772940 Leica Viva Tech Ref_V5.0.0_en Ref V5.0.0 En
User Manual: 772940 Leica Viva TechRef_V5.0.0_en
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 956
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Leica Viva Series Technical Reference Manual Version 5.0 English Introduction Purchase Product identification Symbols Congratulations on the purchase of a Leica SmartWorx Viva instrument. To use the product in a permitted manner, please refer to the detailed safety directions in the CS10/CS15 User Manual, the GS10/GS15 User Manual, the GS25 User Manual, the TS11 User Manual, the TS15 User Manual, the Leica TS12 Robotic User Manual and the Leica MS50/TS50/TM50 User Manual. The type and serial number of your product are indicated on the type plate. Enter the type and serial number in your manual and always refer to this information when you need to contact your agency or Leica Geosystems authorised service workshop. Type: _______________ Serial No.: _______________ The symbols used in this manual have the following meanings: Type Trademarks Description Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in practice as they enable the product to be used in a technically correct and efficient manner. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries • CompactFlash and CF are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • SD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Validity of this manual Available documentation • This manual applies to SmartWorx Viva. For the Lite version of SmartWorx Viva, some functionality described in this manual is not available. • This manual applies to the Leica Viva Series. Differences between GPS and TPS are marked and described. Name Description/Format CS10/CS15 User Manual All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and safety directions. GS10/GS15 User Manual All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and safety directions. TS11 User Manual All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and safety directions. Viva Series, Introduction 2 Name Description/Format GS25User Manual All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and safety directions. TS15 User Manual All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and safety directions. TS12 Robotic User Manual All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and safety directions. TS12 Lite User Manual All instructions required to operate the product to a basic level are contained in the User Manual. Provides an overview of the product together with technical data and safety directions. Name Description/Format Viva GNSS Getting Describes the general working of the product in standard Started Guide use. Intended as a quick reference field guide. Viva TPS Getting Started Guide Describes the general working of the product in standard use. Intended as a quick reference field guide. Viva Series Tech- Overall comprehensive guide to the product and applica- nical Reference tion functions. Included are detailed descriptions of Manual special software/hardware settings and software/hardware functions intended for technical specialists. Refer to the following resources for all Leica Viva Series documentation/software: • the SmartWorx Viva USB documentation card • https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com Viva Series, Introduction 3 Table of Contents In this manual Chapter 1 Configurable Keys 1.1 1.2 2 Overview Creating a New Job Job Properties and Editing a Job Choosing a Job Managing Job Codes Jobs & Data - Data 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 7 Main Menu Functions Go to Work! Jobs & Data Instrument User Icons Jobs & Data - Jobs 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 6 Leica GPS Favourites Main Menu 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 5 Leica TPS Favourites Check Point Joystick Turn Instrument to Hz/V Orientation With Compass Using the Digital Camera GPS Settings 3.1 4 Hot Keys Favourites Key TPS Settings 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 3 Page Overview Accessing Data Management Point Management 6.3.1 Creating a New Point 6.3.2 Editing a Point 6.3.3 Mean Page Line/Area Management 6.4.1 Overview 6.4.2 Creating a New Line/Area 6.4.3 Editing a Line/Area Data Log Point Sorting and Filters 6.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas 6.6.2 Point, Line and Area Code Filter 6.6.3 Stakeout Filter Scan Viewer Codelists 7.1 7.2 7.3 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Accessing Codelist Management Creating/Editing a Codelist 19 19 20 21 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 30 30 31 31 33 34 35 42 42 42 47 51 51 54 54 54 57 57 59 62 65 65 65 68 70 71 71 74 75 76 78 78 78 79 4 7.4 7.5 8 Managing Codes 7.4.1 Accessing Codes 7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code Managing Code Groups Coordinate Systems 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 Overview Accessing Coordinate System Management Coordinate Systems - Creating and Editing Transformations 8.4.1 Accessing Transformation Management 8.4.2 Creating/Editing a Transformation Ellipsoids 8.5.1 Accessing Ellipsoid Management 8.5.2 Creating/Editing an Ellipsoid Projections 8.6.1 Accessing Projection Management 8.6.2 Creating/Editing a Projection Geoid Models 8.7.1 Overview 8.7.2 Accessing Geoid Model Management 8.7.3 Creating a New Geoid Model from the Data Storage Device / Internal Memory CSCS Models 9 Jobs & Data - Create control data 10 Jobs & Data - Import data 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 11 Data in ASCII/GSI Format Data in LandXML Format Alignment Data Data in DXF Format DTM Data Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 12 Overview Importing Importing Importing Importing Importing Overview Exporting Data from a Job to an ASCII Format Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom Format Exporting Data in DXF Format Exporting Data in XML Format Exporting Data using Stylesheets Exporting Data in FBK/RW5/RAW Format Copy Data Between Jobs Instrument - TPS settings 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 Viva Series, Table of Contents Measure mode & target 12.1.1 Measure & Target Settings 12.1.2 Targets 12.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target Prism search settings Atmospheric corrections Level bubble & compensator Offsets & Quality Control Lights / Lights & accessories 80 80 81 82 84 84 85 86 87 87 88 89 89 89 90 90 92 92 92 93 94 94 95 99 99 100 103 104 108 109 111 111 112 114 115 119 121 122 124 126 126 126 129 130 131 134 136 137 139 5 13 Instrument - GPS settings 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 14 Antenna Heights 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 15 Starting the GPS Connection Wizard Connection to GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS25 Connections.. - TPS connection wizard 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 17 Overview Mechanical Reference Planes, MRP Determining Antenna Heights 14.3.1 Pillar Setup 14.3.2 Tripod Setup 14.3.3 Pole Setup SmartStation Setup Connections.. - GPS connection wizard 15.1 15.2 16 RTK rover wizard 13.1.1 Overview 13.1.2 Creating a New RTK Profile 13.1.3 Loading an Existing RTK Profile 13.1.4 Editing an Existing RTK Profile Satellite tracking Antenna heights 13.3.1 Rover Antenna Heights 13.3.2 Antennas 13.3.3 Creating/Editing an Antenna Quality control Raw data logging Starting the TPS Connection Wizard Connection Using Cable Connection Using Bluetooth Connection Using Internal Radio Connection To Leica Legacy and Third Party Total Stations Connections.. - CS connection wizard 17.1 17.2 17.3 Starting the CS Connection Wizard Connection Using TCPS Connection Using Cable 143 143 143 144 144 145 145 148 148 149 150 151 156 158 158 159 160 160 162 163 164 165 165 166 168 168 169 169 171 171 174 174 176 177 18 Connections.. - Internet wizard 178 19 Connections.. - All other connections 179 179 180 182 183 183 185 186 190 192 192 201 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 19.7 Viva Series, Table of Contents Accessing Configuration Connections CS Internet / GS Internet / TS Internet GPS Rover / Base Sensor ASCII Input 19.4.1 Configuration of an ASCII Input Connection 19.4.2 Configuration of a Command to the Device GPS Hidden Pt Export Job RTK Rover 19.7.1 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Connection 19.7.2 Configuration with Digital Cellular Phone and Radio 19.7.3 Configuration of GGA Message Sending for Reference Network Applications 202 6 19.8 19.9 19.10 19.11 19.12 19.13 19.14 19.15 19.16 20 Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.5 20.6 20.7 20.8 21 Digital Cellular Phones 20.1.1 Overview 20.1.2 Configuring a GSM Connection 20.1.3 Configuring a CDMA Connection Modems Radios for GPS Real-Time Radios for Remote Control RS232 Internet Configuring the Stations to Dial 20.7.1 Accessing Dial-up Connection List 20.7.2 Creating / Editing a Station to Dial Configuring the Server to Connect 20.8.1 Accessing Server to Connect 20.8.2 Creating / Editing a Server Configuration of Devices 21.1 21.2 21.3 22 Base RTK 1 / Base RTK 2 19.8.1 Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Connection NMEA 1 / NMEA 2 Remote (OWI) PPS Output Event Input 1/Event Input 2 Total Station GSI Output Field Controller Connection GeoCom Connection Devices 21.1.1 Overview 21.1.2 Digital Cellular Phones 21.1.3 Modems 21.1.4 Radios for Real-Time 21.1.5 Radios for Remote Control 21.1.6 RS232 21.1.7 USB 21.1.8 Hidden Point Measurement Devices 21.1.9 GPRS / Internet Devices Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices Creating/Editing a Device Instrument - Instrument status info 22.1 22.2 22.3 22.4 22.5 22.6 22.7 Viva Series, Table of Contents Status Functions Battery & memory Satellite tracking RTK data link status Current GPS position Raw data logging Connection status 22.7.1 Connection Status 22.7.2 Internet 22.7.3 ASCII Input 22.7.4 RTK Data Link Status 22.7.5 Remote (OWI) 203 203 206 211 212 214 216 217 222 223 225 225 225 225 227 229 230 233 234 234 237 237 238 239 239 240 241 241 241 241 242 243 243 243 244 244 245 245 247 250 250 251 252 254 259 261 263 263 263 264 264 264 7 22.8 22.9 23 22.7.6 Event Input 1/Event Input 2 Internet connection status TPS current station info Instrument - Base settings 23.1 23.2 Satellite tracking Base raw data logging 265 266 266 268 268 270 24 Instrument - TPS camera settings 272 25 User - Work settings ID templates 25.1.1 Accessing ID Template Configuration 25.1.2 Creating/Editing an ID Template Coding & linework My Survey Screen Hot keys & favourites Prompt before storing 272 272 272 274 276 279 283 285 Overview Thematical Coding 26.2.1 Thematical Coding with Codelist 26.2.2 Thematical Coding without Codelist Free Coding 26.3.1 Free Coding Using a Codelist 26.3.2 Free Coding with Direct Input Quick Coding SmartCodes 26.5.1 Overview 26.5.2 Configuring SmartCodes 26.5.3 Code Block Code and Attribute Mismatch 26.6.1 Code Mismatch 26.6.2 Attribute Mismatch Code Information 286 286 287 287 290 290 290 291 292 293 293 293 295 297 297 298 299 25.1 25.2 25.3 25.4 25.5 26 Coding 26.1 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.5 26.6 26.7 27 Linework 27.1 27.2 27.3 28 User - Working style wizard 28.1 28.2 28.3 28.4 28.5 29 Overview Performing Linework using the Linework Field Performing Linework with Thematical Coding Overview Accessing the Working Style Wizard Choosing a Different Working Style Creating a New Working Style Editing a Working Style User - System settings 29.1 29.2 29.3 29.4 Viva Series, Table of Contents Regional settings SmartWorx options Screen & audio Admin settings 300 300 300 301 304 304 304 305 305 306 307 307 313 314 315 8 30 User - Tools & other utilities 30.1 30.2 30.3 30.4 30.5 30.6 30.7 31 Transfer user objects Uploading System Files Load licence keys Ftp data transfer Format memory devices View contents of ASCII files Leica Exchange 30.7.1 Overview 30.7.2 Configuring Leica Exchange 30.7.3 Sending Data 30.7.4 Getting Data 30.7.5 Data Transfer Status 30.7.6 In the Office User - Check & Adjust 31.1 31.2 31.3 31.4 31.5 31.6 31.7 31.8 31.9 31.10 31.11 31.12 Overview Details on Instrument Errors Accessing the Check & Adjust Wizard Combined Adjustment (l, t, i, c, ATR and tele camera) Tilting Axis Adjustment (a) Compensator Adjustment (l, t) Viewing the Current Values Configuring Check & Adjust Adjusting the Circular Level of the Instrument and Tribrach Adjusting the Circular Level of the Prism Pole Inspecting the Laser Plummet of the Instrument Servicing the Tripod 317 317 319 320 321 324 325 325 325 327 329 330 331 332 333 333 334 337 338 341 343 344 345 345 346 346 347 32 User - About Leica Viva 348 33 Camera & Imaging 349 349 350 352 352 352 355 359 360 362 364 364 365 367 33.1 33.2 33.3 33.4 33.5 33.6 34 Overview Instrument - TPS camera settings Taking an Image 33.3.1 Overview 33.3.2 Outside of Applications 33.3.3 Within Applications 33.3.4 Screenshot 33.3.5 Panoramic Imaging Image Management Sketching 33.5.1 Sketching on Images 33.5.2 Field Sketching Exporting Images TPS Functions 34.1 34.2 34.3 34.4 34.5 Viva Series, Table of Contents EDM Prism Search Methods 34.2.1 Automatic aiming 34.2.2 PowerSearch Follow Moving Prisms - Lock RCS EGL 368 368 368 368 369 370 371 371 9 34.6 34.7 35 Calculator 35.1 35.2 35.3 36 Accessing the Calculator Configuring the Calculator Using the Calculator 35.3.1 RPN Mode 35.3.2 Standard Mode 35.3.3 Description of Softkeys NTRIP via Internet 36.1 36.2 37 Illumination Connection to Other Total Stations 34.7.1 Leica Legacy Total Stations 34.7.2 Topcon 34.7.3 Sokkia 34.7.4 Nikon Configuring Access to the Internet Using the NTRIP Service with a Real-Time Rover MapView Interactive Display Feature 37.1 37.2 37.3 37.4 37.5 37.6 37.7 Overview Accessing MapView Configuring MapView MapView Components 37.4.1 Screen Area 37.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar 37.4.3 Point Symbols Selecting Points, Lines and Areas Context Menu Viewing Results 372 373 373 374 374 375 376 376 376 377 377 378 379 382 382 384 387 387 387 387 390 390 392 393 393 394 396 38 Tap Map 398 39 Applications - General 402 40 COGO 403 403 404 405 408 408 410 412 414 417 421 421 423 425 428 430 432 434 434 436 40.1 40.2 40.3 40.4 40.5 40.6 40.7 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Accessing COGO Configuring COGO COGO Calculation - Inverse Method 40.4.1 Selecting the Inverse Method 40.4.2 Point to Point and Current Position to Point 40.4.3 Point to Line and Current Position to Line 40.4.4 Point to Arc and Current Position to Arc COGO Calculation - Traverse Method COGO Calculation - Intersection Method 40.6.1 Selecting the Intersection Method 40.6.2 Intersection with Double Bearing 40.6.3 Intersection with Double Distance 40.6.4 Intersection with Bearing - Distance 40.6.5 Intersection with By Points 40.6.6 Intersection with TPS Observation - TPS Observation COGO Calculation - Line/Arc Calculations Method 40.7.1 Selecting the Line/Arc Method 40.7.2 Arc Calculation 10 40.7.3 40.8 40.9 40.10 40.11 40.12 40.13 40.14 41 Determine Coordinate System 41.1 41.2 41.3 41.4 42 Overview Selecting the Transformation Method The Normal Method 41.3.1 Configuring the Normal Method 41.3.2 Determining a New Coordinate System 41.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System 41.3.4 Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching Points 41.3.5 Transformation Results for Onestep and Twostep 41.3.6 Transformation Results for Classic 3D The One Point Localisation Method 41.4.1 Determining a New Coordinate System 41.4.2 Computing Required Azimuth 41.4.3 Computing the Grid Scale Factor 41.4.4 Computing the Height Scale Factor QuickGrid 42.1 42.2 43 Calculate Line Offset Point and Calculate Line Base Point 40.7.4 Segment an Arc 40.7.5 Segment a Line COGO Calculation - Area Division 40.8.1 Selecting the Division Method 40.8.2 Choosing an Area to be Divided 40.8.3 Dividing an Area 40.8.4 Results of the Area Division COGO Calculation - Shift, Rotate & Scale 40.9.1 Selecting the Shift, Rotate & Scale Method and the Points to be Moved 40.9.2 Manually Entered 40.9.3 Matching Points COGO Calculation - Angle Method COGO Calculation - Horizontal Curve Method COGO Calculation - Triangle Method Selecting a Result from Previous COGO Inverse Calculations Modifying Values for Azimuths, Distances and Offsets Selecting the Transformation Method Determining a New Coordinate System Reference Line 43.1 43.2 43.3 43.4 43.5 43.6 43.7 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Accessing Reference Line Configuring Reference Line Defining the Reference Line 43.4.1 Overview 43.4.2 Defining the Line 43.4.3 Defining a Segment of a Line 43.4.4 Defining Reference Line Slopes Measuring to a Reference Line Staking to a Reference Line Gridstaking to a Reference Line 439 442 442 443 443 447 448 449 451 451 455 459 462 463 465 466 467 470 470 471 473 473 474 481 482 483 484 485 485 493 494 495 496 496 499 502 502 506 508 515 515 516 520 520 522 526 532 11 44 Reference Plane & Grid Scan 44.1 44.2 44.3 44.4 44.5 44.6 44.7 44.8 44.9 45 Overview Accessing Reference Plane & Grid Scan Creating a Reference Plane From Previously Stored Points Selecting a Reference Plane from a Job Configuring Reference Plane & Grid Scan Editing a Reference Plane Measuring Points to a Reference Plane Grid Scan on Plane Grid Scan on Surface Roads - General 45.1 45.2 45.3 45.4 45.5 45.6 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Jobs & Design Data 45.2.1 Accessing Roads Applications 45.2.2 Working with a DTM Job 45.2.3 Design Data 45.2.4 Viewing and Editing the Design Data Configuring Roads Applications 45.3.1 Configuration Settings 45.3.2 Road Line - Info Page 45.3.3 Road Local Line - Info Page 45.3.4 Road Surface Grade - Info Page 45.3.5 Road Manual Slope, Local Manual Slope and Slope Info Page 45.3.6 Road Crown - Info Page 45.3.7 Road Layer - Info Page 45.3.8 Road DTM - Info Page 45.3.9 Rail - Info Page 45.3.10 Tunnel - Info Page 45.3.11 Workflow for Height (aim to stake ht) Working with Shifts Tasks Understanding Terms and Expressions 45.6.1 Road - Basic Terms 45.6.2 Road - Horizontal and Vertical Geometry Elements 45.6.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements 45.6.4 Road - Stake Offset and Stake Height Difference 45.6.5 Road - Chainage or Station Equations 45.6.6 Road - Working Corridor 45.6.7 Road - Extension of the Centreline 45.6.8 Road/Rail - Working with Heights 45.6.9 Rail - Working with a Single Track 45.6.10 Rail - Working with Multiple Tracks 45.6.11 Rail - Check Elements and Stakeout Elements 45.6.12 Rail - Working with Offsets 45.6.13 Tunnel - Basic Terms 45.6.14 Tunnel - Elements for Stake Out and Check Measurements 45.6.15 Tunnel - Shifts 535 535 539 540 543 544 546 549 550 553 556 556 558 558 560 560 563 569 569 583 585 588 591 594 596 599 600 602 603 604 608 609 609 610 610 612 613 615 615 616 616 618 619 620 620 621 623 12 46 Roads - Alignment Editor 46.1 46.2 46.3 46.4 46.5 46.6 46.7 46.8 46.9 46.10 46.11 47 Basic Terms Starting Alignment Editor 46.2.1 Accessing Alignment Editor 46.2.2 Creating a New Alignment 46.2.3 Modifying an Existing Alignment 46.2.4 Importing Alignment Data 46.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu Configuring Alignment Editor Edit Horizontal Alignments Using Elements 46.4.1 Overview 46.4.2 Editing the Start Point 46.4.3 Inserting/Editing an Element in a Horizontal Alignment Edit Horizontal Alignments Using PIs 46.5.1 Overview 46.5.2 Inserting/Editing a PI in a Horizontal Alignment Edit Vertical Alignments Using Elements 46.6.1 Overview 46.6.2 Editing the Start Point 46.6.3 Inserting/Editing an Element in a Vertical Alignment Edit Vertical Alignments Using PIs 46.7.1 Overview 46.7.2 Inserting/Editing a PVI in a Vertical Alignment Edit Cross Section Templates 46.8.1 Overview 46.8.2 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template 46.8.3 Add/Edit a Layer Edit Cross Section Assignments 46.9.1 Overview 46.9.2 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Assignment Edit Chainage Equation 46.10.1 Overview 46.10.2 Creating/Editing a Chainage Equation Convert to job Roads - Road 47.1 47.2 47.3 Viva Series, Table of Contents Creating a New Road Job Defining the Work 47.2.1 Defining the Method and the Task 47.2.2 Selecting a Line 47.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings Staking/Checking the Road 47.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen 47.3.2 Measuring Points by Chainage and Offset 47.3.3 Measuring Lines Relative to a Centreline 47.3.4 Measuring Local Lines without Centrelines 47.3.5 Indefinite Triangle 47.3.6 Measuring Surface Grades 47.3.7 Measuring Manual Slopes, Local Manual Slopes and Design Slopes 47.3.8 Measuring Road Crowns 47.3.9 Measuring Road Layers 47.3.10 Measuring Digital Terrain Models (DTM) 625 625 626 626 626 627 628 629 630 632 632 633 633 639 639 640 642 642 643 643 647 647 647 649 649 649 651 653 653 654 655 655 655 656 657 657 658 658 664 666 672 672 677 678 679 679 680 681 682 682 683 13 47.4 48 Roads - Rail 48.1 48.2 48.3 48.4 49 The Tools Menu 47.4.1 Overview 47.4.2 Use heights from DTM 47.4.3 Apply current chainage 47.4.4 Get current angle to alignment 47.4.5 Stake individual point 47.4.6 COGO Road - Alignment Information 47.4.7 Additional Layer Information 47.4.8 Box / base definition 47.4.9 Get current slope 47.4.10 Manual Slope 47.4.11 Reset slope to design 47.4.12 Shift reference line 47.4.13 Re-initialise search 47.4.14 Stake intersection point Creating a New Rail Job 48.1.1 Overview 48.1.2 Installing all necessary Software 48.1.3 Importing the Track Design with Leica Geo Office 48.1.4 Loading the Track Design onto the Instrument Defining the Work Staking/Checking the Track 48.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen 48.3.2 Offset Library 48.3.3 Working with Pendular Displacements The Tools Menu 48.4.1 Overview 48.4.2 Use heights from DTM 48.4.3 Apply current chainage 48.4.4 Stake individual point 48.4.5 Second point of cant 48.4.6 COGO Rail Roads - Tunnel 49.1 49.2 49.3 49.4 Viva Series, Table of Contents Creating a New Tunnel Job 49.1.1 Preparing Design Data 49.1.2 Tunnel Centreline 49.1.3 Design Profiles 49.1.4 Data Transfer to Instrument Defining the Work Staking/Checking the Tunnel 49.3.1 Overview 49.3.2 Stake face 49.3.3 Stake profile and Check profile 49.3.4 Scan profile The Tools Menu 49.4.1 Profile Viewer 49.4.2 Stake face auto 683 683 684 685 685 686 686 688 689 691 693 693 693 695 696 699 699 699 699 700 706 706 708 708 716 717 717 717 717 718 719 719 720 721 721 721 721 722 723 723 727 727 734 738 739 742 742 743 14 50 Scanning 50.1 50.2 50.3 50.4 51 Sets of Angles 51.1 51.2 51.3 52 52.8 52.9 54 Overview Accessing Setup Configuring Setup Set Station Point Enter Station Information Setup Reminder Setup Methods 52.7.1 Set orientation and Known backsight 52.7.2 Multiple backsights 52.7.3 Transfer height 52.7.4 Resection 52.7.5 Orientate to line Setup Results Finding a Target Point 772 772 773 773 777 778 779 780 780 783 785 785 786 787 791 Overview Accessing Stakeout Configuring Stakeout Staking Out Stakeout Difference Limit Exceeded Staking Out a DTM or Points & DTM Seismic Stakeout 54.1 54.2 54.3 54.4 55 752 752 753 753 754 757 761 762 766 770 Stakeout 53.1 53.2 53.3 53.4 53.5 53.6 Overview Accessing Stakeout Configuring Stakeout Staking Out Base Menu - Start base 55.1 55.2 55.3 Viva Series, Table of Contents 746 746 746 750 751 Overview Sets of Angles 51.2.1 Accessing Sets of Angles 51.2.2 Configuring Sets of Angles 51.2.3 Creating New Point Groups 51.2.4 Managing Existing Point Groups 51.2.5 Measuring the Sets 51.2.6 Managing Results Monitoring Setup 52.1 52.2 52.3 52.4 52.5 52.6 52.7 53 Accessing Scanning Defining a Scan Configuring Scanning Starting a Scan Start base over known point Start base over last setup Start base over any point 792 792 793 794 799 803 804 806 806 806 809 811 813 813 814 815 15 56 Survey - General 56.1 56.2 56.3 56.4 Surveying Points 56.1.1 Post-Processed Kinematic and Static Operations 56.1.2 Real-Time Rover Operations Adding Annotations Timed Measurements Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations 56.4.1 Accessing Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations 56.4.2 Initialise while Moving 56.4.3 Initialise while Static 56.4.4 Initialise on Known Point 816 816 816 817 819 820 821 821 821 822 822 57 Survey - General 823 58 Survey - Auto Points 825 825 825 831 834 834 836 58.1 58.2 58.3 58.4 59 Survey Cross Section 59.1 59.2 59.3 59.4 59.5 60 60.3 60.4 60.5 60.6 60.7 Overview Hidden Point Methods 60.2.1 Bearing & Distance 60.2.2 Using 2 Bearings 60.2.3 Using 2 Distances 60.2.4 Chainage & Offset 60.2.5 Backwards Bearing & Distance Hidden Point Measurements Hidden Point Results Computing an Azimuth 60.5.1 Using the Sun 60.5.2 Using Auxiliary Point Computing Horizontal Distances from Slope Distances Hidden Point Measurement Including Heights Hidden Point 61.1 61.2 61.3 62 Overview Accessing Survey Cross Section Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template Surveying Cross Sections Configuring Survey Cross Section Survey - Hidden Points 60.1 60.2 61 Overview Configuring Auto Points Measuring Auto Points Offset Points of Auto Points 58.4.1 Overview 58.4.2 Configuring Offset Points Overview Accessing Hidden Point and Measuring Configuring Hidden Point Survey - Remote Point 62.1 62.2 62.3 Viva Series, Table of Contents Overview Accessing Remote Point Configuring Remote Point 839 839 840 841 843 845 847 847 848 848 848 849 850 850 851 853 854 854 855 856 858 860 860 861 863 865 865 865 867 16 63 Traverse 63.1 63.2 63.3 63.4 63.5 63.6 63.7 63.8 63.9 63.10 64 Volumes & Surfaces 64.1 64.2 64.3 64.4 65 Overview Accessing Traverse Creating/Editing a Traverse Selecting an Existing Traverse Traverse Data Configuring Traverse Traverse Methods 63.7.1 Starting Traverse 63.7.2 Continuing an Existing Traverse 63.7.3 Closing Traverse 63.7.4 Creating a Control Point from Backsight by Azimuth Traverse Point Results Traverse Results Traverse Adjustment 63.10.1 Accessing Traverse Adjustment 63.10.2 Adjustment Results Overview Accessing Volumes & Surfaces Configuring Volumes & Surfaces Calculating Volumes 64.4.1 Create a New Surface by Measuring New Points 64.4.2 Create a New Surface by Using Grid Scan 64.4.3 Create a New Surface from Previously Stored Points 64.4.4 Choosing an Existing Surface 64.4.5 Selecting the Surface Task 64.4.6 Boundary Definition 64.4.7 Compute Volumes QuickVolume 868 868 868 869 870 871 872 874 874 875 876 878 878 881 882 882 884 886 886 886 887 888 888 890 890 892 892 893 895 Overview Accessing Volume Calculations Volume Calculations 898 898 898 898 Appendix A Menu Tree 900 Appendix B Internal Memory 905 Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device 906 Appendix D Pin Assignments and Sockets 908 908 908 910 910 912 914 915 915 916 65.1 65.2 65.3 D.1 D.2 D.3 D.4 D.5 D.6 D.7 D.8 D.9 Appendix E E.1 E.2 Viva Series, Table of Contents GS08plus GS10 GS14 GS15 GS25 CS10/CS15 TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite MS50/TS50/TM50 TPS1200+ Cables GPS Cables TPS Cables 917 917 920 17 Appendix F NMEA Message Formats Overview Symbols Used for Describing the NMEA Formats GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP GGK(PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP, Trimble Proprietary GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ GLL - Geographic Position Latitude/Longitude GNS - GNSS Fix Data GSA - GNSS DOP and Active Satellites GSV - GNSS Satellites in View LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality RMC - Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS Data VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed ZDA - Time and Date 922 922 922 924 925 926 927 928 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 Appendix G AT Commands 936 Appendix H Event Input Notify Message Format 938 Appendix I PPS Output Notify Message Format 939 Appendix J Glossary 942 942 943 951 952 955 956 957 959 960 960 963 968 968 F.1 F.2 F.3 F.4 F.5 F.6 F.7 F.8 F.9 F.10 F.11 F.12 F.13 F.14 F.15 J.1 J.3 J.4 J.7 J.8 J.9 J.14 J.15 J.16 J.19 J.20 J.22 J.23 Index Viva Series, Table of Contents A C D G H I N O P S T V W 940 18 1 Configurable Keys 1.1 Hot Keys Hot keys are found on the TS and on the CS15 model only. The CS10 model does not have any hotkeys. Description Two levels of hot keys exist: • The first level is the keys F7, F8, ..., F12 and F13, the user definable Smartkey. • The second level is the combination of Fn and F7, F8, ..., F12. Functionality Hot keys provide a shortcut for quickly and directly carrying out functions or starting applications assigned to the keys. The assignment of functions and applications to hot keys is user configurable. Use • The first level is accessed by pressing F7, F8, ..., F12 or F13, the user definable Smartkey, directly. • The second level is accessed by pressing Fn first followed by F7, F8, ... F12. • Hot keys can be pressed at any time. It is possible that a function or application assigned to a hot key cannot be executed in certain situations. Define hot key step-by-step This step-by-step description shows how to assign the Coding & linework settings screen to the F7 key and to the first line of the My GPS Favourites or My TPS Favourites menu. Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Hot keys & favourites. 2. Hot Keys & Favourites For hot keys/Fn hot keys select F7: User - Coding & linework settings. For favourites select 1: User - Coding & linework settings. 3. OK 4. OK 5. Press F7 to access Coding & linework settings. OR Press the favourites key settings. Press Fn, the favourites key settings. User definable Smartkey and 1 to access Coding & linework and 1 to access Coding & linework The user definable Smartkey is located next to the right hand fine drives. It enables fast and comfortable recording of measurements. Being equipped with a soft touch key located in the instruments turning axis allows highest precision measurements. All functions and application programs that can be assigned to the hot keys can be assign to the user definable Smartkey including. Viva Series, Configurable Keys 19 1.2 Favourites Key Description • Fn • The opens the My GPS Favourites menu. key alone opens the Leica GPS Favourites menu. • Fn • The opens the My TPS Favourites menu. key alone opens Leica TPS Favourites. The following chapter is about the My GPS Favourites and My TPS Favourites menus only. Refer to Leica TPS Favourites for more information about Leica TPS Favourites. Functionality of the favourites menu The My GPS Favourites and My TPS Favourites menus can be configured to contain the most used functions or applications. The favourites menu cannot be accessed while in a configuration screen. Selecting an option in the menu carries out the function or starts the application assigned to the option. My favourites menu The following screen is an example of what a My GPS Favourites or My TPS Favourites menu can look like. The softkeys and their order is fixed. The functions and applications which are assigned to the individual places in the menu can differ depending on the configuration. Define favourites menu step-by-step Key Description OK To execute the selected function. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Defining the favourites menu is the same process as for defining the hot keys. Refer to "1.1 Hot Keys". Viva Series, Configurable Keys 20 2 TPS Settings 2.1 Leica TPS Favourites Description Frequently used settings can be accessed and changed quickly. The change is applied immediately. The workflow is not interrupted. This screen displays the possible settings to change to. Changes made on this screen are stored in the active working style. Access Tap the target aiming icon or select Leica TPS Favourites The appearance of the screen changes, depending on whether the instrument is equipped with motorisation, ATR, reflectorless EDM or PowerSearch. To change to the displayed setting do one of the following: • Tap on the icon on the touch screen. • Highlight a field and press . • Highlight a field and press OK . . • Highlight a field and press OK. • Press the number next to the function. Key Description OK To apply the selected setting, or to access the selected function. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of options Icon Description Measure any surface To measure to any surface (reflectorless). Automatically sets Target aiming: Manual. Measure to prism To measure to prisms. Continuous meas on To set the measure mode to continuous. Continuous meas off To set the measure mode to the previous non-continuous mode. Change face To change the face of the telescope. PowerSearch right Prisms are searched for with PowerSearch in the PS window when this icon is used. Viva Series, TPS Settings 21 Icon Description If this icon is selected and reflectorless measurements is still set, then this setting is changed to measurements to prisms. PowerSearch left To start PowerSearch right in anti-clockwise direction. Red laser on To turn the red laser of the reflectorless EDM on. Red laser off To turn the red laser of the reflectorless EDM off. Auto aiming To set Target aiming: Automatic. Manual aiming To set Target aiming: Manual. Target lock on To set Target aiming: LOCK. Target lock off To set Target aiming to the previous non-lock setting. Joystick To turn the instrument using the arrow keys. Refer to Joystick. Turn to Hz/V To turn the instrument to a specific entered position. Refer to Turn Instrument to Hz/V. Check point To check a point or the instrument orientation. Refer to Check Point. Compass To turn the instrument using compass readings. Refer to Orientation With Compass. Bluetooth connec- To define Bluetooth connections. tion Camera To begin the camera function of the CS field controller. Refer to "2.6 Using the Digital Camera". Panoramic image To generate a panoramic image. Refer to "33.3.5 Panoramic Imaging". Sketch pad Panoramic images can only be generated with motorized instruments with overview camera. To create a sketch on a virtual piece of paper. Refer to "33.5.2 Field Sketching". Start Active Assist To connect to the Active Assist service. End Active Assist Viva Series, TPS Settings To disconnect from the Active Assist service. 22 2.2 Check Point Description This screen is used to check if a measured point is identical to a point already stored in the job, or if the instrument’s orientation to a backsight point is still correct. Access In Leica TPS Favourites click Check point. Check Point Key Description Dist To measure a distance. Store To store the point and return to Main Menu. Positn To position to the selected point. For Target aiming: Automatic the instrument does an ATR search. For Target aiming: LOCK the instrument tries to lock on to a prism. More To display additional information. Last To recall the point ID of the last checked point. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Selectable list Point ID to be checked. If a stored point was checked, the point ID for that point is remembered and recalled when Last is pressed. Target height Editable field The last used prism height is suggested. An individual prism height can be typed in. Target Selectable list Target names as configured in the Targets screen. ∆ azimuth Display only Difference between calculated azimuth and current orientation. ∆ hz dist Display only Difference between calculated and current distance. ∆ height Display only Difference between calculated and current height. Current azimuth Display only Current orientation. Horiz distance Display only Viva Series, TPS Settings Current distance between station and backsight point. 23 Field Option Description Height difference Display only Current height difference between station and backsight point. Calc'd azimuth Display only Calculated azimuth between station and backsight point. Display only Calculated horizontal distance between station and backsight point. Calc'd hz dist Calc'd ∆height Display only Calculated height difference between station and backsight point. 2.3 Joystick Description The instrument can be turned using the keyboard arrow keys on the instrument or field controller, or the arrow keys displayed on the touch screen. When this screen is accessed, the EGL is turned on automatically. When leaving the screen, the EGL is turned off. Access In Leica TPS Favourites click Joystick. Move by Joystick Use the arrow keys to start the telescope movement. Press an arrow key again to speed up the movement. Press any of the other arrow keys while the instrument turns to stop the movement. Press OK to stop the instrument movement. Key Description OK To return to Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Speed -----, Very slow, Slow, Medium and Fast Displays the rotating speed of the instrument. Press the same arrow key to change the speed. Viva Series, TPS Settings 24 2.4 Turn Instrument to Hz/V Description This screen is used when the instrument is remote controlled and the telescope is to be turned to a certain direction. Access In Leica TPS Favourites click Turn to Hz/V. Turn Instrument to Hz/V, Absolute page Key Description OK To return to Main Menu. The instrument turns to the prism. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Azimuth Editable field Oriented horizontal direction for the instrument to turn to. Angle right Editable field Displays the horizontal angle difference between the backsight point and the current telescope position. V angle Editable field Vertical direction for the instrument to turn to. Next step Page changes to the Relative page. Turn Instrument to Hz/V, Relative page The values are added to the current telescope position to calculate the new direction for the telescope to turn to. Description of fields Field Option Description ∆Hz Editable field Angular difference for the horizontal angle to turn to. ∆V Editable field Angular difference for the vertical angle to turn to. Next step Press OK. The instrument turns to the prism. Viva Series, TPS Settings 25 For Target aiming: Automatic an ATR measurement is performed. If no prism was found, the instrument turns to the position typed in. For Target aiming: Lock the instrument locks on the prism and the LOCK icon is displayed. If no prism was found, the instrument turns to the position typed in. 2.5 Orientation With Compass Description Using a conventional magnetic compass while remotely controlling the instrument, it is possible to determine the direction towards which the instrument should turn to perform a target search to locate the prism. Access In Leica TPS Favourites press Comps. The instrument must be connected to a radio to be remote controlled with the field controller. Orientation with compass step-bystep Step Description 1. Set up the instrument. 2. Start the Survey application. 3. Turn the telescope until Hz: 0.0000. 4. Look through the telescope with Hz: 0.0000 to select an object which is easily recognisable. 5. Standing at the instrument, point the compass to the selected object. Turn the rotating dial until the "N" lines up with the north end of the compass needle. The compass dial must not be turned once the "N" is lined up with the north end of the compass needle. 6. Go to the prism. From the prism aim the "N" of the compass towards the instrument. Read the horizontal angle as pointed to by the north end of the compass needle. 7. In Leica TPS Favourites click on the Compass icon. 8. Orientation With Compass Compass reading: The horizontal angle read from the compass while aiming to the instrument. V angle: If the compass works as a clinometer, those values can also be used. 9. The horizontal and vertical angle reads from the compass are always displayed in degree regardless of the system settings. OK to return to the survey screen. The instrument turns to the prism. For Target aiming: Automatic an ATR measurement is performed. If no prism was found, the instrument turns to the position typed in. For Target aiming: Lock the instrument locks on the prism and the LOCK icon is displayed. If no prism was found, the instrument turns to the position typed in. Viva Series, TPS Settings 26 2.6 Using the Digital Camera Taking a picture step-by-step Step Description 1. Aim the camera to the desired target. 2. Check the view at the display. 3. Press OK or click Capture to take the picture. 4. Capture changes to Save. Press OK again or click Save to open the Save As dialog. 5. Click Discard to reject the picture. Viva Series, TPS Settings 27 3 GPS Settings 3.1 Leica GPS Favourites Description Frequently used settings can be accessed and changed quickly. The change is applied immediately. The workflow is not interrupted. This screen displays the possible settings to change to. Changes made on this screen are stored in the active working style. Access Tap the position status icon or select Leica GPS Favourites The appearance of the screen changes, depending on the RTK settings defined. To change to the displayed setting do one of the following: • Tap on the icon on the touch screen. • Highlight a field and press . • Highlight a field and press OK . . • Highlight a field and press OK. • Press the number next to the function. Key Description OK To apply the selected setting, or to access the selected function. Once leaving a screen, the system returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed.. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of options Icon Description Current GPS posi- To open the status screen Current GPS Position. Refer to "22.5 tion Current GPS position". Satellite tracking To open the status screen Satellite Tracking. Refer to "22.3 Satellite tracking". RTK data link status Available when RTK is configured. Opens the status screen RTK Data Link Status or RTK Data Link Status (RTK1)/RTK Data Link Status (RTK2). Refer to "22.4 RTK data link status". RTK settings To open the configuration screen RTK Rover Settings or RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2). Refer to "19.7 RTK Rover" and "19.8 Base RTK 1 / Base RTK 2". Load RTK profile To load an existing profile via the RTK Rover Wizard. Refer to "13.1 RTK rover wizard". Viva Series, GPS Settings 28 Icon Description Radio ch. / dial-up To open the configuration screen Radio Configuration. Refer to "20.3 Radios for GPS Real-Time". Start RTK stream To start streaming RTK data. Stop RTK stream To stop streaming RTK data. Quality control To open the configuration screen GNSS Quality Control Settings. Refer to "13.4 Quality control". Raw data logging To open the status screen Raw Data Logging Status. Refer to "22.6 Raw data logging". Bluetooth connec- To define Bluetooth connections. tion Camera To begin the camera function of the CS field controller. Refer to "2.6 Using the Digital Camera". Sketch pad To create a sketch on a virtual piece of paper. Refer to "33.5.2 Field Sketching". Start Active Assist To connect to the Active Assist service. End Active Assist Viva Series, GPS Settings To disconnect from the Active Assist service. 29 4 Main Menu 4.1 Main Menu Functions Main Menu Description of the main menu functions Key Description OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Map To open Tap Map. Refer to "38 Tap Map". Fn Mode To switch between GPS and TPS mode. Fn Exit To close Leica SmartWorx Viva software. Main menu function Description Refer to chapter Go to Work! To select and start an application. "4.2 Go to Work!" Jobs & Data To manage jobs and data, as well as import and export. Available in SmartWorx when operating an RTK rover or a TPS. "4.3 Jobs & Data" Instrument To access settings regarding GPS and instrument connections as well as status information. "4.4 Instrument" User To make settings regarding the software and "4.5 User" the display as well as other useful tools. Available in SmartWorx when operating an RTK rover or a TPS. Viva Series, Main Menu 30 4.2 Go to Work! Description The Go to Work! menu contains all loaded applications. Selecting an option in the menu starts the application. Configurations and measurements that can be performed depend on the application. The menu can be displayed as drop-down menu or as icon menu. To change between both options go to User\System Settings\SmartWorx options. Change to the General page and check or uncheck Use drop down menus in the main menu. Go to Work! Key Description OK To start the highlighted application or to open a submenu. Next step Refer to Applications - General for information on the applications. 4.3 Jobs & Data Description Jobs & Data is available in SmartWorx when operating an RTK rover or a TPS. It is used to: • Create a new job. • Select a job. • View job properties. • View and edit data. • Import data. • Export and copy data. The menu can be displayed as drop-down menu or as icon menu. To change between both options go to User\System Settings\SmartWorx options. Change to the General page and check or uncheck Use drop down menus in the main menu. Viva Series, Main Menu 31 Jobs & Data Next step Key Description OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. New job View & edit data Create control data Job properties Choose working job Choose control job Import data Export & copy data Viva Series, Main Menu Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer Refer to to to to to to to to chapter chapter chapter chapter chapter chapter chapter chapter 5.2. 6. 9. 5.3. 5.4. 5.4. 10. 11. 32 4.4 Instrument Description Instrument is used to: • Configure parameters related to the instrument. • Configure parameters related to the interfaces. • Check status information. The menu can be displayed as drop-down menu or as icon menu. To change between both options go to User\System Settings\SmartWorx options. Change to the General page and check or uncheck Use drop down menus in the main menu. Instrument Next step Key Description OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. GPS settings TPS settings Base settings Connections.. • GPS connection wizard • TPS connection wizard • All other connections Base connections Instrument status info Base status info Viva Series, Main Menu Refer to chapter 13. Avialable for TPS. Refer to chapter 13. Available in SmartWorx when operating an RTK base. Refer to chapter 22. Refer to chapter 13.1. Avialable for TPS. Refer to chapter 13. Refer to chapter 19. Available in SmartWorx when operating an RTK base. Refer to chapter 22. Available in SmartWorx when operating an RTK rover or a TPS. Refer to chapter 22. Available in SmartWorx when operating an RTK base. Refer to chapter 22. 33 4.5 User Description User is available in SmartWorx when operating an RTK rover or a TPS. It is used: • To configure user favourite settings for the survey and the instrument. • For functionality which is not directly related to surveying data, such as loading firmware or licence keys, format data storage devices and viewing ASCII files. The menu can be displayed as drop-down menu or as icon menu. To change between both options go to User\System Settings\SmartWorx options. Change to the General page and check or uncheck Use drop down menus in the main menu. User Next step Key Description OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Work settings Working style wizard System settings Tools & other utilities Viva Series, Main Menu Refer Refer Refer Refer to to to to chapter chapter chapter chapter 25. 28. 29. 30. 34 4.6 Icons Description The screen icons display the status information of the instrument. TPS specific icons GNSS specific icons The icons provide information related to basic instrument functions. The icons that appear depend upon which instrument is used and the current instrument configuration. Icon Description Automatic aiming Displays the current automatic aiming or PowerSearch settings. Prism Displays the selected prism. Measure mode Displays the selected measurement mode. The red laser icon will display when the red laser is active. Compensator level and Instrument face I or II Displays the compensator is off or out of range icons, or the instrument face I or II icon. Icon Description Position status Displays the status of the current position. As soon as this icon becomes visible the instrument is in a stage where practical operation can commence. Number of visible satellites Displays the number of theoretically visible satellites above the configured cut-off angle according to the current almanac. Contributing satellites Displays the number of satellites that are contributing to the currently computed position solution. The number of contributing satellites can differ from the number of visible satellites. This difference can be because satellites cannot be viewed, or because the observations to these satellites are considered too noisy to be used. Automatic aiming Real-time device Displays the real-time device configured to be used. Real-time status Displays the status of the real-time device configured to be used. Icon Description The instrument is in Auto Aiming mode using ATR. The instrument is in manual aiming mode Viva Series, Main Menu 35 Icon Description The instrument is in target lock mode, however not following a prism at current. Lock Status: Unlocked. The instrument is in target lock mode, following a prism at current. Lock Status: Locked. The Visibility setting in Measure & Target Settings is set to Rain & fog. This setting ensures better performance under unfavourable visibility conditions. The Visibility setting in Measure & Target Settings is set to Sun & reflections. This setting ensures better performance under sunny conditions with reflexions. The instrument is in prediction or locking on the fly is activated. The instrument will lock towards a prism coming into the field of view and follow this prism. The prediction time has elapsed. The instrument beeps and the EGL is blinking.The instrument will lock towards a prism coming into the field of view and follow this prism. Searching for the prism using Auto aiming. Searching for the prism using PowerSearch. Prism Icon Description Leica circular prism Leica 360° prism Leica mini prism Leica mini 0 Leica mini 360° Leica Machine Automation power prism MPR122 Leica reflective tape or HDS target. Reflectorless User defined prism Viva Series, Main Menu 36 Measure mode Icon Description No active distance measurement Distance measurement active Measure mode Single Measure mode Single (fast) Measure mode Continuous Measure mode Averaging Measure mode Continuous+ Measure mode Long range (>4km) Measure mode Long range avg Red laser is turned on Compensator level and instrument face I or II Icon Description Compensator is turned off. Compensator is turned on, but is out of range. The current face of the instrument is shown, if the compensator and the Hz-correction are turned on. Position status Icon Description Navigation position available Code solution available Fixed position available xRTK fixed position available Precise mode Viva Series, Main Menu 37 Icon Description The ticks indicate that an ambiguity check is being made. Number of visible satellites Icon Contributing satellites Icon Description The number of visible satellites. Description When a position status icon is displayed then the number of satellites currently used for the position computation are shown. If no position is currently available then • the L1, L2 and L5 values (GPS only) show how many satellites are being tracked. OR • the sum and G (GPS), R (GLONASS), E (Galileo) or B (BeiDou) values show how many satellites are being tracked. Real-time device Icon The number of contributing satellites can differ from the number of visible satellites. This may be either because satellites cannot be viewed or the observations to these satellites are considered to be too noisy to be used in the position solution. The number of contributing GLONASS satellites could be zero if five or more GPS satellites are used for the position computation. The processing algorithm automatically selects the best possible set of satellite combinations for the position computation. A position computation with R = 0 is certainly within the specified reliability. Description Radio Digital cellular phone/modem Internet SBAS/WAAS/EGNOS/MSAS/GAGAN CTR16 NTRIP Viva Series, Main Menu 38 Icon Description RS232 Caution Real-time status Icon Description An arrow pointing down indicates a real-time rover configuration. The arrow flashes when real-time messages are received. An arrow pointing up indicates a real-time base configuration. The arrow flashes when real-time messages are received. Sending/receiving data Raw data logging active Synchronization active Current active instrument Icon Description TS instrument TS with cable GS rover instrument GS rover with cable TS and GS rover connected via cable. The instrument in the foreground is used first. TS and GS rover connected via Bluetooth. The instrument in the foreground is used first. GS base with active Bluetooth connection CS with GS05 used TS and CS used GS25 used GS25 with cable connection GS base and GS25 connected via cable Viva Series, Main Menu 39 Icon Description GS12 rover instrument GS12 rover connected via cable GS12 base Caution. Connection between CS and GS via Bluetooth. Camera Icon Description To capture an image with the camera Image capture in progress Internet online status Icon Description Instrument is online in the Internet. Internet not connected. Leica Exchange service Icon Description Logged into Leica Exchange. Data upload in progress. Data download in progress. Exchanging new data. Data transfer problem. Active Assist service Icon Viva Series, Main Menu Description Active Assist is active. Leica technical support can gain remote access to the instrument. 40 Data management Icon Description To access data management where lines/areas can be opened/closed. At least one line is open. At least one area is open. At least one line and one area are open. Memory storage Icon Description Internal memory. Sufficient memory space available. CompactFlash card is inserted and can be removed. Sufficient memory space available. Secure Digital Memory card is inserted and can be removed. Sufficient memory space available. USB stick is inserted and can be removed. Sufficient memory space available. The memory device is inserted and cannot be removed. It is strongly recommended not to remove the memory device to avoid loss of data. Memory device full Battery Icon Description A CS internal battery is inserted and in use. Sufficient power available. A GS internal battery is inserted and in use. Sufficient power available. A TS internal battery is inserted and in use. Sufficient power available. Power level is getting low. Power level is getting low. Battery empty. Viva Series, Main Menu 41 5 Jobs & Data - Jobs 5.1 Overview Description Jobs • structure surveying projects. • contain all points, lines, areas and codes that are measured/recorded and stored. • can be downloaded to LGO for post-processing or for data transfer to a further program. • can be uploaded from LGO, for example, for (real-time) stakeout operations. • can be stored on the data storage device or, if fitted, the internal memory. Type of jobs • Data jobs. Explained in this chapter. • DTM files. Refer to "53.6 Staking Out a DTM or Points & DTM". • Road alignment files. Default job A job called Default is available on the instrument after: formatting the memory device, inserting a previously formatted data storage device or deleting all jobs from Job properties. Working job The working job is the one data is stored to. One job is always considered the working job. After formatting the memory device, the job Default is used until a user-defined job is created and selected. When a job becomes the working job, then the sort and filter settings of this job are saved in the SystemRAM. If the data storage device is formatted then these last used sort and filter settings are used for the job Default. 5.2 Creating a New Job Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New job. New Job, General Key Description Store To store the settings. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 42 Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new job. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Input required. Description Editable field Two lines for a detailed description of the job, for example, work to be performed or the classes contained in the job. Input optional. Creator Editable field The person’s name who is creating the job. Input optional. Device Selectable list The device on which the new job will be stored. Depending on the instrument options, this may be a display only field. Use with System1200 Check box When this box is checked, the job can be used on System 1200 instruments. The setting of this check box is remembered until changed manually. Next step Page changes to the Codelist page. New Job, Codelist page Description of fields Field Option Description Codelist Selectable list Choosing a codelist copies the codes to the job. Next step Page changes to the CAD files page. New Job, CAD files page Key Description Store To store the settings. Selected and attached CAD files will be available in the job as background maps. Unit To change between the options in the Unit column. Available when the Unit column is visible after using the More key. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs The default value for the units depends on the selection in Regional Settings, Distance page. If the regional settings units are inches or miles, then the default cad file units are feet. If the regional settings are kilometer, then the default settings for cad files are meters. 43 Key Description Attach To attach a CAD file from the \DATA folder of any data storage device. The new job and the CAD file need not be on the same data storage device. The setting in the Use column will be updated. CAD heights are supported. More To display information about the format, size, source and units. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description File The name of the CAD files available in the \DATA directory of any data storage device. Format The format of the CAD file: dxf, shp or Leica for CAD files that are already attached to other jobs and converted to Leica format. Size (MB) The size of the CAD file in megabytes. Source The memory device where the CAD file is stored. Unit The units used for the CAD file. Use If set to Yes, the file is attached to the job when Store is pressed. Next step Page changes to the Coord system page. New Job, Coord system page Description of fields Field Option Coord system Selectable list Description Choosing a coordinate system attaches it to the job. If it is not known which coordinate system to use, select Coord system: WGS 1984. All other fields on this screen are display only fields. They depend on the transformation type of the selected coordinate system. Next step Page changes to the Averaging page. Page changes to the Scale page. New Job, Averaging page In order to check measurements, the same point can be measured more than once. If activated, an average or an absolute difference is calculated. Description of fields Field Mode Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs Option Description Defines the averaging principles for multiple measured points. The selection determines the availability of the subsequent fields for setting the acceptable averaging limits or absolute differences. 44 Field Option Description Average Computes the average for the position and the height. Points exceeding the defined limits are marked with ! in Edit Point:, Mean page. Absolute differences Computes the absolute differences between two points selected from a list of measured points which are all stored with the same point ID. Off Averaging is turned off. No other fields are available. The method used for computing the average. Available for Mode: Average. Method Points to use Weighted Calculates a weighted average No weighting Calculates an arithmetic average. Selectable list The type of points which will be taken into account for averaging or absolute differences. Available for Mode: Average and Mode: Absolute differences. Limit in posi- Editable field tion and Limit in height The acceptable difference for the position and height components. Available for Mode: Average. From Easting Editable fields to Cartesian Z The acceptable absolute differences for each coordinate component. Available for Mode: Absolute differences. Next step Store creates a new job. New Job, Scale page The geometric distance correction (geometric ppm) is derived from the map projection distortion (map projection ppm), the height above reference datum correction (height ppm) and an individual correction (individual ppm). The calculation of the map projection ppm follows the formula for the Transversal Mercator Projection. The individual factors are: the scale factor of the line of projection central meridian, Gauss-Krüger = 1.0, UTM = 0.9996, etc. and the offset from the line of projection. The calculation of the height ppm is derived from the height of the instrument station above the reference datum. Normally this is the height above mean sea level MSL. Key Description Store To store the settings. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 45 Key Description SF/ppm To change between entering the scale factor or the ppm. Only available for Compute scale using:SF/GeoPPM. ppm=0 To set Geometric ppm: 0.0. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Compute scale using Projection & ht info To enter all values for determining the geometric ppm. SF/GeoPPM To enter only the scale factor or the geometric ppm value. Stn & coord system To automatically calculate the ppm/scale factor from the coordinate system and station position. Scale at CM Editable field The scale at the central meridian. Available for Compute scale using: Projection & ht info. Offset to CM Editable field The offset to the central meridian. Available for Compute scale using: Projection & ht info. Map proj ppm Display only The map projection ppm value. If this value cannot be calculated, then ----- is displayed and is also ignored in the calculation of the geometric ppm value. Available for Compute scale using: Projection & ht info and Compute scale using: Stn & coord system. Ground height Editable field The height of the instrument station above the reference datum. Available for Compute scale using: Projection & ht info. Height ppm Display only The height ppm value calculated from the height coordinates of the current station stored in the internal memory. If this value cannot be calculated, then ----- is displayed and is also ignored in the calculation of the geometric ppm value. Available for Compute scale using: Projection & ht info and Compute scale using: Stn & coord system. User entered ppm Editable field Geometric ppm Display only The individual ppm value. Available for Compute scale using: Projection & ht info and Compute scale using: SF/GeoPPM. For Projection & ht info: Geometric ppm = Map proj ppm + User entered ppm + height ppm value calculated fromGround height. For Stn & coord system: Geometric ppm = Map proj ppm + Height ppm. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 46 Field Option User entered scale Editable field factor Description The user entered scale factor. Compute scale using: SF/GeoPPM. Additional calculation method for the geometric ppm value The geometric ppm value can also be calculated by a resection calculation. The scale factor from the resection is used for User entered ppm. Individual ppm=(s-1)*106.s=1+ppm*10-6. The Geometric ppm value is calculated with the following: • Scale at CM: 1, • Offset to CM: 0, • Map proj ppm: 0 and • Ground height: 0. Automatic calculation of the geometric ppm value When Compute scale using: Stn & coord system: • the ppm values for Map Proj ppm, Height ppm and Geometric ppm are automatically calculated. The coordinates of the current instrument station stored in the internal memory are used, which are based on the currently active coordinate system. • each time an application is accessed, the geometric ppm value is automatically calculated. The coordinates of the current instrument station stored in the internal memory are used (these coordinates may have been updated), which are based on the currently active coordinate system (this coordinate system may have changed). This way, the user is always working with the correct geometric ppm value. • when the coordinate system is chosen, then the geometric ppm value cannot be automatically calculated. A message will appear, allowing the user to either manually enter the ppm values or accept ppm values of 0. Next step Page changes to the Averaging page. 5.3 Job Properties and Editing a Job Description In the Job Properties:, the settings for a job can be viewed and changed. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties. Job Properties:, General page The fields on this page are identical with the fields in New Job, General. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job". Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 47 Key Description Store To store the settings. Data.. To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are shown on separate pages. Selected sort and filter settings apply. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Log.. To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are sorted by time in one list. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Page changes to the Codelist page. Job Properties:, Codelist page Key Description Store To store the settings. Import To add additional codes from a new codelist to the job. The name of this codelist is copied to the job. Codes.. To view codes currently stored in the job. Refer to "5.5 Managing Job Codes". Data.. To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are shown on separate pages. Selected sort and filter settings apply. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Log.. To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are sorted by time in one list. Fn Export To copy codes from the job to an existing or new codelist. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Codelist No codes are stored in the job. This default setting can be changed. Choosing a codelist copies the codes to the job. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 48 Field Option Description Display only Codes are stored in the job. If codes had been copied from a codelist in the internal memory, the name of the codelist is displayed. If codes have been typed in, then the name of the working job is displayed. Next step Page changes to the CAD files page. Job Properties:, CAD files page Key Description Store To store the settings. Add To select a CAD file to be added to the job properties. The screen that opens is very similar to New Job, CAD files page. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job" for a description of the screen. Only the files that are currently not attached to the job are displayed in the CAD Files screen. The files listed are all dxf, shp files and mpl files from the \Data directory on a data storage device or in the internal memory. If an mpl file is selected, then this file, including all related files, is copied to the appropriate job folder. Rmove To delete the highlighted Map file from the job. If deleted accidentally, the file must be attached again. View To change the setting in the View column. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Layrs.. To change to the CAD layers screen. On this screen, it is possible to make layers from the CAD file visible or invisible for MapView. Fn Log.. To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are sorted by time in one list. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Maps The name of the CAD files that can be used. The files displayed are the converted Leica Map files (*.mpl) within the job. The original file extension is added to the file name with an underscore, for example example_dxf. View If set to Yes, the map is visible as background maps in MapView. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 49 Next step IF you want to change to THEN another page Page changes to the Coord system page and the Averaging page and for also to the Scale page. The functionality on all pages is identical with the creation of a new job. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job" If the coordinate system of the working job is edited, and Use auto coordinate system has been selected in the RTK Rover Wizard, a message will display requesting confirmation to deactivate auto coordinate system. the CAD Layers page press Fn Layrs... Refer to "CAD Layers". CAD Layers Key Description Store To store the settings. State To change between the options in the Visible column of the highlighted layer. Shapefiles are not displayed on this screen. Shape files are only displayed in Job Properties:, CAD files page. All To make all layers have the same state as the currently highlighted layer. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Layer The name of the layer. For dxf files, all layers are listed, no matter if the layer is filled or empty. Visible The state of the layer: • Hidden These layers are not shown on the Map page and their positions are not used when zooming to extents. Nothing in these layers can be selected. • Visible These layers are shown on the Map page and their positions are used when zooming to extents. Nothing in these layers can be selected. Empty dxf layers can be set to visible. • Selectable These layers are shown on the Map page and their positions are used when zooming to extents. Objects on these layers are available to be selected. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 50 5.4 Choosing a Job Access • For a working job, where measured points are stored to, select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Choose working job. • For a control job with control points, select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Choose control job. Choose working job Listed are all data jobs stored on the data storage device or in the internal memory depending on the current device. Key Description OK To select the highlighted job and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a job. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job". Edit.. To edit the highlighted job. Refer to "5.3 Job Properties and Editing a Job". Delete To delete the highlighted job, including all map files from attached CAD files. CF card, SD card or Intrnl To change between viewing jobs stored on another data storage device or internal memory. 5.5 Managing Job Codes Description Available for jobs which have a codelist attached. To view, edit, group and sort all codes currently stored in the job. The functionality of this screen is mainly the same as for Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New job, Codelist. For simplicity, the functionality which is different for Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties, Codelist is explained here. Refer to "7.4 Managing Codes" for information on Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New job, Codelist. Access step-by-step Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Job properties. OR Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Choose working job or Choose control job. Edit.. to access Job Properties:. 2. Page until the Codelist page is active. 3. Codes.. to access Job Codes. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 51 Job Codes Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. New.. To create a new code. Refer to "7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code". Info To edit the highlighted code. Accesses Edit Code where new attributes can be added to a code and line styles can be changed. More To display information about the code group, the code type, the code description and the quick codes if available. Fn Group To access Code Groups. To view, create, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer to "7.5 Managing Code Groups". Fn Sort To access Sort Codes. To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code or last used. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step IF THEN the job codes do not need to be changed OK closes the screen. a new job code is to be created New... Refer to "7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code". an existing job code is to be edited highlight the job code and Info. Edit Code Key Description Store To store the code including any newly created attributes. +Attrib To add a new attribute to a code. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 52 Key Description Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in. Fn Quit To exit the screen. The behaviour of this screen varies with the type of code to be edited. The differences are explained in the table. Type of code Description Point codes and Free codes New attributes can be added with +Attrib. Line codes and Area codes • New attributes can be added with +Attrib. • The line style can be changed. This new line style is stored to the code. It can be decided whether to update the line style of all previously stored lines/areas with this code in this job. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Jobs 53 6 Jobs & Data - Data 6.1 Overview Description Data management is the administration of data stored in the working job, including • viewing data and related information. • editing data. • creating new data. • deleting existing data. • filtering existing data. 6.2 Accessing Data Management Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\View & edit data. The objects listed on the pages belong to the working job. The objects listed and their order depend on the active sort and filter settings. An active filter for a page is indicated by * to the right of the name of the page. Refer to "6.6 Point Sorting and Filters" for information about sort and filter settings. Data:, Points page Key Description OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a point. Edit.. To edit the highlighted point. Delete To delete the highlighted point. More To display information about the codes and code information if stored with any point, the 3D coordinate quality, the class, Easting, Northing and Elevation, the time and the date of when the point was stored, and the flag for Linework. The order in which the Easting and Northing columns are shown depends on the Grid format configured to be used in Regional Settings, Coords page. The Easting, Northing and Elevation values are shown in the unit configured in Regional Settings, Distance page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Log.. To view points, lines, areas and free codes stored with the job sorted by time. Refer to "6.5 Data Log". Fn Filter.. To define sort and filter settings. Refer to "6.6 Point Sorting and Filters". Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 54 Key Description Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Page changes to the Lines and Areas page. Data:, Lines and Areas page The explanations given for the softkeys are valid for both pages. The number in brackets next to the name of the page indicate the number of open lines/areas. Example: Lines (2)/Areas (2) means that two lines/areas are open. Key Description OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a line/area. After storing the new line/area, all existing lines and areas which are open are closed. Refer to "6.3.1 Creating a New Point". Edit.. To edit the highlighted line/area. Close and Open To change between the options in the Open column of the highlighted line/area. Only available for the current working job. More To display information about the codes if stored with any line/area, the start time, the end time of when the last point was added to the line/area, the length of the line, the perimeter and the area of the area. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Delete To delete the highlighted line/area. Fn Filter.. To define sort and filter settings. Refer to "6.6 Point Sorting and Filters". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Line or Area The listed lines/areas already stored in the working job. Open The status of a line/area. • Yes The line/area is open. Measured points are assigned to the line/area. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 55 Column Description • No The line/area is closed. Measured points are not assigned to the line/area. Close and Open change between the options. Next step IF the line/area THEN which was last used press a hot key configured to reopen last used line/area. This is to be opened hot key can be used at any time. Refer to "1.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys. is to be viewed Page until the Map page is active. For information on camera and images refer to "33.4 Image Management". Data:, Scans page Key Description OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. View To open Scan Viewer for scans that show Yes in the Display column. Scan Viewer is a perspective display of the 3D-point clouds. To cancel the loading of the selected scan(s) pressing ESC. Display To change the setting in the Display column for the highlighted scan. More To display information about the date, the time, the status, the number of surface points and the number of boundary points. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Delete To delete the highlighted scan. Fn All or Fn None To change the setting in the Display column for all scans at once. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 56 6.3 Point Management 6.3.1 Creating a New Point Access In Data:, Points page, press New... New Point, Coords page Key Description Store To store the new point entered and all associated information. Coord To view other coordinate properties. North or South Available for local geodetic or WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates when Local latitude or WGS84 latitude is highlighted. Changes between North and South latitude. East or West Available for local geodetic or WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates when Local longitude or WGS84 longitude is highlighted. Changes between East and West longitude. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht or Fn Available for local coordinates. Changes between the ellipsoidal and Elev the orthometric height. Fn IndivID or Fn Run For an individual name independent of the ID template or to change back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The name of the new point. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: • To start a new sequence of point IDs, type over the point ID. • For an individual name independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Coordinate fields Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data Editable field Negative geodetic coordinates are interpreted as being of the opposite hemisphere or other side of the central meridian. For example, entering 25 °N will be stored as 25 °S, entering -33 °E will be stored as 33 °W. 57 Next step Page changes to the Code page. New Point, Code page The settings for Code & attributes in Main Menu: User\Work settings\Coding & linework determine the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys. Key Description Store To store the new point entered and all associated information. +Attrib To create additional attributes for this point code. Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in. Last To recall the last used attribute values which were stored with this point code. Default To recall the default attribute values for the selected code. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point code Selectable list When the check box Use a list box to view codes is checked in Coding & Linework Settings: The codes from the job codelist are used. All point codes of the job codelist can be selected. The description of the code is shown as a display only field. The attributes are shown as display only, editable fields or selectable lists depending on their definition. Editable field When the check box Use a list box to view codes is not checked in Coding & Linework Settings: Codes for points can be typed in but not selected from a codelist. A check is performed to see if a point code of this name already exists in the job. If so, an information message is displayed. If Suggested attributes: Last used in Coding & Linework Settings, the according attributes are also shown. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 58 Field Option Description Attribute Editable field When the check box Use a list box to view codes is checked: Up to 20 attribute values are available. When the check box Use a list box to view codes is not checked: Up to eight attribute values are available. Next step Store stores the new point entered and all associated information. The properties stored with the point are: • Class: Ctrl • Sub class: Fixed (Pos & Ht) • Source: User entered • Instrument source: GPS It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If the codes and/or attribute values of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens where they can be corrected. 6.3.2 Editing a Point Access In Data:, Points page highlight a point to be edited. Press Edit... Edit Point:, Coords page The visible pages on this screen depend on the properties of the point being edited. It is possible to edit the point ID and for points of Class: Ctrl and Class: Est also the coordinates. Other point-related data is shown in display only fields. Changing the point ID of a point, applies this new point ID to all other points with the same original name, regardless of their class. Points of Class: Ref cannot be renamed. Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in other applications, for example COGO, or hidden point measurements does not update the application results. An edited point retains the creation value for Time. Key Description Store To store the changes. Coord To view other coordinate properties. Prev To display the previous point in the list of points displayed in Data:, Points page. Available unless the beginning of the list is reached. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 59 Key Description Next To display the next point in the list of points displayed in Data:, Points page. Available unless the end of the list is reached. More To display information about class, sub class, 3D coordinate quality, time and date of when point was stored, instrument source, source and the flag for Linework if available. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht or Fn Available for local coordinates. Changes between the ellipsoidal and Elev the orthometric height. Changing the height type does not edit the point. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Page changes to the next page. Edit Point:, Obs page Available when the edited point is Class: Meas. For GPS points The name of the real-time base station from where the GPS/GNSS point was measured, the name of antenna used to measure the point and the baseline values, are shown in display only/observations fields. For TPS points It is possible to edit the reflector height. The name of the station from where the point was measured is shown in a display only field. Changing the reflector height recalculates the point height. The distance variables ∆Hz, ∆V, ∆ slope dist are shown in a display only field, whenever a measurement has been taken in both faces. More displays the horizontal angle or the azimuth from the point to the instrument. Next step Page changes to the next page. Edit Point:, RTK info page Available for GNSS points which were recorded in real-time mode, however not for average or mean points. All fields are display only fields and cannot be edited. The information is obtained from System settings and data coming across with the real-time information and the Ntrip connection. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 60 Description of fields Field Option Network solu- Single baseline tion type Description Displayed when Use RTK network is not checked in RTK Rover Settings, RTK network page. Network solution Displayed when Use RTK network is checked in RTK Rover Settings, RTK network page. Network type FKP, VRS, MAX, i-MAX The type of reference network selected in RTK Rover Settings. Refer to "RTK Rover Settings, RTK network page". Nearest If Network type: Nearest is selected in RTK Rover Settings, a singlebase solution is calculated and the number of base stations equals 1. RTK data format Display only Refer to "RTK Rover Settings, General page". No. of ref stations in solution Display only • For single-baseline solutions, this number is always 1. • For VRS and i-MAX, this number is always 1 since it is not possible to derive the number of base stations contributing to the VRS or i-MAX corrections from the data format. • For network solutions, this information is derived from the content of the data format. Only RTCM v3 and Leica 4G are able to provide this number. Mountpoint Display only The Ntrip server sending out real-time data. Available for network RTK with Ntrip. The information is available for all Ntrip connections independent from the Network type used. The information is derived from the Connection Settings, either manually defined or selected from the NTRIP Source Table. Point measured inside network Display only Available for network RTK with Ntrip and MAX and data format RTCM v3 or Leica 4G. User ID Display only Available for single baseline RTK, network RTK with/without Ntrip. Next step Page changes to the next page. Edit Point:, Code page Available when the edited point is Class: Meas. The point code and code information can be edited. All point codes in the job can be selected. The description of the code is shown as a display only field. The attributes are shown as display only, editable fields or selectable lists depending on their definition. The attribute values shown depend on the setting in Coding & Linework Settings. Suggested attributes: Last used shows the last used attribute values which are stored for this point code in the active codelist. Suggested attributes: Default values shows the default attribute values for this point code if existing. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 61 It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If the codes and/or attribute values of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens where they can be corrected. Next step Page changes to the next page. Edit Point:, Annots page Available when the edited point is Class: Nav or Class: Meas and no offset point. The comments to be stored with the point can be edited. Next step Page changes to the next page. Edit Point:, Mean page Available when the edited point is Class: Avge. Refer to "6.3.3 Mean Page" for a detailed description. 6.3.3 Mean Page Description In order to check measurements, the same point can be measured more than once. These measured points are assigned the class Meas. The various measured coordinate triplets for one point can be recorded using the same point ID. If the averaging mode is activated, an average is calculated when more than one measured coordinate triplet is available for the same point ID. The averaged point is given the class Avge. It is checked if the deviations of each single point are within the limits configured in Job Properties:, Averaging page. After averaging, the Mean page becomes available in Edit Point: and accessible from the Survey application. Available functionality on the Mean page depends on the selected averaging mode. Averaging Defining the averaging mode and configuring the limits The averaging mode and the limits are configured in Job Properties:, Averaging page. Refer to "5.3 Job Properties and Editing a Job". Description of averaging modes Averaging mode Description Average When more than one measured coordinate triplet is recorded for the same point, the average for the position and the height is computed. Depending on the selected averaging method, the average will be computed weighted or arithmetic (no weighting). The class Avge is assigned to the averaged point. The horizontal and height distances from the measured points to the average are computed and displayed on the Mean page. A check is performed that the differences in position and height, between the averaged point and the point being stored, do not exceed the defined limits. Absolute differences Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data What is described for Average also applies for Absolute differences. Additionally, the absolute difference between two points selected from a list of measured points with the same point ID, is checked to be within the defined limits. 62 Averaging mode Description Off Averaging functionality is turned off. With more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point, no average for the position and the height is computed. Averaging with position only or height only points Position only points, height only points and points with full coordinate triplets are handled in the averaging. Access step-by-step The Mean page can be accessed if Mode: Average or Mode: Absolute differences is configured in Job Properties:, Averaging page. AND more than one measured coordinate triplet is recorded for the same point using the same point ID. Access within data management Step Description 1. In Data:, Points page highlight a point to be edited. 2. Edit.. to access Edit Point:, Mean page. Access within Survey From within the Survey application, the Mean page is accessible when the RTK Rover interface is active. In Survey, Points page, press Fn Avg or Fn Abs to access Edit Point:, Mean page. Edit Point:, Mean page All measured coordinate triplets recorded using the same point ID are shown. Key Description Store To store the changes. Use To change between the options in the Use column for the highlighted coordinate triplet. To include or exclude this triplet in or from the calculation of the average. Edit.. To view and edit the highlighted measured coordinate triplet. It is possible to edit the point ID and the antenna height without impact on all other classes of the point with the same original name. The coordinates are updated. A change in codes must be an overall change for the average point. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 63 Key Description Example: One of the measured coordinate triplets has a wrong point ID and should not be included in the average. By editing the point ID, the point is renamed and no longer contributes to the average. Delete To delete the highlighted coordinate triplet. The average is recomputed. More To change between time and date of when the point was stored and the 3D coordinate quality. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Diffs Available for Mode: Absolute differences and Yes is set in the Use column for exactly two measurements. To display the absolute coordinate differences when a local coordinate system is active. Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by !. Description of columns Column Description Use The use of a measured coordinate triplet in the averaging. • Auto The coordinate triplet is included in the averaging computation if within the averaging limit defined in Job Properties::Averaging page. • Yes The coordinate triplet is always included in the averaging computation even if it would fall outside the averaging limit defined in Job Properties::Averaging page. • No The coordinate triplet is never included in the averaging computation. • ----The coordinate triplet cannot be included in the averaging computation. Automatically set by the system. Use changes between the options. Time The time the measured coordinate triplet was stored. Date The date the measured coordinate triplet was stored. The format is as defined in Regional Settings, Time page. dPos The horizontal distance from the measured coordinate triplet to the average. dPos : ----- indicates unavailable information, for example for a height only point. dHt The height distance from the measured coordinate triplet to the average. dHt: ----- indicates unavailable information, for example for a position only point. ! Available for measured coordinate triplets with Auto or Yes in the Use column if Mode: Average. Indicates an exceeding of the limits. Next step Store stores the changes. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 64 6.4 Line/Area Management 6.4.1 Overview Description A line/area consists of points and can be created/edited in Data:, Lines and Areas page. The individual points are measured within any application. All points can be used except auxiliary points. Points can be simultaneously assigned to one or more lines and/or areas. A line/area can have • a style for display in MapView. • a code independent of the point code of the points comprising the line/area. Points are assigned to a line/area when the line/area is open. Refer to "6.2 Accessing Data Management" for information on how to open a line/area. 6.4.2 Creating a New Line/Area The functionality of all screens and fields are similar for the creation of both lines and areas. The descriptions for lines can be applied for areas. Access In Data:, Lines page, press New... New Line, General page Key Description Store To store the new line entered and all associated information. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn IndivID or Fn Run For an individual name independent of the ID template or to change back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Line ID Editable field The name of the new line. The configured ID template for lines is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: • To start a new sequence of line IDs, type over the line ID. • For an individual name independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 65 Field Option Description Points to store Selectable list The type of points which are used to form the line during a survey. Style Selectable list The line style in which lines/areas are represented in MapView and LGO. For Line code: on the Code page a line style can be selected from a selectable list. Otherwise the line style as defined for the selected line code is shown. Colour Selectable list A colour in which the line will be displayed. Next step Page changes to the Code page. New Line, Code page The settings for Code & attributes in Main Menu: User\Work settings\Coding & linework determine the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys. The value for Start time with which the line is stored is the time when Store was pressed. The same value is assigned to the value for End time until a point is added to the line. Key Description Store To store the new line entered and all associated information. Any existing lines and areas which are open are closed. +Attrib To create additional attributes for this line code. Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in. Last To recall the last used attribute values which were stored with this line code. Default To recall the default attribute values for the selected code. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 66 Description of fields Field Option The line code to be stored with the point. Line code Attribute Description Selectable list When the check box Use a list box to view codes is checked in Coding & Linework Settings: All line codes of the job codelist can be selected. The description of the code is shown as a display only field. The line style is shown as defined for the selected line code. It is the style in which lines/areas are represented in MapView and LGO. For Line code: , it can be changed. The attributes are shown as display only, editable fields or selectable lists depending on their definition. Editable field When the check box Use a list box to view codes is not checked in Coding & Linework Settings: Codes for lines can be typed in but not selected from a codelist. A check is performed to see if a line code of this name already exists in the job. If so, the line style and colour are copied from the existing code and shown as display only. If Suggested attributes: Last used in Coding & Linework Settings, the according attributes are also shown. Editable field When the check box Use a list box to view codes is checked: up to 20 attribute values are available. When the check box Use a list box to view codes is not checked: up to eight attribute values are available. Next step Store stores the new line entered and all associated information. Creating lines/areas most efficiently IF the task is to create THEN multiple lines/areas use the hot key/favourites menu function Linework - Create with subsequent new line (quick)/Linework - Create new area (quick). Pressing line/area IDs the hot key or selecting the function from the My GPS Favourites menu creates and immediately stores the new line/area. For the line/area ID, the line/area ID template as defined in ID Templates is used. The code and attributes are taken over from the last created line/area. lines/areas with certain codes Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data use quick coding. The job codelist must contain quick codes for lines/areas. By typing the quick code a new line/area is created and immediately stored with that line/area code and attributes. For the line/area ID, the line/area ID template as defined in ID Templates is used. 67 6.4.3 Editing a Line/Area The functionality of all screens and fields are similar for the creation of both lines and areas. The descriptions for lines can be applied for areas. Access In Data:, Lines page, press Edit... Edit Line, General page Key Description Store To store the changes. More To display End time and End date. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Line ID Editable field The name of the line can be edited. A line cannot be renamed to an already existing line ID. Points to store Selectable list The type of points which are used to form the line during a survey can be edited. Style Editable field The line style in which lines/areas are represented in MapView and LGO. Colour Editable field A colour in which the line will be displayed. Number of points Display only The number of points contained within the line. Length Display only The sum of the distances between the points in the sequential order in which they are stored for the line. This length can be a horizontal grid distance or a geodetic distance on the WGS 1984 ellipsoid. Start date and Display only Start time The time/date when the line was created. An edited line retains the creation value for Start time. End date and End time The time/date when the last point was added to the line. This can be different to the time the point was created. The values do not change after deleting the last added point or after editing unless an additional point is added to the line. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data Display only 68 Next step Page changes to the Points page. Edit Line, Points page All points belonging to the line are listed. The point that was added last to the line is at the top of the list. Key Description Store To store the changes. Add To add an existing point from the working job to the line. A new point is added above the point which was highlighted when the key was pressed. The value for End time on the General page changes when a point was added to the line. Edit.. To edit the highlighted point. Remov To remove the highlighted point from the line. The point itself is not deleted. More To display information about the point codes if stored with the line, the time and the date of when the line was stored, the 3D coordinate quality, the class and the flag for Linework. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Page changes to the Code page. Edit Line, Code page The line code can be edited. All line codes can be selected. For Line code:None, the line style can be changed. The description of the code is shown as a display only field. The attributes are shown as display only, editable fields or selectable lists depending on their definition. Next step Store stores the changes. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 69 6.5 Data Log Description A list of all objects and free codes in the working job is displayed in order of time. Access step-by-step Access within data management In Data:, Points page, press Fn Log.. to access Data Log. Access within job management In Job Properties:, General page, press Fn Log.. to access Data Log. Data Log In the column Data record, all points, lines and areas as well as free codes stored within the working job are displayed. They are always sorted by time with the most recent record at the top. For lines and areas, the value for Start time is relevant. Key Description OK To close the screen. New.. To insert a free code below/before the currently highlighted object or record. The functionality of inserting a free code is identical to the functionality of entering a free code during a survey. Edit.. To edit the highlighted object or free code. The functionality of editing a free code is identical to the functionality of entering a free code during a survey. Refer to "26.3 Free Coding". Delete To delete the highlighted object or free code. More To display information about the type of data recorded, the time and the date of when it was stored or for lines and areas when they were created and the codes if stored with any object. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step OK returns to the screen from where Data Log was accessed. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 70 6.6 Point Sorting and Filters 6.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas Description The sort settings define the order of the objects in the working job. The filter settings define the objects to be viewed. Three types of filters are available: Point filter: Line filter: Area filter: An active point filter shows selected points in Data:, Points page. An active line filter shows selected lines in Data:, Lines page. An active area filter shows selected areas in Data:, Areas page. For information on camera and images refer to "33.4 Image Management". The sort and filter settings are stored in the job. They are remembered after turning off the instrument. When a job becomes active, then the sort and filter settings of this job are saved in the internal memory. If the data storage device is formatted then these last used sort and filter settings are used for the job Default. When a new job is created, the sort and filter settings from what was the working job are copied to the new job. Changing the working job influences the sort and filter settings for the objects. The settings are changed to those of the selected job. An active filter for an object is indicated in Data: by * located on the right side of the page name. Access In Data: on the Points, Lines or Areas page, press Fn Filter.. to access Sorts & Filters. Sorts & Filters, Points page The available fields on this screen depend on the selected setting for Filter by. Key Description OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The selected sort and filter settings are applied. Codes.. Available for Filter by: Point code. To define the code filters. Refer to "6.6.2 Point, Line and Area Code Filter". Stake.. To filter points for the Stakeout application. Refer to "6.6.3 Stakeout Filter". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 71 Description of fields Field Option Description Sort by Ascending point ID, Always available. The method points are Descending point sorted by. ID, Forward time or Backward time Always available. The method the points are filtered by. Filter by No filter Shows all points. Highest class Shows points of highest class. Range of point IDs Shows points with point IDs between the entered start and end ID. The points are left aligned and sorted by the first digit. Pt ID wildcard Shows points with point IDs matching the wildcard. Time Shows points which were recorded within a defined time window. Class Shows points of the selected class. Instrument Shows points originating from the selected instrument or software program type. Coordinate type Shows points of the selected type of coordinates. Point code Shows points with selected codes attached. Box around point Shows points within the defined radius from a particular point. The radius is the horizontal distance. Individual line Shows points forming a selected line. This can be useful, for example, during stakeout. Individual area Shows points forming a selected area. This can be useful, for example, during stakeout. Start ID Editable field Available for Filter by: Range of point IDs. The first point to be displayed. End ID Editable field Available for Filter by: Range of point IDs. The last point to be displayed. Wildcard Editable field Available for Filter by: Pt ID wildcard. * and ? are supported. * indicates an undefined number of unknown characters. ? indicates a single unknown character. Start date Editable field Available for Filter by: Time. The date of the first point to be displayed. Start time Editable field Available for Filter by: Time. The time of the first point to be displayed. End date Editable field Available for Filter by: Time. The date of the last point to be displayed. End time Editable field Available for Filter by: Time. The time of the last point to be displayed. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 72 Field Option Description Control (Ctrl), Show or Hide Adjusted (Adj), Reference (Ref), Average (Avge), Measured (Meas), Navigated (Nav), Estimated (Est), None Available for Filter by: Class. Defined classes are shown or hidden. View Available for Filter by: Class. Highest triplet The coordinate triplets of the highest class are shown. All triplets All classes for one coordinate triplet are shown. Instrument All, TPS, GPS, LEICA Geo Office, Level, Controller, Third party SW or Unknown Available for Filter by: Instrument. Points originating from this instrument type are shown. Type WGS84 only or Local only Available for Filter by: Coordinate type. Points from the chosen coordinate type are shown. Point ID Selectable list Available for Filter by: Box around point. The point to which the radius is applied. Opening the selectable list opens Data:. Refer to "6.2 Accessing Data Management". Radius Editable field Available for Filter by: Box around point. The radius of the circle within which the points are shown. Line ID Selectable list Available for Filter by: Individual line. Opening the selectable list opens Data:. Refer to "6.2 Accessing Data Management". Area ID Selectable list Available for Filter by: Individual area. Opening the selectable list opens Data:. Refer to "6.2 Accessing Data Management". Next step Page changes to the Lines page. Sorts & Filters, Lines and Areas page Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 73 Key Description OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The selected sort and filter settings are applied. Codes.. Available for Filter by: Code / code group. To select the line codes to be used. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Sort by Ascending line ID, Always available. The method the lines Descending line ID, Forward are sorted by. start time, Backward start time, Forward end time, Backward end time Always available. The method by which the lines are filtered. Filter by No filter Shows all lines. Code / code group Shows lines with selected codes attached. Next step OK closes the screen. 6.6.2 Access step-by-step Point Code Filter Point, Line and Area Code Filter For each object, a code filter exists. The point, line and area code filters are independent from each other. The functionality is identical. For simplicity, the point code filter is explained. Step Description 1. In Sorts & Filters select Filter by: Point code. 2. Codes.. to access Point Code Filter. This screen shows the point codes from the working job and codes currently used as filter. Point codes are sorted according to the settings in Sort Codes. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 74 Key Description OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Group To activate and deactivate code groups. Accesses Code Groups. Any code group that has been previously deactivated are displayed as deactivated here. Codes belonging to a deactivated code group are not displayed in Point Code Filter. Use To activate and deactivate the filter for the highlighted code. None or All To deactivate or activate all point codes. Fn Sort To define the order of the codes. Accesses Sort Codes. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 6.6.3 Stakeout Filter Description The settings on this screen define a filter for the Stakeout application. The Stakeout filter can be applied to show points which are already staked or points that are still to be staked. The stakeout filter acts in addition to any other filter set in Sorts & Filters. For example, points still to be staked out with a particular code can be filtered. Access In Sorts & Filters, Points page, press Stake.. to access Stakeout Filter. Stakeout Filter Key Description OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Reset To reset the staked flag for all points of the currently working job. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description View All points Shows all points. Points to stake Shows points not yet staked out. Staked points Shows points which are already staked out. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 75 6.7 Scan Viewer Description The Scan Viewer is available on MS50. The Scan Viewer is a point cloud viewer. One or more scans can be viewed. The Scan Viewer respectively the Scans tab in the data management is available as soon as a scan in available in the data job. Scan Viewer provides a perspective display of the 3D point clouds which allows for a better overall understanding of the measured data. The displayed data can be navigated in. Access Step Description 1. In Data:, Scans page, highlight one scan and press Display to set Yes in the Display column. 2. To set Yes in the Display column for all scans. press Fn All. Press View. Scan Viewer Scan View Settings Key Description OK To return to Data:, Scans page. Fn Config.. To configure Scan Viewer. Refer to "Scan View Settings". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Background colour Selectable list A colour in which the background will be displayed. Point cloud colour Intensity The point cloud is colored according to the intensity value of the received EDM signal. Single colour A point cloud gets a single colour. If several scans are available, each point cloud gets a different colour. A colour table is defined in the background, from which the colours are picked for each point cloud. RGB The point cloud is coloured according to the RGB (red, green, blue) values from the panoramic image. If a panoramic image has been taken when defining a scan, the RGB values are available. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 76 Toolbar icons Icon Description To scroll the Scan Viewer toolbar. The fit icon fits all displayable data using the largest possible scale. To zoom into the map. Pressing ESC stops the zooming process. To zoom out of the map. Pressing ESC stops the zooming process. To zoom into the point cloud in real-time by tapping the screen and moving the stylus up. To zoom out move the stylus down the screen. To rotate the point cloud in 3D. The rotation point is the closest point of the scan to the centre of the 3D viewer. To toggle between pre-defined perspective views zoomed fit: top view, front view and side view. To change the pixel size of a single scan point displayed in the viewer. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Data 77 7 Codelists 7.1 Overview It is recommended to create a codelist in LGO. A codelist can be transferred from LGO to the internal memory of the instrument using the data storage device. Steps from creating to using a codelist Codelist Management: Create codelist Instrument LGO Serial upload Tools: Transfer Data storage device Internal memory: Internal memory codelist Selecting codelist(s) for a job: Copy of codes Job: Job codelist The creating, editing and managing of codelists is explained in this chapter. In order to use a codelist on the instrument, it must be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory. 7.2 Access Codelists Viva Series, Codelists Accessing Codelist Management Step Description 1. Go to Job Properties:, Codelist page when creating a new job or editing an existing working or control job. 2. Open the selectable list for Codelist. Listed are all codelists stored in the internal memory. Key Description OK To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The codes from the highlighted codelist are copied to the working job. New.. To create a codelist. Refer to "7.3 Creating/Editing a Codelist". Edit.. To edit the highlighted codelist. Refer to "7.3 Creating/Editing a Codelist". 78 Key Description Delete To delete the highlighted codelist. More To display information about the creator and the date of when the codelist was created. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 7.3 Creating/Editing a Codelist Access In Codelists press New.. or Edit... New Codelist or Edit Codelist Key Description Store To store the codelist. Codes.. To access Codes where codes can be created, edited or deleted and code groups can be accessed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the codelist. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Input required. Description Editable field A detailed description of the codelist. This description can be, for example, work to be performed. Input optional. Editable field The person’s name who is creating the codelist. Input optional. Creator Viva Series, Codelists 79 7.4 Managing Codes 7.4.1 Accessing Codes Description Managing codes includes • creating new codes • viewing codes with their related information • editing codes • deleting existing codes. Access step-by-step Codes Step Description 1. In Codelists, highlight the codelist of the codes which are to be managed. 2. Edit.. to access Edit Codelist. 3. Codes.. to access Codes. Codes from currently active code groups are shown. The listed codes belong to the codelist selected from the internal memory when this screen was accessed through New job\Codelist OR to the job codelist when this screen was accessed through Job properties\Codelist. The * indicates codes which have attributes attached. Viva Series, Codelists Key Description OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new code. Refer to "7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code". Edit.. To edit the highlighted code. Refer to "7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code". Delete To delete the highlighted code. More To display information about the code description, the quick codes if available, the code groups and the code type. Fn Group To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer to "7.5 Managing Code Groups". Fn Sort To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code or the last use. 80 7.4.2 Creating/Editing a Code The values for code groups, codes and attributes are case sensitive. For example, the code group Tree is not the same as the code group TREE. Attribute names that have already been typed in cannot be edited in a job codelist. A new code can also be created within an application. In this case, the new code is added to the job codelist. New Code or Edit Code Key Description Store To add the new code and any associated attributes to the codelist in the internal memory. +Attrib To add a new editable field for an attribute of attribute type normal and of value type text. Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and the attribute value to be used as the default attribute value can be typed in. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Code Editable field A unique name for the new code. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Input required. Description Editable field A detailed description of the code. This description can be, for example, the full designation if Code is an abbreviation. Input optional. Code group Selectable list The code group to which the code is to be assigned. Code type Selectable list Defines the use of the code. It can be used as thematical code for points, lines or areas or as a free code. Makes a code unique. A code can have the same value with different types within the same codelist. For example a code OAK can be of type Point, Line, Area and/or Free. Viva Series, Codelists 81 Field Option Description Linework Selectable list Only available for Code type: Point. To allow a new line or new area to be opened whenever the point code is newly selected. This functionality is also available when creating codelists with LGO Codelist Management. None Select this option to disable the functionality. All other code settings on the instrument are not affected when this option is set. Begin line When a point code is newly selected, a new line is opened and the point being stored is added to the line. When the same point code remains selected, a new line is not opened. The point being stored is added to the current line. Begin area The behaviour for opening a new area is the same as the behaviour for opening a new line. Style Selectable list Available for Code type: Line and Code type: Area. The style in which lines/areas are represented in MapView and LGO. Attribute Editable field Up to twenty attributes can be created. Attributes of attribute type mandatory or fixed and of value type real or integer must be created in LGO. 7.5 Managing Code Groups Access In Codes, press Fn Group. Code Groups The listed code groups belong to the codelist selected from the internal memory when this screen was accessed through New job\Codelist OR to the job codelist when this screen was accessed through Job properties\Codelist. Codes from currently active code groups are shown. Viva Series, Codelists Key Description OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. 82 Key Description New.. To create a new code group. In New Code Group type in a unique name for Name. Store stores the new code group typed in and returns to Code Groups. Edit.. Available for codelists in the internal memory. To edit the highlighted code group. In Edit Code Group type in the changes for Name. Store stores the changes and returns to Code Groups. Use To activate and deactivate the highlighted code group. Codes belonging to a deactivated code group are not displayed in Codes. None or All To deactivate or activate all code groups. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Viva Series, Codelists Column Description Code group The name of the code group. Activated Use code group or not. The codes belonging to a deactivated code group cannot be selected from the selectable list for code selection. Use changes between the options. 83 8 Coordinate Systems 8.1 Overview Description A coordinate system • consists of up to five elements. • allows the conversion from WGS 1984 geodetic or cartesian coordinates to, local cartesian, geodetic or grid coordinates and back. • can be attached to jobs. • can be manually defined. • can be computed in the field. • can be directly received from a reference network. Refer to "19.7.1 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Connection". • can be downloaded to LGO. • can be uploaded from LGO. Using coordinate systems on TPS Coordinate systems are used on TPS instruments to combine GPS data with TPS data. An attached coordinate system is not used to reduce any measured distance on a TPS instrument. All GPS surveyed points are always stored as WGS 1984 geodetic coordinates regardless of the coordinate system being used. Using a different coordinate system converts the coordinates displayed on the screen, but does not convert and restore the coordinate values in the database DBX. Points surveyed with a TPS instrument are always stored in local GRID coordinates regardless of the coordinate system being used. One coordinate system can be attached to a job at one time. This coordinate system remains attached to the job unless it is changed. Default coordinate systems The default coordinate system is WGS 1984. It cannot be deleted. It is not possible to create a coordinate system called WGS 1984. Additional default coordinate systems may be available for certain countries. Active coordinate system The active coordinate system is the one attached to the working job. One coordinate system is always considered as the active coordinate system. Automatic coordinate system (RTCM transformation parameters) When Use auto coordinate system is checked in the RTK Rover Wizard, the coordinate system is directly received from the reference network via RTCM correction data. Refer to "19.7.1 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Connection". Coordinate systems when transferring jobs between GPS and TPS When transferring a job from GPS to TPS, or vice versa, the coordinate system stays attached to the job. It then appears like any other coordinate system on the instrument. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 84 8.2 Access Coordinate Systems Accessing Coordinate System Management Step Description 1. Go to Job Properties:, Coord system page when creating a new job or editing an existing working or control job. 2. Open the selectable list for Coord system. Listed are all coordinate systems stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is shown as -----. Key Description OK To select the highlighted coordinate system and to return to the previous screen. With a data storage device inserted, the selected coordinate system will be attached to the working job. New.. To create a coordinate system manually. Refer to "8.3 Coordinate Systems - Creating and Editing". Edit.. To edit the highlighted coordinate system. Refer to "8.3 Coordinate Systems - Creating and Editing". Delete To delete the highlighted coordinate system. Deletion is not possible if the highlighted coordinate system is active and its source is RTCM. More To display information about the type of transformation used, the type of heights computed, the number of control points used for the determination and the date of when the coordinate system was created. Fn Set-D Available unless a default coordinate system is highlighted. To turn the highlighted coordinate system into a user defined default coordinate system stored in the instrument. Fn Default To recall the deleted default coordinate systems. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 85 8.3 Access Coordinate Systems - Creating and Editing Coordinate systems can be defined by manual creation or determined by calculation. In this chapter, the manual creation of coordinate systems is explained. Refer to "41 Determine Coordinate System" for information on the determination by calculation. Coordinate systems with a Classic 3D transformation can be defined by manual creation. The type of transformation of the selected coordinate system determines which elements of a coordinate system can be edited. The name of the coordinate system, the method of residual distribution and the geoid model in use are always editable. For coordinate systems with source RTCM, only the geoid model in use can be changed. However, if no projection is received with the automatic coordinate system, then the projection can also be defined. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system. A copy of this coordinate system is taken for further configurations. Press New.. or Edit... New Coordinate System or Edit Coordinate System Key Description Store To store the coordinate system. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new coordinate system. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Available for transformations with control points. Manually entered transformations do not have control points. The method by which residuals are distributed throughout the transformation area. The transformation results become more realistic and any strain is dispersed in the transformation. Residuals 1/distance, 1/distance², 1/distance³/² Viva Series, Coordinate Systems Distribute the residuals of the control points according to the distance between each control point and the newly transformed point. 86 Field Transformation Option Description Multiquadratic Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic interpolation approach. Selectable list The type of transformation. Pre Transform Selectable list Available when editing a coordinate system and for Twostep transformations. The name of a preliminary 3D transformation, which, together with the selected projection, is used to obtain preliminary grid coordinates for a final 2D transformation. Ellipsoid Selectable list Available unless projection Type: Customised. The local coordinates are based on this ellipsoid. Projection Selectable list The map projection. Geoid model Selectable list The geoid model. CSCS model Selectable list The Country Specific Coordinate System model. 8.4 Transformations 8.4.1 Accessing Transformation Management Transformations cannot be accessed for coordinate systems with source RTCM. Refer to "Automatic coordinate system (RTCM transformation parameters)". Access step-by-step Transformations Step Description 1. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system. 2. Press New.. or Edit... 3. Highlight Transformation. 4. ENTER to access Transformations. Listed are all Classic 3D transformations stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is shown as -----. Key Description OK To select the highlighted transformation and to return to the previous screen. New.. To create a new transformation. Refer to "8.4.2 Creating/Editing a Transformation". Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 87 Key Description Edit.. To edit the highlighted transformation. Refer to "8.4.2 Creating/Editing a Transformation". Delete To delete the highlighted transformation. More To display information about the type of heights computed and the number of control points used for the determination of the transformation. Fn Set-D To turn the highlighted transformation into a user-defined default transformation stored in the instrument. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 8.4.2 Creating/Editing a Transformation Classic 3D transformations can be created. Access In Transformations, highlight a transformation. A copy of this transformation is taken for further configurations. Press New.. or Edit... New Transformation or Edit Transformation, General page Key Description Store To store the transformation. Clear To set the editable fields to 0. Available on the Parameters and the Advanced page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new transformation. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Type Display only No other transformations than Classic 3D can be created. Next step Page changes to the Parameters page. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 88 New Transformation or Edit Transformation, Parameters page New Transformation or Edit Transformation, Advanced page Enter the known values of the transformation parameters. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Select at least a height mode and a transformation model. Description of fields Field Option Description Height mode Selectable list The type of heights to be computed. Model Selectable list The transformation model to be used. For Model:Molodensky-Badakus, additional editable fields are available. Next step Store stores the transformation. 8.5 Ellipsoids 8.5.1 Accessing Ellipsoid Management Ellipsoids cannot be accessed for coordinate systems with source RTCM. Refer to "Automatic coordinate system (RTCM transformation parameters)". Access step-by-step Step Description 1. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system. 2. Press New.. or Edit... 3. Highlight Ellipsoid. 4. ENTER to access Ellipsoids. 8.5.2 Creating/Editing an Ellipsoid Access In Ellipsoids, highlight an ellipsoid. A copy of this ellipsoid is taken for further configurations. Press New.. or Edit... New Ellipsoid or Edit Ellipsoid Key Description Store To store the ellipsoid. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 89 Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new ellipsoid. A name is mandatory, can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Axis a Editable field The semi-major axis a. 1/f Editable field The reciprocal value of flattening f. 8.6 Projections 8.6.1 Accessing Projection Management Projections cannot be accessed for coordinate systems with source RTCM. Refer to "Automatic coordinate system (RTCM transformation parameters)". Access step-by-step Projections Step Description 1. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system. 2. Press New.. or Edit... 3. Highlight Projection. 4. ENTER to access Projections. Listed are all projections stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is shown as -----. Key Description OK To select the highlighted projection and to return to the previous screen. New.. To create a new projection. Refer to "8.6.2 Creating/Editing a Projection". Edit.. To edit the highlighted projection. Refer to "8.6.2 Creating/Editing a Projection". Delete To delete the highlighted projection. Fn Set-D Available unless a default projection is highlighted. To turn the highlighted projection into a user-defined default projection stored in the instrument. Fn Default To recall the deleted default projections. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 90 Description of columns Column Option The projection type. Refer to standard surveying literature for details on projections. Type Viva Series, Coordinate Systems Description Customised Customised projection. Certain fixed projections which cannot be defined by any of the following options. Transverse Mercator Transverse Mercator. Conformal projection onto a cylinder with its axis lying on the equatorial plane. The cylinder is tangential to a meridian. UTM Universal Transverse Mercator. Transverse Mercator Projection with fixed zone-defining constants. The central meridian is selected automatically according to the selected zone number. Oblique Mercator Oblique Mercator. Oblique Mercator Conformal projection onto a cylinder. The cylinder is tangent to any circle other than the equator or a meridian. Mercator Mercator. Conformal projection onto a cylinder with its axis lying on a meridian plane. The cylinder is tangent to the sphere along the equator. Lambert 1 parallel Lambert 1 Parallel. Conformal projection onto a cone, with its axis coinciding with the z-axis of the ellipsoid. Lambert 2 parallel Lambert 2 Parallel. Conformal projection onto a cone, with its axis coinciding with the z-axis of the ellipsoid. The cone is secant to the sphere. Cassini Soldner-Cassini. Projection onto a cylinder. It is not an equal area or conformal. The scale is true along the central meridian and along lines perpendicular to central meridian. Polar stereo Polar Stereographic. Conformal azimuthal projection onto a plane. The point of projection is on the surface of the ellipsoid diametrically opposite of the origin which is the centre of the projection. Double stereo Double Stereographic. Conformal azimuthal projection onto a plane. The point of projection is on the surface of the sphere diametrically opposite of the centre of the projection. RSO Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic. This is a special type of Oblique Mercator projection. 91 8.6.2 Creating/Editing a Projection Access In Projections, highlight a projection. A copy of this projection is taken for further configurations. Press New.. or Edit... New Projection or Edit Projection Key Description Store To store the projection. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new projection. A name is mandatory, can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Type Selectable list The projection type. The setting for determines the availability of the subsequent fields for the parameters of the projection. Refer to "8.6.1 Accessing Projection Management" for a description of the projection types. 8.7 Geoid Models 8.7.1 Overview Use in the field For use on the instrument in the field, geoid field files are created from the geoid model. Create geoid models on the instrument Geoid models can be created on the instrument in one of three ways: 1. 2. 3. The geoid field file is stored on a data storage device and can be used when the data storage device is inserted in the instrument. It is recommended for large geoid field files. This method is explained in this chapter. The geoid field file is stored in the internal memory of the instrument. It is recommended for large geoid field files. This method is also explained in this chapter. The geoid field file is transferred to the internal memory and can be used at any time. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects"for information on how to transfer geoid field files to the internal memory on the instrument. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 92 8.7.2 Access step-by-step Geoid Models Accessing Geoid Model Management Step Description 1. In Coordinate Systems, highlight a coordinate system. 2. Press New.. or Edit... 3. Highlight Geoid model. 4. ENTER to access Geoid Models. Listed are all geoid models stored in the database DBX. Any unavailable information is shown as -----. For example, ----- would be shown if the geoid field file associated to the geoid model is not available on the data storage device / internal memory. Key Description OK To select the highlighted geoid model and to return to the previous screen. CF card To create a new geoid model. The \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data storage device is automatically scanned for geoid field files. Refer to "8.7.3 Creating a New Geoid Model from the Data Storage Device / Internal Memory". Edit.. To view the highlighted geoid model. None of the fields can be edited. The geoid field file from which the geoid model was created must be stored in the internal memory or in the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data storage device. Delete To delete the highlighted geoid model. The geoid field file which was associated with this geoid model is then also deleted. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 93 8.7.3 Creating a New Geoid Model from the Data Storage Device / Internal Memory Requirement At least one geoid field file with the extension *.gem is in the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data storage device / internal memory. Create geoid model step-by-step Step Description 1. Listed in Geoid Models are all geoid models stored in the internal memory. OR Press CF card to scan the \DATA\GPS\GEOID directory on the data storage device. 2. For each geoid field file on the data storage device or in the internal memory, one geoid model is automatically created. The names given to the geoid models are those names which were entered in LGO. Existing geoid models are automatically overwritten by new models with the same name. 3. The creation of a geoid model is finished. 8.8 CSCS Models Use in the field For use on the instrument in the field, CSCS field files are created from the CSCS model. The creation of CSCS models on the instrument and the functionality of all screens and fields are similar to those for geoid models. Refer to " Requirement". The directory on the data storage device / internal memory for CSCS field files with the extension *.csc is \DATA\GPS\CSCS. Viva Series, Coordinate Systems 94 9 Jobs & Data - Create control data All changes made effect the control job. Access Create new point Methods for creating lines, arcs and polylines Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Create control data. Data.. displays the Data in the control job. This screen is similar to the New Point screen. Refer to "New Point, Coords page". Key Description Next To store the point and to remain in the screen. The point ID increments according to point ID template. Description of fields Field Option Description Select one of the following options to create a line/arc/polyline. Method 2 points and Line For lines/polylines. Uses two known points to - 2 points define the reference line. Pt, brng, dist, grade and Line Pt, brng, dist, grad For lines/polylines. Defines the reference line using a known point, a distance, an azimuth and the gradient of the line. A new point is created at the end of the line. Pt, brng, dist, ∆ht For lines/polylines. The same as Pt, brng, dist, and Line - Pt, grade/Line - Pt, brng, dist, grad but uses the brng, dist, ∆ht difference in height instead of the gradient. A new point is created at the end of the line. 3 points and Arc - For arcs/polylines. Defines the reference arc using 3 points three known points. 2 points/radius and Arc - 2 points/radius Create new line/arc For arcs/polylines. Defines the reference arc with two known points and a known radius. For all point fields, the MapView interactive display can be used to select the desired point. Key Description Store To store the line/arc to the control job. Next To store the line/arc and to remain in the screen. The line ID increments according to line ID template. Survy.. To manually measure a point. Available when a point field is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual line ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running line ID according to the ID template. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Create control data 95 Description of fields Field Option Description Line ID Editable field The name of the new line. The configured ID template for lines is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: • To start a new sequence of line IDs, type over the line ID. • For an individual name independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the line from the start point. ∆ height Editable field The difference in height from the start point to the end point of the line. End point Selectable list The last point forming the line. Grade Editable field The gradient of the line from the start point to the end point of the line. Horiz distance Editable field Line length Display only The horizontal grid distance from the start point to the end point of the line. For lines: The horizontal grid distance between the two points of the line. If the distance cannot be calculated, ----- is displayed. For arcs. The horizontal grid distance along the arc between the points. If the distance cannot be calculated, ----- is displayed. Radius Editable field The radius of the arc. Second point Selectable list The medium point forming the arc. Start point Selectable list The first point forming the line. Point ID Editable field The end point of the defined line. Available for creating a line with Method:Pt, brng, dist, ∆ht. Next step Page changes to the Code page. Refer to "New Line, Code page". Create new polyline - Segment by segment Step Description 1. In Create New Polyline select Segment by segment. 2. Select the method to use for the first segment. Refer to "Methods for creating lines, arcs and polylines" for a description of methods. 3. Type in the values for the first segment. Refer to "Create new line/arc" for a description of the input fields. 4. Next to store the segment. 5. Repeat step 2. to 4. until all segments are entered. 6. Finish to store the polyline. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Create control data 96 Create new polyline - Enter point IDs In Create New Polyline select Enter point IDs. Key Description Store To store the line to the control job. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access Screen & Audio Settings and change the text input. Available when Points in line is highlighted. Refer to "29.3 Screen & audio". Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual line ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running line ID according to the ID template. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Line ID Editable field The name of the new line. The configured ID template for lines is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: • To start a new sequence of line IDs, type over the line ID. • For an individual name independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Points in line Editable field Enter a list of points from the control job and characters to define the line. . Entering a dot between the points adds point-bypoint to the polyline. Example: Entering 1.3.5 creates a polyline with the points 1, 3 and 5 in that order. - Entering a minus between the points adds all points between the two points to the polyline, according to the point ID ordering. Example: Entering 1-5 creates a polyline with all points between 1 and 5. This can only be used with numeric point IDs. Line length () Entering () creates an arc between the points which are outside () through the point which is inside (). Example: Entering 1(3)5 creates a 3-point arc from 1 to 5 through 3 as the arc mid point. Display only The calculated 2D line length according to the selected points. Units according to distance in regional settings. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Create control data The line length is shown in the unit configured in Regional Settings, Distance page. 97 Extend existing polyline Step Description 1. In Line to extend select the line to extend. 2. OK. 3. Continue as if creating a new polyline. Refer to "Create new polyline Segment by segment". Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Create control data 98 10 Jobs & Data - Import data 10.1 Overview Description The data to import must be stored on the data storage device or in the internal memory. Data can be imported to a job • on the data storage device. • on the internal memory. Import formats Format Characteristic Description ASCII Import variables Point ID, grid coordinates, thematical codes. No free codes, no attributes. Format definition Free format. Use and order of variables and delimiter can be defined during import. Units As currently configured on the instrument Height Orthometric or ellipsoidal Specialities Local heights but no coordi- Points are imported without coordinates nates in file but with local height and code if available. Coordinates but no heights Points are imported without height but in file with coordinates and code if available. GSI8 GSI16 No coordinates or heights in file No import No point IDs in file No import Import variables Point ID (WI 11), local coordinates (WI 81, WI 82, WI 83), thematical codes (WI 71). No free codes, no attributes. Example for GSI8: 110014+00001448 81..01+00001363 82..01-00007748 83..01-00000000 71....+000sheep Format definition Fixed format. Easting and Northing can be switched during import. Units As defined in the GSI file Heights Orthometric or ellipsoidal Specialities Local heights but no coordi- Points are imported without coordinates nates in file but with local height and code if available. Coordinates but no heights Points are imported without height but in file with coordinates and code if available. DXF No coordinates or heights in file No import No point IDs in file No import Import variables Block, point, line, arc, polyline. Local coordinates. No free codes, no attributes. Format definition Fixed format (X/Y/Z). Units Not predefined. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 99 Format Characteristic Description Heights Z value imported as orthometric. Specialities No coordinates or heights in file No import MxGenio - - LandXML - - DTM data Format definition DXF file containing DTM data Checks Points are always imported with the class Ctrl and a coordinate quality of -----. Refer to "Appendix J Glossary". While importing points to a job, checks are performed against point ID, class and coding of points already existing in the job. 10.2 Importing Data in ASCII/GSI Format Requirements At least one ASCII file with any file extension, is stored in the \DATA or \GSI directory of the data storage device. Do not remove the data storage device while importing the data. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import ASCII data. Import ASCII Data Key Description OK To import the data. Config.. To define the format of the data to be imported. View To view the file from which data will be imported. Fn Hts.. To define how heights and the Easting are imported. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description From Selectable list Defines from which storage device the data are imported. Data type to import Selectable list Defines if ASCII or GSI data are imported. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 100 Field Option Description From file Selectable list For Data type to import: ASCII data: All files in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. For Data type to import: GSI data: All files with extension *.gsi in the \GSI directory on the data storage device can be selected. Header lines Selectable list This option allows up to ten header lines which can exist in an ASCII file to be skipped. Select the number of header lines. To job Selectable list Available when Create new job on import is not checked. Choosing a job as destination for import makes this job the working job. Editable field Available when Create new job on import is checked. The name of the new job. Create new job Check box on import When this box is checked and the file from which the data should be imported is selected the To job field displayes a suggested jobname. The suggested jobname is the name of the file without the extension. Create new job Selectable list as The new job can wither be a working job or a control job. Device Selectable list The device on which the new job will be stored. Next step Config.. accesses, depending on selection for Data type to import, either Configuration or Configuration (GSI). Configuration Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. Default To recall the default import settings. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Delimiter Selectable list The separator between the import variables. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 101 Field Option Description Point ID posi- None (not for Select the positions of the particular variables. An tion, Easting Point ID position) example is shown at the bottom of the screen. position, and from 1 to 20 Northing position, Height position and Code position Available for Delimiter: Space. Multiple spaces between data Number of lines/pt Yes For space delimited data having multiple spaces between the variables. No For space delimited data having one space between the variables. Selectable list Available for Delimiter: Line feed. The number of lines used to describe each point. Next step Configuration (GSI) Step Description 1. OK leads back to Import ASCII Data. 2. Fn Hts.. to access Define Ht Type & Easting Import. Description of fields Field Option Description Switch WI81/WI82 Yes or No All WI 81 data, normally Easting, is imported as Northing and all WI 82 data, normally Northing, is imported as Easting. This coordinate switch is necessary for “left handed” coordinate systems. Definition of feet Selectable list The type of feet used in the GSI file. Next step Define Ht Type & Easting Import Step Description 1. OK leads back to Import ASCII Data. 2. Fn Hts.. to access Define Ht Type & Easting Import. Description of fields Field Option Description Import as Selectable list The height type for the imported data. Easting Selectable list The Easting can be imported as written in the ASCII file or it can be multiplied by -1. This change is required by some coordinate systems. OK leads back to Import ASCII Data. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 102 10.3 Importing Data in LandXML Format Requirements At least one file in LandXML format with the file extension *.xml has to be stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device. The file can contain points, lines, areas, alignments (Road/Rail/Tunnel jobs) and DTM’s/PLA’s. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import XML data. Import XML Data Key Description OK To import the data. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description From Selectable list Defines from which storage device the data are imported. From file Selectable list All files with extension *.xml in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. Import points, Check box lines, areas, coord systems & point codes When this box is checked, points, lines and areas are imported and a job can be selected. Import alignments Check box When this box is checked, alignments are imported and a job can be selected. Import DTM Check box When this box is checked, DTM’s are imported and a new DTM job is created which can be selected. Next step OK start the import. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 103 10.4 Importing Alignment Data Requirements The requirements depend on the file type: • For MxGenio: At least one file in MxGenio format with the file extension *.txt is stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device. • For LandXML and Terramodel: At least one file in LandXML format with the file extension *.xml is stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device. • For DXF: At least one file in DXF format with the file extension *.dxf is stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device. • For Carlson: At least one file in Carlson format with the file extension *.cl is stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import alignment data. Import Alignment Data Key Description OK To import the data. Config.. To define the format of the data to be imported. Available for Data type to import: MX Genio, Data type to import: DXF and Data type to import: Carlson. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Data type to import Selectable list Defines if MX Genio, LandXML, DXF, Terramodel or Carlson data are imported. From file Selectable list For Data type to import: MX Genio: All files with the extension *.txt in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. For Data type to import: LandXML: All files with the extension *.xml in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. For cross section-based LandXML data, vertex connection definitions are mandatory. For Data type to import: DXF: All files with extension *.dxf in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 104 Field Option Description For Data type to import: Terramodel: A Terramodel *.xml file in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. The file must contain the centreline. For Data type to import: Carlson: All Carlson centreline files with the extension *.cl in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. Section file Selectable list For Data type to import: Terramodel: All ASCII cross-section files with the extension *.txt in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. For Data type to import: Carlson: All Carlson cross-section files with the extension *.sct in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. Job type Road and Rail To road job or Selectable list To rail job Configuration The type of job the data are converted to. When importing data, a new/empty rail or road job must be created for the data to be stored in. This screen is available for Data type to import: MX Genio, Data type to import: DXF and Data type to import: Carlson. Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description File linear units Selectable list The units used in the file to import. Line prefix Editable field Available for Data type to import: DXF. The prefix to be used. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data Line prefix can not be defined for Carlson data. 105 Next step Import MX Genio Data, for Road jobs Step Description 1. OK leads back to Import Alignment Data. 2. OK opens, depending on the selections made, a screen for the line, layer or track selection. Key Description OK To start the import. Centre To set the highlighted line as centreline. Use To set Yes or No in the Use column for excluding/including the highlighted line from/to import. Fn Quit To exit the application. Line selection is also possible on the Map page. IF THEN a single line is to be selected tap on the line. multiple lines are to be selected the context menu is to be activated click the icon, drag the stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to make a rectangular area. hold down the supplied stylus anywhere on the map for 0.5 second. Refer to "37.6 Context Menu". To deselect all objects for import, select Clear selected object. Description of columns Column Description Line name Displays the name of all the lines in the layer. CL Shows CL for the line selected as centreline. Use For Yes: The selected line is used for the import. For No: The selected line is not used for the import. Next step OK start the import. Define Track Design, MxGenio for Rail jobs For MxGenio, only single track Rail jobs can be created. Key Description OK To start the import. Ch CL To select/deselect the highlighted line as external chainage centreline. The selection is optional. T. CL To select/deselect the highlighted line as track centreline. The selection is mandatory. Rail L To select/deselect the highlighted line as left rail. The selection is optional. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 106 Key Description Rail R To select/deselect the highlighted line as right rail. The selection is optional. Fn Quit To exit the application. Line selection/deselection is also possible on the Map page. IF THEN a single line is to be selected/deselected tap on the line. the context menu is to be activated hold down the supplied stylus anywhere on the map for 0.5 second. Refer to "37.6 Context Menu". Description of columns Column Description Line name Displays the name of all the lines. Use as Displays a line selected as external chainage centreline, track centreline, left rail or right rail. Next step OK start the import. Select Layers to Import, for DXF Road/Rail data, LandXML Road/Raildata, Terramodel Road data and Carlson Roaddata Key Description OK To start the import. Edit.. • For Road: To define the centerline and to turn lines on and off for the highlighted layer. • For Rail: To define the external chainage centreline (optional), to define the track centerline (mandatory), to define the left rail (optional) and to define the right rail (optional). By default, the longest stringline is set as the centreline. For DXF and LandXML data (Road and Rail), line selection, per layer, is also possible in Edit Layer, Map page. • To select a single line, tap on the line. • For Road: To select multiple lines, click the icon, drag the stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to make a rectangular area. • To activate the context menu, hold down the supplied stylus anywhere on the map for 0.5 second. Refer to "37.6 Context Menu". Use To set Yes or No in the Use column for excluding/including the highlighted line from/to import. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Layer name Displays the name of all layers available for importing. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 107 Column Description Use For Yes: The selected layer is used for the import. For No: The selected layer is not used for the import. Next step OK start the import. 10.5 Importing Data in DXF Format Requirements At least one file in DXF format with the file extension *.dxf has to be stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device. Do not remove the data storage device while importing the data. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import DXF data. Import DXF Data Key Description OK To import the data. Config.. To define the format of the data to be imported. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description From Selectable list Defines from which storage device the data are imported. From file Selectable list All files with extension *.dxf in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. To job Selectable list Choosing a job as destination for import makes this job the working job. Next step Config.. accesses Configuration. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 108 Configuration Description of fields Field Option Description Block prefix Editable field Optional prefix to imported blocks. Point prefix Editable field Optional prefix to imported points. Line prefix Editable field Optional prefix to imported lines. File units Selectable list Choosing the unit for the DXF data to be imported. Create points Check box at the vertices of lines Option if points will be created at vertices of the imported line/arc/polyline elements. Convert white Check box elements Option if white coloured elements will be converted to black coloured elements. Height to exclude Selectable list Apply height Check box to 2D CAD data on import Height to apply Editable field Height values inside the DXF file are considered invalid and will not be converted. When this box is checked, a height can be defined which is then applied to all imported 2D CAD points. Available when Apply height to 2D CAD data on import is checked. The height to apply to 2D CAD points. Next step OK leads back to Import DXF Data. 10.6 Importing DTM Data Requirements • At least one file in DXF format with the file extension *.dxf has to be stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device. • The DXF file must contain a 3D face layer. Do not remove the data storage device while importing the data. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import DTM data. Import DTM data Key Description OK To import the data. Config.. To define the linear units of the data to be imported. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 109 Description of fields Field Option Description From Selectable list Defines from which storage device the data are imported. From dxf file Selectable list All files with extension *.dxf in the \DATA directory on the data storage device can be selected. To job Selectable list Choosing a job as destination for import makes this job the DTM job. Device Selectable list Defines to which storage device the data are imported. Next step Config.. accesses Configuration. Configuration Description of fields Field Option Description File linear units Selectable list Choosing the unit for the DXF data to be imported. Next step OK leads back to Import DXF Data. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Import data 110 11 Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 11.1 Overview Description Data can be exported • to a file on the data storage device. • to a file on the internal memory. Export format Format Characteristic Description ASCII Export variables Point ID, grid coordinates, thematical codes, code description, up to four attributes and linework. No free codes. Format definition Free format. Use and order of variables and delimiter can be defined during export. Units As currently configured on the instrument Height Orthometric or ellipsoidal Export variables Refer to the online help of LGO. Format definition Composed individually as format file using LGO. Refer to the online help of LGO for information on creating format files. Units Defined within the format file. Coordinate conversion All coordinate types are supported. Height All height types are supported. If the desired height cannot be computed, the default value for the missing variable is output. Custom Specialities: DXF Points in file outside of CSCS model If the variable is missing, the default value is output. Points in file outside of geoid model If the variable is missing, or a geoid separation is available, the default value is output. Coordinate conversion All points are converted to local grid position using the coordinate system. Height Orthometric height and ellipsoidal height are supported. Specialities: LandXML Points in file outside of CSCS model Points outside of CSCS model are not exported. Points in file outside of geoid model The ellipsoidal height is exported. Coordinate conversion All points are converted to local grid position using the coordinate system. Height Orthometric height and ellipsoidal height are supported. Specialities: Points in file outside of CSCS model Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data LocalGrid position of the points outside of CSCS model is not exported. 111 Format Characteristic Description Points in file outside of geoid model The ellipsoidal height is exported. FBK/RAW5/ Coordinate conversion RAW All points are converted to local grid position using the coordinate system. Height If a geoid model exists, then orthometric height is supported, otherwise ellipsoidal height is exported. Units Metre, US Ft or Int Feet, Gons, Dec Deg, DMS 11.2 Exporting Data from a Job to an ASCII Format Description The settings on this screen define the data that is converted and exported and what format is used. Data is exported from the selected job. Currently active view, filter and sort settings are applied. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export ASCII data. Export ASCII Data Key Description OK To select the highlighted format file. Config.. To define the format of the data to be exported. Filter.. To define the order in which points, lines and areas are exported as well as which points are exported. CrdSys. To update the coordinate system in which the coordinates are exported. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data are saved to. Folder Selectable list Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data For Export to: Internal memory the data is always exported to the \DATA directory. The data can be exported to the \DATA or the root directory or to the folder where the selected job is located. 112 Field Option Description Job Selectable list To select the job to export. Coord system Display only Output file to write Editable field The coordinate system currently attached to the selected job. The name of the file to which the data will be exported. Next step Config.. accesses Configuration. Configuration Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. Default To recall the default import settings. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Delimiter Selectable list The separator between the import variables. 1st position to None, Point ID, Select the variable of the particular positions. An 8th position Easting, example is shown on the Export ASCII Data Northing, Eleva- screen. tion, Code, Code information, Code & code info, Description, Attribute 1 to Attribute 4 and Linework Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 113 11.3 Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom Format Description The settings on this screen define the data that is converted and exported and what format is used. Data is exported from the selected job. Currently active view, filter and sort settings are applied. Requirements At least one format file was created using LGO and transferred to the internal memory. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export custom data. Export Custom Data Key Description OK To select the highlighted format file. Config.. To configure the default extension to be used. Filter.. To define the order in which points, lines and areas are exported as well as which points are exported. CrdSys. To update the coordinate system in which the coordinates are exported. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data are saved to. For Export to: Internal memory the data is always exported to the \DATA directory. Folder Selectable list Available for Export to: CF card, Export to: SD card and Export to: USB. The data can be exported to the \DATA, the \GSI or the root directory or to the folder where the selected job is located. Data must be stored to the \GSI directory to be read in a TPS instrument. Job Selectable list To select the job to export. Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the selected job. Format file to use Selectable list The format files currently available in the internal memory. Output file to write Editable field The name of the file to which the data will be exported. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 114 11.4 Exporting Data in DXF Format General Data can be exported to a DXF file in a data storage device or the internal memory. Do not remove the data storage device while exporting the data. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export DXF Data. Export DXF data Key Description OK To accept the settings. Config.. To define what is exported. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Folder Selectable list Defines if the data is exported to the \DATA directory or to the folder where the selected job is located. Export to Selectable list Available for Folder: Data. Defines which data storage device the data is exported to. Display only Available for Folder: Same as job. Displays the data storage device of the selected Job. Selectable list To select the job to export. Job Coord system Display only File name Editable field The coordinate system currently attached to the selected job. The name of the file to which the data will be exported. Next step Config.. goes to Configuration, Export page. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 115 Configuration, Export page Key Description OK To export the data. Filter.. To define the order in which points, lines and areas are exported as well as which points are exported. Refer to "6.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Points Check box When this box is checked, points are exported. Lines Check box When this box is checked, lines are exported. Areas Check box When this box is checked, areas are exported. Export images Check box When this box is checked, images are exported. Next step Page changes to the DXF page. Configuration, DXF page For information on camera and images refer to "33.6 Exporting Images". Description of fields Field Option Export lines & Selectable list areas Description Defines if lines and areas are exported as Line or Polyline entities. Symbol size Editable field Defines the size used for creation of the LGO symbols. Dimensions Selectable list Defines if the data is exported as 2D or 3D. Export to DXF Selectable list layer Export LGO symbols Check box Defines the DXF layer. When this box is checked, the relevant symbols for LGO are also exported. Next step Page changes to the Labels page. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 116 Configuration, Labels page Key Description OK To accept the settings. Edit.. To define if the label is exported, its colour, the number of decimal places to use and what layer or block it is exported to. More To display information about the layer name, the colour and the decimals. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Label The name of the label. Export Shows if the label is exported or not. Layer name The name of the layer that is exported which can be: • Name of a user-defined layer If the label is exported to a user-defined layer. • Same layer as point If the label is exported to the same layer as the point symbol. • Block with point If the label is exported to a block with the point symbol. • ----The label is not exported. Colour The colour of the label. Decimals The number of decimals used. Next step Edit.. access Labels. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 117 Labels Description of fields Field Option Description First field on screen Check box When this box is checked, the chosen label types are exported. All other fields on the screen are active and can be edited. Colour Selectable list Defines the colour for the label. Decimals From 0 to 4 Available for the labels Coordinates and Height. Defines the number of decimal places for the label. Export to User defined The label is exported to a user defined layer. Same layer as point The label is exported to the layer which the point symbols are exported to. Block with point The label is exported to a block with the point symbol and all other labels which are also set to be exported to Block with point. Only one block is created for a point and there can be one or more labels in this block. Layer name Selectable list Available for Layer name: User defined is checked. The name of the layer. Export code descriptions Check box Available when Point Code is highlighted in Configuration, Labels page. Defines if the code descriptions are exported with the point code. Export attribute names Check box Available when Attribute is highlighted in Configuration, Labels page. Defines if the attribute names are exported with the attribute values. Next step OK returns to Configuration. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 118 11.5 Exporting Data in XML Format General Data can be exported to a XML file in the. • \DATA directory or • same directory as the job is in on the • data storage device or • internal memory. Do not remove the data storage device while exporting the data. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export XML Data. Export XML Data Key Description OK To export the data. Config.. To define what is exported. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data are saved to. Folder Selectable list The data can be exported to the \DATA directory or to the folder where the selected job is located. Job type Points/lines/area The type of job to be exported. To use this option, s, Road, Rail or select LandXML version: 1.2 and check Use Tunnel Hexagon XML extension in Configuration, XML page. Job Selectable list Coord system Display only File name Editable field To select the job to export. The selectable list depends on the setting for Job type. The coordinate system currently attached to the selected job. The name of the file to which the data will be exported. Next step Config.. accesses Configuration, Export page. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 119 Configuration, Export page Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. Filter.. To set the sort and filter settings for export. Refer to "6.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Points Check box When this box is checked, points are exported. Lines Check box When this box is checked, lines are exported. Areas Check box When this box is checked, areas are exported. Images Check box When this box is checked, all onboard, TPS and panoramic images are exported. TPS measure- Check box ments When this box is checked, TPS observations are exported. GPS measure- Check box ments When this box is checked, GPS observations are exported. Codes Check box When this box is checked, point codes, line codes and area codes are exported. Free codes Check box When this box is checked, the free code, free code description, free code group and the free code attributes, are all exported to the LandXML file associated to each exported point. Free code export works also when Use Hexagon XML extension is checked on the XML page. Application results Check box When this box is checked, all application results such as stakeout and reference line are exported. They are only exported when Use Hexagon XML extension is checked on the XML page. Next step Page changes to the XML page. For information on camera and images refer to "33.6 Exporting Images". Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 120 Configuration, XML page Description of fields Field Option Description Dimensions Selectable list Defines the dimension of the exported entities. LandXML version Selectable list Defines the LandXML version of the file exported file. Use Hexagon XML extension Check box Available for LandXML version: 1.2. When this box is checked, a job type can be selected for the export in the Export XML Data screen. 11.6 Exporting Data using Stylesheets Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export using stylesheets. Export Data Using Stylesheet Key Description OK To export the data. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Folder Selectable list The data can be exported to the \DATA directory or to the folder where the selected job is located. Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data is saved to. Job type Points/lines/area The type of job to be exported. s, Road, Rail or Tunnel Job Selectable list Coord system Display only To select the job to export. The coordinate system currently attached to the selected job. Stylesheet to use Selectable list The stylesheets currently available in the \CONVERT folder on the internal memory of the CS: My Device\Leica GeoSystems\SmartWorx Viva\Convert. Description: Display only A detailed description of the stylesheet. This information is entered by the user in a variable within the stylesheet. File name Editable field The name of the file to which the data will be exported. The file extension is defined by the user in a variable inside the stylesheet. Default is "txt" if the extension has not been defined. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 121 11.7 Exporting Data in FBK/RW5/RAW Format General Data can be exported to an AutoDesk FBK, TDS RAW, TDS RW5, Carlson RW5 or MicroSurvey RW5 file. The newly created file is stored in the \DATA directory of the data storage device or the internal memory. The formatted FBK files can be imported directly into Autodesk products. The created RW5 and RAW files can be processed with various survey office packages. Although the export operation converts any job to an FBK/RW5/RAW file, the figure creation is based on existing lines and areas present in the job. Point codes Each point collected should have a point code. IF you are creating THEN Autodesk FBK file Point codes are used to match the Description Keys in Autodesk LDT and Civil 3D to each position located. TDS RW5 file Point codes are used to generate raw linework in TDS Foresight. MicroSurvey RW5 file Point codes are used to match the Description Keys in MicroSurvey CAD to each position located. Line/Area ID IF you are creating THEN Autodesk FBK file The figure ID follows the user selection as defined in the configuration menu. TDS RW5 file The line and area IDs are not used when importing data into TDS Foresight. MicroSurvey RW5 file The line and area IDs are not used when importing data into MicroSurvey CAD 2005. Do not remove the data storage device while exporting the data. Access Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export FBK/RW5/RAW data. Export FBK/RW5/RAW data Key Description OK To export the data. Config.. To configure some format-specific options. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 122 Description of fields Field Option Description Export to Selectable list Defines where the exported data are saved to. Folder Display only The data can be exported to the \DATA directory or to the folder where the export job is located. Job Selectable list To select the job to export. Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the selected job. Data format Autodesk FBK, TDS RW5, TDS RAW, Carlson RW5 or MicroSurvey RW5 Ensure that this field is set properly. File name Editable field Default is the name of the selected Job. It can be changed. The extension designation (.FBK, .RW5 or .RAW) is added automatically. Next step Config.. to access the configuration screen. Configuration for FBK, General page Description of fields Field Option Use numerical Check box pt ID Description Available unless Data format: TDS RW5. Pt ID offset Editable field The point IDs are offset by this value. Use angle right Check box Define if angle right values are exported. Figure ID Selectable list Available for Data format: Autodesk FBK. For all other formats, the figure ID is set to point code only automatically. Next step Page changes to the Objects page. Configuration for FBK, Objects page Key Description OK To return to Export FBK/RW5/RAW data. Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 123 Key Description All To check all boxes at once. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description All fields Check box To include points from an application, check a box. Next step OK returns to Export FBK/RW5/RAW data. 11.8 Copy Data Between Jobs Description This chapter explains the process of copying data from one job to another. Access Important features: • Points are copied as defined by the point filter settings. • Points selected for copying can be viewed in a points listing. The point sort settings define the order of the points in the listing. The point filter settings define the points to be viewed in the listing. • Only points are copied - observation data is not copied. • When points are copied from one job to another: • the point codes and attached attributes are also copied. • the Class is retained. • the Sub class is retained. • the Source is changed to Copied Point. • the point coordinate quality is retained. • the Instrument Flag is retained. • the Date and Time is retained. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Copy data between jobs. Copy Data Between Jobs Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data 124 Key Description OK To copy a selection of points. Filter.. To define the point sort and/or point filter settings of points from the job. Refer to "6.6.1 Sorting and Filters for Points, Lines and Areas". Data.. To view, edit and delete points, lines and areas stored with the job. Points, lines and areas are shown on separate pages. Selected sort and filter settings apply. Refer to "6 Jobs & Data - Data". CrdSys. To select a different coordinate system. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description From job Selectable list Describes where the points are to be copied from. Coord system Display only To job Selectable list Viva Series, Jobs & Data - Export & copy data The coordinate system which is currently attached to the job. Describes where the points are to be copied to. 125 12 Instrument - TPS settings 12.1 Measure mode & target 12.1.1 Measure & Target Settings Description The settings on this screen define the active EDM Electronic Distance Measurement and ATR Automatic Target Recognition settings. Available options depend on the purchased model, for example with or without ATR. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Measure mode & target. Measure & Target Settings Description • This screen has two pages - the Survey page and the Setup page. • The Survey page and Setup page contain identical fields. • The settings made in the Survey page are used by all applications and all measurements taken outside of the Setup application. • The settings made in the Setup page are only used inside the Setup application. • Any changes made to the Measure & Target Settings, for example via icons or hotkeys, while the Setup application is active, only affect the Setup Measure & Target Settings. • Any changes made to the Measure & Target Settings, for example via icons or hotkeys, while the Setup application is not active, only affect the Survey Measure & Target Settings. • When entering the Setup application, the Setup Measure & Target Settings are active. • When leaving the Setup application, the Survey Measure & Target Settings are active. • Both Survey and Setup Measure & Target Settings are part of the working styles. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Test To access the Measurement Signal Test screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 126 Description of fields Field Option Description Measure Prism All fields are set to the last used options. The infrared EDM exists for all instrument types and allows to measure the distance to a prism or a tape. For Target aiming: Automatic or Target aiming: Lock this option is automatically set. Any surface To measure without reflector. Single Available for Measure: Prism. When a single measurement with high precision is required. Single (fast) Available only for Measure: Prism. When a single measurement is required but the time to survey must be minimised. The highest accuracy is of less importance. Measure mode Use this mode for example when performing, “typical” topographical surveys. Continuous When continuous distance measurements are required. Use this mode for example when continually checking the positions of a moving prism pole. Continuous+ Available for Measure: Prism. This is the measurement mode for the interpolation of angle measurements in prism LOCK continuous mode. In difference to normal continuous mode, where angle measurements are only assigned to certain distance measurements, Continuous+ will perform a linear interpolation between the previous and following angle measurement, based upon the timestamp of the EDM measurement. Using this interpolation procedure, a higher accuracy for all dynamic applications, for example machine guidance, is possible. Use this mode for example with machine control applications. Averaging Repeats measurements in standard measuring mode. The average distance of No. of distances and the standard deviation for the averaged distance are calculated. Use this mode for example when performing cadastral survey where rigid guidelines must be followed. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings Long range (>4km) Available only for Measure: Prism. When long distances (> 4 km) to prisms are needed. Use this mode for example for triangulation measurements. Long range avg Available for Measure: Prism. Whenever long distances (> 4 km) to prisms are needed but in addition, average values and standard deviations for multiple precise distance measurements are required. 127 Field Option Description Use this mode for example when performing triangulation measurements within a cadastral survey where rigid guidelines must be followed. Precise Available for Measure: Prism on TS50/TM50. Fine measuring mode for highest precision measurements with prisms. Available if Measure mode: Averaging or Measure mode: Long range avg. Input field for the maximum number of distances to be averaged from 2 to 999 distances. No. of distances Target Selectable list Target names as configured in the Targets screen. Leica constant Display only The additive constant as stored for the selected prism in the SmartWorx Viva software. Absolute constant Display only The true additive constant. Target aiming Manual Measurements are done without any automation. ATR search and/or ATR measurement are not performed. Automatic Positioning to static prisms. The ATR sensor is used for measurements to static prisms. If needed an ATR measurement or ATR search is performed after pressing Meas or Dist. Lock Unavailable for SmartStation/TS12 Lite. The instrument locks onto and follows the moving prism. The ATR sensor is used to follow moving prisms and to find prisms after loss of lock. Depending on Measure single or continuous measurements are performed pressing Meas or Dist. Good If weather conditions are normal, then select this mode. Rain & fog To increase the instrument measuring ability during suboptimal weather conditions. This mode is automatically deactivated when the instrument is turned off. Rain & fog always As for Rain & fog, however this mode stays active when the instrument is turned off. Visibility Sun & reflec- To increase the instrument measuring ability tions during incident solar radiation and reflections, for example safety vests. This mode has a considerabel influence on the range (restriction 100 150 m). This mode is automatically deactivated when the instrument is turned off. Sun & rflctns As for Sun & reflections, however this mode always stays active when the instrument is turned off. Allow lock in on the fly Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings Check box Available for Target aiming: Lock. For robotic instruments and the remote operation with CS10/CS15. 128 Field Option Description When this box is checked, the instrument locks to a prism as soon as it enters the ATR field of view when previously locked to a prism and target lock was lost. A power search helps to lock to shaking prisms. Works on all prisms and tape targets. Check box Available for Target aiming: Lock. For robotic instruments and the remote operation with TS15. When this box is checked, the performance improves for distances less than 20 m to the instrument. The instrument reacts faster to changes in prism speed and direction. Use precise target Check box aiming Available for the 0.5" instruments of TS50/TM50. When this check box is checked, ATR measurements with higher accuracy are performed. High dynamics at short range 12.1.2 Targets Description Each prism type has an absolute constant. Leica Geosystems prisms are predefined as defaults and can be selected. Additional prisms can be defined. Default targets Following default prisms are always available on the instrument: Product Name Name in list GRZ4, GRZ122 Leica 360° Prism Prism GMP111-0 Leica Mini 0 GRZ101 Leica Mini 360° Leica constant Absolute constant +23.1 mm -11.3 mm Prism 0.0 mm -34.4 mm Prism +30.0 mm -4.4 mm GMP101, GMP111 Leica Mini Prism Prism +17.5 mm -16.9 mm GZM29, GZM30, GZM31, CPR105 Leica Reflectve Tape Tape +34.4 mm 0.0 mm GPR1, GPR111, GPR113, GPR121, GPH1P Leica Round Prism Prism 0.0 mm -34.4 mm - Reflectorless RL +34.4 mm 0.0 mm Prism +28.1 mm -6.3 mm MPR122 Leica HDS Target For Machine Control purposes only! Access Type Open the selectable list for Target in Measure & Target Settings. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 129 Targets Key Description OK To select the highlighted target and to return to the previous screen. New.. To define a new target. Refer to "12.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target". Edit.. To edit the highlighted target. It is not possible to edit default targets. Refer to "12.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target". Delete To delete the highlighted target. It is not possible to delete default targets. More To display information about the additive constant, the target type and the creator of the target. Fn Default To recall previously deleted default targets and to reset default targets to the default settings. User-defined targets are not affected. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 12.1.3 Creating/Editing a Target Access In Targets, highlight a target. All constants are copied from this target. Press New.. or Edit... New Target Key Description Store To store the target. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A significant name for the new target. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 130 Field Option Description Type Prism, Tape or Undefined The type of target to be defined. Leica constant Editable field The additive constant as stored for the selected prism in the SmartWorx Viva software. Absolute constant Creator Editable field The true additive constant. The additive constant is always in mm. Editable field An additive constant of 0.0 mm has been defined for the Leica Geosystems standard targets GPR1, GPR111, etc. All entered or selected additive constant values are differences to this 0.0 mm based Leica Geosystems TPS prism system. The additive constants of non-Leica Geosystems prisms are often given in the true zero prism system. Use the following formula to convert the additive constant to the Leica Geosystems TPS prism system. This Leica constant must be entered into the Leica instrument. Formula: True zero constant - 34.4 mm = Leica constant. It is highly recommended to check the additive constant for non-Leica Geosystems prisms on a baseline with an appropriate procedure. A name of the creator or other comments can be entered. 12.2 Prism search settings Description The settings on this screen define • the size of search windows for prisms to be searched in. The prisms can be searched with PowerSearch in the PowerSearch window or with ATR in the Fine search window. • the behaviour of automatic prism search after the target is lost in lock mode. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Prism search settings. Prism Search Settings, Target prediction page Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 131 Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Default To recall the default settings. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Time limit for predicting target location From 1 s to 5s If the target is lost when Target aiming: Lock the path of the prism is predicted for the selected number of seconds. If no target found after prediction then Stop searching Perform no search after prediction. Start fine search Perform search after prediction with ATR in a dynamic Fine search window. Start PowerSearch Perform search after prediction with PowerSearch. Activate PowerSearch on the PowerSearch window page. Turn to last msd pt If the target is lost when Target aiming: Lock, then the instrument turns back to the last stored point. The field of view is disabled while the instrument is repositioning. Next step Page changes to the PowerSearch window page. Prism Search Settings, PowerSearch window page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. New.. To define new PowerSearch window. Centre To centre the PowerSearch window to the current position of the telescope. Show To position the telescope to corners of PowerSearch window. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 132 Description of fields Field Option Description Use PowerSearch window Check box If checked, PowerSearch searches in the defined window. Hz angle left, Hz angle Display only right, V angle up and V angle down The left, right, upper and lower boundaries of the PowerSearch window. Minimum range No limit and from Minimum distance of the search range 25 m to 175 m for the PS window to be defined. Maximum range From 25 m to 175 m and No limit Maximum distance of the search range for the PS window to be defined. Next step Page changes to the Fine search window page. Prism Search Settings, Fine search window page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Default To recall the default settings. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Width of Hz search Editable field Horizontal extent of window. Height of V search Editable field Vertical extent of window. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 133 12.3 Atmospheric corrections Description The settings on this screen define the atmospheric ppm and the refraction. For standard applications, the distance is corrected due to atmospheric influences. The geometrical correction and the projection distortions are set to 0.00. Heights are reduced with the standard refraction coefficient. Refer to the TS11 User Manual, the TS15 User Manual, the Leica TS12 Lite User Manual and the MS50/TS50/TM50 User Manual for information on calculations. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Atmospheric corrections. Atmospheric Corrections, Atmospheric ppm page The atmospheric distance corrections are derived from the dry air temperature, air pressure or elevation above mean sea level MSL, and the relative air humidity or wet bulb temperature. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn P<>E To change Pressure to Elev above MSL and back. Fn %<>T' To change Humidity to Temp wet-bulb and back. Fn ppm=0 To set Atmospheric ppm: 0.0. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Temperature Editable field Sets the temperature. Pressure or Elev above MSL Editable field Sets the atmospheric pressure or the elevation above mean sea level dependent on selection. Humidity or Temp Editable field wet-bulb Sets the relative air humidity or the wet bulb temperature dependent on selection. Atmospheric ppm Editable field The atmospheric ppm is either set or calculated or display only from the values in the previous fields. Next step Page changes to the Refraction page. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 134 Atmospheric Corrections, Refraction page The refraction correction is taken into account during the calculation of the height difference. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Default To recall the default settings. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Use refraction Check box coefficient correction Coefficient (k) Editable field Description If checked, refraction correction is applied to measurements. Refraction coefficient to be used for calculation. Next step Page changes to another page. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 135 12.4 Level bubble & compensator Description If raw data is to be displayed and recorded, the compensator and the horizontal correction can be deactivated. The graphical level bubble is displayed correctly for the situation when the first screen is aligned with two foot screws. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator. OR Tap / . Level Bubble & Compensator Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Intensity Scroll bar To adjust the intensity of the laser plummet. Tilt compensator On Vertical angles are relative to plumb line. The horizontal angle is corrected for the transversal tilt errors if Hz correction: On. Off Vertical angles are relative to vertical/standing axis. Always off The mode stays always deactivated. On The horizontal angles are corrected for the line of sight, tilting axis and if Tilt compensator: On transversal tilt errors. Off Horizontal angles are not corrected. Always off The mode stays always deactivated. Hz correction Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 136 12.5 Offsets & Quality Control Description Quality control The instrument can be configured to monitor sequentially stored measurements and to notify the user if the coordinates lie within a defined range of each other. If configured, the X,Y coordinates of a point being stored can be compared to the coordinates of the last previously stored point. If the difference is less than the defined position tolerance then a warning is shown. It can now be decided whether to store the point or not. If configured, backsight target points and resection target points which were measured during the setup procedure are then also checked in this manner. Offsets The offset values are applied to measured points. The Offset function allows offset points to be determined, for instance when the reflector cannot be set up directly on a point. Transverse, longitudinal and/or elevation offsets can be defined from the reflector position to the offset point. All of the displayed and recorded measurement data is in relation to the offset point. P2 d6 d1 d2 d3 P1 d5 P3 P0 TS_003 Access d4 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 Station Current position Offset point Offset point Offset cross left Offset cross right Offset length towards instrument Offset length away from instrument Offset height down Offset height up Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Offsets & Quality Control. Offsets & Quality Control, Target QC page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 137 Description of fields Field Option Description Check for repeated Check box measurements to same target If checked, target checking is activated. Editable field The position tolerance. The units are defined by User\System settings\Regional settings. Target tolerance Next step Page changes to the Target offsets page. If configured in a survey screen page, the offset values appear also in the survey screen page in Survey. Offsets & Quality Control, Target offsets page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Offst=0 To set all offsets to 0.000. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Offset mode Reset after storing The offset values are reset to 0.000 after a point is measured with Store or Meas. Permanent The offset values are applied to every measured point until reset or changed. Offset left/right Editable field Sets cross offset of target point, perpendicular to the line of sight. Offset in/out Editable field Sets length offset of target point, in the direction of the line of sight. Offset height Editable field Sets height offset of target point. Next step Page changes to another page. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 138 12.6 Lights / Lights & accessories Description The settings on this screen allow the lights on the instrument to be configured. For motorised instruments (TS15, TS12 Lite), the horizontal/vertical boundaries of a search window can be defined. Access For manual TPS instruments: Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Lights. For motorised TPS instruments: Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Lights & accessories. Instrument Lights This screen is available for TPS instruments or TS11. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Use the red laser pointer Check box If checked, the red laser of the reflectorless EDM is turned on. Use the instrument Check box guide lights (EGL) If checked, the Emitting Guide Light (EGL) is turned on. This field is only available if EGL is fitted. Intensity From 0 % to 100 % To adjust the EGL/Laser Guide intensity using the left and right arrow keys. Use the reticule light Check box If checked, the reticule illumination is turned on. Intensity From 0 % to 100 % To adjust the reticule illumination intensity using the left and right arrow keys. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 139 Lights & Accessories, Lights page This screen is available for motorised instruments. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Use laser guide Check box When this box is checked, either the GUS74 or the red laser guide can be activated. Use the laser guide Check box Available if the instrument has a GUS74. If checked, the GUS74 is turned on. Intensity From 0 % to 100 % To adjust the GUS74 intensity using the left and right arrow keys. Use the red laser pointer Check box If checked, the red laser of the reflectorless EDM is turned on. Use the reticule light Check box If checked, the reticule illumination is turned on. Intensity From 0 % to 100 % To adjust the reticule illumination intensity using the left and right arrow keys. Use the instrument Check box guide lights (EGL) From 0 % to 100 % Intensity If checked, the Emitting Guide Light (EGL) is turned on. This field is only available if EGL is fitted. To adjust the EGL/Laser Guide intensity using the left and right arrow keys. Next step Page changes to the Hz limit page. Lights & Accessories, Hz limit page This screen is available for motorised instruments. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. New.. To define new search window. Follow the instructions on the screen. Show To position the telescope to corners of the search window. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings 140 Description of fields Field Option Description Limit Hz moveCheck box ment of instrument When this box is checked, horizontal boundaries for the search window can be defined. Hz begin and Hz end The boundaries of the search window as horizontal angles where the search begins/ends. Editable field Next step Page changes to the V limit page. Lights & Accessories, V limit page This screen is available for motorised instruments. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. New.. To define new search window. Follow the instructions on the screen. Show To position the telescope to corners of the search window. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Limit V movement Check box of instrument Limit movement for When this box is checked, vertical boundaries for the search window can be defined. Selectable list Limits can be set for eyepiece and/or lens. V begin and V end Editable field Lights & Accessories, Battery & charging page Description The boundaries of the search window as vertical angles where the search begins/ends. For eyepiece and lens. This screen is available for MS50/TS50/TM50 on the CS when is connected to a MS50/TS50/TM50. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Determines the power source to be used when internal and external battery are attached at the same time. Main power source Internal battery Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings Description Select this setting if an internal battery and an external power source are attached but the internal battery must be used first. 141 Field Option Description External power Select this setting if: • an interal battery is attached but an external battery will be attached later. Then the external power source will used as power source. • an external power source and an internal battery is attached but the external power source must be used. Charge the internal Check box battery when external power is connected Viva Series, Instrument - TPS settings The internal battery is charged from the external power source, if attached. 142 13 Instrument - GPS settings 13.1 RTK rover wizard 13.1.1 Overview Description Using this wizard, the settings for a real-time rover behaviour are defined at one glance. These settings are stored in an RTK profile. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\RTK rover wizard. If RTK profiles exist, the wizard starts with the screen shown in this section. Otherwise, the wizard starts the process of creating a new RTK profile. In this case refer to "13.1.2 Creating a New RTK Profile". RTK rover wizard Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Next step IF you want to THEN create a new set of select Create a new profile, press Next and continue with settings "13.1.2 Creating a New RTK Profile". select a different set of settings select Load an existing profile, press Next and continue with "13.1.3 Loading an Existing RTK Profile". edit an existing set of settings select Edit an existing profile, press Next and continue with "13.1.4 Editing an Existing RTK Profile". Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 143 13.1.2 Creating a New RTK Profile RTK rover wizard, Enter a name for the new RTK profile. Type in the name and a description for the new set of settings. Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. 13.1.3 Loading an Existing RTK Profile RTK rover wizard, Choose an RTK profile. Select an existing RTK profile from the selectable list. Listed are profiles that match the instrument in use. Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Delete Pressing this key deletes the RTK profile currently shown in the selectable list. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 144 13.1.4 Editing an Existing RTK Profile RTK rover wizard, Choose an RTK profile. Select the RTK profile to be edited from the selectable list. Listed are profiles that match the instrument in use. Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Delete Pressing this key deletes the RTK profile currently shown in the selectable list. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Description of fields Field Option Create a copy Check box Description Creates a copy before the editing process starts. 13.2 Satellite tracking Description The settings on this screen define which satellite system, satellites and satellite signals are used by the instrument. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Satellite tracking. Satellite Tracking Settings, Tracking page Key Description OK To accept changes. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 145 Key Description Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description GPS L5 Check box Defines if the GPS L5 signal will be tracked. Glonass Check box Defines if GLONASS satellite signals are accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. Galileo Check box Defines if Galileo satellite signals are accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. BeiDou Check box Defines if BeiDou satellite signals are accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. Show message & Check box audio warning, when loss of lock occurs Activates an acoustic warning signal and a message given by the instrument when satellites are lost. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Satellite Tracking Settings, Advanced page Key Description OK To accept changes. Hlth.. Available for Satellite health: User defined. To configure the satellites used in the survey. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Cut-off angle Editable field Sets the elevation in degrees below which satellite signals are not recorded and are not shown to be tracked. Recommended settings: • For real-time: 10°. • For purely post-processing applications: 15°. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 146 Field Option Description DOP limit None, GDOP, HDOP, PDOP or VDOP If activated, the limit defined in Limiting value is checked. GPS positions are unavailable when the limit is exceeded. Limiting value Editable field The maximum acceptable DOP value. Available unless DOP limit: None. L2C tracking Automatic L2 signals which are flagged as unhealthy are not recorded or used for real-time computations. Always track L2C signals are always tracked. Sets the satellite tracking behaviour. Satellite health This setting is remembered when the instrument is turned off. It is stored as part of the configuration set. Automatic Incoming satellite signals are monitored by the instrument. Data from signals which are flagged as unhealthy is not recorded or used for real-time computations. User defined Satellites must manually be included/excluded from data recording and real-time computations with Hlth... Next step Hlth.. changes to Satellite Health. Satellite Health This screen consists of the GPS page, Glonass page and the Galileo page. The explanations given for the softkeys are valid for all pages. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Use To change between the options in the column User. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 147 Description of columns Column Option Description Satellite 01 to 32 The Pseudo Random Noise number (GPS, 1 to 32), the Slot ID (GLONASS, 1 to 24) or the Space Vehicle number (Galileo, 1 to 30) of the satellites. There is a prefix G for GPS satellites, a prefix R for GLONASS satellites and a prefix E for Galileo satellites. System RAM OK, N/A or Unhealthy Information on the satellite health taken from the almanac. N/A stands for not available. User Bad Excludes satellite from tracking. OK Includes satellite in tracking. Auto Automatic satellite tracking when satellite is healthy. Next steps Step Description 1. Page changes to the Glonass page and to the Galileo page, where GLONASS satellites and Galileo satellites used in the survey can be configured. 2. OK returns to Satellite Tracking. 3. OK returns to Main Menu. 13.3 Antenna heights 13.3.1 Rover Antenna Heights Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Antenna heights. Rover Antenna Heights This screen consists of two pages: • If a GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS14 is selected, then no pages are available. • If a GS05/GS06 is selected, then two page tabs are available - Internal and External. The internal settings are used when an external (connected by cable) antenna is NOT used. The external settings are used when an external (connected by cable) antenna is used. Key Description OK To return to the Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 148 Description of fields for the External page Field Option Description Rover antenna Selectable list Leica Geosystems antennas are predefined as default and can be selected from the list. Default antennas contain an elevation-dependent correction model. New antenna correction models can be set up and transferred to the instrument using LGO. Open the list to define or edit additional antennas. Refer to "14 Antenna Heights". Vertical offset Display only The vertical antenna offset for the selected antenna. Antenna height when measuring points Editable field Sets the default antenna height for the current working style. This height is then also the default antenna height during the use of applications. The antenna height can still be changed during a survey. The initial value depends on the selected antenna. Unavailable for SmartStation. The height is added in the Setup and GPS Survey application. Use offset for Check box moving antenna Offset Editable field When unchecked, the moving antenna height is considered the same as the default antenna height. When the check box Use offset for moving antenna is checked: Sets the default antenna height for auto points and for the moving part of a track when logging raw observations. 13.3.2 Antennas Description Listed are antennas in the instrument’s internal memory. Access Open the selectable list for Rover antenna in Rover Antenna Heights. Antennas Key Description OK To select the highlighted antenna and to return to the previous screen. New.. To define a new antenna. Refer to "13.3.3 Creating/Editing an Antenna". Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 149 Key Description Edit.. To edit the highlighted antenna. It is not possible to edit default antennas. Refer to "13.3.3 Creating/Editing an Antenna". Delete To delete the highlighted antenna. It is not possible to delete default antennas. Fn Default To recall previously deleted default antennas and to reset default antennas to the default settings. User-defined antennas are not affected. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 13.3.3 Creating/Editing an Antenna Access In Antennas, highlight an antenna. All offsets are copied from this antenna. Press New.. or Edit... New Antenna or Edit Antenna, General page Key Description Store To store the antenna. Clear To set the editable fields to 0. Available on the Parameters and the Advanced page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new antenna. Hz offset Editable field Horizontal offset of measurement reference point. Vertical offset Editable field Vertical offset of measurement reference point. L1 phase offset Editable field Offset of L1 phase centre. L2 phase offset Editable field Offset of L2 phase centre. Copy additional corrections Check box Allows additional corrections to be copied from the antenna which was highlighted before this screen was accessed. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 150 Next step Page changes to the IGS page. New Antenna or Edit Antenna, IGS page The combination of values typed in here provides a unique standardised ID for the antenna being used. Description of fields Field Option Description IGS name Editable field The International GPS/GNSS Service name of the antenna. Serial number Editable field The serial number of the antenna. Setup number Editable field The setup number of the antenna. Identifies the version number of the current calibration. Next step Store stores the new antenna. 13.4 Quality control Description The settings on this screen define the limits for coordinate quality accepted for point occupations. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Quality control. Quality Control, General page Key Description OK To accept changes. Param.. To configure the time interval after which a point occupation can be stopped automatically. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Automatically Check box stop point measurement Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings Description Activates a selectable list for the stop criteria. Stops the measurements automatically when the parameter defined for Stop criteria reaches 100 %. 151 Field Option Description Defines the method used for Automatically stop point measurement. The setting determines the computation and value to be shown in the survey screen mask and in the status screen. Parameters for the selected method are defined with Param... Stop criteria Accuracy or Posi- Available when working with real-time device. tions Records observations between pressing Meas and Stop. Recommended for normal real-time applications. Refer to the diagram below. Instantaneous Records the time tag when Meas is pressed. A coordinate is interpolated between the positions at the neighbouring two epochs to filter out effects of slight movement. Recommended when measuring positions of objects while the antenna is moving very fast. Example: Measuring the position of lampposts by driving in a car along the road and pressing Meas when the car is next to the lamppost. Refer to the diagram below. Stop & go indicator Available when raw data logging is configured. The occupation time is based on a user defined baseline length, the number of satellites and the GDOP. Time, Observations or Number of satellites Available when working without real-time device and when raw data are recorded for postprocessing. Automatically Check box store point Stores points automatically after stopping the point occupation. If Automatically stop point measurement and Automatically store point are checked, then points are recorded by pressing one button. Check quality Check box before storing If activated, the limit defined in Tolerance is checked before storing a point. A warning signal is given when the limit is exceeded. Check Position only, The type of coordinate quality to be checked Height only or before storing a point. Position & height Tolerance Editable field The maximum acceptable coordinate quality. Stop criteria: Accuracy or Positions b c a) Time in epochs a b) Meas pressed 1 GS_046 2 3 d Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 4 5 c) Stop pressed d) Post-processed coordinates computed by averaging resulting positions of epochs 2 and 3 152 Stop criteria: Immediately b 1 2 c 3 4 5 5 f 2 1 e GS_047 4 3 a) Time in epochs b) Meas pressed and point coordinates a interpolated based on epochs 2 and 3 c) Meas pressed and point coordinates interpolated based on epochs 4 and 5 d) Plan view d e) Meas pressed and point coordinates interpolated based on epochs 2 and 3 f) Meas pressed and point coordinates interpolated based on epochs 4 and 5 Next step IF parameters for Stop criteria THEN are not to be config- Page changes to the Advanced page. ured are to be configured Param.. changes to Parameters for Auto Stop or Real-Time Stop Criteria. Quality Control, Advanced page Description of fields Field Option Description Automatically start measuring point on entering survey No Starts point occupation when pressing Meas. Yes Starts point occupation automatically when entering the survey screen. All subsequent points must be occupied by pressing Meas. Timed Starts point occupation automatically at a certain time. Next step OK closes the screen. Parameters for Auto Stop The parameters shown on this screen depend on the setting for Stop criteria. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 153 Key Description OK To accept changes. Description of fields Field Option Time at point Editable fields Sets the required observation time for each point. Counting time starts when Meas is pressed. The instrument stops measuring when the set length of time is reached. Number of obs Editable fields Sets the required number of observations that are to be recorded at each point. Counting observations starts when Meas is pressed. The instrument stops measuring when the set number of observations is reached. At logging rate Display only 8+ satellites for, 7 Editable field satellites for, 6 satellites for, 5 satellites for and 4 satellites for Baseline length Description Displays the rate at which static raw observations are logged as configured. Sets the required observation time depending on the number of satellites available. Counting time starts when Meas is pressed. The instrument stops measuring when the set length of time for a certain number of satellites is reached. Should the number of available satellites change during observation, the observations already recorded will be taken into account. Selectable list Used for the calculation of the occupation time for Stop criteria: Stop & go. From 1.0 to Extend occupation time by factor 5.0 of The factor extends the point occupation time recommended by SmartWorx Viva. It directly influences the occupation time shown in Time at point on the Survey screen. Next step Step Description 1. OK closes the screen. 2. OK returns to the screen from where Parameters for Auto Stop was accessed. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 154 Observation time depending on the number of satellites available a d c b b b 6 5 4 e 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GS_048 a) b) c) d) e) Meas is pressed. Counting time starts. Observation is stopped. 40 % for six satellites. 30 % for five satellites. 30 % for four satellites. Thin line represents 6 satellites for: 3 min. Bold line represents 5 satellites for: 5 min. Dashed line represents 4 satellites for: 7 min. Real-Time Stop Criteria The parameters shown on this screen depend on the setting for Stop criteria. Key Description OK To accept changes. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Pos quality Editable field better than and Ht quality better than Sets the maximum position and height qualities for each point occupation. Calculating the qualities starts when Meas is pressed. The instrument stops measuring when the position and height qualities are both less than the configured values. Editable field Raw data is logged for a minimum number of positions even when the Pos quality better than and Ht quality better than is already less than the specified maximum. Positions Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 155 Field Option Description Position update Display only Displays the value for GPS position update rate as configured in Instrument\Instrument status info: Position. No. of positions Editable field Sets the number the positions which must be observed before the instrument stops measuring. Counting the number of positions starts when Meas is pressed. Next step OK closes the screen. 13.5 Raw data logging Description Logged raw observations are used for • static and kinematic operations. With these operations, raw data is always postprocessed in the office. Raw data must therefore be logged on both base and rover instruments. • real-time operations to check the work in the office by post-processing. OR to fill in gaps when a real-time position could not be calculated in the field, for example, due to problems with the real-time data reception from the reference station or the RTK network provider Observations must be logged on all instruments which will be used for postprocessing. The settings on this screen define the logging of raw observations. Access • The licence for raw data logging is required to log GNSS raw data on the GS, CS or TS instrument. • The licence for RINEX logging is required to log RINEX data on the GS or CS. RINEX data cannot be logged on the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite. The licence key can only be loaded from an SD card using the Webserver or myWorld@Leica Geosystems. Select Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Raw data logging. Raw data logging settings Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 156 Key Description OK To accept changes. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Log data for postprocessing Check box Activates raw data logging. Log data to Controller or GS sensor For GS10/GS14/GS15/GS25, data can either be logged to the field controller or to the GS. Controller For GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12 data can only be logged to the field controller. TS instrument or GS sensor For SmartStation, data can either be logged to the TS11/TS15 or to the GS14/GS15. Logging starts Selectable list Available for GS10/GS14/GS15/GS25 with Log data to: GS sensor. Data logging can start as soon as the instrument is turned on or only while in the Survey application. For GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12 data can only be logged with the Survey application. Log data when Static Raw observation logging during static intervals when occupying a point. The instrument has to be stationary. For SmartStation, this is the only option available. Static & kinematic Raw observation logging during static and moving intervals. For post-processed kinematic rover operations. Unavailable for SmartStation. Rate Kinematic Raw observation logging during moving intervals. For post-processed kinematic antenna operations. Unavailable for SmartStation. From 0.05s to 300.0s Rate at which raw observations are logged. For GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12 logging rates of 0.2s and slower are supported. Recommendations: Data type Selectable list • The maximum logging rate using Bluetooth on the field controller is 0.2 s. • For static operations with long baselines and over long time Rate: 15.0s or Rate: 30.0s. • For base stations for post-processed and realtime kinematic rovers, Rate at the base should be the same rate as at the rover. • For initialisation while static and occupying distinct points in kinematic chains Rate between 0.1s and 2.0s. Unavailable for SmartStation. Available for Log data to: GS sensor. Data can be logged in the Leica proprietary MDB format or in RINEX. For GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12, this field is available for Log data when: Static. Viva Series, Instrument - GPS settings 157 14 Antenna Heights 14.1 Overview Description The height of the GNSS antenna above a point consists of three components: • the vertical or slope height reading, • the vertical offset, • the vertical phase centre variations. For most operations, pre-configured standard settings in the instrument can be used. They automatically take the vertical phase centre variations into account. Vertical or slope height Only vertical antenna heights measured to the Mechanical Reference Plane are accepted. Measurements required This table is an overview of required measurements depending on antennas, setup and accessories. All former Leica antenna types are supported. IF the antenna is AND the accesso- AND the setup is THEN the measries are urements required are Leica antenna, for example GS15 standard Leica tripod or tripod short vertical height from height hook Leica antenna, for example GS15 standard Leica pole none. Value is 2.00 m as indicated on the pole Leica antenna, for example GS15 standard Leica pillar vertical height to the MRP. Leica antenna, for example GS15 non-Leica any • vertical height to the MRP. • possibly vertical offset. non-Leica antenna standard Leica OR non-Leica any • vertical height to the MRP. • possibly vertical offset. • phase centre variations. • horizontal offset if a slope height reading. Viva Series, Antenna Heights 158 Vertical phase centre variations For Leica antennas: Are handled automatically in the standard antenna records. For non-Leica antennas: Can be stored in a newly created antenna record. OR Antenna records including azimuth and elevationdependent corrections must be created using LGO or imported using the ANTEX format. The antenna calibrations to determine the phase centre variations of all Leica antennas were executed by Geo++® GmbH. 14.2 Mechanical Reference Planes, MRP General The Mechanical Reference Plane • is where the antenna heights are measured to. • is where the phase centre variations refer to. • varies for different antennas. GS15 GS_031 a a) The mechanical reference plane is the underside of the threaded metal insert. GS_127 a a) The mechanical reference plane is the underside of the thread. GS_032 a a) The mechanical reference plane is the underside of the threaded metal insert. GS08plus/GS12/ GS14 AS05/AS10 Viva Series, Antenna Heights 159 14.3 Determining Antenna Heights 14.3.1 Pillar Setup • One of the Leica standard antennas is used, for example GS15. All former Leica antenna types are supported. • Leica standard accessories are used. Pillar setup a b c d a) b) c) d) Mechanical reference plane Vertical phase centre offset for L1 Vertical phase centre offset for L2 Vertical height reading Vertical offset = 0 GS_033 Vertical height reading The vertical height reading is the height difference between the pillar benchmark and the mechanical reference plane of the antenna. Normally, it is determined indirectly by levelling. Determine the antenna height step-by-step Sometimes, it is difficult to measure to the MRP directly. Step Description 1. Determine the height difference between the pillar benchmark and a surface on the carrier. 2. Look up the height difference between this surface on the carrier and where the MRP of the antenna sits on the carrier. 3. Add the values determined in step 1. and 2., to get the vertical height reading. 4. For Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset is 0.00 m. Viva Series, Antenna Heights 160 40 mm 109 mm 36.5 mm 145.5 mm Carrier and adapter dimensions GS_038 GS_036 GRT146 carrier - Tripod setup 99.7 mm 36.5 mm 145.5 mm 9.3 mm GRT247 carrier, preferred for GS15 Tripod Short setup GS_037 GRT144 carrier with GAD31 screw-to-stub adapter - Tripod setup Viva Series, Antenna Heights 161 Next step • At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the instrument. • The vertical offset of 0.00 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a pillar setup and will automatically be taken into account. • Refer to Overview for the vertical phase centre variations. For carriers other than those carriers shown in the diagram above, the dimensions must be determined. Except for Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset must be measured. This value must be entered in the antenna setup record. 14.3.2 Tripod Setup • One of the Leica standard antennas is used, for example GS15. All former Leica antenna types are supported. • Leica standard accessories are used. Tripod setup a c b d e a) b) c) d) e) GS_034 Vertical height reading Determine the antenna height step-by-step Next step Mechanical reference plane Vertical phase centre offset for L1 Vertical phase centre offset for L2 Vertical offset Vertical height reading The vertical height reading is the height difference between the ground mark and the bottom end of the height hook. It is determined using the height hook. Step Description 1. Determine the vertical height reading using the height hook. 2. For Leica standard antennas plus accessories, the vertical offset is 0.36 m for a Tripod setup and 0.2545 m for a Tripod Short setup. • Determine the antenna type. • At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the instrument. • The vertical offset is stored in the antenna setup record for all tripod setups and will automatically be taken into account. It does not need to be entered. • Refer to Overview for the vertical phase centre variations. Viva Series, Antenna Heights 162 For other than the carriers shown in the diagram above, the dimensions must be determined, the vertical offset must be adapted and entered into a new antenna record. For other height measurement devices than the height hook, the dimensions must be determined and the vertical offset must be adapted. For other than Leica standard antennas, the vertical offset must be measured. It must be entered in the antenna setup record. 14.3.3 Pole Setup • One of the Leica standard antennas is used, for example GS15. All former Leica antenna types are supported. • Leica standard accessories are used. Pole setup a c b d a) b) c) d) GS_035 Mechanical reference plane Vertical phase centre offset for L1 Vertical phase centre offset for L2 Vertical height reading, 2.00 m for the fully extended Leica telescopic pole. Vertical offset = 0 Vertical height reading The vertical height reading is the height difference between the bottom end and the top end of the pole. Usually, this height difference is a fixed value. Next step • At the beginning of a survey, enter the vertical height reading into the instrument. A standard rover configuration with a standard antenna setup record for a pole setup uses the value of 2.00 m already as default. • The vertical offset of 0.00 m is stored in the antenna setup record for a pole setup and will automatically be taken into account. It does not need to be entered. • Refer to Overview for the vertical phase centre variations. For other than the Leica standard poles, the dimensions must be determined. For other than Leica standard antennas, the vertical offset must be measured. It must be entered in the antenna setup record. Viva Series, Antenna Heights 163 14.4 SmartStation Setup • For a SmartStation setup, select the SmartStation antenna in use. This configuration depends on both the used GS and the used TS instrument. The configuration will ensure the correct vertical offset is applied to the antenna heights. • For a SmartStation setup, the antenna height value in the GPS survey screen must equal the value for Instrument height. Instrument height is seen in the preceding Set Station Point. • Leica standard accessories are used. SmartStation setup a b c d e GS_078 Viva Series, Antenna Heights a) b) c) d) e) Mechanical reference plane Vertical phase centre offset for L1 Vertical phase centre offset for L2 Vertical offset Instrument height reading 164 15 Connections.. - GPS connection wizard 15.1 Starting the GPS Connection Wizard Description This chapter explains how the field controller can be connected with a GNSS antenna using a wizard. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\GPS connection wizard. GS Connection Wizard - Step 1 Key Description Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step IF connecting a THEN GS10/GS15/GS08plus/ GS12/GS25 refer to "15.2 Connection to GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS25". GS05/GS06 follow the instruction on the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - GPS connection wizard 165 15.2 Connection to GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS25 GS Connection Wizard - Step 2 Key Description Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Next changes to the next screen. GS Connection Wizard - Step 3 IF THEN connected via cable follow the instructions on the screen. connected via Bluetooth the screen shown depends on whether a Bluetooth GPS connection has previously been configured or not. This screen is displayed if a Bluetooth connection has previously been configured. Key Description Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Search To search for a different GPS instrument. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - GPS connection wizard 166 GS Connection Wizard - Step 3 This screen is displayed if a NO Bluetooth connection has previously been configured. Move the focus using the arrow keys or the stylus to select a Bluetooth device. Key Description Next To connect to the selected device and continue to the next screen. Search To search for a different total station. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - GPS connection wizard 167 16 Connections.. - TPS connection wizard 16.1 Starting the TPS Connection Wizard Description This chapter explains how the field controller can be connected with a total station using a wizard. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\TPS connection wizard. TPS Connection Wizard - Step 1 Key Description Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Manufacturer Selectable list The brand of the instrument. Model Selectable list The instrument model. The Leica models TC1000 and TC1100 are not supported. Connect using Cable, Bluetooth How the instrument is connected. The options or Internal radio available depend on the selection for Model. The CTR16 can be only used on the CS15. To connect a CS15 to a TS with RH16 or TCPS29 attached. Offline configuration is possible if a Bluetooth address is known. Radio cap (CTR16) Next step Next changes to the next screen. IF THEN connected via cable refer to Connection Using Cable. connected via Bluetooth refer to Connection Using Bluetooth. connected via internal radio refer to Connection Using Internal Radio. connected via CTR16 refer to "16.3 Connection Using Bluetooth". Viva Series, Connections.. - TPS connection wizard 168 16.2 Connection Using Cable Description The connection settings must be specified. TPS Connection Wizard - Step 2 Key Description Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Default To return the fields back to their default values. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Baud rate From 1200 to 115200 Frequency of data transfer from instrument to device in bits per second. Parity None, Even or Odd Error checksum at the end of a block of digital data. Data bits 6, 7 or 8 Number of bits in a block of digital data. Stop bit 1 or 2 Number of bits at the end of a block of digital data. Flow control None or RTS/CTS Activates hardware handshake. When the instrument/device is ready for data, it asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is ready to receive data. This line is read by the sender at the Clear To Send input, indicating it is clear to send the data. Next step Next and follow the instructions on the screen. 16.3 Connection Using Bluetooth Description The screen shown depends on whether a last used Bluetooth ID is available for the chosen instrument model. Viva Series, Connections.. - TPS connection wizard 169 TPS Connection Wizard - Step 2 This screen is displayed if the chosen instrument model has a previously used Bluetooth ID already stored. For a CTR16 connection, the last total station which was connected via RH16 or TCPS29 and CTR16 is displayed. Key Description Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Search To search for a different total station. For a CTR16 connection also: To check if the radio used for the connection was changed. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Follow the instructions on the screen. Total Station Connection - Step 2 This screen is displayed if the chosen instrument model has NO previous used Bluetooth ID already stored. Move the focus using the arrow keys or the stylus to select a Bluetooth device. Key Description Next To connect to the selected device and continue to the next screen. Search To search for a different total station. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - TPS connection wizard 170 16.4 Connection Using Internal Radio TPS Connection Wizard - Step 2 Description of fields Field Option Description Link number Editable field The assigned channel number. Set as Remote or Base The radio modules inside the field controller and the TPS instrument must be set to opposite settings. It is recommended to set the field controller to Remote and TPS instrument to Base. Next step Next and follow the instructions on the screen. 16.5 Settings required Connection To Leica Legacy and Third Party Total Stations Once you begin working with the CS always work on the controller! Do not touch the total station software, excluding turning the laser pointer, laser plummet or guide lights on/off for some models. Refer to "34.7 Connection to Other Total Stations" for supported functions. Before using any Leica Legacy or third party total station, please ensure that the following values are set on the TPS: Instrument Settings Leica Legacy total station 1. Total station ppm/scale: • Atmospheric ppm = 0 • Geometric ppm = 0 or scale factor = 1 These settings ensure that the correct coordinates are calculated at the CS. It is still possible to apply the relevant atmospheric and geometric ppm/scale factor values. These values must then be set on the CS. 2. Communication settings: • The communication settings on the TPS must match the default parameters for that particular instrument type as seen on the CS. • For TPS1000, TPS2000 and TPS1100 instruments: • set the communication mode to GSI • ensure the TPS is in the measurement screen when trying to connect. Third party total station 1. Total station ppm/scale: - Topcon • Atmospheric ppm = 0 • Geometric ppm = 0 or scale factor = 1 • Prism constant = 0 (non-motorised instruments only) • The vertical angle on the total station must be set to zenith for all Topcon instruments. • The angular unit on both the total station and controller must match These settings ensure that the correct coordinates are calculated at the CS. It is still possible to apply the relevant atmospheric and geometric ppm/scale factor values. These values must then be set on the CS. Viva Series, Connections.. - TPS connection wizard 171 Instrument Settings 2. Communication settings: • The communication settings on the TPS must match the default parameters for that particular instrument type as seen on the CS. • On motorised Topcon total stations, for example GTS800 and above, set the communication values through Prog\Ext. Link\Setting\RS232. • For non-motorised instruments ensure that the total station is in the survey measurement screen when trying to connect. 3. External Link mode • To connect to motorised Topcon total stations, for example GTS800 and above, set the external link mode through Prog\Ext. Link\Execute. 4. Required cable: • TDS DB9 Data Cable (148 SCGTSSOKTOP – Topcon/Sokkia) Third party total station 1. Total station ppm/scale: - Sokkia • Atmospheric ppm = 0 • Geometric ppm = 0 or scale factor = 1 • Prism constant = 0 • The vertical angle display setting must be the same on the CS and the total station These settings ensure that the correct coordinates are calculated at the CS. It is still possible to apply the relevant atmospheric and geometric ppm/scale factor values. These values must then be set on the CS. 2. Units: • For a Set 030R/220/010 instrument, the angle unit at the total station must be set to degrees, minutes, seconds. The angle setting at the CS does not matter. 3. Communication settings: • The communication settings on the TPS must match the default parameters for that particular instrument type as seen on the CS. • For all Sokkia instruments ensure the TPS is in the measurement screen when trying to connect. • On motorised Sokkia total stations, set additional total station communication values: Comms mode: RS232C, Checksum: No and Controller: 2 Way + Remote • For the Sokkia SRX set Tilt correction: No to have an uninterrupted connection. On the total station go to Settings\Obs. Condition\Tilt crn: No. 4. Required cable: • TDS DB9 Data Cable (148 SCGTSSOKTOP – Topcon/Sokkia) Viva Series, Connections.. - TPS connection wizard 172 Instrument Settings Third party total station 1. Total station ppm/scale: - Nikon • Atmospheric ppm = 0 • Geometric ppm = 0 or scale factor = 1 • Prism constant = 0 • The angular unit on both the total station and controller must match These settings ensure that the correct coordinates are calculated at the CS. It is still possible to apply the relevant atmospheric and geometric ppm/scale factor values. These values must then be set on the CS. 2. Communication settings: • The communication settings on the TPS must match the default parameters for that particular instrument type as seen on the CS. • For all Nikon instruments ensure the TPS is in the measurement screen when trying to connect. 3. Required cable: • TDS DB9 Data Cable (148 CNTG Nikon) Viva Series, Connections.. - TPS connection wizard 173 17 Connections.. - CS connection wizard 17.1 Starting the CS Connection Wizard Description This chapter explains how to configure a total station for remote controlled from the CS. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\CS connection wizard. CS Connection Wizard, Which software is running on the field controller? Key Description Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Next step Independent of the selection made, Next changes to a screen where the connection type must be selected. CS Connection Wizard, How do you want to connect to the field controller? Key Description Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Viva Series, Connections.. - CS connection wizard 174 Description of fields Field Option Description How the instrument is connected. Connect using Radio handle, Bluetooth or External radio When External radio is selected, choose the type of External radio in use. Cable For TS11/TS15: Serial cable connection. For MS50/TS50/TM50: USB cable connection. Select Cable for a USB cable connection. Use the cables GEV234 (Lemo - USB), GEV237 (Lemo Lemo) or GEV261 (combined RS232/USB cable). Cable RS232 Available on MS50/TS50/TM50 to configure serial connection. WLAN Available when A software other than SmartWorx Viva is checked in the previous screen. Requires configurations in WinCE. Next step Next changes to the next screen. IF THEN connected via RadioHandle Next changes to the next screen. The RadioHandle is detected automatically, if it is plugged onto the TS. The name of the RadioHandle is then displayed. If the RadioHandle is not plugged onto the TS, then select the RadioHandle which will be used. Press Next. The RH16 can only be connected to a CS15 equipped with a CTR16. connected via TCPS27/TCPS28 Select the TCPS connected and press Next. Refer to "17.2 Connection Using TCPS". connected via TCPS29 Select the TCPS connected. Further configurations are not required. connected via cable refer to "17.3 Connection Using Cable". a MS50/TS50/TM50 is the systems sets all the parameters to be able to connect connected via cable and to a CS via USB interface from port 1. SmartWorx Viva is running on the field controller a MS50/TS50/TM50 is • for a serial connection refer to "17.3 Connection Using connected via cable and a Cable". software other than • for a USB connection, the systems sets all the parameSmartWorx Viva is running ters to be able to connect to a CS via USB interface on the field controller from port 1. connected via Bluetooth Next changes to the next screen. The Bluetooth connection is established automatically. Press Finish. connected via WLAN enabled and configure WLAN within WinCE. Next changes to the next screen. Press Finish. Viva Series, Connections.. - CS connection wizard 175 17.2 Connection Using TCPS TPS Radio Communication This screen is valid for TCPS27 and TCPS28. The channel on which the TCPS broadcasts can be changed. Changing channels changes the frequency at which the TCPS operates. This may be necessary to enable multiple pairs of TCPS to work simultaneously in the same area without interferring with each other. Key Description OK To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Default To return the fields back to their default values. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Radio type Display only The type of protocol. Link number Editable field The assigned channel number. Set as Remote or Base The TCPS inside the field controller and the TS11/TS15 must be set to opposite settings. It is recommended to set the field controller to Remote and TS11/TS15 to Base. Next step OK and follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - CS connection wizard 176 17.3 Connection Using Cable CS Connection Wizard - Connect the cable between the total station & CS. Ensure same settings are made on the CS. Valid for TS11/TS15. Key Description Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Default To return the fields back to their default values. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Baud rate From 1200 to 115200 Frequency of data transfer from instrument to device in bits per second. Parity None, Even or Odd Error checksum at the end of a block of digital data. Data bits 6, 7 or 8 Number of bits in a block of digital data. Stop bit 1 or 2 Number of bits at the end of a block of digital data. Flow control None or RTS/CTS Activates hardware handshake. When the instrument/device is ready for data, it asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is ready to receive data. This line is read by the sender at the Clear To Send input, indicating it is clear to send the data. Next step Next and follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - CS connection wizard 177 18 Connections.. - Internet wizard Description This chapter explains how the field controller can be connected to the Internet using a wizard and without using RTK. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\Internet wizard. The screen displayed varies. IF AND THEN the Internet wizard is started for the first time a CS is used the Internet device can be connected to the • Internal 3.5G modem • Bluetooth mobile phone a TS11/TS15/TS12 the Internet device can be Lite/MS50/TS50/TM50 is connected to a Bluetooth used phone of type • GSM/GPRS/UMTS device • CDMA device the Internet connection is not connected configured • the Internet connection can be edited. • the connection can be started. the Internet connection is connected configured • the Internet connection can be edited. • the connection can be stopped. Next step Make a selection, press Next and follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - Internet wizard 178 19 Connections.. - All other connections 19.1 Accessing Configuration Connections Description The instrument has various connections which can be configured to be used with different ports and devices. The configuration varies depending on the individual application. Access For RTK rover, TPS, TS11/TS15 and MS50/TS50/TM50: • Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\All other connections. For RTK base: • Select Main Menu: Base connections\Connections..\All other connections. Connection Settings The screen gives an overview of all connections with the currently assigned port and device. For an RTK rover, this screen consists of the CS connections and the GS connections or TS connections page. For a GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12, this screen consists of only one page. Key Description OK To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Edit.. To configure the parameters related to the highlighted connection. Refer to the sections on each individual connection in this chapter. Cntrl.. Available for certain devices connected to certain connections. To configure additional parameters related to the highlighted device. For MS50/TS50/TM50: Available when the GeoCom connection is set to Cable (USB) and WLAN. To show the IP and the port for third party connections. Fn Conect and Available for a real-time connection configured to use an Internet Fn Disco connection. To connect/disconnect from the GPS reference data. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 179 19.2 CS Internet / GS Internet / TS Internet Description The Internet connection • allows accessing the Internet using the field controller (CS internal GSM) or the instrument plus a GPRS device. • can be used together with the real-time connection to receive real-time data from, for example, an Ntrip Caster via Internet communication. Refer to "36 NTRIP via Internet" for information about Ntrip. The settings on this screen define the port and parameters required for accessing the Internet. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight CS Internet. Edit... • In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight GS Internet. Edit... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, select GS Internet. Edit... For TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight CS Internet. Edit... For TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite: • In Connection Settings, highlight TS Internet. Edit... Internet Connection, Internet page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Search To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Available if CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are selected. Devce.. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Available if the Internet connection is activated. For Connect using: CS 3.5G modem, a special screen opens to edit the CS 3.5G modem settings. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Page To change to another page on this screen. Available if the Internet connection is activated. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 180 Description of fields Field Option Description Use Internet Check box connection on CS, Use Internet connection on GS or Use Internet connection on TS Activates the Internet connection. Connect using The ports available for connection to the Internet. CS 3.5G modem The internal GSM modem of the field controller. CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller. CS Bluetooth 1 The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which and CS Bluetooth will be used for the connection functionality. 2 CS 3.5G modem GS Port 1 For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box. For GS15: The red LEMO port. GS Port 2 For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box. For GS15: The black LEMO port. GS Port 3 For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box. For GS15: The port for the slot devices. TS Bluetooth 1 The Bluetooth ports on the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite and TS Bluetooth which will be used for the connection function2 ality. Device Display only Use user ID & Check box password for Internet connection User ID Editable field The name of the selected device. If checked, a user ID and a password can be typed in. Some providers ask for a user ID to allow connecting to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your provider if a user ID must be used. It is possible to show/hide the User ID. Password Editable field Some providers ask for a password to allow connecting to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your provider if a password is required. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Internet Connection, Advanced page Description of fields Field Option Description Use static IP address Check box In order to get access to the Internet, an IP address is required. This IP address identifies the instrument in the Internet. This option should only be checked if a static IP address is available for the instrument. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 181 Field Option Description The IP address to get access to the Internet is provided by the network provider permanently. Each time the instrument wants to access the Internet via the device the same IP address identifies the instrument. This behaviour is important if the instrument is used as a TCP/IP server. IP address Editable field Available if Use static IP address is checked. To set the IP address. Next step OK returns to the screen from where Internet Connection was accessed. 19.3 GPS Rover / Base Sensor Description To connect the field controller to the sensor (antenna) either on the base or on the rover side. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight GPS Rover. Edit... • Select Instrument\Connections..\GPS connection wizard. For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, select Base Sensor. Edit... • Select Instrument\Base connections\Connect to base sensor. GPS Rover Connection / Connect to Base Sensor Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. When changing the sensor type, SmartWorx Viva must be shutdown and re-started before the sensor can be used. Search To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Available for GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS14/GS25 with Connection using: Use Bluetooth. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 182 Description of fields Field Option Description Sensor Selectable list Select the attached model. Connect using Cable or Bluetooth GS08plus is only available if SmartWorx Viva LT is used on a CS10. How the instrument is connected. The options available depend on the selection for Sensor. The availability of the other fields depends on the selection made here. Last used rover Display only For GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS14/GS25: Available for RTK rover. The name of the selected Bluetooth device. Last used base Display only For GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS14/GS25: Available for RTK base. The name of the selected Bluetooth device. Bluetooth ID Display only For GS10/GS15/GS08plus/GS12/GS14/GS25: The ID of the selected Bluetooth device. 19.4 ASCII Input 19.4.1 Configuration of an ASCII Input Connection Description The ASCII Input connection receives ASCII messages from third-party devices such as depth sounders, barometers, digital cameras, pipe detectors, Geiger counters, etc. The ASCII messages are stored as annotations together with the next manually measured point and/or auto point. The settings on this screen define the port and the device to be used and the type of ASCII messages to be written to individual annotations. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight ASCII Input. Edit... For TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight ASCII Input. Edit... ASCII Input, ASCII input page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 183 Key Description Devce.. Available when Receive ASCII data via a device is checked. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Cmnd.. To configure a message to be sent through the configured port to the device. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Receive ASCII Check box data via a device Description Activates the ASCII input connection. Connect using CS Bluetooth 1 The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which and CS Bluetooth will be used for the connection functionality. 2 CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller. Device Display only The name of the device selected for ASCII input. End of message CR, LF or CR/LF The character to be used to identify the end of the incoming ASCII message. Next step Page changes to the Annotation 1/Annotation 2/Annotation 3/Annotation 4 page. ASCII Input, Annotation 1/ Annotation 2/ Annotation 3/ Annotation 4 page Description of fields Field Option Description Store ASCII data to this annotation Check box If checked, ASCII messages are recorded with the selected annotation. Message desc Editable field Message ID Display only The description for the ASCII message being received. This description is then displayed in other screens, for example in the status screen. The message ID to identify a particular ASCII message coming from the device. The message is then saved to the annotation. The following characters can be used as filter: ^ To accept strings starting with the subsequent characters. For example, ^1 accepts 12 but not 21. $ To accept strings ending with the preceding characters. For example, 1$ accepts 21 but not 12. . To accept any character except newline. [ ] To accept a set of characters. For example, [09] accepts all numbers. Any characters to accept strings that include the characters at any position. For example 1 accepts 1234, 4321 or 2134 but not 2345. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 184 Field Option Description Prefix '@ @' when writing Check box Stores the description in Message desc as prefix to the ASCII message. This prefix helps to more easily identify the annotations registered with a point. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. 19.4.2 Configuration of a Command to the Device Access For RTK rover: • In ASCII Input, ASCII input page, Fn Cmnd... Send Command to Device Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Send To send the command to the device. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Command Editable field A message to be sent to the device through the configured port when the survey or stakeout application is accessed. This functionality, for example, allows the device to be started remotely. The last used command that was entered is remembered as part of the active working style. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 185 19.5 GPS Hidden Pt Description Hidden point measurement devices are used for measuring to points which cannot be directly measured with GPS, for example house corners or trees. The measurements made with a hidden point measurement device are directly transferred to the instrument for the calculation of the coordinates of the hidden point. They can also be entered manually. The settings on this screen define the port, the device and estimated qualities to be used for the hidden point connection. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight GPS Hidden Pt. Edit... Hidden Point Measurement Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Offset.. To configure the height and external angle offsets. Search Available when a Bluetooth port and device is selected. To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Devce.. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Use a device Check box to measure hidden points Description To compute a hidden point with height. Activates the hidden point connection. If not checked, the measured values must be entered manually. Connect using CS Bluetooth 1 The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which and CS Bluetooth will be used for the connection functionality. 2 CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller. Device Display only The name of the selected hidden point device. Bluetooth ID Display only Available if CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are selected. The Bluetooth ID of the hidden point device. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 186 Field Option Description The method which is suggested first when starting the Survey Hidden Points application. Default method The distance and bearing from the known point to the hidden point are to be determined. An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which might not be known. The auxiliary point can be measured in the direction from the known point to the hidden point. Bearing & distance Using 2 bearings The bearings from the known points to the hidden point are to be determined. Auxiliary points help compute the bearings which might not be known. Auxiliary points can be measured in the direction from the known points to the hidden point. Using 2 distances The distances from the known points to the hidden points are to be determined. The location of the hidden point relative to the line between the two known points is to be defined. Chainage & offset The chainage from one known point along the line between the two known points must be determined. The offset of the hidden point to the line between the two known points must be determined. Set 2DCQ to Back brng & distance The distance and the bearing from the hidden point to the known point are to be determined. An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which might not be known. An auxiliary point can be measured in the direction from the hidden point to the known point. Editable field The estimated value for the position quality assigned to all hidden points. This value must be estimated because hidden point measurement devices do not output position qualities. Compute Check box height for hidden points Set 1DCQ to Select to compute a hidden point with height. Editable field Available when Compute height for hidden points is checked. The estimated value for the height quality assigned to all hidden points. Next step IF height and external angle/distance offsets THEN are not to be configured OK closes the screen and returns to the screen from where Hidden Point Measurement was accessed. are to be configured Offset... Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 187 Hidden Point Device Offsets Key Description OK To accept changes and to return to Hidden Point Measurement. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Distance offset Editable field The offset is automatically added to the measured distance. Available when Compute height for hidden points is checked in Hidden Point Measurement. Height offset None No height offsets are used. The result is the delta height between the centre of the device and the aimed point. Device height When measuring hidden points, the height of the hidden point measurement device can be typed in. This option should be used when the hidden point can be directly measured using the hidden point device. Device & target ht When measuring hidden points, the height of the hidden point measurement device as well as the target height can be typed in. This option should be used when the hidden point cannot be directly measured with a hidden point device, but a target point can be used to calculate the position. Device height Editable field Target height Editable field The height of the hidden point measurement device. This height is the distance from the ground to the centre of the device. The distance from the hidden point to the aimed point. Sets the default method for entering an angle offset. EAO is an offset angle between the North of the device being used and WGS 1984 geodetic North. EAOs are applied when measuring hidden points using a device capable of measuring azimuths. Angle offset None Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections No EAO value is applied to the azimuth measurement received from the hidden point measurement device. 188 Field Offset Option Description Permanent Applies a default value for the offset angle. The value is changeable. New for each point Offset angle values must be entered for each new hidden point. Editable field Available for Angle offset: Permanent. The default value for the offset angle. Next step Step Description 1. OK returns to Hidden Point Measurement. 2. OK returns to the screen from where Hidden Point Measurement was accessed. Diagram P1 d2 d3 b d1 a P2 d5 d4 P0 P1 P2 a b d1 d2 d3 d4 P0 GS_052 Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections d5 Known point Target point Hidden point Height of P0 Height of P2 = a + d1 + d4 - d3 Device height: height of hidden point measurement device above P0 Slope distance Device height: height of P1 above P2 Height difference between hidden point measurement device and P1 Horizontal distance 189 Distance offsets at hidden point measurement devices A Leica DISTO is shown as an example P0 d b c a a) b) c) d) P0 GS_053 Negative Distance offset Positive Distance offset Pole DISTO Hidden point 19.6 Export Job Description The Export Job connection allows data from a job to be exported from the instrument to another instrument. The settings on this screen define the port and the device to which the data will be exported. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, CS connections page, highlight Export Job. Edit... For TPS and TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite: • In Connection Settings highlight Export Job. Edit... Export Job Connection Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 190 Key Description Search Available when CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are selected. To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Devce.. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Export job to external device Check box Activates the connection. Connect using CS Bluetooth 1 / The Bluetooth ports on the field controller or the CS Bluetooth 2 or TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite which will be used for the TS Bluetooth 1 / connection functionality. TS Bluetooth 2 CS RS232 port or The RS232 port on the field controller or the Cable TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite. Radio handle Hotshoe connection for RadioHandle. This port is located on top of Communication side cover. Device Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port within the active working style. The device which is selected determines the availability of the next fields. Job Number Selectable list Available if the Device is a Leica instrument. Select a job number to assign to the job. Name Editable field Available if the Device is a Leica instrument. The name of the job. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 191 19.7 RTK Rover 19.7.1 Configuration of a Rover Real-Time Connection Description The real-time connection allows real-time related parameters to be configured. These parameters include defining the real-time messages and the base to be used. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight RTK Rover. Edit... RTK Rover Settings, General page The available fields and keys on this screen depend on the selected settings. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Search Available when connecting via Bluetooth. To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Devce.. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". For Connect using: CS 3.5G modem, a special screen opens to edit the CS 3.5G modem settings. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Receive RTK data Check box If checked, the rover real-time connection is activated. Connect using CS 3.5G modem The internal GSM modem of the field controller. CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller. Unavailable for GS08plus. CS Bluetooth 1 and CS Bluetooth 2 The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will be used for the connection functionality. CS Internet 1, The Internet ports on the field controller. If these CS Internet 2 and ports are not assigned to a specific connection, CS Internet 3 then these ports are additional remote ports. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 192 Field Option Description GS Port 1 For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box. For GS14/GS15: The red LEMO port. GS Port 2 For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box. For GS15: The black LEMO port. GS Port 3 For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box. For GS15: The slot for a device. GS Internet 1, The Internet ports on the GS10/GS14/GS15. If GS Internet 2 and these ports are not assigned to a specific connecGS Internet 3 tion, then these ports are additional remote ports. TS Bluetooth 1 and TS Bluetooth 2 The Bluetooth ports on the TPS which will be used for the connection functionality. TS Internet 1, The Internet ports on the TPS. If these ports are TS Internet 2 and not assigned to a specific connection, then these TS Internet 3 ports are additional remote ports. RTK device CS CGR radio The CGR10/CGR15 that can be attached to the CS. Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port within the active working style. The device which is selected determines the availability of the next fields. RTK data format If a mountpoint was selected from a downloaded source table during the use of the RTK connection wizard, then the RTK format which is used with the NTRIP mountpoint is displayed. Leica The proprietary Leica real-time GPS data format supporting GPS L1/L2 and GLONASS L1/ L2. This format is recommended when working exclusively with Leica instruments. Leica 4G The proprietary Leica real-time GNSS data format supporting GPS L1/ L2/ L5, GLONASS L1/ L2 and Galileo E1/E5a/E5b/Alt-BOC. This format is recommended when working exclusively with Leica instruments. CMR/CMR+ CMR and CMR+ are compacted formats used to broadcast data for third-party instruments. RTCM 18,19 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Uncorrected carrier phase and pseudorange. Message 3 is also generated. Use for real-time operations where the ambiguities will be resolved at the rover. Accuracy at the rover: 1 - 5 cm rms after a successful ambiguity resolution. RTCM v3 Use RTCM when rover units from a different manufacturer are to be used. Message according to RTCM version 3. A new standard format for transmission of Global Navigation Satellite System correction information. Higher efficiency than RTCM v2.x. Supports realtime services with significantly reduced bandwidth. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 193 Field Option Description Message types for real-time GNSS operation: • 1001: L1-only GPS real-time observables • 1002: Extended L1-only GPS real-time observables • 1003: L1 & L2 GPS real-time observables • 1004: Extended L1 & L2 GPS real-time observables • 1005: Stationary real-time base station Antenna Reference Point • 1006: Stationary real-time base station ARP with antenna height • 1007: Antenna descriptor • 1008: Antenna descriptor and serial number • 1009: L1-only GLONASS real-time observables • 1010: Extended L1-only GLONASS real-time observables • 1011: L1 & L2 GLONASS real-time observables • 1012: Extended L1 & L2 GLONASS real-time observables Network RTK Messages according to MasterAuxiliary Concept: • 1014: Network Auxiliary Station Data message. This message contains details of the base stations in the network. For example, the master station and its coordinates, and the coordinate differences between the master and its auxiliaries. • 1015: Ionospheric Correction Differences message • 1016: Geometric Correction Differences message • 1021: Helmert / Abridged Molodensky transformation • 1022: Molodensky-Badekas transformation • 1023: Transformation Residual Message, ellipsoidal grid representation; CSCS/position & geoid/height residuals are supported • 1024: Transformation Residual Message, plane grid representation; CSCS/position & geoid/height residuals are supported • 1025: Projection types except LCC2SP, OM • 1026: Projection type Lambert Conic Conformal (LCC2SP) • 1027: Projection type Oblique Mercator (OM) • 1029: Unicode Text String message • 1032: Physical Reference Station Position message Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 194 Field Option Description • 1033: Receiver and Antenna Descriptor message • 1037: GLONASS Ionospheric Correction Differences message (phase). • 1038: GLONASS Geometric Correction Differences message (phase). • 1039: GLONASS Combined Geometric and Ionospheric Correction Differences message (phase). • 1068: GLONASS Ionospheric Correction Differences message (code). • 1069: GLONASS Geometric Correction Differences message (code). • 1070: GLONASS Combined Geometric and Ionospheric Correction Differences message (code). Pseudorange and phase range values for L1 and L2. Depending on the type of instrument, the data for L1-only or for L1 and L2 are sent out. Accuracy at the rover: • For L1-only: 0.25 - 1 m rms. • For L1 and L2: 1 - 5 cm rms after a successful ambiguity resolution. RTCM 1,2 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Differential and delta differential GPS corrections. Message 3 is also generated. Use for DGPS applications. Accuracy at the rover: 0.25 - 1 m rms. RTCM 9,2 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. GPS partial correction set and delta differential GPS corrections. Message 3 is also generated. Use for DGPS applications with a slow data channel in the presence of interference. Accuracy at the rover: 0.25 - 1 m rms. RTCM 20,21 v2 Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Real-time carrier phase corrections and high accuracy pseudorange corrections. Message 3 is also generated. Use for real-time operations. Accuracy at the rover: 1 - 5 cm rms after a successful ambiguity resolution. RTCM 1,2,18,19 v2 Available for RTK base. Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Combination of RTCM 1,2 v2 and RTCM 18,19 v2. RTCM 1,2,20,21 v2 Available for RTK base. Message according to RTCM version 2.x. Combination of RTCM 1,2 v2 and RTCM 20,21 v2. The availability of the following options, depends on the selection made for SBAS tracking on the Advanced page. Automatic SBAS SBAS satellites will be tracked and the SBAS service used will be automatically selected. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 195 Field Option Description WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System satellites will be tracked. WAAS (test) To track Wide Area Augmentation System satellites while the system is still in test mode. EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System satellites will be tracked. EGNOS (test) To track European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System satellites while the system is still in test mode. MSAS MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System where MTSAT stands for Multi-functional Transport SATellite GAGAN GPS Aided Geo Augmentation Navigation satellites will be tracked. RTCM version 1.x, 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3 Bits per byte 6 or 8 Available when the selected RTK data format is an RTCM version 2 format. The same version must be used at the reference and the rover. Defines the number of bits/byte in the RTCM message being received. Use auto coor- Check box dinate system Available for RTK data format: RTCM v3. To set an RTCM coordinate system received by a reference network as active coordinate system. Receive RTK Check box network information Available for RTK data format: RTCM v3. Activates an info message (RTCM message 1029). Behaviour Selectable list Available for RTK data format: RTCM v3. Log only The info message will only be logged to a text file. Show only The info message will only be shown by the instrument. Show & log The info message will be shown by the instrument and logged to a text file. Next step Page changes to the RTK base page. RTK Rover Settings, RTK base page Description of fields Field Option Sensor at base Selectable list Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections Description The instrument type used at the base. If the realtime data format contains information of the instrument type, certain corrections based on this information are applied in order to provide correct results. The real-time data formats Leica, Leica 4G, CMR/CMR+ and RTCM v3 contain this information. These corrections are important when third party instruments are used as reference. 196 Field Option Description Antenna at base Selectable list The antenna used at the base. If the real-time data format contains information of the antenna, certain corrections based on this information are applied in order to provide correct results. The real-time data formats Leica, Leica 4G, CMR/CMR+ and RTCM v3 contain this information. If the reference data is corrected by absolute antenna calibration values and a Leica standard antenna is being used on the rover, select ADVNULLANTENNA as base antenna. RTK base is sending unique ID Check box If checked, an ID can be typed in. RTK base ID Editable field The special ID of the base station from which realtime data is to be received. The allowed minimum and maximum values vary. From 0 to 31 For RTK data format: Leica and RTK data format: CMR/CMR+. From 0 to 1023 For RTCM version: 2.x. From 0 to 4095 For RTK data format: Leica 4G and RTK data format: RTCM v3. Next step Page changes to the RTK network page. RTK Rover Settings, RTK network page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Fn GGA.. To activate the sending of a GGA message for RTK network applications. Refer to "19.7.3 Configuration of GGA Message Sending for Reference Network Applications". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 197 Description of fields Field Option Description Use RTK network Check box If checked, an RTK network can be used. Defines the type of reference network to be used. Refer to Leica GNSS Spider documentation for more detailed descriptions. Network type Nearest The rover sends its position via NMEA GGA message to Leica GNSS Spider. From this position, Leica GNSS Spider determines the reference in a reference network that is closest to the rover. The corrections from that reference are sent to the rover. Supported for all real-time data formats. If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message must be activated using Fn GGA... i-MAX individualised Master-AuXiliary corrections. The rover sends its position via NMEA GGA message to Leica GNSS Spider where the Master-Auxiliary corrections are calculated. The corrections are also individualised by Leica GNSS Spider, which means it determines the best suitable corrections for that rover. If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message can be activated using Fn GGA... MAX Master-AuXiliary corrections The rover typically does not send its position to Leica GNSS Spider. Leica GNSS Spider calculates and sends Master-Auxiliary corrections to the rover. The rover individualises the corrections for its position, which means it determines the best suitable corrections. The corrections are sent in RTCM v3 with message types 1015/1016. If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message can be activated using Fn GGA... VRS Virtual Reference Station. If this option is selected, an NMEA GGA message must be activated using Fn GGA... Refer to "19.7.3 Configuration of GGA Message Sending for Reference Network Applications". FKP Area correction parameters. Derived from German: FlächenKorrektur Parameter Send user ID Check box Activates the sending of a Leica proprietary NMEA message defining the user. User ID 1 and User ID 2 Editable field The specific user IDs to be sent as part of the Leica proprietary NMEA message. By default the serial number of the instrument is displayed. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 198 RTK Rover Settings, Advanced page Description of fields Field Option Use prediction Check box Description To activate and deactivate the prediction of realtime observations between the data rate of the base. Available unless RTK data format: RTCM 1,2 v2 or RTK data format: RTCM 9,2 v2. Use height filter Check box To activate and deactivate the height filter for height smoothing. Compute xRTK positions Check box To activate or deactivate a slightly less accurate RTK position type, typically 5 - 10 cm, automatically providing more availability for phase fixed positions with a reliability of 99%. Recommended when working in heavy canopy environments. Available for GS10/GS14/GS15/GS25. Glonass mode Automatic For NMEA messages, positions measured with the x-RTK mode are flagged as fixed. The instrument decides automatically if GLONASS observations are fixed or not. Available for GLONASS instruments. For GS05/GS06, the option Automatic is always used. Glonass fix The GLONASS observations are fixed in an RTK solution. The GLONASS observations are not fixed in an RTK solution. Allows a Space-Based Augmentation System to be SBAS tracking configured to provide additional corrections in conjunction with GPS signals. Also commonly referred to as Satellite-Based Augmentation System, SBAS provides corrected time and distance measurements calculated by a network of ground relay stations and geostatic satellites. An SBAS can correct for problems such as atmospheric delays, poor satellite geometry and incorrect satellite positioning. Automatic SBAS SBAS satellites will be tracked and the SBAS service used will be automatically selected. Glonass float WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System satellites will be tracked. WAAS (test) To track Wide Area Augmentation System satellites while the system is still in test mode. EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System satellites will be tracked. EGNOS (test) To track European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System satellites while the system is still in test mode. MSAS MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System where MTSAT stands for Multi-functional Transport SATellite GAGAN GPS Aided Geo Augmentation Navigation satellites will be tracked. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 199 Prediction The following provides additional information on the prediction of real-time positions between the data rate of the base. Access In RTK Rover Settings, Advanced page. Description Prediction is the interpolation of real-time corrections between those corrections regularly transmitted by a reference at a defined data rate. Advantages in using prediction • Computation of real-time positions on the rover is independent from the transmission rate of the data from the base station. • Positions computed with prediction have a reduced latency of around 20 ms. Recommended settings for using prediction The slower the data rate the more important it is to activate prediction. Height smoothing The following provides additional information on the height filter for height smoothing. Access In RTK Rover Settings, Advanced page. Description Height smoothing is a filter applied to all heights measured in the WGS84 or a local coordinate system or output via NMEA. The filter defaults are best suited for high dynamic variations in height up to 1 m/s as carried out by graders. Height Smoothing with high dynamic GPS operations All GPS computed positions are almost twice as accurate in plan than in height. For the position determination, satellites can appear in all four quadrants. For the height determination, satellites can appear in two quadrants. Having fewer quadrants, weakens the height position compared to the plan position. N E N H GS12_041 Position determination with satellites appearing in all four quadrants. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections Height determination with satellites appearing in two quadrants. 200 In high dynamic GPS operations, this fact results in height variations of a few centimetres as shown in the blue curve in the following diagram. Some GPS monitoring applications require a stabilised height. By applying the filter, the height variations are smoothed and most of the noise in the height component is eliminated. a [m] 201.2 b 201.19 c 201.18 201.17 201.16 201.15 201.14 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 [sec] GS_050 a) Height b) Height variations c) Smoothed height 19.7.2 Configuration with Digital Cellular Phone and Radio Description An ideal real-time setup is to combine a radio and a digital cellular phone to get the best of both technologies. The radio can be used where the radio signals can be received, the advantage being that the radio data transmission is free. If the radio channel is broken, when the rover goes out of range or due to an obstruction, change to the digital cellular phone to complete the survey. This switch allows maximum productivity and minimal costs with real-time GPS. Field procedure step-by-step Step Description 1. Set up a base. 2. On the base, attach a digital cellular phone to one port and a radio to another port. 3. Configure both connections on the base. 4. Start the base. Real-time data is transmitted on two ports simultaneously using different devices. 5. Set up a rover. 6. On the rover, attach a digital cellular phone to one port and a radio to another port. 7. Use two working styles to configure both connections on the rover. 8. Start the rover using either the digital cellular phone connection or the radio connection. 9. On the rover, change the working style in use in order to change between using digital cellular phone and radio. There is no need to return to the base. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 201 19.7.3 Configuration of GGA Message Sending for Reference Network Applications Description Most reference networks require an approximate position of the rover. For reference network applications, a rover dials into the reference network and submits its approximate position in form of an NMEA GGA message. By default, the instrument sends GGA messages with updated current positions automatically when a reference network is selected. Surveying regulations in some countries require that one certain position can be selected. This position is then sent to the reference network as GGA message through the real-time connection every five seconds. Refer to "F.3 GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data" for information on GGA message format. Access step-by-step In RTK Rover Settings, RTK network page, press Fn GGA... Send GGA NMEA Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Coord Available for GGA position: From job and GGA position: LAST/HERE Posn. To view other coordinate types. Local coordinates are available when a local coordinate system is active. Last Available for GGA position: LAST/HERE Posn. To use the same coordinates in the GGA message as when the instrument was last used in a reference network application. This functionality is possible when position coordinates from a previous reference network application are still stored in the internal memory. Here Available for GGA position: LAST/HERE Posn. To use the coordinates of the current navigation position in the GGA message. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option GGA position Automatic Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections Description The current rover position is sent to the reference network. The position is updated and sent every five seconds. 202 Field Option Description From job A point from the working job can be selected in Point ID. The position of this point is sent to the reference network every five seconds. LAST/HERE Posn The position last used in a reference network application or the current navigation position can be selected using Last or Here. The selected position is sent every five seconds. Point ID None No GGA message is sent to the reference network. Selectable list Available for GGA position: From job. The coordinates of this point are sent out in the GGA message. 19.8 Base RTK 1 / Base RTK 2 19.8.1 Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Connection Unavailable for GS05/GS06. Description The real-time connection allows real-time related parameters to be configured. These parameters include defining the real-time messages, data rates and time slicing. Up to two real-time connections can be configured on the instrument. Access For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings highlight Base RTK 1. Edit... Two real-time devices can be attached to two different ports, for example a radio and a digital cellular phone. On the reference, the two devices can operate simultaneously. Highlight Base RTK 2 and press Edit.. to configure a second real-time connection. RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2), General page The available fields and pages on this screen depend on the selected settings. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Devce.. Available for Connect using: GS Port 1/GS Port 2/GS Port 3/GS radio/GS modem. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 203 Description of fields Field Option Description Transmit RTK Check box base info Activates the base real-time connection. Connect using GS Port 1 For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box. For GS14/GS15: The red LEMO port. For GS08plus/GS12: Fixed to this setting. Streaming of RTK data throught the CS is not allowed. GS Port 2 For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box. For GS15: The black LEMO port. GS Port 3 For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box. For GS15: The slot for a device. GS Internet 1, The internet ports on the GS10/GS14/GS15. If GS Internet 2 and these ports are not assigned to a specific connection, then these ports are additional remote GS Internet 3 ports. GS radio Available for GS14. GS modem Available for GS14. Device Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port within the active working style. RTK data format Leica, Leica 4G, CMR/CMR+, RTCM 18,19 v2, RTCM v3, RTCM 1,2 v2, RTCM 9,2 v2, RTCM 20,21 v2, RTCM 1,2,18,19 v2 Refer to "19.7.1 Configuration of a Rover RealTime Connection" for information about these real-time data formats. For GS08plus/GS12, the setting is fixed to RTCM v3. RTCM version 1.x, 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3 Use external antenna on GS15 Check box Available when the selected RTK data format is an RTCM version 2 format. The same version must be used at the reference and the rover. Available for Connect using: GS Port 3. Allows external radio / GSM antenna on the GS15 to be used for slot devices. Next step Page changes to the Data rates page. RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2), Data rates page This page is unavailable for GS08plus/GS12. Description For all real-time data formats, parts of the message can be output at different rates. The settings on this screen define the output rates for the various parts of the selected real-time data format. The available fields on this screen depend on the selected setting for RTK data format in RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2). Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 204 Description of fields Field Option Description RTK data format Display only The selected data format. Data From 0.1s to 60.0s Rates for the transmission of raw observations. The default settings are suitable for standard applications. They can be changed for special applications. A check is performed for permissible combinations. Message type Selectable list The message type of RTCM v3 and Leica 4G. Compact is suitable for standard applications. Coords From 10s to 120s Rate for the transmission of reference coordinates. Info From 10s to 120s Rate for the transmission of base station information such as point ID. End of message Nothing or CR To add a Carriage Return at the end of the realtime message. Messages to be streamed (local coords will be computed using coordinate system on the GS sensor) Selectable list Available for RTCM version: 2.3. The messages sent within the coordinate message. RTK base ID Editable field An identification for a base station. It is converted into a compact format and sent out with realtime data in all real-time data formats. It is different from the point ID of the base station. An ID of the base station is required if working with several base stations in time slicing mode on the same frequency. In this case, the ID of the base station from which data is to be accepted must be typed in at the rover. The allowed minimum and maximum values vary. From 0 to 31 For Leica and CMR/CMR+. From 0 to 1023 For any RTCM version 2 format. From 0 to 4095 For Leica 4G and RTCM v3. Next step Page changes to the Time slicing page. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 205 RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2), Time slicing page This page is unavailable for GS08plus/GS12. Description of fields Field Option Description Use time slicing Check box The possibility to send delayed real-time messages. This functionality is required when real-time messages from different base stations are sent on the same radio channel. Time slicing works for all device types. Total base 2, 3 or 4 stations being used Time slot for this base 2, 3 or 4 The contents of the selectable list depend on the settings for Total base stations being used. The number of base stations in use from where real-time messages are sent. The time slot represents the actual time delay. The number of possible time slots is the number of base stations in use. The time delay equals 1 s divided by the total number of base stations. If two base stations are used, the time delay is 0.50 s. Therefore, the time slots are at 0.00 s and at 0.50 s. With three base stations, the time delay is 0.33 s. The time slots are at 0.00 s, 0.33 s and 0.66 s. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. 19.9 Description NMEA 1 / NMEA 2 Unavailable for GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12. For GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12, streaming of GGA messages is supported for RTK network operations. National Marine Electronics Association has developed a message standard related to the marine electronics industry. NMEA messages have been accepted as the standard for sharing specific data information between companies since the late 1970s. Refer to "Appendix F NMEA Message Formats" for a comprehensive description of each NMEA message. The settings on this screen define the port, the device and the type of NMEA message to be used for the NMEA Out connection. Up to two NMEA Out connections can be configured. Each NMEA Out connection can output different messages at different rates with different talker IDs. The output of NMEA messages on both ports is simultaneous. The screens for the configuration of both NMEA connections are identical except for the title - NMEA Output 1 and NMEA Output 2. For simplicity, the title NMEA Output 1 is used in the following. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight NMEA 1 or NMEA 2. Edit... Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 206 NMEA Output 1 Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Mesgs To configure what NMEA messages are output, the rates and the output timing method. Refer to paragraph "NMEA Messages". Devce.. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Stream NMEA Check box messages from the GS Activates the output of NMEA. Stream NMEA Check box messages from the GS Activates the output of NMEA. Connect using GS Port 1 For GS10: The physical port P1 on the box. For GS15: The red LEMO port. GS Port 2 For GS10: The physical port P2 on the box. For GS15: The black LEMO port. GS Port 3 For GS10: The physical port P3 on the box. For GS15: The slot for a device. GS BT The Bluetooth port on the GS10/GS15. Display only Usually, RS232 is used to transfer NMEA messages. Device Use a defined Check box talker ID Talker ID Editable field Messages to be Display only streamed (local coords will be computed using coordinate system on the GS sensor) Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections When this box is checked, a user-defined talker ID can be typed in. Otherwise, the NMEA Talker ID based on the NMEA standards v3.0 is used (default GP for GPS.) Available when Use a defined talker ID is checked. Appears at the beginning of each NMEA message. The NMEA messages currently selected for output. 207 Next step IF NMEA messages THEN are not configured OK closes the screen. are to be configured Mesgs. NMEA Messages This screen shows the messages that can be output, which messages are currently output, the output rates and the output timing method. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Edit.. To configure how the currently highlighted message is output. Refer to paragraph "NMEA Message to Send". All and None To activate and deactivate the output for all messages. Use To activate and deactivate the output for the highlighted message. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step IF an NMEA message THEN is not to be config- OK closes the screen. ured is to be configured highlight the message and Edit... NMEA Message to Send Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 208 Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Stream the NMEA message Check box When this box is checked, the selected NMEA message is output. Output At each epoch The NMEA message is created at the exact epoch of the screen update rate. It is sent out in the time interval as defined in Rate. With Output Delay, the output can also be delayed by a time after this epoch. Refer to paragraph "Diagram". Immediately The NMEA message is created as soon as the information is available. It is sent out in the time interval as defined in Rate. On point stored The NMEA message is sent on point storage. Output Delay Editable field If the time interval defined in Rate is shorter than the epochs of the screen update, then the internal computation of positions is changed to allow the specified rate of NMEA positions. The screen update remains unchanged. Available for Output: At each epoch. Delays the output of the NMEA message. The delay is applied from the epoch as defined in Rate. The time of delay can be a value up to Rate. This option is required if two or more instruments are being used to monitor the position of an object. The position of each instrument is being output as NMEA message back to a control station. If all instruments sent their position message at the same time, as would be the case with Output: Immediately, then the control station may not be able to cope with all the positional data messages. In this case, the output of the second instrument could be delayed. The control station would then receive the message from each instrument at a slightly different time. Available for Output: On point stored. Defines the type of points for which the NMEA message is sent. Point Type All points The NMEA message is sent when any type of point is stored. Occupied pts only The NMEA message is sent when a manually measured point is stored. Auto pts only The NMEA message is sent when auto points are stored. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 209 Field Option Description Rate From 0.05s to 3600.0s Available unless Output: On point stored. Defines the time intervals at which the NMEA messages are created. For GS05/GS06 logging rates > 5 Hz are supported. Monitor CQ values Check box When this box is checked the CQ control can be defined. CQ Control Position only, Available when Monitor CQ values is checked. Height only or Activates a control over the coordinate quality. If Position & height the coordinate quality of the position and/or height component exceeds the limit as defined in Maximum CQ, then NMEA messages are not output. Maximum CQ Editable field Available when Monitor CQ values is checked. The limit for the coordinate quality up to which NMEA messages are output. Next step Step Description 1. OK returns to NMEA Messages. 2. OK returns to the screen from where NMEA Messages was accessed. 0 B1 A2 B2 b1 c1,a2 b2 1 2 For Output: At each epoch with Rate: 1.0s a1 Data 1 available b1 NMEA message for data 1 composed c1 NMEA message for data 1 sent a2 Data 2 available b2 NMEA message for data 2 composed c2 NMEA message for data 2 sent c2 A1 a1 Diagram 3 GS_051 Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 4 For Output: Immediately with Rate: 1.0s A1 Data 1 available B1 NMEA message for data 1 composed and sent A2 Data 2 available B2 NMEA message for data 2 composed and sent 210 19.10 Remote (OWI) Unavailable for GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12. Description The remote connection allows: • the instrument to be controlled using a device other than the field controller, for example a computer. Outside World Interface or Leica Binary 2 commands can be used to control the instrument through the remote port. Documentation for OWI and LB2 is available on request from the Leica Geosystems representative. • a message log to be requested from a remote client via an OWI message. A message log contains a history of warning messages and message lines. • the downloading of data directly from the instrument’s memory device to LGO through a serial port on the computer. The CS does not need to be removed from the instrument. The settings on this screen define the port and the device to be used for the remote control. A port configured as a remote port can be used to output event input, meteo or tilt notification messages. The OWI commands listed here are protected by a licence key. Refer to "30.3 Load licence keys" for information on how to type in the licence key. The corresponding LB2 commands are also protected. If these OWI commands have been activated by a licence key, it is indicated in About Leica Viva. • • • • • Access AHT ANT CNF DCF DCT • • • • • DPM GGA GGK GGK(PT) GGQ • • • • • GLL GNS LLK LLQ NET • • • • • POB POE POQ POS RMC • RTK • TPV • USR For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight Remote (OWI). Edit... Remote (OWI) Connections Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Cntrl.. To configure additional parameters. Devce.. Available unless an internet connection is used. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 211 Key Description Use Available unless a connection is NMEA 1, NMEA 2 or Remote (OWI). To use the highlighted connection by Remote (OWI). Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Port The physical port on the instrument which will be used for the connection functionality. Connection The connection configured for the ports. Any port which is not configured is automatically assigned the remote connection. Device The hardware connected to the chosen port. 19.11 PPS Output The PPS output is an optional interface requiring a special port. Description PPS stands for Pulse Per Second. It is a pulse that is output at a specified interval time. This can be used to activate another device. Additionally, a notification message can be output through the GS25 ports P1, P2, P3, P4 or BT when a PPS output occurs. For example, in aerial photography, an aerial camera can be configured to take a photo each time it receives a pulse from the instrument. The settings on this screen define the output port and parameters for the PPS option. This screen is available if the instrument is fitted with a PPS output port. Access This option is only available on GS25. For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, GS connections page, highlight PPS Output. Edit... PPS Output, PPS Output page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 212 Description of fields Field Option Description Stream Puls Per Second from the GS Check box When this box is checked, the output of PPS is activated and relevant settings can be configured. Rate From 0.05s to 20.0s The rate at which pulses are output. Polarity Negative edge Measure the time from the negative edge or the and Positive edge positive edge of the pulse. Restrict Check box output by time accuracy To restrict the PPS output by the accuracy of time. If the time accuracy is degraded below a defined value, for example, due to a lack of satellites, no PPS output is generated. When this box is checked, the observation of the time accuracy limit within which pulses are generated is activated. Accuracy limit Editable field The time accuracy limit in nanoseconds. Available when Restrict output by time accuracy is checked. Next step Page changes to the Notification page. PPS Output, Notification page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Send notifica- Check box tion on each PPS output When this box is checked, the output of a notification message with each PPS output is activated. Refer to "Appendix I PPS Output Notify Message Format" for information on the message format. Connect using GS Port 1, GS Port 2 or GS Port 3 The ports on the GS25 used for the connection. GS BT The Bluetooth ports on the GS25 used for the connection. Device Display only The hardware connected to the chosen port. Notification Selectable list The message can be in ASCII or in binary format. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 213 19.12 Event Input 1/Event Input 2 The event input is an optional interface requiring a special port. Description The event input interface allows pulses which are sent from devices connected to the instrument to be recorded. These records can later be superimposed on the processed kinematic data and the positions where the events took place can be interpolated in LGO. Events logged during real-time operations can also be exported to an ASCII file using an appropriate format file. Additionally, a notification message can be output through the GS25 ports P1, P2, P3, P4 or BT providing information about when the event occurred. A port configured as a remote port can be used to output the notification message. For example, in aerial photography, an aerial camera can be connected through the event input port. When the shutter opens, the position at which the event occurred is recorded. The settings on this screen define the input port and parameters for the event input option. This screen is available if the instrument is fitted with a event input port. This option is only available on GS25. Event input 1/Event input 2, Event input page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Receive event Check box input pulses Description When this box is checked, the detection and logging of events being sent to the event ports is activated and relevant settings can be configured. Information to Time,pos,vel,CQ, Time, position, velocity and coordinate quality log Time,pos,vel, can be recorded in various combinations. Time,pos or Time Polarity Negative edge or The polarity according to the device in use. Positive edge Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 214 Field Option Description Accuracy limit Editable field If two or more events take place during the time defined in s, the first event is recorded. Enter 0 to accept all events. The shortest recording time is 0.05 s. Editable field Records up to four lines of data with the event record. Use the description to differentiate between the two event records if two event input ports are used at the same time. Description Next step Page changes to the Bias values page. Event input 1/Event input 2, Bias values page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description External bias Editable field Sets a calibration value in ns according to the external event device and cable being used. Enter user defined internal bias Check box When this box is checked, personal calibration values for the particular instrument can be configured. When this box is not checked, default calibration values for the particular instrument are used. Internal bias Editable field Available when Enter user defined internal bias is checked. Sets the particular calibration value in ns for the instrument. Next step Page changes to the Notification page. Event input 1/Event input 2, Notification page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Send notifica- Check box tion on each Event Input Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections Description When this box is checked, the output of a notification message with each event input is activated. Refer to "Appendix H Event Input Notify Message Format" for information on the message format. 215 Field Option Connect using GS Port 1, GS Port 2 or GS Port 3 Description The ports on the GS25 which are used for the connection. GS BT The Bluetooth ports on the GS25 used for the connection. Device Display only The hardware connected to the chosen port. Notification Selectable list The message can be in ASCII or in binary format. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. 19.13 Total Station Description The settings on this screen define the communication of the field controller with Leica total stations and third-party instruments. Access For TPS: • In Connection Settings highlight Total Station. Edit... Total Station Connection Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Search To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Available if Connect using: Bluetooth is selected. Cntrl.. Available for certain devices connected to certain connections. To configure additional parameters, for example changing the radio channel. Default To return the fields back to their default values. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Manufacturer Selectable list The brand of the instrument. Model Selectable list The instrument model. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 216 Field Option Connect using Cable, Bluetooth, Internal radio, External radio Description How the instrument is connected. The options available depend on the selection for Model. The availability of the other fields depends on the selection made here. Radio cap (CTR16) To configure a connection between a CS15 with CTR16 and a TS with RH16. Baud rate From 1200 to 115200 Frequency of data transfer from instrument to device in bits per second. Parity None, Even or Odd Error checksum at the end of a block of digital data. Data bits 6, 7 or 8 Number of bits in a block of digital data. Stop bit 1 or 2 Number of bits at the end of a block of digital data. Flow control None or RTS/CTS Activates hardware handshake. When the instrument/device is ready for data, it asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is ready to receive data. This line is read by the sender at the Clear To Send input, indicating it is clear to send the data. Bluetooth ID and Name Display only The last connected total station using CTR16. If no information of a last total station is available, then ---- is displayed. 19.14 GSI Output Description Each time a measured point is stored to the working job, GSI data is streamed through the configured port of the field controller. Access In Connection Settings highlight GSI Output. Edit... GSI Output Connection Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Search Available when CS Bluetooth 1 or CS Bluetooth 2 are selected. To search for all available Bluetooth devices. If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided. Devce.. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 217 Description of fields Field Option Description Output GSI data to device Check box Activates the connection. Connect using CS RS232 port The RS232 port on the field controller. CS Bluetooth 1 The Bluetooth ports on the field controller which will be used. and CS Bluetooth 2 TS Bluetooth 1 The Bluetooth ports on the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite and which can be used. TS Bluetooth 2 Cable The RS232 port on the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite. Radio handle Hotshoe connection for RadioHandle. This port is located on top of Communication side cover. Device Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port. GSI Format GSI8 polar & crtsn GSI Polar and Cartesian (8 data characters) (Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM, E, N, Elev.) GSI16 polar GSI Polar (16 data characters) (Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM, reflector height) GSI16 cartesian GSI Cartesian (16 data characters) (E, N, Elev, Reflector Height) Use RS232 GSI protocol Pt,N,E,Ht,Date Coordinate data (Northing BEFORE Easting) Pt,E,N,Ht,Date Coordinate data (Easting BEFORE Northing) Pseudo NMEA GGA Based on NMEA (National Marine Electronics Association), which is a standard for interfacing marine electronic devices. GSI8 polar GSI Polar (8 data characters) (Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM) GSI16 polar 2 GSI Polar (16 data characters) (Point ID, Hz, V, SlopeDist, PPM) Check box A protocol defines if the system expects a handshake or no handshake. If checked, a handshake is required. A data block is sent out from the instrument and a receipt confirmation is expected. This handshake requires that GeoCom Mode is activated. Output format - GSI Format GSI data is transmitted in blocks. Every block consists of several data words, refer to the examples in the following table. Every data word begins with a two character Word Index, the WI code, specifying the data type within this block. Each GSI8 word has in total 16 characters, consisting of 7 information characters followed by 8 data characters and finally the blank character ASCII code 32. The GSI16 block is like the GSI8 block, but begins with * and the data word contains 16 characters for large values such as UTM coordinates, alphanumeric codes, attributes or point IDs. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 218 Example 1 shows a GSI8 block sequence with the words for point ID (11), Easting coordinate (81) and Northing coordinate (82). Example 2 shows a GSI16 block sequence with the words for point ID (11), horizontal (21) and vertical angle (22). Type GSI8 Polar&Cart GSI16 Polar GSI16 Cartesian WI 11 Point ID Point ID Point ID WI 21 Hz Hz - WI 22 V V - WI 31 SlopeDist SlopeDist - WI 51 PPM Total/mm PPM Total/mm - WI 81 East - East WI 82 North - North WI 83 Elev. - Elev. WI 87 Refl. Ht - Refl. Ht Example 1: GSI8 Each word has 16 characters of which 8 characters are used for the data block. Word 1 110001+0000A110 110002+0000A111 110003+0000A112 110004+0000A113 110005+0000A114 Word 2 81..00+00005387 81..00+00007586 81..00+00007536 81..00+00003839 81..00+00001241 Word 3 82..00-00000992 82..00-00003031 82..00-00003080 82..00-00003080 82..00-00001344 Example 2: GSI16 Each word has 24 characters of which 16 characters are used for the data block. Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 *110001+000000000PNC0055 *110002+000000000PNC0056 *110003+000000000PNC0057 *110004+000000000PNC0058 *110005+000000000PNC0059 21.002+0000000013384650 21.002+0000000012802530 21.002+0000000011222360 21.002+0000000010573550 21.002+0000000009983610 22.002+0000000005371500 22.002+0000000005255000 22.002+0000000005433800 22.002+0000000005817600 22.002+0000000005171400 GSI Word information Pos. Name Description of values 1-2 Word Index (WI) 3 No signifi- .: No information. cance WI 11, WI 22, WI 51, WI 82, 4 Automatic index information WI 21, WI 22 .: No information. 0: Tilt compensator: Off 3: Tilt compensator: On Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections Applicable for WI 21, WI 31, WI 81, WI 83, WI 87 219 Pos. Name Description of values Applicable for 5 Input mode .: No information. 0: Measured values transferred from instrument 1: Manual input from keyboard 2: Measured value, Hz correction: On. 3: Measured value, Hz correction: Off. 4: Result calculated from functions WI 21, WI 31, WI 81, WI 83, 6 Units WI 21, WI 22, .: No information. 0: Distance: Metre (m), last digit 1 / 1000 m WI 31, WI 81, WI 82, WI 83, WI 87 1: Distance: US ft (ft) last digit 1 / 1000 ft 2: Angle: 400 gon 3: Angle: 360° dec 4: Angle: 360°'" 5: Angle: 6400 mil 6: Distance: Metre (m), last digit 1 / 10000 m 7: Distance: US ft (ft) last digit 1 / 10000 ft 7 Sign +: Positive value -: Negative value WI 21, WI 31, WI 81, WI 83, WI 22, WI 51, WI 82, WI 87 Data includes a sequence of 8 (16) numerical or alphanumerical characters. Certain data blocks are allowed to carry more than one value for example ppm/mm. This data is automatically transferred with the according sign before each single value. WI 11, WI 22, WI 51, WI 82, WI 21, WI 31, WI 81, WI 83, WI 87 WI 11, WI 22, WI 51, WI 82, WI 21, WI 31, WI 81, WI 83, WI 87 8-15 Data 8-23 16 24 Output format Pt,N,E,Ht,Date Separating character : Blank WI 22, WI 51, WI 82, WI 87 Format Point ID, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Date, Time Description of fields The format settings are defined in Regional Settings. Field Description Point ID Text describing the point identification Northing The Northing coordinate. Easting The Easting coordinate. Elevation The height coordinate. Date The measurement/origination date. Time The measurement/origination time. Carriage Return Line Feed Example 2004,4997.635,6010.784,393.173,09/10/2001,16:34:12.2 2005,4997.647,6010.765,393.167,09/10/2001,16:34:12.4 2006,4997.657,6010.755,393.165,09/10/2001,16:34:12.7 Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 220 Output format Pt,E,N,Ht,Date Format This output format is identical to the Pt,N,E,Ht,Date format except the order of the Easting and Northing variables are reversed. Output format Pseudo NMEA GGA Description This output format is based on NMEA (National Marine Electronics Association), which is a standard for interfacing marine electronic devices. Format $GPGGA,Time,Northing,N,Easting,E,1,05,1.0,Elevation,M,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99 Description of Fields Field Description $GPGGA Sentence identification (header including talker identification). A Talker ID appears at the beginning of the header of each NMEA message. Time UTC time of position (hhmmss.ss) Northing The Northing coordinate (always output with 2 decimal places) N Fixed text (N) Easting The Easting coordinate (always output with 2 decimal places) E Fixed text (E) GPS Quality Indicator Fixed number (1=no real-time position, navigation fix) Number of satellites Number of satellites in use (00 to 12) HDOP Fixed number (1.0) Elevation The height coordinate (always output with 2 decimal places) Elevation units Elevation units (F or M). The format settings are defined in Regional Settings. Height Geoid Fixed number (0.0) Height units Fixed text (M) Time since last DGPS update Fixed number (0.0) DGPS Base station ID Fixed number (0.0001) Checksum Fixed number (*99) Carriage Return Line Feed Example $GPGGA,171933.97,7290747.02,N,3645372.06,E,1,05,1.0,1093609.54,F,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99 $GPGGA,171934.20,7290747.02,N,3645372.06,E,1,05,1.0,1093609.54,F,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99 $GPGGA,171934.45,7290747.03,N,3645372.06,E,1,05,1.0,1093609.54,F,0.0,M,0.0,0001*99 Fields are always separated by a comma. A comma is never placed before the Checksum field. When information for a field is not available, the position in the data string is empty. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 221 19.15 Field Controller Connection Description The Remote connection allows the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite/MS50/TS50/TM50 instrument to be steered remotely from a field controller where SmartWorx Viva is running. The settings on this screen define the port and the device used for the remote connection. Field Controller Connection Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Devce.. Available unless Connect using: Cable is selected on TS50. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Allow field controller to connect to this instrument Check box When this box is checked, the remote connection is activated. Connect using Cable For TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite: The RS232 port. For MS50/TS50/TM50: The cable USB port. Radio handle Hotshoe connection for RadioHandle. This port is located on top of Communication side cover. Bluetooth The Bluetooth port on the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite which is used. Cable RS232 The RS232 port on the MS50/TS50/TM50. Device Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port. Next step When the connection is established, keys are locked except Meas, Dist, Store. Dist and Store have the same functionality as on the CS or as on the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite/MS50/TS50/TM50 when it is independently controlled. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 222 19.16 GeoCom Connection Description The GeoCOM Mode permits communication of the TS11/TS15/MS50/TS50/TM50 with a 3rd party device. TS12 Lite can not communicate with a 3rd party device. GeoCom Connection Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Devce.. Available unless Connect using: Cable is selected on TS50. To create, select, edit or delete a device. Refer to "21.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Allow GeoCom communication with this instrument Check box When this box is checked, the GeoCOM mode is activated. Connect using Cable For TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite: The RS232 port. For MS50/TS50/TM50: The cable USB port. Radio handle Hotshoe connection for RadioHandle. This port is located on top of Communication side cover. TS Bluetooth 1 The Bluetooth ports on the TS11/TS15 which can and be used. TS Bluetooth 2 Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 223 Field Device Option Description Cable RS232 The RS232 port on the MS50/TS50/TM50. WLAN The WLAN port on the MS50/TS50/TM50. Display only The device currently assigned to the selected port. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections 224 20 Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 20.1 Digital Cellular Phones 20.1.1 Overview Description For digital cellular phones, information such as • the base stations that can be contacted • the phone numbers of the base stations and • the type of protocol to be used can be defined. Changing the base station to be dialled is of interest in two cases. Case 1: Case 2: Technologies CDMA GSM Two real-time base stations, each equipped with a digital cellular phone, are set up at two locations belonging to different network providers. When leaving the area of one base, the station can be changed and the other base can be called. Set up as in case 1. Two separate fixes from each base for each point can be obtained, providing redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations. Code Division Multiple Access is a high speed data transmission for effective and flexible use of available resources such as bandwidth. Users of a cellular phone network occupy the same frequency band. The signal is especially coded for each user. Global System for Mobile Communications is a more efficient version of CDMA technology that uses smaller time slots but faster data transfer rates. It is the world’s most commonly used digital network. 20.1.2 Configuring a GSM Connection Access For RTK rover and TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone of GSM technology attached. Cntrl... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone of GSM technology attached. Cntrl... GSM Dial-Up Connection, Dial-up details page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 225 Key Description Near To find the nearest base station with a digital cellular phone of GSM technology. Available when base stations to dial are already created in Dial-up Connection List. Coordinates of these stations must be known. Page To change to another page on this screen. Available if the Internet connection is activated. Fn Cmnd.. To send AT commands to the digital cellular phone. Fn Clear Available on the Sim codes page. To set the additional editable fields to 0. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description GSM device Display only Available for RTK rover and TPS. The type of digital cellular phone highlighted when this screen was accessed. Dial-up connection Selectable list Available for RTK rover and TPS. The digital cellular phone base station to be dialled. Opening the selectable list accesses Dial-up Connection List where new base stations can be created and existing base stations can be selected or edited. Refer to "20.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial". Number Display only Available for RTK rover and TPS. The number of the digital cellular phone at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List. Protocol Display only Available for RTK rover and TPS. The configured protocol of the digital cellular phone at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List. APN Editable field Available for RTK base with Internet capable devices. The Access Point Name of a server from the network provider, which allows access to data services. Contact your provider to get the correct APN. Next step Page changes to the Sim codes page. GSM Dial-Up Connection, Sim codes page Description of fields Field Option Description PIN code Editable field To enter the Personal Identification Number of the SIM card. PUK code Editable field If the PIN is locked for any reason, for example the wrong PIN was entered, input the Personal UnblocKing code for access to the PIN. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 226 GSM Dial-Up Connection, Advanced page Description of fields Field Option Description The network baud rate. Network data rate Selectable list For digital cellular phones of GSM technology that do not support autobauding choose the baud rate from the selectable list. Autobauding Select this option for an automatic search of the network baud rate. Use transparent mode Check box Define if the digital cellular phone uses Radio channel Protocol. Check for digital cellular phones that do use transparent mode. Uncheck for digital cellular phones that use RLP. Check with the network provider if the digital cellular phone uses transparent mode or not. Manually select cellphone network Check box Available for digital cellular phone devices unless they are in data mode. When this box is checked, the currently selected network provider is displayed and the Search key is available. Press Search for a list of all available networks and to select a specific network. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. 20.1.3 Configuring a CDMA Connection Access For RTK rover and TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone of CDMA technology attached. Cntrl... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone of CDMA technology attached. Cntrl... CDMA Connection Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 227 Key Description Near To find the nearest base station with a digital cellular phone of CDMA technology. Available when base stations to dial are already created in Dial-up Connection List. Coordinates of these stations must be known. Fn Info To provide information about the CDMA device being used, such as the manufacturer, the model and the electronic serial number. Fn Reg To register the settings of the CDMA digital cellular phone over the air. For US and Canada only. Available when the registration process must be done manually. Fn Cmnd.. To send AT commands to the digital cellular phone. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description CDMA Type Display only The type of digital cellular phone highlighted when this screen was accessed. Dial-up connection Selectable list The digital cellular phone base station to be dialled. Opening the selectable list accesses Dialup Connection List where new base stations can be created and existing base stations can be selected or edited. Refer to "20.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial". Number Display only The number of the digital cellular phone at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List. Protocol Display only The configured protocol of the digital cellular phone at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List. Next step Fn Info changes to CDMA Information. CDMA Information Description of fields Field Option Description Manufact Display only The manufacturer of the CDMA device being used. Model Display only The model of the CDMA device being used. ESN No. Display only Electronic Serial Number For registration purposes, send the electronic serial number to the network provider in order to receive the service programming code and the mobile directory number. These numbers must be typed in CDMA Registration. Next step Step Description 1. Press Print to print all information to a file CDMA Info.log in the \DATA directory on the data storage device. 2. Press OK to return to CDMA Connection. 3. For US and Canada only: Press Reg to access CDMA Registration. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 228 CDMA Registration The settings allow the CDMA digital cellular phone to be registered over the air. Description of fields Field Option Description MSL/SPC Display only The Service Program Code provided by the network provider. MDN Display only The Mobile Directory Number provided by the network provider MSID/MIN Display only Mobile Station Identity Number and Mobile IdentificationNumber. Another 10-digit number to identify the mobile phone. Sometimes identical with the MDN. Next step OK to return to CDMA Connection. 20.2 Modems Description For modems, information such as • the base stations that can be contacted and • the phone numbers of the base stations can be controlled. Changing the base station to be dialled is of interest in two cases. Case 1: Case 2: Access Two real-time base stations, each equipped with a digital cellular phone, are set up at two locations belonging to different network providers. When leaving the area of one base, the station can be changed and the other base can be called. Set up as in case 1. Two separate fixes from each base for each point can be obtained, providing redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations. For RTK rover and TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a modem attached. Cntrl... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a modem attached. Cntrl... Modem Dial-up Connection Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 229 Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Near To find the nearest base station with a modem. Available when base stations to dial are already created in Dial-up Connection List. Coordinates of these stations must be known. Fn Cmnd.. To send AT commands to the modem. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Modem Display only The type of modem highlighted when this screen was accessed. Dial-up connection Selectable list The modem base station to be dialled. Opening the selectable list accesses Dial-up Connection List where new base stations can be created and existing base stations can be selected or edited. Refer to "20.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial". Number Display only The number of the modem at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List. Protocol Display only The configured protocol of the modem at the selected Dial-up connection as configured in Dial-up Connection List. 20.3 Radios for GPS Real-Time Description For radios the channels on which the radio broadcasts can be changed. Changing channels changes the frequency at which the radio operates. Not all radios support channel changing. Changing radio channels is of interest in three cases. Case 1: Case 2: Case 3: Requirements for channel changing Two real-time base stations are set up at two locations, each broadcasting on a different channel. If the signal from one base station is jammed, the channel can be changed and the other base can be used. Set up as in case 1. Two separate fixes for each point can be obtained, providing redundancy for future least squares adjustment operations. One real-time base and one real-time rover are being used. If the signal is blocked due to radio interference, the channel at the base and the rover can be changed in order to work on a different frequency. Pacific Crest radios: Satelline radios: • channel changing must be activated by a Pacific Crest dealer. • A special licence might be required. The radio must be in programming mode. This mode can be set by a Satelline dealer. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 230 Channel changing may contravene radio broadcasting regulations in certain countries. Before operating with radios, check the regulations in force in the working area. The number of channels available and the frequency spacing between channels depends on the radio used. Access If channel changing is to be used, when configuring the base real-time connection, set RTK base ID in RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2), Data rates page to a different ID for each base site. By doing so, the rover can recognise if the incoming real-time data after channel changing is being received from a different base station or if the original base station is using a new frequency. In the first case, the ambiguities are recomputed. For RTK rover and TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a radio attached. Cntrl... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a radio attached. Cntrl... Radio Configuration Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Scan To provide information such as the station ID, latency and the data format of incoming signals from base stations broadcasting on the same radio channel. This information can be used to select appropriate base stations to dial. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Radio type Display only The type of radio highlighted when this screen was accessed. Channel Editable field The radio channel. The channel used must be within minimum and maximum allowed input values. The minimum and maximum allowed input values for a radio depend on the number of channels supported by the radio and the spacing between the channels. Actual frequency Display only Available for Radio type: Satelline 3AS. Displays the actual frequency of the radio. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 231 Field Option Description Use different protocol Check box Available when a Satelline radio is selected as Radio type. When this box is checked, the Satelline radio can transmit data to and receive data from a Pacific Crest radio. The radio is configured accordingly online. The radio need not be connected to a PC and no configuration software is needed. When this box is not checked and OK is pressed the device switches to the standard Satel 3AS/3ASd mode. Modulation type Pac Crest GMSK or Pac Crest 4FSK Defines the settings supported on Pacific Crest radios. Refer to the next table. Available when Use different protocol is checked. Settings for Modulation type: Pac Crest GMSK and Modulation type: Pac Crest 4FSK Setting Modulation type/Channels with channel spacing Pac Crest GMSK/25 kHz Pac Crest Pac Crest GMSK/12.5 kH 4FSK/25 kHz z Pac Crest 4FSK/12.5 kHz Protocol Type Transparent with EOT Timeout Transparent with EOT Timeout Transparent with EOT Timeout Transparent with EOT Timeout Link Rate 19200 9600 9600 4800 Modulation Type 4FSK 4FSK GMSK GMSK Use Forward Error Correction ON ON ON ON Next step Scan to access Scan for Base Station. Scan for Base Station This screen provides information about the base stations, with specific types of devices attached, for example a radio, from which real-time corrections are being received. This information can also be useful for finding out if anyone else in the area is using a particular radio channel. Key Description OK To select the highlighted base station and to continue with the subsequent screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 232 Key Description Chnl-1 and Chnl+1 Available for scanning base stations with radios attached. To switch the radio to one channel lower/higher than the current channel. The base stations displayed change to those broadcasting on the new channel. Description of columns Column Description Station ID Station ID of available base stations from which a signal is being received. For radios, the base station radios transmitting on the same channel will be listed. Latency(s) Time delay, in seconds and configured on the base, from when the base collects the data to when the data is transmitted. RTK data format Format of the data from the base station. Refer to "19.8.1 Configuration of a Reference Real-Time Connection" for more information about data formats. 20.4 Radios for Remote Control Description For radios the channels on which the radio broadcasts can be changed. Changing channels changes the frequency at which the radio operates. This change in frequency can be necessary to enable multiple pairs of radios to work simultaneously in the same area without interfering with each other. Access For TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an internal radio, a TCPS or a GFU attached. Cntrl... Internal radio Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Default To change to the default radio settings. Fn Save To save the radio settings. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 233 Description of fields Field Option Description Radio type Display only The type of radio device selected for the connection. Link number Editable field The assigned channel number. The channel number for the field controller and the radio must be the same. The communication settings for the field controller and the radio must also be same. Set as Remote or Base The radio modules inside the field controller and the radio must be set to opposite settings. It is recommended to set the field controller to Remote and the radio to Base. 20.5 RS232 Description RS232 is a standard serial communication method that is able to transfer data without the need for predefined time slots. Access For RTK rover and TPS: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an RS232 device attached. Cntrl... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an RS232 device attached. Cntrl... RS232 Connection Displayed is the type of device highlighted when this screen was accessed. 20.6 Internet Description Internet The Internet connection allows connection to the Internet to receive real-time data. A GPRS / Internet device must be attached to the instrument. Requirements For Internet • Check Use Internet connection on GS in Internet Connection. • An Internet port must be selected in RTK base settings (RTK1)/RTK base settings (RTK2) or RTK Rover Settings. Access For RTK rover: • In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an Internet device attached. Cntrl... For RTK base: • In Base Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an Internet device attached. Cntrl... Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 234 Internet Port Connection Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Internet port Display only The name of the Internet port attached to the connection that was highlighted when this page was accessed. User type Selectable list How the instrument will operate in the Internet. Available for RTK base. Client Must be selected when using Ntrip as Internet application. Inside the Internet, Ntrip Clients and Ntrip Servers are considered as clients. Selectable list The server to be accessed in the Internet. Opening the selectable list accesses Server to Connect where new servers can be created and existing servers can be selected or edited. Server to use NTRIP mount- Editable field point Mountpoints are the Ntrip servers sending out real-time data. Next step Select Source to access NTRIP Source Table. Highlight a mountpoint about which more information is required. This information helps to configure the instrument to use the selected mountpoint as a base. Press Info to access Mountpoint. Mountpoint, General page Description of fields Field Option Description Identifier Display only The name of the selected Mountpoint. Format Display only The real-time data format sent out by the Mountpoint. Format details Display only Details about Format, for example the RTCM message types including update rates in seconds displayed in brackets. Authentic The type of password protection required for the authorisation to the Ntrip server. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 235 Field Option Description None If no password is required. Basic If the password does not require encryption. Digest If the password must be encrypted. NMEA Display only Indicates if the Mountpoint must receive GGA NMEA data from the rover in order to compute VRS information. Charges Display only Indicates if charges are currently made for the connection. Carrier Display only The type of carrier message sent out. System Display only The type of satellite system supported by the Mountpoint. Next step Page changes to the Location page. Mountpoint, Location page Detailed information about the location of the Mountpoint is displayed. Next step Page changes to the Miscell page. Mountpoint, Miscell page Description of fields Field Option Description Generator Display only The hard- or software generating the data stream. Compress Display only The name of the compression / encryption algorithm. Bitrate Display only The data speed in bits per second. Info Display only Miscellaneous information if available. Next step OK to return to the previous screen. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 236 20.7 Configuring the Stations to Dial 20.7.1 Accessing Dial-up Connection List Description Dial-up Connection List allows new stations to be created, provides a list of base stations that can be dialled and allows existing stations to be edited. For digital cellular phones of any technology and for modems, the phone numbers of the device at the base station must be known. For a base station to be dialled, a name, the phone number and, if available, the coordinates can be configured. The configuration is possible for rover and base digital cellular phones and modems. Access step-by-step Step Description 1. In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has a digital cellular phone of any technology or modem attached. 2. Cntrl... 3. Open the selectable list for Dial-up connection. Dial-up Connection List Key Description OK To select the highlighted station and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new station. Refer to "20.7.2 Creating / Editing a Station to Dial". Edit.. To edit a station. Refer to "20.7.2 Creating / Editing a Station to Dial". Delete To delete the highlighted station. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Name Name of all available base stations. Number Phone number of the station to dial. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 237 20.7.2 Creating / Editing a Station to Dial Access In Dial-up Connection List press New.. or Edit... New Dial-up Connection Key Description Store To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Coord To view other coordinate types. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new base station to be dialled. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Input optional. Number Editable field The number of the base station to dial. If the survey is to be undertaken across country borders it is necessary to input the phone number using standard international dialling codes. For example, +41123456789. Otherwise it can be input as a standard digital cellular phone number. Available for digital cellular phones of GSM technology. The configured protocol of the digital cellular phone of GSM technology. Protocol Use coordinates Analog For conventional phone networks. ISDN v.110 or ISDN v.120 For GSM networks. Selectable list Select Yes to type in the approximate coordinates of the base station. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 238 20.8 Configuring the Server to Connect 20.8.1 Accessing Server to Connect Description Server to Connect allows new servers to be created, provides a list of servers that can be accessed in the Internet and allows existing servers to be edited. Access step-by-step Step Description 1. In Connection Settings, highlight a connection which has an Internet connection attached. 2. Cntrl... 3. Open the selectable list for Server name. Server to Connect Key Description OK To select the highlighted server and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new server. Refer to "20.8.2 Creating / Editing a Server". Edit.. To edit a server. Refer to "20.8.2 Creating / Editing a Server". Delete To delete the highlighted server. More To change between the IP Address and the TCP/IP Port of the server. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Name Name of all available servers. IP address IP addresses of all available servers. TCP/IP port TCP/IP Port numbers of all available servers. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 239 20.8.2 Creating / Editing a Server Access In Server to Connect press New.. or Edit... New Server, General page Key Description Store To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the new server to be accessed. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Address Editable field Type in the host name or the IP address of the server to be accessed in the Internet. Port Editable field The port of the Internet server through which the data is provided. Each server has several ports for various services. Next step Page changes to the NTRIP page. New Server, NTRIP page Description of fields Field Option Description Use NTRIP Check box Check to activate Ntrip. User ID Editable field A user ID is required to receive data from to the Ntrip Caster. Contact the Ntrip administrator for information. Password Editable field A password is required to receive data from the Ntrip Caster. Contact the Ntrip administrator for information. Next step Store to store the settings. Viva Series, Connections.. - All other connections, Cntrl.. Key 240 21 Configuration of Devices 21.1 Devices 21.1.1 Overview Description Before using any device, it is necessary to configure the interface with which it will be used. Refer to "19.1 Accessing Configuration Connections" for information on how to configure the interfaces. Some devices can be used with different interfaces for different applications. For example: • A radio can be used to receive real-time base data but a second radio could also be used to output simultaneous NMEA messages. • A radio can be used for remote control with a TPS but also to send GeoCOM commands from a computer to a TPS. 21.1.2 Digital Cellular Phones Description Digital cellular phones comprise of the technologies CDMA and GSM. Typical uses • • • • To To To To transmit real-time data. receive real-time data. download raw observations from a remote location. steer an instrument. Example use Step Description 1. Base and rover must both be equipped with a digital cellular phone. 2. Ensure that the digital cellular phone at the base is on. 3. The rover digital cellular phone contacts the selected base of which the phone number was pre-defined. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". 4. One rover can dial in to the base digital cellular phone at a time. 5. As soon as the base digital cellular phone is contacted, real-time data is sent to the rover digital cellular phone that has called. Requirements for using digital cellular phones Several digital cellular phone numbers can be pre-defined on the rover. Dialling a different number dials that particular base station. Always required: Sometimes required: Viva Series, Configuration of Devices • AT command language must be supported by the digital cellular phone. • Working area must be covered by a digital cellular phone network. • The network operator must support data transmission. • SIM card. This SIM card is the same as is normally used in mobile phones. The SIM card must be enabled to transmit data. Contact the service provider to enable the SIM card. • Personal Identification Number • Registration 241 Supported digital cellular phones Some digital cellular phones are predefined. Other digital cellular phones can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new digital cellular phone configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". These digital cellular phones must be connected with a cable or Bluetooth. Refer to "Appendix E Cables" for information on cables. Please contact the local selling unit or dealer for further information. Advantages • Unlimited range of the data channel between base and rover. • Free of jamming from other users. • Cheaper in price in the initial costs of buying. Disadvantages Fees are charged for the time that the digital cellular phone network is being used. Base and rover can both be equipped with a digital cellular phone and a radio. On the base, they operate simultaneously. On the rover, use the radio when within radio range of the base and the digital cellular phone when radio reception is not possible. 21.1.3 Modems Typical uses • To transmit NMEA messages. • To download raw observations from a remote location. • To transmit real-time data. Example of use Step Description 1. The base is equipped with a modem. 2. The rover is equipped with a digital cellular phone. 3. Ensure that the modem is switched on. 4. The rover digital cellular phone contacts the selected base of which the phone number was pre-defined. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". 5. One rover can dial in to the base modem at a time. 6. As soon as the base modem is contacted, it sends its data to the rover digital cellular phone that has called. Several modem numbers can be pre-defined on the rover. Dialling a different number changes the base station. Requirements for using modem AT command language must be supported by the modem. Supported modems Some modems are predefined. Modems must be connected with a cable. Other modems can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new modem configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 242 21.1.4 Radios for Real-Time Typical uses • To transmit real-time data. • To receive real-time data. • To steer an instrument. Example of use Step Description 1. Base and rover must both be equipped with radios using the same frequency range and the same data format. 2. The base radio continuously sends out real-time data until the instrument is turned off, the configuration is changed or the radio is detached. 3. The rover radio continuously receives real-time data until the instrument is turned off, the configuration is changed or the radio is detached. 4. Several rovers can receive data from the same base at the same time. Supported radios Several base radios can transmit real-time data simultaneously using different radio channels. Changing to a different radio channel on the rover changes the base from which real-time data is received. Some radios are predefined. Other radios can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new radio configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". These radios must be connected with a cable. Base and rover can both be equipped with a digital cellular phone and a radio. On the base, they operate simultaneously. On the rover, use the radio when within radio range of the base and the digital cellular phone when radio reception is not possible. 21.1.5 Radios for Remote Control Typical uses • To remote control the TPS. • To transmit data between a TPS and computer. Supported radios • The default radios used with TPS for remote control are the internal radio CTR16, the RadioHandle and the external radios TCPS. The TPS has to be set to the correct communication mode to send and receive data and commands via the radio. • A Communication side cover must be fitted to the TPS when operating with the RadioHandle. User defined radios Other radios than the default radios can be used. Their settings must be defined by creating a new radio configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". These radios must be connected with a cable. Refer to "Appendix E Cables" for information on cables. 21.1.6 RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 is supported by default. The settings are: Baud rate: Parity: Data bits: Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 115200 None 8 Stop bits: Flow control: 1 None 243 21.1.7 USB USB USB is supported on the MS50/TS50/TM50. The USB interface on port 1 can be used to: • connected to the CS via the USB interface. • configure GeoCom Connection (cable). USB and serial interface are possible. • configure GSI Output Connection (cable). USB and serial interface are possible. • configure Export Job Connection (cable). USB and serial interface are possible. If cable is selected (serial – RS232), then the USB interface is also available. If USB is selected, the serial interface is also available but with the default respectively previously set parameters. The IP address of the RNDIS interface of the MS50/TS50/TM50 cannot be changed within SmartWorx Viva. Use Windows CE to change the IP address, for example when connecting two instruments via USB to the same PC. 21.1.8 Hidden Point Measurement Devices Typical uses To measure • distances (reflectorless distance measurements using laser technology) • angles • azimuths to points which are not directly accessible with GPS, for example house corners or trees. If the device is connected to the instrument, the measurements taken with hidden point measurement devices are directly transferred. If the device is not connected, measurement can be typed in manually to calculate the coordinates of a hidden point. Example of use Step Description 1. An instrument must be a rover with or without real-time configuration. 2. A hidden point measurement device is connected to the instrument via cable or Bluetooth. 3. Hidden point measurements are configured and activated. 4. Distances, angles and azimuths are measured to the hidden point with the hidden point measurement device. 5. The measurements are directly transferred to the instrument and displayed in the appropriate fields. Supported hidden point measurement devices Hidden point measurement devices can be connected in addition to any of the other devices. They can be active at the same time. Changing of ports is not required. Some devices are predefined. Hidden point measurement devices of the same type but with different settings must be defined by creating a new hidden point measurement device. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 244 21.1.9 GPRS / Internet Devices Description GPRS is a telecommunication standard for transmitting data packages using the Internet Protocol. When using GPRS technology, charges are made based on the amount of transferred data and not, as per normal digital cellular phones, for the connection time. Typical uses To access the Internet with an instrument in order to receive real-time data from the Internet. Example use Step 1 Description The following is an example use for receiving data from the Internet. Rover must be equipped with a GPRS / Internet device. 2 The GPRS / Internet device accesses the Internet where the rover connects for example to Ntrip. 3 The rover receives real-time corrections via the Internet. Requirements for using GPRS / Internet devices • AT command language must be supported by the digital cellular phone. • Access Point Name of a server from the network provider. The APN can be thought of as the home page of a provider supporting GPRS data transfer. • SIM card. This SIM card is the same as is normally used in mobile phones. The SIM card must be enabled to transmit data. Contact the service provider to enable the SIM card. • Personal Identification Number • Registration Supported GPRS / Internet devices Some GPRS/Internet devices are predefined. Other GPRS capable devices can be used as long as they use AT commands. Their settings must be defined by creating a new device configuration. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Please contact the local selling unit or dealer for further information. Advantages • Unlimited range of the data channel between base and rover. • Free of jamming from other users. • Fees are charged for the amount of data being transferred. 21.2 Accessing Devices / GPRS Internet Devices Description Allows devices to be created, edited, selected and deleted. Access step-by-step Step Description 1. For RTK rover and TPS: • Select Main Menu:Instrument\Connections..\All other connections. For RTK base: • Select Main Menu:Base connections\Connections..\All other connections. 2. Highlight the appropriate interface based on the type of device to be configured. For example, highlight RTK Rover when a radio is to be configured. 3. Edit... 4. Activate the interface by checking the check box. 5. Devce.. to access Devices. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 245 Devices This screen may consist of several pages and provides different devices for selection depending on which interface the screen was accessed from. The functionality described here is always the same. Key Description OK To select the highlighted device and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new device. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Edit.. To edit the highlighted device. Refer to "21.3 Creating/Editing a Device". Delete To delete the highlighted device. More To display information about the type of device and the creator of the device. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn All or Fn Filter.. Available for Internet and Bluetooth devices. To list all devices or to hide devices which are not Internet or Bluetooth capable. Fn Default To recall previously deleted default devices and to reset default devices to the default settings. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Name Names of available devices. Type Type of device defined when creating the device. Creator The creator of the device. The creator can be either Default if the device is a default, or User if the device has been created. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices If a Default device is edited by using Edit.. then its creator is still displayed as Default. 246 21.3 Creating/Editing a Device Description Allows a new device to be configured or an existing device to be edited. Access In Devices, highlight a device of the same type as the device to be created, from the list. Press New.. or Edit... New Device or Edit Device Key Description Store To store the new device and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. AT Msg Available for digital cellular phones and modems. To configure communication commands. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field Name of new device. Type Display only Same device type as was highlighted when New.. or Edit.. was used. Use this device for Internet (use GPRS) Check box Available for digital cellular phones and modems. Defines the device as an Internet capable device and adds it to the list in GPRS Internet Devices. Use UMTS network if available Check box In case of using GSM only modems together with modems, which are UMTS capable, this option must be disabled. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 247 Field Option Description Baud rate From 1200 to 230400 Frequency of data transfer from instrument to device in bits per second. Unavailable for CS 3.5G modem. Parity None, Even or Odd Error checksum at the end of a block of digital data. Unavailable for CS 3.5G modem. Data bits 6, 7 or 8 Number of bits in a block of digital data. Unavailable for CS 3.5G modem. Stop bit 1 or 2 Number of bits at the end of a block of digital data. Unavailable for CS 3.5G modem. Flow control None or Flow control Activates hardware handshake. When the instrument/device is ready for data, it asserts the Ready To Send line indicating it is ready to receive data. This line is read by the sender at the Clear To Send input, indicating it is clear to send the data. Unavailable for CS 3.5G modem. Next step IF the device is a THEN radio or device other than digital cellular phone or modem Store to close the screen and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. digital cellular phone AT Msg. or modem AT Msg For Use this device for Internet (use GPRS) checked in New Device or Edit Device, this screen consists of two pages: GSM/CSD page: The AT commands configure the devices for normal digital cellular phone/modem mode. GPRS/Internet page The AT commands configure the devices for GPRS/Internet mode. Please refer to the manual of the GPRS / Internet device for information about which AT commands must be entered or contact the supplier. The following table lists the fields of both pages. Description of fields Field Option Initialisation 1 Editable field Description Initialisation sequence to initialise digital cellular phone/modem. When the device is used, between Initialisation 1 and Initialisation 2, a check for the PIN is performed. Editable field Allows the Initialisation 1, Initialisation 2 or the Connect string to continue onto a new line. Initialisation 2 Editable field Initialisation sequence to initialise digital cellular phone/modem. Editable field Dialling string used to dial the phone number of the real-time base. (continued) Dial Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 248 Field Option Description Hang-up Editable field Hangup sequence used to end the network connection. Escape Editable field Escape sequence used to switch to the command mode before using the hangup sequence. Connect Editable field Dialling string used to dial into the Internet. Next step Store returns to New Device or Edit Device. Viva Series, Configuration of Devices 249 22 Instrument - Instrument status info 22.1 Status Functions The Status functions for the GPS RTK base menu, the GPS rover menu and for TPS are similar. The functions are described in the same chapters, differences are outlined. Description The STATUS functions help using the instrument by showing the state of many instrument functions. All fields are display only fields. Unavailable information is indicated by -----. Access • For RTK base: Select Main Menu: Instrument\Base status info. • For RTK rover and TPS: Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument status info. Status Menu Description of the Status functions Key Description OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. STATUS function Description Refer to chapter Battery & memory Information related to usage and status of battery and memory. "22.2 Battery & memory" Satellite tracking • Information related to the satellites ordered by the elevation angle. "22.3 Satellite tracking" • A skyplot shows satellite information in a graphical way. • Another page shows the date of the used almanacs, and, as shown on the skyplot, the number of satellites tracked and the number of satellites available above the cut-off elevation mask. RTK data link status Information related to real-time data, for "22.4 RTK data example the data link and the device used to link status" transfer real-time data. Current GPS position Information related to the current antenna position and the speed of the antenna. Raw data logging Information related to logging of raw obser- "22.6 Raw data vations. logging" Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info "22.5 Current GPS position" 250 STATUS function Description Refer to chapter Connection status • Information related to the configuration "22.7 Connection and use of interfaces, ports and devices. status" • Information related to the incoming data from active devices. TPS current station info Information related to the current station set on the instrument. "22.9 TPS current station info" 22.2 Battery & memory Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access is also possible by tapping the battery icon. Battery & Memory This description is valid for all pages of the screen. For the GPS base page, the information that is displayed depends on the real-time message. Leica/Leica 4G: Transfers precise values for all fields. RTCM: Transfer of any of the information not part of the message. CMR/CMR+: Transfers general status information such as O.K. and Low. For GS05/GS06/GS08plus, the GPS rover page is unavailable. Key Description Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Description Battery, Battery 1 or Battery 2 The percentage of remaining power capacity for the battery is displayed numerically. If no information for a field is available, for example no battery is inserted, then 0% is displayed. External power On the MS50/TS50/TM50, if the battery gets charged (charging) is stated behind the percentage of the battery power level. When the battery is getting low on the TS, a warning message is displayed on the CS. Shows if an external power supply is connected. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 251 Field Description Internal The total/free memory for data storage on the data storage device. memory, CF If no information for a field is available, for example no data storage card, SD card device is inserted, then ----- is displayed. or USB stick 22.3 Satellite tracking Description This screen shows information related to the satellites ordered by the elevation angle. Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access is also possible by tapping the number of visible satellites icon. Satellite Tracking: RTK rover, GPS/Glonass/Galileo page Key Description OK To return to the Main Menu. Base / Rover To change between the SNR values of rover and base. Hlth.. To view the numbers of satellites categorised in good, bad and unavailable. Page To change to another page on this screen. The Galileo page is unavailable with GS08plus. More To display information about the SNR values for GPS satellites (if GPS L5 is checked in GPS settings\Satellite tracking) and Galileo satellites. Available on the Satellite tracking and GAL page. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Sat The Pseudo Random Noise number (GPS), the Slot number (GLONASS) or the Space Vehicle number (Galileo) of the satellites. Elev The elevation angle in degrees. The arrows indicate if the satellite is rising or falling. Azmth The azimuth of the satellite. S/N 1, S/N 2 and S/N L5 The SNR on L1, L2 and L5 for GPS, on L1 and L2 for GLONASS and on E1, E5a, E5b and Alt-Boc for Galileo. If the signal is currently not being used in the position calculations, the number is shown in brackets. For GS05/GS06, S/N 2 is unavailable. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 252 Satellite Tracking: GPS, Skyplot page Satellites below the Cut-off angle configured in Satellite Tracking are marked grey. The part of the skyplot between the 0° elevation and the cut-off angle is marked grey. Key Description OK To return to the Main Menu. GPS ? / GPS ? To hide or show the GPS satellites (shown by the prefix G). GLO ? / GLO ? To hide or show the GLONASS satellites (shown by the prefix R). Available when Glonass is activated in Satellite Tracking. GAL ? / GAL ? To hide or show the Galileo satellites (shown by the prefix E). Available when Galileo is activated in Satellite Tracking. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of symbols Symbol Description Satellites above the Cut-off angle configured in Satellite Tracking. Satellites below the Cut-off angle configured in Satellite Tracking. Next step Page changes to the Almanac page. Satellite Tracking: GPS, Almanac page The almanac page shows the date of the used almanacs, and, as shown on the skyplot, the number of satellites tracked and the number of satellites available above the cutoff elevation mask. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 253 Key Description OK To return to the Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Next step OK exits Satellite Tracking. Satellite Tracking, RTK rover page The information about the satellites at the base shown on this page is identical with the information shown for the rover. Next step OK exits Satellite Tracking. 22.4 RTK data link status Description This screen shows information related to real-time data, for example the data link and the device used to transfer real-time data. Access Standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu. RTK Data Link Status, General page Key Description OK To exit the screen. Data.. To view the data being received. Depending on the RTK data format, the shown data differ. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Description RTK data format The received real-time data format message type. GPS used L1/L2 The number of satellites on L1, L2 and L5 (when GPS L5 is activated in Satellite Tracking) being used in the current position solution. GLO used L1/L2 Available if Glonass is activated in Satellite Tracking. The number of satellites on L1 and L2 being used in the current position solution. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 254 Field Description GAL used E1/E5a Available if Galileo is activated in Satellite Tracking. The number of satellites on E1 and E5a being used in the current position solution. GAL used E5b/ABOC Available if Galileo is activated in Satellite Tracking. The number of satellites on E5b and Alt-BOC being used in the current position solution. Last data sent Available for an RTK base. Seconds since the last message from the base was sent. Last received Available for an RTK rover. Seconds since the last message from the base was received. In last minute Available for an RTK rover. The percentage of real-time data received from the base compared with the data received from the antenna within the last minute. This percentage indicates how well the data link is working. RTK network Available for an RTK rover. The type of base network in use. Stream NMEA Available for an RTK rover in a base network. NMEA positions must messages from be send to a network. The type of NMEA message sent to the base the GS network. If more than one message is sent at a time, then all types are shown separated by comma. Next step Page changes to the Device page. RTK Data Link Status, Device page The content of this page differs for each type of device in use. Key Description OK To exit the screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. For all devices available Description of fields Field Description Name The name of the device. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 255 For RS232 Description of fields Field Description Type The type of device. Port The port to which the device is connected. Bluetooth Available if device is connected via Bluetooth. Indicates the state of the connection. For digital cellular phones and modems Description of fields Field Description Type The type of device. Port The port to which the device is connected. Firmware The software version of the attached digital cellular phone. Operator The name of the network operator in which the digital cellular phone is operating. Status The current mode of the digital cellular phone. The options are Unknown, Detection and Registered. Bluetooth Available if device is connected via Bluetooth. Indicates the state of the connection. Unavailable for CS 3.5G modem. Signal Indication of received signal strength of the digital cellular phone network. For radios Description of fields The available fields depend on the radio type. Field Description Port The port to which the device is connected. Type The type of device. Channel The radio channel. Actual frequency The current set frequency of the radio. Central freq The defined central frequency of the radio. Firmware The software version of the attached radio. Signal Indication of strength of received radio signal. Next step Page changes to the RTK base page. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 256 RTK Data Link Status, RTK base page As shown below, the name of the page changes depending on the type of base being used. Name of page Description RTK base page Base is a real base station. Base (Nearest) page Base is the closest to the rover determined by for example Leica GNSS Spider. Base (i-MAX) page Base information is individualised Master-Auxiliary corrections determined and sent by for example Leica GNSS Spider. Base (MAX) page Base information is Master-Auxiliary corrections determined and sent by for example Leica GNSS Spider. Base (VRS) page Base is a virtual base station. Base (FKP) page Base information is area correction parameters. Description of fields Field Description RTK base ID An identification for a base station. The ID can be converted into a compact format to be sent out with real-time data in all real-time data formats. It is different from the point ID of the base station. Antenna height • For RTK data format: Leica, RTK data format: Leica 4G, RTK data format: RTCM v3 or RTK data format: RTCM 9,2 v2/RTCM 1,2 v2 with RTCM version: 2.3: The antenna height at the base from the marker to the MRP. • For RTK data format: CMR/CMR+ and RTK data format: RTCM 18,19 v2 or RTK data format: RTCM 18,19 v2 with RTCM version: 2.2: The antenna height at the base from the marker to the phase centre. • For all other RTK data format: ----- is displayed because the data format does not include information about the antenna height. Coords of The coordinates for the base station which are transferred depend on the active real-time data format. • For real-time messages which include antenna height and antenna type: Marker. • For real-time messages which do not include antenna information: Phase Centre of L1. Number of aux The number of active auxiliary base stations from which data is ref received. Antenna at base The antenna used at the base. Sensor type at The instrument type used at the base. base Next step IF THEN other coordinate types are to be viewed Coord. Local coordinates are available when a local coordinate system is active. another page is to be accessed Page. this screen is to be quit OK exits the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 257 RTK Data Link Status, Connectivity page This screen shows the status real-time connectivity as dynamic troubleshooting screen. It shows the success of each of the steps in the connectivity to receive realtime corrections. If one step fails, the check box is unchecked. As each step is successfully completed, the check box will be checked. Real-Time Input Data The following provides additional information on the satellite data received via realtime message. Information of those satellites is displayed, which are used on both base and rover. Access Data.. on RTK Data Link Status, General page. Key Description OK To return to RTK Data Link Status. Sat - To display information about the satellite with the next smaller PRN. Sat + To display information about the satellite with the next larger PRN. Description of fields The data being received from the satellites and the layout of the screen depend on the active real-time data format. Field Description Sat PRN The PRN number (GPS), the Slot number (GLONASS) or the Space Vehicle number (Galileo) of the satellites shown with the prefix G (GPS), R (GLONASS) or E (Galileo). Sat Time The GPS time of the satellite. Phase L1, Phase L2, Phase L5 The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the GPS satellite on L1, L2 and L5. Phase L1, Phase L2 The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the GLONASS satellite on L1 and L2. Phase E1, Phase E5a, Phase E5b, Phase AltBOC The number of phase cycles from the antenna to the Galileo satellite on E1, E5a, E5b and Alt-BOC. Msg 18 L1, Msg 18 L2 The uncorrected carrier phases for L1 and L2. Msg 20 L1, Msg 20 L2 The carrier phase corrections for L1 and L2. Code L1, Code L2, Code L5 The pseudorange from the antenna to the GPS satellite for L1, L2 and L5. Code L1, Code L2 The pseudorange from the antenna to the GLONASS satellite on L1 and L2. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 258 Field Description Code E1, Code E5a, Code E5b, The pseudorange from the antenna to the Galileo Code AltBOC satellite on E1, E5a, E5b and Alt-BOC. Msg 19 L1, Msg 19 L2 The uncorrected pseudoranges for L1 and L2. Msg 21 L1, Msg 21 L2 The pseudorange corrections for L1 and L2. PRC Pseudorange corrections. RRC Rate of change of the corrections. IODE Issue Of Data Ephemeris. The identification number of the ephemeris for a satellite. 22.5 Current GPS position Description This screen shows information related to the current antenna position and the speed of the antenna. For real-time rover configurations, the baseline vector is also shown. MapView shows the current position in a graphical format. Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu, access is also possible by: • Tapping the position Status icon. Current GPS Position, Position page Key Description OK To return to the Main Menu. Coord To see other coordinate types. Local coordinates are available when a local coordinate system is active. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To determine how often positions are computed and the screen display is updated. Fn Elev To see height as elevation. Available when local grid coordinates are displayed. Fn Ell Ht To see height as ellipsoidal height. Available when local grid coordinates are displayed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 259 Description of fields Field Description Position latency The latency of the computed position. Latency is mostly due to time required for data transfer and computation of position. Depends on the use of the prediction mode. Position quality and Height quality Available for phase fixed and code only solutions. The 2D coordinate and height quality of the computed position. HDOP and VDOP Available for navigated solutions. Next step IF THEN the instrument is a real-time rover Page changes to the Baseline page. the instrument is not configured for real- Page changes to the Speed page. time the instrument is a real-time base Current GPS Position, Baseline page Current GPS Position, Speed page OK exits Current GPS Position. Information on the baseline vector is displayed. Next step Page changes to the Speed page. Description of fields Field Description Horizontal speed The speed over ground in the horizontal direction. On bearing Available for local coordinate systems. The bearing for the horizontal direction related to the North direction of the active coordinate system. Vertical speed The vertical component of the current velocity. Next step OK exits Current GPS Position. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 260 22.6 Raw data logging Description This screen shows information related to logging of raw observations. Access Standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu. Raw Data Logging Status, General page Key Description OK To return to the Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Description Data format Shows if raw data is saved and if so in which format. Logging to Shows where the data is saved. Current interval The type of current interval. Obs logged in The number of observations logged in current interval. current interval Total no. of static obs The number of static epochs recorded in the current job. Total no. of moving obs The number of moving epochs recorded in the current job. Next step Page changes to the Point occupation page. Raw Data Logging Status, Point occupation page Description of fields Field Description Current Status Shows if the instrument is moving or not. GDOP Current GDOP. Logging rate Rate at which raw observations are being recorded. No. of moving The number of logged moving raw observations. Reset as soon a new obs moving interval starts. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 261 Field Description Logging data from more than 5 sats since The time for how long five or more satellites are tracked on L1 and L2 without interruption. If less than five satellites were tracked, the counter is reset. The counter is not reset after Meas, Stop or Store. Measurement The percentage of collected data required for successful processing. completed It is a conservative estimate based on a 10 - 15 km baseline. The criteria used to display this value depend on the settings for Automatically stop point measurement, Stop criteria and Enter the values to be used to automatically stop the point occupation: in Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Quality control. Time to go The estimated time in hours, minutes and seconds until the configured criteria for Stop criteria or Enter the values to be used to automatically stop the point occupation: is reached. The criteria used to display this value depend on the settings for Automatically stop point measurement, Stop criteria and Enter the values to be used to automatically stop the point occupation: in Main Menu: Instrument\GPS settings\Quality control. Next step Page changes to the RTK base page. Raw Data Logging Status, RTK base page As shown below, the name of the page changes depending on the type of base used. Name of page Description RTK base page Base is a real base station. Base (Nearest) page Base is the closest to the rover determined by for example Leica GNSS Spider. Base (i-MAX) page Base information is individualised Master-Auxiliary corrections determined and sent by for example Leica GNSS Spider. Base (MAX) page Base information is Master-Auxiliary corrections determined and sent by for example Leica GNSS Spider. Base (VRS) page Base is a virtual base station. Base (FKP) page Base information is area correction parameters. Description of fields Field Option Logging static A time in sec obs ----- Description The logging rate at the base. This information is shown if the real-time message format supports this information and raw observations are being logged at the base. Raw observations are not being logged, or status information is not supported by RTK format. Next step OK exits Raw Data Logging Status. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 262 22.7 Connection status 22.7.1 Connection Status Description This screen gives an overview of all interfaces with the port and the devices currently assigned. Access Standard access from the Instrument status info/Base status info menu. Connection Status This screen consists of two pages, one for the field controller interfaces and one for the GS interfaces. For a GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12, the GS connections page is not shown. Key Description OK To return to the Main Menu. Intfce Available for configured interfaces being highlighted. To view information related to real-time data or the internet connection. Devce.. To view the status of the attached device. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 22.7.2 Internet Description This screen shows • if the instrument is online on the Internet. • for how long the instrument is online. • the technology of data transfer. • the amount of data received or sent since the instrument is online. Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated Internet interface. • On the Connection Status, CS connections page, highlight CS Internet.Intfce. • On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight GS Internet. Intfce. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 263 22.7.3 ASCII Input Description This screen shows the • incoming ASCII data which is stored as an annotation. • description of the incoming ASCII data for each annotation field. Not used is shown for annotation fields which are not configured to receive incoming ASCII data. Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated ASCII Input interface. On the Connection Status, CS connections page, highlight ASCII Input.Intfce. ASCII Input - Data Key Description OK To exit the screen. Data.. and Descr To change between the given description for the incoming ASCII data or the last received ASCII data. 22.7.4 RTK Data Link Status Description For information about this screen, refer to "22.4 RTK data link status". Access This screen is accessible for a configured RTK rover interface. On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight RTK Rover.Intfce. 22.7.5 Remote (OWI) Description This screen shows all available ports and the interfaces and devices configured to these ports. Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated remote interface. On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight Remote (OWI) Connections. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 264 Remote (OWI) Key Description OK To exit the screen. Devce.. Available for some devices. To view status information about the devices. Description of fields Column Description Port The physical port on the instrument which is being used for the interface functionality. Connection The interface configured for the ports. Device The hardware connected to the chosen port. Next step OK exits the screen. 22.7.6 Event Input 1/Event Input 2 Description This screen shows the incoming data from the event input interface. Access This screen is accessible for a configured and activated event input interface. On the Connection Status, GS connections page, highlight Event Input 1 or Event Input 2. Event input 1/Event input 2 Description of fields Field Description Time The local time of when the last event was available. Event Count The incrementing number of detected events. Counting starts as soon as the event input is configured and activated. To reset the counter to 0, press Reset. Event Pulse Count The incrementing number of detected pulses in the event input. Events which do not fulfil the requirements configured are counted as an event pulse but not as an event. This is, for example, the case when the time between two events is shorter than defined in Time. Counting starts as soon as the event input is configured and activated. To reset the counter to 0, press Reset. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 265 Next step OK exits the screen. Diagram c c a c a a a b b a) Event b) Event pulse c) Accuracy limit 0 GS12_129 22.8 Internet connection status Description The information on this screen is valid for the CS or TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite. The information is invalid for the GS. The status of the device used for the Internet connection is displayed as well as the status of the Internet connection itself. Access Besides the standard access from the Instrument status info menu, access is also possible by tapping the Internet icon. Internet Connection Status For a description of the Device, refer to "22.4 RTK data link status". On the Connectivity page, all necessary steps for an Internet connection are displayed. A checked box indicates that this step has been accomplished successfully. 22.9 TPS current station info Access Standard access from the Instrument status info menu. TPS Current Station Info Key Description OK To exit the screen. Coord To display other coordinate types. ppm/SF To switch between displaying the station scale factor and the station ppm. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 266 Description of fields Field Description Station ID Station ID of the current station setup. Instrument height Instrument height of the current station setup. Easting Easting value of the instrument position. Northing Northing value of the instrument position. Local ellipsoid ht or Elevation For a selected coordinate system, ellipsoidal height and elevation can be displayed. Temperature Temperature set on the instrument. Pressure Pressure set on the instrument. Atmospheric ppm Atmospheric ppm set on the instrument. Station ppm Ppm of the current station set up. Station scale Scale factor of the current station set up. Viva Series, Instrument - Instrument status info 267 23 Instrument - Base settings 23.1 Satellite tracking Description The settings on this screen define which satellite system, satellites and satellite signals are used by the instrument. Access Unavailable for GS05/GS06. This screen contains the same settings as the RTK Rover Satellite Tracking Settings screen. Changes made to the settings here in RTK Base mode, will be reflected in the RTK Rover mode and vice versa. For RTK base: Select Main Menu: Instrument\Base settings\Satellite tracking. Satellite Tracking Settings, Tracking page Key Description OK To accept changes. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description GPS L5 Check box Defines if the GPS L5 signal will be tracked. Glonass Check box Defines if GLONASS satellite signals are accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. Galileo Check box Defines if Galileo satellite signals are accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. BeiDou Check box Defines if BeiDou satellite signals are accepted by the instrument when tracking satellites. Show message & Check box audio warning, when loss of lock occurs Activates an acoustic warning signal and a message given by the instrument when satellites are lost. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 268 Satellite Tracking Settings, Advanced page Key Description OK To accept changes. Hlth.. Available for Satellite health: User defined. To configure the satellites used in the survey. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Cut-off angle Editable field Sets the elevation in degrees below which satellite signals are not recorded and are not shown to be tracked. Recommended settings: • For real-time: 10°. • For purely post-processing applications: 15°. DOP limit None, GDOP, HDOP, PDOP or VDOP If activated, the limit defined in Limiting value is checked. GPS positions are unavailable when the limit is exceeded. Limiting value Editable field The maximum acceptable DOP value. Available unless DOP limit: None. L2C tracking Automatic L2 signals which are flagged as unhealthy are not recorded or used for real-time computations. Always track L2C signals are always tracked. Sets the satellite tracking behaviour. Satellite health This setting is remembered when the instrument is turned off. It is stored as part of the configuration set. Automatic Incoming satellite signals are monitored by the instrument. Data from signals which are flagged as unhealthy is not recorded or used for real-time computations. User defined Satellites must manually be included/excluded from data recording and real-time computations with Hlth... Next step Hlth.. changes to Satellite Health. Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 269 Satellite Health This screen consists of the GPS page, Glonass page and the Galileo page. The explanations given for the softkeys are valid for all pages. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Use To change between the options in the column User. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Option Description Satellite 01 to 32 The Pseudo Random Noise number (GPS, 1 to 32), the Slot ID (GLONASS, 1 to 24) or the Space Vehicle number (Galileo, 1 to 30) of the satellites. There is a prefix G for GPS satellites, a prefix R for GLONASS satellites and a prefix E for Galileo satellites. System RAM OK, N/A or Unhealthy Information on the satellite health taken from the almanac. N/A stands for not available. User Bad Excludes satellite from tracking. OK Includes satellite in tracking. Auto Automatic satellite tracking when satellite is healthy. Next steps Step Description 1. Page changes to the Glonass page and to the Galileo page, where GLONASS satellites and Galileo satellites used in the survey can be configured. 2. OK returns to Satellite Tracking. 3. OK returns to Main Menu. 23.2 Base raw data logging Unavailable for GS05/GS06. Description Logged raw observations are used for Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings 270 • static and kinematic operations. With these operations, raw data is always postprocessed in the office. Raw data must therefore be logged on both base and rover instruments. • real-time operations to check the work in the office by post-processing. OR to fill in gaps when a real-time position could not be calculated in the field, for example, due to problems with the real-time data reception from the reference station or the RTK network provider Observations must be logged on all instruments which will be used for postprocessing. The settings on this screen define the logging of raw observations. Access For RTK base: Select Main Menu: Instrument\Base settings\Base raw data logging. Raw Data Logging Settings Key Description OK To accept changes. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Log base data Check box for post processing Rate From 0.05s to 300.0s Description Activates raw data logging. Rate at which raw observations are logged. Recommendations: • For static operations with long baselines and over long time Rate: 15.0s or Rate: 30.0s. • For base stations for post-processed and realtime kinematic rovers, Rate at the base should be the same rate as at the rover. Data type Selectable list Viva Series, Instrument - Base settings Data can be logged in the Leica proprietary MDB format or in RINEX. 271 24 Instrument - TPS camera settings For information on camera and images refer to "33 Camera & Imaging". 25 User - Work settings 25.1 ID templates 25.1.1 Accessing ID Template Configuration Description ID templates are predefined templates for point, line or area numbers. ID templates save having to type in the ID for each object. They are useful when many points are collected quickly, for example in post-processed and real-time kinematic operations. The ID templates that are selected to be used suggest IDs for Point ID, Line ID and Area ID when points, lines and areas are to be surveyed. Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\ID templates. ID Templates Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The currently active working style is automatically updated, to include the selected ID template. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description GPS points Selectable list Sets the ID templates for manually occupied GPS points. GPS auto points Selectable list Sets the ID templates for GPS auto points. These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. TPS points Selectable list Sets the ID templates for manually occupied TPS points. TPS auto points Selectable list Sets the ID templates for TPS auto points. These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. Auxiliary points Selectable list Sets the ID templates for auxiliary points. These points are used when trying to find a stakeout point. Viva Series, Instrument - TPS camera settings 272 Field Option Description Lines Selectable list Sets the ID templates for lines. Areas Selectable list Sets the ID templates for areas. Next step ENTER to open a selectable list and to access ID Template Library. ID Template Library Key Description OK To select the highlighted template. New.. To create a new ID template. Edit.. To edit the highlighted ID template. Delete To delete the highlighted ID template. It does not matter if the ID template is being used in a working style. The ID template will be rebuilt when that working style becomes active. Fn Default To recall deleted default ID templates. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Template The name of the ID template and the format of the ID object. Increment The amount by which the point ID is incremented. Default ID templates Some ID templates are implemented by default. Default ID template Description The last point ID during a survey will be displayed. This ID is automatically incremented if it contains numerical characters. If this ID is overwritten, the auto increment starts from the new ID. The automatic incrementation can be turned off when editing this ID template. Area0001 Suggested as ID for areas in default working styles. This ID is automatically incremented. Aux0001 Suggested as ID for auxiliary points in default working styles. These points are used when trying to find a stakeout point. This ID is automatically incremented. Viva Series, User - Work settings 273 Default ID template Description GPS0001 Suggested as ID for GPS measured points in default working styles. This ID is automatically incremented. GPS_Auto_0001 Suggested as ID for GPS auto points in default working styles. These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. This ID is automatically incremented. Line0001 Suggested as ID for lines in default working styles. This ID is automatically incremented. TPS0001 Suggested as ID for TPS measured points in default working styles. This ID is automatically incremented. TPS_Auto_0001 Suggested as ID for TPS auto points in default working styles. These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate. This ID is automatically incremented. Date & time The current local time and date is the ID. 25.1.2 Creating/Editing an ID Template Access In ID Template Library, highlight an ID template. A copy of this ID template is taken for further configurations. New... New ID Template/ Edit ID Template Key Description OK To store the new ID template into the ID template library. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description ID Editable field The name of the ID template and the format of the ID object. Any characters including spaces are allowed. Leading spaces are not accepted. Increment Selectable list IDs are incremented numerically or alphanumerically. Increment by Editable field The amount by which the point ID is incremented. Viva Series, User - Work settings 274 Examples for incrementation Field Option Description Cursor position Selectable list The character position at which the cursor is placed when ENTER is pressed in Point ID, Line ID or Area ID when surveying points. Last Character means that the cursor is placed immediately to the right of the last character. For Increment: Numeric only The rightmost numeric part is incremented within the point ID. ID Increment by Next point ID Notes Point994 5 Point999 Point1004 ... - 994point 5 999point 1004point ... - 123point123 -10 123point113 Numbers on the right are incremented. Negative increments allowed. Point11 -6 Point5 Point-1 Point-7 Point-13 ... - Abcdefghijklmn94 5 Abcdefghijklmno99 Incrementation fails if next Point ID increment fail increment will result in more than 16 characters. Abcdefghijklmno9 -5 Abcdefghijklmnop4 Negative incrementing fails Point ID increment fail if next increment requires negative sign and will result in more than 16 characters. For Increment: Alphanumeric The rightmost character within the point ID is incremented regardless of whether that character is numeric or alphanumeric. ID Increment by Next point ID Notes Point994 5 Point999 Point99E Point99J ... - 994point 5 994poiny Lower case alpha characters Point ID increment fail increment until z is reached. Then a new point ID must be entered. Viva Series, User - Work settings 275 ID Increment by Next point ID Notes Abcdef -5 Abcdea AbcdeV … AbcdeB Point ID increment fail Lower case alpha characters decrement from lower to upper case until A is reached. Then a new point ID must be entered. ABCDEB 5 ABCDEG ABCDEL ... Abcdez Point ID increment fail Upper case alpha characters increment from upper to lower case until z is reached. Then a new point ID must be entered. 25.2 Coding & linework Description The settings on this screen define the method of coding. Refer to "26 Coding" for a complete description of coding. Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Coding & linework. Coding & linework settings, Code & attributes page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Use a list box Check box to view codes If checked, codes stored within the job codelist can be selected from a selectable list to code points, lines and areas. Otherwise, each code must be entered manually. Suggested attributes Determines the attribute values displayed under certain circumstances. This setting is applicable to both the storing and displaying of attribute values. Default values Viva Series, User - Work settings When available, the default attribute values, as stored in the job, are displayed and stored. 276 Field Prompt for mandatory attributes Option Description Last used When available, the last used attribute values as stored in the job are displayed and stored. Always prompt A screen to enter mandatory attributes will always appear when codes being stored have one or more attributes of attribute type mandatory. Attributes of attribute type mandatory or fixed can only be created in LGO. Only if no value A screen to enter mandatory attributes will only appear when codes being stored have one or more attributes of attribute type mandatory, without an attribute value. Attributes of attribute type mandatory must always be created in LGO. Code change only A screen to type in mandatory attributes will only appear when a new code with a mandatory attribute was selected. Next step Page changes to the Linework page. Coding & linework settings, Linework page The flags for Linework are defined on this screen. A flag • is stored as a property of a point. • can be exported with a format file. • is different to a code. The flags defined on this screen are linked to the options available for Linework in a survey screen page of an application. The selection for Linework in a survey screen page determines the flag stored with a point. The availability of Linework in a survey screen page is configured in My Survey Screen Settings. Refer to "27 Linework" for information on Linework. Description of fields Field Option Description Automatically Check box create lines & areas when coding If checked, lines and areas can be automatically created and opened using codes. Use a stringing attribute Check box Available if Automatically create lines & areas when coding is checked. If checked, surveyed points that have the same code and attribute value for the Stringing attribute are strung together on one line. Attribute Selectable list Available if Use a stringing attribute is checked. The attribute value used to determine which surveyed points are strung together on one line. Begin line Editable field Opens a new line when the next point is stored. Any lines which are currently open are closed. The point can be stored with a point code. 3pt curve Editable field Stores the linework flag for a curve through the next three measured points and continues a line/area. Viva Series, User - Work settings 277 Field Option Description Re-open last line Editable field Opens the last used line again. End line Editable field Closes all open lines. Cont line/area Editable field Indicates a line/area is open. Start spline Editable field Stores the linework flag for beginning a spline and continues any open line/area. End spline Editable field Stores the linework flag to stop a spline. Cont spline Editable field Indicates a line/area is open with spline line type. Begin area Editable field Opens a new area when the next point is stored. Any areas which are currently open are closed. The point can be stored with a point code. Re-open last area Editable field Opens the last used area again. Close area Editable field Closes all open areas. Next step Page changes to the Quickcoding page. Coding & linework settings, Quickcoding page Description of fields Field Option Description Quickcoding Never Prevents the use of quick coding completely. On Allows the use of quick coding and activates it. Off Allows the use of quick coding, but keeps it deactivated. Digits to use 1, 2 or 3 Sets the mostly used number of digits for the quick code. Quick codes with fewer digits can still be used. While typing a quick code during a survey, using ENTER after typing one or two digits of the quick code indicates the end of the input. Store free code After pt is stored Determines if a free code measured with a quick or Before pt is code is stored before or after the point. stored Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, User - Work settings 278 25.3 My Survey Screen Description Display settings define the parameters shown on a page on the survey screen. Four survey screen pages are definable. Page Page Page Page 1: 2: 3: 4: Always shown on the survey screen. Can be shown or hidden on the survey screen. Can be shown or hidden on the survey screen. Never shown on the survey screen. Reserved for applications. The settings on this screen define the layout of the four survey screen pages. Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\My Survey Screen. My Survey Screen Settings, TPS and GPS page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Config.. To configure the selected survey screen page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Define Page 1, 2, 3 or 4 Selected survey screen page. Use in survey Check box Description Indicates if the survey screen page is shown or hidden as a page in Survey. Next step Highlight the survey screen page and Config.. to access Configure Page. Viva Series, User - Work settings 279 Configure Page Key Description OK To accept changes and to return to previous screen. Clear To set all fields to Line space full. Default To recall the default settings. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field The name of the page is shown as page name in Survey. Show in the Survey application Check box Shows or hides the page as a page in Survey. 1st line Display only Fixed to Point ID. 2nd line to 16th line For each line, one of the following options can be selected. Angle right Displays the horizontal angle difference between the backsight point and the current telescope position. % completed Display only field for the percentage of the time for which the point has been occupied based on the setting for Stop criteria in screen Quality Control. Appears in the page during the point occupation if Quality Control is checked. Annotation 1 to Annotation 4 Editable field for comments to be stored with the point. Antenna height Input field for antenna height for static observations. Attrib (free) 01 to Display only field for attributes for free codes. Attrib (free) 20 Attrib 01 to Attrib Editable field for attributes for codes. 20 Viva Series, User - Work settings Automation Unavailable for SmartStation. Select automation type. Avg max #distances Input field for maximum number of distance measurements in the averaging EDM mode. Azimuth Display only field for the azimuth. 280 Field Option Description Backsight pt ID Display only field for the point ID of the backsight point. Code Editable field for codes. Code (free) Editable field for free codes. Code desc (free) Display only field for the description of free codes. Code information Editable field for additional information relating to the code, such as instructions to the CAD package to start a line and string number and curve information. Viva Series, User - Work settings Description Display only field for the description of codes. Easting Display only field for Easting coordinate of measured point. GDOP Display only field for the current GDOP of the computed position. HDOP Display only field for the current HDOP of the computed position. Elevation Display only field for the height coordinate of the measured point. Height difference Display only field for the height difference between station and reflector. Horiz distance Display only field for horizontal distance. Humidity Editable field for relative humidity to be stored with point. Hz angle Display only field for the horizontal angle. Instrument height Display only field for the instrument height. Line space full Insert full line space. Line space half Insert half line space. Linework Selectable list with option for flagging a line/area. Local ellipsoid ht Display only field for the elevation of the current GNSS position. Measure mode Select EDM measurement mode. Measure Select EDM type. Moving antenna ht Input field for antenna height for moving observations. Msd PP obs Display only field for the number of static observations recorded over the period of point occupation. Appears in the page when recording of static observations is configured. Northing Display only field for Northing coordinate of measured point. Number of dists Display only field for number of averaged distances measured with EDM mode averaging. 281 Field Viva Series, User - Work settings Option Description Offset left/right Input field for horizontal distance offset for measured point, perpendicular to the line of sight. Offset height Input field for height offset for measured point. Offset in/out Input field for horizontal distance offset, in the direction of line of sight. Offset mode Select offset mode. PDOP Display only field for the current PDOP of the computed position. PPM atmos Display only field for atmospheric ppm. PPM geometric Display only field for geometric ppm value. PPM total Display only field for the total ppm value. Point ID Editable field for the point ID. Pressure Editable field for atmospheric pressure. Prism constant Display only field for additive constant of currently selected reflector. Quality 1D Display only field for the current height coordinate quality of computed position. Quality 2D Display only field for the current 2D coordinate quality of computed position. Quality 3D Display only field for the current 3D coordinate quality of computed position. RTK positions Display only field for the number of positions recorded over the period of point occupation. Appears in the page of real-time rover configurations. SD (last recorded) Display only field for the last recorded distance. Slope distance Display only field for measured slope distance. Station ID Display only field for current station ID. Station easting Display only field for current station Easting coordinates. Station height Display only field for current station height coordinates. Station northing Display only field for current station Northing coordinates. Std deviation Display only field of standard deviation in millimetres of averaged distances. Target Select a prism. Target height Input field for prism height. Temp dry Editable field for dry temperature to be stored with point. 282 Field Option Description Temp wet Editable field for wet temperature to be stored with point. Time at point Display only field for the time from when the point is occupied until point occupation is stopped. Appears in the page during the point occupation. Type Display only field for the type of code, for example point code, line code or area code. V angle Display only field for vertical angle. V angle display Select vertical angle display. VDOP Display only field for the current VDOP of the computed position. WGS84 ellipsoid ht Display only field for the current GNSS position. WGS84 latitude Display only field for the current GNSS position. WGS84 longitude Display only field for the current GNSS position. 25.4 Hot keys & favourites Description The settings on this screen assign functions, screens or applications to each of the first and second level of hot keys, including the user definable Smartkey F13, and the favourites key. Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Hot keys & favourites. OR Hold a hot key down for two seconds. This action is also possible after pressing Fn. Hot Keys & Favourites, GPS Hot Keys/ TPS Hot Keys page To configure the first level of hot keys. This page is only available for CS15 models. CS10 models do not have hot keys. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, User - Work settings 283 Description of fields Field Option Description F7 to F12 Selectable list All functions, screens or applications which can be assigned to the particular key. F13 Selectable list Available for MS50/TS50/TM50. All functions, screens or application programs which can be assigned to the user definable Smartkey. Next step Page changes to the GPS Fn+hot keys/TPS Fn+hot keys page. Hot Keys & Favourites, GPS Fn+hot keys/TPS Fn+hot keys page To configure the second level of hot keys. This page is only available for CS15 models. CS10 models do not have hot keys. The functionality on this page is identical to the one on the GPS Hot Keys/TPS Hot Keys page. Next step Page changes to the GPS Fn+favourites/TPS Fn+favourites page. Hot Keys & Favourites, GPS Fn+favourites/TPS Fn+favourites page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description 1 to 9 Selectable list All functions, screens or applications which can be assigned to the individual lines in the userdefined menu. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, User - Work settings 284 25.5 Prompt before storing Access Select Main Menu: User\Work settings\Prompt before storing. Prompt Before Storing, GPS and TPS page Check a box if you want to be asked for input/selection when storing a point with Store. Enter the Following This screen is displayed when prompting is configured in Prompt Before Storing and when storing a point with Store. Only the fields relating to the ticked check boxes in Prompt Before Storing are shown. Viva Series, User - Work settings 285 26 Coding 26.1 Overview Description A code is a description which can be stored by itself or with a point, line, or area. SmartWorx Viva coding is flexible with what types of codes can be stored and also how they are entered. Thematical and/or free codes can be stored to the system by; • selecting codes from a codelist, • entering a quick code combination, • directly typing in the code, or • selecting the code from a SmartCodes screen. Quick coding and SmartCodes are both quick ways for a code to be selected, a point to be measured, and both code and point to be stored. Coding methods For coding, points, lines and areas have the same behaviour. In this chapter, the word object is used as a generic term for points, lines and areas. Coding method Characteristic Thematical Use Selection of the codes Description To store a description together with an object inside an application or in Main Menu: Jobs & Data\ View & edit data. • For thematical coding with codelist: On a configured survey screen page, codes are selected from the job codelist in a selectable list. It is also possible to add thematical codes from the codelist to a SmartCodes screen for quick selection, or to select thematical codes using the quick coding method. The job codelist must contain thematical codes. • For thematical coding without codelist: On a configured survey screen page, codes are manually typed in. Free Recording of the codes Together with the objects. Use To store a description independent of an object at any time. A free code can be used to store a description related to an object, or additional descriptions such as the job name or temperature. Selection of the codes • For free coding using a codelist: Pressing the configured hot key opens a selectable list with the free codes of the job codelist. It is also possible to select free codes using the quick coding method. The job codelist must contain free codes. • For free coding with direct input: Pressing the configured hot key opens a screen for alphanumeric input. Viva Series, Coding 286 Coding method Quick Characteristic Description Recording of the codes Stored as time-related information. A time stamp is stored with each free code. Free codes selected using quick coding can be configured to be stored before or after the object. Use Quick coding is the storing of an object plus a thematical or free code using a minimum number of keystrokes. Selection of the codes Shortcuts must be assigned to codes in the job codelist. Quickcoding: On must be set in Coding & linework settings, Quickcoding page. Typing the shortcut searches for the assigned code. Point measurement begins. Recording of the codes • For thematical codes: Together with the objects. With Automatically stop point measurement and Automatically store point both checked in Quality control, the points and codes are immediately stored. • For free codes: Stored as time-related information before or after the points. A time stamp is stored with each free code. Quick codes must be created in LGO. Characters that can be assigned to quick codes are: • 0 to 9 • A to Z • a to z Configure coding Refer to "25.2 Coding & linework" for information on configuring coding. 26.2 Thematical Coding 26.2.1 Thematical Coding with Codelist Requirements • The job codelist contains thematical codes for points, lines and/or areas. • Use a list box to view codes is checked in Coding & Linework Settings. • A survey screen page with an editable field for codes must be configured. Access Open the selectable list for Code in a survey screen page of an application. OR Open the selectable list for a Code/Point code in New Point, Code page. The procedure is similar for lines and areas. OR Open the selectable list for Point code in Edit Point:, Code page. The procedure is similar for lines and areas. OR Open the selectable list for Code (auto) in Survey, Auto page, if configured. Viva Series, Coding 287 Select Code Select Code is shown as an example. Depending on the setting for Automatically create lines & areas when coding in Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page, either; • all point, line and area codes are available for selection, or • only those point codes from the job codelist, which belong to an active code group, are available for selection. Codes marked with * have attributes attached. Key Description OK To accept changes and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new code. Attrib Available unless creating/editing a point/line/area. To type in attribute values for the selected code and/or add new attributes for the selected code. Last Available if a code has been previously used in the working job. To select from a list of last used codes. The codes are sorted by time with the most recently used code at the top of the list. More To display information about the code description, the code group, the code type and the quick code if codes with quick codes exist in the job. Fn Group To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer to "7.5 Managing Code Groups". Fn Sort To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code, in the order they were added to the codelist, or the last used. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Highlight the desired code. • If a point code is selected then any open line/area is closed. The measured point is stored with the selected code independently of any line/area. • If a line code is selected then any open line is closed and a new line with the selected code is created. The line ID is defined by the configured line ID template. The measured point is assigned to that line. The line stays open until it is closed manually or another line code is selected. • If an area code is selected then the behaviour is as for lines. Attrib to access Enter Attributes. Viva Series, Coding 288 Enter Attributes If configured for the selected code, editable fields for attribute values are available. Any preconfigured attribute rules, for example, integer numbers only, a set range, or a selectable list, control what values can be entered. Type in the attribute values. Attribute values for attributes of type • normal can be edited. • fixed cannot be edited. Key Description OK To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. +Attrib To add a new attribute of type normal and of value type text. Up to twenty attributes can be added. Attributes of type mandatory or fixed and of value type real or integer must be created in LGO. Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and the attribute value to be used as the default attribute value can be typed in. Last To recall the last used attribute values for the selected code. Default To recall the default attribute values for the selected code. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Press OK. The code and any associated attribute values are stored when the point is stored. If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, attribute names and attribute values of the new and existing points must be identical. Should they not be identical, a screen opens where the code or attribute mismatch can be corrected. Viva Series, Coding 289 26.2.2 Thematical Coding without Codelist Requirements • Use a list box to view codes is NOT checked in Coding & Linework Settings. • A survey screen page with an editable field for codes must be configured. • A survey screen page with a selectable list for code types must be configured. Access A thematical code is typed in the field Code in a survey screen page of an application. OR Code/Point code in New Point, Code page. The procedure is similar for lines and areas. OR Point code in Edit Point:, Code page. The procedure is similar for lines and areas. OR in the field Code (auto) in Survey, Auto page, if configured. Survey, Code page Type in a code and attribute values. Up to eight attributes can be added. This setting is configured in the survey screen page. • If a point code is selected then any open line/area is closed. The measured point is stored with the selected code independently of any line/area. • If a line code is selected then any open line is closed and a new line with the selected code is created. The line ID is defined by the configured line ID template. The measured point is assigned to that line. The line stays open until it is closed manually or another line code is selected. • If an area code is selected then the behaviour is as for lines. Next step Press Meas. 26.3 Free Coding 26.3.1 Free Coding Using a Codelist Requirements • The job codelist contains free codes. • A hot key is configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes or the favourites menu is configured to display the option Select free code from list. Access Press a hot key configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes. Refer to "1.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys. OR For GPS mode, press and select Select free code from list to access the screen Select Free Code. For TPS mode, press Fn and select Select free code from list to access the screen Select Free Code. Refer to "1.2 Favourites Key" for information on the key. Viva Series, Coding 290 Select Free Code All free codes from the job codelist which belong to an active code group, are available for selection. Free codes marked with * have attributes attached. Key Description Store To store the free code and any associated attribute values and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new code. Attrib To type in attribute values and/or add new attributes for the selected free code. Refer to "26.2.1 Thematical Coding with Codelist". Last Available if a free code has been previously used in the working job. To select from a list of last used free codes. The free codes are sorted by time with the most recently used code at the top of the list. More To display information about the code description, the code group and the quick code if codes with quick codes exist in the job. Fn Group To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer to "7.5 Managing Code Groups". Fn Sort To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code or the last used. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 26.3.2 Free Coding with Direct Input Requirements A hot key is configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes or the favourites menu is configured to display the option Enter free code. Access Press a hot key configured to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes. Refer to "1.1 Hot Keys" for information on hot keys. OR For GPS mode, press and select Enter free code to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes. For TPS mode, press Fn and select Enter free code to access the screen Enter Free Code & Attributes. Refer to "1.2 Favourites Key" for information on the key. Enter Free Code & Attributes Type in a code and attribute values. As soon as a free code is typed in, a codelist is created within the job. Up to eight attributes can be added. Refer to "26.3.1 Free Coding Using a Codelist" for a description of keys. Next step Press Store. Viva Series, Coding 291 26.4 Quick Coding Requirements • The job codelist contains quick codes for points, lines and/or areas. • According to the user requirements, set Store free code: Before pt is stored or Store free code: After pt is stored in Coding & Linework Settings, Quickcoding. Activate quick coding The current setting for Quickcoding in the Quickcoding page determines how quick coding is activated. Quick coding can be activated at any time. • For Quickcoding: On, Quick coding is active and can be used. • For Quickcoding: Off, use a hot key, the favourites menu or tap the quick coding icon. • For Quickcoding: Never, change the setting manually. Performing Quick coding A screen must be active where points can be measured. Type in the one, two or three digits of the quick code. The current setting for Digits to use in Coding & Linework Settings, Quickcoding page determines by how many keystrokes quick coding is executed. Press ENTER to execute quick coding after less than the configured keystrokes. This action is possible after one keystroke for Digits to use: 2 and one or two keystrokes for Digits to use: 3. Press ESC to clear digits from the entry. Only mandatory attribute values can be entered. For non-mandatory attributes, either the default or the last used attribute values are stored, depending on the setting for Suggested attributes in Coding & Linework Settings, Code & attributes page. For point codes: • The point code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist and point measurement begins. • The point code and any associated attribute values are stored with the point. • If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, attribute names and attribute values of the new and existing points must be identical. Should they not be identical, a screen opens where the code or attribute mismatch can be corrected. For free codes: • The free code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist and point measurement begins. • The free code, associated attribute values and time related information are stored. The setting for Store free code in Coding & Linework Settings, Quickcoding page determines if the free code is stored before or after the point. For line/area codes: • The line/area code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist. • A new line/area is created and immediately stored with that line/area code and attributes. For the line/area ID, the line/area ID template as defined in ID Templates is used. Viva Series, Coding 292 26.5 SmartCodes 26.5.1 Overview Description SmartCodes is a quick way for a code to be selected and a point to be measured. All existing coding, linework, and point measurement functionality is retained. 26.5.2 Configuring SmartCodes Access In Survey press Fn Config.. to access Configuration. Configuration SmartCodes page The settings on this page activate the using of SmartCodes and define the method. All settings in this screen are stored within the currently active working style. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Coding Field Option Description Use SmartCodes Check box If checked, using of SmartCodes is activated. All other fields on the screen are active and can be edited. Measure point Check box when box is tapped If checked, when one of the code boxes is tapped in Survey, SmartCodes page, then the code is selected and the point is measured. Automatically move focus to next box Method by which subsequent code box is selected after a point is stored. Not used Nine code boxes are shown in the Survey, SmartCodes page, but no automatic movement of the focus takes place. Zig-Zag Each new code rotation through the block is started at the same end where the previous code rotation finished. Same direction Each new code rotation through the block is started at the same end where the previous code rotation started. 293 Field Option Refer to "59 Survey Cross Section" for an explanation of Zig-Zag and Same direction. Available for Automatically move focus to next box: Zig-Zag and Automatically move focus to next box: Same direction. The way of using the code boxes. This setting controls the order in which the code boxes will be rotated through automatically. Direction to move Number of code boxes Description Forward The code boxes are used in the same way as defined in Survey, SmartCodes page. Backward The code boxes are used in the reverse way as defined in Survey, SmartCodes page. From 1 to 9 Available for Automatically move focus to next box: Zig-Zag and Automatically move focus to next box: Same direction. Number of code boxes shown in Survey, SmartCodes page. Information shown in line 8 of Survey, SmartCodes page. Show at bottom of screen Not used No survey screen page element is shown. Point ID The identifier for manually measured points. The configured point ID template is used. 3D CQ The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed position. 2D CQ The current 2D coordinate quality of the computed position. 1D CQ The current height coordinate quality of the computed position. Linework The linework flag to be stored with the point. The options available depend on whether a line/area is currently open. Antenna The height of the antenna that is being used. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. height height The height of the reflector that is being used. Changing the reflector height here does not update the default reflector height as defined in the active configuration set. Hz The current horizontal angle of the measured point. V The current vertical angle of the measured point. Horiz distance The current horizontal distance of the measured point. Slope The current slope distance of the measured point. Target distance Height difference Viva Series, Coding The current height difference between the station and the measured point. 294 Field Option Description Automatically Check box create lines & areas when coding If checked, lines and areas can be automatically created and opened using codes. Use a stringing attribute Check box Available if Automatically create lines & areas when coding is checked. If checked, surveyed points that have the same code and attribute value for the Stringing attribute are strung together on one line. Stringing attribute Selectable list Available if Use a stringing attribute is checked. The attribute value used to determine which surveyed points are strung together on one line. Show code description instead of code Check box If checked, the code descripton is shown in the code boxes instead of the code. 26.5.3 Code Block Requirements • Use SmartCodes ticked in Configuration, SmartCodes page. Survey, SmartCodes page Key Description Meas To start recording positions. Codes.. To select a code to be assigned to the highlighted code block. Available when a code box is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Coding Field Option Description Code block Selectable list The code block to be used. Code box - A measured point is stored with the code assigned to the highlighted code box. 295 Field Option Description Linework Selectable list When Stringing attribute is configured in Stringing attribute, SmartCodes page, an attribute value can be typed in below the code name of the highlighted code box. The attribute value can also be modified using the softkeys + and -. For Measure point when box is tapped being checked in Stringing attribute, SmartCodes page, tapping the code box with the supplied stylus automatically starts measuring the point. Selecting the code box by using the arrow keys will not start measuring the point. Lines/areas are automatically opened and closed using SmartCodes, as configured. Available for Show at bottom of screen: Linework. Select the linework flag to be stored with the point. Then move the focus on the line/area code box. Next step Highlight a code block and press Codes.. to access Select Code. Select Code Viva Series, Coding Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. New.. To create a new code. Attrib To type in attribute values for the selected code and/or add new attributes for the selected code. Last Available if a code has been previously used in the working job. To select from a list of last used codes. The codes are sorted by time with the most recently used code at the top of the list. More To display information about the code description, the code group, the code type and the quick code if codes with quick codes exist in the job. Fn Group To view, create, delete, activate and deactivate code groups. Refer to "7.5 Managing Code Groups". Fn Sort To sort codes by code name, code description, quick code, in the order they were added to the codelist, or the last used. 296 Copying a code block to a new job step-by-step Key Description Fn Quit To exit the screen. Step 1. Description Code blocks are stored in the job. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\ Job properties. OR 2. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Choose working job or Choose control job. Edit.. to access Job Properties:. Codelist: If codes had been copied from the internal memory codelist, the name of the codelist is displayed. If codes have been typed in, then the name of the job is displayed. Fn Export to copy codes and code blocks from the job to an existing or new codelist. Copying code blocks to an existing codelist overwrites the code blocks of the existing codelist. 3. OK and Store to save the current job and return to Main Menu. 4. Create a new job and assign the related codelist to the job. SmartCodes from the codelist are now available within the new job. 26.6 Code and Attribute Mismatch 26.6.1 Code Mismatch Description When storing a point with a code, it can happen that a point with the same point ID already exists in the job. If the codes of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens where the code can be corrected. One point cannot have different codes. Point Code Mismatch This screen opens automatically if the codes of the new and the existing point do not match. Highlight the code to be stored with the new point. Viva Series, Coding Key Description Store To store the highlighted code and any associated attributes with the point being stored and to continue with the application or data management. More To display information about the code description, the code group and any attributes associated with the highlighted code. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 297 Description of fields Field Option Description New Code Display only The code for the point. Stored Code Display only The code as stored for the existing point in the job. 26.6.2 Attribute Mismatch Description If a point with the same point ID exists in the job, the codes, attribute names and attribute values of the new and existing points must be identical. Should the attributes not be identical, a screen opens where the attribute mismatch can be corrected. One point cannot have different attribute information. Attributes Already Stored/Attributes Being Stored The name of the screen changes with pressing Current or Stored: Pressing Current: Pressing Stored: Attributes Being Stored Attributes Already Stored This screen opens automatically if the attribute names and/or values of the new and the existing point do not match. Key Description Store To store the selected attributes with the new/created point and to continue with the application or data management. Current or Stored To change between viewing the attribute names and values of the new/created point and those values stored for the existing point in the job. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point code Display only • For Attributes Already Stored: The code of the existing point in the job. • For Attributes Being Stored: The code of the new point. Attributes Display only • For Attributes Already Stored: The attributes as stored for the existing point in the job. • For Attributes Being Stored: The attributes of the new point. Viva Series, Coding 298 26.7 Code Information Description Code information is additional information with up to 40 alphanumeric characters. Code information relates to the code, such as instructions to the CAD package to start a line and string number and curve information. Code information can be used independently of a code being selected. Code information is stored when the measured point is stored. Activating an editable field for code information The editable field for code information can be selected to be used in any survey screen mask for GPS and TPS. To configure a survey screen mask select Main Menu: User\Work settings\My Survey Screen. Press Config.. and select Code information for one of the fields. Using the code information editable field within applications If the use of the Code information field is configured to be used in a survey screen mask, then the editable field is shown on that survey screen mask in any application. At any time, text can be typed into the field. This text is remembered and remains displayed after the point is stored. To recall entered text use the keys Prev and Next when the Code information is highlighted. Viewing and editing code information To view/edit code information, go to: • Data:, Points page. Use More until the code information is visible. • Edit Point:, Code page. Exporting code information To export code information select: • Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export ASCII data. Press Config.. to activate the export of code information. • Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export custom data. Configure a format file to export code information for entered points/lines/areas, points/lines/areas measured by GPS/TPS, GPS baselines or TPS measurements. Viva Series, Coding 299 27 Linework 27.1 Overview Description Working with lines can be automated. Two ways of working are available. They are listed in this table. The two ways of working can be mixed. Linework by Description Linework listbox The Auto page in Survey and any survey screen page, can be configured to show a field Linework with a selectable list. Any application can be configured to display a survey screen page and therefore have access to this Linework field. The selection from the selectable list determines • the action taken for a line/area, for example opening or closing a line. • the linework flag stored with a point. The linework flags • are configured in Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page. • can be exported with a format file. Coding Point, line or area codes can be selected in many applications. Selecting a point, line or area code closes any open line/area and opens a new line/area. Refer to "26 Coding" for more information. The linework flag can be used without thematical coding by using the linework field in the Survey screen page configuration. The code can be linked to linework if it is configured as a point code to start a line/area, or it is a line or area code. Quick coding can be used as described in "26.4 Quick Coding". 27.2 Performing Linework using the Linework Field The Survey application is used here to explain Linework. Requirements • A survey screen page with a selectable list for Linework must be configured. • The linework flags must be defined in Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page. • Access Linework using the linework field stepby-step Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey. Step Description 1. Go to the point to be measured. 2. Select the linework flag to be stored with the point. 3. Viva Series, Linework The rover menu must be used. Measure the point. Depending on the option selected for Linework, a line/area is opened, closed or reopened. 4. Repeat steps 1. to 5. until all points for the linework are measured. 5. Fn Quit to exit the Survey application. 6. Use a format file to export the points including the linework flags. 300 27.3 Performing Linework with Thematical Coding Description Linework and coding can be combined. This combination can be useful, because coding, assigning linework flags and opening/closing lines/areas can all be done with one point observation. Combining Linework and coding can only be configured if thematical point codes or if thematical point, line and area codes are available for selection. Thematical coding can be done with or without codelists. Configuration options Linework and coding can also be combined using SmartCodes. Refer to "26.5 SmartCodes". The configuration for the types of codes available and the configuration for coding with/without a codelist both have an influence on the following: • The required configuration of a survey screen page. • The behaviour of the fields configured for the survey screen page. • The behaviour of the software. The possible configurations and their influence on the coding related fields are shown in this table: Configuration selected in the Coding & Linework Settings screen Behaviour of the coding related fields depending on the configuration selected. Code Use a list box to view codes Code type Linework Selectable list Display only Selectable list Selectable list Display only Selectable list Automatically create lines & areas when coding Use a list box to view codes Automatically create lines & areas when coding Use a list box to view codes Editable field Selectable list Selectable list Editable field Display only Automatically create lines & areas when coding Use a list box to view codes Selectable list Automatically create lines & areas when coding Requirements • A • • • survey screen page must be configured with a field for Code. a selectable list for Linework. a selectable list for Code type when using point, line and area codes without a codelist (Use a list box to view codes is unchecked). This field is not required if only point codes are used, or when working with a codelist (Use a list box to view codes is checked). • Configure in Coding & Linework Settings, Code & attributes page • Automatically create lines & areas when coding checked or not checked. • Use a list box to view codes checked or not checked. • In Coding & Linework Settings, Linework page, define the linework flags. • Viva Series, Linework The rover menu must be used. 301 The Survey application is used here to explain the combination of Linework and Coding. Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey. Survey, Survey page This example is what a survey screen page configured for Linework and coding looks like. The most important keys are explained. Linework and Coding step-by-step Key Description Meas To start recording positions. The key changes to Stop. Stop To end recording of positions when enough data is collected. The key changes to Store. Store To store the point information. The key changes to Meas. Meas To measure and store distances and angles. Stop Available if Measure mode: Continuous and Dist was pressed. Stops the distance measurements. The key changes back to Meas. Dist To measure and display distances. Available unless Measure mode: Continuous and/or Log auto points checked, after the tracking or logging is started. Store To record data. If Measure mode: Continuous and/or Log auto points checked, records measured point and continues tracking. Step Field Use a list box to view codes Use a list box to view codes checked not checked 1. Code 2. Viva Series, Linework Description for thematical coding Select a code from the Type in a code. selectable list. Depending on the configuration only point codes, or also line and area codes are available for selection. to store a point without code or to perform Linework without coding. Code type ----- to store a point without code or to perform Linework without coding. Point is displayed. This field is a display only field. It cannot be changed. 302 Step Field Description for thematical coding Use a list box to view codes Use a list box to view codes checked not checked 3. Linework 4. Viva Series, Linework Select an option for the linework flag to be stored with the point. Refer to "27.2 Performing Linework using the Linework Field" for a description of the options. Select ----- to store a point without linework flag or to perform coding without Linework. - Press Meas, Stop and Store. Press Meas. - • The point is stored with the selected code. - • The point is stored with the selected linework flag. - • The choice of linework flags available for Linework is updated. 303 28 User - Working style wizard 28.1 Overview Description The software has many configurable parameters and functions which can be set by the user to suit their preferred method of working. These preferred settings can be saved as a Working Style. Using the Working Style Wizard, all the settings can be defined at once. Alternatively, all screens of this wizard can also be accessed individually from User\Work settings and User\System settings. Default working style A default working style exists on the instrument. It uses standard settings for most applications. The default working style can be edited or deleted. It is always possible to restore the default working style by formatting the internal memory. User defined working styles New working styles can be created. The working style wizard assists in editing working styles. Edit outside the working style wizard Parameters and functions can be edited without going through the working style wizard. 28.2 Accessing the Working Style Wizard Access Select Main Menu: User\Working style wizard. Working Style Wizard Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Next step IF you want to THEN select a different set of settings select New working style, press Next and continue with "28.3 Choosing a Different Working Style". create a new set of select Choose a different working style, press Next and settings continue with "28.4 Creating a New Working Style". edit an existing set of settings Viva Series, User - Working style wizard select Edit a working style, press Next and continue with "28.5 Editing a Working Style". 304 28.3 Choosing a Different Working Style Working Style Wizard, Choose the working style to use. Select an existing working style from the selectable list. Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Delete To delete the highlighted working style. Back To return to the previous screen. 28.4 Creating a New Working Style Working Style Wizard, Enter the working style details. Type in the name and a description for the new working style. Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Viva Series, User - Working style wizard 305 28.5 Editing a Working Style Working Style Wizard, Choose the working style to edit. Select the working style to be edited from the selectable list. Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Delete To delete the working style currently shown in the selectable list immediately. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Description of fields Field Option Create a copy Check box Viva Series, User - Working style wizard Description Creates a copy of the working style before the editing process starts. 306 29 User - System settings 29.1 Regional settings Description The settings on this screen define • the units for all types of measurement data displayed. • information related to some types of measurement data. • the order in which coordinates are displayed. • the instrument identification number. • the languages available on the instrument. Access Select Main Menu: User\System settings\Regional settings. Regional Settings, Distance page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description The units shown for all distance and coordinate related fields. Distance Metre (m) Metres [m] International ft (fi) International feet [fi], storage in US feet Distance decimal Intl ft/inch (fi) International feet [fi], inches and 1/8 inches (0' 00 0/8 fi), storage in US feet US ft (ft) US feet [ft] US ft/inch (ft) US feet, inches and 1/8 inches (0' 00 0/8 fi) [ft] US mile (mi) US miles [mi] Kilometre (km) Kilometres [km] From 0 to 4 The number of decimal places shown for all distance and coordinate related fields. This setting is for data display and does not apply to data export or storage. The available options depend on the selected Distance. Selects display format for all chainage information fields. Chainage format +123456.789 Viva Series, User - System settings Default chainage display form. 307 Field Option Description +123+456.789 Separator between hundreds and thousands. +1234+56.789 Separators between tens and hundreds. +123.4+56.789 Separator between tens and hundreds with additional decimal point. PegN°+10.000 In this format, a peg distance is used to calculate a peg number and determine what additional value is shown next to it. For example, at chainage of 100 m and a peg distance of 20 m, the peg number equals 5 (100/20 = 5). Chainage Chainage Chainage Chainage 100 m = 5 + 0.000 110 m = 5 + 10.000 -100 m = -5 - 0.000 -90 m = -4 - 10.000 Area m², Intl acres (Ai), The units shown for all area-related fields. US acres (A), Hectares (ha), fi² or ft² Volume m³, fi³, ft³ or yd³ The units shown for all volume-related fields. Next step Page changes to the Slope page. Regional Settings, Slope page OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option All fields Description The input and output format for grades. h:v Horizontal by vertical distance. v:h Vertical by horizontal distance. %(v/h x 100) Percentage of vertical by horizontal distance. Elevation angle Elevation angle. Next step Page changes to the Angle page. Viva Series, User - System settings 308 Regional Settings, Angle page Description of fields Field Option Description Angle 400 gon, 360°'", 360° dec or 6400 mil The units shown for all angular and coordinate related fields. The number of decimal places shown for all angular and coordinate related fields. This setting is for data display and does not apply to data export or storage. Angle decimal Hz angle display From 1 to 4 Available for Angle: 6400 mil. From 2 to 4 Available for Angle: 400 gon and Angle: 360° dec. 5 Available for MS50/TS50/TM50 and Angle: 400 gon or Angle: 360° dec. Unavailable for remote configuration. 0.1", 1", 5", 10" or 60" Available for Angle: 360°'". North azimuth, South azimuth,North anti-clockwise Sets the reference direction as well as the direction from where and how azimuths are computed. The azimuth fields in other screens are called Azimuth. Bearing The azimuth fields in screens are called Bearing. NE, SW, SE and NW indicate the quadrant of the bearing. NW SW N NE SE GS_049 Angle right Displays the horizontal angle difference between the backsight point and the current telescope position. The azimuth fields in screens are called Angle right. P1 P2 GS_128 Viva Series, User - System settings P0 309 Field Option Description P0 Instrument station P1 Backsight point P2 Point in direction of current telescope position Azimuth Angle right GPS direction True or Magnetic Sets the North direction. ref Declination Editable field Available for GPS direction ref: Magnetic. The value for the magnetic declination. It is considered when computing or using any azimuth values. V angle display Zenith angle V = 0 in zenith. Elevation angle V = 0 horizontal elevation angle. Vertical angles are positive above the horizon and negative below it. Elevation angle % V = 0 horizontal. Vertical angles are expressed in % and are positive above the horizon and negative below it. Hold V angle Check box after a Dist measurement If checked, the vertical angle is fixed after a distance measurement with Dist, whereas the horizontal angle is continuously updated with the telescope movement. If not checked, the vertical angle is continuously updated with the telescope movement. The active prism height is applied in the calculation of remote point elevations. The prism height must be set to zero to display and record the elevation of the targeted remote point. Next step Page changes to the Time page. Regional Settings, Time page The time zone is read from WinCE. Description of fields Field Option Description Time format 24 hour or 12 hour (am/pm) How the time is shown in all time-related fields. Current time Display only Shows an example of the selected time format. Date format Day.month.year, Month/day/year or Year/month/day How the date is shown in all date-related fields. Current date Display only Shows an example of the selected date format. Next step Page changes to the Coords page. Viva Series, User - System settings 310 Regional Settings, Coords page Description of fields Field Option Grid format Easting, northing The order in which grid coordinates are shown in or Northing, all screens. The order in survey screen pages easting depends on the user settings. Geodetic format Latitude, longitude or Longitude, latitude Switch Check box Easting for CAD files and Switch Northing for CAD files Description The order in which geodetic coordinates are shown in all screens. The order in survey screen pages depends on the user settings. When these boxes are checked, then the signs of the Easting and Northing coordinates of CAD files are changed so that the CAD file in MapView is mirrored. The setting applies to all applications, including Roads. The signs of the Easting/Northing coordinate only change for the display purposes. The signs are not changed in the database. When importing/exporting dxf data, the signs of the data are switched according to the setting. Next step Page changes to the Language page. Regional Settings, Language page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Delete To delete the highlighted language. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Language The languages available on the instrument. Three languages can be stored on the instrument at one time - English and two others. English cannot be deleted. Viva Series, User - System settings 311 Column Description The selected language is used for the system software. If a language is not available for the system software, the English language is used instead. Applications are available in the languages that were loaded on the instrument when the application was installed. Next step Page changes to the Others page. Regional Settings, Others page Description of fields Field Option Description Temperature Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F) The units shown for all temperature-related fields. Pressure mbar, mmHg, Inch Hg (inHg), hPa or psi The units shown for all pressure-related fields. PSI = pounds per square inch. Velocity unit Km/h (kmh), Mph The units shown for all velocity-related fields. (mph) or Knots (kn) Next step Page changes to the Device ID page. Regional Settings, Device ID page Description of fields Field Option Description Device ID Editable field This number is used for the generation of the file names. Using format files, the instrument ID can be exported together with data from the instrument. By doing so, it can be identified which instrument was used for certain measurements. Sets a four-digit number as instrument identification number. By default the last four numbers of the serial number are used. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, User - System settings 312 29.2 SmartWorx options Description The settings on this screen define the behaviour of the instrument for a general start up. Access Select Main Menu: User\System settings\SmartWorx options. Welcome to SmartWorx Viva! If a check box is checked, the corresponding screen is shown during start up. If all check boxes are unchecked, then, after turning on the instrument, the Main Menu is accessed immediately. Welcome to SmartWorx Viva!, StartUp PIN code page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. If Use PIN: Yes, then, after turning on the instrument, a PIN code must be entered. Description of fields Field Option Description Use PIN Yes PIN protection is activated and a PIN code must be entered at startup. No PIN protection is not activated and no PIN code is required at startup. Editable field Available if Use PIN: Yes The new PIN code that will be required at startup. PIN codes must be numerical only and 4 to 6 digits in length. New PIN Next step Page changes to the General page. Welcome to SmartWorx Viva!, General page If the check box for Use drop down menus in the main menu is checked, then menus will appear as drop down menus. If the check box for Use drop down menus in the main menu is unchecked, then menus will appear as graphical menus. Next step OK to the save the changes and return to the Main Menu. Viva Series, User - System settings 313 29.3 Screen & audio Description The settings on this screen allow the screen appearance to be configured, turn the notification beeps on and off and define the behaviour of the keys. The settings are stored on the field controller itself. If the field controller is exchanged, the settings stored on the new field controller apply. Access Select Main Menu: User\System settings\Screen & audio. Screen & Audio Settings, Screen page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Calib To calibrate the touch screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Minimise instrument icon tool bar Check box If checked, the icon tool bar on the top of the screen is minimised to one small icon on the top left. Tap this icon to make the full icon tool bar visible again. Use the touch Check box screen If checked, the touch screen is turned on. Next step Page changes to the Audio page. Screen & Audio Settings, Audio page Description of fields Field Option Description Message sounds Sounds only A sound alert will be given when an information message appears. Sounds & voice A sound and voice alert will be given when an information message appears. Use Hz sector Check box beeps with total stations Viva Series, User - System settings If checked, the horizontal sector beep is turned on. The instrument beeps when within 5 gon/4°30’ of the defined sector, has a long and consistent beep within 0.5 gon/27’ and no beep within 0.005 gon/16’’. 314 Field Option Description Hz sector angle Editable field Editable field for the sector angle for which a beep will sound. Next step Page changes to the Text input page. Screen & Audio Settings, Text input page Description of fields Field Option Description Data input method Function keys, Mobile phone style or Pop-up keyboard Alphanumeric input can either be through function or numeric keys. For the CS10 model, alphanumeric input can also be through an on-screen pop-up keyboard to be used with the stylus. Default characters Selectable list Sets the set of extra characters available through Alpha or F1-F6 whenever an entry is made. The choices available depend on the character sets loaded on the instrument and the language configured to be used. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. 29.4 Admin settings Description By the settings on this screen, access to certain areas of the system can be locked for other users, for example restricting them from creating a new working style. To unlock the system, a correct password has to be entered. The number of attempts of password entries is not limited. Access Select Main Menu: User\System settings\Admin settings. IF the system is THEN locked the password must be typed in. not locked restriction settings can be set and a password can be defined. Refer to "Admin Settings Wizard, What do you want to do?". Admin Settings Wizard, What do you want to do? Viva Series, User - System settings 315 Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Next step Admin Settings Wizard, Enter new admin password. IF you want to THEN lock settings select Edit user restrictions, press Next and continue with "Admin Settings Wizard, Enter new admin password.". edit lock settings select Edit user restrictions, press Next and follow the instructions on the screen. Then continue with "Admin Settings Wizard, Select the settings to be available.". Description of fields Field Option Description Password Editable field Type in the password. Next step Page saves the password and changes the state of the system to Restricted. Admin Settings Wizard, Select the settings to be available. Admin Settings Wizard, Do you want to apply user restrictions? Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Edit.. To open the screen corresponding to the highlighted field. Shows the screen that will be hidden or displayed. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Key Description Next When Yes, apply user restrictions now is checked and this key is pressed, a password can be typed in. When No, just finish the wizard is checked, this key returns to the Main Menu. Back To return to the previous screen. Viva Series, User - System settings 316 30 User - Tools & other utilities 30.1 Transfer user objects Description This chapter describes the basic procedure for • transferring objects between the data storage device and the internal memory. • sending a job from the CS10/CS15 to the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite and vice versa. Since the TS menu cannot be used when it is connected to the CS, the commands for sending the jobs from and to the TS must be operated from the CS only. Refer to "Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device" for information about file types and locations of files on the data storage device. Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Transfer user objects. Transfer User Objects Key Description OK To transfer an object and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. For transfer between TS and CS, the job is transferred through Bluetooth, radio or cable. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Object to transfer Selectable list Listed are the objects that can be transferred. The available fields on the screen depend on the option selected. Data storage device to transfer object from. From To CF card Transfer from CS CompactFlash card. SD card Transfer from CS Secure Digital Memory card. USB Transfer from CS USB. Internal memory Transfer from the field controller. TS Internal memory Transfer from TS internal memory. TS SD card Transfer from TS Secure Digital Memory card. Selectable list Data storage device to transfer object to. Data storage device not selected in From. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 317 Field Option Description Job Selectable list To select the job to be transferred between memory devices or to/from TS. Admin settings Selectable list To transfer the Admin settings defined. Antenna Selectable list To select the antenna records to be transferred. Codelist Selectable list To select the codelist to be transferred. Working style Selectable list Coordinate system Selectable list CSCS field file Selectable list File Display only To select the configuration set to be transferred. To select the coordinate system to be transferred. To select the Country Specific Coordinate System to be transferred. The dial-up list, the RTK Rover Wizard list, the server list to be transferred as a binary file. To select the custom templates stored on the data storage device in CONFIG\SKETCH_TEMPLATES. Format file Selectable list Geoid field file Selectable list To select the format files to be transferred. To select the Geoid Field File to be transferred. Choose working job Selectable list To select the job to be transferred. Rail job Selectable list To select the Rail job to be transferred. Available when the Roads application is loaded. Road job Selectable list To select the Road job to be transferred. Available when the Roads application is loaded. Tunnel job Selectable list To select the Tunnel job to be transferred. Available when the Roads application is loaded. XSL Stylesheet Selectable list To select the stylesheets to be transferred. Transfer for use with System1200 Check box Available for jobs with To: CF card. When this box is checked, the job files are copied to the DBX folder, not to a subfolder. Transfer all Check box objects of the selected type Available for some transfer object options. To transfer all objects. Transfer all Check box objects into a single VivaSystem.zi p file Available for Object to transfer: All objects. To zip all objects automatically during transfer. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities Custom templates for the sketch pad are included. 318 30.2 Uploading System Files Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load firmware & Apps. Load firmware & Apps Key Description OK To upload an application, firmware or language and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Delete To delete an application or language. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Object to transfer Apps Application uploads are possible from the data storage device to the field controller. These files are stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the data storage device and use the extension *.a*. Firmware Firmware uploads are possible from the data storage device to the field controller. These files are stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the active memory device and use the extension *.fw. The firmware file for SmartWorx Viva includes the firmware of the CS 3.5G modem. However, the firmware of the CS 3.5G modem can also be loaded separately by using the stand-alone loader tool loader.exe. Refer to the CS10/CS15 User Manual and follow the CS firmware update instructions. Language Language uploads are possible from the data storage device to the field controller. These files are stored in the \SYSTEM directory of the data storage device and use an extension that is individual to each language. From Selectable list Upload from CompactFlash card, Secure Digital Memory card or USB stick. App Selectable list List of application files stored on the card. Firmware Selectable list List of firmware files stored on the card. Language Selectable list List of language files stored on the card. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 319 Field Option Description Version Display only Version of the application/firmware/language file chosen. In order to load the firmware to a GS05/GS06, the GS05/GS06 must be connected to the CS. It is not possible to have more than three language files stored on the instrument. English is always available as the default language and cannot be deleted. There is only one version of each application. The application will be installed in English and in any other language that is already loaded onto the instrument. If a new language is loaded after an application has been installed, the application will need to be reinstalled to become available in the new language. 30.3 Load licence keys Description A licence key can be used to activate applications and protected options and can be used to define the expiry date of the software maintenance. Refer to "32 User - About Leica Viva" to find out how to check the expiry date of the software maintenance. A licence key file can be uploaded to the field controller. To upload a licence key file the file must be located on the \SYSTEM directory of the data storage device. Licence key files use the naming convention L_123456.key, where 123456 is the instrument serial number. In order to upload the GS05/GS06 Glonass licence, the GS05/GS06 must be connected to the field controller. To delete the GS05/GS06 Glonass licence from the GS05/GS06, upload the GS05/GS06 GPS licence. Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load licence keys. OR Select an application not yet activated. Load Licence Keys Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu or continue with the application. Fn Delete To delete all licence keys on the field controller. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 320 Description of fields Field Option The method used to input the licence key to activate the application or the protected options or the software maintenance. Load key Key Description Upload key from file The licence key file is uploaded from the data storage device. The licence key file must be stored in the \SYSTEM directory on the data storage device. Enter manually Allows the licence key to be typed in manually. Editable field Available for Load key: Enter manually. The licence key required to activate an application. Entry is not case sensitive. 30.4 Ftp data transfer Description This functionality is to transfer jobs, codelists and other Viva Series related files on the data storage device with a standard and simple FTP server. FTP protocol is used to transfer between Viva Series, which runs SmartWorx Viva and has an Internet device connected, and the FTP server. The zip/unzip functionality is included. Licence keys can also be typed in manually in Main Menu:User\Tools & other utilities\Load licence keys or the first time the functionality is started. Supported files The following list shows the supported file extensions that will automatically move to the corresponding directory after downloading. Supported file File extension Directory Almanac file Almanac.sys DATA/GPS Antenna file from GPS List.ant GPS Application files *.a* SYSTEM ASCII files for import/export to/from job *.txt DATA Coordinate system file from GPS Trfset.dat DBX CSCS field files *.csc DATA/GPS/CSCS DXF files for import/export to/from job *.dxf DATA Firmware files *.fw SYSTEM Format files *.frt CONVERT Geoid field files *.gem DATA/GPS/GEOID GSI files *.gsi GSI GSM/Modem station list from GPS *.fil GPS Language files *.s* SYSTEM Licence file *.key SYSTEM Report sheets created from applications *.log DATA TPS working style files *.xfg CONFIG System files System.ram SYSTEM Custom ASCII file (SmartWorx Viva Export) *.cst DATA Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 321 Supported file File extension Directory Comma separated variables, text file format (ASCII) *.csv DATA Configure and connect the Internet interface before using this function. Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Ftp data transfer. Ftp Connection Details Key Description Conect To connect to the FTP server entered. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Host Editable field In order to get access to the Internet, a host name is required. This host name identifies the instrument in the Internet. TCP/IP port Editable field Port to be used. Any number between 0 and 65535 is valid. User ID Editable field The User ID allows connection to the ftp site. If no value is typed in, then the instrument logs into the FTP server anonymously. Password Editable field The password to get access to the ftp site. Next step Conect. Once the connection to the FTP server is established, the Ftp Data Transfer, Field page is displayed. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 322 Ftp Data Transfer, Field page The files and folders on the selected memory device of the instrument are displayed including their size. To get into the folders, highlight the folder and ENTER. Key Description Send To copy the file or folder to its corresponding directory on the ftp server. Files or folders bigger than 100 KB are zipped before sending. Unzip To unzip a file in the download directory. Available if a zip file is highlighted. Import To move a file from the \Download folder to the appropriate directory folder based on its file extension type. Available in the \Download folder when a file is highlighted. Unavailable for unrecognised files in the \Download folder. These files must stay in the \Download folder. CF card, SD card, USB or Intrnl To change between the data storage devices and the internal memory. Fn Quit To return to Main Menu and disconnect automatically from the FTP server. Next step Page changes to the Office page. Ftp Data Transfer, Office page The files located on the FTP server are displayed. Whenever switching to this page, if the connection to the server was disconnected, then a refresh action is done or it reconnects to the server. The most important keys are explained. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 323 Key Description Transf To download the highlighted file or folder list on the FTP server to the local download folder. If recognised by the system, downloaded files are moved automatically to the corresponding directories. If not, they are stored in the download folder. Zipped files are unzipped before storing in the download folder. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Refrsh To refresh the FTP directory. Fn Quit To return to Main Menu and disconnect automatically from the FTP server. 30.5 Format memory devices Description Allows the data storage device and the internal memory to be formatted. All data will be erased. Access If the internal memory is formatted, all system data such as almanac, user-defined configuration sets, user-defined antennas, codelists, geoid field files and CSCS field files will be lost. Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Format memory devices. Format Memory Device Key Description OK To format a memory device and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Memory device Selectable list The type of memory to be formatted. CF card Formatting the CF card will delete all data currently stored on the CF card. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 324 Field Option Description Internal memory Formatting the Internal Memory will delete the following objects currently stored on the internal memory - Jobs, Admin Settings, Codelists, Coordinate Systems, Format Files, Geoid & CSCS field files, RTK Profiles, Sketch Templates & User Entered Antenna. SD card Formatting the SD card will delete all data currently stored on the SD card. USB stick Formatting the USB stick will delete all data currently stored on the USB stick. Apps Formatting the Apps will delete all currently loaded apps. System Formatting the System RAM will delete the following objects - Working Styles, Stations to Dial lists & Server lists. 30.6 View contents of ASCII files Description Allows ASCII files selected for From file in Import ASCII Data to be viewed in WordPad. Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\View contents of ASCII files. WordPad opens. 30.7 Leica Exchange 30.7.1 Overview Availability Leica Exchange is available on your TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite/MS50/TS50/TM50 instrument or CS10/CS15 field controller. Description Leica Exchange is an online service that allows the data exchange between two users of the service. For example: • The user in the field sends the daily measured data to the user in the office. • The user in the field sends a codelist to a second user in the field. Requirements • Valid Leica Exchange subscription • SmartWorx Viva 4.0 or higher • Leica Exchange licence key loaded on a CS field controller/TS instrument AND / OR • Leica Exchange entitlement ID loaded on a computer with Leica Exchange Office Creating User name and Password stepby-step Step Description 1. Order a Leica Exchange subscription. You will receive a subscription form. 2. Take the subscription ID in the subscription form and log in to your myWorld account (https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com). 3. Navigate to myTrustedServices. 4. On the My Trusted Services tab, select Add Service and type in the subscription ID. 5. The Leica Exchange Service is shown in the My Trusted Services tab. Once the Leica Exchange Service is registered, users can be assigned to the service on the My Users tab. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 325 Step Description 6. Access Click the Add button to define a new user and to assign services to the user. For each user: • Enter contact information • Define a unique user name • Assign a password The user name and password are needed each time you access the Leica Exchange Service. The Leica Exchange Service can be accessed from SmartWorx Viva in the field or using Leica Exchange Office PC software. After registering the subscription ID in your myWorld account, the subscription usage statistic is fully accessible. The total quota is shown and the consumed and remaining GB are displayed in total GB and GB/month. Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Leica Exchange. If a user is currently logged in then the Leica Exchange Main Menu screen is accessed.If no user is currently logged in then the Leica Exchange Login screen is accessed. Leica Exchange Login User name and password must be typed in each time the Leica Exchange service is accessed. Description of fields Field Option Description User name Editable field The user ID created in MyWorld allows connection to the exchange server. Password Editable field The password created in MyWorld to get access to the exchange server. Next step The first time you log into Leica Exchange you need to accept the license agreement. If a connection to the Leica Exchange server is active and if the user name and password are recognised, then OK accesses Leica Exchange Main Menu. Leica Exchange Main Menu Key Description OK To access the selected functionality. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 326 Description of options Icon Description Send data.. To select objects to be uploaded to the server from the CS or TS and to start the upload. Access Leica Exchange Data Transfer. Get data.. To select objects to be downloaded from the server to the CS or TS and to start the download. Access Select Data to Download. Data sent to a user are stored in the users “inbox” for two weeks. Transfer status.. To check the transfer status for the last 20 transfers since login. Config.. To access the Configuration screen for Leica Exchange. Connection status.. To see details about the connection. The Internet Connection Status opens. A checked box for Connected to Leica Exchange indicates an established connection to the Leica Exchange Server. Exit & stay logged To remain logged in but return to the Main Menu. Any transfer in in progress continues in the background. You can see from anywhere inside SmartWorx when new files are received. To unlog and to return to the Main Menu. Any transfer in progress is stopped. Exit & log out 30.7.2 Configuring Leica Exchange Access Select Config.. in Leica Exchange Main Menu. OR Press Fn Config.. in Select Data to Send, Select People to Send Data or Leica Exchange Data Transfer. Configuration, General page This screen consists of two pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for all pages. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 327 Description of fields Field Option Description Captured images Check box When this box is checked, the jobs are sent with the Images folder. CAD files Check box attached to job When this box is checked, the jobs are sent with the Map files folder. Store downSelectable list loaded jobs & data to The device on which the jobs and data are stored. Jobs and data are stored in the internal memory when the chosen memory device is not available. Next step Page changes to the Sorts & filters page. Configuration, Sorts & filters page Description of fields Field Option The method points are sorted by. Sort objects by Display following objects for sending: Description Time Sorts objects on the instrument by the time they were created. Sorts objects in the inbox by the time when they were uploaded to the server. Size Sorts the objects by size in Kb. File name Sorts the objects alphabetically by the object name. Type Sorts the objects in alphabetical order of the object types. After applying the alphabetical order, the time is considered for the order of the files. Check boxes When a box is checked, the filter is active for that object type. The filter is valid for objects sent from the instrument. Objects on the server are always visible. Next step OK closes the screen. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 328 30.7.3 Sending Data Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Leica Exchange\Send data... Select Data to Send Key Description Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. The Internet and server connection is checked. Select To set Yes or No in the Selected column for the highlighted object. More To change between type, size, modification date and source of the listed objects. Fn Config.. To configure Leica Exchange. Fn All or Fn None To select or deselect all object for sending data. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Name The user-defined name of the objects. Type Supported are job, CAD files (dxf and shape files), data files, coordinate systems and codelists. Size The size of the selected object. Modified date The date when the object was last modified. Source The memory device where the object is stored. Selected For Yes: The selected object is used for sending data. For No: The selected object is not used for sending data. Next step Make a selection and press Next. Select People to Send Data Key Description Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. Select To set Yes or No in the Selected column for the highlighted name. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Config.. To configure Leica Exchange. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 329 Description of columns Column Description Name The name of the person data can be send to. The list is downloaded from MyWorld. Refer to "Creating User name and Password step-bystep" for information on how to define user names. Selected For Yes: Data is sent to the person. Multiple selection is possible. For No: Data is not sent to the person. Next step Make a selection and press Next. The transfer starts. While the transfer is in progress, • the status can be checked by pressing Status. Refer to "30.7.5 Data Transfer Status". • other tasks can be done. Press Finish to exit the wizard. 30.7.4 Getting Data Access Select Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Leica Exchange\Get data... Select Data to Send The information shown is derived from the list of information retrieved from the server. Key Description Next To confirm the settings and to continue to the next screen. The Internet and server connection is checked. Select To set Yes or No in the Selected column for the highlighted object. More To change between type, size, modification date and source of the listed objects. Fn Config.. To configure Leica Exchange. Fn All or Fn None To select or deselect all object for sending data. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Name The user-defined name of the objects. Type Supported are job, CAD files (dxf and shape files), data files, coordinate systems and codelists. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 330 Column Description Jobs downloaded from the server are stored in a subfolder of the DBX folder of the data storage device selected in Store downloaded jobs & data to in Configuration, General page. All files with unknown format, for example CAD or data files, are stored in the \DATA folder of the selected data storage device. Coordinate systems and codelists are stored to the internal memory of the CS or TS. From the internal memory, the codelist/coordinate system can be directly selected when creating/editing a job. Size The size of the selected object. Modified date The date when the object was last modified. Selected For Yes: The selected object is used for sending data. For No: The selected object is not used for sending data. Next step Make a selection and press Next. The transfer starts. While the transfer is in progress, • the status can be checked by pressing Status. Refer to "30.7.5 Data Transfer Status". • other tasks can be done. Press Finish to exit the wizard. 30.7.5 Data Transfer Status Access Select Transfer status.. in Leica Exchange Main Menu. OR Press Status in the wizard window while data is being send/received. Data Transfer Status The last 20 transfers since login are displayed. Key Description OK To return to Leica Exchange Main Menu. Pause To pause all transers. Resume To restart all transfers. Accept Available when a row with status Conflict is highlighted. To choose between replacing or discarding the downloaded file. Remov Available for finished or cancelled transfers. To remove the transfer from the list. Cancel To cancel the highlighted transfer. More To change between user, size, date and expected time by when the transfer will be finished. Fn Config.. To configure Leica Exchange. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description Type The type of file transferred. Name The name of the file transferred. Who The user the file is transferred to or from. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 331 Column Description Status ... down/up - The downloading/uploading transfer is running is in progress. Sent - The upload has been successfully finished. Downloaded - The download has been successfully finished. Pending - A transfer is in progress and the current transfer has not been started. Paused - The transfer has been paused. Canceled - The transfer has been cancelled. Conflict - The transfer is finished, but there is another file with the same name in the designated folder. Press Accept. Interrup. - The transfer has been interrupted due to internet connection loss or other events that result in interrupting the transfer. 30.7.6 In the office In the Office Step Description 1. After activating the Entitlement ID, login to Leica Exchange Office with your user name and password. 2. Click on one of the icons to define the view in the right half of the window: Inbox, Status, History, Contacts. On the left side of the window, the data on the computer are displayed. Navigate to the folder you want to place received data or to where the data to be sent are stored. 3. To get files from the inbox, click Inbox, select the files and drag them into the left half of the window. To send data, click Contacts and drag & drop the files from the left to the right. To send files to multiple users, select the users, drag & drop the files from the left to the right. 4. To see the status of current transfers, click Status. To see all transfers done from both field and office and also the time when the objects were sent and received, click History. Viva Series, User - Tools & other utilities 332 31 User - Check & Adjust 31.1 Overview Description Leica Geosystems instruments are manufactured, assembled and adjusted to the best possible quality. Quick temperature changes, shock or stress can cause deviations and decrease the instrument accuracy. It is therefore recommended to check and adjust the instrument from time to time. This check and adjust can be done in the field by running through specific measurement procedures. The procedures are guided and must be followed carefully and precisely as described in the following chapters. Some other instrument errors and mechanical parts can be adjusted mechanically. Electronic adjustment The following instrument errors can be checked and adjusted electronically: l, t i c a ATR Telescope camera Compensator longitudinal and transversal index errors Vertical index error, related to the standing axis Horizontal collimation error, also called line of sight error Tilting axis error ATR zero point error for Hz and V - option Telescope camera zero point error, relation between principal point of telescope camera and crosshair in telescope in Hz and V - option If the compensator and the horizontal corrections are activated in the instrument configuration, every angle measured in the daily work is corrected automatically . Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator to check whether the tilt correction and the horizontal correction are turned on. The results are displayed as errors but used with the opposite sign as corrections when applied to measurements. Mechanical adjustment The following instrument parts can be adjusted mechanically: • Circular level on instrument and tribrach • Optical plummet - option on tribrach • Allen screws on tripod Precise measurements To get precise measurements in the daily work, it is important: • To check and adjust the instrument from time to time. • To take high precision measurements during the check and adjust procedures. • To measure targets in two faces. Some of the instrument errors are eliminated by averaging the angles from both faces. During the manufacturing process, the instrument errors are carefully determined and set to zero. As mentioned above, these errors can change and it is highly recommended to redetermine them in the following situations: • Before the first use • Before every high precision survey • After rough or long transportation • After long working periods • After long storage periods • If the temperature difference between current environment and the temperature at the last calibration is more than 20°C Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 333 Before determining the instrument errors, the instrument has to be levelled using the electronic level. Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator to access the Level Bubble & Compensator screen. The tribrach, the tripod and the underground should be stable and secure from vibrations or other disturbances. The instrument should be protected from direct sunlight to avoid thermal warming. It is also recommended to avoid strong heat shimmer and air turbulence. The best conditions are early in the morning or with overcast sky. Before starting to work, the instrument has to become acclimatised to the ambient temperature. Approximately two minutes per °C of temperature difference from storage to working environment, but at least 15 min, should be taken into account. Even after adjustment of the ATR, the crosshairs may not be positioned exactly on the centre of the prism after an ATR measurement has been completed. This outcome is a normal effect. The telescope is not normally positioned exactly on the centre of the prism, to speed up the ATR measurement. These small deviations/ATR offsets, are calculated individually for each measurement and corrected electronically. This means that the horizontal and vertical angles are corrected twice: first by the determined ATR errors for Hz and V, and then by the individual small deviations of the current aiming. 31.2 Details on Instrument Errors Definition Instrument errors occur, if the standing axis, the tilting axis and the line of sight are not precisely perpendicular to each other. Horizontal collimation error (c) a c d b a TS_073 a) Tilting axis b) Line perpendicular to tilting axis c) Horizontal collimation error (c), also called line of sight error d) Line of sight The Horizontal collimation error (c) is also called line of sight error. It is caused by the deviation between the optical line of sight, which means the direction in which the crosshairs points and the line perpendicular to the tilting axis. This error affects all horizontal readings and increases with steep sightings. Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 334 Tilting axis error (a) b a d a) Axis perpendicular to the vertical axis b) Mechanical vertical axis of the instrument, also called standing axis c) Tilting axis error d) Tilting axis c TS_074 The deviation between the mechanical tilting axis and the line perpendicular to the vertical axis causes the tilting axis error (a). This error affects horizontal angles. The effect is zero in the horizon and increases with steep sights. To determine this error, it is necessary to point to a target located significantly below or above the horizontal plane. To avoid influences from the horizontal collimation error (c), this has to be determined prior to the tilting axis error. Vertical index error (i) a d b c a) Mechanical vertical axis of the instrument, also called standing axis b) Axis perpendicular to the vertical axis c) V = 90° reading in a specific face d) Vertical index error TS_068 A vertical index error (i) exists, if the 0° mark of the vertical circle reading does not coincide with the mechanical vertical axis of the instrument, also called standing axis. The V index error (i) is a constant error that affects all vertical angle readings. Compensator index errors (l, t) a b b c TS_067 a d a) Mechanical vertical axis of the instrument, also called standing axis b) Plumb line c) Longitudinal component (l) of the compensator index error d) Transversal component (t) of the compensator index error The compensator index errors (l, t) occur, if the vertical axis of the instrument and the plumb line are parallel but the zero points of the compensator and the circular level do not coincide. The calibration procedure electronically adjusts the zero point of the compensator. A longitudinal component in direction of the telescope and a transversal component perpendicular to the telescope define the plane of the dual axis compensator of the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite/MS50/TS50/TM50. The longitudinal compensator index error (l) has a similar effect as the vertical index error and affects all vertical angle readings. Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 335 The transversal compensator index error (t) is similar to the tilting axis error. The effect of this error to the horizontal angle readings is 0 at the horizon and increases with steep sightings. Automatic aiming collimation errors d a c a) b) c) d) b TS_075 Centre of prism Crosshairs V component of ATR collimation error Hz component of ATR collimation error The ATR collimation error is the angular divergence between the line of sight, which means the direction in which the crosshairs point, and the ATR CCD camera axis, which detects the centre of the prism. The horizontal and vertical components of the ATR calibration errors correct the horizontal and vertical angles to measure exactly to the centre of the prism. Telescope camera collimation error c a d b 005117_001 a) Physical crosshairs in the telescope b) Digital crosshairs in the telescope camera view c) Hz component of telescope camera collimation error d) V component of telescope camera collimation error The telescope camera collimation error is the angular divergence between the physical crosshairs in the telescope and digital crosshairs in the telescope camera view. The determined horizontal and vertical offset values are applied as constant offset to the recent calibration values. A full telescope camera calibration takes other camera parameters into account, for example focus position, rotation, scale and lens distortion. The full calibration is performed after production and in service. Even after adjustment of the ATR, the crosshairs might not be positioned exactly on the centre of the prism after an ATR search. This is a normal effect. To speed up the ATR search, the telescope is not positioned exactly on the centre of the prism. The small rest deviations, the ATR offsets, are measured individually for each measurement and corrected electronically. This means that the horizontal and vertical angles are corrected twice: first by the determined ATR errors for horizontal and vertical and then by the individual small deviations of the current pointing, the ATR offsets. Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 336 Summary of errors to be adjusted electronically Instrument error Effects Hz Effects V Elimination Automatiwith two face cally measurement corrected with proper adjustment c - Line of sight error - a - Tilting axis error - l - Compensator index error - t - Compensator index error - i - Vertical index error - ATR Collimation error - Co-axial camera collimation error 31.3 Accessing the Check & Adjust Wizard Access Select Main Menu: User\Check & Adjust. Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do? Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Next step IF you want to THEN determine the instrument errors select one of the three available check and adjust procedures and refer to the relevant subchapters. view the current values select View the current values. Refer to "31.7 Viewing the Current Values". configure Check & Adjust select Configure Check & Adjust. Refer to "31.8 Configuring Check & Adjust". adjust the circular level Refer to "31.9 Adjusting the Circular Level of the Instrument and Tribrach". inspect the laser plummet Refer to "31.11 Inspecting the Laser Plummet of the Instrument". adjust the tripod Refer to "31.12 Servicing the Tripod". Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 337 31.4 Combined Adjustment (l, t, i, c, ATR and tele camera) Access In Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do? select Check & adjust the compensator, index error, line of sight error & automatic target aiming or Check & adjust the compensator, index error, line of sight error, automatic target aiming & telescope camera for MS50/TS50/TM50 and press Next. Description The combined adjustment procedure determines the following instrument errors in one process: l, t i c ATR Hz ATR V Telescope camera Hz Telescope camera V Check & Adjust Wizard, Step 1 Compensator longitudinal and transversal index errors Vertical index error, related to the standing axis Horizontal collimation error, also called line of sight error ATR zero point error for horizontal angle - option ATR zero point error for vertical angle - option Telescope camera zero point error for horizontal angle option Telescope camera zero point error for vertical angle - option Before determining the instrument errors, the instrument has to be: • levelled up using the electronic level • protected from direct sunlight • acclimatised to the ambient temperature, approximately 2 minutes per °C difference compared to the storage place. Key Description Next To measure the target. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Description of fields Field Option Description Calibrate the automatic target aiming Check box When this box is checked, the determination of the ATR horizontal and vertical adjustment values is included. Use a clean Leica standard prism as target. Do not use a 360° prism. When this box is not checked, the determination of the ATR horizontal and vertical adjustment value is excluded. Calibrate the telescope camera Check box When this box is checked, the determination of the telescope camera horizontal and vertical zero point adjustment values is included. Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust In Camera Settings, TS overview page, Use TS overview camera must be checked. A prism is not required to run the procedure. Use a clean Leica standard prism as target. Do not use a 360° prism. 338 Aim the telescope accurately at a target at a distance of about 100 m. The target must be positioned within ± 9°/± 10 gon of the horizontal plane The procedure can be started in face I or II. The fine pointing must be performed manually in both faces. Meas to measure and to continue to the next screen. 00 m ~1 ± 9° TS_069 For MS50/TS50/TM50: If Calibrate the telescope camera has been checked, aim at the same target accurately with the telescope camera using the view finder and the digital crosshair on the display. Meas to measure and to continue to the next screen. 180° Motorised instruments change automatically to the other face. 180° TS_071 Non-motorised instruments guide to the other face using the Telescope Positioning screen. Meas to measure the same target in the other face and to calculate the instrument errors. If one or more errors are bigger than the predefined limits, the procedure must be repeated. All measurements of the current run are rejected and are not averaged with the results from previous runs. Check & Adjust Wizard, Step 2 Key Description Next To measure the target. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Description of fields Field Option Description No. of measurements Display only Shows the number of runs. One run consists of a measurement in face I and II. All other fields Display only The standard deviations of the determined adjustment errors are displayed. The standard deviations can be calculated from the second run onwards. Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 339 Check & Adjust Wizard, It is recommended to repeat the last calibration routine at least three times. Measure at least two more runs. Next step IF THEN more runs must be added select Add another calibration loop and press Next. no more runs must be added Check & Adjust Wizard, Results select Finish the calibration & store the results and press Next to accept the measurements and to access the results screen. Key Description Finish To accept and store the new determined instrument errors, where Yes is set in the Use column. If the report sheet recording has been enabled, then the results are written or appended to an existing report sheet. Redo To reject all results and to repeat the complete check and adjust procedure. Use To set Yes or No in the Use column for the highlighted set. More To view additional information about the current used old instrument errors. Description of columns and fields Column Option Description New Display only The new determined and averaged instrument errors. Use Yes Stores the new adjustment error. No Keeps the currently used error active on the instrument and rejects the new one. Display only The old adjustment errors, which are currently valid on the instrument. Old Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 340 31.5 Tilting Axis Adjustment (a) Access In Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do? select Check & adjust the tilting axis and press Next. Description This adjustment procedure determines the following instrument error: a Check & Adjust Wizard, Step 1 Tilting axis error Before determining the tilting axis error, the instrument has to be: • levelled up using the electronic level • protected from direct sunlight • acclimatised to the ambient temperature, approximately 2 minutes per °C difference compared to the storage place. • The horizontal collimation error must be determined before. Key Description Next To measure the target. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Aim the telescope accurately at a target at a distance of about 100 m. For distances less than 100 m, make sure to point to the target precisely. The target must be positioned within at least 27°/30 gon above or beneath the horizontal plane. The procedure can be started in face I or II. The fine pointing must be performed manually in both faces. + 27° V= 90 ° - 27° TS_070 Meas to measure and to continue to the next screen. Motorised instruments change automatically to the other face. 180° 180° TS_071 Non-motorised instruments guide to the other face using the Telescope Positioning screen. Meas to measure the same target in the other face and to calculate the instrument errors. If one or more errors are bigger than the predefined limits, the procedure must be repeated. All measurements of the current run are rejected and are not averaged with the results from previous runs. Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 341 Check & Adjust Wizard, Step 2 Key Description Next To measure the target. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Description of fields Check & Adjust Wizard, It is recommended to repeat the last calibration routine at least three times. Field Option Description No. of measurements Display only The number of runs. One run consists of a measurement in face I and II. σ a T-axis Display only The standard deviation of the determined tilting axis error. The standard deviation can be calculated from the second run onwards. Measure at least two more runs. Next step IF THEN more runs must be added select Add another calibration loop and press Next. no more runs must be added Check & Adjust Wizard, Results select Finish the calibration & store the results and press Next to accept the measurements and to access the results screen. Key Description Finish To accept and record the new determined tilting axis error. If the report recording has been enabled, then the results are written to or appended to an existing report sheet. Redo To reject the result and to repeat the complete check and adjust procedure. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Description of columns and fields Column Option Description New Display only The new determined and averaged tilting axis error. Old Display only The old instrument error, which is currently valid on the instrument. Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 342 31.6 Compensator Adjustment (l, t) Access In Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do? select Check & adjust the compensator and press Next. Description The compensator adjustment procedure determines the following instrument errors: l t Check & Adjust Wizard, 1st tilt measurement in any face. Compensator longitudinal index error Compensator transversal index error Before determining the compensator index errors, the instrument has to be: • levelled up using the electronic level • protected from direct sunlight • acclimatised to the ambient temperature, approximately 2 minutes per °C difference compared to the storage place. Key Description Next To measure the target. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Meas to measure the first face. No target has to be aimed at. Motorised instruments change to the other face and release a measurement automatically. 180° TS_072 Non-motorised instruments guide to the other face using the Telescope Positioning screen. Meas to release the measurement in the other face. If one or more errors are bigger than the predefined limits, the procedure must be repeated. All measurements of the current run are rejected and are not averaged with the results from previous runs. Check & Adjust Wizard, Step 2 Key Description Next To measure the target. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Description of fields Field Option Description No. of measurements Display only The number of runs. One run consists of a measurement in face I and II. σ l Comp and σ t Comp Display only The standard deviations of the determined adjustment errors. The standard deviations can be calculated from the second run onwards. Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 343 Check & Adjust Wizard, It is recommended to repeat the last calibration routine at least three times. Measure at least two more runs. Next step IF THEN more runs must be added select Add another calibration loop and press Next. no more runs must be added Check & Adjust Wizard, Results select Finish the calibration & store the results and press Next to accept the measurements and to access the results screen. Key Description Finish To accept and record the new determined instrument errors. If the report sheet recording has been enabled, then the results are written and appended to an existing report sheet. Redo To reject all results and to repeat the complete check and adjust procedure. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Description of columns and fields Column Option Description New Display only The new determined and averaged instrument errors. Old Display only The old instrument errors, which are currently valid on the instrument. 31.7 Viewing the Current Values Access In Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do? select View the current values and press Next. Atmospheric Corrections Key Description OK To return to Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do?. More To display information about the date of the determination, the standard deviation of the errors and the temperature during the determination. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. The temperature of the environment around the instrument can differ from the temperature shown on the screen as it is the internal temperature of the instrument. Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 344 31.8 Configuring Check & Adjust Access In Check & Adjust Wizard, What do you want to do? select Configure Check & Adjust and press Next. Check & Adjust Wizard Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the wizard. Description of options Option Description 2 weeks, 1 month, 3 months, 6 months or 12 months If one or more adjustment values were determined longer ago than the time specified with this parameter, then a reminder message is displayed each time the instrument is turned on. This helps to redetermine the instrument errors on a regular basis. Never A reminder message to readjust the instrument is never displayed. This setting is not recommended. Next step Next to change to the Report sheet screen. 31.9 Adjusting the Circular Level of the Instrument and Tribrach Adjusting the circular level stepby-step 1 4 4 2 TS_077 Step Description 1. Place and secure the instrument into the tribrach and onto a tripod. 2. Using the tribrach footscrews, level the instrument with the electronic level. 3. Select Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator to access the Level Bubble & Compensator screen. 4. Check the position of the circular level on the instrument and tribrach. 5. a) If both circular levels are centred, no adjustments are necessary b) If one or both circular levels are not centred, adjust as follows: Instrument: If it extends beyond the circle, use the supplied allen key to centre it with the adjustment screws. Turn the instrument by 200 gon (180°). Repeat the adjustment procedure if the circular level does not stay centred. Tribrach: If it extends beyond the circle, use the supplied allen key to centre it with the adjustment screws. After the adjustments, all adjusting screws must have the same tightening tension and no adjusting screw should be loose. Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 345 31.10 Adjusting the circular level stepby-step Adjusting the Circular Level of the Prism Pole Step Description 1. Suspend a plumb line. 2. Use a pole bipod, to align the prism pole parallel to the plumb line. 3. Check the position of the circular level on the prism pole. 4. a) If the circular level is centred, no adjustment is necessary. 31.11 4b 1 2 4a TS_080 b) If the circular level is not centred, use an allen key to centre it with the adjustment screws. After the adjustments, all adjusting screws must have the same tightening tension and no adjusting screw should be loose. Inspecting the Laser Plummet of the Instrument The laser plummet is located in the vertical axis of the instrument. Under normal conditions of use, the laser plummet does not need adjusting. If an adjustment is necessary due to external influences, return the instrument to any Leica Geosystems authorised service workshop. Inspecting the laser plummet step-bystep 1 5 360° Ø 2.5 mm / 1.5 m 4 6 3 mm / 1.5 m TS_078 The following table explains the most common settings. Step Description 1. Place and secure the instrument into the tribrach and onto a tripod. 2. Using the tribrach footscrews, level the instrument with the electronic level. 3. Select Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator to access the Level Bubble & Compensator screen. 4. The laser plummet is switched on when the Level Bubble & Compensator screen is entered. Adjust the laser plummet intensity. Inspection of the laser plummet should be carried out on a bright, smooth and horizontal surface, like a sheet of paper. 5. Mark the centre of the red dot on the ground. 6. Turn the instrument through 360° slowly, carefully observing the movement of the red laser dot. 7. The maximum diameter of the circular movement described by the centre of the laser point must not exceed 3 mm at a distance of 1.5 m. If the centre of the laser dot describes a perceptible circular movement, or moves more than 3 mm away from the point which was first marked, an adjustment may be required. Inform your nearest Leica Geosystems authorised service workshop. Depending on brightness and surface, the diameter of the laser dot can vary. At 1.5 m, it is about 2.5 mm. Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 346 31.12 Servicing the Tripod Servicing the tripod step-by-step 1 2 3 TS_076 The following table explains the most common settings. Step Description The connections between metal and timber components must always be firm and tight. 1. Tighten the leg cap screws moderately, with the supplied allen key. 2. Tighten the articulated joints on the tripod head enough to keep the tripod legs open when lifting the tripod off the ground. 3. Tighten the allen screws of the tripod legs. Viva Series, User - Check & Adjust 347 32 User - About Leica Viva Access Select Main Menu: User\About Leica Viva. About Leica Viva, CS controller page The information relates to the field controller. This screen shows, depending on the controller type: • The serial number, • The equipment number, • The firmware version of the boot software, • The firmware version for the Electric Front Interface, • If a total station radio installed, • If Wireless LAN is installed, • If the internal GSM/CS 3.5G modem is installed. Next step Page changes to the Total station page. About Leica Viva, Total station page The information relates to the TPS instrument. This screen shows: • The type of instrument, • Additional instrument hardware options such as EDM or PowerSearch. Next step Page changes to the GS sensor page. About Leica Viva, GS sensor page The information relates to the GPS instrument. This screen shows: • The currently active system language, • The serial number of the measurement engine, • The availability of additional instrument hardware options, • If the protected OWI commands and the ability to track GPS L5, GLONASS, Galileo and BeiDou have been activated by a licence key. Next step Page changes to the SmartWorx Viva page. About Leica Viva, SmartWorx Viva page The information relates to the SmartWorx Viva instrument. This screen shows the applications installed on the instrument, and the following information. Description of fields Field Description WinCE version Firmware version for WinCE. SmartWorx Viva Firmware version for the onboard software. API version Firmware version for the application interface. CCP end Expiry date of the software maintenance. Load licence keys The information listed here indicates for which applications the licence keys are loaded. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. Viva Series, User - About Leica Viva 348 33 Camera & Imaging 33.1 Overview Description Instruments can be equipped with up to two cameras: Type Available on Overview camera TS11 I, TS15 I, MS50, TM50 I, TS50 I, CS Telescope camera TM50 I, TS50 I, MS50 The camera & imaging functionality is an interactive feature embedded in SmartWorx Viva but used by some applications as well as data management. A licence key is required to store overview and telescope camera images. • The cameras can be used to take images of survey relevant objects for documentation purposes. • The images can be linked to points, lines and areas stored in the working job. • Screenshots can be taken from the display as additional information. • Images, screenshots and digital sketches can be edited and sketched on. This functionality is also available on instruments which do not have a camera or a imaging licence. • Overview and telescope camera images can be transferred can be transferred from the TPS to the CS. • Images can be exported in DXF and LandXML format. • The cameras can be switched. Depending on where the camera & imaging functionality is accessed from, different functionality is available. Overview or telescope camera on TS Camera on back of CS Sketch Pad Screenshot Edit, link and store image DBX Camera & imaging workflow on the TS Step 1. 2. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging Description The camera functionality on the TS must be licensed. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\New job. Create a working job. Return to the Main Menu. Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS camera settings. On the TS overview/TS telescope page, check Use overview camera/Use TS overview & telescope cameras. Return to the Main Menu. 349 Step Description 3. Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Setup. Define the station setup. Return to the Main Menu. 4. Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey. Measure a point. 5. Page until the Camera page is active. Cpture to take an image on demand. 6. The image is only displayed, not stored yet. 7. To draw on the image, press the sketching icon on the toolbar. 8. To store the image, press Store. 9. Decide how to link the image: • With the last measured point • With any point, line or area • No link at all • Cancel 33.2 Instrument - TPS camera settings Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\TPS camera settings. Camera Settings, TS overview/TS telescope (for TS50) page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Use TS overview camera Check box Available for TS11 I/TS15 I. The overview camera can be physically switched on and off. When this box is checked, the camera is switched on. Use TS overview & telescope cameras Check box Available for MS50/TS50 I/TM50 I. The overview AND the telescope camera can be physically switched on and off. The order of images taken is: 1. telescope camera, 2. overview camera. When this box is checked, the cameras are switched on. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 350 Field Option Description Resolution Selectable list The resolution has a direct influence on the file size. When images are transferred between TS and CS, select Medium or Small. Small is recommended to save transfer time. White balance Selectable list This setting defines the colour impression. If Automatic does not provide satisfying results, select Indoor or Outdoor depending on the surveying environment. Image quality The grade of compression of the image. Highest quality Low jpg compression, better image quality, larger file size Standard quality Higher jpg compression, standard image quality, smaller file size Next step Page to change to the Image documentation page. Camera Settings, Image documentation page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Capture image Check box with every measurement Description When this box is checked, an image is taken automatically with every measurement. When this box is not checked, pictures can be taken on demand. Use this option to save power. In the Survey, Reference Plane and Setup applications, use Cpture on the Camera page to take pictures. Outside of applications, set a hot key to User Use camera. Press the defined hot key to take a picture on demand. Or use the Link image Check box with measurement icon. Images taken with the camera are always stored related to the active working job. The images are stored in a subfolder of the active working job. The images can be viewed in the Data Management. Available when Capture image with every measurement is checked. When this box is checked, the image taken with a measurement is automatically linked to the last measurement taken. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 351 Field Option Description One measured point can be linked to several images. One image can be linked to several measured points. When this box is not checked, the image taken with a measurement is not automatically linked to a measurement. The image can be linked manually in data management. Store crossCheck box hair on image Available for TS11 I/TS15 I/MS50/TS50 I/TM50. When this box is checked, the crosshairs are stored on the picture. 33.3 Taking an Image 33.3.1 Overview Description • The camera can be used to take images of survey relevant objects. • The images can be linked to points, lines and areas stored in the job. • Screenshots can be taken from the display as additional information in support cases. Standard functionality is provided by softkeys, keys and a toolbar. The softkeys are available regardless of where the camera functionality was accessed from and always perform the same functions. If Display TS camera focussing toolbar is checked in Camera View Settings, icons are available in a toolbar. One toolbar is located on the right side of the screen. A second toolbar on the left side of the screen is available when the telescope camera is active. Some of the functions performed by the icons can also be replicated using a softkey or key in the same mode as when the icon appears. Requirements • A TS11 I/TS15 I/MS50/TM50 I/TS50 I must be used. • The camera configuration must be active. Refer to "33.2 Instrument - TPS camera settings". • The documentation configuration must be set. Refer to "33.2 Instrument - TPS camera settings". 33.3.2 Outside of Applications Access Press a function key configured with the option User - Use camera. OR Click . Capture Image with Camera Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 352 Overview of keys, softkeys and icons Key Description Cpture To take an image with the current pixel resolution. The image is then displayed but not stored on the memory device yet. Fn Config.. To configure what is displayed on the Camera page. Refer to "Camera View Settings, General page". Fn Quit To exit the screen. The softkeys described in this table are standard on all camera & imaging screens. For descriptions of mode-specific softkeys, see appropriate chapters. Icon Key or Softkey Description - To scroll the camera & imaging toolbar. 1 The fit icon displays, after zooming in/out, the complete image in VGA resolution. 2 To zoom into the image. 3 To zoom out of the image. 5 To zoom to the maximum in the current viewing direction. - To define a range by a minimum and a maximum distance. Three-dimensional points within the defined range are displayed. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging This functionality is only available on the Camera page within the Survey application. Top slider The maximum distance from the instrument, for example set to 400. Bottom slider The minimum distance from the instrument, for example set to 10. Result Points between 10 m and 400 m from the instrument are displayed on the image. To move the slider, tap on the slider, hold and drag it or use the up and down arrow keys. Fn Config.. To access Camera View Settings. Refer to " Camera View Settings, General page". - To increase the brightness from the current value. - To decrease the brightness from the current value. 353 Icon Key or Softkey Description - To return to automatic brightness of the image. - To configure the camera. Refer to "33.2 Instrument - TPS camera settings". - To switch between overview and telescope camera. After turning the instrument on the overview camera is in use. The style of the crosshairs changes with the camera in use. Or use the hot key/favourites menu function TPS - Toggle overview/telescope camera. - To switch continuous autofocus on and off. - Continuous autofocus is active. Focus To activate a single autofocus. Single autofocus deactives continuous autofocus. Same functionality as pressing the autofocus button on the side cover of the instrument. - Fn + OK Or use the hot key/favourites menu function TPS - Single auto focus. While continuous autofocus is active, any manually measured distance updates the focus position. Available on CS. To focus manually: • Up and down arrow: To focus in big steps. • Right and left arrow: To focus in small steps. - Pressing 2x autofocus button on side cover - short - Pressing autofocus To start continuous autofocus. button on side cover - long Viva Series, Camera & Imaging To perform an automatic contrast based refocus. 354 33.3.3 Within Applications Access In the Survey, Reference Plane and Setup application, go to the Camera page. In Survey A Camera page is displayed. The style of the crosshairs changes with the camera in use. Refer to "Overview of keys, softkeys and icons" for information on the toolbar. Key Description Meas To measure and store distances and angles. If configured, an image is taken automatically. If configured, the image is linked to the point measurement automatically. Stop Available if Measure mode: Continuous and Dist was pressed. Stops the distance measurements. The key changes back to Meas. Dist To measure and display distances. Store To record data. If Measure mode: Continuous and/or Log auto points is checked, measured points are recorded and tracking continues. Depending on the configuration, crosshairs are stored on top of the image. If a valid distance measurement is available, then the parallax is corrected and the crosshairs are overlaid on the image on their true position. Cpture To take an image with the current pixel resolution. The image is then displayed but not stored on the memory device yet. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure what is displayed on the Camera page. Refer to "Camera View Settings, General page". Fn 2Store Available for Measure mode: Single and Measure mode: Single (fast). To take an angle only measurement in Face I and Face II and automatically store an average of the two measurements. When using instruments fitted with auto aiming, the point is automatically measured in both faces. The resulting point is stored and the instrument is returned to the first face. Fn 2 Face Available for Measure mode: Single and Measure mode: Single (fast). To take an angle and distance measurement in Face I and Face II. The point stored is an average of the two measurements. When using instruments fitted with auto aiming, the point is automatically measured in both faces. The resulting point is stored and the instrument is returned to the first face. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 355 Key Description Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit In Setup To exit the application. In the setup application, points can be linked with images. Depending on the configuration the images are linked either automatically or manually. A Camera page is displayed. Depending on the screen, the available keys differ. The style of the crosshairs changes with the camera in use. Refer to "Overview of keys, softkeys and icons" for information on the toolbar. For Set Station Orientation and Measure Target Key Description Set For Setup method: Set orientation: To set the station and orientation and exit the Setup application. If configured, an image is taken automatically, also for two face measurements. If configured, the image is linked to the point measurement automatically. Meas For Setup method: Multiple backsights: To measure and store the distances and angles made to the control points. If configured, an image is taken automatically, also for two face measurements. If configured, the image is linked to the point measurement automatically. For measurements in two faces, two images are linked with one point. Dist To measure and display distances. Store For Setup method: Set orientation: To store the measurement with or without a distance. For Setup method: Multiple backsights: To record display values temporarily. The target measurements will not be stored to the current job until the station is set. If configured, an image is taken automatically, also for two face measurements. If configured, the image is linked to the point measurement automatically. For measurements in two faces, two images are linked with one point. Cpture To take an image with the current pixel resolution. The image is then displayed but not stored on the memory device yet. For Setup method: Multiple backsights, Setup method: Transfer height and Setup method: Resection: Images which are to be linked with ‘target n’ must be taken on ‘Measure target n-1’ screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure what is displayed on the Camera page. Refer to "Camera View Settings, General page". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 356 For the Results screen Camera View Settings, General page Key Description Cpture To take an image with the current pixel resolution. The image can then be linked to the calculated setup point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure what is displayed on the Camera page. Refer to "Camera View Settings, General page". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Display TS Check box camera zooming toolbar / Display TS camera focussing toolbar Display cross- Check box hairs Description Determines if the toolbar of icons is displayed. Refer to "Overview of keys, softkeys and icons". If no distance is measured, then the coarse style crosshair is indicated which is approximately the field of view. If a valid distance is measured and the parallax can be resolved, then the fine style crosshair is indicated as two intersecting lines on the true position. When the instrument turns about three gon in horizontal or vertical direction after measuring a distance, then the crosshair style changes back to the field of view variant. In tracking mode or when locked onto a prism, the crosshairs are always on the correct position and displayed as two intersecting lines. Crosshair colour Selectable list Available if Display crosshairs is checked. Defines the colour of the crosshairs. Next step Page to change to the Points display page. Camera View Settings, Points display page Description of fields Field Option Display points Check box Description When this box is checked, points from the working job with 3D local grid coordinates are displayed on the view finder. Use the display of points to check completeness and reliability of the survey. Points are displayed with a visual 3D effect: Points further away from the instrument are displayed smaller than points closer to the instrument. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 357 Field Option Point ID, Point Check box code, Height of point or Quality of point Description Points are only displayed on the image. They are not saved with the image. When this box is checked, the relevant information of a measured point is displayed next to the point symbol. Point symbol colour Selectable list Available if Display points is checked. Defines the colour of the points. Number of points Selectable list Available if Display points is checked. The maximum number of overlaid points. The last points stored in the DBX are displayed, regardless of the point class. If 20 is selected and a new point is measured, then the first point of the previous 20 is no longer displayed. Only display Check box points measured from current station In addition to the selected number of points, the points displayed can be restricted further by showing only points measured from the current station. Next step Page changes to the Lines / areas display page. Camera View Settings, Lines / areas display page Description of fields Field Option Display lines & Check box area Description When this box is checked, lines/areas from the working job with 3D local grid coordinates are displayed on the view finder. Use the display of points to check completeness and reliability of the survey. Points are displayed with a visual 3D effect: Points in further away from the instrument are displayed smaller than points closer to the instrument. Points are only displayed on the image. They are not saved with the image. Display line & Check box area IDs When this box is checked, then the line/area IDs are displayed with the lines/areas. Use fixed colour for lines & areas Check box When this box is checked, a colour for displaying lines/areas can be selected. When this box is not checked, the lines/areas are displayed in the line/area code colour. Colour Selectable list This colour is used for the lines/areas and for the text related to the line and area IDs. Selectable list Number of lines / areas to show Available if Display lines & area is checked. The maximum number of overlaid lines/areas. The last lines/areas stored in the DBX are displayed. If 20 is selected and a new line/area is measured, then the first line/area of the previous 20 is no longer displayed. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 358 Field Option Description The selected number is the sum of lines and areas. For example, if 20 is selected, this can be 5 lines and 15 areas. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. For MS50: Page changes to the ScanArea display page. Camera View Settings, ScanArea display page Available for MS50. Description of fields Field Option Description Current scan definition colour Selectable list This colour is used in Scan Viewer for the scan area currently defined. Show existing Check box scan definitions Colour Selectable list When this box is checked, then scan areas previously defined are displayed in Scan Viewer. This colour is used for the previously defined scan areas. Next step Page changes to another page on this screen. 33.3.4 Screenshot Description A screenshot can be taken and stored when SmartWorx is running on the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite and CS. Press a hot key configured to User - Screenshot capture or Fn and ’.’. The screenshot is displayed and can be edited by sketching. The screenshot can be linked with points manually. Sketching on the screenshot is possible. The screenshot is stored as jpg with a predefined compression rate. The resolution is 640 x 480. Screenshots can be georeferenced by linking to a point. Screenshots cannot be orientated and calibrated. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 359 33.3.5 Panoramic Imaging Description A panoramic image is a combination of single images. Panorama images show the area of what can be seen from the instrument station. Panorama images are used for documentation purposes and support the evaluation of the surveying data directly in the field or in the office. Panorama images can be imported into LGO. Panoramic images can be generated independent of any application. A panorama is organised with a panorama instance within the DBX. The single images are stored in the DBX\JOB\IMAGES folder of the data storage device. The single images are named Img_Pano_x_y_date_time.jpg where as Field Description x Number of the row, starts with upper left corner y Number of columns, starts with upper left corner data Date Same as with normal images Time Same as with normal images Panoramic images can only be generated with motorized instruments with overview camera (TS15). Access In Leica TPS Favourites click Panoramic image. OR Press a function key configured with the option User - Use camera. OR At the end of Setup, a panoramic image can be taken. Select Panoramic Image Type Description of fields Field Option Description Image type Rectangular area Area defined by upper left and lower right corner Multi-row 360° image 360° with one or more rows above each other Single row 360° image 360° in one row Polygonal area Area defined by three or more corners in clockwise direction. Next step OK and follow the instructions on the screen to define the area. Once the panoramic image area is defined then the Panoramic Image Capture screen opens. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 360 Panoramic Image Capture Key Description Start To start taking the panorama images. Stop To end taking the panorama images. Pause To pause taking the panorama images. Resume To continue taking panorama images after Pause has been pressed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Images taken Display only The number of captured images. Images remaining Display only The number of images remaining to be taken. % completed Display only In percent, the number of images taken against the total number of images which must be taken. Image file name Display only The name of the file where the image is stored to. To control the brightness of each tile of the panorama image. Brightness control From first image The brightness is measured for first image of the panorama. The value is applied to all further tiles. Recommended for panorama images taken under normal conditions From each image The brightness is measured for each image of the panorama. Recommended for panorama images with diverse brightness. Next step The panorama and the images are stored in the images folder of the working job, either with or without link to the reference triplet of the current station. An image belonging to a panorama image can be linked manually with another object without affecting the panorama image. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 361 33.4 Image Management Image Management is available on instruments which have a camera or a camera license. Access Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\View & edit data. 2. Page until the Images page is active. Data:, Images page Key Description OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Link.. To display a points list and to link the image to a point. View.. To display an image. Refer to "Image Notes". Delete To delete the highlighted image and all its links. More To display information about the image size and the time and the date of when the image was stored. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Filter.. To define sort and filter settings. Refer to " Sorts & Filters, Images page". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step IF THEN an image is to be viewed or edited Open. Refer to "Image Notes". sort and filter settings are to be defined Fn Filter... Refer to "Sorts & Filters, Images page". Image Notes Use the arrow keys on the keypad to move the image on the screen. Key Description Store To store the image with the added link or a sketch created. If no sketch was created, then the image is not stored a second time to avoid a loss of quality. Prev To display the previous image in the list of images displayed in Data:, Images page. Available unless the beginning of the list is reached. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 362 Key Description Next To display the next image in the list of images displayed in Data:, Images page. Available unless the end of the list is reached. Fn Config.. To activate or deactivate a toolbar with icons for sketching. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Store returns to Data:, Images page. Sorts & Filters, Images page Key Description OK To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The selected sort and filter settings are applied. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Sort by Ascending filename, Descending filename, Forward time and Backward time Always available. The method the images are sorted by. Always available. The method by which the images are filtered. Filter by No filter Shows all images. Image source Shows photos taken with the camera or screenshots. Make the selection in the Image source field. Camera type Shows images taken with the TS11/TS15 or CS camera. Make the selection in the Camera type field. Linked / unlinked Shows linked or unlinked images. Make the selection in the Image field. Available for Filter by: Image source. Image source Camera Viva Series, Camera & Imaging Shows images taken with the camera on the TS11/TS15 or CS. 363 Field Option Description Screenshot Shows pictures taken from the instrument screen. Field sketch Shows field sketches created. Available for Filter by: Camera type. Camera type Image Overview camera Shows images taken with the camera on the TS11/TS15. CS camera Shows images taken with the camera on the CS. Selectable list Available for Filter by: Linked / unlinked. Either linked or unlinked images are displayed. Next step OK returns to Data:, Images page. 33.5 Sketching 33.5.1 Sketching on Images Description A sketch can be overlaid on an image taken with a camera. A sketch can be made on every jpg file stored in the DBX\JOB\IMAGES folder of the working job. The sketch is stored together with the image in jpg format. The compression rate is specified in the Camera Settings screen. The image with the sketch is stored by pressing Store. Access step-by-step In data management (the image is already stored and possibly linked) Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\View & edit data. 2. Page until the Images page is active. 3. Press View. 4. In Sketch Pad, click the icon in the toolbar. For images Step Description 1. Click . OR Start the Survey or Setup application and go to the Camera page. 2. Press Cpture. The image is taken as with a digital camera. For screenshots(the image is already stored and possibly linked) Press a hot key configured to User - Screenshot capture. The screenshot is displayed and can be edited by sketching. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 364 Overview of keys, softkeys and icons for sketching Icon Key or Softkey Description - To scroll the camera & imaging toolbar. 1 The fit icon displays, after zooming in/out, the complete image in VGA resolution. 2 To zoom into the image. Pressing ESC stops the zooming process. 3 - - - To zoom out of the image. Pressing ESC stops the zooming process. The windowing icon zooms to a specified area window. An area window can be drawn by dragging the stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to make a rectangular area or by tapping twice on the screen to define diagonally opposite corners of a rectangular area. This action causes the screen to zoom to the selected area. To activate sketching. The icon is displayed. The image cannot be moved. To quit sketching. The image can be moved. icon is displayed. The - To change the line style. Tap the icon to open a window displaying line styles for selection. The selected line style is remembered. - To change the line colour. Tap the icon to open a window displaying line colours for selection. The selected line colour is remembered. - To change the line width. Tap the icon to open a window displaying line widths for selection. The selected line width is remembered. - To undo all changes since the last saving. 33.5.2 Field Sketching Description The field sketch functionality is used to create a sketch on a virtual paper. Sketching is possible on predefined or on customer templates. Custom templates can, for example, include a company logo or check boxes for tasks that must be done. The sketch is stored as image in jpg format. The jpg file is stored in the DBX\JOB\IMAGES folder of the data storage device. The predefined templates are optimised for A4 printout. Customer templates can be optimised for any format. A screenshot cannot be made from the field sketch. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 365 Access In Leica TPS Favourites or Leica GPS Favourites click Sketch pad. OR Press a hot key configured to access the screen Choose Sketch Template. Refer to "25.4 Hot keys & favourites" for information on hot keys. Choose Sketch Template Key Description OK To create a copy of the selected sketch template and to start sketching. Fn Delete To delete the selected custom template. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Sketch template Plain paper, The predefined sketch templates. Lined papernarrow, Lined paper-wide, Grid paper (small grid) or Grid paper (large grid) Custom templates The custom templates must be jpg files with a maximum of five megapixel. The templates are stored in the CONFIG\SKETCH_TEMPLATES folder of the data storage device. To make a custom template selectable in the list, transfer the template to the internal memory in Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Transfer user objects. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects". Next step Select a template. OK to access Sketch pad. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging 366 Sketch Pad Refer to "Overview of keys, softkeys and icons" for information on the toolbar. Key Description Store To store and link the field sketch. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 33.6 Exporting Images Exporting images in DXF format Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export DXF Data. 2. Config.. goes to Configuration, Export page. 3. Checking Export images activates the export of images linked with any point, line or area. Exporting images in XML format If multiple images are linked with one point, one line or one area, then all images linked are exported. Images are exported according to the filter settings. Press Filter.. to check the settings. Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Export & copy data\Export XML Data. 2. Config.. accesses Configuration, Export page. 3. Checking Images activates the export of images linked with any point, line or area. Viva Series, Camera & Imaging Images are exported according to the filter settings. Press Filter.. to check the settings. 367 34 TPS Functions 34.1 EDM Description Electronic Distance Measurement EDM is the function used for distance measurements. There are different modes the instrument can work in. Refer to Measure & Target Settings. 34.2 Prism Search Methods 34.2.1 Automatic aiming Description Automatic aiming is the function which recognises and measures the position of a prism using a CCD array. A laser beam is transmitted and the reflected beam is received by the built-in CCD array. The position of the reflected spot with respect to the centre of the CCD is computed. These automatic aiming offsets are used to correct the horizontal and vertical angles. The automatic aiming offsets are also used to control the motors which turn the instrument to centre the crosshairs to the prism. In order to minimise the time for measuring, the crosshairs are not moved to the exact centre of the prism. The automatic aiming offset can be up to 500 cc depending on selected Measure mode. The automatic aiming function measures the offsets between the crosshairs and prism centre and corrects the horizontal and vertical angles accordingly. Therefore the horizontal and vertical angles are measured to the prism-centre, even if the crosshairs are not aimed precisely at the centre of the prism. Motorised instruments can be equipped with automatic aiming. For Target aiming: Automatic the instrument can find a static prism and measure a distance once Meas or Dist is pressed. The instrument does not follow a moving prism. Field of view The telescope field of view is the region seen when looking through the telescope. The automatic aiming field of view is the region seen by the automatic aiming. Both are identical on TPS instruments. Automatic aiming measurement If the prism is in the field of view with Target aiming: Automatic the crosshairs are automatically positioned to the prism when, for example Meas or Dist is pressed. No automatic aiming search is started. The displayed values are always related to the centre of the prism after Meas or Dist is pressed. For Meas, these values are displayed only shortly after the key press. The crosshairs of the telescope may not fully coincide with the centre of the prism when viewed through the telescope. The remaining automatic aiming offsets for the horizontal and vertical angles are measured by the automatic aiming function and applied to the measured and displayed angles. TS_004 Viva Series, TPS Functions 368 Automatic aiming search If the prism is not in the field of view when Meas or Dist is pressed, an automatic aiming search is started. For the automatic aiming search the automatic aiming window is scanned line by line starting at the current telescope position. If the • prism was not found: Retry can be pressed to search for the prism in an increased area. • prism was found: The automatic aiming measurement is performed to position the telescope to the centre of the prism. TS_005 Automatic aiming window The automatic aiming window is a relative window based on the current telescope position. The horizontal and vertical extent can be defined. Fine search window If no target is found after the prediction time and If no target found after prediction then: Start fine search is set, then the prism is searched for with automatic aiming using a dynamic automatic aiming window. This window covers a horizontal region from the position of loss of lock to the current telescope position, and the same extent on the other side. The vertical dimension of the dynamic window is one third of the horizontal expansion. Targeting modes Refer to Measure & Target Settings. 34.2.2 PowerSearch Description The PowerSearch module allows an automatic prism detection within a short time period. The PowerSearch function can be started in the Leica TPS Favourites screen and configured in TPS settings\Prism search settings, PowerSearch window. Functionality a b c The PowerSearch function consists of a transmitter (a) and a receiver (b). Both are installed in the telescope. When PowerSearch is activated, the instrument starts to rotate around its standing axis. The transmitter emits a vertical laser swath. If the laser swath detects a prism, the rotation of the instrument is stopped. Afterwards an automatic aiming measurement in the vertical direction is performed. TS_006 a) EGL b) Transmitter c) Receiver If a PS window is defined and active, PowerSearch is executed within the defined limits. Viva Series, TPS Functions 369 360° search If the search window is not defined and PowerSearch is started, the prism is searched for with PowerSearch in the 360° window. The default search with PowerSearch consists of a short swing in anti-clockwise direction followed by a complete 360° turn in clockwise direction. If a prism is detected the movement is stopped and an automatic aiming search is performed. PowerSearch window The PowerSearch window can be defined individually. It is specified by absolute angle values and does not change its position. The PowerSearch window can be set in the Prism Search Settings, PowerSearch window page by aiming at two opposite points of the PowerSearch window. When Use PowerSearch window is checked and a PowerSearch is started, a prism is searched for within the defined window. Dynamic PowerSearch window When Use PowerSearch window is not checked and the instrument has lost lock, after the prediction time, the prism is searched for in a dynamic PowerSearch window. This window covers a region at the position after prediction of horizontal 100 gon by vertical 40 gon. Direction of search The PowerSearch routine can be activated clockwise or anticlockwise by using hotkeys. This action will have no influence on the prism search settings. 34.3 Follow Moving Prisms - Lock Description Lock enables instruments equipped with automatic aiming to follow a moving prism. The automatic aiming sensor is active when Lock is active. When Target lock on is selected in Leica TPS Favourites, an automatic aiming search is executed. The instrument locks onto the prism and follows its movements. Automatic aiming offsets are continuously applied to the angle measurements. When the instrument loses lock to the prism, a PowerSearch or fine search (auto aiming search) can be executed depending on the prism search settings. Lock is unavailable for SmartStation. If the speed of the prism is too fast, the target may be lost. Make sure that the speed does not exceed the figure given in the technical data. Enable lock Selecting Target lock on in Leica TPS Favourites, will immediately activate an automatic aiming search to find the prism. Alternatively, as long as Target aiming is set to Lock in Measure & Target Settings, then pressing Meas, Dist, PowerSearch right, OK in Check Point, Joystick, Turn to Hz/V and Orientation With Compass will start a PowerSearch or automatic aiming search to find the prism. When the prism is found, the instrument locks onto the prism. The instrument follows the moving prism and the automatic aiming function remains active. Loss of lock When the instrument is locked onto a prism, lock may be lost if the movement of the prism is too fast for the instrument to follow or the prism is hidden behind an object. After lock is lost, the prediction, as set in Prism Search Settings is used to find the prism again. The automatic aiming function is still active. Whenever the prism is moved in the field of view during the prediction and any other search periods, the instrument locks automatically to the prism. Prediction a TS_007 Viva Series, TPS Functions b c a) Moving prism locked onto by the instrument b) Loss of lock c) Prediction 370 As long as the prism is being tracked by the instrument a mathematical filter continuously calculates the average speed and direction of the prism. If the line of sight between instrument and prism is disturbed, the instrument keeps on moving using these calculated values. This behaviour is called prediction. The prediction time can be configured. During prediction, the LOCK icon is displayed and if the prism comes into the instruments field of view again the automatic aiming will lock to the prism. Prism search after prediction After prediction, the prism is searched for depending on the settings in Prism Search Settings. • If no target found after prediction then: Stop searching. If the prism moved in the field of view, the prism is not searched for until Meas, Dist, Target lock on is pressed. • If no target found after prediction then: Start fine search: prism is searched for in the dynamic automatic aiming window with automatic aiming. • If no target found after prediction then: Start PowerSearch and Use PowerSearch window is checked: prism is searched for in the PS window with PowerSearch. • If no target found after prediction then: Start PowerSearch and Use PowerSearch window is NOT checked: prism is searched for in the dynamic PowerSearch window. Relock Independent of the setting for If no target found after prediction then the instrument can relock to the prism. Refer to paragraph "Enable lock". 34.4 RCS Description The instrument can be controlled by the field controller via radio. The automatic aiming function does not necessarily have to be active when working in RCS mode. The field controller is used to remote control the instrument. No data can be stored on the field controller. The screen and content displayed on the field controller are a copy of the remote controlled instrument. The communication between the total station and the field controller is established via radio modems. One radio modem has to be connected to the total station serial port. 34.5 EGL Description The Emitting Guide Light, EGL, consists of two differently coloured flashing lights in the telescope housing of the TPS. The EGL is used for guidance into the line of sight. If the left light is seen, the prism must be moved right and vice versa. If both flashing lights can be seen, the prism is in the line of sight of the instrument. Viva Series, TPS Functions 371 Functionality 100 m (300 ft) The EGL can be used • to help guide the prism into the telescope line of sight when the instrument is controlled remotely and Target aiming: Lock. • to stake out points. 6m (20 ft) The instrument emits two differently coloured flashing cones of light. At a target distance of 100 m, the cones have a width of 6 m. Between the two cones of light, a sector with a width of 30 mm is created where both guide lights are visible simultaneously. In this position, the prism is in the line of sight of the instrument. 6m (20 ft) TS_008 Using the EGL stepby-step Step Description 1. Check Use the instrument guide lights (EGL) in the Instrument Lights screen. OR Set Target aiming: Lock and press Comps or Turn to Hz/V or J Stick on the Leica TPS Favourites screen. 2. Align instrument line of sight and prism, where both flashing EGL lights can be seen simultaneously. 3. OK to lock onto the prism. 4. If the instrument has locked onto the prism the EGL is turned off automatically. If the EGL was turned on in Instrument Lights, it has to be turned off by unchecking the check box. 34.6 Illumination Description There are several different illumination types built into the instrument that all fulfil different functions. Some are to support measurements, for example the visible red laser pointer. Others, such as the screen illumination, are for more convenient work with the instrument. These different types of illumination are described in this chapter. Laser plummet The laser plummet allows setting up the instrument over a marked point. The laser beam is emitted from the bottom of the instrument, pointing to the ground. When the instrument is levelled and the laser beam points exactly at the ground point, the instrument is set up correctly. The laser plummet can be turned on and off. It is turned on automatically when opening the Instrument\TPS settings\Level bubble & compensator screen and turned off when leaving the screen. Viva Series, TPS Functions 372 Visible red laser pointer The visible red laser pointer is used to measure to any surface. The visible red laser pointer is arranged coaxially with the line of sight of the telescope and emitted through the objective. If the instrument is correctly adjusted, the visible red laser beam coincides with the line of sight. The direction of the beam should be inspected before precise distance measurements are executed. An excessive deviation of the laser beam from the line of sight can cause inaccurate results. GUS74 Laser Guide The GUS74 Laser Guide is an option for TPS instruments. It is built into a special telescope compartment and emits a visible red laser beam to visualise the line of sight over long ranges. The GUS74 Laser Guide is used for special applications such as tunnelling. Refer to GUS74 Laser Guide Manual for detailed information. 34.7 Connection to Other Total Stations 34.7.1 Leica Legacy Total Stations Supported functions Function TPS300 TPS400 TPS700 TPS700A TPS800 TPS1000 TPS1100 Robotic control - - - - Auto aiming - - Level bubble - - - - Auto aiming in setup - 1 - 1 Compensator on/off Laser plummet on/off - Laser pointer on/off - EGL on/off Connection status TPS battery status - - - - Move between reflectorless & prism measurements Measure mode continuous Auto logged points 1 Supported Not supported The auto aiming function when doing a setup only works if a distance is measured. The Meas or Dist key must be used. When using the Store key only, the auto aiming function in setup is unavailable. SmartPole and SmartStation are not supported with Leica Legacy instruments. Prism constants and correction values set at the CS are applied to the raw measurement data taken from the total station. Viva Series, TPS Functions 373 34.7.2 Topcon Supported functions Function GTS GPT GPT-L GTS800 GTS820 GTS900 GPT8000 GPT8200 GPT9000 Robotic control - - - Auto aiming - - - Level bubble - - - Compensator on/off - - - Laser plummet on/off - - - Laser pointer on/off - - - EGL on/off Connection status TPS battery status - - - Move between reflectorless & prism measurements Measure mode continuous - - - Auto logged points - - - - Supported Not supported Set 300/500/600 SRX Series Set X Series Set SCT6 Function Set 230RM Series Supported functions Set 110M Series Sokkia Set 110 Series Set 110R Set 120 Series 34.7.3 Set 10/10K Series Set 20/20K Series Set 30R/30RK/130R Prism constants and correction values set at the CS are applied to the raw measurement data taken from the total station. Set 030R/220/010 Robotic control - - - - - - - Auto aiming - - - - - - - Level bubble - - - - - - - Compensator on/off - - - - - - - Laser plummet on/off - - - - - - - Laser pointer on/off - - - - - - EGL on/off - - - - - Connection status TPS battery status - - - - - - - Move between reflectorless & prism measurements 1 - - - Measure mode continuous Auto logged points Others 2 - Viva Series, TPS Functions - - - - - 374 1 2 Supported Not supported Not available Set Prism or Any surface measure modes at the instrument. Set the correct prism constant at the controller. Setup not available. Set horizontal angle at instrument. Nivo C Nivo M Function DTM500 Series Supported functions DTM330 Series NPL330 Series Nikon DTM300 Series 34.7.4 Nikon A Series Prism constants and correction values set at the CS are applied to the raw measurement data taken from the total station. 800 Series Robotic control - - - - - - Auto aiming - - - - - - Level bubble - - - - - - Compensator on/off - - - - - Laser plummet on/off - - - - - - Laser pointer on/off - - - - - - EGL on/off - - - - - Connection status TPS battery status - - - - - - Move between reflectorless & prism measurements - - - Measure mode continuous - - - - - - Auto logged points Others 1 - 1 Supported Not supported Not available Setup not available. Set horizontal angle at instrument. Prism constants and correction values set at the CS are applied to the raw measurement data taken from the total station. Viva Series, TPS Functions 375 35 Calculator 35.1 Accessing the Calculator Description The calculator can be used to perform the following arithmetic operations such as • addition, subtraction, multiplication and division • statistics • trigonometry, hyperbolic trigonometry and calculations with Pi • polar, rectangular and angle conversions • powers, logs, roots and exponential functions. Operating modes The calculator has two operating modes - RPN mode and Standard mode. The arithmetic operations available are identical, the difference lies in the way information is entered, stored and displayed on the screen. Type Description RPN Reverse Polish Notation This operating mode was developed as a way of writing mathematical expressions without using parenthesis and brackets. Many scientific calculators, for example Hewlett Packard calculators, are implemented with this operating mode. Values are entered and kept in a working stack. Standard This operating mode is based on the principles of conventional pocket calculators. There is no stacking of values. Access Press Calc in any screen when editing an editable field for numeric characters, such as Azimuth in Traverse Input. 35.2 Configuring the Calculator Access In RPN Calculator or Standard Calculator press Fn Config.. to access Calculator Configuration. Calculator Configuration Viva Series, Calculator Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 376 Description of fields Field Option Description Operating mode RPN The principle of, for example, Hewlett Packard calculators. Standard The principle of conventional pocket calculators. The unit used for trigonometric functions in the calculator. The selection here is independent from the angle setting in Regional Settings, Angle. Angular unit Display Dec DEG Degrees RAD Radians GRAD Gon From 0 to 10 deci- The number of decimal places shown. mals Next step OK confirms the selections made and returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed. 35.3 Using the Calculator 35.3.1 RPN Mode Requirements Operating mode: RPN in Calculator Configuration. RPN Calculator Key Description F1 - F6 The function keys are allocated seven times. Refer to Description of Softkeys. OK Using the up and down keys the various allocations can be accessed. Description of fields Viva Series, Calculator Field Option Description First field on the screen Display only The unit used for trigonometric functions in the calculator as configured in Calculator Configuration. DEG Degrees RAD Radians 377 Field Option Description GRAD Gon ΣY Display only The result of the sum or difference of values in Y using Σ+ and Σ-. ΣX Display only The result of the sum or difference of values in X using Σ+ and Σ-. T Display only Third stack. After an operation, the value from Z is written here. Z Display only Second stack. After an operation, the value from Y is written here. Y Display only First stack. After an operation, the value from X is written here. X Editable field The value for the next operation. Next step Fn Quit returns to Main Menu. 35.3.2 Standard Mode Requirements Operating mode: Standard in Calculator Configuration. Standard Calculator Key Description F1 - F6 The function keys are allocated seven times. Refer to Description of Softkeys. OK Using the up and down keys the various allocations can be accessed. Description of fields Field Option Description First field on the screen Display only The unit used for trigonometric functions in the calculator as configured in Calculator Configuration. DEG Degrees RAD Radians GRAD Gon Display only The result of the sum or difference of values in the last field on the screen using Σ+ and Σ-. Σ Viva Series, Calculator 378 Field Option Description Third to sixth field on the screen Display only Previously entered value OR Latest operation including result. # indicates that the value is cut after the third decimal. Last field on the screen Editable field The value for next operation or result from latest operation. Next step Fn Quit returns to Main Menu. 35.3.3 Description of Softkeys Overview of softkeys The softkeys shown and described are from Operating mode: RPN. Most of the softkeys are identical and their functionality is similar to the softkeys from Operating mode: Standard. Key Description F1 - F6 The function keys are allocated seven times. OK Description of softkeys Viva Series, Calculator Using the up and down keys the various allocations can be accessed. First level Key Description + To add X and Y. - To subtract X from Y. * To multiply X by Y. / To divide Y by X. 379 Key Description +/- To change between positive and negative algebraic sign for X. Clr X To clear X. Second level Key Description Σ+ To add X to ΣX and Y to ΣY. Σ- To subtract X from ΣX and Y from ΣY. Mean To calculate the mean ΣX. SDev To calculate the standard deviation for ΣX. Clr ∑ To clear ΣX and T. Third level Key Description Sin To calculate sine of X. Cos To calculate cosine of X. Tan To calculate tangent of X. Asin To calculate arcsine of X. Acos To calculate arccosine of X. Atan To calculate arctangent of X. Fourth level Key Description °DMS To convert decimal degrees into dd.mm.ss. °Dec To convert dd.mm.ss into decimal degrees. PI To insert X: 3.1415926536. The number of decimals depends on the selection for Display Dec in Calculator Configuration. D->R To convert degrees into radians. R->D To convert radians into degrees. Fifth level Viva Series, Calculator Key Description Polar Conversion of rectangular coordinates into polar coordinates. The y coordinate must be visible in Y and the x coordinate in X when pressing this key. The angle is displayed in Y and the distance in X. 380 Key Description Rect Conversion of polar coordinates into rectangular coordinates. The angle must be visible in Y and the distance in X when pressing this key. The y coordinate is displayed in Y, the x coordinate in X. Sqrt To calculate X. X^2 To calculate X2. 1/X To inverse X:. Y^X To calculate YX. Sixth level Key Description Log To calculate the log10X. 10^X To calculate 10X. LN To calculate the logeX. e^X To calculate eX. Y^X To calculate YX. Seventh level Key Description Sto To store X to the memory. Up to ten values can be stored. Rcl To recall a value for X from the memory. Up to ten values can be recalled. X<>Y To swap the values for X and Y. Last X To recall the last X before recent calculation. Clear To delete everything. Fn to access the second level of function keys Viva Series, Calculator Key Description Fn Config.. To configure the calculator. Fn Done To return to Main Menu. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 381 36 NTRIP via Internet 36.1 Configuring Access to the Internet Select the internet interface It is recommended to configure an Ntrip connection via the RTK Rover Wizard. Select Main Menu\Instrument\GPS settings\RTK rover wizard and follow the on-screen instructions. The remainder of this chapter describes each of the steps and screens when configuring without the use of the RTK Rover Wizard. One Internet interface is available - the CS Internet. Two Internet interfaces are available - the CS Internet and the GS Internet. The CS Internet is used as an example. The explanations are also valid for the GS Internet. To access the Internet with a GPS or TPS instrument, General Packet Radio System devices will normally be used. GPRS is a telecommunication standard for transmitting data packages using the Internet Protocol (IP). Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\All other connections. On the CS connections page highlight CS Internet. Press Edit... Configure the Internet interface Step Description 1. Select a port (Connect using). 2. Select a device (Devce..). 3. If necessary enter User ID and Password. Some providers ask for a User ID and a Password to allow connecting to the Internet via GPRS. Contact your provider if a user ID and password needs to be used. 4. OK to return to Connection Settings. 5. In Connection Settings press Cntrl... Continue with the next paragraph. Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 382 Configure the GPRS/Internet Connection Step Description 1. On the GPRS details page, type in the APN (Access Point Name of a server from the network provider). Contact your provider to get the correct APN. 2. On the Sim codes page, type in the PIN code for the Sim card. If the PIN is locked for any reason, for example the wrong PIN was entered, input the Personal UnblocKing code for access to the PIN. 3. OK twice to return to the Main Menu. The instrument is now online to the Internet. The Internet online status icon is displayed. But because GPRS is being used, no charges are yet made since no data transfer from the Internet has yet taken place. Check the status of the Internet connection Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument status info\Connection status. 2. On the CS connections page highlight CS Internet. 3. Press Intfce. 4. Check the Internet online status. 5. OK twice to return to the Main Menu. Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 383 36.2 Using the NTRIP Service with a Real-Time Rover Select the internet interface Select Main Menu: Instrument\Connections..\All other connections. On the GS connections page highlight RTK Rover. Press Edit... Settings for the RTK rover Step Description 1. On the General page, make sure that an Internet port is selected for Connect using. 2. On the RTK network page, enable Use RTK network. 3. Press OK to return to Connection Settings, GS connections page. 4. Press Cntrl.. to access Internet Port Connection. Continue with the next paragraph. Select the server to be accessed in the Internet Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 384 Step Description 1. The Server to use, must be Ntrip enabled. To create a new server click into the selectable list. 2. In New Server, General page, type in the address and the port of the server through which the data is provided. Each server has several ports for various services. 3. In New Server, NTRIP page, activate the use of Ntrip. 4. Type in the NTRIP user ID and the NTRIP password. A user ID and the password are required to receive data from the Ntrip Caster. Contact the Ntrip administrator for information. 5. Store followed by OK to return to Internet Port Connection. Select the Ntrip mountpoint Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 385 Step Description 1. If the selected server is Ntrip enabled, Ntrip mountpoint is available. 2. Press Source to access NTRIP Source Table. 3. All mountpoints are listed. Mountpoints are the Ntrip servers sending out real-time data. This screen consists of two columns. The first column shows the abbreviations for the Mountpoints, the second the city where the Mountpoint is located. 4. Highlight a mountpoint. 5. Press OK twice to return to Connection Settings, GS connections page. 6. Fn Conect and Fn Disco are now available in all applications to connect to and disconnect from the Ntrip server. Viva Series, NTRIP via Internet 386 37 MapView Interactive Display Feature 37.1 Overview Description MapView is an interactive display feature embedded in the firmware. MapView provides a graphical display of the survey elements which allows for a better overall understanding of how the data being used and measured relates to each other. Depending on the application and where in the application MapView is accessed from, different functionality is available. The displayed data in all modes of MapView can be shifted by using both the arrow keys and the touchscreen. Displayable data The data displayed in MapView is defined by the application through which it was accessed, filters set in Sorts & Filters, and the selections made in Map View Settings. The datum view is always considered as local. If negative coordinates are used in CAD files to suit projections with the origin in North-East and the axes going South and West, use the setting Switch Easting for CAD files and Switch Northing for CAD files in Regional Settings, Coords page to mirror the CAD file in MapView. 37.2 Accessing MapView Description The MapView interactive display feature is provided as a page within all applications and data management. It is accessed through the application itself. Depending on the application and from where in the application MapView is accessed, different MapView modes are available. Access step-by-step Example for data management Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: Jobs & Data\View & edit data. 2. Page until the Map page is active. Example for an application Step Description 1. Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Intersection. 2. COGO Intersection Choose a method and enter appropriate data. 3. Calc to access Intersection Result, Results page. 4. Page until the Plot page is active. 37.3 Configuring MapView Description Allows options to be set which are used as default options within MapView. These settings are stored within the working style and apply to all Map and Plot pages, regardless of how MapView is accessed. Any changes made in Map View Settings affect the appearance of MapView in all applications, not just the active application. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 387 Access step-by-step Press Fn Config.. on any Map or Plot page. Map View Settings, General page Description of fields Field Option Description Display mapview toolbar Check box Determines if the toolbar of icons is displayed. Refer to "37.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar". Show my path Check box Displays the path of the rover as a dashed line. Centre To centre the map on the target. Target to For Measure mode: Standard and Measure mode: Single (fast), the map will centre onto the last measured point. For Measure mode: Continuous and Measure mode: Long range (>4km), the map will centre onto the current reflector position. TPS instrument Rotate data in Check box map by 180° To centre the map on the instrument. To rotate the map by 180°. The north arrow is not rotated and still orientated towards the top of the screen. Next step Page changes to the Points page. Map View Settings, Points page Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Symbol To view all point symbols and their descriptions. Page To change to another page on this screen. Description of fields Field Option Display points Check box Description Determines if points are displayed in MapView. Point ID Check box Available if Display points is checked. Determines if the ID of a point is displayed. Point code Check box Available if Display points is checked. Determines if the code of a point is displayed. Height of point Check box Available if Display points is checked. Determines if the height of a point is displayed. Check box Available if Display points is checked. Determines if the coordinate quality of a point is displayed. Show pt info Check box for a maximum of 200 pts If checked, point information is not shown when more than 200 points are displayed. If not checked, the point information as configured is shown regardless of the number of points being displayed. Quality of point Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 388 Displayable point information a) b) c) d) Point ID Point code Height of point Quality of point Next step Page changes to the Lines & areas page. Map View Settings, Lines & areas page Description of fields Field Option Description Display lines Check box Determines if lines are displayed in MapView. Line ID Check box Available if Display lines is ticked. Determines if the ID of a line is displayed. Line code Check box Available if Display lines is ticked. Determines if the code of a line is displayed. Display areas Check box Determines if areas are displayed in MapView. Area ID Check box Available if Display areas is ticked. Determines if the ID of an area is displayed. Area code Check box Available if Display areas is ticked. Determines if the code of an area is displayed. Displayable line/area information A line is shown as example. a) Line ID b) Line code Next step Page changes to the DTM page. Map View Settings, DTM page Description of fields Field Option Description Display DTM in map Check box When this box is checked, DTM triangles are shown within the Map page of the Stakeout, Reference Line, Road or Rail application. Colour Selectable list The setting of for this check box is linked to the setting for the Show DTM on map check box in Use heights from DTM (Roads, Tools Menu). Defines the colour of the active DTM layer boundary. Next step Page changes to the Alignments page. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 389 Map View Settings, Alignments page Description of fields Field Option Description Vertical exag- Editable field geration of profiles The exaggeration factor of the map. The value can be between 0.1 and 50. This setting only has an effect in applications where cross-section views are displayed. Display all Check box layers in cross-section view When this box is checked, all layers of an alignment are displayed in a cross section view. Next step Page changes to the CAD import page. Map View Settings, CAD import page Description of fields Field Option Description Point prefix, Line prefix or Area prefix Editable field The identifier with up to four characters is added in front of the ID of the imported CAD points, lines or areas. Create points Check box at the vertices of lines Height to exclude Editable field Apply height Check box to 2D CAD data on import Height to apply Editable field Option if points will be created at vertices of the imported line/arc/polyline elements. Height values inside the DXF file are considered invalid and will not be converted. When this box is checked, a height can be defined which is then applied to all imported 2D CAD points. Available when Apply height to 2D CAD data on import is checked. The height to apply to 2D CAD points. Next step OK confirms the selections and returns to the previous screen. 37.4 MapView Components 37.4.1 Screen Area Standard screen a c b SYS13_030 Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature a) North arrow b) Scale bar c) Toolbar 390 Scale bar Symbol Description Scale of the current screen. The minimum is 0.1 m. There is no maximum for the zoom but the scale cannot display values greater than 99000 m. In this case the value displayed will be >99000 m. North arrow Symbol Description North arrow. North is always orientated towards the top of the screen. Toolbar Symbol Description Icon toolbar. Refer to "37.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar" for more information about the functionality of the icons in the toolbar. Point with focus Symbol Description The point that has the focus. Line/area with focus Symbol Description The line/area that has the focus is bolder than other lines shown in blue for the full and in orange for Lite version of SmartWorx Viva. Rover Symbol Description Available in survey mode. Position of the rover. The rover path is shown as dotted line. Prism Symbol Description Measured position. The orientation of the instrument is shown as dotted line. Instrument station Symbol Description Position of the instrument station. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 391 37.4.2 Keys, Softkeys and Toolbar Description Standard functionality is provided by softkeys, keys and a toolbar within MapView. The softkeys are available regardless of the mode in which MapView was accessed and always perform the same functions. Icons are available in a toolbar. The toolbar is always located on the right side of the screen. Some of the functions performed by the icons can also be replicated using a softkey or key in the same mode as when the icon appears. The softkey/key equivalent of each icon, if one exists, are indicated in the following table. Overview of keys, softkeys and icons The softkeys described in this table are standard on all MapView screens. For descriptions of mode-specific softkeys, see appropriate chapters. Icon Key or Softkey Description - To scroll the MapView toolbar. 1 or Fn Refrsh in The fit icon fits all displayable data, according to some applications filters and the map configuration, into the screen area, using the largest possible scale. 2 3 To zoom into the map. Pressing ESC stops the zooming process. To zoom out of the map. Pressing ESC stops the zooming process. - The windowing icon zooms to a specified area window. An area window can be drawn by dragging the stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to make a rectangular area or by tapping twice on the screen to define diagonally opposite corners of a rectangular area. This action causes the screen to zoom to the selected area. 5 To centre the selected point, the GPS rover, the TPS target or TPS instrument. - To select multiple objects. Points within the rectangular area are always selected. Depending on the application also lines, for example dbx lines, Road/Rail job lines or lines from background maps, and areas are selected. Drag the stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to make a rectangular area. • Drag from top left to bottom right to select all lines inside the rectangular window. • Drag from bottom right to top left to select all lines crossing the rectangular window. Fn Config.. To configure MapView. Refer to "37.3 Configuring MapView". Fn Layrs.. To turn layers of background maps (CAD files) on and off. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job" for information on CAD files. - To import CAD files for background only maps. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job". Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 392 Icon Key or Softkey Description - To switch the view. Available in some applications, for example Reference Plane, Road or Rail. - 0 To make the MapView do a complete redraw. - Fn Filter.. To change the filter settings. Refer to "6.6 Point Sorting and Filters". 37.4.3 Point Symbols Description When Display points is checked in Map View Settings, Points page, points are displayed, in all modes, according to their class. A list of the point types available, and their description, is available. Access Press Symbol in Map View Settings, Points page. Symbols Symbol Description 3D control point is a point of class CTRL with full coordinate triplet. 2D control point is a position only point of class CTRL. Adjusted point is a point of class ADJ. Base point is a point of class REF. Average point is a point of class AVGE. Measured point is a point of class MEAS. Single Point Position uploaded from LGO. Navigated point is a point of class NAV. Estimated point is a point of class EST. Points of class None or points of class Ctrl/Meas with a height only component cannot be displayed in MapView. 37.5 Selecting Points, Lines and Areas Selecting a point/line/area using the touch screen step-by-step The instructions for selecting a point using the softkeys can be applied for lines and areas. Step Description 1. Go to Data:, Map page. 2. Display If no point field is highlighted on the previous page when the Map page is accessed, then any point that is selected will be assigned to the first point field on the previous page, the second point to the second point field, etc. If a point field is highlighted when the Map page is accessed then the point selected will be assigned to that field. Tap on the point to be selected. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 393 Step 3. Description Display When there are multiple points within the same area and the precise selection is unclear, tapping on the point will access Select Point. Have multiple points been selected? • If yes, continue with step 4. • If no, continue with step 5. 4. Select Point Point ID The ID of the points within range of the point selection. Point code The code of the points within range of the point selection. Select the desired point. More to display information about the point code, the 3D coordinate quality and class, the time the point was stored and the date the point was stored. 5. OK returns to Data:, Map page with the focus on the selected point. 6. A square is centred on the selected point and the point parameter text is highlighted. Select a point/line/area without touch screen Without touch screen or when Use the touch screen is not checked in Screen & Audio Settings, Screen page, points, lines and areas can only be selected using the selectable lists. 37.6 Context Menu Access The context menu is available in Survey, COGO, Stakeout (points and DTM), Reference Line, Roads and Data Management. On a Map page hold down the supplied stylus on an object for 0.5 second. Options in the context menu The options available in the context menu depend on the object and the application. Option Available in Description Import • • • • • • Imports the selected CAD object into the DBX. The object is imported to the job the CAD is attached to. The entities the object is imported with are displayed. Data Management COGO Reference Line Stakeout Survey Roads The import settings are configured in Map View Settings, CAD import page. Refer to "37.3 Configuring MapView". Information.. • • • • • • Data Management Displays the entities of the object. COGO Reference Line Stakeout Survey Roads Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 394 Option Available in Manage layers.. • • • • • • Description Data Management Opens the CAD Layers screen and highlights the layer to which the object belongs. COGO Refer to "CAD Layers". Reference Line Stakeout Survey Roads Stake point.. • Stakeout Imports the selected point to the control job and selects it for staking immediately. Stake vertices.. • Stakeout Available when Create points at the vertices of lines is checked in Map View Settings, CAD import page. Imports the selected line/area, along with the new points being created at the vertices. The vertices are imported in a sequential order following the direction of the line. The first point created is the point automatically selected to be staked. The next point to be staked is the next vertex along the line. Use as CL • Import Alignment To select/deselect the highlighted line as Data external chainage centreline. Use as Track CL • Import Alignment To select/deselect the highlighted line as Data track centreline. • Import Alignment To select/deselect the highlighted line as Use as left Data left/right rail. Rail/Use as right Rail Clear selected object • Import Alignment To remove the highlight from the highlighted Data line. Turn to point • in survey mode. To display the current direction as dashed line. A point on the Map page can then be tapped and the instrument turns to this direction. If Target aiming: Automatic the instrument does an ATR search. If Target aiming: Lock the instrument tries to lock on to a prism. Turn to here • in survey mode. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature To display the current direction as dashed line. A location on the Map page can then be tapped and the instrument turns to this direction. 395 37.7 Viewing Results Description MapView can be used to view the results of an application. Results are shown in black, all other information, that is displayable, is shown in grey. Example of results displayed in MapView Application Display Description COGO Intersection, Double bearing Intersecting lines with known bearings from known points COGO line calculation, Segmentation Points defining the line and those points created on the line COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale Original points in grey, calculated COGO points in black COGO Area Division Points from the area and the area division are black, other points are grey Reference Line, Edit Reference Line Reference line with target point as offset from reference line Reference Plane, Edit Reference Plane A dashed rectangle indicates the face view of the plane. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 396 Application Display Description Sets of Angles, Calculating Angles Directions from station to sets of angle points Setup Directions to resection points. Viva Series, MapView Interactive Display Feature 397 38 Tap Map Description Tap Map is an extended MapView regarding the context menus. Tap Map can easily be accessed from the Main Menu. The configuration and the toolbar of Tap Map are identical with those of MapView. Access In Main Menu, press Map. Tap Map Hold down the supplied stylus on an object for 0.5 second. Refer to "37.4.1 Screen Area" for information on the screen area and the toolbar. Options in the context menu Key Description OK To return to the Main Menu. Jobs To define if data from the active working or control job, Road job or DTM job is shown. And, for Road and DTM jobs to define the layer of which data is displayed in the Tap Map screen. Fn Config.. To configure Tap Map. Refer to "37.3 Configuring MapView". Fn Layrs.. To turn layers of background maps (CAD files) on and off. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job" for information on CAD files and CAD background maps. The options available in the context menu depend on the object. Multi selection is only possible when lines are closed. Tap and hold on no object and no other object is currently selected Viva Series, Tap Map Option Description Create point here To open the New Point screen. Refer to "New Point, Coords page". Turn to here The instrument turns to the direction of the tapped point or pixel. The CAD element that was tapped is NOT imported. If Target aiming: Automatic the instrument does an ATR search. If Target aiming: Lock the instrument tries to lock on to a prism. 398 Tap on a point Option Description Turn to here The instrument turns to the direction of the tapped point or pixel. The CAD element that was tapped is NOT imported. If Target aiming: Automatic the instrument does an ATR search. If Target aiming: Lock the instrument tries to lock on to a prism. Bearing & dist from pt.. To open the Traverse Input of COGO. The tapped point is displayed in the field From. Refer to "Traverse Input, Input page". Check point.. To open the Check Point screen. Refer to "Check Point". Stake point.. Available when a DBX or CAD point was tapped. To open the Stakeout application. The tapped point is the point to be staked. Refer to "Stakeout, Stake page". Change to arc (mid pt) Not for CAD points. To create an arc in the line to which the point belongs. The arc is created running through the selected point and the point before and the point after. This functionality is only possible if the point: • belongs to a line or area. • is not the first or last point in the line or area. • is not currently the middle point of an arc in that line. Remove arc Not for CAD points. To remove the arc of which the tapped point is the centre point. This functionality is only possible if the selected point belongs to a DBX line or area and is currently the middle point of an arc in that line. Edit point.. To open the Edit Point: screen. Refer to"Edit Point:, Coords page". Import For CAD points. Imports the selected point into the DBX. The point is imported to the job the CAD is attached to. The entities the point is imported with are displayed. The import settings are configured in Map View Settings, CAD import page. Refer to "Map View Settings, CAD import page". Information.. For CAD points. Displays the entities of the point. Manage layers.. For CAD points. To open the CAD Layers screen. Refer to "CAD Layers". Delete point To delete the tapped point. Clear selected object To remove the highlight from all highlighted objects. Two points selected Viva Series, Tap Map Option Description Create line To create a line from the selected points. The points are added in the order in which they were tapped. Compute inverse.. To open the Inverse Point to Point screen. Refer to "Inverse Point to Point/Inverse Point to Current Pos, Inverse page". Segment line.. To open the Define Line Segmentation screen. Refer to "Create Line, Input page". 399 Option Description Import For CAD points. Imports the selected point into the DBX. The point is imported to the job the CAD is attached to. The entities the point is imported with are displayed. The import settings are configured in Map View Settings, CAD import page. Refer to "Map View Settings, CAD import page". Delete point To delete the tapped point. Clear selected objects To remove the highlight from all highlighted objects. Three points selected Option Description Create line For CAD points. To create a line from the selected points. The points are added in the order in which they were tapped. Create area For CAD points. To create an area from the selected points. The points are added in the order in which they were tapped. Clear selected objects To remove the highlight from all highlighted objects. One line/area selected Option Description Use in Roads To stake/check a (local) line/(local) manual slope. Use in Reference Line To stake/measure a line (with slope), to stake a grid from the line or to select a stake/measure task. Open line/Open area To open the selected line/area. If a CAD line/area was selected, then the CAD line is first imported to the DBX. Edit line../Edit area.. To edit the line/area properties. Refer to "Edit Line, General page". Stake vertices.. Available when Create points at the vertices of lines is checked in Map View Settings, CAD import page. Imports the selected line/area, along with the new points being created at the vertices. The vertices are imported in a sequential order following the direction of the line. The first point created is the point automatically selected to be staked. The next point to be staked is the next vertex along the line. Measure to line/Stake For CAD lines/areas. To measure/stake a line, segment, slope to line line or slope segment or to stake a grid. Import For CAD lines/areas. Imports the selected line/area into the DBX. The line/area is imported to the job the CAD is attached to. The entities the line/area is imported with are displayed. The import settings are configured in Map View Settings, CAD import page. Refer to "Map View Settings, CAD import page". Information.. For CAD lines/areas. Displays the entities of the line/area. Manage layers.. For CAD lines/areas. To open the CAD Layers screen. Refer to "CAD Layers". View line details.. For Road lines. To view and edit the design data. Refer to "View & Edit Data". Delete line/Delete area To delete the line/area. Viva Series, Tap Map 400 Option Description Clear selected object To remove the highlight from all highlighted objects. Several lines selected Overview of icons in the drawing toolbar Option Description Delete objects To delete all highlighted objects. Clear selected object To remove the highlight from all highlighted objects. If Display drawing toolbar is checked in Map View Settings, General page, icons are available in the drawing toolbar. The drawing toolbar is always located on the left side of the screen. Icon Description To scroll the MapView toolbar. To create a line. After storing the new line, all existing lines which are open are closed. If a line is open, then measured points are assigned to the line. To create an area. After storing the new area, all existing areas which are open are closed. If an area is open, then measured points are assigned to the area. Available if objects are closed. To open the highlighted object (lines/areas). Available if objects are open. To close the highlighted object (lines/areas). Available if a line/area is open. To create a straight line between the last point of a line to the new point being tapped or surveyed. Available if a line/area is open. To create an arc from the next two points which are tapped or surveyed. This icon is unavailable if the currently open line or area contains no points. Available if a line/area is open. To create an arc from the next three points which are tapped or surveyed. Viva Series, Tap Map 401 39 Applications - General Description Applications are software packages supporting specific tasks. Available for both GPS and TPS are: • COGO • Determine coord system • TPS hidden point for TPS • Ref plane & grid scan • Roads (Alignment Editor, Roads - Stakeout, Roads - As built check, Rail - Stakeout, Rail - As built check, Tunnel - Stakeout for TPS, Tunnel - As built check for TPS) • Scanning for MS50 R2000 • Setup for TPS • Sets of angles for TPS including monitoring • Stakeout DTM • Stakeout • Stake points & DTM • Measure to ref line / Stake to ref line • Survey, including auto point and for GPS also hidden points • Cross Section • Traverse for TPS • QuickVolume • Volume calculations • Customised applications • Start base over known point for GPS • Start base over last setup for GPS • Start base over any point for GPS For an explanation of the applications refer to the relevant chapters. Loadable and nonloadable applications Loadable applications: Licence key Some loadable applications are protected. They are activated through a specific licence key, which can either be typed in Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load licence keys or the first time the application is started. Refer to "30.3 Load licence keys" for information on how to type in or upload a licence key. Customised applications Customised applications can be developed locally using the GeoC++ development environment. Information on the GeoC++ development environment is available on request from the Leica Geosystems representative. Access to the Go to Work! drop-down menu Non-loadable application: • • • • Can be loaded onto the instrument. Can be deleted from the instrument. Are always available on the instrument. Survey is a non-loadable application. To get an update for the application, the system software has to be reloaded. Select Main Menu: Go to Work!. OR Press . The screens for each COGO.. calculation method can be accessed directly by pressing a configured hot key or via the key. The currently active configuration set and job are used. Viva Series, Applications - General 402 40 COGO 40.1 Overview Description COGO is an application to perform coordinate geometry calculations such as • coordinates of points. • bearings between points. • distances between points. The calculations can be made from • existing point data in the job, known distances or known azimuths. • manually measured points. • entered coordinates. In contrast to hidden point measurements within the Survey application, COGO is more of a calculation program than a measuring program. Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in COGO does not result in the point being recomputed. COGO calculation methods The COGO calculation methods are: • Inverse • Traverse • Intersection • Line and arc calculations • Area division • Shift, rotate & scale • Angle • Horizontal curve • Triangle Distances and azimuths Type of distances: The choices are • Ground • Grid • Ellipsoidal Type of azimuths: The azimuths are grid azimuths relative to the local grid. Coding of COGO points • Thematical coding is available in the results screen after the COGO calculation. Thematical coding of COGO points is identical to coding manually measured points. Refer to "26 Coding" for information on coding. • For the COGO calculation shift, rotate & scale, the codes from the original points are taken over for the calculated COGO points. Viva Series, COGO 403 40.2 Accessing COGO Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO and select a COGO calculation method. COGO calculation methods Description of the COGO calculation methods COGO calculation methods Description Inverse To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D coordinate differences between two known points (or one known point and the current GPS position). To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D coordinate differences between a known point (or the current GPS position) and a user-defined line. To calculate the direction, the distance and the 3D coordinate differences between a known point (or the current GPS position) and a user-defined arc. For these calculations, only points with full coordinate triplets or position only points can be used. Traverse To calculate the position of new points using • the azimuth/bearing and the distance from a known point. Offset optional. • the angle and the distance from a known point. Offset optional. For these calculations, only points with full coordinate triplets or position only points can be used. Intersection To calculate the position of an intersection point using • bearings from two known points. • a bearing and a distance from two known points. • distances from two known points. • four points. • two TPS observation lines. For these calculations, only points with full coordinate triplets or position only points can be used. Line & arc calculations To calculate; • the centre point of an arc. • an offset point from a distance along, and offset from, an arc. • an offset point from a distance along, and offset from, a line. • a base point on an arc of a known offset point. • a base point on a line of a known offset point. • new points along an arc by segmentation. • new points along a line by segmentation. Area division To divide an area by a • defined line. • percentage. • defined area size. Viva Series, COGO 404 COGO calculation methods Description Shift, rotate & scale To calculate the coordinates of new points using shifts, rotation and scale. The values for the shift, rotation and/or scale can either be entered manually or computed using selected matching points. For these calculations, points with full coordinate triplets, position only points or height only points can be used. Angle To calculate the angles that are defined by three points. Horizontal curve To calculate the missing parameters of a curve by the input of the known parameters. Triangle To define a triangle by entering the three sides of the triangle or by selecting three points. 40.3 Configuring COGO Access Press Fn Config.. in the Input screen of any COGO calculation method. Configuration, General page This screen consists of the General page, Points & Quality page, TPS specific page, Residuals page and the Report sheet page. The explanations given for the softkeys given are valid for all pages. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option The type of distances and offsets to be accepted as input or displayed in the fields, and used in the calculation. Distance type Grid Viva Series, COGO Description Distances are calculated as the trigonometric distance between the position of two points. The distance field is Horiz distance. 405 Field Option Description Ground Distances are horizontal distances between two points at the mean elevation parallel to the ellipsoid of the active coordinate system. The distance field is Horiz dist (ground). Ellipsoid Distances are reduced to the ellipsoid. They are calculated as the shortest distance between the two points on the ellipsoid. A scale factor is applied. The distance field is Horiz dist (ell). In the attached coordinate system, a projection, an ellipsoid and a transformation have to be defined to calculate grid, ground and ellipsoid coordinates. Use offsets P1 Yes or No Activates the use of offsets in the COGO calculations. Editable fields for the offsets are available in the Input screen of any COGO calculation method. d1 P2 d2 d3 a SYS13_001 a Ellipsoid Known P1 First known point P2 Second known point Unknown d1 Ground distance d2 Ellipsoid distance d3 Grid distance Next step Page changes to the Points & Quality page. Configuration, Points & Quality page Description of fields Field Option Description Store computed COGO points with class Measured (Meas) Defines the point class of COGO calculated and or Control (Ctrl) stored points as Measured (Meas) or Control (Ctrl) triplets. Position quality for computed COGO point Editable field The estimated value for the position quality assigned to all calculated COGO points which is used for the averaging calculation. Height quality Editable field for computed COGO point The estimated value for the height quality assigned to all calculated heights which is used for the averaging calculation. Next step Page changes to the TPS specific page. Viva Series, COGO 406 Configuration, TPS specific page Description of fields Field Option Description Defines if the instrument measures the second face automatically after storing the first. Measure in two faces Yes After storing a measurement with Meas or Store motorised instruments change face automatically, non-motorised instruments access Telescope Positioning. The measurements of face I and face II are averaged on the base of face I. The averaged value is stored. No No automatic measurement in two faces. Defines the height being used within TPS observations. TPS observation Compute height Using average Using an average of the two observations. Use upper height Using the upper height. Use lower height Using the lower height. Next step Page changes to the Residuals page. Configuration, Residuals page This page applies to Shift, Rotate & Scale (Match Pts). Description of fields Field Option Easting Editable field The limit above which Easting residuals will be flagged as possible outliers. Northing Editable field The limit above which Northing residuals will be flagged as possible outliers. Elevation Editable field The limit above which Height residuals will be flagged as possible outliers. Residual Distbtn The method by which the residuals of the control points will be distributed throughout the transformation area. None Description No distribution is made. Residuals remain with their associated points. 1/distance, Distributes the residuals according to the distance 1/distance² between each control point and the newly transformed or point. 1/distance³/² Multiquadratic Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic interpolation approach. Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Viva Series, COGO 407 Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term should also always be considered to mean Bearing. 40.4 COGO Calculation - Inverse Method 40.4.1 Selecting the Inverse Method Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Inverse. COGO Inverse Viva Series, COGO Key Description OK To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen. 408 Description of the Inverse methods Inverse methods Description Point to point The direction, the distance and the coordinate differences between the two known points can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of two points. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Point to current pos The direction, distance and coordinate differences between the current rover position and a known point can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of one point. The coordinates of the known point • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Current pos to line The direction, distance and coordinate differences between the current position and a given line can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Sufficient information must be known to define a line. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Point to line The direction, distance and coordinate differences between a known point and a given line can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Sufficient information to define a line and the coordinates of one point must be known. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Viva Series, COGO 409 Inverse methods Description Point to arc The direction, distance and coordinate differences between the current position and a given arc can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Sufficient information to define an arc and the coordinates of one point must be known. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. The direction, distance and coordinate differences between a known point and a given arc can be calculated depending on the data available. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Current pos to arc Sufficient information must be known to define an arc. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. 40.4.2 Point to Point and Current Position to Point Diagram P1 d GS_001 Viva Series, COGO P0 Known P0 First known point/current position P1 Second known point Unknown α Direction from P0 to P1 d Horizontal distance between P0 and P1 410 Inverse Point to Point/Inverse Point to Current Pos, Inverse page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example ∆ height cannot be calculated if a position only point is used. Key Description Store To store the result. Revers To swap the From and To points around. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when From or To is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description From Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the COGO calculation. Current position Available for Inverse method: Point to current pos. Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the COGO calculation. Current position Available for Inverse method: Point to current pos. Display only The direction from the first to the second known point. Horiz Display only distance, Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) The horizontal distance between the two known points. ∆ height Display only The height difference between the two known points. Slope distance Display only The slope distance between the two known points. Grade Display only The grade between the two known points. To Azimuth Viva Series, COGO 411 Field Option Description ∆ easting Display only The difference in Easting between the two known points. ∆ northing Display only The difference in Northing between the two known points. Next step Page changes to the Map page. The calculated distance between the two known points is indicated. 40.4.3 Point to Line and Current Position to Line Diagram P1 P3 d1 d2 GS_003 Inverse Point to Line/Inverse Current Pos to Line, Input page Viva Series, COGO P2 P0 Known P0 Start point P1 End point P2 Offset point Unknown P3 Base point d1 Offset distance d2 ∆Line distance For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example ∆ height cannot be calculated if a position only point is used. Key Description Calc To calculate COGO point. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted. 412 Key Description Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available if Start point, End point or Offset point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Modif.. To mathematically modify the values. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description Offset point Selectable list Available for Inverse to: Known Point. The offset point. Current position Available for Inverse method: Current pos to line. The method by which the line will be defined. Create line using 2 points Uses two known points to define the line. Pt, bearing & dist Defines the line using a known point, a distance and an azimuth of the line. Start point Selectable list The start point of the line. End point Selectable list Available for Method: 2 points. The end point of the line. Azimuth Editable field Available for Method: Pt, bearing & dist. The azimuth of the line. Horiz Editable field distance, Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) Available for Method: Pt, bearing & dist. The horizontal distance from the start point to the end point of the line. Next step Calc calculates and accesses Inverse Result. Inverse Result, Result page Viva Series, COGO Key Description Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. 413 Key Description Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Description of fields Field Option Description Offset point Display only Point ID of offset point or Current position. Distance along line Display only Horizontal distance from start point to base point. Offset Display only Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the right and negative to the left of the line. Bearing to offset Display only pt Bearing from base point to offset point. Line length Display only Length of line from start point to end point. Line bearing Display only Bearing of line from start point to end point. Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. Elevation Display only The height of the calculated point. Next step Page changes to the Plot page. 40.4.4 Point to Arc and Current Position to Arc Diagram P1 P3 d1 P2 d2 P0 GS_004 Viva Series, COGO Known P0 Start point P1 End point P2 Offset point Unknown P3 Base point d1 Offset-XX d2 ∆ArcDist-XX 414 Inverse Point to Arc/Inverse Current Pos to Arc, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example ∆ height cannot be calculated if a position only point is used. Key Description Calc To calculate COGO point. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available if Radius, Arc length or Chord length is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available if Radius, Arc length or Chord length is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available if Start point, Second point, End point, Offset point or PI point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Modif.. To mathematically modify the values. Available if Radius, Arc length or Chord length is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description Offset point Selectable list Available for Point to arc: Point to line. The offset point. Current position Available for Inverse method: Current pos to arc. The method by which the arc will be defined. Create arc using 3 points Uses three known points to define the arc. 2 points & radius Defines the arc using two known points and a radius of the arc. 2 tngnts & radius Defines the arc using two tangents and a radius of the arc. Viva Series, COGO 2 tngnts & arc lngth Defines the arc using two tangents and the length of the arc. 2 tngnts & crd lngth Defines the arc using two tangents and the chord of the arc. 415 Field Option Description Start point Selectable list The start point of the arc. Available for Method: 3 points and Method: 2 points & radius. Second point Selectable list The second point of the arc. Available for Method: 3 points. End point Selectable list The end point of the arc. Available for Method: 3 points and Method: 2 points & radius. Point 1 Selectable list A point on the first tangent. Available for Method: 2 tngnts & radius, Method: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Method: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. PI point Selectable list The point of intersection of the two tangents. Available for Method: 2 tngnts & radius, Method: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Method: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. Point 2 Selectable list A point on the second tangent. Available for Method: 2 tngnts & radius, Method: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Method: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. Radius Editable field The radius of the arc. Available for Method: 2 points & radius and Method: 2 tngnts & radius. Arc length Editable field The length of the arc. Available for Method: 2 tngnts & arc lngth. Chord length Editable field The length of the chord. Available for Method: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Inverse Result. Inverse Result, Result page Viva Series, COGO Key Description Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. 416 Description of fields Field Option Description Offset point Display only Point ID of offset point for Inverse to: Known Point or current position. Distance along arc Display only Horizontal distance along the arc from start point to base point. Offset Display only Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the right and negative to the left of the line. Bearing to offset Display only pt Bearing of offset point from base point to offset point. Arc radius Display only Computed radius of arc. Arc length Display only Computed length of arc. Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. Elevation Display only The height of the calculated point. Next step Page changes to the Plot page. 40.5 COGO Calculation - Traverse Method Description Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of one point. • the direction from the known point to the COGO point. • the distance from the known point to the COGO point. • offsets, if necessary and configured. The coordinates of the known point • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. The direction from the known point to the COGO point can be an azimuth or an angle. Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Position only is calculated, height can be typed in. A • • • Viva Series, COGO COGO traverse calculation can be calculated for a single point. multiple points. Several single points are calculated in one sequence. sideshots. 417 Diagram COGO traverse calculation with offset for a single point P3 d3 P1 Known P0 Known point α Direction from P0 to P1 d1 Distance between P0 and P1 d2 Positive offset to the right d3 Negative offset to the left Unknown P1 COGO point without offset P2 COGO point with positive offset P3 COGO point with negative offset d2 P2 d1 P0 GS_005 COGO traverse calculation without offset for multiple points d4 P1 d1 d2 P4 P2 d3 P0 P3 GS_002 Traverse Input, Input page Viva Series, COGO Known P0 Known point α1 Direction from P0 to P1 α2 Direction from P1 to P2 α3 Direction from P2 to P3 α4 Direction from P2 to P4 d1 Distance between P0 and P1 d2 Distance between P1 and P2 d3 Distance between P2 and P3 d4 Distance between P2 and P4 Unknown P1 First COGO point P2 Second COGO point P3 Third COGO point - sideshot P4 Fourth COGO point For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Key Description Calc To calculate the result. 418 Key Description Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance, Offset or Angle right is highlighted. SShot To calculate the point as a sideshot. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance, Offset or Angle right is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when From or Backsight is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Modif.. To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance, Offset or Angle right is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description Method Azimuth The direction from the known point to the COGO point is an azimuth. Angle right The direction from the known point to the COGO point is an angle. From Selectable list The point ID of the known point for the COGO calculation. Backsight Selectable list The point ID of a point used as backsight. Available for Angle right. Angle right Editable field The angle between Backsight and the new COGO point to be calculated from the point selected as From: A positive value is for clockwise angles. A negative value is for anticlockwise angles. Available for Angle right. Azimuth Editable field The direction from the known point to the COGO point. Horiz Editable field distance, Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) The horizontal distance between the known point and the COGO point. Editable field The offset of the COGO point from the line of direction. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets: Yes in Configuration, General page. Offset Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Traverse Results. Viva Series, COGO 419 Traverse Results, Result page Key Description Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates. Fn IndivID For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for the currently active instrument type in ID Templates. The point ID can be changed. Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. Elevation Editable field The height of the known point used in the COGO calculation is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, an arrow points from the known point to the calculated COGO point. Store stores the result. Viva Series, COGO 420 40.6 COGO Calculation - Intersection Method 40.6.1 Selecting the Intersection Method Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Intersection. COGO Intersection Key Description OK To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen. Description of the Intersection methods Intersection methods Description Double bearing Calculates the intersection point of two lines. A line is defined by a point and a direction. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of two points. • the direction from these known points to the COGO point. • offsets if necessary and configured. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Position only is calculated, height can be typed in. Viva Series, COGO 421 Intersection methods Description Double distance Calculates the intersection point of two circles. The circles are defined by the known point as the centre point and the distance from the known point to the COGO point as the radius. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of two points. • the distance from the known points to the COGO point. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Bearing & distance Calculates the intersection point of a line and a circle. The line is defined by a point and a direction. The circle is defined by the centre point and the radius. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of points. • the direction from one known point to the COGO point. • the distance from the second known point to the COGO point. • offsets if necessary and configured. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. By points Calculates the intersection point of two lines. A line is defined by two points. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of four points. • offsets of the lines if necessary and configured. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be manually measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. Viva Series, COGO 422 Intersection methods Description TPS observations Calculates the intersection point of two lines. A line is defined by a TPS station and a TPS measurement from this station. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of two points. • azimuths of the lines. The coordinates of the known points • must be taken from the working job. • must be TPS station points. The azimuths of the lines • must be TPS measurements from the known points. Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used. 40.6.2 Intersection with Double Bearing Diagram P2 P0 P1 GS_006 Known P0 First known point P1 Second known point α1 Direction from P0 to P2 α2 Direction from P1 to P2 Unknown P2 COGO point Intersection Double Bearing, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Viva Series, COGO 423 Key Description Calc To calculate the result. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available when Azimuth or Offset is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when Azimuth or Offset is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when 1st point or 2nd point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Modif.. To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Azimuth or Offset is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description 1st point Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the COGO calculation. 2nd point Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the COGO calculation. Azimuth Editable field The direction from the first known point to the COGO point. Offset Editable field The offset of the COGO point from the line of direction. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets: Yes in Configuration, General page. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result. Intersection Result, Result page Viva Series, COGO Key Description Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. 424 Key Description Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates. Fn IndivID For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for Auxiliary points in ID Templates. The point ID can be changed. Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. Elevation Editable field The height of the first point used in the COGO calculation is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, arrows point from the known points to the calculated COGO point. Store stores the result. 40.6.3 Intersection with Double Distance Diagram r1 P2 P0 r2 P3 P1 GS_008 Viva Series, COGO Known P0 First known point P1 Second known point r1 Radius, as defined by the distance from P0 to P2 r2 Radius, as defined by the distance from P1 to P2 Unknown P2 First COGO point P3 Second COGO point 425 Intersection Double Distance, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Key Description Calc To calculate the result. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available when Horiz distance is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when Horiz distance is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when 1st point or 2nd point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Modif.. To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Horiz distance is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description 1st point Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the COGO calculation. 2nd point Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the COGO calculation. Horiz Editable field distance, Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) The horizontal distance between the known points and the COGO point. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result. Viva Series, COGO 426 Intersection Result, Result 1/Result 2 page Key Description Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Result1 or Result2 To view the first and second result. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates. Fn IndivID For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID Templates. The point ID can be changed. Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. Elevation Editable field The height of the first point used in the COGO calculation is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, the calculated COGO points are shown. Store stores the result. Viva Series, COGO 427 40.6.4 Intersection with Bearing - Distance Diagram P2 r P3 P1 P0 GS_007 Intersection Bearing & Dist, Input page Viva Series, COGO Known P0 First known point P1 Second known point α Direction from P0 to P2 r Radius, as defined by the distance from P1 to P2 Unknown P2 First COGO point P3 Second COGO point For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Key Description Calc To calculate the result. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when 1st point or 2nd point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Modif.. To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. 428 Description of fields Field Option Description 1st point Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the COGO calculation. 2nd point Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the COGO calculation. Azimuth Editable field The direction from the first known point to the COGO point. Offset Editable field The offset of the COGO point from the line of direction. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets: Yes in Configuration, General page. Horiz Editable field distance, Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) The horizontal distance between the known point and the COGO point. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result. Intersection Result, Result 1 page Viva Series, COGO Key Description Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Result1 or Result2 To view the first and second result. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates. Fn IndivID For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. 429 Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID Templates. The point ID can be changed. Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. Elevation Editable field The height of the first point used in the COGO calculation is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, an arrow points from the first known points to the calculated COGO point. Store stores the result. 40.6.5 Intersection with By Points Diagram P1 a P3 b P4 P2 GS_009 Intersection By Points, Input page Viva Series, COGO P0 Known P0 First known point P1 Second known point P2 Third known point P3 Fourth known point a Line from P0 to P1 b Line from P2 to P3 Unknown P4 COGO point For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Key Description Calc To calculate the result. 430 Key Description Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available when Offset is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when Offset is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when 1st point, 2nd point, 3rd point or 4th point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Modif.. To add, subtract, multiply and divide values. Available when Offset is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description 1st point Selectable list The point ID of the known start point of the first line for the COGO calculation. 2nd point Selectable list The point ID of the known end point of the first line for the COGO calculation. 3rd point Selectable list The point ID of the known start point of the second line for the COGO calculation. 4th point Selectable list The point ID of the known end point of the second line for the COGO calculation. Offset Editable field The offset of the line in the direction 1st point to 2nd point or 3rd point to 4th point. A positive offset is to the right, a negative offset is to the left. Available for Use offsets: Yes in Configuration, General page. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result. Intersection Result, Result page Viva Series, COGO Key Description Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. 431 Key Description Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Available for local coordinates. Fn IndivID For an individual point ID independent of the ID template. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID Templates. The point ID can be changed. Easting and Northing Display only The calculated coordinates. Elevation Editable field The height of the first point used in the COGO calculation is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, two solid lines are displayed. Store stores the result. 40.6.6 Intersection with TPS Observation - TPS Observation Diagram 1 P2 P0 2 P1 TS_001 Viva Series, COGO Known P0 First known point (TPS station) P1 Second known point (TPS station) α1 Direction from P0 to P2 α2 Direction from P1 to P2 Unknown P2 COGO point 432 Intersection TPS Obs, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Key Description Calc To calculate the result. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available when 1st TPS station or 2nd TPS station is highlighted and the selected station is the active TPS setup. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description 1st TPS station Selectable list The point ID of the first TPS station which is the known start point of the first line for the COGO calculation. TPS intersection observations Selectable list The point ID of the TPS measurement which is the known end point of the first line for the COGO calculation. Azimuth Display only The azimuth related to the known end point of the first/second line for the COGO calculation. 2nd TPS station Selectable list The point ID of the second TPS station which is the known start point of the second line for the COGO calculation. TPS intersection observations Selectable list The point ID of the TPS measurement which is the known end point of the second line for the COGO calculation. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Intersection Result. Viva Series, COGO 433 40.7 COGO Calculation - Line/Arc Calculations Method 40.7.1 Selecting the Line/Arc Method Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Line & arc calculations. COGO Line/Arc Calculations Key Description OK To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen. Description of the Line/Arc methods Line/Arc Methods Description Calculate arc centre Calculates the coordinates of the centre of the arc. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of three points OR • coordinates of two points • radius to the two points The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Calculate arc offset pt Calculates the coordinates of a new point after input of arc and offset values in relation to an arc. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of three points. • offsets. OR • coordinates of two points. • radius to the two points. • offsets. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Viva Series, COGO 434 Line/Arc Methods Description Calculate line offset pt Calculates the coordinates of a new point after input of station and offset values in relation to a line. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of two points. • offsets. OR • coordinates of one point. • bearing and distance from one point. • offsets. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Calculate arc base pt Calculates the coordinates of the base point, station and offset of a point in relation to an arc. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of three points • coordinates of an offset point OR • coordinates of two points • radius to the two points • coordinates of an offset point The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Calculate line base pt Calculates the base point, station and offset of a point in relation to a line. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of two points and an offset point. OR • coordinates of one point and an offset point • bearing and distance from one point The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Segment an arc Viva Series, COGO This method is similar to Segment a line. See the following row. 435 Line/Arc Methods Description Segment a line Calculates the coordinates of new points on a line. Elements that must be known are • coordinates of the start and the end point of the line OR • a bearing and distance from a known point that define the line AND EITHER • the number of segments dividing the line OR • a segment length for the line. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. 40.7.2 Arc Calculation Diagram for arc centre d2 P1 d1 P0 P2 GS_010 P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 Start point End point Arc centre Arc radius Arc length P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 Start point End point Offset point Base point Offset Distance along arc Diagram for arc base point and offset point P1 P3 d1 P2 d2 P0 GS_004 Viva Series, COGO 436 Create Arc, Input page The softkeys are similar to line calculation. Refer to "40.7.3 Calculate Line Offset Point and Calculate Line Base Point" for information on softkeys. Description of fields Field Option Description The method by which the arc will be defined. Create arc using 3 points Uses three known points to define the arc. 2 points & radius Defines the arc using two known points and a radius of the arc. 2 tngnts & radius Defines the arc using two tangents and a radius of the arc. 2 tngnts & arc lngth Defines the arc using two tangents and the length of the arc. 2 tngnts & crd lngth Defines the arc using two tangents and the chord of the arc. Start point Selectable list The start point of the arc. Available for Create arc using: 3 points and Create arc using: 2 points & radius. Second point Selectable list The second point of the arc. Available for Create arc using: 3 points. End point Selectable list The end point of the arc. Available for Create arc using: 3 points and Create arc using: 2 points & radius. Point 1 Selectable list A point on the first tangent. Available for Create arc using: 2 tngnts & radius, Create arc using: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Create arc using: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. PI point Selectable list The point of intersection of the two tangents. Available for Create arc using: 2 tngnts & radius, Create arc using: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Create arc using: 2 tngnts & crd lngth Point 2 Selectable list A point on the second tangent. Available for Create arc using: 2 tngnts & radius, Create arc using: 2 tngnts & arc lngth and Create arc using: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. Radius Editable field The radius of the arc. Available for Create arc using: 2 points & radius and Create arc using: 2 tngnts & radius. Arc length Editable field The length of the arc. Available for Create arc using: 2 tngnts & arc lngth. Chord length Editable field The length of the chord. Available for Create arc using: 2 tngnts & crd lngth. Next step IF THEN Line/arc method: Calc accesses Centre of Arc Result. Calculate arc centre Viva Series, COGO 437 IF THEN Line/arc method: OK accesses Calculations Input. Calculate arc offset pt Line/arc method: Calculate arc base pt Calculations Input, Input page OK accesses Calculations Input. Description of fields Field Option Description Distance along arc Editable field Horizontal distance along the arc from start point to base point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt. Offset, Offset (ground) or Offset (ell) Editable field Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the right and negative to the left of the arc. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt. Offset point Selectable list Point ID of offset point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc base pt. Next step IF THEN Line/arc method: Calc accesses Line/Arc Calculation Result. Calculate arc offset pt Line/arc method: Calculate arc base pt Centre of Arc Result/Line/Arc Calculation Result, Result page Calc accesses Line/Arc Calculation Result. The result screens for base point and offset point are similar. Refer to paragraph " Line/Arc Calculation Result, Result page" for information on softkeys. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID Templates. Elevation or Editable field Local ellipsoid ht Viva Series, COGO The height of the start point of the arc is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Arc radius Display only Computed radius of arc. Arc length Display only Computed length of arc. Bearing to offset pt Display only Bearing of offset point from base point to offset point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt. Offset point Display only Point ID of offset point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc base pt. 438 Field Option Description Distance Display only along arc, Distance along arc (grnd) or Distance along arc (ell) Horizontal distance along the arc from start point to base point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt. Display only Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the right and negative to the left of the line. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate arc offset pt. Offset, Offset (ground) or Offset (ell) Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, the arc and the new point is shown. Store stores the result 40.7.3 Calculate Line Offset Point and Calculate Line Base Point Diagram P1 P3 d1 d2 GS_003 P0 P2 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 Start point End point Offset point Base point Offset-XX: ∆Line-XX: Line management is not available for COGO line calculations. Create Line, Input page Viva Series, COGO Key Description OK To change to the second layer of editable fields. 439 Key Description Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted. Last.. To select the values for the distance and the offset from previous COGO inverse calculations. Available if Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted. Survy.. To measure a point manually for the COGO calculation. Available if Start point or End point is highlighted. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Modif.. To mathematically modify the values. Available if, Azimuth or Horiz distance is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description The method by which the line will be defined. Create line using 2 points Uses two known points to define the line. Pt, bearing & dist Defines the line using a known point, a distance and an azimuth of the line. Start point Selectable list The start point of the line. End point Selectable list The end point of the line. Available for Create line using: 2 points. Azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the line. Available for Create line using: Pt, bearing & dist. Horiz Editable field distance, Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) The horizontal distance from the start point to the end point of the line. Available for Create line using: Pt, bearing & dist. Next step OK accesses Calculations Input. Calculations Input, Input page Description of fields Field Description Distance Editable field along line, Distance along line (ground) or Distance along line (ell) Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line offset pt. Horizontal distance from start point to base point. Editable field Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line offset pt. Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the right and negative to the left of the line. Offset, Offset (ground) or Offset (ell) Viva Series, COGO Option 440 Field Option Description Offset point Selectable list Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line base pt. The offset point. Next step Calc accesses Line/Arc Calculation Result. Line/Arc Calculation Result, Result page The result screens for base point and offset point are similar. The explanations given for the softkeys are valid for the Result page. Key Description Store To store the result. Coord To view other coordinate types. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for GPS / TPS in ID Templates. Elevation or Editable field Local ellipsoid ht Offset point Display only Distance Display only along line, Distance along line (ground) or Distance along line (ell) Viva Series, COGO The height of the start point of the line is suggested. A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in. Point ID of offset point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line base pt. Horizontal distance from start point to base point. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line base pt. 441 Field Option Description Offset, Offset (ground) or Offset (ell) Display only Offset from base point to offset point. Positive to the right and negative to the left of the line. Available for Line/arc method: Calculate line base pt. Line length Display only Length of line from start point to end point. Line bearing Display only Bearing of line from start point to end point. Bearing to offset pt Display only Bearing of offset point from base point to offset point. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, the line and the new point is shown. Store stores the result. 40.7.4 Segment an Arc Exceptions to line calculation segmentation The arc segmentation and the functionality of all screens and fields are similar to those for line segmentation. Refer to "40.7.5 Segment a Line" New field and option in Define Arc Segmentation 40.7.5 Field Option Description Method Delta angle To divide the arc by an angular value. Delta angle Editable field The angular value by which new points will be defined on the arc. Segment a Line Diagram Line divided by Method: No. of segments d d d d P0 P1 SYS13_002 d1 d1 d1 P0 P1 SYS13_003 Define Line Segmentation Viva Series, COGO d2 P0 Start point P1 End point d Equally spaced segments result from dividing a line by a certain number of points. Line divided by Method Segment length P0 P1 d1 d2 Start point End point Segment length Remaining segment For a description of the Create Line, Input page, refer to "40.7.3 Calculate Line Offset Point and Calculate Line Base Point". Description of fields Field Option Description Method Selectable list How the line is to be divided. Depending on the selection, the following fields are editable or display only fields. 442 Field Option Description Line length Display only Calculated line length between the selected Start point and End point. No. of segments Editable field or display only For Method: No. of segments type in the number of segments for the line. For Method: Segment length this field indicates the calculated number of segments. This method can result in a remaining segment. Segment length Editable field or display only For Method: No. of segments this field is the calculated length of each segment. For Method: Segment length type in the required segment length. Last segment Display only Available for Method: Segment length. The length of the remaining segment. Starting pt ID Editable field The point ID to be assigned to the first new point on the line. The selected point ID templates from ID Templates are not applied. Pt ID increment Editable field Is incremented numerically for the second, third, etc. point on the line. Next step Calc calculates the coordinates of the new points. The heights are computed along the line assuming a linear slope between Start point and End point. On the Plot page, the known points defining the line and those points created on the line are shown. 40.8 COGO Calculation - Area Division 40.8.1 Selecting the Division Method Description The COGO calculation area division divides an area by a defined line, by percentage or by the size of a subarea. Elements that must be known for the calculation depend on the area division method. At least three points are required to form an area. The coordinates of the known points • can be taken from the working job. • can be measured during the COGO calculation. • can be entered. Access Viva Series, COGO Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Area division. 443 COGO Area Division Key Description OK To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen. Description of the Area Division methods Area Division method Description Parallel line (%) The border will be parallel to a line defined by two points. The division is calculated using a defined percentage split. Parallel line (area) The border will be parallel to a line defined by two points. The division is calculated using a defined area size. Parallel line (line) The border will be parallel to a line defined by two points. The division is calculated by defining the position of the dividing line. Perpendic line (%) The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by two points. The division is calculated using a defined percentage split. Perpendic line (area) The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by two points. The division is calculated using a defined area size. Perpendic line (line) The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by two points. The division is calculated by defining the position of the dividing line. Swing line (%) The border will be a line rotated around a rotation point by an azimuth. The division is calculated using a defined percentage split. Swing line (area) The border will be a line rotated around a rotation point by an azimuth. The division is calculated using a defined area size. Elements required Divide by Using Line Parallel line Elements required Through a point • Two points defining the line • One point on the dividing line By a distance • Two points defining the line • Distance Perpendicular line Through a point • Two points defining the line • One point on the dividing line By a distance Viva Series, COGO • Two points defining the line • Distance 444 Divide by Using Percentage Parallel line Area Diagram Elements required - • Percentage size of new area • Two points defining the line Perpendicular line - • Percentage size of new area • Two points defining the line Swing line Rotation point • Percentage size of new area • Rotation point of the swing line Parallel line - • Size of new area • Two points defining the line Perpendicular line - • Size of new area • Two points defining the line Swing line • Size of new area • Rotation point of the swing line Rotation point The diagrams show the area division methods. Some diagrams apply to several area division methods. Area division method Using Divide Shift 1. Parallel Line By Defined Line By Distance 2. Parallel Line By Percentage - 3. Parallel Line By Area - P3 P1 d a P2 P0 Area division method Using Point A of defined line Point B of defined line First new COGO point Second new COGO point Horiz distance Area left of line Divide Shift 1. Perpendic Line By Defined Line By Distance 2. Perpendic Line By Percentage - 3. Perpendic Line By Area - P2 P1 P3 a P0 Viva Series, COGO P0 P1 P2 P3 d a d P0 P1 P2 P3 d a Point A of defined line Point B of defined line First new COGO point Second new COGO point Horiz distance Area left of line 445 Area division method Using Parallel Line 1. Divide Shift By Defined Line Through Point P2 P0 Point A of defined line P1 Point B of defined line P2 Through point; in this case it is a known point of the existing border P3 New COGO point d Horiz distance P1 d P3 P0 Area division method Using Perpendic Line 1. Divide Shift By Defined Line Through Point P2 P1 P3 d P0 Area division method Using P0 Point A of defined line P1 Point B of defined line P2 Through point; in this case it is a known point of the existing border P3 New COGO point d Horiz distance Divide Shift 1. Swing Line By Percentage - 2. Swing Line By Area - P1 P2 P0 Viva Series, COGO a P0 P1 P2 α a First new COGO point Second new COGO point Rotation point Azimuth Area left of line 446 40.8.2 Choosing an Area to be Divided Choose Area to be Divided Key Description OK To accept the changes and access the subsequent screen. Description of fields Field Option Description The setting determines the availability of the subsequent fields and screen. Area to use Select existing area To use an area from the working job. The area can be edited and a new area can be created from points existing in the job. Survey new area To survey points that do not exist in the job yet. The points will be added to a new area. Create new with pts To create a new area by selecting points from the job. Selectable list For Area to use: Select existing area. To select the area to be divided. Editable field For Area to use: Survey new area and Area to use: Create new with pts. To enter a name for the new area. No. of points Display only Number of points forming the area. Area Display only The size of the selected area. Perimeter Display only The perimeter of the area. Area ID Next step IF THEN Area to use: Select OK accesses Define How to Divide Area. Refer to "40.8.3 existing area Dividing an Area". Area to use: Survey OK accesses Survey Job name. Refer to "56 Survey - General". new area Area to use: Create OK accesses Edit Area. Refer to "6.4.3 Editing a Line/Area". new with pts Viva Series, COGO 447 40.8.3 Dividing an Area Define How to Divide Area, Input page After each change of parameters on this screen, the values in the display only fields are recalculated and updated. Key Description Calc To perform the area division and to continue with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored. Inv.. To calculate the value for the distance from two existing points. Available if Horiz distance is highlighted. Size and % To display the size and the percentage of the subarea. Last.. To select the value for the distance from previous COGO inverse calculations. Available if Horiz distance is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available if Point A, Point B, Rotation point or Through point is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description Area left of line Editable field For dividing by percentage or area. The size of the sub area must be typed either in % or in m2. When dividing the area using a parallel or perpendicular line, a reference line is defined by Point A and Point B. The direction of the new dividing line is always the same as the direction of the reference line. The direction of a perpendicular line is the same as the reference line rotated 90° anticlockwise. The sub area is always to the left of the new dividing line. When dividing an area using a swing line, the direction of the new dividing line is defined by the Rotation point and the Azimuth. The sub area is always to the left of the new dividing line. Point A Viva Series, COGO Display only For dividing by a line. The size of the sub area is calculated and displayed. Selectable list The first point of the line which is used as the reference for a new parallel or perpendicular border. 448 Field Option Description Point B Selectable list The second point of the line which is used as the reference for a new parallel or perpendicular border. Available for dividing by a line. Shift By distance The new border will run in a certain distance from the line defined by Point A and Point B. Through point The new border will run through a point defined in Through point. Through point Selectable list Available for Shift: Through point. The point through which the new border will run. Rotation point Selectable list Available for using a swing line. The point around which the new border will rotate by Azimuth. Azimuth Display only Available for using a swing line. The angle of the new border from Rotation point to the new COGO point. Horiz Display only distance, Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) The distance from the line defined by Point A and Point B to the new border. Next step Calc performs the area division and accesses Area Division Result. 40.8.4 Results of the Area Division Area Division Result, Result page Key Description OK To accept the calculation and to continue with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Viva Series, COGO Field Option Description Area ratio Display only The ratio of the size of the two sub areas in percent. Area left of line Display only The size of the first sub area in m2. 449 Field Option Description Area right of line Display only The size of the second sub area in m2. Next step On the Plot page, the points defining the area and the calculated COGO points are shown in black. OK accesses Area Divisions Results. Area Divisions Results, Result page The coordinates of the intersection points of the new border with the original area are displayed. Key Description Store To store the two results and to return to Choose Area to be Divided once both points are stored. Coord To view other coordinate types. Result1 or Result2 To view the first and second result. Stake.. To access the Stakeout application and stake out the calculated COGO point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Ell Ht and Fn Elev To change between the ellipsoidal and the orthometric height. Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Plot page, The points defining the area and the points of the new border are shown in black. Store stores the results. Viva Series, COGO 450 40.9 COGO Calculation - Shift, Rotate & Scale 40.9.1 Selecting the Shift, Rotate & Scale Method and the Points to be Moved Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\COGO\Shift, rotate & scale. COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale Key Description OK To select a method and to continue with the subsequent screen. Description of the Shift, Rotate & Scale methods Shift, Rotate & Scale Description methods Manually entered Applies shifts and/or rotation and/or scale to one or several known points. The values for shifts and/or rotation and/or scale are typed in manually. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of the points to be shifted, rotated and/or scaled. They must be stored in the working job. • the shift values. They can be defined as: the direction of Easting, Northing and Height, or as an azimuth and a grid distance, or as shift from one point to another. • the rotation value. It can be defined by a point as rotation centre plus a rotation or by an existing and new azimuth. • the scale. It is only applied to the position, not to the height. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. Viva Series, COGO 451 Shift, Rotate & Scale Description methods Matching points Applies shifts and/or rotation and/or scale to one or several known points. The shifts and/or rotation and/or scale are calculated from selected points using a 2D Helmert transformation. Elements that must be known are • the coordinates of at least two matching points for the calculation of the shifts and/or rotation and/or scale. • the coordinates of the points to be shifted, rotated and/or scaled. They must be stored in the working job. Points with full coordinate triplets, position only points and height only points can be used. The number of pairs of points matched determines whether the shift, rotation and scale values are computed. For only one point, only shifts are calculated, rotation and scale are not. Next step OK accesses Point Selection which is the same for Method: Manually entered and Method: Matching points. Point Selection Viva Series, COGO Listed are points which have been selected for shifting, rotating and/or scaling. Key Description OK To perform the shift, rotation and scale calculation and to continue with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored. + All.. To add all points from the working job to the list. Selected sort and filter settings apply. OK adds all displayed points to the list in Point Selection and returns to that screen. + One.. To add one point from the working job to the list. Selected sort and filter settings apply. OK adds the currently highlighted point to the list in Point Selection and returns to that screen. Remov To remove the highlighted point from the list. The point itself is not deleted. 452 Key Description More To display information about the codes if stored with any point, the time and the date of when the point was stored and the 3D coordinate quality and the class. Fn Rem A To remove all points from the list. The points themselves are not deleted. Fn Range To define a range of points from the working job to be added to the list. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Next step IF AND THEN all points are to be added - + All... one point is to be added - + One... a range of points is to be added - Fn Range accesses Select points by range. all points are added Method:Manually entered OK accesses Computed Parameters. Refer to "40.9.2 Manually Entered". Method:Matching points OK accesses Match Common Points (%d). Refer to "40.9.3 Matching Points". Select points by range Viva Series, COGO Key Description OK To add the points within the selected range to the list in Point Selection. Returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Next To add the points within the selected range to the list in Point Selection without quitting this screen. Another range of point IDs can be selected. 453 Description of fields Field Option Description From pt ID and Editable field To pt ID • Numeric point IDs in both fields: Points with numeric point IDs falling within the range are selected. Example: From pt ID: 1, To pt ID: 50 Selected are point IDs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10…. 49, 50 as well as 001, 01, 0000045, ... Not selected are point IDs 100,200,300, ... • Alphanumeric point IDs in both fields: The left most character of both entries is used as the basis for the range. The standard ASCII numerical range is used. Points with alphanumeric point IDs falling within the range are selected. Example: From pt ID: a9, To pt ID: c200 Selected are point IDs a, b, c, aa, bb, cc, a1, b2, c3, c4, c5, a610, ... Not selected are point IDs d100, e, 200, 300, tzz ... Next step Select a range of points. OK returns to Point Selection. Diagram a P1’ P2’ P1 P2 SYS13_004 Viva Series, COGO Shift b a Height b Easting P1 Known point P1’ Shifted point P2 Known point P2’ Shifted point 454 a Rotation a Height b b Easting P0 Rotation point P2’ P1 Known point P1’ Rotated point P2 P2 Known point P2’ Rotated point P1’ P0 P1 SYS13_005 a P5’ P4 P5 P2 P1 P2’ P3 P3’ SYS13_006 40.9.2 Scale a Height b Easting P1 Rotation point, can be held fixed, all other points are then scaled from here P4’ P2 Known point P2’ Scaled point b P3 Known point P3’ Scaled point P4 Known point P4’ Scaled point P5 Known point P5’ Scaled point Manually Entered Computed Parameters, Shift page Viva Series, COGO Key Description Calc To perform the shift, rotation and scale calculation and to continue with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored. Inv.. To calculate the amount of shift in Easting, Northing and height from two existing points. Available if Azimuth, Horiz distance, ∆ easting, ∆ northing or ∆ height is highlighted. Last.. To select the value for the shift from previous COGO inverse calculations. Available if Azimuth, Horiz distance, ∆ easting, ∆ northing or ∆ height is highlighted. 455 Key Description Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Available for Method: Use 2 points if From or To is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the COGO application. Refer to "40.3 Configuring COGO". Fn Modif.. To mathematically modify the values. Available if Azimuth, Horiz distance, ∆ easting, ∆ northing or ∆ height is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description The method by which the shift in ∆ Easting, ∆ Northing and ∆ Height will be determined. Method ∆east, ∆north, ∆ht Defines the shift using coordinate differences. Bearing, dist, height Defines the shift using an azimuth, a distance and a height difference. Use 2 points Computes the shift from the coordinate differences between two known points. From Selectable list Available for Method: Use 2 points. The point ID of the first known point for calculating the shift. To Selectable list Available for Method: Use 2 points. The point ID of the second known point for calculating the shift. Azimuth Editable field Available for Method: Bearing, dist, height. The azimuth defines the direction of the shift. Horiz Editable field distance, Horiz dist (ground) or Horiz dist (ell) Available for Method: Bearing, dist, height. The amount of shift from the original point to the calculated COGO points. ∆ easting Editable field or display only The amount of shift in East direction. ∆ northing Editable field or display only The amount of shift in North direction. ∆ height Editable field or display only The amount of shift in height. Next step Page accesses Computed Parameters, Rotate page. Viva Series, COGO 456 Computed Parameters, Rotate page The softkeys are the same as on the Shift page. Description of fields Field Option Description The method by which the rotation angle will be determined. Method User entered The rotation can be manually typed in. Computed The rotation will be calculated as New azimuth minus Existing azimuth. Rotation point Selectable list The point around which all points will be rotated. Existing azimuth Editable field Available for Method: Computed. A known direction before rotating. New azimuth Editable field Available for Method: Computed. A known direction after rotating. Rotation Editable field or display only The amount by which the points will be rotated. Next step Page accesses Computed Parameters, Scale page. Computed Parameters, Scale page The softkeys are the same as on the Shift page. Description of fields Field Option Description The method by which the scale factor will be determined. Method User entered The scale factor can be manually typed in. Computed The scale factor will be calculated as New distance divided by Existing distance. Existing distance Editable field Available for Method: Computed. A known distance before scaling. This value is used for calculating the scale factor. New distance Editable field Available for Method: Computed. A known distance after scaling. This value is used for calculating the scale factor. Scale Editable field or display only The scale factor used in the calculation. Scale from point No Scaling is performed by multiplying the original coordinates of the points by Scale. Yes Scale is applied to the coordinate difference of all points relative to Rotation point selected on the Rotation page. The coordinates of Rotation point will not change. Next step Calc performs the shift, rotation and scale calculation and accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results. Viva Series, COGO 457 Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, General page Key Description Store To store the results and continue with the next screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description Points selected Display only The number of selected points having been shifted, rotated and/or scaled. Store points to Selectable list job The calculated COGO points will be stored in this job. The original points are not copied to this job. Store Point ID Prefix with Adds the setting for Store Point ID with in front of the original point IDs. Prefix / suffix Suffix Adds the setting for Store Point ID with at the end of the original point IDs. Editable field The identifier with up to four characters is added in front of or at the end of the ID of the calculated COGO points. Next step IF THEN the used parameters are to be viewed Page accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Summary page. the calculated COGO Page accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Plot page. Origpoints are to be inal points are displayed in grey, calculated COGO points are viewed graphically displayed in black. the calculated COGO Store accesses Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Result page. points are to be Refer to paragraph "Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Result page". stored Viva Series, COGO 458 Shift, Rotate & Scale Results, Result page Description of fields Field Option Description No. of new points Display only Number of new points created. No. of skipped pts Display only Number of points which were skipped either due to not being able to convert coordinates, or points with identical point IDs already in the Store points to job. Next step OK returns to COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale. 40.9.3 Matching Points Point Selection Listed are points which have been selected for shifting, rotating and/or scaling. Key Description OK To perform the shift, rotation and scale calculation and to continue with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored. + All.. To add all points from the working job to the list. Selected sort and filter settings apply. OK adds all displayed points to the list in Point Selection and returns to that screen. + One.. To add one point from the working job to the list. Selected sort and filter settings apply. OK adds the currently highlighted point to the list in Point Selection and returns to that screen. Remov To remove the highlighted point from the list. The point itself is not deleted. More To display information about the codes if stored with any point, the time and the date of when the point was stored and the 3D coordinate quality and the class. Fn Rem A To remove all points from the list. The points themselves are not deleted. Fn Range To define a range of points from the working job to be added to the list. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Next step Viva Series, COGO IF AND THEN all points are to be added - + All... 459 IF AND THEN one point is to be added - + One... a range of points is to be added - Fn Range accesses Select points by range. all points are added Method:Manually entered OK accesses Computed Parameters. Refer to "40.9.2 Manually Entered". Method:Matching points OK accesses Match Common Points (%d). Refer to "40.9.3 Matching Points". Match Points This screen provides a list of points chosen from the working job. The points are used for the determination of the 2D Helmert transformation. The number of points matched is indicated in the title, for example (2). Unless there is no pair of matching points in the list all softkeys are available. Key Description Calc To confirm the selections, compute the transformation and continue with the subsequent screen. New.. To match a new pair of points. This pair is added to the list. A new point can be manually measured. Refer to paragraph"Choose Matching Points or Edit Matching Points". Edit.. To edit the highlighted pair of matched points. Delete To delete the highlighted pair of matched points from the list. Match To change the type of match for a highlighted pair of matched points. Resid To display a list of the matched points used in the transformation calculation and their associated residuals. Refer to paragraph "Fix Parameters". Fn Param To define the parameters to be fixed in the 2D transformation. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of columns Viva Series, COGO Column Description Source point The point ID of the points of origin for the calculation of the shifts and/or rotation and/or scale. Target point The point ID of the target points for the calculation of the shifts and/or rotation and/or scale. 460 Column Description Match The type of match to be made between the points. This information is used in the transformation calculation. Position &Height, Position only, Height only or None. None removes matched common points from the transformation calculation but does not delete them from the list. This option can be used to help improve residuals. Next step IF THEN the transformation is to be computed Calc. The calculated shift, rotation and scale values are displayed in Point Selection. They cannot be edited. The remaining functionality of the calculation is similar to shift, rotate & scale (manual). Refer to "40.9 COGO Calculation Shift, Rotate & Scale". a pair of points is to New.. or Info. Refer to paragraph "Choose Matching Points or be matched or Edit Matching Points". edited parameters for the transformation are to be fixed Fn Param. Refer to paragraph "Fix Parameters". Choose Matching Points or Edit Matching Points Key Description OK To confirm the selections. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Source point Selectable list A point of origin for the calculation of the shifts and/or rotation and/or scale. Target point Selectable list A target point for the calculation of the shifts and/or rotation and/or scale. The type of match to be made between the points selected. Match type Viva Series, COGO Description Pos & height Position and height Pos only Position only 461 Field Fix Parameters Option Description Height only Height only None None The settings on this screen define the parameters to be used in the transformation. IF the value for a field is THEN the value for this parameter will be ----- calculated. any number fixed to that value. Description of fields Field Option Description ∆ easting Editable field Shift in Easting direction. ∆ northing Editable field Shift in Northing direction. ∆ height Editable field Shift in Height direction. Rotation Editable field Rotation around the vertical axis. Scale Editable field Scale factor. AND THEN Next step IF a field displays the parameter highlight the field. Enter the value of the param----must be fixed to a eter. Fix. value a field displays the parameter a value must be calculated highlight the field. Adjst. all parameters are configured OK to return to Match Points. 40.10 COGO Calculation - Angle Method COGO Angle, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Key Description Calc To calculate the result. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Viva Series, COGO Field Option Description Point ID Selectable list The backsight point. 462 Field Option Description At point Selectable list The point of intersection of the backsight and foresight direction. To point Selectable list The foresight point. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses COGO Angle, Results. COGO Angle, Results page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the Input page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. Description of fields P2 P0 d2 d1 P1 TS_131 α ß γ δ ε P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 Azimuth at-from Azimuth at-to Deflection angle Angle right Angle left Point ID At point To point Horiz distance at-from Horiz distance at-to 40.11 COGO Calculation - Horizontal Curve Method Horizontal Curve Calculator, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Key Description Calc To calculate the result. Inv.. To calculate the values for a distance and an angle from two existing points. Available when a distance field or an angle field is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when a distance field or an angle field is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Viva Series, COGO Field Option Description Method Selectable list The horizontal curve can either be defined by three points or by two parameters. 463 Field Option Description Select which parameters are known. Available for Method: 2 parameters. Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Radius Radius of the curve. Delta angle Angle in the radius point. DOC - Arc The degree of curve defines the sharpness or flatness of the curve. Degree of curvature in arc definition. The central angle subtended by one station of circular arc. Mainly used in highway design. SI units: 1 station = 20 m) English system: 1 station = 100 ft DOC - Chord The degree of curve defines the sharpness or flatness of the curve. Degree of curvature in chord definition. The central angle subtended by one station length of chord. Mainly used in railway design. Arc length Total length of the circular curve from start point to end point measured along its arc. Tangent Length of the tangent from the tangent point to the point of intersection. External secant The distance from the point of intersection to the midpoint of the curve. The external distance bisects the interior angle at the point of intersection. Mid ordinate The distance from the midpoint of the curve to the midpoint of the long chord. The extension of the middle ordinate bisects the central angle. Delta angle The angle where the two tangents intersect. The angle between the tangents is also equal to the angle at the centre of the curve Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses Horizontal Curve Calculator, Results. Horizontal Curve Calculator, Results page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the Input page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. Description of fields P1 d3 d5 d2 d4 P2 P0 TS_132 Viva Series, COGO d1 r α P0 P1 P2 r d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Delta angle Start point End point Second point Radius Chord length Arc length Tangent Mid ordinate External secant 464 Horizontal Curve Calculator, Areas page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the Input page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. Description of fields TS_133 TS_134 Sector TS_135 Segment Fillet 40.12 COGO Calculation - Triangle Method COGO Triangle, Input page For all point fields, the MapView interactive display on the Map page can be used to select the desired point. To type in coordinates for a known point open a selectable list. Press New.. to create a new point. Key Description Calc To calculate the result. Inv.. To calculate the values for a distance and an angle from two existing points. Available when a distance field or an angle field is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when a distance field or an angle field is highlighted. Survy.. To manually measure a point for the COGO calculation. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Description Method Selectable list The triangle can either be defined by three points or by three parameters. Parameters Selectable list Select which combination of angle value and side length are known. Available for Method: 3 parameters. Side a, Side b, Editable field Side c The side lengths of the triangle. Editable field The angle values of the triangle. Angle A, Angle C Point A, Point Selectable list B, Point C The points forming the triangle. Next step Calc calculates the result and accesses COGO Triangle, Results. Viva Series, COGO 465 COGO Triangle, Results page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the Input page. Result1 or Result2 To view the first and second result. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To not store the COGO point and to exit COGO calculations. Description of fields P3 b a P2 c P1 TS_130 α ß γ P1 P2 P3 a b c Angle A Angle B Angle C Point A Point B Point C Side a Side b Side c 40.13 Selecting a Result from Previous COGO Inverse Calculations Description Azimuths, distances and offsets required within the COGO traverse and intersection calculations can be selected from previously calculated inverse results. Access In Traverse or Intersection, highlight Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset and press Last... Last Inverse Calculations All previous COGO inverse calculations stored in the working job are displayed, sorted by time with the most recent at the top. This screen consists of three columns. The information displayed can vary. ----- is displayed for unavailable information, for example the Azimuth cannot be calculated if a height only point is used. Viva Series, COGO Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. View To view all calculated values for the highlighted COGO inverse calculation. Includes the height difference, the slope distance, the grade and the coordinate differences between the two known points. Delete To delete the highlighted COGO inverse calculation. More To display other information in the third column. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. 466 Description of columns Column Description From The point ID of the first known point for the COGO inverse calculation. To The point ID of the second known point for the COGO inverse calculation. Azimuth The direction from the first to the second known point. HDist The horizontal distance between the two known points. Date and Time When the COGO inverse calculation was stored. Next step Highlight the COGO inverse calculation of which a result is to be taken over. OK. The relevant result of the highlighted COGO inverse calculation is copied into the field which was initially highlighted on the Input page. 40.14 Modifying Values for Azimuths, Distances and Offsets Description The values for the azimuth, the distance and the offset required within the COGO traverse and intersection calculation can be mathematically modified. Access step-by-step In Traverse or Intersection, highlight Azimuth, Horiz distance or Offset and press Fn Modif... Modify Value On this screen, numbers can be typed in for the multiplication, division, addition and subtraction with the original azimuth, distance or offset value. The standard rules of mathematical operations apply. Key Description OK To accept the modified value and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The modified value is copied into the field which was initially highlighted on the Input page. Fn Quit To exit COGO calculation. Description of fields Field Option Azimuth, Horiz Display only distance or Offset Multiply Viva Series, COGO Editable field Description The name of the field and the value which was highlighted before accessing Modify Value. The number to multiply by. 467 Field Option Description • Minimum: -3000 • Maximum: 3000 • ----- performs a multiplication by 1. Editable field Divide The number to divide by. • Minimum: -3000 • Maximum: 3000 • ----- performs a division by 1. Editable field Add The number to be added. • For azimuths Minimum: 0 Maximum: Full circle • For distances and offsets Minimum: 0 m Maximum: 30000000 m • ----- performs an addition of 0.000. Subtract Editable field The number to be subtracted. • For azimuths Minimum: 0 Maximum: Full circle • For distances and offsets Minimum: 0 m Maximum: 30000000 m • ----- performs a subtraction of 0.000. Azimuth, Horiz Display only distance or Offset The modified value for the field in the first line. This field is updated with every mathematical operation. Angles greater than the full circle are reduced accordingly. Next step OK accepts the modified value and returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Example: Calculations for an azimuth Example: Calculations for a distance Step 1. Value as calculated Value as displayed Azimuth: 250.0000 g Multiply: 2 500 Azimuth: 100.0000 g 2. Divide: 3 166.667 Azimuth: 166.6670 g 3. Add: 300 466.667 Azimuth: 66.6670 g 4. Subtract: 100 366.667 Azimuth: 366.6670 g The behaviour for an offset is identical. Step 1. Viva Series, COGO Editable field Editable field Value as calculated Value as displayed Horiz distance: 250.000 m Multiply: 2 500 Horiz distance: 500.000 m 468 Viva Series, COGO Step Editable field Value as calculated Value as displayed 2. Divide: 3 166.667 Horiz distance: 166.667 m 3. Add: 300 466.667 Horiz distance: 466.667 m 4. Subtract: 100 366.667 Horiz distance: 366.667 m 469 41 Determine Coordinate System 41.1 Overview Description GPS measured points are always stored based on the global geocentric datum known as WGS 1984. Most surveys require coordinates in a local grid system. For example, based on a country’s official mapping datum or an arbitrary grid system used in a particular area such as a construction site. To convert the WGS 1984 coordinates into local coordinates a coordinate system must be created. Part of the coordinate system is the transformation used to convert coordinates from the WGS 1984 datum to the local datum. The Determine Coordinate System application allows: • the parameters of a new transformation to be determined. • the parameters of an existing transformation to be recomputed. With one common control point, it is still possible to calculate a Classic 3D transformation, as long as the rotations and the scale parameter are fixed. Such a transformation fits perfectly in the vicinity of the common control point, but is degraded by the distance from that point. This degradation is because the orientation of the local reference frame or any scale factor within the local datum cannot be taken into account. Requirements to determine a transformation To determine a transformation it is necessary to have common control points whose positions are known in both WGS 1984 coordinates and local coordinates. The more points that are common between datum, the more accurately the transformation parameters can be calculated. Depending on the type of transformation used, details about the map projection, the local ellipsoid and a local geoid model can also be needed. Requirements for control points • The control points used for the transformation should surround the area for which the transformation is to be applied. It is not good practice to survey or convert coordinates outside of the area covered by the control points as extrapolation errors can be introduced. • When a geoid field file, and/or a CSCS field file is used in the determination of a coordinate system, the control points for the calculation must fall within the areas of the field files. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 470 41.2 Selecting the Transformation Method Description Determine Coordinate System is the conventional method of determining a coordinate system. Parameters such as the height mode must be set by the user. One or more control points for both the WGS 1984 and the local datum are needed. Depending on the number of control points and available information, a Onestep, Twostep or Classic 3D transformation can be used. Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Determine coord system. Determine Coord System Description of fields Field Option Description The type of transformation to be used when determining a coordinate system. Method Onestep Transforms coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to local grid and vice versa without knowledge about the local ellipsoid or the map projection. Procedure: 1 The WGS 1984 coordinates are projected onto a temporary Transverse Mercator Projection. The central meridian of this projection passes through the centre of gravity of the common control points. 2 The results of 1. are preliminary grid coordinates for the WGS 1984 points. 3 These preliminary grid coordinates are matched with the local grid control points. The Easting and Northing shifts, the rotation and the scale factor between these two sets of points are then computed. This process is known as a classic 2D transformation. 4 The height transformation is a single dimension height approximation. Refer to "Appendix J Glossary". Twostep Combines the advantages of the Onestep and the Classic 3D transformation. It allows treating position and height separately, but is not restricted to smaller areas. Procedure: 1 The WGS 1984 coordinates of the common control points are shifted closely to the local datum using a given Classic 3D pre-transformation. This Classic 3D transformation is typically a rough transformation valid for the country of the local datum. 2 The coordinates are projected onto a preliminary grid, but this time using the true map projection of the local points. 3 A 2D transformation is applied, exactly as with the Onestep transformation. Refer to "Appendix J Glossary". Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 471 Field Option Description Classic 3D Also known as Helmert transformation. Transforms coordinates from WGS 1984 cartesian to local cartesian coordinates and vice versa. A map projection can then be applied to obtain grid coordinates. As a similarity transformation, it is the most rigorous transformation type and keeps the full geometrical information. Refer to "Appendix J Glossary". Modify existing To modify an existing determine coordinate system. Refer to "41.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System". Next step IF the selected method is THEN Onestep, Twostep or Classic OK to access Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. Refer to 3D the following paragraph: Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. OK to access Coordinate Systems. Refer to "41.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System". Modify existing Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Config.. To configure the selected coordinate system determination method. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the coordinate system. The name can be up to 16 characters in length and can include spaces. Input is mandatory. Entering the name of a coordinate system will allow that existing system to be updated. WGS84 points Selectable list job Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System The job from which the points with WGS 1984 coordinates will be taken. 472 Field Option Description Local points job Selectable list The job from which the points with local coordinates will be taken. Use one point Check box localisation method Number of control points needed: One control point for both the WGS 1984 and the local datum. Transformation to use: • Onestep or Twostep when information about the necessary rotations and scale factor is known. • Classic 3D when the rotations are to be set to zero and the scale factor to one. Next step Press Config.. with Use one point localisation method NOT checked to access Configuration. 41.3 The Normal Method 41.3.1 Configuring the Normal Method Description The configuration allows options to be set, which are used in the Determine Coordinate System application. These settings are stored within the active working style. Access Press Config.. in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs with Use one point localisation method NOT checked. Configuration, Residuals page The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for all pages, unless otherwise stated. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Easting Editable field The limit above which Easting residuals will be flagged as possible outliers. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 473 Field Option Description Northing Editable field The limit above which Northing residuals will be flagged as possible outliers. Elevation Editable field The limit above which Height residuals will be flagged as possible outliers. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Configuration, Advanced page Description of fields Field Option Description Model Bursa-Wolf or MolodenskyBadakus The transformation model to be used. Refer to standard surveying literature for details on the models. Prompt me to Check box enter fixed transformation parameters To configure Classic 3D transformation parameters during the process of calculation. Next step OK returns to Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. 41.3.2 Determining a New Coordinate System Access Press OK in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs with Use one point localisation method NOT checked. Set Height Mode Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 474 Description of fields Field Option Description Transformation name Editable field A unique name for the transformation. The name can be up to 16 characters in length and include spaces. If a coordinate system is being updated then its name is displayed. Transfrm Type Display only The type of transformation to be used when determining a coordinate system. Height mode The height mode to be used in the determination of a coordinate system. Orthometric or Ellipsoidal Available when determining a new coordinate system. Display only Available when updating a coordinate system. The height mode shown is the same as the mode used in the existing system. Next step OK continues to Choose System Components. Choose System Components If a coordinate system was chosen to be edited in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs, pressing OK accesses Matched Points (n). Pressing ESC does not reaccess Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs but accesses Choose System Components and Set Height Mode. This screen contains different fields, depending on what method was chosen in Determine Coord System. Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. For Onestep Description of fields Field Option Description Geoid model Selectable list The geoid model to be used in the transformation. Pre Transform Selectable list Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System For Twostep: The pre-transformation to use for the preliminary 3D transformation. 475 Field Option Description Ellipsoid Selectable list For Twostep and Classic 3D: The ellipsoid to use in the transformation. Display only For Twostep and Classic 3D: The ellipsoid being used by a fixed projection when selected in Projection. Projection Selectable list For Twostep and Classic 3D: The projection to use in the transformation. CSCS model Selectable list For Classic 3D: The CSCS model to use in the transformation. Next step OK continues to Matched Points (n). Matched Points (n) This screen provides a list of points chosen from WGS84 points job and Local pts. The number of control points matched between both jobs is indicated in the title. Unless there is no pair of matching points in the list all softkeys are available. Refer to "41.3.4 Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching Points" for information on how to match points. Key Description Calc To confirm the selections, compute the transformation and continue with the subsequent screen. New.. To match a new pair of points. This pair is added to the list. A new point can be manually occupied. Refer to " Choose Matching Points/Edit Matching Points". Edit.. To edit the highlighted pair of matched points. Refer to " Choose Matching Points/Edit Matching Points". If a coordinate system to be updated contains a point that was deleted from the working job and a new point was created in that job with the same point ID but different coordinates, the coordinates of the old point will still be used for the calculation. Pressing Edit.. to edit a highlighted pair of matched points containing the deleted point, will overwrite the coordinates of the old point. The coordinates of the new point will be used in the calculation. Delete To delete the highlighted pair of matched points from the list. Match To change the type of match for a highlighted pair of matched points. Refer to "41.3.4 Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching Points". Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 476 Key Description Auto To scan both jobs for points that have the same point ID. Points with matching point IDs are added to the list. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description WGS84 pts The point ID of the points chosen from WGS84 points job. Local pts The point ID of the points chosen from Local points job. Match The type of match to be made between the points. This information is used in the transformation calculation. Position & Height, Position only, Height only or None. • For Onestep or Twostep possible options are P & H, P only, H only or None. • For Classic 3D, possible options are P & H or None. None removes matched common points from the transformation calculation but does not delete them from the list. This option can be used to help improve residuals. Next step Calc computes the transformation and continues to Check Residuals or to Classic 3D Parameters if Prompt me to enter fixed transformation parameters was checked during the configuration. Classic 3D Parameters The settings on this page define the parameters to be used in a Classic 3D transformation. Refer to "Appendix J Glossary" for more information about how many transformation parameters are computed, based on the number of points common to both datum. IF the value for a field is THEN the value for this parameter will be ----- calculated. any number fixed to that value. Description of fields Field Option Description Model Bursa-Wolf or MolodenskyBadakus The transformation model to be used. Refer to standard surveying literature for details on the models. Shift dX Editable field Shift in X direction. Shift dY Editable field Shift in Y direction. Shift dZ Editable field Shift in Z direction. Rotation X Editable field Rotation around the X axis. Rotation Y Editable field Rotation around the Y axis. Rotation Z Editable field Rotation around the Z axis. Scale Editable field Scale factor. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 477 Next step IF AND THEN a field displays the parameter highlight the field. Fix. ----must be fixed to a Enter the value of the parameter. value Check Residuals a field displays the parameter a value must be calculated highlight the field. Adjust. all parameters are configured OK computes the transformation and continues to Check Residuals. Displays a list of the matched points used in the transformation calculation and their associated residuals. Key Description OK To accept the residuals and to continue with the subsequent screen. Result To view results of the transformation. Refer to "41.3.5 Transformation Results for Onestep and Twostep". More To display information about height residuals. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Column Description WGS84 pts The point ID of the points chosen from WGS84 points job. East The Easting residual. If positions are not used in the transformation calculation then ----- will be displayed. North The Northing residual. If positions are not used in the transformation calculation then ----- will be displayed. Height The Height residual. If heights are not used in the transformation calculation then ----- will be displayed. ! Indicates residuals that exceed the residual limit defined in Configuration, Residuals page. ! Indicates the largest residual in East, North and Height. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 478 Next step IF the residuals are THEN unacceptable ESC returns to Matched Points (n). Matched points can be edited, deleted or temporarily removed from the list and the transformation recalculated. acceptable OK continues to Store Coordinate System. Store Coordinate System, Summary page Key Description Store To store the coordinate system to the DBX and return to Main Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field The name of the coordinate system can be changed. The name can be up to 16 characters in length and include spaces. Transformation type Display only The type of transformation used. No. of matched pts Display only Number of matched points. Easting Display only Largest Easting residual from the transformation calculation. Northing Display only Largest Northing residual from the transformation calculation. Elevation Display only Largest Height residual from the transformation calculation. Next step Page changes to the Coord system page. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 479 Store Coordinate System, Coord system page Description of fields Field Option Description Residuals None, 1/distance, The method by which the residuals of the control 1/distance² or points will be distributed throughout the trans1/distance³/² formation area. Geoid model Display only Name of geoid model used. Pre Transform Display only For Twostep: Name of the pre-transformation used. Transformation Display only For Classic 3D: Name of transformation used. Ellipsoid Display only For Twostep and Classic 3D: Name of ellipsoid used. Projection Display only For Twostep and Classic 3D: Name of projection used. CSCS model Display only For Classic 3D: Name of CSCS model used. Next step Store stores the coordinate system to the DBX and attaches it to the WGS84 points job selected in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs, replacing any coordinate system attached to this job. WGS84 points job becomes the working job. Determine Coord System Description of fields Field Option Description The type of transformation to be used when determining a coordinate system. Method Onestep Transforms coordinates directly from WGS 1984 to local grid and vice versa without knowledge about the local ellipsoid or the map projection. Procedure: 1 The WGS 1984 coordinates are projected onto a temporary Transverse Mercator Projection. The central meridian of this projection passes through the centre of gravity of the common control points. 2 The results of 1. are preliminary grid coordinates for the WGS 1984 points. 3 These preliminary grid coordinates are matched with the local grid control points. The Easting and Northing shifts, the rotation and the scale factor between these two sets of points are then computed. This process is known as a classic 2D transformation. 4 The height transformation is a single dimension height approximation. Refer to "J.20 T". Twostep Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System Combines the advantages of the Onestep and the Classic 3D transformation. It allows treating position and height separately, but is not restricted to smaller areas. Procedure: 480 Field Option Description 1 The WGS 1984 coordinates of the common control points are shifted closely to the local datum using a given Classic 3D pre-transformation. This Classic 3D transformation is typically a rough transformation valid for the country of the local datum. 2 The coordinates are projected onto a preliminary grid, but this time using the true map projection of the local points. 3 A 2D transformation is applied, exactly as with the Onestep transformation. Refer to "J.20 T". Classic 3D Also known as Helmert transformation. Transforms coordinates from WGS 1984 cartesian to local cartesian coordinates and vice versa. A map projection can then be applied to obtain grid coordinates. As a similarity transformation, it is the most rigorous transformation type and keeps the full geometrical information. Refer to "J.20 T". Modify existing To modify an existing determine coordinate system. Refer to "41.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System". Next step IF the selected method is THEN Onestep, Twostep or Classic OK to access Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. Refer to 3D the following paragraph: Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs. Modify existing OK to access Coordinate Systems. Refer to "41.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System". 41.3.3 Modifying a Coordinate System Access OK in Determine Coord System when Method: Modify existing. Coordinate Systems Select an existing coordinate system and press OK. All the following steps are identical with the determination of a new coordinate system from the Matched Points (n) screen onwards. Refer to "41.3.2 Determining a New Coordinate System" Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 481 41.3.4 Matching Points: Selecting/ Editing a Pair of Matching Points Description Before calculating a transformation, it must be defined which points in WGS84 points job and Local points job are to be matched. Pairs of matched points are displayed in one line in Matched Points (n). New pairs of matched points can be created, existing pairs of matched points can be edited and pairs of matched points can be deleted. Access Press New.. or Edit.. in Matched Points (n). Choose Matching Points/Edit Matching Points Key Description OK To return to Matched Points (n) and to adds a new line of matched points to the matched points list. Survy.. To manually occupy a point and store it in WGS84 points job. Available when WGS84 point is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description WGS84 point Selectable list A WGS 1984 control point. Local point Selectable list A local control point. The type of match to be made between the points selected. Match in P & H, P only, H only or None. Available for Onestep and Twostep. P & H or None Available for Classic 3D. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 482 41.3.5 Transformation Results for Onestep and Twostep Access Press Result in Check Residuals. Transformation Results, Position page Results of the transformation between the WGS 1984 datum and the local datum are shown for each of the transformation parameters. This screen consists of the Position page and the Height page. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the pages as indicated. Key Description OK To return to Check Residuals. Scale.. or Ppm Available on the Position page. To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm. Rms or Param.. To switch between the root mean square values of the parameters and the actual parameter values. The name of the screen changes to Transformation Results rms when displaying rms values. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Shift dX Display only Shift in X direction. Shift dY Display only Shift in Y direction. Rotation Display only Rotation of transformation. Scale Display only Scale factor used in transformation. Either true scale or ppm. Rotation orgn Display only X Position in the X direction of the origin of rotation. Rotation orgn Display only Y Position in the Y direction of the origin of rotation. Next step Page changes to the Height page. Transformation Results, Height page Description of fields Field Option Description Slope in X Display only Tilt of the transformation in the X direction. Slope in Y Display only Tilt of the transformation in the Y direction. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 483 Field Option Description Height shift Display only Shift in height between WGS 1984 datum and local datum. Next step OK returns to Check Residuals. 41.3.6 Transformation Results for Classic 3D Access Press Result in Check Residuals. Transformation Results, Parameters page Results of the transformation between the WGS 1984 datum and the local datum are shown for each of the transformation parameters. This screen consists of the Parameters page and the Rotation origin page. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the pages as indicated. Key Description OK To return to Check Residuals. Scale.. or Ppm Available on the Position page. To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm. Rms or Param.. To switch between the root mean square values of the parameters and the actual parameter values. The name of the screen changes to Transformation Results rms when displaying rms values. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Shift dX Display only Shift in X direction. Shift dY Display only Shift in Y direction. Shift dZ Display only Shift in Z direction. Rotation X Display only Rotation around the X axis. Rotation Y Display only Rotation around the Y axis. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 484 Field Option Description Rotation Z Display only Rotation around the Z axis. Scale Display only Scale factor used in transformation. Either true scale or ppm. Next step Page changes to the Rotation origin page. Transformation Results, Rotation origin page Description of fields Field Option Description Model Display only Classic 3D transformation model used for the transformation. Rotation orgn Display only Available for Model: Molodensky-Badakus. Position in X the X direction of the origin of rotation. Rotation orgn Display only Available for Model: Molodensky-Badakus. Position in Y the Y direction of the origin of rotation. Rotation orgn Display only Available for Model: Molodensky-Badakus. Position in Z the Z direction of the origin of rotation. Next step OK returns to Check Residuals. 41.4 The One Point Localisation Method 41.4.1 Determining a New Coordinate System Access Press OK in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs with Use one point localisation method being checked. Set Height Mode Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 485 Description of fields Field Option Description Transformation name Editable field A unique name for the transformation. The name can be up to 16 characters in length and include spaces. If a coordinate system is being updated then its name is displayed. Transfrm Type Display only The type of transformation to be used when determining a coordinate system. Height mode The height mode to be used in the determination of a coordinate system. Orthometric or Ellipsoidal Available when determining a new coordinate system. Display only Available when updating a coordinate system. The height mode shown is the same as the mode used in the existing system. Next step OK continues to Choose System Components. Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term must always be considered to mean also Bearing. Choose System Components This screen contains different fields, depending on what method was chosen in Determine Coord System. Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. For Onestep Description of fields Field Option Description Geoid model Selectable list The geoid model to be used in the transformation. Pre Transform Selectable list Ellipsoid Selectable list Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System For Twostep: The pre-transformation to be used for the preliminary 3D transformation. For Twostep and Classic 3D: The ellipsoid to be used in the transformation. 486 Field Option Description Display only For Twostep: The ellipsoid being used by a fixed projection when selected in Projection. Projection Selectable list For Twostep and Classic 3D: The projection to be used in the transformation. CSCS model Selectable list For Classic 3D: The CSCS model to be used in the transformation. Next step OK continues to Choose Common Point. Choose Common Point Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Survy.. Available for WGS84 point being highlighted. To occupy a point manually and store it in WGS84 points job. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description For Onestep and Twostep: How the horizontal and vertical shifts of the transformation will be computed. Match in Position & height Position and height are taken from the same pair of matching points. Position only Position is taken from one pair of matching points. The height can be taken from another pair of matching points. WGS84 point Selectable list The point ID of the horizontal and/or vertical control point chosen from WGS84 points job. Local point Selectable list The point ID of the horizontal and/or vertical control point chosen from Local points job. Match height Check box For Onestep and Twostep: Available for Match in: Position only. Activates the determination of the vertical shift from a separate pair of matching points. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 487 Field Option Description Local height Use WGS84 point For Classic 3D: The source of the height informaht or Use Local tion to use in the transformation. point ht Next step For Onestep and Twostep: OK continues to Determine Rotation. For Classic 3D: OK continues to Store Coordinate System. Determine Rotation For Onestep and Twostep only. Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Inv Available for Method: Two WGS84 points and Method: User entered. To compute an azimuth between two local points. Refer to "41.4.2 Computing Required Azimuth". Survy.. To manually occupy a point and store it in WGS84 points job. Available when Point 1 or Point 2 are highlighted for Method: Two WGS84 points or when WGS84 point is highlighted for Method: Convergence angle. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Method Use WGS84 Method by which the rotation angle for the transnorth, User formation is determined. entered, Convergence angle or Two WGS84 points Rotation Display only • For Method: Use WGS84 north: Transformation will be rotated to North as defined by the WGS 1984 datum. North is 0.00000 °. • For Method: Convergence angle: The rotation of the transformation calculated as 0.00000 ° minus the computed convergence angle. The field is updated as Coord system and WGS84 point are changed. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 488 Field Option Description • For Method: Two WGS84 points: The rotation of the transformation calculated as required azimuth minus azimuth. The field is updated as Point 1, Point 2 and Required azimuth are changed. Editable field • For Method: User entered: Allows the orientation of the transformation to be manually typed in or calculated in Compute Required Azimuth. Coord system Selectable list Coordinate system to provide the direction of grid North in the area where the control point used for determining the local coordinate system, is located. Available for Method: Convergence angle. WGS84 point Selectable list WGS 1984 point of which the convergence angle will be calculated. Available for Method: Convergence angle. Point 1 Selectable list First point to use for computation of Azimuth. Available for Method: Two WGS84 points. Point 2 Selectable list Second point to use for computation of Azimuth. Available for Method: Two WGS84 points. Azimuth Display only Computed azimuth between Point 1 and Point 2. Available for Method: Two WGS84 points. Required azimuth Editable field The required grid azimuth, computed between two local points. Refer to "41.4.2 Computing Required Azimuth". Available for Method: Two WGS84 points. Diagram for Onestep, Method: Convergence angle c d e b f a SYS13_008 Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System a) b) c) d) e) f) α WGS 1984 coordinate system Local coordinate system Geodetic North Grid North Point on WGS 1984 datum Meridian Convergence angle 489 Diagram for Onestep, Method: Two WGS84 points a b c d a b SYS13_009 a) b) c) d) α β WGS 1984 coordinate system Local coordinate system Line between two WGS 1984 points Line between two local points Azimuth of two WGS 1984 points Known azimuth or azimuth of two local points Next step OK continues to Determine Scale. Determine Scale For Onestep and Twostep only. The scale is calculated using the formula (r + h)/r where r is the distance from the centre of the ellipsoid to the WGS 1984 point selected in Choose Common Point, and h is the height of this point above the WGS 1984 ellipsoid. Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Grid.. Available Twostep and for Method: Combined SF. To compute the grid scale factor. Refer to "41.4.3 Computing the Grid Scale Factor". Hgt.. Available Twostep and for Method: Combined SF. To compute the height scale factor. Refer to "41.4.4 Computing the Height Scale Factor". Scale or Ppm To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm. Survy.. To manually occupy a point and store it in WGS84 points job. Method: Convergence angle when WGS84 point is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 490 Description of fields Field Option Method Known WGS84 Available for Onestep: Method of determining the pt, Known scale factor of the transformation. WGS84 ht or User entered Scale (Reducing points to the ground) WGS84 point Description User entered or Combined SF Available for Twostep. The default method for determining the Combined Scale Factor to be used in the transformation process. Editable field Available for Onestep. Allows the scale factor to be typed in manually. Available for Method: User entered. Display only Available for Onestep. The calculated scale factor. Available for Method: Known WGS84 pt and Method: Known WGS84 ht. Selectable list Available for Onestep. WGS 1984 point from which the scale factor will be calculated. The scale factor is calculated using the height of the known WGS 1984 point. Available for Method: Known WGS84 pt. Known height Editable field Available for Onestep. The WGS 1984 height of a point can be typed in. The scale factor is calculated using this height. Available for Method: Known WGS84 ht. Grid SF Display only Available for Twostep and Method: Combined SF. The grid scale factor as computed in Compute Grid Scale Factor. Refer to "41.4.3 Computing the Grid Scale Factor". Height SF Display only Available for Twostep and Method: Combined SF. The height scale factor as computed in Compute Height Scale Factor. Refer to "41.4.4 Computing the Height Scale Factor". Available for Twostep. The combined scale factor of the transformation. Combined SF Editable field Available for Method: User entered. The scale factor can be typed in. Display only Available for Method: Combined SF. The product of the grid scale factor and the height scale factor. Next step OK continues to Store Coordinate System. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 491 Store Coordinate System Key Description Store To store the coordinate system to the DBX, attach the system to WGS84 points job that was selected in Choose WGS84 & Local Jobs and return to Main Menu. Scale or Ppm For Onestep and Twostep. To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm. Coord For Classic 3D: To view other coordinate types. Fn Quit To exit the screen. For Onestep Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field A unique name for the coordinate system. The name can be up to 16 characters in length and include spaces. Shift dX Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Shift in X direction. Shift dY Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Shift in Y direction. Shift dZ Display only For Classic 3D: Shift in Z direction. Rotation Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Rotation of transformation. Scale Display only For Onestep and Twostep: Scale factor of transformation. Rotation orgn Display only X For Onestep and Twostep: Position in the X direction of the origin of rotation. Rotation orgn Display only Y For Onestep and Twostep: Position in the Y direction of the origin of rotation. Next step Store stores the coordinate system and returns to Main Menu. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 492 41.4.2 Computing Required Azimuth Description Available for: • One Point Localisation method with Onestep or Twostep transformation. • Method: Two WGS84 points and Method: User entered in Determine Rotation. Allows two local points to be chosen from local job between which the required azimuth will be computed. This azimuth is then used with an azimuth computed between two WGS 1984 points chosen from the WGS84 job to calculate the rotation of the transformation. The computed required azimuth appears in the Required azimuth field for Method: Two WGS84 points and the Rotation field for Method: User entered in Determine Rotation. Access Press Inv in Determine Rotation. Compute Required Azimuth Key Description OK To calculate the required azimuth and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description From Selectable list The point ID of the first known point for the azimuth calculation. To Selectable list The point ID of the second known point for the azimuth calculation. Azimuth Display only The calculated azimuth. Next step OK returns to Determine Rotation. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 493 41.4.3 Computing the Grid Scale Factor Description For One Step Localisation method with Twostep transformation. Calculates the grid scale factor. The grid scale factor is the scale factor of the point chosen, relative to the projection being used. Access Press Grid.. in Determine Scale. Compute Grid Scale Factor Key Description OK To confirm the selections and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Scale or Ppm To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Method by which the grid scale factor is to be calculated. Method Local point Description User entered Grid scale factor can be manually typed in. Known local pt Grid scale factor is computed using the position of a known local point. Selectable list Available for Method: Known local pt. The point ID of the point chosen from the local job from which the grid scale factor is computed using the projection selected. The grid scale factor. Grid SF Editable field Available for Method: User entered. To type in the grid scale factor. Display only Available for Method: Known local pt. The computed grid scale factor. Next step OK returns to Determine Scale. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 494 41.4.4 Computing the Height Scale Factor Description For One Point Localisation method with Twostep transformation. Calculates the height scale factor of the point chosen. Access Press Hgt.. in Determine Scale. Compute Height Scale Factor Key Description OK To confirm the selections and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Scale or Ppm To switch between displaying the true scale and displaying the ppm. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Method by which the height scale factor is to be calculated. Method Known Point Description User entered Height scale factor can be manually typed in. Known local pt Height scale factor is computed using the position of a known local point. Known local ht Height scale factor is computed using an entered height value. Selectable list Available for Method: Known local pt. The point ID of the point chosen from the local job from which the height scale factor is computed. Known height Editable field Available for Method: Known local ht. A known local height. Height SF The height scale factor. Editable field Available for Method: User entered. To type in the height scale factor. Display only Available for Method: Known local pt and Method: Known local ht. The computed height scale factor. Next step OK returns to Determine Scale. Viva Series, Determine Coordinate System 495 42 QuickGrid 42.1 Selecting the Transformation Method For an overview of determine coordinate systems, refer to "41.1 Overview" Description QuickGrid is designed to allow for quick coordinate system determination on site. Particularly for those users who must combine GPS and TPS data. All points must be measured by GPS, and therefore this method is not available in TPS mode. There are five different methods to choose from, Single point, Multi point, Single point from base, Orientate to line & Quickshift. Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\QuickGrid. Choose QuickGrid Method Description of fields Field Option Description Method Single point This method is fast and targeted at the basic customer who wants to set up a local coordinate system based on a single point. The orientation is fixed to WGS 1984 north. A height scale is applied to bring GPS distances to “ground” using measured point WGS 1984 height. Multiple points This method is fast and targeted at the more rigorous customer who wants to set up a local coordinate system based on multiple points. Rotation and scale are as calculated. Single point base This method is fast and targeted at the basic customer who wants to set up a local coordinate system based on the base station position. The orientation is fixed to WGS 1984 north. A height scale is applied to bring GPS distances to “ground” using measured point WGS 1984 height. Viva Series, QuickGrid Orientate to line This method is fast and targeted at the more advanced customer who wants to set up a local coordinate system based on a single point, but set the orientation of the resulting grid by measuring a second point. The rotation is as calculated. A height scale is applied to bring GPS distances to “ground” using measured point WGS 1984 height. QuickShift This method is fast and targeted at the more advanced customer who wants to shift their existing coordinate system based on a single point. A 3D transformation is calculated. 496 Next step IF the selected method is THEN Single point, Multiple points, OK to access Define Local Quickgrid Point. Refer to Single point base or Orien- paragraph Define Local Quickgrid Point. tate to line OK to access Select Coordinate System. Refer to paragraph Select Coordinate System. QuickShift Select Coordinate System This screen is only available for Method: QuickShift. Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Coord system Selectable list Description Select the coordinate system to be shifted. Transformation Display only The type of transformation. Ellipsoid Display only The coordinates are based on this ellipsoid. Projection Display only The map projection. Geoid model Display only The geoid model. CSCS model Display only The Country Specific Coordinate System model. Next step OK accesses Define Local Quickgrid Point. Viva Series, QuickGrid 497 Define Local Quickgrid Point Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Local point User entered The local QuickGrid point is entered by the user. From working job The local QuickGrid point is selected from the working job. From control job The local QuickGrid point is selected from the control job. The point ID of the local QuickGrid point. Point ID Editable field For Local point: User entered. Selectable list For Local point: From working job and Local point: From control job. The Easting coordinate of the local QuickGrid point. Easting Editable field For Local point: User entered. Display only For Local point: From working job and Local point: From control job. The Northing coordinate of the local QuickGrid point. Northing Editable field For Local point: User entered. Display only For Local point: From working job and Local point: From control job. The orthometric height of the local QuickGrid point. Elevation Editable field For Local point: User entered. Display only For Local point: From working job and Local point: From control job. Ignore local Check box height & use WGS84 height Use geoid Viva Series, QuickGrid Check box When this box is checked, no height adjustment is calculated. When this box is not checked, a height adjustment is calculated. Check this box to select a geoid model for the calculation. 498 Field Option Description Geoid model Selectable list Available when Use geoid is checked. To select a geoid model. Next step OK accesses Measure QuickGrid Point. 42.2 Determining a New Coordinate System Access Press OK in Define Local Quickgrid Point. Measure QuickGrid Point This screen is similar to the standard Survey screen. Refer to "56.1.2 Real-Time Rover Operations". Next step • For Method: Multiple points: After measuring and storing a point, Matched Pts & Residuals is accessed. • For Method: Orientate to line: Measure the points of the line. Then Store Coordinate System is accessed. • For all other QuickGrid methods: After measuring and storing a point, Store Coordinate System is accessed. Matched Pts & Residuals This screen shows what points have been matched so far. More points can be added, matched points can be deleted. Key Description OK To confirm the selections, compute the transformation and continue with the subsequent screen. New.. To survey another point and return to the Survey screen. Match To change the type of match for the highlighted point. Delete To delete the highlighted point from the list. More To display information about height residuals. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of columns Viva Series, QuickGrid Column Description WGS84 pts The point ID of the points chosen from WGS84 points job. 499 Column Description Match The type of match to be made between the QuickGrid point and the surveyed point. This information is used in the transformation calculation. Position & Height, Position only, Height only or None. East, North and Height The residuals of the matched points. Next step Press New.. to return to Measure QuickGrid Point and to survey another point for the calculation. Press OK to continue with Store Coordinate System. Store Coordinate System, Summary page The available fields, keys and pages depend on the selected QuickGrid method. Key Description Store To store the coordinate system and to exit the Determine Coordinate System application. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, QuickGrid Field Option Description Name Editable field The name of the new coordinate system. No. of matched pts Display only Available for Multiple points. The number of matched points. Largest resid- Display only uals East, North and Height Available for Multiple points. The largest residuals of the transformation. Rotation from Display only north Available for Orientate to line. The rotation is shown in the configured angle units. Shift dX Display only Available for QuickShift. Shift in X direction. Shift dY Display only Available for QuickShift. Shift in Y direction. Shift dZ Display only Available for QuickShift. Shift in Z direction. 500 Next step Page changes to the Coord system page. Store Coordinate System, Coord system page The available fields, keys and pages depend on the selected QuickGrid method. Key Description Store To store the coordinate system and to exit the Determine Coordinate System application. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description For Multiple points. The method by which the residuals of the control points will be distributed throughout the transformation area. Residuals None No distribution is made. Residuals remain with their associated points. 1/distance, 1/distance² or 1/distance³/² Distributes the residuals according to the distance between each control point and the newly transformed point. Multiquadratic Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic interpolation approach. Transformation Display only Available for QuickShift. The type of transformation. Ellipsoid Display only Available for QuickShift. The coordinates are based on this ellipsoid. Projection Display only Available for QuickShift. The map projection. Geoid model Display only Available for Multiple points and QuickShift. The geoid model used. CSCS model Display only Available for QuickShift. The Country Specific Coordinate System model. Next step Store saves the new coordinate system. Viva Series, QuickGrid 501 43 Reference Line 43.1 Overview Description The Reference Line application can be used to set out or measure points relative to a line. Reference line tasks The Reference Line application can be used for the following tasks: • Measuring to a reference line where the coordinates of a design point can be calculated from its position relative to the defined reference line. • Staking to a reference line where the position of a design point is known and instructions to locate the point are given relative to the reference line. • Gridstaking a reference line where a grid can be staked relative to a reference line. • Viewing the position relative to a slope defined from the reference line. Other functionality available includes: • Shifting the reference line with parallel offsets. • Referencing to a specific segment of a line. • Reversing the direction of a reference line. Activating the application If the message panel appears which requires that the application must be activated via a license key then refer to "30.3 Load licence keys". Measuring and staking out of points is possible for GPS and TPS. Point types Reference lines/arcs can be created from points stored as: • WGS 1984 geodetic • Local grid A local grid must always be available when using the application. Terms Reference point: Used in this chapter to refer to the point from which the perpendicular offset, from the reference line to the design point, is measured. Design point: The design point. • For measuring to a reference line, this term refers to the point with the coordinates of the current position and the designed or calculated height. • For staking or grid staking to a reference line, this term refers to the point to be staked, defined by the user Measured point: Line: The current position. A line can be a straight line between two points, an arc or a multi-point line made up of multiple individual line sections. It may be 003976_001 constructed by joining many “point to points”, by creating the sections segmentby-segment, or by creating an alignment. A line segment is an individual component of a multi-line such as a polyline or an alignment. The segment can be a straight or an arc. Line segment: 003977_001 Viva Series, Reference Line 502 Preparing the data Line data can be created by one of the following methods: Method Description Create lines onboard The Reference Line application supports DBX polylines. Lines created with SmartWorx Viva 4.50 or higher are DBX polylines. DBX areas can be also used as closed polylines. Data management Refer to "6 Jobs & Data - Data". Create Control Data Lines can be created using the Create line function. Refer to "Create new line/arc". Tap Map From Tap Map, lines can be created, imported or selected to be used in Reference Line. Refer to "38 Tap Map". Survey linework Lines can be created by measuring points in the field. Lines can be made using the linework commands in the Survey page. Also, taking measurements with line objects open as well using Jobs & Data or line codes can create lines. Road data in Alignment Editor Using the Alignment Editor application, a simple centreline alignment can be created and be imported. Only straight and curve elements are supported. The alignment created with the Alignment Editor application has to be converted to a RoadRunner Job. Import lines Import an individual line from DXF background map Using a DXF file attached as a background map, lines can be selected and imported within the map screens of Tap Map, Survey or Reference Line applications. Import all objects including lines from DXF Copy the DXF files to the \Data directory on the data storage device of the Viva Series instrument. Once the card is back in the instrument the DXF import program can be used to bring the lines into the job. Import from XML Copy the DXF files to the \Data directory on the data storage device of the Viva Series instrument. Once the card is back in the instrument the XML import program can be used to bring the lines into the job. Import Road alignments The Import alignment data application in Jobs & Data supports various different formats like dxf, LandXml, MxGenio, Terramodel, Carlson. Create lines externally Leica Geo Office Refer to LGO Online Help. Design to Field Using the Design to Field tool of Leica Geo Office, the user is able to bring in lines from multitudes of formats. For example, XML, DXF, Microstation XML and many more. Refer to LGO Online Help for information on Design to Field. Some 3rd party software export to Leica database - Viva Series, Reference Line 503 Refer to "Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device" for the placements of the data files on the data storage device. Defining chainage The chainage of the start point of a reference line can be defined. Coordinate systems Lines and points defining the lines can be read from the control job using the active coordinate system. For this reason, the coordinate system in the control job must match the active one in the working job. If using TPS, select the or a local grid coordinate system. If using GPS, a local grid coordinate system must be used. Working in WGS84 coordinates is not supported. Measured WGS84 coordinates are converted to grid using the active coordinate system. It is possible to use a valid coordinate system, but have the line or part of it lying outside the projection or CSCS model being used. In these cases, the field values relating to the difference in coordinates between the design point and current position are shown as -----. Direction of values Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term must always be considered to mean also Bearing. The following diagram shows the direction of positive and negative values for distance and height differences between the design point and the reference point for reference lines. P1 + - + P2 P2 P3 - P0 GS_017 P0 P1 P2 P3 Start point End point Design point Reference point P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 Instrument station Start point End point Design point Reference point P2 P3 P0 TS_023 Viva Series, Reference Line P1 + P3 + - P4 504 Shifts A reference line can be shifted. A shift is permanently applied to the reference line for the duration of the Reference Line task. P1a P1 P1b P0 Start point P1 End point P0a Start point with Up/down shift P1a End point with Up/down shift P0b Start point with Left/right shift P1b End point with Left/right shift d1 Up/down shift d2 Left/right P0a d1 d2 P0b P0 000237_002 P2a P2 P0 d1 Viva Series, Reference Line P0 Instrument station P1 Start point P2 End point P1a Start point with Up/down shift P2a End point with Up/down shift P1b Start point with Left/right shift P2b End point with Left/right shift d1 Up/down d2 Left/right P1a d2 000407_002 P2 P1b P1 505 43.2 Accessing Reference Line Access • For measuring tasks: Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Measure to ref line. • For staking tasks: Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Stakeout+\Stake to ref line. • From Tap Map: Tap & hold on a line from the displayed job or attached CAD. Select Use in Reference Line from the context menu. Select how to enter the application: Stake task selection, Measure task selection, Stake line, Measure line with slope, Measure line, Stake line with slope Job Selection Key Description OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Choose control job Selectable list The reference lines are stored in this job. Use a DTM job Check box DTM job Selectable list The measurements are stored to the working job. The coordinate systems in the control job and in the working job must match, otherwise a warning message appears to prevent any further step. When this box is checked, a DTM job can be selected. A DTM job holds DTM (Digital Terrain Model) or TIN (Triangular Irregular Network) data. The files are stored in the \DBX folder or a subfolder of \DBX. Holds DTM (Digital Terrain Model) data or TIN (Triangular Irregular Network) data. The DTM job to be used must be stored in the \DBX directory on the active memory device. The DTM job is a read-only source of information and cannot be selected as a working or control job. Viva Series, Reference Line 506 Field Option Description DTM layer Selectable list To choose the DTM layer. Next step OK accesses Reference Line Task. Reference Line Task Key Description OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of the Reference Line tasks For measuring to a reference line Task Description Line Measure relative to a line by viewing the distance, offset & height values. Line with slope Measure relative to a line by viewing the distance, offset & height values. Additionally view position relative to a defined slope from the line. Segment Measure relative to a line segment by viewing the distance, offset & height values. A segment may be an individual straight or arc, or a segment within a line. Segment with slope Measure relative to a line segment by viewing the distance, offset & height values. Additionally view position relative to a defined slope from the line. Quick Line Create a temporary line from 2 points & measure relative to it by viewing the distance, offset & height values. For staking to a reference line Task Description Line Stakeout relative to a line by defining the distance, offset & height. Line with slope Stakeout relative to a line by defining the distance, offset & height. Additionally view position relative to a defined slope from the line. Viva Series, Reference Line 507 Task Description Grid Define & stakeout a grid of points relative to a line. Segment Stakeout relative to a line segment, by defining the distance, offset & height. A segment may be an individual straight or arc, or a segment within a line. Segment with slope Stakeout relative to a line segment, by defining the distance, offset & height. Additionally view position relative to a defined slope from the line. Quick Line Create a temporary line from 2 points & stakeout relative to it by defining the distance, offset & height. Next step OK accesses Define Line. 43.3 Configuring Reference Line Access Press Fn Config.. in the input screens of the Reference Line application. Configuration, General page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Use chainages Check box Allow stake definition in stake page Viva Series, Reference Line Check box Description Activates the use of chainages within the reference line application. If this is deactivated, Dist along line will be used for data input purposes. When this box is checked, stake values can be defined on the Stake page. 508 Field Option Description Always enable Check box editing of design height When this box is checked, the design height can be changed manually for Heights to use: From line or Heights to use: Start point. Available when Allow stake definition in stake page is checked. View results Check box page after staking a point When this box is checked, the stake results are displayed after staking a point. Only update stakeout values when distance is measured Check box When this box is checked, angles and stakeout values are updated after a distance was measured. Then all values are frozen until the next distance is taken. Turn to point automatically Check box When this box is checked, the instrument positions automatically to the point to be staked. Turn to Selectable list Available when Turn to point automatically is checked. Position only Instrument positions horizontally to the point to be staked. Position & height Instrument positions horizontally and vertically to the point to be staked. Check box To take a measurement in Face I and Face II. The point stored is an average of the two measurements. When using instruments fitted with auto aiming, the point is automatically measured in both faces. The resulting point is stored and the instrument is returned to the first face. Use two face measurements Next step Page changes to the Quality control page. Configuration, Quality control page Description Especially when checking points it is useful to enable the Quality control criteria available. For every point stored the chosen parameters are checked. When Quality control criteria is fulfilled, green ticks are shown in the stake page, and the measured point can be directly stored. If the check limits are exceeded a warning is shown. This function guarantees a higher productivity as it is no longer necessary to check the values for every shot taken. Description of fields Field Option Check deltas Check box to point before storing (set Limit to 0 if you wish to always be shown differences before storing) Viva Series, Reference Line Description When this box is checked, a position check is done when storing a staked point. When the defined tolerance is exceeded, the stake out can be repeated, skipped or stored. When this box is not checked, no quality check is done during stake out of points. 509 Field Option Delta values Description Depending on this selection the following lines are enabled/disabled. Ch, offset & height Check for chainage, horizontal offset and height. Ch & offset Check for chainage and horizontal offset. Position & height Check for 2D position and height. Position Check for 2D position. Height Check for height. Chainage limit From 0.001 to 100 Maximum difference in chainage. Offset limit From 0.001 to 100 Maximum horizontal offset from defined position. Position limit From 0.001 to 100 Maximum radial horizontal distance. Height limit From 0.001 to 100 Maximum height difference. Next step Page changes to the Design page. Configuration, Design page On this page, additional design points to be staked are set. Refer to "43.6 Staking to a Reference Line" for a graphic. Description of fields Field Option Description Horizontal (PC, PT, AP) Check box Horizontal type points occur at the junction between two segments in a line. Mid curve (MCP) Check box Occurs in arc segments. Curve radius (RP) Check box Occurs in arc segments. Offset Check box bisected point (BP) Occurs when the junction between two segments in a line is not tangent AND when offsets are active. Offset in Check box average direction (Avg) Occurs when the junction between two segments in a line is not tangent AND when offsets are active. Check box Vertical type points occur at the junction between two segments in the vertical alignment of the line, or when a high or low element is found. Example: In a curve between two grades Vertical (VPI, Low, High, VPC, VPT) Viva Series, Reference Line 510 Configuration, Graphics page This page is only available for staking operations. Description of fields Field Option Description The reference direction to be used to stakeout points. The stakeout elements and the graphical display shown in the Reference Line application are based on this selection. Navigate direction From instrument The direction of the orientation is from the instrument to the point to be staked. To instrument The direction of the orientation is from the point to be staked to the instrument. To north The North direction shown in the graphical display based on the active coordinate system. To sun The position of the sun calculated from the current position, the time and the date. To last point Time-wise, the last recorded point. To point (cntrl A point from the control job selected in Job job) Selection. Point To point A point from the working job. To reference line The direction of the orientation is parallel to the reference line. Following arrow The direction of the orientation is from the current position to the point to be staked. The graphical display shows an arrow pointing in the direction of the point to be staked. Selectable list Available for Navigate direction: To point (cntrl job) and Navigate direction: To point. To select the point to be used for orientation. The method of staking out. Navigate using Direction & distance The direction from the orientation reference, the horizontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed. In/out, left/right The distance forwards/backwards to the point, the distance right/left to the point and the cut/fill is displayed. Switch to bulls eye Check box when 0.5m from target When this box is checked, a bulls eye bubble is shown in the stakeout graphic when less than half a metre from the point being staked. Beep faster when getting close to point Check box The instrument beeps when the horizontal radial distance from the current position to the point to be staked, is equal to or less than defined in Start within. Distance to use Height The distance in height is used as indicator. Horizontal distance The distance from Easting and Northing is used as indicator. Position & height The distance from Easting, Northing and Height is used as indicator. Viva Series, Reference Line 511 Field Option Description Start within Editable field The horizontal radial distance from the current position to the point to be staked when a beep will be heard. Next step Page changes to the Info page. Configuration, Info page Two things can be configured on this page: 1) The required information for the stake or measure method to be displayed on the Info page. 2) If and which additional user-defined survey screen page is displayed. Key Description OK To confirm the changes and continue. Clear To clear all parameters from all lines. Default To set the default value for all lines. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Show additional page from My Survey Screen Check box Shows a selectable list for the survey screen pages. Page to show Selectable list The user-defined survey screen page to be shown. All survey screens defined in My Survey Screen Settings can be selected. Method Display only The method is based on the selected Reference Line task. The settings in the following lines can only be changed for the current task. The method defines the parameters available to view on the Info page of the application. Different combinations of the parameters to view can be stored. 1st line to 16th line Selectable list To modify the selection on any particular line, place the cursor on the line to modify using the arrow keys and press the ENTER key. Use the arrow keys to select the required parameter and press the ENTER key to confirm the choice. Define which parameters are viewed on each line. Up to 16 lines of parameters can be defined. Some of the options are explained in graphics in the following chapters. Always available Point ID Viva Series, Reference Line To enter the point ID. 512 Field Option Description Antenna height To enter the antenna height. Target height To enter the target height. Code Editable field for codes. Code desc (free) Displays the description of free codes. Attrib 01 and Attrib 02 Editable field for attributes for codes. Chainage Displays the current chainage. Dist along line Displays the horizontal distance from the start point to the reference point along the reference line. Line offset Displays the horizontal offset perpendicular from the line to the current position. Line height diff Displays the height difference from the defined line to the current position. Line name Displays the name of the reference line. Line type Displays the line type as straight, arc or polyline. Easting Displays the Easting coordinate of the current position. Northing Displays the Northing coordinate of the current position. Height Displays the height of the current position. Quality 3D Display only field for the current 3D coordinate quality of computed position. Cut/fill Displays the height difference between the design height and the measured height. Line space full Insert full line space. Line space half Insert half line space. For measure with/without slope also available Dist to start point Displays the horizontal distance from the measured point to the start point of the line. Dist to end point Displays the horizontal distance from the measured point to the end point of the line. Line dist to end Displays the horizontal distance from the end point of the line to the base point of the measured point, along the line. Perp distance Displays the slope distance between the reference point and the measured point, perpendicular to the reference line. Not displayed when shifts are applied. Perp ht to line Displays the height difference perpendicular from the reference line to the horizontal base point. Not displayed when shifts are applied. Spatial dist Displays the slope distance between the start point and the reference point. Not displayed when shifts are applied. For stake with/without slope also available Viva Series, Reference Line 513 Field Option Description ∆ dist along line Displays the horizontal distance along the reference line from the current position to the defined design point. ∆ chainage Displays the difference between the defined chainage and the current chainage. ∆ height Displays the vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. Defined chainage Displays the defined chainage of the point to be staked out. Defined line dist Displays the defined horizontal distance along the reference line from the start point to the design point. Defined offset Displays the defined horizontal offset perpendicular from the reference line to design point. Direction to point Displays the direction from the current position to the design point. Distance to point Displays the distance from the current position to the design point. Design easting Displays the Easting of the design point. Design northing Displays the Northing of the design point. Design height Displays the height of the design point, depending on the defined heights to use. For slope only also available Slope ratio meas Displays the ratio of the slope from the current position to the hinge. Slope ratio defined Displays the ratio of the slope from the design point to the hinge, as defined by the user. Slope dist hinge Displays the slope distance offset from the hinge to measured point. Slope dist line Displays the slope distance offset from line to measured point. Slope height diff Displays the height difference between the current position and the height of the slope at that position. A cut is above the slope. A fill is below the slope. Hinge offset Displays the horizontal offset from the hinge point of the slope to the current position. Hinge height diff Displays the height difference from the hinge point of the slope to the current position. Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Viva Series, Reference Line 514 Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. 43.4 Defining the Reference Line 43.4.1 Overview Description The definition of the reference line to be used can require up to three steps, depending on the selected task: Task Define Line Define Segment Define Slope Line Quick Line - - Segment Grid - Line with slope - Segment with slope Viva Series, Reference Line 515 43.4.2 Defining the Line Access 1) Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Measure to ref line or Stake to ref line. 2) In the job selection screen, select the required job and press OK. 3) In Reference Line Task, select the required task and press OK. Define Line, Line page Key Description OK To accept changes and continue with the subsequent screen. Create.. To create a line. Refer to "9 Jobs & Data - Create control data". Shifts.. To apply horizontal and vertical shifts to the selected line. Refer to "Shift Settings". Available for lines only. If using line segments, shifts are applied in the Define Segment screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Fn Report To view an alignment report. Refer to "Line Report, Points page". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Line to use Selectable list To select a line. Open the selectable list to access the Line Selection screen showing all selectable lines from the control job. Type Display only The selected line type as straight, arc or polyline. Length Display only The horizontal grid distance between the two points of the line. Start chainage Display only The beginning chainage of the line. Heights to use Selectable list Depending on the task chosen this parameter determines the design height. • When measuring to a line, it affects the height difference value. • When staking, it affects the delta height value. Viva Series, Reference Line From line Heights are computed along the reference line. Manually enter Heights are typed in manually into the Design height field. Start point Heights are computed relative to the height of the starting point of the line. 516 Field Option Description DTM The height computed from the DTM at the position of the reference point. Next step OK accesses Define Slope, Define Segment, Measure to Line or Define Stake. Define Line, Map page Key Description Revrs To reverse the direction of the lines, so that the distance along line/chainage increment is in the opposite direction to the original: Original: Define Quick Line Reverse: When Quick Line is the selected task, the line is defined by two points from the control job, instead of an existing line. When the task is finished or a new quick line is defined, the previously defined quick line is automatically deleted from the database. Key Description OK To accept changes and continue with the subsequent screen. Shifts.. To apply horizontal and vertical shifts to the defined line. Refer to "Shift Settings". Survy.. To measure a point. Available when Start point or End point is highlighted. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Start point Selectable list The first point forming the line. End point Selectable list The last point forming the line. Length Display only The horizontal grid distance between the two points of the line. Heights to use Selectable list Depending on the task chosen this parameter determines the design height. • When measuring to a line, it affects the height difference value. • When staking, it affects the delta height value. From line Viva Series, Reference Line Heights are computed along the reference line. 517 Field Line selection and importing lines Option Description Manually enter Heights are typed in manually into the Design height field. Start point Heights are computed relative to the height of the starting point of the line. DTM The height computed from the DTM at the position of the reference point. Selecting lines In Define Line, open the selectable list for Line to use. The list contains all selectable lines from the control job. The line ID and the start chainages of lines can be edited. Key Description OK To select the highlighted reference line and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Edit.. To edit line ID and the start chainage. Import To import a line from a Road/Rail job or from an external survey job. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Importing lines Press Import to import a single alignment from a Road or Rail job, or a line/area from another survey job, to a line to be used in the application. The Import Line screen opens. Only alignment geometry that contains lines and simple curves are supported. Clothoids are not supported and can not be imported. If the source survey job for the importation is the same as the control job, for example when you want to import areas, the imported element is converted to a line with the suffix _001. Key Description OK To import the selected alignment data to active raw alignment. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option The file type of the data source. Data source Road job Viva Series, Reference Line Description To import lines from an existing Road job. 518 Field Line Report, Points page Option Description Rail job To import lines from an existing Rail job. Survey job To import lines/areas from an existing survey job. Road+ (GSI format) To import lines from an existing Road job defined in GSI format. From job Selectable list All jobs are available for selection. Line Selectable list Line from the selected Road job. The line must be stored in the \dbx folder of the memory device to be selectable. The report displays information on the points that have been measured with the current selected control job, and current select line. Key Description OK To return to the screen from which this screen was accessed. Edit.. To edit details of the highlighted point. Save.. To save the alignment report. More To change the values displayed between Offset, Cut/fill, Measured height, Design height, Point ID and Pt code. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Page changes to the Map page. Use Prev and Next to the previous or next measured point. Shift Settings The Map page is not updated with shifts. Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit Reference Line application. Description of fields Field Option Description Shift line Check box Check to apply a shift. Left/right Editable field Distance to shift the reference line horizontally to the left or right. Viva Series, Reference Line 519 Field Option Description Up/down Editable field The vertical shift of the reference line. Rotate line Editable field Available for Measure: Quick Line. To rotate the line by the defined angle value clockwise if not defined otherwise in Regional settings. If values are entered for both Rotate line and Left/right, the horizontal shift is applied to the rotated line. 43.4.3 Defining a Segment of a Line Description Define Segment, Segment page appears when the selected method is Segment, Segment with slope or Grid. A segment can be a straight or an arc. Define Segment, Segment page Key Description OK To accept changes and continue with the subsequent screen. Shifts.. To apply horizontal and vertical shifts to the selected segment. Refer to "Shift Settings". Seg- or Seg+ To select the previous/next segment in the line. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Line to use Display only The current line. Segment no Editable field The line segment number to work with. A polyline is split into segments, naming from 1 upwards. Segment type Display only Segment length Display only Start chainage Display only The selected line type as straight or arc. The horizontal grid distance between the two points of the line segment. The beginning chainage of the line segment. Next step Page changes to the Map page. Refer to "Define Line, Map page". 43.4.4 Defining Reference Line Slopes Description It is possible to define slopes for reference line. When measuring or staking to the reference line, additional information about the position relative to the slope is displayed. Stakeout values still refer to the reference line. For the Info page, additional information relative to the slope can be configured in Configuration, Info page. Viva Series, Reference Line 520 Define Slope Key Description OK To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Fn Quit To exit Reference Line application. Description of fields Field Option Description Line to use Selectable list To select a line. Or select a line on the Map page. The method how the slope is created. Slope direction Left down Creates a downward plane extending to the left of the defined reference line. Right down Creates a downward plane extending to the right of the defined reference line. Left up Creates an upward plane extending to the left of the defined reference line. Right up Creates an upward plane extending to the right of the defined reference line. Slope grade Editable field Inclination of the slope. Hinge hz offset Editable field Horizontal offset from the line that sets where the slope starts. Hinge vt offset Editable field Viva Series, Reference Line Vertical offset from the line that sets where the slope starts. 521 43.5 Measuring to a Reference Line Description The horizontal and vertical position and the distance along line/chainage of a manually measured point can be calculated relative to the defined reference line. Information can be measured and displayed in the Info page, and then exported. Refer to "Configuration, Info page". Measure to line straight segment horizontal measurements P1 d3 d5 P3 d1 d2 P2 d4 P0 GS_020 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Start point End point Measured point Reference point Line offset Dist along line Line dist to end Dist to start point Dist to end point P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Start point End point Measured point Reference point Line offset Dist along line Line dist to end Dist to start point Dist to end point P1 d3 d5 P3 d1 d2 P0 000411_002 Measure to line straight segment vertical measurements P2 d4 Z Z P1 X P1 X P4 Y P3 P3 P4 d2 d3 d5 P5 P0 P2 d1 d1 d5 P5 d4 P0 000240_002 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Start point End point Measured point Reference point Perpendicular point Horizontal base point Line height diff Perp distance Spatial dist ∆ ht start of line Perp ht to line Viva Series, Reference Line 522 Z Z P1 X P1 X P4 Y P3 P3 P4 P0 d2 d3 d5 P2 d1 P5 d1 d5 P5 d4 P0 P6 000412_002 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Measure to line - arc segment - horizontal measurements Start point End point Measured point Reference point Perpendicular point Horizontal base point Instrument station Line height diff Perp distance Spatial dist ∆ ht start of line Perp ht to line Design point inside arc d3 P3 d2 P1 d5 d1 d4 P2 P0 GS_022 d3 P4 d2 P2 d1 d4 P1 P0 TS_028 Viva Series, Reference Line P3 d5 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Start point End point Measured point Reference point Line offset Dist along line Line dist to end Dist to start point Dist to end point P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 Instrument station Start point End point Measured point Reference point Line offset Dist along line Line dist to end Dist to start point Dist to end point 523 Measure to line - arc segment - vertical measurements P1 P3 P2 d2 d1 P0 GS_024 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 Start point End point Measured point Reference point ∆ ht start of line Line height diff P2 P4 P3 d2 P0 TS_030 Measure to Line, Measure page P1 P0 P1 P2 d1 P3 P4 d1 d2 Instrument station Start point End point Measured point Reference point ∆ ht start of line Line height diff Design point outside the range of the selected element: When measuring outside of the defined lines, lines and arcs are extended in a straight projection tangent to the start/end of the line. For Heights to use: From line, the start/end grade of the line is also extended. A warning appears when this is the case. When working with segments, the same extension rules are applicable to the selected segment beyond its limits. For lines imported from a road alignment, heights are not extended outside the segment. An additional page is available when a user-defined survey screen page is used. Key Description Meas To start measuring the point being staked. The key changes to Stop. The difference between the current position and the point being staked is still displayed. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Viva Series, Reference Line 524 Key Description Stop To end measuring the point being staked. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General page recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The position mode icon changes to the moving icon. The key changes to Store. Store To store the measured point. When Automatically store point is checked in Quality Control, General page, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Dist To measure a distance. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Available when Meas is displayed. Refer to "43.3 Configuring Reference Line". Fn Conect and To connect/disconnect from the GPS reference data. Fn Disco Fn Init To select an initialisation method and to force a new initialisation. Available when Meas or Store is displayed and for working styles allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer to "56.4 Initialisation for RealTime Rover Operations". Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Selectable list The point ID of the point to be measured. Antenna height Editable field The default antenna height. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. Target height Editable field The last used target height is suggested. An individual target height can be typed in. Chainage Display only Chainage of the current position along the line. This value is the chainage of the start of the reference line plus Dist along line. Defined line dist Display only Horizontal distance from the start point to the reference point along the reference line. Line offset Display only Perpendicular offset from the reference line measured from the reference point to the measured point. Height diff Display only Difference between measured height and design height. Viva Series, Reference Line 525 Next step Page changes to the user definable Info page. Refer to "43.3 Configuring Reference Line" for information on all available items. Page changes to the Map page. Displayed is • the horizontal distance or chainage along the reference line from the start point to the reference point. • the perpendicular offset from the reference line measured from the reference point to the measured point. • the cut/fill value. 43.6 Staking to a Reference Line Description Allows for the position of a point to be defined relative to a reference line and then staked. Stake to line - horizontal measurements P1 d1 P3 d2 d4 P2 d3 d6 d5 P0 004099_002 P2 d1 d2 d3 P0 004098_002 P4 d4 P3 d5 P1 Stake to line vertical measurements d6 P0 P1 P2 P3 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 Start point End point Design point Reference point Line offset Dist along line Defined line dist Defined offset ∆ offset ∆ dist along line P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 Instrument station Start point End point Design point Reference point Line offset Dist along line Defined line dist Defined offset ∆ offset ∆ dist along line P1 P3 P0 Viva Series, Reference Line P2 P0 P1 d2 P2 d1 P3 d1 Start point End point Design point Reference point Height offset, for Heights to use: Start point d2 Height offset, for Heights to use: From line 526 P2 P4 P3 P0 P1 000417_002 Define Stake P0 P1 P2 d2 P3 d1 P4 d1 Instrument station Start point End point Design point Reference point Height offset, for Heights to use: Start point d2 Height offset, for Heights to use: From line This screen is for typing in the stakeout values for a point relative to the reference line. The fields available depend on the options chosen in the Configuration screen. Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Stk-/Ch- To decrease the distance along line/the chainage by Increment. Stk+/Ch+ To increase the distance along line/the chainage by Increment. Fn Config.. To configure the Reference Line application. Refer to "43.3 Configuring Reference Line". Fn Report To view an alignment report. Refer to " Line Report, Points page". Fn Start and Fn End To change between the start point and the end point of the line. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Line Display only The name of the selected reference line. Start chainage Display only The chainage of the start point of a reference line. Editable field Chainage along the line. Define this value as chainage of the start of the reference line plus a distance along the line. Dist along line Editable field Horizontal distance from the start point along the line to the design point. Chainage Viva Series, Reference Line 527 Field Option Description Offset Editable field The offset from the reference line to the design point Height offset Display only The height offset of the design point. • For Heights to use: Start point The height of the design point is calculated as the height of the start point plus Height offset. • For Heights to use: From line The height of the design point is calculated as the height of the reference point plus Height offset. Design height Editable field Use stake increments/Use chainage increments Check box • For Heights to use: Manually enter The height of the design point is entered manually. Activates the use of stake/chainage increments. Sets behaviour of the stake/chainage after a point is stored. After storing Do nothing Does not change the stake/chainage after a point is stored. Move forwards Proceeds to the next point up stake/chainage after each stored staked point. Move backwards Proceeds to the next point down stake/chainage after each stored staked point. Use different increment on curves Check box Option to use a different chainage increment along a curve. Increment Editable field Available when Use different increment on curves is checked. Chainage increment to be used along the small radius curve. Radius under Editable field Available when Use different increment on curves is checked. Defines the threshold value of a small radius curve. For example, a curve with a radius smaller than this value, uses the chainage increment defined in the following field. Next step OK to accept changes and continue to Stakeout. Refer to "53.4 Staking Out". Viva Series, Reference Line 528 Stakeout, Stake page Once in the Stakeout screens, the user is guided to reach design positions. The functionality of this screen is similar to the Stakeout screen. Differences between the two screens are outlined here. Refer to paragraph "53.4 Staking Out" for all other key and field explanations. In the title bar is a description of where the stake point is on the alignment. This description can come from the position of the defined stake point someway along the line or a point of interestion. For points of interest refer to "Points of interest". The availability of the fields depends on the configuration in Configuration, General page. Key Description Stk-/Ch- To decrease the distance along line/the chainage by Increment. Stk+/Ch+ To increase the distance along line/the chainage by Increment. Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1.1 Accessing ID Template Configuration". Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID/ Pt Editable field The point ID of the point to be staked. Target height Editable field The last used target height as defined is suggested. An individual target height can be typed in. Antenna ht Editable field The default antenna height as defined in the active working style is suggested. Ch Editable field The current chainage to be staked. Off Editable field Current offset being staked. Current height Display only Design height Editable field Design elevation. The orthometric height of the point to be staked is displayed. Measured elevation. The orthometric height of the current position is displayed. Next step Page changes to the Results page, if configured. Viva Series, Reference Line 529 Points of interest Points of interest are staked out if they appear within the defined Ch-/Ch+/Stk-/Stk+ range and if checked in Configuration, Design page. Refer to "Configuration, Design page". P4’ P5’ P4 P2’ P5 P2 P1’ P6c’ P1 P6 P7 000262_002 On P1 P2 P3 the original line: BOP - Beginning of project PC - Beginning of curve RP - Radius point of the centre of the curve P4 MCP - Mid point curve P5 PT - End of curve section - Start of straight segment P6 AP - Angle point P7 EOP - End of project P6b’ P6a’ P3 P6’ P7’ On the offseted line: P1’ Offset BOP - Beginning of project P2’ Offset PC - Beginning of curve P4’ Offset MCP - Mid point curve P5’ Offset PT - End of curve section Start of straight segment P6’ AP-F - Offset angle point projected to the next segment P6a’AP-B - Offset angle point projected to the previous segment P6b’AVG - Offset in average direction P6c’BP - Offset bisected point P7’ EOP - End of project General terms: • Curve - Along a curve section • Extension - Along an extended part of the line • Curve mid point - Mid curve point • Straight - Along a straight section • VPI - Vertical interesection point • Offset PI avg - Offset intersection point average element Results, General page If View results page after staking a point is checked in Configuration, General page, this screen opens automatically once a point is measured and stored. Key Description OK To return to the stake screen. Viva Series, Reference Line 530 Key Description Edit.. To add a vertical offset to the design height and to display the new height. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The point ID of the point staked. Chainage Display only The chainage measured at the stored point. Offset Display only The offset from the alignment measured at the stored point. Design height Display only The entered design elevation. Measured height Display only The height measured at the stored point. Cut/Fill Display only The height difference between the Design height and the Measured height. Annot 1 Display only Fixed value recorded for certain software packages. Annot 2 to Annot 4 Editable field Available for additional notes. Next step Page changes to the Coords page. This page displays the design coordinates as well as the differences between design and measured coordinates. Page changes to the Code where codes can be selected or typed in. Page changes to the Map page. This page provides an interactive display of the data. Viva Series, Reference Line 531 43.7 Gridstaking to a Reference Line Description A grid can be defined relative to a reference line and points staked out in that defined grid. Stake grid from line In same direction P1 d1 P0 d3 d2 GS_026 P0 P1 d1 d2 d3 Start point End point Distance along line to first grid point Grid spacing along line Grid spacing across line P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 d3 Instrument station Start point End point Distance along line to first grid point Grid spacing along line Grid spacing across line P0 P1 d1 d2 d3 Start point End point Distance along line to first grid point Grid spacing along line Grid spacing across line P2 d1 d3 P1 d2 P0 TS_034 In reverse direction P1 d1 P0 d3 GS_027 Viva Series, Reference Line d2 532 P2 d1 P1 d3 d2 P0 TS_035 P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 d3 Instrument station Start point End point Distance along line to first grid point Grid spacing along line Grid spacing across line Define Grid Key Description OK To confirm the selections and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Chainage Editable field Chainage of the first design point to be staked along the line. Across line Editable field Spacing between grid lines. Along line Editable field Spacing between points on the grid line. Method by which the grid will be staked out. Stake next grid line In same direction Each new grid line is started at the same end as where the previous grid line started. In reverse direction Each new grid line is started at the same end as where the previous grid line finished. Determines the format of the point ID for grid points. Store point using Grid reference Point ID is shown as the position of the grid being staked, where +yyy.yy is the chainage position along the grid line, and +xxx.xx is the grid line offset. Pt ID template The point ID template as defined in the active working style is used. The point ID template can be defined in Main Menu: User\Work settings. Next step OK to accept changes and continue to the stakeout screen. Viva Series, Reference Line 533 Stake +yyy.yy +xxx.xx The title of this screen indicates the position of the grid being staked, where +yyy.yy is the chainage position along the grid line, and +xxx.xx is the grid line offset. The functionality of this screen is similar to the Stakeout screen. Differences between the two screens are outlined here. Refer to paragraph "53.4 Staking Out" for all other key and field explanations. Key Description Skip To skip the currently displayed chainage and increment to the next chainage. Available when Meas is displayed. Line+ To start staking the next grid line. Moves grid stake point to the next line (right) in the grid. There is no automatic Line+ when the end of the line is reached. Description of fields Field Option Description First field on the screen Editable field The point ID of the grid point to be staked. The point ID is based on the selection for Store point using in Define Grid. If a different point ID is typed in, the next point ID will still be shown as the next automatically computed point ID. Target height Editable field The last used target height as defined is suggested. An individual target height can be typed in. Antenna ht Editable field The default antenna height as defined in the active working style is suggested. Current height Display only Measured elevation. The orthometric height of the current position is displayed. Design height Editable field Design elevation. The orthometric height of the point to be staked is displayed. Next step Page changes to the Map page. Displayed is • the horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked. • the height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the point to be staked. Viva Series, Reference Line 534 44 Reference Plane & Grid Scan 44.1 Overview Description The Reference Plane & Grid Scan application can be used to measure points relative to a reference plane. Any surface can also be grid scanned. It is possible to measure either a regular grid on a predefined reference plane or any surface with an angle based resolution. Reference Plane & Grid Scan tasks The Reference Plane & Grid Scan application can be used for the following tasks: • Measuring points to calculate and store the perpendicular distance to the plane. • Viewing and storing the instrument and/or local coordinates of the measured points. • Viewing and storing the height difference from the measured points to the plane. • Grid Scan a defined area on a predefined reference plane with a regular grid or on any surface with an angle based resolution. Planes can only be computed with grid coordinates. Face scan is available for instruments with reflectorless EDM. Activating the application The Reference Plane & Grid Scan application must be activated via a licence key. Refer to "30.3 Load licence keys" for information on how to activate the application. Defining a reference plane Reference planes are created using a right hand system. For two points defining a plane, a vertical plane is used. A reference plane is defined with the X axis and the Z axis of the plane. The Y axis of the plane defines the positive direction of the plane. A reference plane can be defined in the following ways: • vertical • tilted • horizontal P3 P1 P4 P2 P5 GS_058 P3 P2 P5 P0 Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan Point Point Point Point Point defining defining defining defining defining reference reference reference reference reference plane plane plane plane plane P4 P1 TS_039 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Instrument station Point defining reference plane Point defining reference plane Point defining reference plane Measured point Measured point 535 • Tilted plane Any number of points define the plane. The axes of the tilted reference plane are: Measure to plane is applicable for tilted and horizontal plane definitions. • Measure to plane and Grid scan on plane is applicable for tilted and horizontal plane definitions. X axis: Z axis: Y axis: Horizontal and parallel to the plane Defined by steepest direction of the plane Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined Offsets are applied in the direction of the Y axis. For : Z a Z a Y X P1 P1 X Y b GS_059 For b GS_060 : a a Z Z Y X P1 X P1 Y b TS_041 a b N P1 X Y Z Horizontal plane TS_041a b Height Easting Northing Origin of plane X axis of plane Y axis of plane Z axis of plane The axes of the horizontal reference plane are: X axis: Z axis: Y axis: Horizontal and parallel to the plane Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined Parallel to the plane Offsets are applied in the direction of the Z axis. Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 536 For : Z Z a a Y X X P1 P1 Y b GS_114 a b N P1 X Y Z b GS_115 Height Easting Northing Origin of plane X axis of plane Y axis of plane Z axis of plane For : a a Z Z Y P1 X X P1 P2 b TS_066 Y TS_066a P2 b a Height b Easting N Northing P1 Origin of plane P2 Point of plane X X axis of plane Y Y axis of plane Z Z axis of plane Vertical plane The axes of the vertical reference plane are: X axis: Z axis: Y axis: Horizontal and parallel to the plane; X axis starts in point defined as origin point Parallel to the instrument zenith and parallel to the plane Perpendicular to the plane; increases in the direction as defined Offsets are applied in the direction of the Y axis. Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 537 a a Z Y Z P2 P2 P1 X X b TS_040 P1 Y b TS_040a a Height b Easting N Northing P1 Origin of plane P2 Point of plane X X axis of plane Y Y axis of plane Z Z axis of plane With four or more points, a least squares adjustment is calculated resulting in a best fit plane. Origin The origin of the reference plane can be defined to be in the plane coordinates or in relation to the national coordinate system. Grid orientation The orientation of the grid is part of a reference plane. The orientation is defined during the reference plane definition and can be changed when editing a reference plane. Positive direction of plane The positive direction of the plane is defined by the direction of the Y axis. The direction of the Y axis can be redefined by selecting a point on the desired side of the plane. Offset of the plane Z Z P2 d1 P2' Y d1 P1 X Y d2 X P1 TS_039 TS_038 P1 X Y Z d1 d2 Origin of plane X axis of plane Y axis of plane Z axis of plane Positive offset Negative offset Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan P1 P2 P2’ d1 X Y Z Origin of plane Point defining offset of plane P2 projected on original plane Offset defined by P2 X axis of plane Y axis of plane Z axis of plane 538 44.2 Accessing Reference Plane & Grid Scan Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\ Survey+\ Ref plane & grid scan. Ref Plane & Grid Scan Key Description OK To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the reference plane. Refer to "44.5 Configuring Reference Plane & Grid Scan". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of the Reference Plane & Grid Scan tasks Task Description Measure to plane The coordinates of measured points are calculated relative to the reference plane. Grid scan on plane Measures a regular grid on a defined reference plane within a defined area. Grid scan on surface Measures any surface within a defined area. Next step IF THEN Task: Measure to plane or Grid scan on plane OK. • To create a new plane by measuring points, enter a name for the reference plane. New points can be measured by starting the Survey application. • To create a new plane from previously stored points, enter a name for the reference plane. Refer to "44.3 Creating a Reference Plane From Previously Stored Points". • For selecting an existing reference plane from a job, refer to "44.4 Selecting a Reference Plane from a Job". Only available when a reference plane has already been stored in the actual working job. Task: Grid scan on OK accesses Define Grid Scan Area. Refer to "44.9 Grid Scan surface on Surface". Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 539 44.3 Creating a Reference Plane From Previously Stored Points Access In Ref Plane & Grid Scan, select Create a new plane from previously stored points. Press OK. New Reference Plane, General page Key Description OK To continue to the next screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Ref plane name Display only The name of the new reference plane. No. of points Display only Number of points used for plane definition. Std deviation Display only Standard deviation of used points for plane definition. ----- is displayed unless more than four points are used to define the plane. Max ∆d Display only Maximum distance between measured point and defined plane. ----- is displayed unless more than four points are used to define the plane. Next step Page changes to the Points page. New Reference Plane, Points page • * is shown to the right of the point for a point which will be used as origin of the plane. • ! is shown to the left of the point if the point is outside maximum distance between a point and the calculated plane as defined on the General page. • The column ∆d displays the perpendicular distance of the point from the definition of the plane. Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 540 Key Description OK To continue to the next screen. +Point To add points from the working job to define the reference plane. Available when creating a new plane from previously stored points. Use To change between Yes and No in the Use for the highlighted point. Delete To remove the highlighted point from the list. Survy.. To measure a point to be used for the plane. Available when creating a new plane by measuring new points. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Origin To use the highlighted point as the origin of the plane. Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step Page changes to the Plot page. New Reference Plane, Plot page Points displayed depend on the settings in Configuration, Parameters page. Points defining the plane are displayed in black, the other points are displayed in grey. Select the icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane. Next step OK changes to the Ref Plane Coordinate System. Ref Plane Coordinate System This screen is displayed if Use local plane coordinate system is checked in Configuration, Parameters page. Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 541 Key Description OK To compute and store the reference plane. Survy.. Available when Point is highlighted. To measure a point to define the plane direction. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Ref Plane Grid Orientation Field Option Description Currently selected origin point Display only Point which has been selected as origin point. To change the origin point, press ESC and Fn Origin. X coordinate Editable field Enter local X coordinate of origin. The origin is defined as the projection of the measured point onto the calculated plane. Z coordinate Editable field Enter local Z coordinate of origin. The origin is defined as the projection of the measured point onto the calculated plane. Point Selectable list Defines the direction of the Y axis. Choose how you want to define the grid orientation on the reference plane. Key Description OK To continue to the next screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Currently selected origin point Display only Point which has been selected as origin point. To change the origin point, return to the previous screen and press ESC and Fn Origin. Use the fall line of the reference plane Check box The fall line is the line of greatest slope. The fall line is a curve following the steepest slope. It is always orthogonal to the contour lines. Mathematically it is determined by the gradient of the height. Select a point Check box of the reference plane besides the origin point The orientation is defined by the origin point and another point on the reference plane. Orientation Point Selectable list The point which defines the orientation together with the origin point. Next step OK changes to the Offset of Reference Plane. Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 542 Offset of Reference Plane Key Description OK To compute and store the reference plane. Survy.. Available when Offset pt ID is highlighted. To measure a point to define the offset point. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Offset plane Selectable list An offset can be defined by a point or a distance. The defined plane is shifted along the Y axis by the offset. Offset pt ID Selectable list Available for Offset plane: Offset to a point. Point ID of offset point. Offset Display only or editable field Distance by which to offset the plane along the Y axis. For Offset plane: Offset by distance, the distance can be entered. For Offset plane: Offset to a point, the calculated distance to the adjusted plane is displayed. ----- if no values are available. 44.4 Selecting a Reference Plane from a Job Access In Ref Plane & Grid Scan, select Create a new surface from previously stored points. Press OK. Highlight Ref plane name. Press ENTER. Available if a reference plane has already been stored in the actual working job. Manage Reference Planes Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 543 Key Description OK To select the highlighted reference plane. Delete To delete the highlighted reference plane. More To display information about date and time of when the reference plane was created and the number of points defining the plane. Fn Quit To exit the application. 44.5 Configuring Reference Plane & Grid Scan Description Allows options to be set which are used within the Reference Plane & Grid Scan application. These settings are stored within the working style. Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\ Survey+\ Ref plane & grid scan. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Parameters page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Config.. To edit the survey screen page currently being displayed. Available when a list item in Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "25.3 My Survey Screen". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages. Max +/- ∆d for Editable field defining plane The maximum perpendicular deviation of a point from the calculated plane. Max +/- ∆d for Editable field grid scan on ref plane Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan The maximum perpendicular deviation of a measured point in grid scan on plane from defined plane. Measured points outside the defined limit are not stored. 544 Field Option This parameter defines the points displayed in the Plot and Map pages of the Reference Plane & Grid Scan application in the plan view. Display Slice width Description All points Displays all points in the plan view. Points within slice Displays points within the defined Slice width in the plan view. Editable field Available for Display: Points within slice. This parameter defines the distance from the plane in which points are displayed. This distance is applied to both sides of the plane. If lines and areas are displayed in a Map page, then the parts of lines and areas that fall within the defined slice are also displayed. Use local plane coordinate system Check box When this box is checked, then point results are additionally stored with X, Y, Z coordinates based on the local plane coordinate system. The screen Ref Plane Coordinate System is displayed in the reference plane definition workflow. Local coordinates and the positive direction of the reference plane can be defined. When this box is not checked, then points on the plane are transformed into the global coordinate system. Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 545 Field Option Description Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. 44.6 Editing a Reference Plane Access After creating or selecting a reference plane, select Edit Reference Plane in Measure to Plane or Grid Scan on Reference Plane. Edit Reference Plane, General page Key Description OK To compute and store the reference plane. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Ref plane name Editable field The name of the reference plane. No. of points Display only Number of points used for plane definition. Std deviation Display only Standard deviation of used points for plane definition. ----- is displayed unless more than four points are used to define the plane. Max ∆d Display only Maximum distance between measured point and defined plane. ----- is displayed unless more than four points are used to define the plane. Next step Page changes to the Points page. Edit Reference Plane, Points page • * is shown to the right of the point for a point which will be used as origin of the plane. • ! is shown to the left of the point if the point is outside maximum distance between a point and the calculated plane as defined on the General page. • The column ∆d displays the perpendicular distance of the point from the definition of the plane. Key Description OK To compute and store the reference plane. Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 546 Key Description +Point To add points from the working job to define the reference plane. Use To change between Yes and No in the Use for the highlighted point. Delete To remove the highlighted point from the list. Survy.. To measure a point to be used for the plane. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Origin To use the highlighted point as the origin of the plane. Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step Page changes to the Origin page. Edit Reference Plane, Origin page Key Description OK To compute and store the reference plane. Survy.. Available when Point is highlighted. To measure a point to define the plane direction. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Use local plane coordinate system Check box When this box is checked, then point results are additionally stored with X, Y, Z coordinates based on the local plane coordinate system. When this box is not checked, then points on the plane are transformed into the global coordinate system. Currently selected origin point Display only The point which has been selected as origin point. To change the origin point, change to the Points page and Fn Origin. Set the highlighted point as the origin point. X coordinate Editable field Enter local X coordinate of origin. The origin is defined as the projection of the measured point onto the calculated plane. Z coordinate Editable field Enter local Z coordinate of origin. The origin is defined as the projection of the measured point onto the calculated plane. Point Selectable list Defines the direction of the Y axis. Next step Page changes to the Offset page. Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 547 Edit Reference Plane, Offset page Key Description OK To compute and store the reference plane. Survy.. Available when Offset pt ID is highlighted. To measure a point to define the offset point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Use offset for Check box reference plane Description When this box is checked, an offset can be defined for the reference plane. Offset plane Selectable list An offset can be defined by a point or a distance. The defined plane is shifted along the Y axis by the offset. Offset pt ID Selectable list Available for Offset plane: Offset to a point. Point ID of offset point. Offset Display only or editable field Distance by which to offset the plane along the Y axis. For Offset plane: Offset by distance, the distance can be entered. For Offset plane: Offset to a point, the calculated distance to the adjusted plane is displayed. ----- if no values are available. Next step Page changes to the Plot page. Edit Reference Plane, Plot page Points displayed depend on the settings in Configuration, Parameters page. Points defining the plane are displayed in black, the other points are displayed in grey. Select the icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane. Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 548 44.7 Measuring Points to a Reference Plane Access After creating or selecting a reference plane, select Measure to plane in Measure to Plane. Measure Points to Plane, Reference page Key Description Meas To start measuring the point. The key changes to Stop. The difference between the current position and the adjusted plane is displayed. Stop To end measuring the point. The key changes to Store. After ending the measurement, the differences between the measured point and the adjusted plane are displayed. Meas To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Dist To measure a distance. Store To store the point information. Cmpare To calculate offsets to previously measured points. Plane To edit the selected reference plane. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The number of the measured point. Target height Editable field The target height. Antenna height Editable field The height of the antenna. Offset perp dist Display only The perpendicular distance between the measured point and the adjusted plane. Offset ht Display only The vertical distance between the measured point and the adjusted plane. X coordinate, Y coordinate, Z coordinate Display only For Use as origin: Plane coordinates. Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 549 Field Option Description Easting, Northing, Elevation Display only For Use as origin: Instrument coords. Next step Page changes to the Map page. Select the icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane. 44.8 Grid Scan on Plane Description Grid scan on plane automates the process of measuring a sequence of points along the defined vertical, tilted or horizontal reference plane. The window of interest can be either rectangular or polygonal. The boundaries of the window of interest and the increment values can be defined. Grid scan on plane can be run on instruments with the option "reflectorless EDM" only. Access step-by-step Step Description 1. After creating or selecting a reference plane, select Grid scan reference plane in Grid Scan on Reference Plane. 2. Press OK. 3. Choose between: • Rectangular area: Two opposite corner points define the rectangular grid scan area. The area must be defined from the first to the second point. Grid scan areas bigger than 180° are not allowed. • Polygonal area: Three or more clockwise measured points define the polygonal grid scan area. The polygonal grid scan area is calculated based on the sequence of the points. Grid scan areas bigger than 180° are not allowed. 4. Press OK. Diagram TS_120 Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan P0 Known P0 Station Unknown Grid point coordinates 550 Measure corner Grid Scan Settings, Define grid spacing on the reference plane. For a rectangular grid scan area, measure two points at opposite corners. For a polygonal grid scan area, measure all corner points in consecutive order. Key Description OK To either measure another corner point of the grid scan area or to start grid scanning the area. Dist Available on the Camera page. To measure distances for displaying the fine-style crosshairs. Done For polygonal areas, this key appears for the first time after the third measured point. Cpture Available on the Camera page. To take an image with the current pixel resolution. The image is then displayed but not stored on the memory device yet. Fn Config.. To configure what is displayed on the Camera page. Refer to "Camera View Settings, General page". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. ESC To delete the last measured point of the rectangular or polygonal grid scan area. This allows the remeasurement of scan area points. Description of fields Field Option Description Left / right Editable field For tilted and vertical planes. Horizontal grid distance. Up / down Editable field Up slope grid distance. Grid scan area Display only Estimated points Display only Size of the grid scan area. Estimated number of points to be grid scanned. >20'000 is shown for all resolution bigger than 20'000 points. It is not checked if all points from the scan resolution fall within the defined grid scan area. For more than 20’000 points, grid scanning the defined grid scan area with the selected resolution may take very long. Also measure Check box the boundary of the defined scan area Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan When this box is checked, the boundary of the grid scan area is also measured. 551 Grid Scan Settings, Define start point ID & increment. Description of fields Field Option Description Start point Editable field The point ID to start with. Increment Editable field The incrementation used for Start point. No point ID template used • For Start point: RMS and Increment: 10 the points are RMS, RMS10, RMS20, ..., RMS100, ... • For Start point: 100 and Increment: 10 the points are 100, 110, ..., 200, 210, ... • For Start point: abcdefghijklmn89 and Increment: 10 the points are abcdefghijklmn99, point ID incrementing fails. Grid Scan Settings, Choose the grid scan mode to be used. This screen is only displayed for motorised instruments. For all other instrument types, the standard measurement mode is set. Description of fields Field Option Description Standard accuracy & range optimised Check box This measurement mode is accuracy and range optimized. It uses the reflectorless single distance measurement mode. Fast - speed & Check box performance optimised Available for TS15. This measurement mode is speed and performance optimized. It uses the reflectorless continuous distance measurement mode. Grid Scan Status, Progress page Key Description Stop To stop the grid scanning of points. Pause To pause the grid scanning of points. Scan To continue grid scanning. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 552 Description of fields Field Option Description Points measured Display only Number of points being measured. Points remaining Display only Number of points remaining to be grid scanned. Points rejected Display only Number of skipped points. % completed Display only Percentage of points measured. Time left Display only Estimated time remaining until grid scan is finished. Point ID Display only Point ID of last stored point. Next step If the instrument has a camera and the camera functionality is activated, Page changes to the Camera page. Refer to "33 Camera & Imaging" for information on camera and imaging. Page changes to the Plot page. Points currently scanned are displayed in black, previously measured points, lines and areas are displayed in grey. Select the icon to change between the face view and the plan view of the plane. 44.9 Grid Scan on Surface Description Grid Scan on Surface allows the measurement of a grid on any surface based on an angular resolution (constant delta horizontal and delta vertical values). No reference plane is required. The grid scan area can be either rectangular or polygonal. Optionally, the boundary of the grid scan area can be measured. Grid Scan on Surface can be run on instruments with the option "reflectorless EDM" only. Diagram P0 TS_121 Access step-by-step Known P0 Station Unknown Grid point coordinates Step Description 1. In Ref Plane & Grid Scan, select Grid scan on surface. 2. Press OK. 3. Choose between: • Rectangular area: Two opposite corner points define the grid scan area. The area must be defined by pointing the instrument to opposite corners of the area. Grid scan areas bigger than 180° are allowed. • Polygonal area: Three or more clockwise measured points define the grid scan area. The polygonal grid scan area is calcualated based on the sequence of the points. Grid scan areas bigger than 180° are allowed. Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan 553 Step Description 4. Press OK. Most steps are identical with the steps for Grid scan on plane. Refer to "44.8 Grid Scan on Plane" for a description of the screens. Surface Scan Settings, Define grid scan spacing. Key Description OK To continue with the next screen. Dist Available when Define spacing by: Distances is selected. To take a reflectorless distance measurement. The measured value is displayed in the Horiz distance field. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Define spacing by Angles The scan resolution is defined by horizontal and vertical angle values. Distances The scan resolution is defined by horizontal and vertical spacings at a certain range. Editable field Available for Define spacing by: Angles. The horizontal and vertical angle values defining the scan resolution. Horiz distance Editable field Available for Define spacing by: Distances. The range for which the horizontal and vertical spacing are valid. Editable field Available for Define spacing by: Distances. The horizontal and vertical spacing defining the scan resolution at the defined range. Hz and V Horizontal spacing and Vertical spacing Also measure Check box the boundary of the defined scan area Estimated points Display only Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan When this box is checked, then the boundary of the grid scan area is also measured. The number of points to be scanned according to the defined scan resolution. >20’000 is displayed for all scan resolution exceeding 20’000 points. 554 Field Option Viva Series, Reference Plane & Grid Scan Description It is not checked if all points from the scan resolution fall within the defined grid scan area. For more than 20’000 points, grid scanning the defined grid scan area with the selected resolution may take very long. 555 45 Roads - General 45.1 Overview Please be aware that the terminology or workflow used on different construction sites can vary from the one used in this manual. However, basic principles remain the same. Description Roads is an umbrella term for four subapplications. Name of subapplication Description Alignment Editor • Alignment Editor is an "add-on" component to the Roads application. It is only intended for quick and easy modification of existing alignments, or creation of new ones. Alignment Editor is not an onboard road planning and design application. • This application supports the following alignment types: • Horizontal alignments • Vertical alignments • Cross section templates • Cross section assignments • Chainage equations • This application is a free application provided by Leica Geosystems AG. If the application does not appear on your menu or you are otherwise unable to access it, please contact your Leica Geosystems AG representative. Roads • This subapplication allows the measuring and staking of roads and other alignments. • It can be used with GPS and with total stations. • It consists of two main functions: • Roads - As built check for checking or measuring existing lines, surface grade, slopes or surfaces and comparing the measurements against design data. • Roads - Stakeout for setting or staking out and adjusting road elements during construction using design data. • The data can be typed in manually by using the Alignment Editor or data created in a design package can be converted. The Import alignment data application and the Design to Field component of Leica Geo Office offer converters from several road design and CAD packages. Rail • This subapplication allows the measuring and staking of railways and other alignments. • It can be used with GPS and with total stations. • It consists of two main functions: • Rail - As built check for checking or measuring an existing track and comparing the measurements against design data. • Rail - Stakeout for setting or staking out and adjusting track features during construction using design data. Viva Series, Roads - General 556 Name of subapplication Description • Single track or multiple track designs can be imported for use with this application. • For horizontal and vertical alignments, the data can be typed in manually by using the Alignment Editor application or data created in a design package can be converted. • For multiple track designs, it is possible to define one centreline which is common to all tracks. • A superelevation table can be created for each track using the Rail Editor computer application. This application is part of the Design to Field component in Leica Geo Office. Tunnel • This subapplication allows the measuring and staking of tunnels. • It is for use with total stations only. • It consists of two main functions: • Tunnel - As built check for checking a built or excavated tunnel with a tunnel design. • Tunnel - Stakeout for setting out tunnel features during construction. • The centreline of the tunnel can be imported for use onboard the instrument using the industry standard LandXML data format. Alternatively the centreline can be imported in formats exported from many other tunnel design packages using the Design to Field component of the Leica Geo Office. • Tunnel design profiles can be created using the Tunnel Profile Editor computer application. This application is integrated into the Design to Field component in Leica Geo Office. Roads, Rail and Tunnel subapplications are licence protected. They can be activated through a licence key which is specific to the instrument. This licence key can be entered either through Main Menu: User\Tools & other utilities\Load licence keys or alternatively, the first time the program is started. Viva Series, Roads - General 557 45.2 Jobs & Design Data 45.2.1 Accessing Roads Applications Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads. Then select the subapplication required to access the job selection screen. For the Alignment Editor, refer to "46.2.1 Accessing Alignment Editor". Job selection When the application is resumed, the last active selections are remembered and can be accessed again. This ability means the settings do not need to be reselected every time after turning off the instrument. Key Description OK To continue with the next screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields The methods available in the Define the Work to be Done screen depend on the selected job types (road or control job). Refer to Define the Work to be Done. Field Option Description Working job Selectable list Available for Road. The working job is the one data is stored to. If a CAD file is attached to this job and no Control job is used, then the CAD file is displayed in the background of Map pages. Use alignment Check box from road job Road alignment Selectable list Available for Road. When this box is checked, a road alignment file can be selected. Contains all the information about the road design. For example, the geometry of the line, the formation layer of the road or the information related to the construction of cuttings and embankments. Available for Road. The files are stored in the \DBX folder or a subfolder of \DBX. The data is either typed in manually in the Alignment Editor application or converted from a road design package. For tunnel projects, all road design information for road data outside of the tunnel must be stored in the road job. The road job is a read-only source of information and cannot be selected as a working or control job. Viva Series, Roads - General 558 Field Option Description Rail job Selectable list Available for Rail. Contains all the information about the rail design including the geometry of the centreline and the rail definition (superelevation). The files are stored in the \DBX folder or a subfolder of \DBX. The rail job is a read-only source of information and cannot be selected as a working or control job. Tunnel job Selectable list Available for Tunnel. Contains all the information about the tunnel design including the geometry of the centreline and the tunnel profile. The files are stored in the \DBX folder or a subfolder of \DBX. The tunnel job is a read-only source of information. When this box is checked, a control job can be selected. Individual lines and/or points of a control job can be staked out and set in relation to the alignment. Use line &/or points from control job Control job Selectable list The control job is the one control points are stored in. The control job holds all control point information needed in the field, for example, control points, points with known coordinates used for a TPS setup. Lines of the control job can be used for Roads - Stakeout or Roads - As built check. A CAD file attached to a control job can be used to view and import the CAD lines for working with. The CAD lines are viewable in any Map page of the Stake/Check screen. Use a DTM Check box Available for Roads and Rail. When this box is checked, a DTM job can be selected. A DTM job holds DTM (Digital Terrain Model) or TIN (Triangular Irregular Network) data. The files are stored in the \DBX folder or a subfolder of \DBX. DTM Selectable list Available for Roads and Rail. Holds DTM (Digital Terrain Model) data or TIN (Triangular Irregular Network) data. The DTM job to be used must be stored in the \DBX directory on the active memory device. The DTM job is a read-only source of information and cannot be selected as a working or control job. If only a DTM job is selected, then only check measurements relative to the selected DTM layer can be done. Next step IF you want to continue with THEN refer to configuration "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Viva Series, Roads - General 559 IF you want to continue with THEN refer to Roads "47 Roads - Road". Rail "48 Roads - Rail". Tunnel "49 Roads - Tunnel". 45.2.2 Working with a DTM Job Access Start the Roads or Rail subapplication. In the job selection screen check Use a DTM. Open the selectable list for DTM. DTM Key Description OK To select the highlighted DTM job and continue. Layrs.. To view the DTM layers and the number of triangles of the highlighted DTM job. A DTM job can consist of multiple DTM layers or surfaces. These DTM layers can cover different locations, be on top of each other or intersect each other. Delete To delete the highlighted DTM job. CF card, SD card, USB or Intrnl To change between viewing jobs stored on another data storage device or internal memory. Fn Quit To exit the application. 45.2.3 Design Data Design data for Road 2D and 3D lines Depending on the method to be used, the design in all road jobs must consist of either 2D or 3D lines. 2D lines are required at least when working with lines, local lines, manual slope, local manual slope or layer. If the design consists of 2D lines, heights can be considered manually. 3D lines are required when working with slope, surface grade or crown. 3D lines can also be used when working with lines, local lines, manual slope, local manual slope or layer. Viva Series, Roads - General 560 Description Depending on the complexity of the road job, the design data can vary from a single horizontal alignment to a design containing profiles with dozens of defined vertices. Design elements can be grouped logically for faster access. Lines When manually typing in a road job, alignments and cross sections are used. Alignments are defined by geometric elements, for example straights and arcs, and the cross sections by vertices. Furthermore, at which chainage a certain cross section is used is also defined. By defining these elements the vertices are connected to create a series of lines representing the three-dimensional design of the road. Road_029 Line representation of a road design. In Roads, such lines defining the design are called lines. Lines are the base elements used for stakeout and check activities. Lines have a project unique name by which they are identified and selected. Whenever a new road design is typed in or imported from a design package these lines are generated automatically in the background. Road_030 Design data for Rail A cross section can be derived from the line model by slicing the group of lines with a vertical plane orthogonal to the centreline. Vertical cut of a line group defines a cross section. Lines are referenced by layers and can be used in more than one layer. Every layer is relative to a centreline. This centreline does not have to be a part of the layer. In the previous example, layer one - general fill - uses the centreline for calculation even though the centreline is not part of the layer surface. Whereas the centreline is part of layer three - final surface. Horizontal and vertical alignments All rail jobs must consist of at least one horizontal alignment. Each horizontal alignment can either be typed in manually using the Alignment Editor application, or converted from a rail design package using Import alignment data application or the Design To Field component within the Leica Geo Office program. Horizontal alignments can consist of straights, circular curves, clothoids, parabolic curves and bloss curves. Vertical alignments can consist of straights, circular curves and parabolic curves. Viva Series, Roads - General 561 If a design comprises multiple tracks, one horizontal alignment can be defined as the chainage centreline. From the chainage centreline all chainages will be calculated and additional horizontal and vertical alignments can be used to define each track. Rail definition Rails can be defined by: • entering the design data manually in the field • by using the Alignment Editor • by using Import alignment data application • by converting data from a rail design package using the Design To Field component and if required the Rail Editor (for defining the superelevation) component within the Leica Geo Office program Rails are stored as lines (continuous 2D or 3D lines) within the rail job. Tracks Tracks are used to group related lines (centreline and rails) together. In the case of a single track, the track centreline and the two rails are grouped together in one track. In the case of multiple tracks where one chainage centreline is used for all tracks, each track consists of four lines: the track centreline, the chainage centreline and the left and right rails. In the case of multiple tracks where chainage is calculated relative to the track centreline, each track is stored as a single track as described previously. Design data for Tunnel Horizontal and vertical alignments All tunnel jobs must consist of at least a horizontal and a vertical alignment. This data can be converted from a road design package using the Design To Field component within the Leica Geo Office application. Profiles Depending on the complexity of the tunnel job, the design data can vary from a single horizontal and vertical alignment to a design containing many different design profiles with dozens of defined vertices. Design profiles can be defined and edited using the Design To Field component within the Leica Geo Office application. Layers Tunnels generally consist of layers made of different materials, for example a shotcrete surface or a lining. At different times throughout a project, it may be required to work with different layers of the tunnel. The Tunnel Profile Editor allows the possibility of creating such layers by grouping together design profiles that will be used at the same chainage. ab B4 A4 B3 B5 A3 B2 B1 Tunnel_023 A5 A2 A6 A1 A7 Viva Series, Roads - General B6 B7 a) The vertices A1-A7 could be grouped together in a layer (a) and represent the final lining of the tunnel. b) The vertices B1-B7 could be grouped together in a layer (b) and represent the inner shotcrete layer of the tunnel. 562 Design Profile Layers can be assigned to chainages along the centreline using the Tunnel Profile Editor within the Design To Field component. The layer of the tunnel to set out or check can be defined when creating a task. 45.2.4 Viewing and Editing the Design Data Access Start the Roads subapplication required. In the job selection screen highlight Road Jobs, Rail job or Tunnel job. Open the selectable list In Road Jobs/Rail jobs/Tunnel jobs highlight a job and press Data. View & Edit Data The design data stored within the road/rail/tunnel job contains all information about the road/rail/tunnel design. This information includes the lines and layers, for example, the geometry of the centreline or the layers of the different materials/surfaces which form the road/tunnel. The design data can be viewed and partially edited on this screen. Key Description OK To return to the job selection. Edit.. To edit the general job details and the start chainage of the centreline of the selected layer. For Road additionally to select another centreline and include/exclude lines from the selected layer. View To view geometry details of the lines and to view cross-section plots. For Road and Rail additionally to view the list of all lines in the layer. Fn Config.. To access the configuration settings. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Job name Display only The name of the active road/rail/tunnel job, as selected in the job selection screen. Layer Display only To select a layer from the active road/rail/tunnel job. All layers within the active road/rail/tunnel job can be selected. No. of lines Display only Available for Road and Rail. The number of lines from the selected layer. Viva Series, Roads - General 563 Field Option Description Number of profiles Display only Available for Tunnel. The number of profiles from the selected layer. Centreline Display only The name of the layer centreline. Every layer must have a centreline. Chainage Editable field To enter chainage to use when viewing the data. The default value is the start chainage of the layer centreline. Ch increment Editable field To enter a chainage increment to use when stepping through the data. Next step Edit:, Layer page IF you want to THEN press edit data Edit.. to access the screen Edit:. Refer to "Edit:, Layer page". view data View to access the screen View at. Refer to "View at, Line Info page". Only available for Road. Key Description Store To store data and return to the previous screen. Centre To set the highlighted line as centreline. Use To set Yes or No in the Use column for excluding/including the highlighted line of selected layer. Page To change to the next page. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Line name Displays the name of all the lines in the layer. CL Shows CL for the line selected as centreline. Use For Yes: The selected line is used for stake/check. For No: The selected line is not used for stake/check. Viva Series, Roads - General 564 Next step Page changes to the Centreline page. Edit:, Centreline/Chainage line page Key Description Store To store changes and return to the previous screen. Reset To clear all changes made and to reset to the original start chainage. The original start chainage is always remembered. Page To change to the next page. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option CentreDisplay only line/Chainage line Set start chainage Editable field End chainage Display only Description The name of the centreline. To enter a start chainage for the layer centreline. The end chainage of the layer centreline. By using the centreline length, the end chainage is automatically calculated. Next step Store to store the changes. View to access the screen View at. View at, Line Info page If a value is unavailable in the design data, the field is shown as -----. Viva Series, Roads - General 565 Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. Ch- To decrease the chainage by the chainage increment, as defined in the View & Edit Data screen. Ch+ To increase the chainage by the chainage increment, as defined in the View & Edit Data screen. Segmnt To access Segment Info - Start Point. Hz or Vt To change between the vertical alignment data and the horizontal alignment data. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Line name Selectable list All lines available at the defined chainage are displayed and can be selected. Easting, Northing and Height Display only The East/North coordinate and height of the line at defined chainage. Hz tangent Display only The tangent direction of the line at defined chainage. Grade Display only The grade of the line at defined chainage. Hz radius Display only The horizontal radius of the line segment at defined chainage. Vertical radius Display only The vertical radius of the line segment at defined chainage. Hz type Display only The horizontal segment type at defined chainage. Vertical type Display only The vertical segment type at defined chainage. Hz offset Display only The horizontal offset to the layer centreline at defined chainage. Vertical offset Display only The vertical offset to the layer centreline at defined chainage. Next step Page to change to the Lines page. View at, Lines page Unavailable for Tunnel. Viva Series, Roads - General 566 Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. Ch- To decrease the chainage by the chainage increment, as defined in the View & Edit Data screen. Ch+ To increase the chainage by the chainage increment, as defined in the View & Edit Data screen. Segmnt To access Segment Info - Start Point. More To change between the height differences or absolute heights at the selected chainage. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Line name The name of the lines available at defined chainage in the selected layer. CL offset The horizontal offset of the line from the layer centreline. Ht diff The height difference of the line to the layer centreline. Height The absolute height of the line. Next step Page to change to the Map page. The Map page shows a cross section, profile and planar view of the design data at the selected chainage. Segmnt to access Segment Info - Start Point/Segment Info - End Point. Segment Info - Start Point/Segment Info End Point, Hz alignment page If a value is unavailable in the design data, the field is shown as -----. Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. Seg- To move to the previous segment. Seg+ To move to the next segment. End Pt or Start To change between the start point and the end point of the segment. Pt Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - General 567 Description of fields Field Option Description Line name Display only The name of the selected line. Chainage Display only The chainage of start/end point of the segment. Easting Northi Display only ng and Height The East/North coordinate and height of the start/end point of the segment. Hz tangent Display only The tangent direction at the start/end point of the segment. Hz radius Display only The radius at the start/end point of the segment. Hz type Display only The current segment type. Next step Page to change to the Vertical alignment page. Segment Info - Start Point/Segment Info End Point, Vertical alignment page Refer to "Segment Info - Start Point/Segment Info - End Point, Hz alignment page" for a description of keys. If a value has not been defined, the field is shown as -----. Description of fields Field Option Description Line name Display only The name of the selected line. Chainage Display only The chainage of start/end point of the segment. Easting, Northing and Height Display only The East/North coordinate and height of the start/end point of the segment. Grade Display only The grade at the start/end point of the segment. Vertical radius Display only The radius at the start/end point of the segment. Vertical type Display only The current segment type. Next step OK returns to the previous screen. Viva Series, Roads - General 568 45.3 Configuring Roads Applications 45.3.1 Configuration Settings Access In the job selection screen press OK and then, depending on the subapplication Config.. or Fn Config... Configuration, Graphics page Key Description OK To confirm the changes and move to the previous screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option The reference direction used to stakeout points. The stakeout elements and the graphics displayed are based on this selection. Navigation direction Viva Series, Roads - General Description To alignment The stake out is relative to the alignment. To north The North direction shown in the graphical display based on the active coordinate system. To sun The position of the sun calculated from the current position, the time and the date. To last point Time-wise, the last recorded point. If no points are yet staked, Navigation direction: To north is used for the first point to be staked. To point (cntrl job) A point from the control job is selected. Following arrow The direction of the orientation is from the current position to the point to be staked. The graphical display shows an arrow pointing in the direction of the point to be staked. From station The reference direction is from the station to the current position. To station The reference direction is from the current position to the station. 569 Field Option Description Point ID Selectable list Available for Navigation direction: To point (cntrl job). To select the point or line to be used for orientation. The method of staking out. Navigate using Direction & distance The direction from the orientation reference, the horizontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed. In/out, left/right The distance forwards to/backwards from the point, the distance right/left to the point and the cut/fill is displayed. Switch to bulls Check box eye when 0.5m from target When this box is checked, a bulls eye bubble is shown in the stakeout graphic when less than half a metre from the point being staked. Beep faster Check box when getting close to point The instrument beeps when the distance from the current position to the point to be staked is equal to or less than defined in Start within. The closer the instrument is to the point to be staked the faster the beeps will be. Distance to use Height, HoriAvailable when Beep faster when getting close to zontal distance or point is checked. The type of distance to use for Position & height the stake beep. Start within Editable field Available when Beep faster when getting close to point is checked. The horizontal radial distance, from the current position to the point to be staked, when a beep is to be heard. Next step Page changes to the Design page. Configuration, Design page Description of fields Field Option Description Working corridor Editable field Valid offset range defined by the working corridor left and right of the centreline. If a measured point is further away from the working corridor distance, an error message is displayed. Refer to "45.6 Understanding Terms and Expressions" for more information on the working corridor. Show tangent Check box points When this box is checked, a message box is shown when a tangent point (PI or PVI) has been detected within the chainage increment range. This tangent point can be selected for stakeout. Refer to "47.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for further details. When this box is not checked, no tangent points are indicated. Type Available when Show tangent points is checked. Horizontal Viva Series, Roads - General Indicates tangent points of the horizontal alignment only. 570 Field Option Description Vertical Indicates tangent points of the vertical alignment only. Horizontal & vertical Indicates all tangent points. Available for Road only. Selects sign definition method for slopes and surface grades. Slope signs Mathematical All slope signs defined from left to right, independent of whether left or right of the centreline. + Road_054c Relative to CL + + Slope signs defined relative to the centreline. + Road_054a + + + Relative from CL Slope signs defined relative from the centreline. + + + Road_054b When using slopes generated by a design package, the quality of the change from cut to fill or where slopes start and end, depends on the terrain model used for the project. Occasionally, one of the lines defining the slope ends before intersecting with the natural surface. A message appears asking to extended the slope, as soon as a measurement is taken outside of the defined design slope. Extend slopes Extend lines Viva Series, Roads - General Yes (with warning) The slope is expanded beyond and above or below the hinge point. A warning is shown as soon as leaving the defined slope. Yes The slope is expanded beyond and above or below the hinge point. No warning is when leaving the defined slope. No The slope is not expanded beyond and above or below the hinge point. Check box Extend each line or curve at its beginning and end with a tangent. The extension is used for projecting a point to the line and for intersecting the line. 571 Field Option Checked Description Intersection points on extended lines/curves are not shown in crosssections and cannot be staked out. a b c Road_094 a) Any type of line or curve b) Extended line c) Projected point on extended line Not checked This option is recommended when working with closed alignments (for example roundabout, slip road, motorway exit). a Road_095 b a) Any type of line or curve b) Projected point on line Project scale for length values Check box When this box is not cheked, no scale factor is applied to length values. Length values are displayed in the grid format. When this box is checked, a defined scale factor is applied to length values. All distance values (chainages, chainage increments, offsets, ∆ chainage, ∆ offset, ∆ height, …) are displayed in ground using the Scale factor. Scale factor Viva Series, Roads - General Editable field The Road job data is still in grid format. All data is saved to the DBX in ground format. Only ground data is written to the log file. To apply an appropriate geodetic map projection to scale over the ground. The scale factor is only applied to Road, not to Rail or Tunnel. 572 Next step Configuration, Rail design page IF you work with THEN Page changes to the Road Quality control page. Rail Rail design page. Tunnel Tunnel design page. Available for Rail only. Description of fields Field Option Description Nominal gauge Editable field Nominal distance between the active (internal) faces of the left and right rails. a b Rail_014 a) Superelevation base b) Nominal gauge Superelevatn base Editable field Distance over which the superelevation is to be applied. This distance normally corresponds to the distance between the rail axes. Superelevation Design To use the superelevation values from the design. If these values don’t exist in the design, then all superelevation values are ignored. Manual To ignore all superelevation values from the design and to enter them manually. None All superelevation values are ignored. Plumbline The target height is applied in plumbline to the measured position. Apply target height c a b Rail12_17 a) Superelevation base b) Nominal gauge c) Measured point (Easting, Northing, Height) Perpendicular Use this setting when working with a rail bar (solar gauge) with a fix mounted prism. Easting, Northing and Elevation of the measured point is calculated using the design cant or, if enabled, the manually defined cant. Viva Series, Roads - General 573 Field Option Description c a d b Rail12_18 a) b) c) d) CL height Calculate chainage directly onto chainage centreline Superelevation base Nominal gauge Measured point (Easting, Northing, Height) Superelevation CL geometry The centreline height is taken from the alignment centreline. Rail interpolated The centreline height is interpolated between the left rail height and right rail height. Lower rail The height of the lower rail is used as centreline height. Check box Chainage calculation method when checking points of multiple tracks with respect to a chainage centreline. The direct measurement method is when the chainage is calculated by projecting the measured point directly onto the chainage centreline. The indirect measurement method is when the chainage is calculated by first projecting the measured point onto the track centreline, and then projecting the point onto the chainage centreline. Checked Project measured point directly onto the chainage centreline. a f c b d Rail_010 a) b) c) d) e) f) Viva Series, Roads - General e Chainage centreline Track centreline Left rail Right rail Measured point Direct chainage 574 Field Option Description Not checked Project measured point onto track centreline and then make a second projection onto the chainage centreline. a f c g b d Rail_011 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Disable chainage centreline Check box e Chainage centreline Track centreline Left rail Right rail Measured point Indirect chainage Measured point projected onto track centreline Only affecting multiple track designs. The defined chainage centreline is disabled and the track centreline is used for chainage calculations. Next step Page changes to the Quality control page. Configuration, Tunnel design page Available for Tunnel only. Description of fields Field Option Defines the direction in which the design profile is considered. The setting has an influence on the profile offset sign. Theoretical profile direction Profile definition Viva Series, Roads - General Description Clockwise The design profile is defined in a clockwise direction. In underbreak areas the profile offset values are negative where as in overbreak areas they are positive. Counter-clockwise The design profile is defined in a counter-clockwise direction. In underbreak areas the profile offset values are positive where as in overbreak areas they are negative. Vertical Profiles are always defined as vertical. Tilted Profiles are always defined perpendicular to the vertical alignment of the tunnel axis. 575 Field Option Description Available for Method to use: Scan profile. When measuring tunnel profiles, it is possible to scan various profiles from one instrument position. Scan area defnd by Chainage Allows a scan area to be defined by entering a back and forward chainage. Distance Allow a scan area to be defined by measuring/entering a back distance and forward distance from the station chainage. Plan view c e b f d a Tunnel_030 a) b) c) d) e) f) Drilling rig orientation Parallel to alignment Alignment Station chainage Start chainage or Start distance End chainage or End distance Before stn every After stn every Guides a jumbo to drill in the direction parallel to the alignment. a b Tunnel_031 a) b) Drill Pattern Alignment Drill direction Guides a jumbo to drill in the user defined direction. This must not be parallel to the alignment. a b Tunnel_032 a) b) Viva Series, Roads - General Alignment Drill direction 576 Next step Page changes to the Quality control page. Configuration, Quality control page Description Especially when checking points in an as-built control or when staking out it is useful to enable the Quality control criteria available. For every point stored the chosen parameters are checked and if the check limits are exceeded a warning is shown. This function guarantees a higher productivity as it is no longer necessary to check the values for every shot taken. When checking layers of a road, a too thick layer results in higher costs as more material is used. Alternatively, a too thin layer can lead to problems and could cause serious damage. Therefore different check limits for above and below the design can be defined. Graphic a) b) c) d) e) a d b c e Road_087 Layer is too thick Design surface Layer is too thin Upper ht limit Lower ht limit Height limits below the design surface are entered as negative values (for example, the Lower ht limit with -10 mm in the previous diagram). By using the signs of the height limits, it is also possible to cover situations like the one shown in the following diagram, with a valid range between -10 to -50 mm below the design surface. a b a) Design surface b) Upper ht limit c) Lower ht limit c Road_088 Description of fields Field Option Description Check deltas to point before storing Check box When this box is checked, a position check is done when storing a staked or checked point. When the defined tolerance is exceeded, the stake out/check can be repeated, skipped or stored. When this box is not checked, no quality check is done during stake out/check of points. Delta values Viva Series, Roads - General Depending on this selection the following lines are enabled/disabled. Ch, offset & height Check for chainage, horizontal offset and height. Ch & offset Check for chainage and horizontal offset. Position & height Check for 2D position and height. Position Check for 2D position. Height Check for height. Profile Available for Tunnel. Check for distance from design profile. 577 Field Option Description Chainage limit From 0.001 to 100 Maximum difference in chainage. Offset limit From 0.001 to 100 Maximum horizontal offset from defined position. Position limit From 0.001 to 100 Maximum radial horizontal distance. Upper ht limit From -100 to +100 Maximum height difference. Lower ht limit From -100 to +100 Maximum height difference. Profile tolerance From 0.001 to 100 Available for Tunnel. Permitted distance from design profile. Next step Page changes to the Info page. Configuration, Info page Two things can be configured on this page: 1) The required information for each stakeout and check method to be displayed on the Info page. Depending on the working method used on the construction site, different information is written on the stakes. The information to be written on the stake is displayed on the Info page. 2) If and which additional user-defined survey screen page is displayed. Key Description OK To confirm the changes and continue. Clear To clear all parameters from all lines. Default To set the default value for all lines. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Show additional page from My Survey Screen Check box The user-defined survey screen page to be shown in the stake or check screen. Viva Series, Roads - General 578 Field Option Description Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages. Method Display only The method is based on the selected subapplication and, if available, the setting for Method to use. The settings in the following lines can only be changed for the current method. The method defines the parameters available to view on the Info page of the application. Different combinations of the parameters to view can be stored 1st line to 16th line Selectable list To modify the selection on any particular line, place the cursor on the line to modify using the arrow keys and press the ENTER key.Use the arrow keys to select the required parameter and press the ENTER key to confirm the choice. Define which parameters are viewed on each line. Up to 16 lines of parameters can be defined. The available parameters depending on the Method selected are explained separately: • For Road Line, refer to "45.3.2 Road Line Info Page". • For Road Local line, refer to "45.3.3 Road Local Line - Info Page". • For Road Surface grade, refer to "45.3.4 Road Surface Grade - Info Page". • For Road Manual slope, Local manual slope and Slope, refer to "45.3.5 Road Manual Slope, Local Manual Slope and Slope - Info Page". • For Road Crown, refer to "45.3.6 Road Crown - Info Page". • For Road Layer, refer to "45.3.7 Road Layer - Info Page". • For Road DTM, refer to "45.3.8 Road DTM Info Page". • For Rail refer to "45.3.9 Rail - Info Page". • For Tunnel refer to "45.3.10 Tunnel - Info Page". Next step Page changes to the TPS page. Page changes to the Report sheet page. Viva Series, Roads - General 579 Configuration, TPS page Description of fields Field Option Description Only update stakeout values when distance is measured Check box When this box is checked, angles and stakeout values are updated after a distance measurement. All values are then frozen until the next distance is taken. When Target aiming: Lock is selected and the instrument is locked onto a target the angular values do not change. When this box is not checked, angles are updated with telescope movement after a distance was measured. Turn to point Check box Available for Road and Rail. To make stake out of points even more efficient, a motorised instrument offers you the possibility to aim automatically at the stakeout position. Available for Road and Rail and when Turn to point is checked. Turn to Position only The instrument positions horizontally in the direction of the point to stake out. Position & height The instrument positions horizontally and vertically to the point to stake out. The instrument only points to the correct position on the ground if the point to stake out has the same height as the natural surface. If the natural surface is higher than the point to stake out, the measured point would be closer than the stakeout point. If the natural surface is lower than the point, the measured point would be further away. With Position & measure, the possibility of iterative positioning using the auto position, this problem can be avoided. b a c Road_071 a) Point to stake out, defined with 3D coordinates b) Position if natural surface is higher than point to stake out c) Position if natural surface is lower than point to stake out Position & measure Allows the instrument to aim at a 2D position. As the natural surface height is unknown the correct position is calculated via iterations. Viva Series, Roads - General Depending on the settings chosen for Red laser pointer the instrument will turn on the red laser as soon as the position is found. 580 Field Option Description The first position (b) the instrument points to is defined by the 2D coordinates (a) of the point to stake out ( = horizontal direction) and the current vertical angle. Therefore, aim the instrument at the approximate position of the point to stake out.The measured 2D position is compared with the stakeout position to determine a new position (c) to aim at. As no information about the natural surface is available, a point at the same height as the measured position is calculated. The new position (d) is measured and compared again with the point to stake out (a).This iteration process runs until the tolerances defined for the stakeout are reached. a f d e b c a d e b c Road_064 a) 2D position to stake out b) First position measured defined by 2D coordinates and current vertical angle c) New position calculated based on height of b d) Second position measured e) New position calculated based on height of d. The measured position for this point is within the defined tolerance, the correct position is found. Prompt before turn The method how the instrument turns is not fixed but is selected when pressing Positn. Additionally to the three methods listed above, an option allowing the instrument to find the height on the peg is available: a c b Road_072 a) Peg placed at the correct position b) First height, manually chosen direction c) Required height on the peg Viva Series, Roads - General 581 Field Option Description For more information refer to "45.3.11 Workflow for Height (aim to stake ht)". Position limit From 0.001 to 10 Maximum permitted radial horizontal distance. Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn to: Position & measure or Turn to: Prompt before turn. Height limit From 0.001 to 10 Maximum height difference. Available for Road and Rail. Chainage limit From 0.001 to 10 Chainage tolerance of the position to stake out. Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn to: Position & measure or Turn to: Prompt before turn. Offset limit From 0.001 to 10 Maximum horizontal offset from defined position. Available for Road and Rail. Defines when the visible red laser beam is turned on during the automatic search of the position. Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn to: Position & measure or Turn to: Prompt before turn. Red laser pointer Always off Visible red laser is turned off. On at point only Visible red laser is turned on as soon as the point is found. Always on Visible red laser is turned on during the whole search. The laser can also be permanently turned on by using the instrument settings. Refer to "12.6 Lights / Lights & accessories" for more information. Max iterations From 2 to 10 Maximum number of iterations for the distance measurement before stopping. Available for Tunnel and for Road/Rail with Turn to: Position & measure or Turn to: Prompt before turn. Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Viva Series, Roads - General 582 Field Option Description Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. 45.3.2 Road Line - Info Page Description This info page is used for staking and checking Road lines. Available fields e b f d c a Road_043 a) b) c) d) e) f) Line to stake out Centreline Line offset Line ht diff CL offset CL ht diff The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Line task Name defined for the line task. ∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined chainage Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. Viva Series, Roads - General If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. 583 Field Description Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Stake chainage Chainage to stake out. Line offset Horizontal offset from the line. Line ht diff Height difference from the defined line. Line name Name of the line to stake out or the stake out is relative to. Additional line The name of an additional line. Additnl line chnge Current local chainage of additional line. Additnl line offset Current perpendicular offset to the additional line including the defined stake/check offset of additional line of the Offsets page. Additnl line ht diff Current height difference to the additional line including the defined stake/check height difference of the additional line of Offsets page. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Element type of the centreline. CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Offset angle The current angle to selected line. Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to "47.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables and in the construction segment. Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. e a d c b Road_089 a) b) c) d) e) Viva Series, Roads - General Vertical chainage Chainage Centreline Centreline height difference Vertical square offset 584 45.3.3 Field Description CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Road Local Line - Info Page Available fields c b d e f a Road_085 g Stake out of roundabout a) Position to stake out b) Line to stake out c) Centreline d) Chainage e) ∆ chainage f) ∆ offset g) ∆ height The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Line task Name defined for the local line task. Additional line The name of an additional line. Additnl line chnge Current local chainage of additional line. Additnl line offset Current perpendicular offset to the additional line including the defined stake/check offset of additional line of the Offsets page. Viva Series, Roads - General 585 Field Description Additnl line ht diff Current height difference to the additional line including the defined stake/check height difference of the additional line of Offsets page. ∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined chainage Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Stake chainage Chainage to stake out. Line offset Horizontal offset from the line. Line ht diff Height difference from the defined line. Line name Name of the line to stake out or the stake out is relative to. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Element type of the centreline. CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Offset angle The current angle to selected line. Nearest hz tngnt pt Distance to the nearest horizontal tangent point of the design. Refer to "47.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables and in the construction segment. Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. Viva Series, Roads - General 586 Field Description e a d c b Road_089 a) b) c) d) e) Working with pipelines Vertical chainage Chainage Centreline Centreline height difference Vertical square offset CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point at the line). Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position (relevant point at the line). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point at the line). Ht end vert align Height at the endpoint of the vertical alignment of the line. ∆ ht end of v align Height difference to the endpoint of the vertical alignment of the line. Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Description When staking/checking pipes, a common task is to use height differences at the start/end of the pipe. The two Info page items for local lines enable the height difference to be added to the end of the vertical alignments ∆ ht end of v align and Ht end vert align. Viva Series, Roads - General 587 45.3.4 Road Surface Grade - Info Page Available fields e d c i f j g a m q b o k l p h n Road_044 a) Surface grade to stake out b) Right line of the surface grade Right name c) Left line of the surface grade Left name d) Centreline e) CL offset f) g) h) i) j) k) CL ht diff Surf. grade offset Surf. grade ht diff Left offset Left ht diff Right offset l) Right ht diff m) Surface grade ratio n) Width o) Square offset p) Camber (in this case negative) q) Square slope dist The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Surface grade task Name defined for the surface grade task. Additional line The name of an additional line. Additnl line chnge Current local chainage of additional line. Additnl line offset Current perpendicular offset to the additional line including the defined stake/check offset of additional line of the Offsets page. Additnl line ht diff Current height difference to the additional line including the defined stake/check height difference of the additional line of Offsets page. ∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined chainage Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Stake chainage Chainage to stake out. Surf. grade offset Horizontal offset from the surface grade. Surf. grade ht diff Height difference to the surface grade. If no stake height difference is used Surf. grade ht diff = ∆ height. Viva Series, Roads - General 588 Field Description Camber The superelevation of the active surface grade. The calculation is always in relation to the defined reference line of the surface grade: Camber = line – reference line Left name Name of the left line defining the surface grade. Left offset Horizontal offset from the left point of the surface grade. Left ht diff Height difference from the left point of the surface grade. Right name Name of the right line defining the surface grade. Right offset Horizontal offset from the right point of the surface grade. Right ht diff Height difference from the right point of the surface grade. Ref line Indicates which side of the surface grade the stake out is relative to. Ref offset Horizontal offset from the line of the surface grade used as reference. Depends on Ref line and is identical to Right offset or Left offset. Ref ht diff Height difference from the line of the surface grade used as reference. Depends on Ref line and is identical to Right ht diff or Left ht diff. Surface grade ratio Slope ratio of the surface grade. Square offset Offset from the surface grade, perpendicular to the surface grade. Square slope dist Slope distance from the slope reference line to the current position perpendicular to the slope. The slope distance is always at the same grade as the defined or current slope. If the current position is above or below the slope, the slope distance is projected square to the slope, and then the slope distance is calculated to the defined reference point. The Square slope dist is measured from the current position to the reference line. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL ht diff Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Element type of the centreline. CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Width Horizontal width of the surface grade. Nearest hz tngnt pt Distance to the nearest horizontal tangent point of the design. Refer to "47.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Viva Series, Roads - General 589 Field Description Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables and in the construction segment. Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. e a d c b Road_089 a) b) c) d) e) Vertical chainage Chainage Centreline Centreline height difference Vertical square offset Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point on the surface grade = Actual easting). Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position relevant point on the surface grade = Actual northing). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point on the surface grade). Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Viva Series, Roads - General 590 45.3.5 Road Manual Slope, Local Manual Slope and Slope - Info Page Available fields g e m b k h p a n l i s f r q d c j o Road_045 a) Slope to stake out/check b) Hinge point Hinge name, reference line c) Second line of slope Additnl line name d) Real catch point e) Centreline f) Natural surface g) CL offset h) CL ht diff i) Slope offset j) Slope height diff k) Hinge offset l) Hinge ht diff m) Slope dist hinge n) Slope ratio o) p) q) r) s) Square offset Current ratio Additnl line offset Additnl line ht diff Square slope dist The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Slope task Name defined for the slope task. ∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Stake chainage Chainage to stake out. Slope offset Horizontal offset from the slope. Slope height diff Height difference from the slope. If no stake height difference is used Slope height diff = ∆ height. Ht diff rail Height difference from the batter rail to mark the slope (for Type: Batter rail vertical in Slope Stakeout Settings). Hinge name Name of the line defining the hinge of the slope. Hinge offset Horizontal offset from the hinge point of the slope. Viva Series, Roads - General 591 Field Description Hinge ht diff Height difference from the hinge point of the slope. Additnl line name Name of the second line defining the slope. Additnl line offset Horizontal offset from the second line of the slope. Additnl line ht diff Height difference from the second line of the slope. Slope ratio Ratio of the slope. Slope dist hinge The display format is defined as system setting in Regional Settings, Slope page. Slope distance to the hinge point. All defined settings for a batter rail or reference point are already taken into account. This value is the information to write on the stake. Slope ratio gon Slope ratio in gon. Slope ratio degree Slope ratio in decimal degrees. Slope ratio % Slope ratio in percent. Current ratio Ratio of the slope from the current position to the hinge. For the catch point the Current ratio is identical to the Slope ratio. Square offset Offset from the slope, perpendicular to the slope. Square slope dist Slope distance from the slope reference line to the current position perpendicular to the slope. The slope distance is always at the same grade as the defined or current slope. If the current position is above or below the slope, the slope distance is projected square to the slope, and then the slope distance is calculated to the defined reference point. For slope, the Square slope dist is measured from the current position to the reference line. For manual slope and local manual slope, Square slope dist is measured from the current position to the hinge line. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Element type of the centreline. CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Offset angle Available for manual slope. The defined value for the angle to alignment. Traveller height Height of the traveller in use. Refer to "47.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings" for information on the different methods of slope staking. Nearest hz tngnt pt Distance to the nearest horizontal tangent point of the design. Refer to "47.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Viva Series, Roads - General 592 Field Description Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables and in the construction segment. Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. e a d c b Road_089 a) b) c) d) e) Vertical chainage Chainage Centreline Centreline height difference Vertical square offset CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point on the slope = Act Easting). Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position relevant point on the slope = Act Northing). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point on the slope). Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Viva Series, Roads - General 593 45.3.6 Road Crown - Info Page Available fields v c d m j g e n k o r i l q f u b p h a t s Road_056 a) Left surface grade of road crown b) Right surface grade of road crown c) Centreline d) CL offset e) CL ht diff f) Left most line of the crown Left name g) Middle line of the crown Mid name h) Right most line of the crown Right name i) L surf. grade ∆ ht j) R surf. grade ∆ ht k) Left offset l) Left ht diff m) Mid offset n) Mid ht diff o) p) q) r) s) t) Right offset Right ht diff L surf. grade ratio R surf. grade ratio Left width Right width The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Crown task Name defined for the road crown task. Additional line The name of an additional line. Additnl line chnge Current local chainage of additional line. Additnl line offset Current perpendicular offset to the additional line including the defined stake/check offset of additional line of the Offsets page. Additnl line ht diff Current height difference to the additional line including the defined stake/check height difference of the additional line of Offsets page. ∆ offset Horizontal offset to the line of the crown defined as the reference line. If working in the toggle offset left/right mode, the correct line is automatically selected as the reference depending on whether the measured point is to the left or right of the middle line. Refer to "47.3.8 Measuring Road Crowns" for more information on the toggle offset left/right mode. ∆ ht left Vertical offset to the left/right surface grade defining the road crown. ∆ ht right Vertical offset to the left/right surface grade defining the road crown. Viva Series, Roads - General 594 Field Description ∆ chainage Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Stake chainage Chainage to stake out. L surf. grade ∆ ht Height difference from the road crowns left surface grade. R surf. grade ∆ ht Height difference from the road crowns right surface grade. Ht diff crown Height difference from Active surf. grade of the crown. Active surf. grade Indicates if you are on the left or right surface grade of the road crown. Actv surf. grade ratio Slope ratio of Active surf. grade. This value is equal to L surf. grade ratio or R surf. grade ratio depending on the value of Active surf. grade. Left name Name of the left most line defining the road crown. Left offset Horizontal offset from the left line of the road crown. Left ht diff Height difference from the left line of the road crown. Right name Name of the left most line defining the road crown. Right offset Horizontal offset from the right line of the road crown. Right ht diff Height difference from the right line of the road crown. Mid name Name of the mid line defining the road crown. Mid offset Horizontal offset from the mid line of the road crown. Mid ht diff Height difference from the mid line of the road crown. L surf. grade ratio Slope ratio of the road crowns left surface grade. R surf. grade ratio Slope ratio of the road crowns right surface grade. Left width Horizontal width of the road crowns left surface grade. Right width Horizontal width of the road crowns right surface grade. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Curve type of the centreline. CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Nearest hz tngnt pt Distance to the nearest horizontal tangent point of the design. Refer to "47.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Viva Series, Roads - General 595 45.3.7 Field Description Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point on the crown = Actual easting). Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position relevant point on the crown = Actual northing). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point on the crown). Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Road Layer - Info Page Available fields b c n e k i h f l o g d a m j Road_047 a) Relevant part of the layer b) Centreline c) CL offset d) CL ht diff e) Slope offset f) Layer ht diff g) h) i) j) k) l) Right name Right offset Right ht diff Left name Left offset Left ht diff m) Width n) Slope ratio or Surface grade ratio o) Square offset The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Layer task Name defined for the layer task. Layer name Name of the layer to check. Viva Series, Roads - General 596 Field Description Chainage Chainage of the current measured position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Stake chainage Chainage to stake out. Layer offset Horizontal offset from the layer. Surface between Left line and Right line. Layer ht diff Height difference of the measured position to the layer ∆ height Height difference to the layer, including the stake or check height difference. Left name Name of the line next to the current position on the left side. Left offset Horizontal offset from the left line Left name. Layer ht diff Height difference to the left line Left name. Right name Name of the line next to the current position on the right side. Right offset Horizontal offset from the right line Right name. Right ht diff Height difference to the right line Right name. Slope ratio Ratio of the slope between the left line Left name and the right line Right name. Surface grade ratio The display format is defined as system setting in Regional Settings, Slope page. Ratio of the surface grade between the left line Left name and the right line Right name. The display format of the Surface grade ratio depends on the type chosen for Surface grade on Regional Settings, Slope page. Square offset Offset from the slope, perpendicular to the slope. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Curve type of the centreline. CL offset Horizontal offset from the centreline at the current chainage. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Traveller height The height of the traveller. Nearest hz tngnt pt Distance to the nearest horizontal tangent point of the design. Refer to "47.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. Viva Series, Roads - General 597 Field Description Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables and in the construction segment. Vertical chainage Chainage of the measured point is projected perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. e a d c b Road_089 a) b) c) d) e) Vertical chainage Chainage Centreline Centreline height difference Vertical square offset CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point on the crown = Actual easting). Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position relevant point on the crown = Actual northing). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point on the crown). Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Viva Series, Roads - General 598 45.3.8 Road DTM - Info Page An Info page for Road DTM is only available for Roads - As built check. Available fields e a b g d f c Road_046 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Relevant triangle of the DTM Projected point on DTM Easting Northing DTM height diff Flow direction Flow ratio The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description DTM task Name defined for the DTM task. DTM height diff Vertical height difference to the DTM. ∆ height Height difference to the layer including the stake or check height difference. DTM height Height of the DTM at the current measured position. Flow direction Direction of maximum slope ratio on the current DTM triangle. This direction is the direction water would flow toward from the projected point. Flow ratio Slope ratio of the DTM. This ratio is the maximum slope ratio of the triangle. DTM name Name of the DTM surface. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Actual height Height of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the DTM for the current position (= Actual easting). Current dsgn north Northing of the DTM for the current position (= Actual northing). Current dsgn ht Height of the DTM for the current position. Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Viva Series, Roads - General 599 45.3.9 Rail - Info Page Available fields The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description ∆ offset Distance from the measured point to the point to set out in a direction perpendicular to the horizontal alignment. ∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the horizontal alignment at the chainage of the measured point. CL type Element type of the centreline. CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Nearest hz tngnt pt Refer to "47.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Actual easting Easting of the current position. Actual northing Northing of the current position. Current dsgn east Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Current dsgn north Northing of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Current dsgn ht Height of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Viva Series, Roads - General 600 Field Description Ht diff lower rail Height difference between the measured point and the lower rail. Ht lower rail Height of the lower rail at current chainage. Current design cant Design cant at the current position. Ref offset Horizontal distance between the measured point and the rail or centreline being used as a reference. Ref ht diff Height difference between the measured point and the rail or centreline being used as a reference. Offset (using cant) Offset calculated regarding the cant. Ht diff (using cant) Height difference calculated regarding the cant. Rail task Name of the current task. Rail name Name of the centreline or rail being used as a reference. Defined desgn cant Design cant at the defined chainage. Pendular length The pendulum length as distance value: The difference in elevation of the pendulum centre on the original track and above the axis point. Def pendulum displacement The defined horizontal displacement for the track. Def pendulum angle The pendulum angle is defined by the pendulum displacement and the superelevation (cant). Actl pendulum displacement The current horizontal displacement for the track. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. Current cant Available for Check. Superelevation of the current position. This value is calculated by using the ’Second Point of Cant’ option, which is located in the Tools menu. Measured cant Displays the value entered on Check Track, General page. The value is usually measured with a camber measurement instrument. Cant difference Using Second Point of Cant of the Tools menu, Measured cant on the Info page is set to ----- and is not stored in the DBX. This means, that the cant value of Second Point of Cant (current cant) is used and not the manually entered measured cant value. The calculation depends on the setting for Superelevation in Configuration, Rail design page: • For Superelevation: Design: Cant difference = Measured cant - Current design cant • For Superelevation: Manual: Cant difference = Measured cant - Manually defined cant of Check Track, General page • For Superelevation: None: Cant difference = ----- Viva Series, Roads - General 601 45.3.10 Tunnel - Info Page Available fields The following parameters are available. All fields are display only. Field Description Line task Name of the current task. ∆ offset Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ height Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. ∆ chainage Difference between the defined chainage Stake chainage on the General page and the current chainage Chainage shown on the Stake page. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field reads ∆ chainage: -----. Chainage The current chainage. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. Line offset Horizontal offset from the line. Line ht diff Height difference from the defined line. Line name Name of the line to stake out or the stake out is relative to. CL ht diff Height difference from the centreline. Vertical sqr offset Offset perpendicular to the vertical component of the selected line. This value can be useful when dealing with pipelines, cables and in the construction segment. CL height Height of the centreline at the current chainage. CL radius Radius of the centreline at the current chainage. CL type Element type of the centreline. CL offset Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. This field is independent of the chosen settings for Navigation direction and Navigate using in Configuration, Graphics page. CL tangent Tangent direction of the centreline at the current chainage. Nearest hz tngnt pt Distance to the nearest horizontal tangent point of the design. Refer to "The Stake/Check Screen" for details on this field. Nearst vt tngnt pt Distance to the nearest vertical tangent point of the design. CL grade Grade of the centreline at the current position. Direction to point Direction from the current position to the point to stake out. Distance to point Distance from the current position to the point to stake out. Defined easting Easting of the point to stake out. Defined northing Northing of the point to stake out. Defined height Height of the point to stake out. Viva Series, Roads - General 602 Field Description Actual easting Easting of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Actual northing Northing of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Actual height Height of the design for the current position (relevant point at the selected line). Quality 3D Standard deviation of the point measurement. Line space half and Line space full Empty line. ∆Prof Distance from the design profile to the measured point. Profile element no. Element number of the closest design profile element to the measured point. Profile element(%) Distance in percentage terms of the measured point along the design profile element. Dist along profile Distance of the measured point along the design profile starting at the origin of the profile. Top distance Distance of the measured point along the design profile starting at the top of the profile. CL Off Rotated Perpendicular horizontal offset from the current position to the centreline, along the X-axis of the rotated tunnel profile CL Ht Diff Rotated Height difference from the current position to the centreline along the Y-axis of the rotated tunnel profile. 45.3.11 Workflow for Height (aim to stake ht) Step-by-step In this example, the height of the surface grade is marked on a peg by using the auto position function. a c b Road_072 a) Peg placed at the correct position b) First height, manually chosen direction c) Required height on the peg Step Description 1. In the Configuration, TPS page, select Turn to: Prompt before turn. 2. Make sure that the instrument uses the reflectorless EDM mode. After staking out the peg at the correct position with Stake Surface Grade, aim the instrument at the peg. 3. Press Fn Positn to open the Configuration screen. 4. Configuration Highlight Height (aim to stake ht). 5. Viva Series, Roads - General Press OK. The instrument searches for the point on the peg at the required height without changing the horizontal direction. As soon as the defined Upper ht limit/Lower ht limit from Configuration, Quality control is reached, the instrument stops. 603 Step Description Depending on the settings chosen, the instrument turns on the red laser to mark the height. 45.4 Working with Shifts Description When working on site, often design data does not match the measured data. For example, an existing road surface that should intersect with the design surface may be 15 cm higher than the plans indicate. To guarantee a smooth intersection, this difference has to be distributed over the remaining 100m of paving. To handle these situations, shifts can be added to the existing design data. A shift is applied when selecting the element to stake out/check. Horizontal and vertical shifts can be applied to the selected element. By using these shifts the design can be lifted/lowered and moved horizontally. A shift is always an overlay of the existing design and is stored with the task. For a horizontal alignment, the shift is applied perpendicular to the centreline. For the vertical part of the alignment, shifts are applied following the plumb line. Shifts are applied temporarily to the design data. The original design data is not modified when a shift is applied. Access Press Shifts.. in the Define screen. Shift Settings, Horizontal shift/Vertical shift/Scale profile/Apply an expand or shrink value to scale the tunnel profile page The parameters required for applying the shift are identical for all entities. Description of fields Field Option Description Apply horizontal shift/Apply vertical shift Check box When this box is checked, shifts can be defined. Horizontal shifts are always rectangular to the centreline of the element being worked with. Whereas vertical shifts are defined along the plumb line. a b Road_013 a) Horizontal alignment with constant shift b) Vertical alignment with constant shift Shift type a b c Road_014 a) Constant shift b) Linear shift c) Parabolic shift and reverse curve Viva Series, Roads - General 604 Field Option Description Linear The difference between the shift at the begin chainage and the shift defined at the end chainage is distributed in a linear fashion. Constant A constant shift is applied from the begin chainage of the shift to the end chainage of the shift. The shift stays the same from its start chainage or station to the end chainage or station. Parabolic Available for Road and Rail. The difference between the shift at the begin chainage and the shift defined at the end chainage is distributed using a cubic parabola. Parabolic shifts allow a smooth transition between the existing curve and the shifted part. Reverse curve Available for Road and Rail. Two arcs with the same radius are used to distribute the shift. As for parabolic shifts, reverse curves guarantee a smooth transition between the existing curve and the shifted part. b g c g d e Road_077 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) i h f a Chainage Shift Start shift at chainage (e) End shift at chainage (f) Start chainage of the shift End chainage of the shift Radius of the two arcs used as transition curve Random chainage between (e) and (f) Shift applied at chainage (h) Begin chainage Editable field Chainage from which the shift is applied. Begin shift Editable field Magnitude of the shift to apply at the begin chainage. Shift value Editable field Available for Shift type: Constant. The magnitude of shift. End chainage Editable field End shift Viva Series, Roads - General Editable field Chainage at which the shift ends. Magnitude of the shift to apply at the end chainage. 605 Field Option Description Available for Road and Rail. Defines the object outside of the defined shift range. Before / after a b c Road_057 a) None b) Step c) Parallel None The object only exists within the defined shift range. Parallel The begin shift and the end shift are continued parallel. The start shift is used from the start of the alignment until the start chainage. The end shift is used from the end chainage until the end of the alignment. Step Before/after the defined shift range, no shift is added. Outside of the defined shift area the original design is used. This option means a "step" will appear at the start and/or end of the shifted area. Plot page with shifts The application offers for all stakeout and check methods a page showing a graphical representation of the measured position in relation to the design. If shifts are applied to the design the plot shows the original unshifted cross section view of the design as well as the shifted element. The current element is shown in blue. Sign convention for shifts The sign convention for design shifts is identical to the convention used for stake offset and height difference. a b e d c Road_053 ++ g f a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Centreline Line on left side Negative horizontal shift Negative vertical shift Line on right side Positive horizontal shift Positive vertical shift Horizontal stake offsets are always defined perpendicular to the centreline of the layer the line/s belongs to. c a d b Road_010 Viva Series, Roads - General a) b) c) d) Line the horizontal shift is applied to User defined horizontal shift for the line Centreline Shifted line 606 Shifts for lines, slopes, layers and DTMs The shifts applied to lines, slopes, road crowns layers and DTMs are identical with one exception: Given that DTMs are not defined relative to a centreline and hold no orientation information, no horizontal shift is possible for a DTM. b a c d e Road_016 Shift for surface grade and road crowns a) b) c) d) e) Slope to shift Centreline Value for horizontal shift Value for vertical shift Shifted slope Description To allow widening and narrowing of surface grade and road crowns, only one of the two lines defining the surface grade or crown, is shifted when adding a horizontal shift. This behaviour is useful for small changes to the original design, for example to bus stops or emergency bays. a b c a) Centreline b) Original line of the design c) Line with horizontal parabolic shift Road_017 Horizontal shift For surface grades and crowns, the horizontal shift is added to the line that is defined as the reference line. To maintain the original surface grade/crown ratio the line is shifted along the surface grade/crown. c a b Road_018 d + e a) b) c) d) e) Surface grade to shift Reference line of the surface grade Second line of the surface grade Positive horizontal shift Position of the shifted reference line Vertical shift The vertical component of the shift for a surface grade or crown is applied to all lines. c a d e Road_019 Viva Series, Roads - General b a) b) c) d) e) Surface grade to shift Right line of the surface grade Left line of the surface grade Negative vertical shift Shifted surface grade 607 Horizontal alignment with constant horizontal shift Horizontal shifts are always perpendicular to the centreline. b c d a Rail_013 Plan view a) Reference line b) Point to stake c) Stake height difference d) Stake offset 45.5 Tasks Description When staking out or checking a road/rail/tunnel, often it is not possible to finish a particular task in one go. The element to be staked out or checked can be stored together with all defined settings as a work task. Stored in a task are: • Selected layer • Working chainage • Selected line(s) or element • Shifts Tasks are stored within the selected Road/Rail/Tunnel job. They can be created at any time when working in the field or during preparation in the office. Deleting a task does not delete the referenced jobs. Deleting a Road/Rail/Tunnel job deletes all referencing tasks. Tasks are method-specific. Creating a task Loading a task Step Description 1. Start the Roads/Rail/Tunnel application. 2. In the job selection screen, select the required jobs and press OK. 3. Select a method, if required, and press OK. 4. In the Define screen press Save... 5. Type in a name for the task and press OK. Access Press Load.. in the Define screen. Load a Defined Task Viva Series, Roads - General 608 Key Description OK To select the highlighted task and continue. Delete To delete the selected task. More To display information about Date, Time, Creator and Description. Fn Name or Time To sort task list by name or time. Fn Quit To exit the application. 45.6 Understanding Terms and Expressions 45.6.1 Road - Basic Terms Terms and expressions a b j k i e f c g Road_001 e h g c d i h a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) Cut situation Fill situation Centreline Natural surface Hinge point Catch point Carriage way Shoulder Slope Top Toe Term / expression Description Carriage way The part of the road on which users drive once the road is finished. Shoulder or Verge Often located next to the carriage way, usually with a slightly higher slope ratio than the carriage way. Slope Located next to the verge and can be thought of as linking the road level with the natural surface. The ratio of the slope is greater than the ratio of the verge. A slope starts at the hinge point. Natural surface or orig- The undisturbed surface before project construction. inal ground Finished road level Describes the final road surface. Catch point or daylight Indicates the point of intersection between the slope and point the natural surface. Both the hinge point and the catch point lie on the slope. For a cut slope, the catch point forms part of the top of a bank. For a fill slope, the catch point forms part of the bottom of a bank. Chainage or station Viva Series, Roads - General The cumulative distance along the centreline, frequently but not always starting at zero. 609 45.6.2 Road - Horizontal and Vertical Geometry Elements Horizontal alignment The application supports the following elements in the horizontal component of alignments: • Straights • Arcs • Clothoids, entry and exit as well as partial • Cubic parabolas, entry and exit as well as partial • Bloss curves, entry and exit as well as partial; only available for Rail • Multipoints, all elements that cannot be described by one of the previous types are represented by discrete points along the curve. For example, a line parallel to a clothoid. Vertical alignment The application supports the following elements in the vertical component of alignments: • Straights • Arcs • Quadratic parabolas • Asymmetric quadratic parabola • Multipoints, all elements that cannot be described by one of the previous types are represented by discrete points along the curve. 45.6.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements Description In general, there are four different basic stakeout and check elements: • Surface grades, for example, the final carriage way • Lines, for example, a centreline • Slopes, for example, the end-slopes of a cross section • Surfaces, for example, a DTM surface a a b a a b c b b a) Lines b) Surface grades c) Slopes c Road_002 Every stakeout or check is based on one or more of these four base elements. For example, a road crown consists of two surface grades with one common line. Lines The stake out of a line is used in different situations: • Centre line of a road • Edges of a road or any other change in slope • Gutters • Pipelines, cables and any other line-related design feature a c Road_003 Viva Series, Roads - General b a) Line to stake out or check, in this case the centreline b) Line offset c) Line height difference 610 Surface grades Surface grades are defined by two lines. The two lines define the right and left edge of the surface grade. One of the two lines is used as the reference line. c a a) b) c) d) e) b d e Road_004 Slopes Slopes, like surface grades, are defined by two lines. Different to surface grades, only one edge of the slope, the hinge point, is known. The second edge, catch point or daylight point, is defined by the intersection of the slope and the natural surface. As the natural surface is unknown this edge can only be staked out in the field. Finding and staking out the catch point is the most important task when working with slopes. a c b f g d e Road_005 Surfaces Surface grade to stake out or check Reference line Horizontal offset to reference line Height difference to reference line Height difference to expanded surface grade h a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Centreline Slope Hinge Point Second line defining the slope Catch point Natural surface ∆ Offset from the slope Height difference from the slope There are two types of surfaces supported that represent a three-dimensional design: • DTM / TIN (Digital Terrain Model; Triangular Irregular Network) • Layer A DTM consists of several 3D triangles. DTMs do not include information relating the DTM to a centreline. Positions are defined by easting, nothing and height values. c a b Road_006 a) Height difference from the triangle of the DTM found in the same vertical line as the measured point b) Easting of coordinate system c) Northing of the coordinate system A layer is a combination of lines that form a 3D surface relative to a centreline. Thus it is possible to define points by chainage or station, offset and height. Refer to "45.2.3 Design Data" for more information. a b c Road_007 Viva Series, Roads - General a) Chainage or station b) Layer Offset c) Layer height difference 611 45.6.4 Road - Stake Offset and Stake Height Difference Description When conducting a stake out, the aim is usually to mark the position of geometric elements defined by the design. For example, in the graphic below, the catch point of a slope. A point can be staked either directly or indirectly. For a directly staked point, the peg ends up at exactly the position of the point to be staked. Staking the same point indirectly, the peg will be placed with a certain offset to the point. a c d Road_009 b One reason to stake out a point indirectly is that the peg would not last long at the position of the actual point. In this example, the peg staked directly would be removed as soon as the excavation work starts. Horizontal stake offsets are, like shifts, defined perpendicular to the centreline of the layer the line(s) belongs to, if no offset angle on Offsets page has been defined. For surface grades and road crowns, the stake offset is applied following the same rules as stated for horizontal shifts. Refer to "45.4 Working with Shifts" for more information. Stake offset For each stakeout method, a horizontal and/or vertical offset can be defined. The stake offset and stake height difference are defined on the Offsets page of the stake screen. Sign convention for stake offset and height difference The sign convention for stake offsets and height differences is identical to the convention used for design shifts. a b d c Road_011 Plot page with stake offset and stake height difference a) b) c) e + + g d) e) f f) g) Centreline Line on left side Negative stake offset Negative stake height difference Line on right side Positive stake offset Positive stake height difference The application offers for all stake out methods a page showing a graphical representation of the measured position in relation to the design. If stake offset and/or stake height difference are used, the plot shows the original cross section view of the design as well as the position to stake out. The position to stake out is marked by a yellow/black peg. Viva Series, Roads - General 612 45.6.5 Road - Chainage or Station Equations Description Chainage or station equations are used to adjust the alignment chainage or station. The most common reason for doing so is the insertion or removal of curves during the design process. Inserting or removing a curve would require recalculating the chainage or station of an entire alignment. Using chainage or station equations eliminates this need. Chainage or station equations can create either a gap or an overlap as shown in the following diagrams. 12 11 13 14 15 10 10 9 9 8 7 a 8 b 6 7 Gap chainage or station equation. Chainage or station back 10 = 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 chainage or station ahead 15. a) Old 15 1 b) New 5 4 6 5 3 2 1 Road_062 10 9 11 8 12 13 7 6 5 6 4 a 5 4 2 Overlap chainage or station equation. Chainage or station 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 back 13 = chainage or station ahead 7. a) New b) Old b 3 3 7 2 Road_063 Multiple chainage or station In the case of the overlap shown in the example, the chainages or stations between seven and thirteen appear twice. When a duplicate chainage or station is entered, a message asks which one is to be used. Example As more than one chainage or station equation is possible, a chainage or station can appear more than twice on a design. In this example, the chainages or stations 11 to 13 appear three times. 0.. ..5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Road_069 11 12 13 14 15 16.. ..24 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Overlap chainage or station equation. Chainage back 13 = chainage ahead 7 and chainage back 15 = chainage ahead 11. In this example, when chainage or station 12 is entered in Road - Multiple Chainage, the following screen shows how the option to select the right chainage or station is displayed: Viva Series, Roads - General 613 Key Description OK To select the highlighted chainage or station equation and return to the stake out screen. More To switch the value displayed in the last column to show the end chainage or station of the chainage or station equation. Description of columns Column Description End Shows the end chainage or station for the chainage or station equation. In this example, the field shows 13.000 for Nr. 1, 15.000 for Nr. 2 and 24.000 for Nr. 3. End shows to which chainage or station, the current chainage or station equation is valid. As for the first part of the alignment, no chainage or station equation exists, Ahead stays empty for the first row. Viva Series, Roads - General 614 45.6.6 Road - Working Corridor Description A working corridor defines the valid offset range left and right of the centreline. When working with irregular alignments such as traffic islands and parking lots, working corridors are useful to avoid displaying results from the wrong centreline element. The following example shows the result if working without a defined working corridor. For the measured position (b), the application finds the centreline point (c) with the minimum perpendicular offset (f). With a defined working corridor (e), the application would display a message advising that the measured position is outside of the defined centreline. d d c e f a e b Road_081 a) b) c) d) e) f) Centreline Measured position Projected point on the centreline Defined offset range for the working corridor Working corridor Offset from the centreline, if no working corridor is used The working corridor is defined in Configuration, Design page. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications" for more information. 45.6.7 Road - Extension of the Centreline Description Whenever centrelines must be extended, for example, at the start and end area of an alignment or slope. The projection of the measured position to the centreline is made using the tangent of the start/end point of the centreline. In this case a warning appears informing that the original design is exceeded. The application will advise as soon as a measured position is within the design area once again. Concept When expanding the centreline the geometry will be continued using the tangent of the start/end point of the centreline. a Road_090 Method b a) Centreline b) Extended centreline Description When staking out in the region of the start/end area of the design centreline, situations occur where an expansion of the centreline is useful. As soon as measurements are outside the defined centreline, the application will prompt if, and with which method, the centreline should be expanded. Viva Series, Roads - General 615 The extension of a centreline is made following its start/end tangent. Outside of the original design area correct results cannot be guaranteed. 45.6.8 Road/Rail - Working with Heights Description Normally, heights stored with the design data are used. The Rail application offers the possibility to switch to either: • a height which is entered manually by the user, This option enables the manual definition of a height, which can be applied for staking out or checking. This height is entered in the General page. • a height which is retrieved from an existing Height Layer, as defined in the DTM job associated with the project. The layer from the DTM is applied and used as a height reference for the staking out or checking of alignments. 2D and 3D are possible. This option is configured in the Tools menu. Understanding priorities of various heights Type of height Overrules Stake Height Diff Manually entered All other heights Considered Of individual point All other heights Considered From height layer of DTM Design height Considered From design No other heights Considered 45.6.9 Rail - Working with a Single Track Terms and expressions Term / expression Description Track A track comprises two separate rails. Single track A single track is defined as one track with one centreline and two rails. All chainages are calculated from the centreline. Track centreline Geometric alignment in two or three dimensions to which all design elements of the project are referenced. It could be that the vertical component of the alignment does not coincide with the plan component. In this case the vertical part of the alignment will generally coincide with the lowest rail. Chainage or station The cumulative distance along the centreline, frequently but not always starting at zero. Left/right rail Planimetric position of the left/right rail of a track. The sense of the left/right rail is given by the direction of increasing chainage. When a section of the track is viewed in the direction of increasing chainage, the left rail is to the left of the centre of the track. Nominal gauge The nominal distance between the active (internal) faces of the left and right rails. Superelevation base The distance over which the superelevation is applied. This distance is normally the distance between the centre of the left and right rail. Left/right superelevation Left/right cant The superelevation or height difference of each rail with respect to the track centreline. Usually expressed in millimetres. Viva Series, Roads - General 616 Term / expression Description If one of the rails is used to rotate the track section, or the height of the vertical alignment coincides with the lowest rail, the superelevation of the rotation point or lowest rail will be zero. Superelevation is also known by the term cant. These two words can be interchanged. Diagram - Plan b a a) b) c) d) d Rail_001 Diagram - Section Track centreline Left rail Right rail Nominal gauge Two generic methods can be used to define the section of the track. Method 1 - A definition using rotation around a known point This method involves rotating the section around a known point, normally the lowest rail. e a) b) c) d) e) f) d c b Rail_002 a Left rail Right rail Rotation point Nominal gauge Superelevation base Superelevation (cant) Method 2 - A definition using relative height distances This method uses height differences relative to the vertical alignment to define the height of the left and right rail. e a f g d c Rail_003 Viva Series, Roads - General b a) b) c) d) e) f) Track centreline Left rail Right rail Nominal gauge Superelevation base Left superelevation (left cant) g) Right superelevation (right cant) 617 45.6.10 Rail - Working with Multiple Tracks Description Multiple tracks are used when more than one track share a common centreline, from which all chainages are calculated. When there are multiple tracks with independent centrelines for each track, each track is then considered as a single track. Refer to "45.6.9 Rail - Working with a Single Track" for details on single tracks. Diagram - Plan c b d a f e Rail_004 a) g b) c) d) e) f) g) Chainage centreline Left track centre ine Left track left rail Left track right rail Right track centreline Right track left rail Right track right rail Diagram - Section b g f j e d i a Rail_005 a) b) c) d) e) f) Calculations k c Chainage centreline Left track centreline Left track left rail Left track right rail Left track left rail superelevation Left track right rail superelevation h g) h) i) j) k) Right Right Right Right Right track track track track track centreline left rail right rail left rail superelevation right rail superelevation For multiple tracks, the chainage centreline is used only to calculate the chainage. The superelevation of each track is calculated with respect to the corresponding (left / right) vertical alignment. The chainage centreline can consist of a plan and a vertical component. Although the vertical component of the chainage centreline is not used for any calculation. Viva Series, Roads - General 618 45.6.11 Rail - Check Elements and Stakeout Elements Description Points can be staked with respect to three basic elements of the track: • Track centreline • Left rail • Right rail Centreline stakeout Description The line to stake out can be a track centreline or, in the case of multiple tracks, the left or right track centreline. In both cases, a horizontal offset with respect to the centreline can be applied. Additionally, if a vertical alignment is available for a track centreline, a vertical offset can be applied. Diagram - Single track elements d f a e a) b) c) d) e) Track centreline Left rail Right rail Point to stake Horizontal offset from track centreline f) Vertical offset from track centreline a c Rail_006 Left/right rail stakeout b Description The left or right rail of a track can be staked out: • directly, • horizontal and/or vertical offsets can be used to stake any point relative to either rail. Diagram - Staking out a point relative to the right rail d f a e c Rail_007 Viva Series, Roads - General b a) b) c) d) e) Track centreline Left rail Right rail Point to stake Horizontal offset from right rail f) Vertical offset from right rail The position from which the horizontal and rail offsets will be applied depends on how the left and right rails were defined in the imported design data. Using standard practice, the horizontal offset would be defined from the active face of the rail, and the height offset would be defined from the highest part of the rail, as shown in the diagram. 619 45.6.12 Rail - Working with Offsets Sign convention for offsets The sign convention for offsets is: + d a + e c a) b) c) d) e) b - Rail_008 Centreline Positive horizontal offset Positive vertical offset Negative horizontal offset Negative vertical offset 45.6.13 Tunnel - Basic Terms Terms and expressions Term / expression Description Centreline Geometric alignment in two or three dimensions to which all design elements of the project are referenced. Chainage or station The cumulative distance along the centreline, frequently but not always starting at zero. Design Profile Geometric description of the designed shape of the crosssection of the tunnel. The design profile can contain straight or curve elements. Excavated Profile Shape of the cross-section of the tunnel that has been excavated. Underbreak When the excavated profile is inside the design profile, the underbreak is the perpendicular distance between the design profile and the excavated profile. Overbreak When the excavated profile is outside of the design profile, the overbreak is the perpendicular distance between the design profile and the excavated profile. Tunnel Portal The open end of a tunnel. Tunnel Face The point where the excavated tunnel meets existing terrain. Superelevation (Rota- Angle of rotation of a design profile. Used to take into tion) account the velocity of a moving vehicle through a curve. Rotation Point The point about which the design profile is rotated. This point may or may not coincide with the centreline. General terms e f g h a d b c Tunnel_001 Viva Series, Roads - General a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Centreline Centreline offset Point on design profile Centreline height offset Design profile Excavated profile Underbreak Overbreak 620 3D View Tunnel_002 a b a) Centreline or axis b) Tunnel portal c) Tunnel face c Superelevation a) b) c) d) e) c a d e b Tunnel_003 Centreline or axis Rotation point Centreline offset Centreline height offset Superelevation (Rotation) 45.6.14 Tunnel - Elements for Stake Out and Check Measurements Tunnel face Staking tunnel faces It is usually required to stake out the tunnel face to indicate the position to excavate when certain tunnelling methods are used. For example, Drill and Blast or excavation using a roadheader. The points to stake on the tunnel face can be defined in various ways: Horizontal and vertical offsets By horizontal and vertical offsets with respect to the centreline: a d Tunnel_004 Viva Series, Roads - General b c a) b) c) d) Centreline Point on tunnel face to stake Centreline offset Centreline height offset 621 Distance along profile By the distance from the start of the design profile and an offset from the design profile. e b d a) b) c) d) e) a c Tunnel_005 Centreline Point on tunnel face to stake Point defining start of design profile Distance from start of design profile Offset perpendicular to design profile Distance along a particular element By the distance along a particular element of the design profile and an offset from the element. b d e c a) b) c) d) Centreline Point on tunnel face to stake Element of design profile to stake Distance from start of design profile element e) Offset perpendicular to design profile a Tunnel_006 Tunnel profiles Staking tunnel profiles Tunnel profiles are normally staked after excavation to indicate the position of tunnel design elements or services such as lighting or ventilation. Basic terms Usually a tunnel under construction is designed and built in various stages such that a given chainage can have various design profiles. For example shotcrete or final lining. Each design profile is called a layer. b c a Tunnel_007 a) Centreline or axis b) Final lining c) Shotcrete Measuring tunnel profiles Tunnel profiles are normally measured after excavation to compare the excavated profile with the design profile. This check can occur during the excavation phase of the project or for quality control checks of the built tunnel. Viva Series, Roads - General 622 When measuring tunnel profiles, it is possible to scan various profiles from one instrument position. The profiles to scan are defined with respect to a defined chainage. Profiles can be scanned at a given forward and back interval within a given forward and back distance from the defined profile. Measuring tunnel profiles - Plan view d h i e a b c f Tunnel_009 g a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Centreline Instrument position Tunnel face Defined profile to scan Instrument profile Back distance Forward distance Back interval Forward interval Profile view Tunnel profiles can be measured vertically, horizontally or perpendicular to the tunnel centreline. c d e b a) b) c) d) Centreline Tunnel face Horizontal profile Profile perpendicular to centreline e) Vertical profile a Tunnel_010 45.6.15 Tunnel - Shifts Description When working on site, often design data does not match the measured data. For example, an existing road surface that should intersect with the design surface may be 15 cm higher than the plans indicate. To guarantee a smooth intersection, this difference has to be distributed over the remaining 100 m of paving. To handle these situations, the application allows the possibility of adding shifts to the existing design data. A shift is applied when selecting the element to stake out/check. Centreline shifts Shifts do not change the stored design. They are applied temporarily for stake out purposes. Horizontal and vertical shifts Horizontal shifts are always perpendicular to the centreline whereas vertical shifts are applied along the plumb line. a Road_013 Viva Series, Roads - General b a) Horizontal alignment with constant shift (plan view) b) Vertical alignment with constant shift (profile view) 623 Constant and linear shifts are supported For both horizontal and vertical shifts, two different types can be applied: Constant: The shift remains the same from its start chainage or station to the end chainage or station. The shift is linearly interpolated along the chainage or station. Linear: a b a) Constant shift b) Linear shift Tunnel_025 Sign convention The sign convention for design shifts is identical to the conventions used for centreline offset and height shifts difference. d (-) a b (+) e (-) Tunnel_011 Design profile shift c (+) a) b) c) d) e) Centreline Positive horizontal shift Positive vertical shift Negative horizontal shift Negative vertical shift A shift can be applied to the design profile. The shift is applied perpendicularly to the design profile at any point along the design profile. A positive shift will increase the size of the profile, a negative shift will decrease the size of the profile. a (-) b c (+) d (-) e (+) Tunnel_012 Viva Series, Roads - General a) b) c) d) e) Design profile with negative shift Original design profile Design profile with positive shift Negative shift Positive shift 624 46 Roads - Alignment Editor 46.1 Basic Terms Description A • • • road surface can be thought of three different types of design elements: the horizontal alignment the vertical alignment the cross section Basic concepts a bc B’ B’’ B’’’ A’ A’’ A’’’ TS_051 a - Natural surface. b - The vertical alignment. c - The horizontal alignment. A’’/B’’ - Points on horizontal alignment A’/B’ - Points on real surface A’’’/B’’’- Points on vertical alignment Any point A in a project has ENH coordinates in a determined coordinate system. Each point has three different positions: • A’ - Point on real surface • A’’ - Point on horizontal alignment • A’’’- Point on vertical alignment By adding a second point B to the project an alignment is defined. The alignment can be thought in three ways: • Horizontal alignment (A’’-B’’) • Projection of the horizontal alignment onto the real surface (A’-B’) • Vertical alignment (A’’’-B’’’) The angle between the horizontal and the vertical alignment is the grade (). Geometric elements A road design is fitted to a base plan or map using the three basic geometric elements: • Straight • Curve • Spiral Refer to "Appendix J Glossary" for a definition of the terms. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 625 46.2 Starting Alignment Editor 46.2.1 Accessing Alignment Editor Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Alignment Editor. Alignment Editor Startup Key Description OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "46.3 Configuring Alignment Editor". Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step Select an option and press OK. 46.2.2 Creating a New Alignment Access Select Create new alignment in Alignment Editor Startup and press OK. New Alignment Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Fn Config.. To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "46.3 Configuring Alignment Editor". Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 626 Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field The name of the new Alignment editor raw alignment. Description Editable field Optional description of the new raw alignment. Creator Editable field Optional description of the creator of this alignment. Alignment type Selectable list Defines if the alignment is for Roadrunner Road or Rail applications. Device Selectable list The device on which the new Alignment editor raw alignment will be stored. Depending on the inserted memory devices, this field may be a display only field. Next step Press OK to access the Alignment Editor Menu. Refer to "46.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu". 46.2.3 Modifying an Existing Alignment Access Select Edit existing alignment in Alignment Editor Startup and press OK. Select Alignment Description of fields Field Option Description Alignment name Selectable list All existing Alignment editor raw alignments currently stored in the \Data\XML folder with the file extension *.xml. Alignment type Selectable list Defines if the alignment is for Roadrunner Road or Rail applications. Next step Highlight the Alignment name field and press ENTER. Alignments Key Description OK To select the highlighted raw alignment and continue. New.. To create a new raw alignment. Refer to "46.2.2 Creating a New Alignment". Edit.. To edit the name and description of an existing raw alignment. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 627 Key Description Delete To delete an existing raw alignment. More To switch the last column between Date, Time and Size. CF card, SD card or Intrnl To change between viewing jobs stored on another data storage device or internal memory. Fn Backup To restore a raw alignment file with the extension *.xmb currently stored in the \Data\XML folder. Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step Press OK to select the highlighted raw alignment and return to the Select Alignment screen. Press OK to access the Alignment Editor Menu. Refer to "46.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu". 46.2.4 Importing Alignment Data Access 1) Select Import alignment from file in Alignment Editor Startup and press OK. 2) Create a new alignment in the New Alignment screen. Refer to "46.2.2 Creating a New Alignment". 3) Press OK. Import Line Key Description OK To import the selected alignment data to active raw alignment. Fn Config.. To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "46.3 Configuring Alignment Editor". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option The file type of the data source. Data source Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor Description Survey job To import lines or areas from the selected job. Road job To import lines from an existing Road job. Road+ (GSI format) To import GSI alignment data. Rail job To import lines from an existing Rail job. 628 Field Option Description From job Selectable list All jobs are available for selection. Available for Survey job, Road job and Rail job. Coord system Display only The coordinate system currently attached to the selected Survey job, Road job or Rail job. Line Selectable list Line or area element from the selected job. Available for Survey job. Alignment Selectable list Line from the selected Road job. The line must be stored in the \dbx folder of the memory device to be selectable. Available for Road job and Rail job. Alignment (.aln) file Selectable list Horizontal alignment file in GSI format. The GSI alignment file must be stored in the \GSI folder of the memory device to be selectable. Available for Road+ (GSI format). Vertical (.prf) file Selectable list Vertical alignment file in GSI format. The GSI alignment file must be stored in the \GSI folder of the memory device to be selectable. Available for Road+ (GSI format). Next step OK imports the selected alignment data and accesses the Alignment Editor Menu. Refer to "46.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu". 46.2.5 Alignment Editor Menu Access This screen is always accessed after successfully creating, editing or importing an alignment file from the Alignment Editor Startup screen. Alignment Editor Menu Description of options Option Description Edit horizontal alignment Depending on the setting for Use PI instead of element for horizontal alignment definition in Configuration, Advanced page: • To create, edit and delete elements of a horizontal alignment. Refer to "46.4 Edit Horizontal Alignments Using Elements". • To create, edit and delete PIs of a horizontal alignment. Refer to "46.5 Edit Horizontal Alignments Using PIs". Edit vertical alignment Depending on the setting for Use PVI instead of element for vertical alignment definition in Configuration, Advanced page: • To create, edit and delete elements of a vertical alignment. Refer to "46.6 Edit Vertical Alignments Using Elements". • To create, edit and delete PVIs of a vertical alignment. Refer to "46.7 Edit Vertical Alignments Using PIs". Edit cross section templates Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor To create, edit and delete cross section templates. Refer to "46.8 Edit Cross Section Templates". Only available for road jobs. 629 Option Description Edit cross section assignments To create, edit and delete cross section assignments. Refer to "46.9 Edit Cross Section Assignments". Only available for road jobs. Edit chainage equation To create, edit and delete chainage equations. Refer to "46.10 Edit Chainage Equation". Convert to job To convert existing LandXML alignments to a RoadRunner job. Refer to "46.11 Convert to job". To be able to convert alignments to a Roadrunner job, at least a horizontal alignment must exist. 46.3 Configuring Alignment Editor Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Alignment Editor. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Quality control page Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Check horizontal deflection Check box Possibility to do a deflection check for the horizontal alignment. Horiz limit Editable field The deflection tolerance for horizontal alignments. The tolerance value used for determining deflection errors. A deflection error occurs when the beginning curve tangent of an element does not match the ending tangent of the previous element. If the actual error in deflection is greater than this value, the error will be reported. Check vertical Check box deflection Vert limit Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor Editable field Possibility to do a deflection check for the vertical alignment. The deflection tolerance for vertical alignments. 630 Field Option Confirm end Check box coordinates of segment before storing Description If this box is checked, then each time a new alignment element has been entered, a confirmation message displays the end coordinates for confirmation. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Configuration, Advanced page Description of fields Field Option Description Parameter defining the parabola. Vertical parabola definition Parameter p K factor Use PI instead Check box of element for horizontal alignment definition K factor = Parameter p/100. When this box is not checked, elements such as straights, curves and parabolas define the horizontal alignment. When this box is checked, the horizontal alignment is defined by Points of Intersection (tangent/geometrical points). • Horizontal alignments are defined by the coordinates of the PI and the curve radius (for circular curves). • Horizontal transitions are defined by coordinate of PI, the circular curve radius plus tangent length in and tangent length out. Use PVI Check box instead of element for vertical alignment definition When this box is not checked, elements such as straights, curves and parabolas define the vertical alignment. When this box is checked, the vertical alignment is defined by Points of Vertical Intersection (tangent/geometrical points). • Vertical alignments with symmetrical curves are defined by the PVI chainage, the elevation of PVI and the total length of curve, where the tangent length is half the total length of the VC. • Vertical Alignments with non-symmetrical curves are defined by the PVI chainage, the elevation of the PVI and both tangent lengths. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 631 46.4 Edit Horizontal Alignments Using Elements 46.4.1 Overview Description Allows creating, editing and deleting of the following elements: • • • • • • Start Point Straight (Tangent) Curve Clothoid Cubic Parabola Partial Bloss as well as checking the horizontal alignment. Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit horizontal alignment. Press OK. Use PI instead of element for horizontal alignment definition must be unchecked in Configuration, Advanced page. Horizontal Alignment, Elements page Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and return to the Alignment Editor Menu. Add To add a new horizontal element after the highlighted element. Edit.. To edit the highlighted element of the horizontal alignment. Delete To delete the highlighted element of the horizontal alignment. Either all following elements or only the next element can be adjusted. Check To check the horizontal alignment. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 632 46.4.2 Editing the Start Point Access In Horizontal Alignment, highlight the start point and press Edit... Horizontal Start Point Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Get Pt To apply coordinates or heights from an existing point in the working job. Survy.. To go to Survey and measure a point. Fn Config.. To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "46.3 Configuring Alignment Editor". Fn Reset To reset all screen entries. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Easting Editable field Easting of the start point of the horizontal alignment. Northing Editable field Northing of the start point of the horizontal alignment. Start chainage Editable field Start chainage of the horizontal alignment. 46.4.3 Inserting/Editing an Element in a Horizontal Alignment Access In Horizontal Alignment, Elements page, highlight the start point, or an element if one exists, and press Add or Edit... Elements can be added after the start point and either before or after other elements. Add Horizontal Element Creating and editing an alignment element are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of an alignment element is explained and differences are clearly outlined. Description of fields Field Option Description Element type Straight To insert/edit a straight to/in a horizontal alignment. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 633 Field Option Description Curve To insert/edit a curve to/in a horizontal alignment. Spiral To insert/edit a clothoid to/in a horizontal alignment. Cubic parabola To insert/edit a cubic parabola to/in a horizontal alignment. Bloss To insert/edit a bloss curve to/in a horizontal alignment. The options available for the field Method depend on the Element type selected. For Element type: Straight Field Option Description Method Azimuth & length Using the azimuth and the length of the straight. Azi & end chainage Using the azimuth and the end chainage of the straight. End coords Using the end coordinates of the straight. For Element type: Curve Field Option Description Method Radius & length Using the radius of the curve and its length. Radius & delta Using the radius and the delta angle of the curve. Radius & end chain Using the radius of the curve and the end chainage. Radius & end coords Using the radius and the end coordinates of the curve. Center & end coords Using the coordinates of the centre point and the end point of the curve. 3 points Using three points. For Element type: Spiral Field Option Description Method Radius & length Using the radius of the clothoid and its length. Radius & end chain Using the radius of the clothoid and the end chainage. Param & length Using the parameter A and the length of the connecting curve. Param & end chain Using the parameter A and the end chainage of the spiral. Radius & param- Using the parameter A and the radius. eter Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 634 For Element type: Cubic parabola Field Option Description Method Radius & length Using the radius of the cubic parabola and its length. Radius & end chain Using the radius of the cubic parabola and the end chainage. For Element type: Bloss Field Option Description Method Radius & length Using the radius of the connecting curve and its length. Radius & end chain Using the radius of the connecting curve and its end chainage. Rad,lngth,end coord Using the radius, length and end coordinates of the bloss curve. Next step OK to access the next screen. Horizontal Straight/Horizontal Curve/Horizontal Clothoid/Horizontal Cubic Parabola/Horizontal Bloss, Input page Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Inv.. To calculate the distance and angle between two points from the working job. Last.. To select values from the last inverse calculations. Get Pt To apply coordinates or heights from an existing point in the working job. Available when coordinates must be typed in. Survy.. To go to Survey and measure a point. Available when coordinates must be typed in. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access the Alignment Editor configuration. Fn Reset To reset all screen entries. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 635 Description of fields Field Option Start chainage Display only Description The end chainage of the start point / previous element is automatically used and cannot be edited. The other fields and options available depend on the Method and Element type selected in Add Horizontal Element. For Element type: Straight Field Option Description Azimuth Editable field The azimuth displayed is from the previous element. Another value can be entered manually. Available for Method: Azimuth & length or Method: Azi & end chainage. End chainage Editable field Chainage at the end of the element. Available for Method: Azi & end chainage. End easting Editable field Easting for the end chainage. Available for Method: End coords. End northing Editable field Northing for the end chainage. Available for Method: End coords. Length Editable field Length of the straight element. Available for Method: Azimuth & length. For Element type: Curve Field Option Description Start azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This azimuth is used from the previous element. The value can be edited. Available for Method: Radius & length, Method: Radius & delta or Method: Radius & end chain. CP easting Editable field Easting of the centre point of the curve. Available for Method: Center & end coords. CP northing Editable field Northing of the centre point of the curve. Available for Method: Center & end coords. Curve direction Right or Left The direction of the curve when looking in the direction of increasing chainage. Available for Method: Radius & length, Method: Radius & delta, Method: Radius & end chain or Method: Radius & end coords. Radius Editable field Radius of the curve. The signs are set by the system depending on the curve direction defined in Curve direction. Available for Method: Radius & length, Method: Radius & delta, Method: Radius & end chain or Method: Radius & end coords. Delta Editable field The deflection angle. Available for Method: Radius & delta. Length Editable field Length from the start to the end point of the curve. Available for Method: Radius & length. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 636 Field Option End chainage Editable field Description The end chainage of the curve element can be typed in. Available for Method: Radius & end chain. Int easting Editable field Easting of the intermediate point of the 3-pt-arc. Available for Method: 3 points. Int northing Editable field Northing of the intermediate point of the 3-ptarc. Available for Method: 3 points. End easting Editable field Easting for the end chainage. Available for Method: Radius & end coords, Method: Center & end coords and Method: 3 points. End northing Editable field Northing for the end chainage. Available for Method: Radius & end coords, Method: Center & end coords and Method: 3 points. For Element type: Spiral Field Option Description Start azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This azimuth is used from the previous element. The value can be edited. Spiral direction Right or Left The direction of the clothoid looking in the direction of increasing chainage. Spiral in/out Spiral in For transition from tangent to curve. Spiral out For transition from curve to tangent. Radius Editable field Radius of the clothoid. Available for Method: Radius & length, Method: Radius & end chain and Method: Radius & parameter. Parameter A Editable field The parameter A defining the clothoids. Available for Method: Param & end chain, Method: Param & length and Method: Radius & parameter. Length Editable field Length of the clothoid element. Available for Method: Param & length and Method: Radius & length. Start radius Editable field The entry radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the system depending on the spiral direction defined in Spiral direction. Available for Method: Radius & length and Method: Radius & end chain when Use partial spiral is checked. End radius Editable field The exit radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the system depending on the spiral direction defined in Spiral direction. Available for Method: Radius & length and Method: Radius & end chain when Use partial spiral is checked. End chainage Editable field The end chainage of the clothoid can be typed in. Available for Method: Radius & end chain and Method: Param & end chain. Use partial spiral Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor Check box To create partial clothoids. Available for Method: Radius & length and Method: Radius & end chain. 637 For Element type: Cubic parabola Field Option Description Start azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This azimuth is used from the previous element. The value can be edited. Spiral direction Right or Left The direction of the cubic parabola looking in the direction of increasing chainage. Spiral in/out Spiral in For a transition from tangent to curve. Spiral out For a transition from curve to tangent. Radius Editable field Radius of the cubic parabola. Start radius Editable field The entry radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the system depending on the spiral direction defined in Spiral direction. Available when Use partial spiral is checked. End radius Editable field The exit radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the system depending on the spiral direction defined in Spiral direction. Available when Use partial spiral is checked. Length Editable field Length of the cubic parabola element. Available for Method: Radius & length. End chainage Editable field Use partial spiral Check box The end chainage of the cubic parabola element can be typed in. Available for Method: Radius & end chain. To create partial cubic parabolas. For Element type: Bloss Field Option Description Start azimuth Editable field The azimuth of the tangent in the start point. This azimuth is used from the previous element. The value can be edited. Spiral direction Right or Left The direction of the bloss looking in the direction of increasing chainage. Spiral in/out Spiral in For a transition from tangent to curve. Spiral out For a transition from curve to tangent. Radius Editable field Radius of the bloss. Start radius Editable field The entry radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the system depending on the spiral direction defined in Spiral direction. Available for Method: Rad,lngth,end coord. End radius Editable field The exit radius of the spiral. The signs are set by the system depending on the spiral direction defined in Spiral direction. Available for Method: Rad,lngth,end coord. Length Editable field Length of the bloss curve element. Available for Method: Radius & length and Method: Rad,lngth,end coord. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 638 Field Option End chainage Editable field Description The end chainage of the bloss curve element can be typed in. Available for Method: Radius & end chain. End easting Editable field Easting for the end chainage. Available for Method: Rad,lngth,end coord. End northing Editable field Northing for the end chainage. Available for Method: Rad,lngth,end coord. Next step Page changes to the Details page, where all entered and calculated elements are displayed. 46.5 Edit Horizontal Alignments Using PIs 46.5.1 Overview Description Allows creating, editing and deleting PIs by chainage, easting and northing. Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit horizontal alignment. Press OK. Use PI instead of element for horizontal alignment definition must be checked in Configuration, Advanced page. Horizontal Alignment, PI page Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and return to the Alignment Editor Menu. Add To add a new horizontal PI after the highlighted PI. The chainage values must be added in the correct order. Edit.. To edit the highlighted PI of the horizontal alignment. Delete To delete the highlighted PI of the horizontal alignment. Either all following elements or only the next element can be adjusted. More To display information about the length in/out and the parameter in/out in the fourth column. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 639 46.5.2 Inserting/Editing a PI in a Horizontal Alignment Access In Horizontal Alignment, PI page, highlight a PI and press Add or Edit... A PI can also be selected on the Map page. Elements are added after the highlighted PI. Creating and editing an alignment PI are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of an alignment PI is explained and differences are clearly outlined. Add PI Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and return to the Alignment Editor Menu. Get Pt To apply coordinates from an existing point in the working job. Available when Easting or Northing is highlighted. Survy.. To go to Survey and measure a point. Available when Easting or Northing is highlighted. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available when Radius, Length in, Length out, Param in or Param out is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available when Radius, Length in, Length out, Param in or Param out is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "46.3 Configuring Alignment Editor". Fn Reset To reset all screen entries. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Easting and Northing Editable field The coordinates of the PI. Element type at PI None No element is defined at the PI. Curve A curve is defined at the PI. Spiral A spiral is defined at the PI. Spiral-Curve Spiral - curve is defined at the PI. Curve-Spiral Curve - spiral is defined at the PI. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 640 Field Option Description Spiral-Spiral Two spirals are defined at the PI. Spiral-CurveSpiral Spiral - curve - spiral is defined at the PI. The other fields on the screen depend on the Element type at PI selected. For Element type at PI: Curve Field Option Description Radius Editable field Using the radius of the curve. For Element type at PI: Spiral Field Option Description Spiral type Clothoid, Cubic Bloss is available for Rail jobs only. parabola or Bloss Spiral in/out Selectable list The type of spiral. Available for Spiral type: Clothoid. Method Radius & lengths Using the radius of the clothoid and its length. Radius & parame- Using the radius of the clothoid and its parameters ters. Radius Editable field The radius of the clothoid, parabola or bloss. Available unless Use partial spiral is checked. Radius in and Editable field Radius out The radius of the partial spiral for a clothoid or parabola. Available when Use partial spiral is checked. Length in and Editable field Length out The lengths of the clothoid, parabola or bloss. Param in and Param out Editable field Depending on the configuration, the parameters P or factors K of the clothoid. Available for Spiral type: Clothoid with Method: Radius & parameters. Use partial spiral Check box To create a partial clothoid. Available for Spiral type: Clothoid and Spiral type: Cubic parabola. For Element type at PI: Spiral-Curve and Element type at PI: Curve-Spiral Field Option Description Available for Spiral type: Clothoid. Method Radius & lengths Using the radius of the clothoid and its length. Radius & parame- Using the radius of the clothoid and its parameters ters. Radius Editable field The radius of the curve. Length in Editable field The lengths of the connecting curve. Param in Editable field Depending on the configuration, the parameters P or factors K of the clothoid. Available for Spiral type: Clothoid with Method: Radius & parameters. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 641 For Element type at PI: Spiral-Spiral and Element type at PI: Spiral-Curve-Spiral Field Option Description Available for Spiral type: Clothoid. Method Radius & lengths Using the radius of the clothoid and its length. Radius & parame- Using the radius of the clothoid and its parameters ters. Radius Editable field The radius of the curve. Length in and Editable field Length out The lengths of the connecting curve. Param in and Param out Depending on the configuration, the parameters P or factors K of the clothoid. Available for Spiral type: Clothoid with Method: Radius & parameters. Editable field Next step OK to access the next screen. 46.6 Edit Vertical Alignments Using Elements 46.6.1 Overview Description Allows creating, editing and deleting of the following elements: • • • • • Start Point Straight (Tangent) Parabola Asymmetric parabola Curve as well as checking the vertical alignment. Throughout the whole component height and elevation is used for local orthometric height. If no local orthometric height is available, the local ellipsoidal height is used instead. Access Vertical Alignment, Elements page In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit vertical alignment. Press OK. Use PVI instead of element for vertical alignment definition must be unchecked in Configuration, Advanced page. The available keys are identical to the keys in Horizontal Alignment. Refer to the paragraph "Horizontal Alignment, Elements page". Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 642 46.6.2 Editing the Start Point Access In Vertical Alignment, highlight the start point and press Edit... Vertical Start Point Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Get Pt To apply heights from an existing point in the working job. Survy.. To go to Survey and measure a point. Fn Reset To reset all screen entries. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Elevation Editable field Elevation at the start chainage of the vertical alignment. Start chainage Editable field Start chainage of the vertical alignment. 46.6.3 Inserting/Editing an Element in a Vertical Alignment Access In Vertical Alignment, Elements page, highlight the start point and press Add or Edit... Creating and editing an alignment element are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of an alignment element is explained and differences are clearly outlined. For grade units, the system settings are applied. Refer to "29.1 Regional settings" to change the system setting. Add Vertical Element Description of fields Field Option Description Element type Straight To insert/edit a straight to/in a vertical alignment. Parabola To insert/edit a quadratic parabola to/in a vertical alignment. Curve To insert/edit a curve to/in a vertical alignment. The options available for the field Method depend on the Element type selected. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 643 For Element type: Straight Field Option Description Method Length & end elev Using the length and the end elevation of the straight. End chain & elev Using the end chainage and the elevation of the straight. Length & grade Using the length and the grade of the straight. End chain & grade Using the end chainage and the grade of the straight. For Element type: Parabola Field Option Description Method Length & grades Using the length and the grades of the parabola. End chain & grades Using the end chainage and the grades of the parabola. Param & end elev Using the parameter and the end elevation of the parabola. 3 elevations Using three elevations at defined chainages of the parabola. For Element type: Curve Field Option Description Method Radius & length Using the radius of the curve and its length. Radius & end chain Using the radius and the end chainage of the curve. Radius & grades Using the radius and the grades of the curve. Length & grades Using the length and the grades of the curve. End chain & grades Using start, intermediate and end elevation and chainage of the curve. Next step OK to access the next screen. Vertical Straight/Vertical Parabola/Vertical Curve, Input page Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 644 Key Description Inv.. To calculate the distance and angle between two points from the working job. Last.. To select values from the last inverse calculations. Get Pt To apply coordinates or heights from an existing point in the working job. Available when coordinates must be typed in. Survy.. To go to Survey and measure a point. Available when elevation must be typed in. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access the Alignment Editor configuration. Fn Reset To reset all screen entries. Fn %/V:H/H:V To switch between h:v, v:h and %(v/h x 100) for the grade unit. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Start chainage Display only The end chainage of the previous element is automatically used and cannot be edited. Start elevation Display only The end height of the previous element is automatically used and cannot be edited. The other fields and options available depend on the Method and Element type selected in Add Vertical Element. For Element type: Straight Field Option Description Length Editable field Length of the straight element as slope distance. Available for Method: Length & end elev and Method: Length & grade. End chainage Editable field Chainage at the end of the element. Available for Method: End chain & elev and Method: End chain & grade. End elevation Editable field Height at the end of the element. Type in manually or, alternatively, press Get Pt when the focus is on this line to select the height from an existing point in the working job. Available for Method: Length & end elev and Method: End chain & elev. Editable field The grade of the straight element. Positive inclines have positive values, negative inclines have negative values. Available for Method: Length & grade and Method: End chain & grade. Grade For Element type: Parabola Field Option Description Curve type Crest The curve type is convex. Available for Method: Param & end elev. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 645 Field Option Description Sag The curve type is concave. Available for Method: Param & end elev. Parameter p or Editable field K factor Parameter of the parabola. Available for Method: Param & end elev. The field name depends on the value chosen for the Vertical parabola definition in the Configuration, Advanced page. Length Editable field Length of the parabola as horizontal distance. Available for Method: Length & grades and Method: Param & end elev. Int chainage Editable field Chainage of the second elevation. Available for Method: 3 elevations. Int elevation Editable field Second elevation. Type in manually or press Get Pt when the focus is on this line to select the height from an existing point in the working job. Available for Method: 3 elevations. End chainage Editable field Chainage at the end of the element. Available for Method: End chain & grades and Method: 3 elevations. End elevation Editable field Height at the end of the element. Type in manually or, alternatively, press Get Pt when the focus is on this line to select the height from an existing point in the working job. Available for Method: Param & end elev and Method: 3 elevations. Grade in Editable field The grade at the beginning of the parabola. Positive inclines have positive values, negative inclines have negative values. Available for parabolas with Method: Length & grades and Method: End chain & grades. Grade out Editable field The grade at the end of the parabola. Positive inclines have positive values, negative inclines have negative values. Available for Method: Length & grades and Method: End chain & grades. For Element type: Curve Field Option Description Curve type Crest The curve type is convex. Sag The curve type is concave. Radius Editable field Radius of the curve. Available for Method: Radius & length, Method: Radius & end chain and Method: Radius & grades. Length Editable field Length of the curve along the segment. Available for Method: Radius & length and Method: Length & grades. End chainage Editable field Chainage at the end of the element. Available for Method: End chain & grades and Method: Radius & end chain. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 646 Field Option Description End elevation Editable field Height at the end of the element. Type in manually or, alternatively, press Get Pt when the focus is on this line to select the height from an existing point in the working job. Available for Method: Radius & length and Method: Radius & end chain. Grade in Editable field The grade at the beginning of the parabola. Positive inclines have positive values, negative inclines have negative values. Available for Method: Radius & grades, Method: Length & grades and Method: End chain & grades. Grade out Editable field The grade at the end of the parabola. Positive inclines have positive values, negative inclines have negative values. Available for Method: Radius & grades, Method: Length & grades and Method: End chain & grades. Next step Page changes to the Details page, where all entered and calculated elements are displayed. 46.7 Edit Vertical Alignments Using PIs 46.7.1 Overview Description Allows creating, editing and deleting PIs by chainage, elevation and if required an element type (parabola, curve). Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit vertical alignment. Press OK. Use PVI instead of element for vertical alignment definition must be checked in Configuration, Advanced page. Vertical Alignment, PVI page The available keys are identical to the keys in Horizontal Alignment. Refer to the paragraph "Horizontal Alignment, PI page". 46.7.2 Inserting/Editing a PVI in a Vertical Alignment Access In Vertical Alignment, PVI page, highlight a PVI and press Add or Edit... Creating and editing an alignment PVI are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of an alignment PVI is explained and differences are clearly outlined. Add PVI Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 647 Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and return to the Alignment Editor Menu. Get Pt To apply heights from an existing point in the working job. Available when Elevation is highlighted. Survy.. To go to Survey and measure a point. Available when Elevation is highlighted. Inv.. To calculate the values for the distance and the offset from two existing points. Available when Radius or Length is highlighted. Last.. To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations. Available if Radius or Length is highlighted. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Alignment editor application. Refer to "46.3 Configuring Alignment Editor". Fn Reset To reset all screen entries. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Chainage Editable field The chainage of the vertical PVI. Elevation Editable field The elevation of the vertical PVI. Element type at PVI None No element is defined at the vertical PVI. Curve A curve is defined at the vertical PVI. Parabola A quadratic parabola is defined at the vertical PVI. The other fields on the screen depend on the Element type at PVI selected. For Element type at PVI: Curve Field Option Description Method Length To define the curve by its length. Radius To define the curve by its radius. Length Editable field The length of the curve. Radius Editable field The radius of the curve. For Element type at PVI: Parabola Field Option Description Method Length To define the parabola by its length. Parameter To define the parabola by its parameter. Length Editable field The length of the parabola. Parameter p Editable field Depending on the configuration, the parameters P or factors K of the parabola. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 648 Next step OK to access the next screen. 46.8 Edit Cross Section Templates 46.8.1 Overview Description Allows creating, editing, deleting and duplicating of cross section templates. Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit cross section templates. Press OK. Templates Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. New.. To create a new cross section template. Edit.. To edit the highlighted cross section template. Delete To delete the highlighted cross section template. Duplct To duplicate the highlighted template. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. 46.8.2 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template Access In Templates press New.. to create a new cross section template OR highlight an existing template and press Edit... Creating and editing a cross section template are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of a cross section template is explained and differences are clearly outlined. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 649 New Template, General page Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access the Alignment Editor configuration. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Template name Editable field Name of the cross section template to be created/edited. Allow absoCheck box lute heights for cross section definition If this box is checked, in addition to relative to line input methods, absolute heights can also be entered to define cross section segments. Center height Editable field To be able to create segments using absolute heights, a centre height must be defined. Available if Allow absolute heights for cross section definition is checked. Next step Page changes to the Layers page where the layers of the template are listed. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 650 46.8.3 Add/Edit a Layer Access In New Template/Edit Template, Layers page, press New.. or Edit... Creating and editing a layer of a cross section template are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of a layer is explained and differences are clearly outlined. New Layer, Segments Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Add To create and add a new segment. Edit.. To edit the highlighted segment. Delete To delete the highlighted segment. More To switch between CL horizontal offset, Slope distance, Horiz distance in the second column and between CL vertical offset, Slope ratio, Vertical distance in the third column. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Mirror To mirror the entered segments to the other side of the cross section. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Name The name of the segment. CL horizontal offset Horizontal offset to the centre line of the segment. CL vertical offset Vertical offset to the centre line of the segment. Slope distance Slope distance to the neighbouring vertex. Slope ratio Slope ratio of the segment. Horiz distance Horizontal distance to the neighbouring vertex. Vertical distance Vertical distance to the neighbouring vertex. Next step Add to add a segment. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 651 Add Segment, Input page Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. Inv.. Available when Horiz distance, CL horizontal offset or Slope distance is highlighted. To calculate the distance and angle between two points from the working job. Last.. Available when Horiz distance, CL horizontal offset or Slope distance is highlighted. To select values from the last inverse calculations. %/V:H/H:V To switch between h:v, v:h and %(v/h x 100) for the slope ratio. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access the Alignment Editor configuration. Fn Reset To reset all screen entries. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Template name Display only Name of the cross section template to be edited. Layer name Display only Name of the layer to be edited. Method to be used for defining the segment. Method Horiz dist & slope Using a horizontal distance and slope ratio to define the segment. Horiz dist & vert dist Using a horizontal distance and a vertical distance to define the segment. CL offsets Using a horizontal and vertical offset in relation to the centre line. Slope dist & ratio Using a slope distance and slope ratio to define the segment. Horiz dist & height Using a horizontal and absolute height to define the segment. Only available for templates with Allow absolute heights for cross section definition enabled. CL offset & height Using a horizontal offset in relation to the centre line and absolute height. Only available for templates with Allow absolute heights for cross section definition enabled. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 652 Field Option Horiz distance Editable field Description Horizontal distance of the segment. Available for Method: Horiz dist & slope and Method: Horiz dist & vert dist. Vertical distance Editable field Vertical distance of the segment. Available for Method: Horiz dist & vert dist. CL horizontal offset Editable field Horizontal centre line offset of the segment. Only available for Method: CL offsets. CL vertical offset Editable field Vertical centre line offset of the segment. Only available for Method: CL offsets. Slope distance Editable field Slope distance of the segment. Only available for Method: Slope dist & ratio. Slope ratio Editable field Slope ratio of the segment. Available for Method: Horiz dist & slope and Method: Slope dist & ratio. Next step Page changes to the Details page, where all entered and calculated elements are displayed. 46.9 Edit Cross Section Assignments 46.9.1 Overview Description Allows the creation, editing and deleting of cross section assignments as well as checking the cross section assignments. A cross section assignment defines from which chainage on a cross section template is to be used. Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit cross section assignment. Press OK. Cross Section Assignments Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. New.. To create a new cross section assignment. Edit.. To edit a cross section assignment. Delete To delete a cross section assignment. Check To check the cross section assignments. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 653 46.9.2 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Assignment Access In Cross Section Assignments press New.. or Edit... Creating and editing a cross section assignment are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of a cross section assignment is explained and differences are clearly outlined. Assigned cross section templates must contain the same number of vertices. New Cross Section Assgnmnt Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. StartCh To take the start chainage of the vertical alignment for Chainage. End Ch To take the end chainage of the vertical alignment for Chainage. Fn Config.. To access Alignment Editor configuration. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Chainage Editable field The chainage to which the cross section template is assigned to. Type in or edit the value for Chainage. Alternatively press StartCh or End Ch to apply the start or end chainage of the vertical alignment. Template name Selectable list The cross section template to be assigned to. All existing cross section templates currently stored to the alignment can be selected. Select an existing template from the list or create a new one to be assigned to the Chainage. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 654 46.10 Edit Chainage Equation 46.10.1 Overview Description Allows creating, editing and deleting of: • Gaps • Overlaps Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Edit chainage equation. Press OK. Chainage Equation Key Description OK To accept the screen entries and continue. New.. To create a new chainage equation. Edit.. To edit a chainage equation. Delete To delete a chainage equation. Fn Quit To exit the application. 46.10.2 Creating/Editing a Chainage Equation Access In Chainage Equation press New.. or Edit... Creating and editing a Chainage equation are similar processes. For simplicity, only the creation of a Chainage equation is explained and differences are clearly outlined. New Chainage Equation Description of fields Field Option Description Chainage back Editable field Chainage back. Type in or edit the value. Chainage ahead Editable field Chainage ahead. Type in or edit the value. Next step OK to create the chainage equation or to store the edited chainage equation. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 655 46.11 Convert to job Description Allows the onboard conversion of existing LandXML alignments including horizontal alignment, vertical alignment, cross sections and chainage equations to a RoadRunner job. Access In Alignment Editor Menu highlight Convert to job. Press OK. Convert to Road Job/ Convert to Rail Job Description of fields Field Option Description From alignment Display only Displays the modified or newly created alignment to be converted. To road job Selectable list The Road job to which the alignment will be converted. Create a new job. Available if the Alignment type is set to Road in Select Alignment. To rail job Selectable list If a new job with the same name as an existing job must be created, then the existing job must be deleted first. The Rail job to which the alignment will be converted. Create a new job. Available if the Alignment type is set to Rail in Select Alignment. If a new job with the same name as an existing job must be created, then the existing job must be deleted first. Defines the mode to be used for the conversion process. Conversion mode Horiz & vert Only horizontal and vertical alignment will be converted. Horizontal only Only horizontal alignment will be converted. Hz,vert,cross section Horizontal alignment, vertical alignment and cross sections will be converted. Only available for road jobs. Next step Press OK to start the conversion. Alignment Editor creates a report sheet during the conversion. The file LandXml2Dbx.log can be found in the \Data\XML folder on the data storage device. After the successful conversion, press OK to return to the Main Menu on the instrument. Viva Series, Roads - Alignment Editor 656 47 Roads - Road 47.1 Creating a New Road Job Description There are two ways of creating road/rail jobs: Typing them in manually by using the Alignment Editor application. OR Converting data created in a design package. Manually entered data Data can be typed in and edited with Alignment Editor. Refer to "46 Roads - Alignment Editor" for information on how to enter data manually. Converted data The Import alignment data application in Jobs & Data supports various different formats like dxf, LandXml, MxGenio, Terramodel, Carlson. The Design to Field component of Leica Geo Office offers converters from several road/rail design and CAD packages. Several design packages also include a built-in converter to Roads/Rail. As different design packages follow different philosophies in representation, creation and storage of data the conversion process differs slightly. LEICA Geo Office Road_065 Leica Geo Office can be found on the Leica Geo Office DVD. The latest version of the Design to Field importers can be found in the downloads section of: • myWorld@Leica Geosystems https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com Job selection Refer to "45.2.1 Accessing Roads Applications". Viva Series, Roads - Road 657 47.2 Defining the Work 47.2.1 Defining the Method and the Task Access 1) Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Roads - Stakeout or Roads - As built check. 2) In the job selection screen, select the required jobs. Refer to "45.2.1 Accessing Roads Applications". 3) Press OK. Define the Work to be Done Key Description OK To continue to the next screen. Fn Config.. To access the configuration settings. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Method To define what is shown in the selectable list for Method to use. Fn Quit Local line can not be hidden. To exit the screen. Description of the methods Method Description Line To stake/check any type of line, for example a centreline or kerb. Chainage information is related to the centreline. Local line Like the previous method when staking/checking any line of a layer. The stake/check is always in relation to the chainage of the line itself and not the centreline of the layer. Surface grade To stake/check a surface grade defined by the road design. Two lines define the surface grade (a lane or running surface). Manual slope To stake/check a manually defined slope relative to an existing centreline. The slope is defined by one line (hinge point) and the slope direction with ratio. The stake/check is always in relation to the chainage of the line itself and not the centreline of the layer. Local manual slope To stake/check a manually defined slope relative to an existing hinge line. The slope is defined by one line (hinge point) and the slope direction with ratio. Slope To stake/check a slope defined by two lines of the 3D road design. Viva Series, Roads - Road 658 Method Description Crown To stake/check a road crown defined by two surface grades and one common line. The information for both surface grades is displayed at the same time. Layer To stake/check a layer surface defined by the road design relative to the layer centreline. DTM To check a DTM surface. Available for Roads - As built check only. The available methods depend on the selected job types (road or control job): Available method Road job only Control job only Road job & control job DTM job only Line - - Local line - Surface grade - - - Manual slope - - Local manual slope - Slope - - - Crown - - - Layer - - - DTM - - - Next step OK accesses the Define Task screen. Define Task screen Key Description OK To continue to the next screen. Slope Available for Method to use: Manual slope, Method to use: Local manual slope and Method to use: Slope. To define the slope parameters. Refer to "47.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings". Shifts.. To apply horizontal and vertical shifts to the selected element. Refer to "45.4 Working with Shifts". Load.. To load a task. Refer to "45.5 Tasks". Save.. To save the settings as a task. Refer to "45.5 Tasks". Page To change, depending on the selected method, to Hinge offset and/or Map page. Viva Series, Roads - Road 659 Key Description Any line can be selected on the Map page. Dxf lines have to be imported to a control job before they can be used for Roads. Refer to "37.6 Context Menu". Fn Config.. To access the configuration settings. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the application. The fields available depend on the selection for Method to use in Define the Work to be Done. Description of fields Common to all methods Field Option Description Layer Display only or selectable list The selected layer in the Road job. For Method to use: Line Field Option Description Working chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The chainage can range between the start chainage and the end chainage. The default is the setup point for TPS and the current position for GPS. Line to use Selectable list To select a line at the Working chainage. Or select a line on the Map page. Refer to "47.2.2 Selecting a Line". Refer to an Check box additional line When this box is checked, a second line can be selected. Allows chainage, offset and height difference information to be obtained from any other string of the layer, independent from those strings currently selected for the chosen method. For example: Staking a surface grade where the height information comes from the surface grade, but the chainage information comes from a string which is not the centreline of the current layer. For the additional line, an offset and a height difference can be defined on the Offsets page. Line to use Viva Series, Roads - Road Selectable list The lines available as second lines, independent of the Working chainage. Or select a line on the Map page. Refer to "47.2.2 Selecting a Line". 660 For Method to use: Local line Field Option Description Line to use Selectable list To select a line at the Working chainage. Or select a line on the Map page. Refer to "47.2.2 Selecting a Line". Refer to an Check box additional line When this box is checked, a second line can be selected. Allows chainage, offset and height difference information to be obtained from any other string of the layer independent from those strings currently used. For example: Staking a surface grade where the height information comes from the surface grade but the chainage information comes from a string which is not the centreline of the current layer. Line to use Selectable list The lines available as second lines, independent of the Working chainage. Or select a line on the Map page. Refer to "47.2.2 Selecting a Line". For Method to use: Surface grade Field Option Description Working chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The chainage can range between the start chainage and the end chainage. The default is the setup point for TPS and the current position for GPS. Left line Selectable list The name of the left line defining the surface grade. Refer to "47.2.2 Selecting a Line". Right line Display only The name of the right line defining the surface grade. Reference line Left line or Right To select one of the lines to be used as the referline ence line. Refer to an Check box additional line When this box is checked, a second line can be selected. Allows chainage, offset and height difference information to be obtained from any other string of the layer independent from those strings currently used. For example: Staking a surface grade where the height information comes from the surface grade but the chainage information comes from a string which is not the centreline of the current layer. Line to use Selectable list The lines available as second lines, independent of the Working chainage. Or select a line on the Map page. Refer to "47.2.2 Selecting a Line". For Method to use: Manual slope and Method to use: Local manual slope Field Option Description On the Slope page: Viva Series, Roads - Road 661 Field Option Description Chainage of slope Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The chainage can range between the start chainage and the end chainage of selected line. Hinge line Selectable list To select the hinge point of the slope. Or select a line on the Map page. Refer to "47.2.2 Selecting a Line". Slope location Left or Right For Manual slope, only lines from the Road job can be selected. Defines if the slope is left or right of the hinge point. a Road_079 a) b) c) d) e) Use cut and Use fill Check box Slope cut ratio Editable field and Slope fill ratio b c d e Hinge Point Left, cut Right, cut Left, fill Right, fill When the box is checked, a cut/fill is used for the calculation. During the surveying process, the system calculates if it is a cut or a fill. Check only one box to work only with cut or fill. Defines the cut/fill ratio of the slope. The slope ratio format is defined as system setting in Regional Settings, Slope page. On the Hinge offset page: Apply hinge offsets Check box When this box is checked, a horizontal and vertical offset of the hinge point can be defined. The vertical offset type for the hinge point. Ht offset type Absolute The only option available for 2D lines. Relative to line or Available for 3D lines. Relative to DTM Relativ to surf grade Available for Method to use: Manual slope. The manual slope is defined by the: • Hinge offset relative to the selected hinge reference line • Hinge height, calculated by using the hinge offset on the selected surface grade (left or right selected surface grade, depending on Offset – or +) Viva Series, Roads - Road 662 Field Option Description b d a c Road_105 a) b) c) d) Hinge point of manual slope Defined hinge offset (-) Left surface grade of design Selected hinge reference Offset Editable field The horizontal offset of the hinge point from the centreline/reference line. Elevation Editable field The elevation of the hinge point (absolute height). Available for Ht offset type: Absolute. Left line Editable field The name of the left line. Available for Ht offset type: Relativ to surf grade. Right line Display only The name of the right line. Available for Ht offset type: Relativ to surf grade. Height difference Editable field For Ht offset type: Relative to line: A vertical offset for the hinge point using a height difference can be defined. For Ht offset type: Relative to DTM: A height difference to the DTM height can be applied. For Ht offset type: Relativ to surf grade: Height difference of the hinge point to the calculated height on the end slope. For Method to use: Slope Field Option Description Working chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The chainage can range between the start chainage and the end chainage. The default is the setup point for TPS and the current position for GPS. Left line Selectable list The name of the left line defining the slope. Right line Display only The name of the right line defining the slope. Reference line Left line or Right To select one of the lines to be used as the referline ence line (= hinge line). For Method to use: Crown Field Option Description Working chainage Editable field The chainage for the stake/check survey. The chainage can range between the start chainage and the end chainage. The default is the setup point for TPS and the current position for GPS. Crown line Selectable list Line defining the middle line of the crown. Refer to "47.2.2 Selecting a Line". Left line Display only The name of the line defining left line of the crown. Viva Series, Roads - Road 663 Field Option Description Right line Display only The name of the line defining right line of the crown. Reference line Left line or Right To select one of the lines to be used as the referline ence line. Refer to an Check box additional line When this box is checked, a second line can be selected. Allows chainage, offset and height difference information to be obtained from any other string of the layer independent from those strings currently used. For example: Staking a surface grade where the height information comes from the surface grade but the chainage information comes from a string which is not the centreline of the current layer. Line to use Selectable list The lines available as second lines. For Method to use: Layer Field Option Description Layer Selectable list A list of all available layers of the selected Road job. Centreline Display only Active centreline of the selected layer. Extend end slopes Check box When this box is checked, the left most and right most end slopes of the design are extended. For Method to use: DTM, available for Roads - As built check Field Option Description DTM layer Display only A list of all DTM surfaces available in the selected DTM job. Number of triangles Display only Number of triangles the selected DTM consists of. Next step OK to access the Stake or Check screen. 47.2.2 Selecting a Line Access • In the Define screen, open a selectable list for a line, for example for Line to use or Left line. • Or, tab on a line on the Map page. • Or, for dxf lines, hold down the supplied stylus on an object for 0.5 second and select Select Line. The selection of lines depends on: • Availability of horizontal alignments • Availability of vertical alignment information • View (plan or cross section view) • Working chainage defined or not • Selected method Viva Series, Roads - Road 664 Lines The screen can have a Lines page (if control job is selected), an Alignments page (if road alignment is selected) and a Map page. If no working chainage has been entered, the lists show all lines of the current layer. If a working chainage is available, all lines existing at that chainage are listed only. Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. More On the Lines and Areas page: To display information about the codes if stored with any line, the start time, the end time of when the last point was added to the line and the length of the line. On the Alignments page: To display information about the absolute height or the height difference. Unavailable for local lines. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Line name The name of the line. CL offset The offset from the centreline. The format is defined as system setting in Regional Settings. Height The absolute height of the line. Ht diff The height difference to the centreline. In addition to the list selection the required lines and slopes can also be selected on Map page. Lines can be selected in a graphical way by using the • cross section view. The cross section view is available if a working chainage has been defined. The selected line (3D only) or area from the control job is also displayed. Unavailable for Method to use: Local manual slope. • planar view which is always available. The defined working chainage is displayed as a grey line. The size corresponds to the working corridor settings. Viva Series, Roads - Road 665 Key Description <-- For lines from Road jobs: To select the previous line. --> For lines from Road jobs: To select the next line. 47.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings Access Press Slope in the Define screen. General slope stakeout Description This method involves a generic approach to slope stakeout for direct stakeout of the catch point. No special batter rails or reference point parameters are defined. c b a) Slope to stake out b) Natural surface c) Catch point a Road_055 Workflow As the natural surface is unknown the catch point can only be staked out iteratively. If staking out on a horizontal natural surface, the values shown for ∆ offset indicate how far the catch point is away. If the natural surface is not horizontal, more iterations could be needed. Slope Stakeout Settings Key Description OK To return to the Define screen. Types To define which slope stakeout types are shown and which are hidden. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Common to all types Field Option Use advanced Check box slope stakeout Viva Series, Roads - Road Description When this box is checked, slope stakeout settings are available. 666 Field Option Description Type Reference point Stakeout of a reference peg with a defined offset from the catch point. Refer to "Slope staking using Reference point". Batter rail vertical Stakeout of batter rails using defined rail heights vertically above the batter. Refer to "Slope staking using Batter rail vertical or Batter rail perpend". Batter rail perpend Stakeout of batter rails using defined rail heights perpendicularly above the batter. Refer to "Slope staking using Batter rail vertical or Batter rail perpend". Ref batter vertical Stakeout of batter rails using defined rail heights vertically above the batter. The innermost peg/stake is offset at a defined horizontal distance from the catch point. Refer to "Slope staking using Ref batter vertical or Ref batter perpend". Ref batter perpend Stakeout of batter rails using defined rail heights perpendicularly above the batter. The innermost peg/stake is offset at a defined horizontal distance from the catch point. Refer to "Slope staking using Ref batter vertical or Ref batter perpend" Ref point surface Stakeout of a reference peg in the slope surface with a defined height difference to the hinge point. Slope values for the reference point cannot be entered. Refer to "Slope staking using Ref point surface". For Type: Reference point Field Option Description Ref offset Editable field The defined offset of the reference point from the catch point. For Type: Batter rail vertical and Type: Batter rail perpend Field Option Description Batter type Cut or Fill Defines the cut or fill rail. Traveller height Editable field Depending on the selected Type, the vertical or perpendicular height of the rail top above the batter. Rail over ground Editable field The vertical height of the rail over the ground. For Type: Ref batter vertical and Type: Ref batter perpend Field Option Description Ref offset Editable field The defined offset of the inner peg from the catch point. Viva Series, Roads - Road 667 Field Option Description Traveller height Editable field Depending on the selected Type, the vertical or perpendicular height of the rail above the batter. For Type: Ref point surface The only available fields are Use advanced slope stakeout and Type. Next step OK returns to the Define screen. Slope staking using Reference point Description When staking out slopes using the reference point method, the catch point of the slope is marked with a reference peg using a defined offset. The grade of the slope is marked and controlled by "grade checkers". d b c a Road_022 e a) b) c) d) e) Slope to stake out Natural surface Catch point of the slope Defined reference point offset Reference peg The reference point offset guarantees that all pegs are placed with the same horizontal offset to the catch point. Workflow 1 2 e b c d a Road_023 c d g f a) b) c) d) e) Slope to stake out Natural surface Real catch point Projected catch point Approximate staked out catch point after three iterations f) Defined reference point offset g) Reference peg Step Description 1. The first step when staking out is to find the catch point of the slope. As the natural surface is unknown, this process has to be done iteratively. As soon as the measured position (e) is close enough to the real catch point (c), it can be used as the approximate catch point. Based on this approximate catch point, the projected catch point (d) on the slope is calculated. No reference point offset and no traveller height are taken into account for this step. The projected catch point (d) is then used as a starting point for the stakeout of the reference peg (g). Viva Series, Roads - Road 668 Step Description 2. The second step is to stake out the reference point relative to the projected catch point. Select Place reference peg from the Tools menu. Values in Stake Slope Reference Point, Stake page will guide the user to the position to place the peg. The defined reference point offset (f) is already taken into account. The catch point is marked indirectly via the reference peg. Values to be marked on the reference peg can be found on Stake Slope Reference Point, Info page. The closer the real catch point and the approximated stakeout catch point are, the closer the projected catch point gets to the real catch point. Slope staking using Batter rail vertical or Batter rail perpend Description When staking out slopes with the Batter rail vertical or Batter rail perpend method, the grade of the slope is marked with a board. Using this method it is not necessary to stake out the catch point first. For Batter rail vertical 1 2 e e d b a d b c c Road_024 1 a 2 a) b) c) d) e) Batter rail for a cut Batter rail for a fill Slope to stake out Natural surface Catch point of the slope Rail over ground Rail over batter, vertical 1 a 2 a) b) c) d) e) Batter rail for a cut Batter rail for a fill Slope to stake out Natural surface Catch point of the slope Rail over ground Rail over batter, perpendicular For Batter rail perpend 1 2 e d b a c e d b c Road_101 The defined rail over ground should guarantee that the rails are positioned as high as possible, to make them easier to use. Step Description 1. The first peg to stake out is always the peg closest to the hinge point. Stake out the position of the first peg of the batter by using ∆ offset on the Stake page of the Stake/Check screen. The height of the rail over ground Rail over ground is taken into account for ∆ offset. This action means that when ∆ offset is equal to zero the first peg is in the correct position. 2. Place the pole on top of the first peg. The value for ∆ height indicates how far below the top of the batter has to be placed. 3. Stake out the second peg of the batter rail by using ∆ chainage and place the peg. Viva Series, Roads - Road 669 Step Description 4. Place the pole on the position of the batter rail to be used as a reference for the slope values to mark on the batter rail. ∆ height should now read zero. All values shown under the Info page are relative to the original slope. Slope staking using Ref batter vertical or Ref batter perpend Description This method is used if batter rails with a constant distance from the inner peg to the catch point are required. For Ref batter vertical d e b a c Road_025 a) b) c) d) e) Slope to stake out Natural surface Catch point of the slope Defined reference point offset Height of the "traveller", vertical a) b) c) d) e) Slope to stake out Natural surface Catch point of the slope Defined reference point offset Height of the "traveller", perpendicular For Ref batter perpend d e b a c Road_100 Workflow Step Description The first step is to stake out the catch point of the slope. The reference point offset and traveller height are not taken in account in this step. Based on this approximate catch point the projected catch point on the slope is calculated. The projected catch point is used as a starting point for the stakeout of the reference peg. 1. Stake out the position of the catch point by using ∆ offset and/or ∆ height on the Stake page of the Stake/Check screen. When ∆ offset and ∆ height are equal to zero, the catch point has been located. 2. Fn Tools.. to access the Tools screen. The measured position is used as the catch point for the stake out of the reference point. 3. Select Place reference peg to access the stakeout screen for the reference peg. 4. Stake out the reference point using ∆ offset. When ∆ offset is equal to zero the reference peg position has been found. 5. Place the pole on top of the reference peg. The value for ∆ height indicates how far below the top of the peg the batter has to be placed. 6. Place the pole on the position of the batter rail to be used as a reference for the slope values to mark on the batter rail. ∆ height should now read zero. All values shown under the Info page are relative to the original slope. 7. to return to Stake Slope. Stake out the next catch point from this screen. Viva Series, Roads - Road 670 Slope staking using Ref point surface Description When staking out slopes using the reference point surface method, the reference peg is staked out with a defined height difference to the hinge point. a b c d e f Road_096 a) b) c) d) e) f) Slope to stake out Natural surface Catch point of the slope Reference peg Defined hinge height difference Hinge point Workflow 1 2 e b c c d a f Road_097 Step a) b) c) d) e) Slope to stake out Natural surface g Real catch point Projected catch point Approximate staked out h catch point after three iterations f) Hinge point g) Reference peg h) Defined hinge height difference Description The first step when staking out is to find the catch point of the slope. As the natural surface is unknown, this process has to be done iteratively. As soon as the measured position (e) is close enough to the real catch point (c), it can be used as the approximate catch point. Based on this approximate catch point, the projected catch point (d) on the slope is calculated. The projected catch point (d) is then used as a starting point for the stakeout of the surface reference peg (g). 1. Stake out the position of the catch point by using ∆ offset and/or ∆ height on the Stake page of the Stake/Check screen. When ∆ offset and ∆ height are equal to zero, the catch point has been located. 2. Define the hinge height difference. Fn Tools.. to access the Tools screen. 3. Select Place surface reference peg to access the define screen for the reference peg field. The measured position from step 1. is used as the catch point for the stake out of the reference point. The Actual hinge ht diff field displays the Hinge ht diff value from the Stake page of the Stake/Check screen. Type in the appropriate value for Defined hinge ht diff. 4. Stake out the surface reference point relative to the projected catch point. Values in Stake Slope Ref Point Surface, Stake page guide you to the position to place the peg. The defined hinge height difference (h) is already taken into account. Values to be marked on the reference peg can be found on Stake Slope Ref Point Surface, Info page. 5. to return to Stake Slope. Stake out the next catch point from this screen. The closer the real catch point and the approximated stakeout catch point are, the closer the projected catch point gets to the real catch point. Viva Series, Roads - Road 671 47.3 Staking/Checking the Road 47.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen Stake/Check screen, General page The Stake Line is shown as example. Key Description Meas To start measuring the point being staked. The key changes to Stop. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Stop To end measuring the point being staked. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General page recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The key changes to Store. After ending the measurements, the differences between the measured point and the point to be staked are displayed. Store To store the measured point. When Automatically store point is checked in Quality Control, General page, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Dist To measure a distance. Ch- Available for Roads - Stakeout. To decrease the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Ch+ Available for Roads - Stakeout. To increase the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access configuration settings. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Positn To position the total station to the defined stakeout point, including defined offsets. This depends on the settings for Turn to point in Configuration, TPS page. Refer to " Configuration, TPS page". Fn Tools.. To access the method-specific Tools Menu. Refer to "47.4 The Tools Menu". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Viva Series, Roads - Road Option Description The following fields are always shown in all Stake and Check methods. 672 Field Option Description Point ID Editable field Name of the next point to be stored. The ID is incremented/decremented whenever a point gets stored. Antenna height Editable field Height of the antenna. Target height Editable field Height of the prism. The following fields are always shown in all Stake methods, except for method Layer. Stake chainage Editable field Chainge incre- Editable field ment Nominal chainage of the point to be staked out. Chainage increment. Value by which the nominal chainage increases/decreases when pressing Ch/Ch+. The following field is shown in the Stake and Check methods except for Slope and Manual slope. Use manual Check box height instead of design heights When this box is checked, a height value typed in manually is used instead of design height or DTM height. When this box is not checked, the height from design is used. Manual height Editable field The height to be used. Next step Page changes to the Offsets page. Stake/Check screen, Offsets page Refer to "Stake/Check screen, General page" for a description of keys. Description of fields Field Option Description Apply offsets Check box When this box is checked, the defined stake/check offsets are applied. Stake offset Editable field Available for Stake. Horizontal offset from the reference line (as defined by the chosen method) of the point to stake. When a stake offset is entered for line, local line, manual slope and local manual slope and Work with non-perpendicular offset is checked on the Offsets page: When coming to a corner when working at a stake chainage along an alignment, choose one of the following from the message: • Prev: To stake out the point according to the tangent direction of the previous line. • Avg: To stake the average tangent direction. The stake distance from the corner is the offset value defined. • Next: To stake out the point according to the tangent direction of the next line. Viva Series, Roads - Road 673 Field Option Description CL stake offset Editable field Available for Stake with Layer. The Easting and Northing values for staking are calculated by the horizontal offset from the centreline. The height is derived from the layer. Stake height diff Editable field Available for Stake. Vertical offset from the reference line or surface (as defined by the chosen method) of the point to stake. Toggle offsets Check box left/right When this box is checked, points can be staked/checked on the left/right side of the selected line in one process. a d b b c Road_073 a) b) c) d) Line Defined Stake offset Parallel right line Parallel left line This functionality is available for the following stake out/check methods: • Line: Toggle between line left and right. • Surface grade: Toggle between left and right line of the surface grade. • Crown: Toggle between left and right surface grade. The application automatically detects which side of the centreline is being used and selects the appropriate line as a reference. Auto position When pressing auto position Fn Positn, available in total station mode, a message box comes up prompting if either the left or right side should be staked out/checked. Check offset Editable field Available for Check. Horizontal offset from the reference line, as defined by the chosen method, of the point to stake. CL check offset Editable field Available for Check with Layer. The Easting and Northing values for checking are calculated by the horizontal offset from the centreline. The height is derived from the layer. Check height diff Editable field Available for Check. Vertical offset from the reference line or surface, as defined by the chosen method, of the point to stake. Viva Series, Roads - Road The following field is shown for the Stake methods Line, Local line, Local manual slope and Manual slope. 674 Field Option Description Work with non-perpendicular offset Check box When this box is not checked the measured point is projected in a right angle to the selected line. When this box is checked, any projection angle can be defined. Offset angle Editable field Manually defined projection angle. The following fields are shown in the Line, Local line, Surface grade and Crown methods when Refer to an additional line is checked in the Define screen. Apply offsets to additional line Check box When this box is checked, an offset to the additional line can be defined. Offset Editable field Horizontal stake/check offset to the additional line. Height difference Editable field Vertical stake/check height difference to the additional line. Next step Page changes to the Stake page. Understanding priorities of various heights Type of height Overrules Stake height diff Manually entered OR Obtained from individual point All other heights Considered Use DTM height for stakeout (Tools Design height menu: Use heights from DTM) Considered From design Considered No other heights Show DTM height difference on Info No influence on priorities page (Tools menu: Use heights For additional info only from DTM) Stake screen, Stake page - This page is available for Roads - Stakeout only. This page displays the differences between the measured points and stakeout points (delta values). If these values are zero, the measured point coincides with the stakeout point. Refer to "Stake/Check screen, General page" for a description of keys. Refer to "53.4 Staking Out" for a description of the elements of the graphical display. Description of fields Field Option Description Chainage Display only The current chainage. CL O Display only Perpendicular horizontal offset to the centreline. ∆ chainage Display only Difference between the defined Stake chainage and the current chainage Chainage of the measured position. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field shows -----. Viva Series, Roads - Road 675 Field Option Description NrTP Display only The chainage difference between the measured point and the nearest tangent point (start/end point of a road segment) of the design is displayed. a b Road_099 a) Vertical alignment b) Horizontal alignment Only tangent points (start/end point of a road segment) are detected. ∆O Display only Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. The Stake offset defined on the Offsets page is taken into account. ∆ height Display only Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. The Stake height diff defined on the Offsets page is taken into account. Next step Page changes to the Info page. Stake/Check screen, Info page A user definable Info page exists for each of the stake methods and check methods. Refer to the chapters from "45.3.2 Road Line - Info Page"to "45.3.8 Road DTM - Info Page". Refer to "Configuration, Info page" for information on all available items for the Info page and how to select them. Stake/Check screen, Map page The Map page for Stake shows information about the measured point relative to the design. The design is defined by the selected layer and line, and the values entered on the General page. The Map page for Check and Stake are similar. The only difference is that the current chainage is always shown instead of ∆ chainage. For Check and when only a DTM job is used, the Map page shows the DTM and the lines of selected Road layer - always in plan view. At the top of the page, DTM height and delta height are shown. Viva Series, Roads - Road 676 Key Description Refer to "Stake/Check screen, General page" for a description of keys. Fn Layrs.. To turn layers of background maps (CAD files) on and off. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job"for information on CAD files and CAD background maps. The following information is shown: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Chainage difference between the measured point and the defined chainage. When working with random chainages, for instance if no defined chainage has been entered on the General page, ∆Ch changes to Ch. Ch is the current chainage as shown on the Stake page. Horizontal offset (left/right arrow) to the design Height difference (up/down arrow) to the design The measured point (prism pole or GPS antenna) The element to stake is shown in bold and blue. The position to stake is marked with a yellow-black peg. The plot can be shown as a cross plot or plan view by using the eye icon on second level of MapView toolbar. Displayed is: Cross plot: • Road job lines of the selected layer • Only selected line of the control job (not all lines) Plan view: • Road job lines of the selected layer • Lines of control job • Background maps, for example dxf(s), attached to control job • Working job items are displayed in grey 47.3.2 Measuring Points by Chainage and Offset Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check b b f f e e i c c d Road_034 h a h g d a g Road_080 a) Position to stake out, defined by chainage, stake offset and, optionally, stake height difference b) Centreline/line the position is defined relative to c) Stake offset d) Stake height diff e) Chainage f) CL offset/Ref offset g) ∆ chainage h) ∆ offset i) ∆ height Viva Series, Roads - Road a) Position to check, defined by check offset and, optionally, check height difference b) Centreline/line the position is defined relative to c) Check offset d) Check height diff e) Chainage f) CL offset/Ref offset g) ∆ offset h) ∆ height 677 Description • When staking points, the points are defined by the stake chainage and, if enabled, by the stake offset and the stake height difference relative to an existing 2D or 3D centreline or line. • When checking points, the points are defined by the check offset and the check height difference relative to an existing 2D or 3D centreline or line. Required elements • For 2D, a horizontal centreline is required. • For 3D, a 3D centreline is required. 47.3.3 Measuring Lines Relative to a Centreline Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check c b d a c a e e f f g h h d i b g e c f f h h i c=d a=b a=b g Road_035 Road_066 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Position to stake out Line to stake out Centreline Stake chainage Chainage CL offset ∆ chainage ∆ offset ∆ height a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Line to check Projected point on line Centreline Chainage CL offset CL ht diff ∆ offset ∆ height Description • Lines define various elements, including: • Centreline of the design • Change in slope ratio, for example, the edge of a carriage way • Gutter, cable, pipeline or any other type of alignment element • Refer to "45.6.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements" for information on the usage of lines. Required elements • For 2D, at least a 2D line and a 2D centreline are required. • For 3D, a 3D line and a 2D or 3D centreline are required. Viva Series, Roads - Road 678 47.3.4 Measuring Local Lines without Centrelines Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check c b a c b d f e d g e a Road_085 Road_084 Stakeout of Roundabout a) Position to stake out b) Line to stake out c) Centreline of the layer- is not used for the local line d) Chainage e) ∆ chainage f) ∆ offset g) ∆ height Checking a Roundabout a) Line to check b) Chainage c) Centreline of the layer- is not used for the local line d) ∆ offset e) ∆ height Description This process is different to lines, where the stake/check is always relative to the centreline defined for the layer. Local lines no longer have a relationship to an overall centreline. Local lines are used to check roundabouts, parking bays, subdivision works and any other type of lines. The different lines to stake/check can be stored within one layer, which does not require a defined centreline. This ability is different to the stake/check of any other type which always require a centreline. Required elements A 2D or 3D design of the line to stake/check is required. 47.3.5 Indefinite Triangle Description In almost all situations, a measured position is shown relative to the local line by the line chainage and a square offset to the line. However, situations can arise where a road design has extreme changes in the deflection angle of tangent points. In these cases, it is not always possible to show a measured position by the nominal chainage and offset. An indefinite triangle is a region in which these situations arise. Points measured within an indefinite triangle are shown relative to the tangent point. Graphic A B b b a Road_091 Viva Series, Roads - Road b‘ b a b“ 679 Road Design A a) Local line b) Measured position (displayed relative to the line by chainage and square offset) Road Design B a) Local line with extreme changes in the deflection angle of tangent points b) Measured position within indefinite triangle This position cannot be shown in the usual manner and is displayed relative to the tangent point b")Measured position within indefinite triangle This position can be shown in the usual manner and is displayed by chainage and square offset Screen Points measured within an indefinite triangle are always shown relative to the tangent point. 47.3.6 Measuring Surface Grades Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout f Roads - As built check b d d a j g e e c i h f h g i k a k e d h c j b a=d Road 036 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) c b Position to stake out Surface grade to stake out Left line Right line Centreline Working chainage Chainage CL offset ∆ chainage ∆ offset ∆ height f b k g h a i c Road_067 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Surface grade to check Left line Right line Centreline Chainage ∆ offset ∆ height Surf. grade offset Surf. grade ht diff Description • Surfaces such as the final carriage way, are often staked/checked using surface grades. A surface grade consists of a combination of two lines. • Refer to "45.6.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements" for information on the usage of surface grades. Required elements A 3D design of the road is required. Viva Series, Roads - Road 680 47.3.7 Measuring Manual Slopes, Local Manual Slopes and Design Slopes Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout b Roads - As built check h b h g g d c f Road_037 Catch point Centreline Slope to stake out Hinge point = left line Second / right line Natural surface Hinge offset CL offset ∆ offset ∆ height e i c f a a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) d i a j e j Road_037 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) Catch point Centreline Slope to check Hinge point Second line of the slope Natural surface Hinge offset CL offset Slope offset Slope height diff Description • Surfaces, such as the end slopes of a cut or fill, are staked/checked using slope methods. • Slopes are defined by two lines. Refer to "45.6.3 Road - Basic Elements for Stake and Check Measurements". • When staking slopes, the point of interest is the intersection of the defined slope with the natural surface (= catch point). Refer to "47.2.3 Advanced Slope Settings" for information on the slope staking methods supported. • When checking slopes, the slope check is independent of the slope method selected. Description of manual slopes The slope is defined manually relative to a selected 3D centreline, slope direction and slope ratio or relative to a 2D line using a manual height, slope direction and slope ratio. Chainage information is related to the centreline. Description of local manual slopes The slope is defined manually relative to a selected 3D line, slope direction and slope ratio or relative to a 2D line using a manual height, slope direction and slope ratio. Chainage information is related to the selected line itself and not the centreline of the layer. Description of design slopes For this method, a 3D representation of the slope, defined by two lines, is required. Viva Series, Roads - Road 681 47.3.8 Measuring Road Crowns Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout Roads - As built check e h e h f g c a b f g d c a b d Road_076 Road_040 a) Position to stake out, in this case the left line of the crown b) Middle line of the crown, in this case also the centreline c) Left surface grade to stake out d) Right surface grade to stake out e) CL offset f) ∆ offset g) ∆ ht left h) ∆ ht right a) Left line of the crown b) Middle line of the crown, common for both surface grades c) Left surface grade to check d) Right surface grade to check e) CL offset f) ∆ offset g) ∆ ht left h) ∆ ht right Description • Staking road crowns allows the stake out of two surface grades at the same time. If Toggle offsets left/right is checked, the reference for ∆ offset is automatically switched between the right and left surface grade depending on whether the measured position is to the right or left of the middle line. • When checking road crowns, it allows the check of two surface grades at the same time. The information for both surface grades is shown at the same time. Required elements A 3D design of the road, defining a crown consisting of three lines, is required. Specific fields The following fields vary from the description used in "47.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen": Field Option Description ∆ ht left/ ∆ ht right or ∆HtL/∆HtR Display only Vertical offset to the left/right surface grade defining the road crown. 47.3.9 Measuring Road Layers Graphical overview Roads - Stakeout b b d a Road_068 Roads - As built check e c a) Relevant part of the layer for the current position b) Left line Left name c) Right line Right name d) ∆ offset e) ∆ height Viva Series, Roads - Road d a Road_068 e c a) Relevant part of the layer for the current position b) Left line Left name c) Right line Right name d) Slope offset e) Layer ht diff 682 Description All lines are grouped in layers. Such a layer describes a surface of the road. When staking/checking out a layer, it is automatically detected the line left and right of the measured position. Required elements A 3D design of the road is required. 47.3.10 Measuring Digital Terrain Models (DTM) Graphical overview Roads - As built check e a b g d f c Road_046 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Relevant triangle of the DTM Projected point on DTM Easting Northing DTM height diff Flow direction Flow ratio Description A DTM check returns the height difference between the current height and the height of the DTM at the measured position. Required elements A DTM job is required. 47.4 The Tools Menu 47.4.1 Overview Access Press Fn Tools.. on any page of the Stake/Check screen. Description The Tools menu contains additional functionality for each of the stake and check methods. This functionality is additional to those already existing functions which are available via the function keys. The functionality differs between the stake and check methods. Refer to these subchapters for a detailed description of the functionalities: • "47.4.2 Use heights from DTM" • "47.4.3 Apply current chainage" • "47.4.4 Get current angle to alignment" • "47.4.5 Stake individual point" • "47.4.6 COGO Road - Alignment Information" • "47.4.7 Additional Layer Information" • "47.4.8 Box / base definition" • "47.4.9 Get current slope" • "47.4.10 Manual Slope" • "47.4.11 Reset slope to design" • "47.4.12 Shift reference line" • "47.4.13 Re-initialise search" • "47.4.14 Stake intersection point" Viva Series, Roads - Road 683 47.4.2 Use heights from DTM Availability This menu function is available for the following stake/check methods: Line, local line, surface grade, crown, layer. Description The application offers the possibility to • switch to a height which is retrieved from an existing height layer, as defined in the selected DTM job. The layer from the DTM is applied and used as a height reference for the staking out or checking of alignments. • retrieve heights from an existing layer, as defined in the DTM job associated with the project. The DTM used is not considered for the stake values. Three new information lines are added to the Info page: DTM Ht Diff, DTM Height and DTM Layer. • show the DTM triangles in the planar view and in the cross section view on the Map page. Once defined, each layer remains active until it is turned off. DTM heights can be used for both 2D and 3D alignments. Use heights from DTM Key Description OK To confirm the settings and return to the Stake/Check screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description DTM Display only DTM from the selected DTM job. Use DTM height for stake out Check box When this box is checked, a layer of the DTM is used as a height reference. When this box is not checked, no DTM heights are applied for stakeout or check. DTM layer Selectable list Available when Use DTM height for stake out is checked. When selecting a DTM layer the relevant triangle of the DTM is shown on the Map page. Show DTM height difference on Info page Check box When this box is checked, a layer of the DTM to be used as a height reference on the Info page. When this box is not checked, no additional height information relative to the DTM is shown on the Info page. Viva Series, Roads - Road 684 Field Option Description DTM layer Selectable list Available when Show DTM height difference on Info page is checked. Layer of the DTM to be used as a height reference. When selecting a DTM layer the relevant triangle of the DTM is shown in cross section view on the Map page. Show DTM on Check box map When this box is checked, the DTM triangles are displayed in planar view on the Map page. Selectable list DTM layer The setting of for this check box is linked to the setting for the Display DTM in map check box in Map View Settings, DTM page. All available layers are selectable. 47.4.3 Apply current chainage Availability This menu function is available for all stake methods except layer. Description To set Stake chainage on the General page of the stakeout to the current chainage. 47.4.4 Get current angle to alignment Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of lines and local lines. Description To project a measured point to the alignment considering the entered Stake chainage. This functionality is only available when Work with non-perpendicular offset is checked in the Stake screen on the Offsets page. Graphic c b a Road_098 Workflow Step Description 1. Measure a point: a) b) c) α Alignment Defined chainage Current position Angle to alignment Dist Meas and Stop 2. Press Fn Tools.. to access the Tools menu. 3. Select Get current angle to alignment. 4. At the defined chainage, the angle between the tangent direction and the direction to the current position is calculated. This angel is set as Offset angle for Work with non-perpendicular offset on the Offsets page. 5. Continue with staking out using the calculated Stake chainage and Offset angle values. These values are valid until new values are defined manually or by using Get current angle to alignment. Viva Series, Roads - Road 685 47.4.5 Stake individual point Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of lines and local lines. Description To select the point to stake from the selected Working job. If a control job has been selected on the job selection screen, a point from the control job can be selected. When staking out/checking an individual point, the selected point is set in relation to the alignment and all line relevant values are calculated and displayed. To access Data:, Points page, which allows staking out points with known Easting, Northing and Height. Points can either be selected from the Working job or manually typed in. The Stake chainage and Stake offset of the Stake screen are calculated based on the coordinates of the selected point. The height for the stakeout can be set as Manual height. If the chosen point has no height the design height will be used. If the point has a height it is possible to use that one or continue working with the design height. 47.4.6 COGO Road - Alignment Information Availability This menu function is available for staking/checking a line/local line. Description This function allows • the selection of existing single or multiple points from a job. • viewing the selected points along the alignment. • displaying the respective alignment chainage and offset information. Any job containing points from any data storage device can be used. The calculated alignment information is stored and a report sheet can be used for extracting the data. Point Selection Key Description Calc To perform the chainage and offset calculation and to continue with the subsequent screen. Calculated COGO points are not yet stored. Viva Series, Roads - Road 686 Key Description Use To change between Yes and No in the Use column for the highlighted point. More To display information about the codes if stored with any point, the Easting, Northing, Elevation, time, date and 3D coordinate quality. The order in which the Easting and Northing columns are shown depends on the Grid format configured to be used in Regional Settings, Coords page. The Easting, Northing and Elevation values are shown in the unit configured in Regional Settings, Distance page. To change to another page on this screen. Page Fn None or Fn To deactivate or activate all points for the COGO calculation. All Fn Quit To exit the application. Point selection/deselection is possible on the Map page. IF THEN a single point is to be selected/deselected tap on the point. multiple points are to be selected/deselected all points are to be selected click the icon, drag the stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to make a rectangular area. press All or None. Next step Calc computes the alignment information. Alignment Results, Points page Key Description Store To store the results. Points are stored in the working job together with the alignment information. The points can be exported with a report sheet later. The information is the same as if the points had been measured along the alignment. More To display information about the calculated alignment information: Horizontal offset from the line, height difference from the defined line and horizontal offset from the centreline. Page To change to another page on this screen. Config.. To configure if the calculated points are stored with the original point ID, a prefix or a suffix. Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step Page changes to another page. The fields and information displayed on the Info page are as defined in Configuration, Info page. Refer to "Configuration, Info page". The Plot page displays all the calculated points against the design data. Viva Series, Roads - Road 687 Configuration Description of fields Field Option Store point ID Same point ID with Prefix / suffix Description The same point ID from the selected job is used when storing to the working job. If a point exists with the same point ID in the working job a warning appears. Choose to overwrite the existing point or not. Prefix Adds the setting for Store point ID with in front of the original point IDs. Suffix Adds the setting for Store point ID with at the end of the original point IDs. Editable field The identifier with up to four characters is added in front of or at the end of the ID of the calculated COGO points. 47.4.7 Additional Layer Information Availability This menu function is available for all stake/check methods except layer. Description This function allows additional road data to be obtained during a check or stake survey of a road element. Road elements include centrelines, kerb and gutters and slopes. The map shows cross section view only and allows setting the vertical exaggeration. Additional Layer Information Key Description OK To store the selected element, which is then automatically recalled. <-- or --> To select the relevant element in the plot. The information displayed shows the current slope ratio and the height difference of the element. Also displayed are the offset and height differences from the left and right vertices of the element. Fn Config.. To configure MapView. Refer to "37.3 Configuring MapView". Fn Layrs.. To turn layers of background maps (CAD files) on and off. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job" for information on CAD files and CAD background maps. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Road 688 47.4.8 Box / base definition Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of lines and local lines. Description This function allows a box or similar structure to be set out during a check or stake survey of a road element. The box is set out relative to a line chainage and parallel offset. A base point of the box, user-defined dimensions of the box (a base distance and a base offset) are required. Diagram f d e c g a b Road_092 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Centreline Defined chainage Stake offset Base point Base offset Base distance Box to stake out Box / base definition Key Description OK To store the selected element, which is then automatically recalled. Define To overwrite the values before pressing Base If a different base had been defined before. Base or Clear To freeze or unfreeze the values of the base point. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Base chainage Display only The position defined by Stake chainage. Base offset Display only The position defined by Stake offset. Distance box Editable field The distance in the direction of increasing chainage of base point is positive. Offset box Editable field The offset to the right of base point is positive. Base easting, Editable field Base northing and Base height Viva Series, Roads - Road The coordinates of the base point, either from the Working job or from a surveyed point. 689 Example Field Option Description Base direction Editable field The orientation of the local coordinate system (azimuth). The following steps describe the stakeout of two reference pegs from a centreline chainage and offset. f e+ d ec f a b Road_093 a) b) c) d) e) Centreline Defined chainage Stake offset Base point Base distance, positive (e+), negative (e-) f) Peg to stake out Step Description 1. Define the base point for the box/base stakeout using Stake offset and Stake height diff from the Offsets page. 2. Press Fn Tools.. to access the Tools menu. 3. Select Box / base definition. Press OK to continue to the next screen. 4. The position defined by Stake chainage and Stake offset is used as Base chainage and Base offset when accessing Box / base definition for the first time within a stakeout session. 5. Similar to the stakeout of individual points in the Tools menu. The Box/Base functionality calculates the new point to stake out and changes the according values of Stake chainage and Stake offset. The Box/Base functionality also activates the Manual height functionality. 6. To avoid these values being used as the next base point when accessing the box/base menu, press Base in the Box/Base Definition screen. Pressing this key freezes the values of the base point. Base is now replaced by Clear. If a different base had been defined before, use Define to overwrite the values before pressing Base. 7. Define the Distance box and Offset box. Both follow the same rules as used for the definition of offsets and chainages in general. That is; offset to the right = positive; distance in direction of increasing chainage = positive. 8. Press OK to continue to the next screen. 9. The values of Stake chainage, Stake offset and the Manual height are adjusted accordingly. 10. The fields ∆ chainage, ∆ offset and ∆ height on the Stake page guide you to the new position to stake out. Press Fn Tools.. to access Tools menu. 11. Viva Series, Roads - Road Select Box / base definition. Press OK to continue to the next screen. 690 Step Description 12. The next point of the box to stake out can now be defined. To change back to the original chainage and offset defined for the base point definition use Clear. 13. Start with step 1. to define a new box/base. 47.4.9 Get current slope Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of slopes, local manual slopes and manual slopes. Description To access Slope Definition. The slope ratio Current ratio of the last measured position is used as the defined Slope ratio. All other values in Slope Definition are filled in with the last measured position. The defined manual slope is used for all points to stake out or check. The manual slope is active until it is turned off with Reset slope to design from the Tools menu. Graphic Slopes are defined relative to the centreline. a d a) b) c) d) e) e b f c Road_038 Centreline Hinge point New slope Defined hinge offset Offset Defined hinge height difference Height difference f) Slope ratio Slope Definition Key Description OK To accept changes and move to the next screen depending on the settings for slope staking. Config.. To access the configuration settings. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Hinge line Display only The line the slope is defined relative to. Viva Series, Roads - Road 691 Field Option Description The vertical offset type for the hinge point. Hinge offset Relative to line Define the hinge point by the height difference relative to the selected Reference line. a)Hinge point b)Slope a b Road_039a Absolute Define the hinge point using its absolute height. a)Hinge point b)Slope a b Road_039b Hold hinge The hinge point of the slope stays fixed at the defined line. Editable field The horizontal offset of the hinge point from the centreline/reference line. Height difference Editable field The height difference of the hinge point from the centreline/reference line. Available for Hinge offset: Relative to line. Offset Elevation Editable field The absolute height of the hinge point. Available for Hinge offset: Absolute. Slope type Selectable list Differentiates if the defined slope is a cut/fill and left/right. a Road_079 a) b) c) d) e) Slope ratio Editable field b c d e Hinge point Left cut Right cut Left fill Right fill Defines the ratio of the slope. The measured slope ratio is the default value. This value can be edited manually. The display format is defined as system setting in Regional Settings, Slope page. Viva Series, Roads - Road 692 47.4.10 Manual Slope Availability This function is available for stake/check of slopes. Description To access Slope Definition. Allows a manual slope to be defined. The defined manual slope is then used for all points to stake out or check. Refer to "Slope Definition"for a description of the screen. The manual slope is active until it is turned off with Reset slope to design from the Tools menu. 47.4.11 Reset slope to design Availability This function is available for stake/check of slopes. Description This option is only available if a slope has been defined by using Get current slope. The manually defined slope is deactivated and reset to the design slope. 47.4.12 Shift reference line Availability This menu function is available for the stake/check of slopes and surface grades. The Shift reference line item of the Tools menu stays disabled until the first measured position is available. The current chainage is used for the cross section shown to pick the reference line. Description When staking out or checking different layers of the road strata, such as the subgrade, gravel or asphalt, it is often found that not all these layers are available in the design. For such cases, the application offers the possibility to apply either a negative or positive height shift to the design values. Example A gravel layer with a thickness of 10 cm is to be staked out. A negative vertical shift to the final design surface is applied. This shift is applied: • by pressing Shifts.. in the Define screen and • by applying a vertical shift of -10 cm. As shown, the selected surface grade is shifted by 10 cm. c 10 cm a d 15 cm Road_086 Viva Series, Roads - Road b a) b) c) d) Reference surface Shifted reference point Original surface grade Shifted surface grade 693 When staking out the newly shifted surface grade, the original left edge of the shifted surface grade is of little interest. It is the intersection with the left end slope that is of greater interest. Reference Shift Key Description OK To confirm the settings and return to the Stake/Check screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Shift slope reference line Check box When this box is checked, the settings for the shift can be set. Left line Display only Shows the name of the left line from the surface. Right line Display only Shows the name of the right line from the surface. The vertical shift applied to the surface selected. Shift mode Shift value Viva Series, Roads - Road Plumbline The shift defined under Shift value gets applied following the plumb line. Perpendicular The shift defined under Shift value gets applied perpendicular to the selected surface. Editable field Value the selected surface gets shifted following the chosen Shift mode. 694 The graphical selection. The expanded element and the shifted reference line, marked with a cross, are shown in the Map page in the Stake/Check screen. On the Stake page, the ∆ offset and ∆ height guide you to the new shifted position. 47.4.13 Re-initialise search Availability This menu function is available for all stake/check methods except layer. Description When staking or checking complex road designs it can happen that the current position is not projected to the desired segment of the alignment. The Re-initialise search forces a re-projection of the current position. Example Before initialisation This screen shows the projection of the current position to the left segment, although the distance to the right segment is shorter. Viva Series, Roads - Road 695 After initialisation This screen shows the projection after the reinitialisation. 47.4.14 Stake intersection point Availability This menu function is available for staking a line with Refer to an additional line checked in Define Line Task The additional line must be a Straight. Offsets for the selected line and the additional line can be defined. Description The menu function Stake intersection point is only available if the offsets are defined perpendicular to the selected line. Work with non-perpendicular offset must not be checked. Stake intersection point is commonly used to stake out bridge abutment positions. The graphic shows an example. a c b P1 d Road_102 Calculation of the stake intersection point and chainage a) Selected line, for example bridge centreline b) Perpendicular offset from the selected line c) Selected additional line, for example abutment line d) Perpendicular offset from the selected line P1 Required intersection point for stakeout The calculation of the intersection point is based on: • A perpendicular offset from the selected line, for example bridge centreline • A perpendicular offset from the additional line Step-by-step Step Description 1. Define Line Task Select the line to work with (bridge centreline) and select a second intersecting line (abutment centreline) under Refer to an additional line. 2. Stake Line, Offsets page If necessary, check Apply offsets. Type in the offset of the intersection point in relation to selected line (bridge centreline). Viva Series, Roads - Road Non-perpendicular offsets are not allowed. If necessary, check Apply offsets to additional line. Type in the offset of the intersection point in relation to selected additional line (abutment centreline). 696 Step Description 3. Fn Tools.. to access the Tools menu and select Stake intersection point. In some cases, more than one intersection point can be calculated. b P1 P2 a P3 P4 Road_104 a) b) P1 P2 P3 P4 Selected line Additional line Intersection point Intersection point Intersection point Intersection point 1 2 3 4 In this case a plot with the possibility to select the desired intersection point appears. The selection is made using the touch screen and a selectable list. All intersection points are marked with a yellow flag. The point ID and the point symbol of a selected intersection point are displayed in blue. 4. Height confirmation Depending on the available height information of the selected lines the following possibilities are available to define the height of the intersection point which has been selected for stakeout. • Using the design height, which is the height of the selected line (bridge centreline). This option is used by default or by pressing None. • Using the height of the additional line as manual height. This option appears when the additional line contains height information. • Using the average height of the selected line and of the additional line as manual height. This option appears when the additional line contains height information. • Using Use heights from DTM from the Tools Menu. This option is only available if a DTM has been selected in the job selection screen. 5. Stake Line, General page Depending on the height selection, the check box Use manual height instead of design heights is enabled automatically and the selected height is used for staking out. Viva Series, Roads - Road 697 Step Description Stake chainage is the intersection of the original line (bridge centreline) and the line which is offset from the additional line. This value is updated automatically. a d b c P1 Road_103 a) b) c) d) P1 6. Selected line, for example bridge centreline Stake chainage of intersection point Non-perpendicular offset from the selected line Selected additional line, for example abutment line Non-perpendicular offset angle Required intersection point for stakeout Stake Line, Offsets page Stake offset: After pressing Fn Tools.. and selecting Stake intersection point, the value is updated automatically to the non-perpendicular offset of the intersection point to the selected line (bridge centreline). Work with non-perpendicular offset: The check box is checked automatically after pressing Fn Tools.. and selecting Stake intersection point. Offset angle is updated automatically to the non-perpendicular offset angle of the intersection point to the selected line (bridge centreline). 7. To stake further points along the same alignment to the additional line, update the value for Stake offset by the required distances. In this case, Stake offset is the distance along/parallel to the additional alignment. Stake Line, Stake page To stake out the selected intersection point, all delta values must be 0.000. Viva Series, Roads - Road 698 48 Roads - Rail 48.1 Creating a New Rail Job 48.1.1 Overview Description There are two ways of creating road/rail jobs: Typing them in manually by using the Alignment Editor application. OR Converting data created in a design package. Manually entered data Data can be typed in and edited with Alignment Editor. Refer to "46 Roads - Alignment Editor" for information on how to enter data manually. Converted data The Import alignment data application in Jobs & Data supports various different formats like dxf, LandXml, MxGenio, Terramodel, Carlson. The Design to Field component of Leica Geo Office offers converters from several road/rail design and CAD packages. Several design packages also include a built-in converter to Roads/Rail. As different design packages follow different philosophies in representation, creation and storage of data the conversion process differs slightly. LEICA Geo Office Road_065 Leica Geo Office can be found on the Leica Geo Office DVD. The latest version of the Design to Field importers can be found in the downloads section of: • myWorld@Leica Geosystems https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com 48.1.2 Installing all necessary Software Install Leica Geo Office LGO runs under WindowsXP or Windows Vista and can only be installed successfully if the user is logged in as the Administrator. To install LGO, run the setup file from the DVD and follow the instructions on the screen. Install Design To Field To prepare the track design for use on the instrument successfully, the data must first be converted from its original format to an onboard job. This conversion is achieved using Design to Field, a component of LGO which is automatically installed with LGO. Install Importers The field importers are used by Design to Field to read in the track design. These importers are installed separately and have the file extension *.rri. The latest version of the Design to Field importers can be found in the downloads section of: • myWorld@Leica Geosystems: https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com Viva Series, Roads - Rail 699 Install Rail Editor Rail Editor is a computer program for defining the height of the rails relative to the horizontal and vertical alignments (superelevation). Rail Editor is automatically installed into LGO from the Field Importers install package, which can be found in the downloads section of the Leica Geosystems website. Rail Editor can be run either externally or within Design To Field. Install Roads and Rail Roads and Rail are the onboard programs which are loaded onto the instrument: • via a data storage device (under the System folder), which is inserted into the instrument, • via a serial cable and LGO. 48.1.3 Importing the Track Design with Leica Geo Office Importing the design Step Description 1. Starting the Design to Field program To import a track centreline select Design to Field from the Tools menu in LGO. 2. Selecting an Import Type To prepare track design for onboard use successfully, it has to be converted from its original data format to an onboard job which will run on the instrument. Select Importer Type: Rail Data 3. Selecting a Field Importer Importers are used to convert the data. Additional importer formats can be added to the selectable list by clicking Manage. Select the importer related to the track design from the selectable list of available importers. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 700 Step Description 4. Importing Click Import to start the file selection wizard. 5. Selecting the job type • For single tracks, select Rail Design-Single Track. A single track design can consist of a horizontal alignment, a vertical alignment and superelevation. • For double tracks, select Rail Design-Double Track. A double track design can consist of a horizontal alignment, a vertical alignment and superelevation for each track. Alternatively, a third horizontal alignment can also be defined and used for calculating the chainage of both tracks (chainage centreline). Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard. 6. Viva Series, Roads - Rail Selecting the horizontal and vertical alignment files 701 Step Description • For a single track, select the horizontal and vertical alignments using the browse button. • For a double track, three screens are used to define the design data. The arrows at the bottom of the screens can be used to move between the different screens. First screen - Centreline: The first screen defines the horizontal and vertical alignment of the chainage centreline. If the chainage for each track is to be calculated relative to each track centreline, then it is not mandatory to select a chainage centreline. The horizontal and vertical alignment on the first screen can be left blank. Second screen - Left track: The second screen defines the horizontal and vertical alignments and the rail definition (superelevation) of the left track. Third screen - Right track: The third screen defines the horizontal and vertical alignments and the rail definition (superelevation) of the right track. Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard. 7. Superelevation (rail definition) • Design data which is compulsory: A track design must contain a horizontal alignment. • Design data which is optional: A track design can include a vertical alignment and a rail definition (superelevation). Superelevation is only possible when the track design includes a vertical alignment. A superelevation file can be obtained in the following ways: • by selecting an existing superelevation file. • by selecting an existing superelevation file and modifying it with Rail Editor. • by creating a new superelevation file with Rail Editor. Creating a superelevation (rail definition) To create a rail definition (superelevation) for any track, click the Edit button next to the Superelevation file name. This action starts the Rail Editor program. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 702 Step Description The Rail Editor program is used to define the height of the rails at a given chainage. The height of the rails can be defined by a rotation point and a cant or by a left and right cant. Describing the screen elements - Entering Track Information Superelevation left and right To define the height of the rails using one superelevation value for the left rail and another superelevation value for the right rail. Superelevation by curve To define the rails using a rotation point and a superelevation value. Once the method by which the superelevation values are defined has been selected, it cannot be changed Co-Planar (for multiple tracks) To define the height of the rails of the second track by extending the plane which runs through the rails of the first track. Nominal Gauge The default nominal distance between the active (internal) faces of the left and right rails. This value can be changed if necessary for any rail definition (superelevation). Superelevation Base The distance over which the superlevation is applied. This distance is normally the distance between the centre of the left and right rail. This value can be changed if necessary for any rail definition (superelevation). Default Rotation Axis If a rotation point is used, this selection will be used as the default for all new rail definitions. This value can be changed if necessary for any rail definition (superelevation). Superelevation Format The format in which the superelevation values are entered. Once all superelevation data has been entered, press the button to add the data to the chainage assignment screen. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 703 Step Description To delete an element, select the element and press the button. To modify an existing element, select the element, modify the data and press the button. Once all values have been entered for the entire alignment, the file can be saved in an XML format using Save from the File menu. To return to the Design To Field converter, select Exit from the File menu. To modify an existing rail definition (superelevation) file, for example XML files, use Load option from the File menu. 8. Entering the alignment tolerances Enter the appropriate horizontal and vertical tolerances to be used during the checking of the alignments. Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard. 9. Checking the track design When the track design has been imported, information is displayed to show the success or failure of the import. • When the import is successful: Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard. • When the import is unsuccessful: Click Back to step back through the wizard. • If a problem is encountered a red symbol appears. Double click on the red symbol and a window containing a description of the problem appears. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 704 Step Description 10. Entering the range of chainages to be used Enter the range of chainages to be exported. Click Next to move to the next page of the wizard. 11. Checking the summary report • When the report is correct: Click Finish to complete the wizard. • When the report is incorrect: Click Back to step back through the wizard. 12. Viewing the track design The track design can be viewed graphically. Click Export to create the files for onboard use. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 705 Step Description 13. Creating the files for onboard use The track design can now be prepared. Click OK to create the files for onboard use. The database files are created and are located in the same folder as the source alignment files. Refer to the Design to Field User Manual for details on importing various types of data with various field importers. This manual is included in the Design to Field Converters install application RR_Design_to_Field.exe, which can be downloaded. 48.1.4 Loading the Track Design onto the Instrument Loading the design Once the track design has been converted, copy all the database files to the \DBX folder of the data storage device of the instrument. Refer to "Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device". 48.2 Defining the Work Access 1) Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Rail - Stakeout or Rail - As built check. 2) In the job selection screen, select the required jobs. Refer to "45.2.1 Accessing Roads Applications". 3) Press OK. Define Viva Series, Roads - Rail 706 Key Description OK To continue to the next screen. Shifts.. To apply horizontal and vertical shifts to the selected element. Refer to "45.4 Working with Shifts". Load.. To load a task. Refer to "45.5 Tasks". Save.. To save the settings as a task. Refer to "45.5 Tasks". Fn Config.. To access the Rail configuration settings. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Layer Display only or selectable list Layers contained in the active rail job can be selected, for example layer of left or right track design. Chainage line Display only Working chainage Editable field Shows the name of the chainage line, at the selected layer. To enter a chainage (ranging between the start chainage and end chainage) of the chainage centreline. The default is the setup point for TPS and the current position for GPS. Only those elements which appear at this chainage can then be selected from Line to use. The measured point values can be compared with the left rail, the right rail or the track centreline. The selectable list allows the selection of the line with which measured values are then compared. Line to use Centre line The track centreline. Left rail or Right rail • For design data including the rails: When working with design data including the rails, the horizontal and vertical alignment of the design is used. Depending on the rail design configuration setting, the superelevation of the design or the manually defined superelevation can be used. • For design data without rails (only track centreline): If the design data does not contain the rail design, then the position of the left rail is calculated. The nominal gauge entered in the program configuration is used for the calculation. • When working with horizontal alignments only: The height of the rails is calculated by using the values for Manual cant definition defined on Stake Track/Check Track, General page. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 707 48.3 Staking/Checking the Track 48.3.1 The Stake/Check Screen Staking points It is possible to stakeout points using a rail job with and without a stored rail design. When the position of the rails is not stored in the rail job, it is possible to stake out: • The horizontal and vertical alignment of the track centreline • Points with a known horizontal and vertical offset from the horizontal and vertical alignment of track centreline • The rails of the track by entering the track superelevation, superelevation base and nominal gauge • Points with known horizontal and vertical offsets from the manually defined rails. When the position of the rails is stored in the rail job, it is possible to stake out: • The horizontal and vertical alignment of track centreline • Points with a known horizontal and vertical offset from the horizontal and vertical alignment of track centreline • The rails of the track • Points with known horizontal and vertical offsets from the defined rails. Checking points Besides checking points, it is also possible to work with cants (superelevation): • The cant value can be entered manually. The value is measured using a device to measure the cant with an inclination sensor (camber measurement instrument). • The difference of the manually entered cant value and the current design cant can be displayed on Info page and is stored in the DBX. • The cant value can be measured by using the option Second point of cant of the Tools menu. A second point on the track is measured to calculate the cant using the measured height difference and the configured superelevation base. Stake Track/Check Track, General page Information regarding the measured point can be entered. This screen allows any point of the track to be checked against design values. Key Description Meas To start measuring the point being staked. The key changes to Stop. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 708 Key Description Stop To end measuring the point being staked. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in GPS Settings Quality Control, General page recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The key changes to Store. After ending the measurements, the differences between the measured point and the point to be staked are displayed. Store To store the measured point. When Automatically store point is checked in GPS Settings Quality Control, General page, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Dist To measure a distance. Ch- Available for Rail - Stakeout. To decrease the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Ch+ Available for Rail - Stakeout. To increase the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access Rail configuration settings. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Positn To position the total station to the defined stakeout point, including defined offsets. This depends on the settings for Turn to point in Configuration, TPS page. Refer to " Configuration, TPS page". Fn Tools.. To access the Tools Menu. Refer to "48.4 The Tools Menu". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field Name of the next point to be stored. The ID is incremented/decremented whenever a point gets stored. Antenna height Editable field Height of the antenna. Perp. antenna Editable field ht Perpendicular height of the antenna. Available when the perpendicular height is configured. Refer to " Configuration, Rail design page". Target height Editable field Height of the prism. Perp. target height Editable field Perpendicular height of the prism. Available when the perpendicular height is configured. Refer to " Configuration, Rail design page". Stake chainage Editable field The defined chainage of the point to be staked out. For multiple tracks that have a defined chainage centreline, the chainage to be staked out always refers to the chainage of the chainage centreline, not to the chainage of the track centreline. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 709 Field Option Chainge incre- Editable field ment Use cant device Check box Description Value by which the nominal chainage increases/decreases when pressing Ch-/Ch+. If a point is to be staked at more than one chainage, a chainage increment can be defined. When this box is checked, the cant value (superelevation) which was measured with an inclination sensor can be entered manually. The difference of the manually entered cant value and the current design cant is displayed on Info page. When this box is not checked, no cant difference (superelevation) is calculated of the current design cant and the measured cant. The current cant can be measured using the option Second point of cant from the Tools menu. Measured cant Editable field Available when Use cant device is checked. Positive or negative signs must be entered. Seen in increasing chainage direction: • Negative cant value (example: -0.1900 m) Rail_017 • Positive cant value (example: 0.1900 m) Rail_018 Use manual Check box height instead of design heights When Second Point of Cant of the Tools menu is active, the current cant value is used for the cant difference calculation, not the value for Measured cant. When this box is checked, a height value typed in manually is used instead of design height or DTM height. When this box is not checked, the height from design is used. Available for Superelevation: Design in Configuration, Rail design page. Manual height Editable field Manual cant definition Viva Series, Roads - Rail Display only Available when Use manual height instead of design heights is checked. The height to be used. This field and the following fields are available for Superelevation: Manual in Configuration, Rail design page. 710 Field Option Description Ht lower rail Editable field Defines the absolute height of the lowest rail at the defined chainage. Cant left Editable field Defines the superelevation at the left rail. • When working with horizontal alignments only: If the superelevation is rotated around the left rail, the superelevation would be zero. • When working with horizontal and vertical alignments: If the track is rotated around the left rail, the vertical alignment would coincide with the left rail and the superelevation would thus be zero. Cant right Editable field Defines the superelevation at the right rail. • When working with horizontal alignments only: If the track is rotated around the right rail, the superelevation would be zero. The total superelevation (left + right) is applied across the distance defined as the superelevation base in the configuration. • When working with horizontal and vertical alignments: If the track is rotated around the right rail, the vertical alignment would coincide with the right rail and the superelevation would thus be zero. The total superelevation (left + right) is applied across the distance defined as the superelevation base in the configuration. Next step Page changes to the Offsets page. Stake Track/Check Track, Offsets page Refer to "Stake Track/Check Track, General page" for a description of keys. Description of fields Field Option Description Apply offsets Check box When this box is checked, offsets can be typed in. Often it is necessary to set out points with a fixed plan offset and fixed height offset from a known reference line (track centreline or rail). Offsets are applied in the same way, irrespective of how the rail design has been entered, whether the offsets are manually entered or if library offsets are used. The sign of the offsets conforms to the offset sign convention described in "45.6 Understanding Terms and Expressions". Viva Series, Roads - Rail 711 Field Option Description b c d a Rail_013 a) b) c) d) Reference line (right rail) Point to stake Stake height diff Stake offset Manual Offsets can be entered in Stake offset/Check offset or Stake height diff/Check height diff. From library The offset is stored as part of the rail job and recalled whenever required. Offsets Selectable list Available for Offsets: From library. The point ID of the stored stake offsets. To select a different stored offset or to create a new point, highlight this field and open the selectable list. Refer to "48.3.2 Offset Library". Stake offset Editable field Available for Stake. Horizontal offset applied to the position of the reference line as defined by the design data or as calculated from manually entered data using the nominal gauge. Stake height diff Editable field Available for Stake. Vertical offset applied to the height of the reference line as defined by the design data or as calculated from manually entered data using the superelevation and superelevation base. Check offset Editable field Available for Check. Horizontal offset applied to the position of the reference line as defined by the design data or as calculated using manually entered data using the nominal gauge. Check height diff Editable field Available for Check. Vertical offset applied to the height of the reference line as defined by the design data or as calculated from manually entered data using the superelevation and superelevation base. Work with pendular displacement Check box This functionality is used in railway tunnels. The functionality is available for Rail - Stakeout and Rail - As built check. Some rail projects require additional pendular displacement calculation for the design axis. Offsets The track is rotated based on a line with a defined height offset (pendulum length) from the track centreline. This action defines a horizontal displacement for the track. The vertical alignment is independent from the pendular displacement and does not change. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 712 Field Option Description The pendular displacement calculation only influences the horizontal position of the design axis. It does not change the height of the track. When this box is checked, a pendulum length can be entered. From the original track definition, a pendulum centre is defined exactly above the axis point. The difference in elevation of the pendulum centre is the pendulum length. With the help of the superelevation, a displacement is calculated. The effect of the pendular displacement is displayed on the Info page. a b c d Rail_016 a) Pendulum length: The difference in elevation of the pendulum centre on the original track and above the axis point b) Resulting pendular displacement c) Displaced design axis based on pendular displacement calculation d) Design axis defined in horizontal alignment Pendulum angle Pendular length Editable field Available when Work with pendular displacement is checked. The pendulum length as distance value. Positive values (0 - 9999.9999) point upwards. Negative values are not allowed. Next step IF you work with THEN Page changes to the Rail - Stakeout Stake page. Rail - As built check Info page. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 713 Stake Line, Stake page This page is available for Rail - Stakeout only. This page displays the differences between the measured point and the defined point. The position of the point to stake is reached when all difference values are close to zero. The chainage can be de-/incremented by pressing left/right arrow key. The defined value for chainage increment is applied. Refer to "Stake Track/Check Track, General page" for a description of keys. Refer to "53.4 Staking Out" for a description of the elements of the graphical display. Description of fields Field Option Description Chainage Display only The current track chainage. CL O Display only Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. ∆ chainage Display only Difference between the defined Stake chainage and the current chainage Chainage of the measured position. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field shows -----. NrTP Display only The chainage difference between the measured point and the nearest tangent point (start/end point of a road segment) of the design is displayed. a b Road_099 a) Vertical alignment b) Horizontal alignment Only tangent points (start/end point of a road segment) are detected. ∆O Display only Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. The Stake offset defined on the Offsets page is taken into account. ∆ height Display only Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. The Stake height diff defined on the Offsets page is taken into account. Next step Page changes to the Info page. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 714 Stake Track/Check Track, Info page The Info page displays the differences between the measured and design data. The fields viewed on this page can be configured in Rail Configuration, Info page. Refer to "Configuration, Info page" for information on all available items for the Info page and how to select them. Stake Track/Check Track, Map page The Map page displays a plot of the measured point with respect to the track design. The design is defined by the selected rail or track centreline, and the values entered on the General page. The Map page for Check and Stake are similar. The only difference is that the current chainage is always shown, as shown on the Info page. Key Fn Layrs.. Description Refer to "Stake Track/Check Track, General page" for a description of keys. To turn layers of background maps (CAD files) on and off. Refer to "5.2 Creating a New Job"for information on CAD files and CAD background maps. The following information is shown: 1) Chainage difference between the measured point and the defined chainage. When working with random chainages, for instance if no defined chainage has been entered on the General page, ∆Ch changes to Ch. Ch is the current chainage as shown on the Stake page. 2) Horizontal offset (left/right arrow) to the design 3) Height difference (up/down arrow) to the design 4) The measured point 5) The element to stake is shown in bold and blue. The position to stake is marked with a yellow-black peg. 6) The plot can be shown as a cross plot or plan view by using the second level of MapView toolbar. Viva Series, Roads - Rail eye icon on 715 48.3.2 Offset Library Description To select a different stored offset or to create a new point. Access 1) In Stake Track/Check track, Offsets page, select Offsets: From library. 2) Highlight Offsets and open the selectable list. Rail job: Job name This screen allows offsets relative to a reference line to be defined and stored in the rail job. These points can be recalled at any time. Key Description OK To select a defined offset and to continue. Add To enter an offset. Edit.. To edit an existing offset. Delete To delete an existing offset. More To display information about the reference rail or the Offset and the height difference. Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step Press Add or Edit... Rail job: Job name, Offsets This screen allows the values of the stake/check offsets to be entered/edited. In addition to the horizontal and vertical offsets, an offset name (point ID) can be entered for each item. Next step Press OK twice to return to Stake Track/Check track. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 716 48.3.3 Working with Pendular Displacements Requirements In Stake Track/Check Track, Offsets page, check Work with pendular displacement and type in a value for Pendular length. Specific values on the Info page Value Description Pendular length The defined pendulum length as entered on Offsets page. Def pendulum displacement Resulting horizontal displacement at defined chainage. Actl pendulum displacement Resulting horizontal displacement at current chainage. Def pendulum angle Resulting pendulum angle at defined chainage. Actl pendulum angle Resulting pendulum angle at current chainage. 48.4 The Tools Menu 48.4.1 Overview Access Press Fn Tools.. on any page of the Stake/Check screen. Description Additional functions for staking/checking the track can be accessed through the Tools menu. This functionality is additional to those already existing functions which are available via the function keys. The functionality differs between the stake and check methods. Refer to these subchapters for a detailed description of the functionalities: • "48.4.2 Use heights from DTM" • "48.4.3 Apply current chainage" • "48.4.4 Stake individual point" • "48.4.5 Second point of cant" • "48.4.6 COGO Rail" 48.4.2 Use heights from DTM Availability This menu function is available for stake and check. Description The application offers the possibility to • switch to a height which is retrieved from an existing height layer, as defined in the selected DTM job. The layer from the DTM is applied and used as a height reference for the staking out or checking of alignments. • retrieve heights from an existing layer, as defined in the DTM job associated with the project. The DTM used is not considered for the stake values. Three new information lines are added to the Info page: DTM Ht Diff, DTM Height and DTM Layer. • show the DTM triangles in the planar view and in the cross section view on the Map page. Once defined, each layer remains active until it is turned off. DTM heights can be used for both 2D and 3D alignments. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 717 Use heights from DTM Key Description OK To confirm the settings and return to the Stake/Check screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description DTM Display only DTM from the selected DTM job. Use DTM height for stake out Check box When this box is checked, a layer of the DTM is used as a height reference. When this box is not checked, no DTM heights are applied for stakeout or check. DTM layer Selectable list Available when Use DTM height for stake out is checked. When selecting a DTM layer the relevant triangle of the DTM is shown on the Map page. Show DTM height difference on Info page Check box When this box is checked, a layer of the DTM to be used as a height reference on the Info page. When this box is not checked, no additional height information relative to the DTM is shown on the Info page. DTM layer Selectable list Available when Show DTM height difference on Info page is checked. Layer of the DTM to be used as a height reference. When selecting a DTM layer the relevant triangle of the DTM is shown in cross section view on the Map page. Show DTM on Check box map DTM layer Selectable list When this box is checked, the DTM triangles are displayed in planar view on the Map page. The setting of for this check box is linked to the setting for the Display DTM in map check box in Map View Settings, DTM page. All available layers are selectable. 48.4.3 Apply current chainage Availability This menu function is available for stake. Description To set Stake chainage on the General page of the stakeout to the current chainage. Viva Series, Roads - Rail 718 48.4.4 Stake individual point Availability This menu function is available for stake. Description To select the point to stake from the selected Working job. If a control job has been selected on the job selection screen, a point from the control job can be selected. When staking out/checking an individual point, the selected point is set in relation to the alignment and all line relevant values are calculated and displayed. To access Data:, Points page, which allows staking out points with known Easting, Northing and Height. Points can either be selected from the Working job or manually typed in. The Stake chainage and Stake offset of the Stake screen are calculated based on the coordinates of the selected point. The height for the stakeout can be set as Manual height. If the chosen point has no height the design height will be used. If the point has a height it is possible to use that one or continue working with the design height. 48.4.5 Second point of cant Availability This menu function is only available for check. Description To determine the current cant of two rails. In order to calculate the current cant, it is necessary to measure two points, one on each rail. A mechanical device can be used to measure these points if necessary. Additionally, the current cant can be calculated by first measuring any two points (example, the track centreline and lower rail) and then using the superelevation base. The calculation is dependent upon the superelevation base. When Second point of cant is active, the Current cant is used for the calculation of the cant difference, not the measured cant value from a cant device as seen in Check Track, General page. Diagram d e c b Rail_015 Viva Series, Roads - Rail a a) b) c) d) e) Left rail Right rail first point Second point of cant Current cant 719 Procedure Measuring the first point The first point can be measured directly from the Check Track screen. Measuring the second point The second point is measured after accessing the Second point of cant in the Tools menu. Once the second point has been measured, the value Current cant is displayed on the Info page. 48.4.6 COGO Rail The functionality of COGO Rail is identical with COGO Road. Refer to "47.4.6 COGO Road - Alignment Information". Viva Series, Roads - Rail 720 49 Roads - Tunnel 49.1 Creating a New Tunnel Job 49.1.1 Preparing Design Data Downloads section The tunnel design data is imported for use onboard the instrument using • the industry standard LandXML data format • formats exported from some other design packages using the Design to Field component of the Leica Geo Office computer application. Converters are available for more than 15 different design packages. The latest version of the Design to Field importers can be found in the downloads section of: • myWorld@Leica Geosystems https://myworld.leica-geosystems.com 49.1.2 Tunnel Centreline Basics The tunnel centreline is defined in two or three dimensions. If design profiles are to be used, a three-dimensional centreline is required. Design to field Step Description 1. To import a centreline using the Design to Field component select the Tools/Design to Field option of the Leica Geo Office computer application. 2. For general information about Design to Field, please refer to the Leica Geo Office manual or Online Help. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 721 49.1.3 Design Profiles Tunnel design profiles If tunnel design profiles are available, they are created using the Tunnel Profile Editor computer application. This application is integrated in the Design to Field viewer. It allows users to import or create tunnel data like profiles, layers and rotations. Refer to the Tunnel Profile Editor online help for more information. Tunnel Profile Editor, Profile details view Tunnel Profile Editor, Layer details view Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 722 Vertical or perpendicular profiles The Tunnel Profile Editor allows users to define tunnel profiles vertically or perpendicular to the vertical alignment of the tunnel axis. This results in different tunnel sizes for equal profile definitions as shown in the graphic. A B a a Tunnel_027 c b d b A Perpendicular (tilted) profile B Vertical profile a) Vertical alignment of tunnel axis b) Horizontal alignment of tunnel axis c) Chainage for perpendicular profile definition d) Chainage for vertical profile definition 49.1.4 Data Transfer to Instrument Getting data onboard Once the design data have been converted, copy the database files to the DBX folder of the data storage device that is used on the instrument. The file names are jobname.x**. 49.2 Defining the Work Access 1) Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Roads\Tunnel - Stakeout or Tunnel - As built check. 2) In the job selection screen, select the required jobs. Refer to "45.2.1 Accessing Roads Applications". 3) Press OK. Define the Work to be Done Key Description OK To continue to the next screen. Config.. To access the configuration settings. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of the methods Method Description Stake face Stakeout points at the tunnel face. Points are defined relative to the tunnel axis or the tunnel profile. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 723 Method Description Stake profile Stakeout points at defined chainages. Points are defined relative to the tunnel axis or the tunnel profile. Check profile Measure deviations of the built tunnel to the original design. Scan profile Automatically scan profiles in a defined section of the tunnel Next step OK accesses the Define screen. Define The screen is an example valid for Method to use: Stake face. Key Description OK To continue to the next screen. Shifts.. To apply horizontal, vertical and profile shifts to the selected element. Refer to "45.4 Working with Shifts". Load.. To load a task. Refer to "45.5 Tasks". Save.. To save the settings as task. Refer to "45.5 Tasks". Fn Config.. To access the configuration settings. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Common to all methods Field Option Description Layer Display only or selectable list Layers contained in the active tunnel job can be selected. Centreline Display only The name of the layer centreline. For Method to use: Stake face Field Option Description Drilling rig orientation Check box Available for Method to use: Stake face. This functionality helps to orientate the drilling rig when drilling holes parallel to the tunnel axis direction. The entry point at the tunnel face is marked and delta angles to align the drilling rig are provided. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 724 Field Option Description The following fields are available when Drilling rig orientation: Parallel to alignment is selected in Tunnel Configuration, Tunnel design page: Drilling distance Editable field Check Jumbo Check box position The bore hole length. Available when Drilling rig orientation is checked and used to calculate the direction parallel to the alignment. When this box is checked, the jumbo position is checked after measuring to the back of the boom. Boom length Editable field The length of the boom is used for calculating and checking the jumbo position when Check Jumbo position is checked. Tolerance Editable field Defines how accurately the boom must be positioned to calculate the delta angles (max 10% of boom length). Available when Check Jumbo position is checked. The following fields are available when Drilling rig orientation: Drill Pattern is selected in Tunnel Configuration, Tunnel design page: Apply drill pattern from Meas Chainage The drill pattern is directly applied to the measured chainage. To acquire the measured chainage, take a measurement, press Fn Tools.. and select Apply current chainage. Defined Chainage This chainage is typed manually into the Stake chainage editable field. It is used to calculate the corresponding position and drill direction at the measured chainage. For Method to use: Check profile Field Option Description Apply target radius Check box Available for Method to use: Check profile. When using a prism to check a design profile, it is important to take the prism radius into account. The measured point is projected by a distance equivalent to the radius of the prism in a direction perpendicular to the tangent of the design profile. When this box is not checked, the design profile is compared to the coordinates of the centre of the prism at the measured position. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 725 Field Option Description a d b >4m c ~2m Tunnel_013 a) b) c) d) Tangent to design profile Prism radius Prism Design profile If reflectorless measurements are used or no design profile has been defined, the prism radius parameter will not be used in the calculation. In Check Profile, Map page a plot of the measured point regarding the design profile is displayed. Target radius Editable field Available for Method to use: Check profile and when Apply target radius is checked. The radius of the prism. For Method to use: Scan profile Field Option Define a scan Scan whole task profile Scan using segment Description Each profile is scanned 360°/400 gon. The tunnel profile can be split into user-defined segments. Each segment can be assigned as a scan segment or non scan segment. c d e b a Tunnel_014 a) b) c) d) e) Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel Instrument axis Ventilation shaft Scan segment, included Scan segment, excluded Scan interval 726 Field Option Description Scan interval Editable fields Available for Define a scan task: Scan whole profile. Defines at what interval to measure a point around the profile. Scan Mode Accuracy optimised This measurement mode is accuracy and range optimized. It uses the reflectorless single distance measurement mode. Speed optimised Available for TS15. This measurement mode is speed and performance optimized. It uses the reflectorless continuous distance measurement mode. TPS handle is Check box on When this box is checked, scanning a segment above the instrument is excluded automatically. The TPS handle would otherwise interfere with measurements. Handle type If scanning at the station chainage, then the scan does not include the profile segment beneath the total station. Normal handle If this option is selected, then it is not scanned between 386 gon and 7 gon. Radio handle If this option is selected, then it is not scanned between 380 gon and 25 gon. 49.3 Staking/Checking the Tunnel 49.3.1 Overview Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile, General page This screen is an example valid for Method to use: Stake profile. Key Description Meas To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Dist To measure a distance. Store To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Ch- Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To decrease the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Dist+ To increase the distance along the profile. Available for Input method: Profile, dist & offset and Input method: Dist from top&offset. Ch+ Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To increase the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 727 Key Description Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access configuration settings. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Positn Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To stake the point automatically. The instrument aims toward the point at the given chainage and offsets and measures a distance. If this distance is not within the required tolerance an iterative process is started until: • the number of iterations set as the configuration parameter Max iterations is reached, or • the difference between the measured point and the design point is less than the value set as the configuration parameter Position limit. Fn Tools.. Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To access the tools menu. Refer to "47.4 The Tools Menu". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The point identifier of the point to be staked. Stake chainage Editable field Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. The defined or approximate chainage of the point to be staked out. Chainge incre- Editable field ment Available for Method to use: Stake profile.Chainage increment. Value by which the nominal chainage increases/decreases when pressing Ch+/Ch-. If a point is to be staked at more than one chainage, a chainage increment can be defined. Target height Editable field Available for Method to use: Check profile. The height of the prism. If a prism is used, type in the vertical difference between the point to be measured and the point of the prism pole. Next step Page changes to the Offsets page. Scan profile, Scan area page Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 728 Key Description Scan Available for automatic scanning. To start the scanning process. Refer to "During a scan". Stop Available for automatic scanning. To stop the scanning process. Pause To pause the scan. Resum To re-start scanning. Get Ch Point the telescope to the start or end chainage and press Get Ch to measure to the start/end chainage. Meas Available for manual scanning. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Dist Available for manual scanning. To measure a distance. Store Available for manual scanning. To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Pt+ To skip the point being measured and move onto the next profile point. Prof+ To stop scanning the current profile and move onto the next profile. Manual or Auto To switch between manual and automatic scanning. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access configuration settings. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Temp To define a temporary scan interval. This will result in all scan segments being scanned at the defined temporary scan interval until the temporary scan interval is disabled. Fn Tools.. To access the tools menu. Refer to "49.4 The Tools Menu". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The point identifier of the point to be staked. Station chainage Editable field The chainage of the instrument station. Start chainage Editable field and Start distance Enter/measure a chainage/distance value where scanning starts along the alignment. This can be before or after the station chainage. If entering a distance value to indicate start scanning before the station chainage use a negative. If entering a distance value to indicate start scanning after the station chainage use positive. End chainage Editable field and End distance Enter/measure a chainage/distance value where scanning ends along the alignment. This can be before or after the station chainage. If entering a distance value to indicate end scanning before the station chainage use a negative. If entering a distance value to indicate end scanning after the station chainage use positive. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 729 Field Option Description Before stn every Editable field If the scan area starts before the station chainage then define how often to scan a profile along the alignment from this chainage until the defined end chainage or station chainage (which ever comes first). After stn every Editable field If the scan area ends after the station chainage then define how often to scan a profile along the alignment from the station chainage or start chainage (which ever has a greater chainage) until the defined end chainage/distance. c e b f d a Tunnel_030 a) b) c) d) e) f) Alignment Station chainage Start chainage or Start distance End chainage or End distance Before stn every After stn every Next step Page changes to the Offsets page. Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile/Scan profile, Offsets page Refer to "Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile, General page" for a description of keys. Description of fields Common for all methods Field Option Description Apply offsets Check box When this box is checked, horizontal and vertical offsets can be applied. For Scan profile this does NOT offset or expand/shrink the design profile. For Tunnel - Stakeout Field Option To define the position of the point to be staked out. Input method Offset & height Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel Description The point is staked out with a known perpendicular and vertical offset from the horizontal and vertical alignments respectively. 730 Field Option Description c b a Tunnel_018 a) Centreline b) Centreline height difference c) Centreline offset From job The offsets of the point are stored as coordinates in the Working job. The Stake offset is stored as the X coordinate and the Stake height diffis stored as the Y coordinate. Profile, dist & offset The point is defined by the distance from the start of the profile and an offset perpendicular to the design profile. b c a Tunnel_019 a) Centreline b) Profile offset c) Distance from start of design profile Dist from top&offset The point is defined by the distance from the top of the tunnel and an offset perpendicular to the design profile. - + d b c a Tunnel_028 a) b) c) d) Element & offset Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel Centreline Top of profile Offset perpendicular to the profile segment Distance from the top of the profile The point to stake out is defined by: 1) The number of the element on which the point lies 2) The percentage of the distance along the element of the point to stake out 3) The offset perpendicular to the design profile. 731 Field Option Description c d e a b Tunnel_020 a) b) c) d) Centreline Point defining start of design profile Offset perpendicular to profile segment Distance from start of start point of segment in % e) Start point of segment Stake offset Editable field Applies a horizontal offset perpendicular to the centreline. Available for Input method: Offset & height. Stake height diff Editable field Applies a vertical offset to the centreline. Available for Input method: Offset & height. Point ID Selectable list Available for Input method: From job. Profile distance Editable field The distance from start of design profile. Available for Input method: Profile, dist & offset. Top distance Editable field The distance from the top of the tunnel. Available for Input method: Dist from top&offset. Profile offset Editable field The offset from the design profile. Available for Input method: Profile, dist & offset, Input method: Dist from top&offset and Input method: Element & offset. Increment Editable field To increment the distance for offset definitions as distance and offset. Available for Input method: Profile, dist & offset and Input method: Dist from top&offset. Element no. Editable field Element number 1 is the first element of the design profile. % Element Editable field Distance in percentage terms of the measured point along the design profile element. Check offset Editable field Available for Method to use: Check profile. Applies a horizontal offset perpendicular to the centreline used for comparing to the measured point. Check height diff Editable field Available for Method to use: Check profile. Applies a vertical offset to the centreline used for comparing to the measured point. Drill hz angle Editable field The horizontal direction 0 is along the centreline of the tunnel alignment. Tunnel_034 Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 732 Field Option Description α Drill v angle Editable field Drill hz angle The vertical direction 0 is along the centreline of the tunnel alignment. Tunnel_035 α Drill v angle For Tunnel - As built check Field Option Description Check offset Editable field Applies a horizontal offset perpendicular to the centreline used for comparing to the measured point. Check height diff Editable field Applies a vertical offset to the centreline used for comparing to the measured point. Next step Stake face/Stake profile, Stake page IF you work with THEN Page changes to the Tunnel - Stakeout Stake page. Tunnel - As built check Info page. This page is available for Tunnel - Stakeout only. This page displays the differences between the measured point and the defined point. The position of the point to stake is reached when all difference values are close to zero. Refer to "Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile, General page" for a description of keys. Refer to "53.4 Staking Out" for a description of the elements of the graphical display. Description of fields Field Option Description Chainage Display only The current chainage. CL O Display only Perpendicular horizontal offset from the centreline. ∆ chainage Display only Difference between the Stake chainage and the current chainage. If no defined chainage exists, for example if staking out random chainages or checking, this field shows -----. ∆O Display only Horizontal offset between the defined position and the current position. The offset defined on the Offsets page is taken into account. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 733 Field Option Description ∆ height Display only Vertical offset between the defined position and the current position. The height difference defined on the Offsets page is taken into account. Next step Page changes to the Info page. Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile/Scan profile, Info page The Info page displays the differences between the measured and design data. The fields viewed on this page are be configurable. Refer to " Configuration, Info page" for information on all available items for the Info page and how to select them. Stake face/Stake profile/Check profile/Scan profile, Map page The Map page displays a plot of the measured point regarding the tunnel design. This screen is an example valid for Method to use: Stake profile. Key Description Ch- Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To decrease the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. Ch+ Available for Tunnel - Stakeout. To increase the chainage as defined by Chainge increment. 49.3.2 Stake face Stake face Overview When excavating a tunnel, it is required to stake out the tunnel portal before excavation can begin. In addition, for excavation methods other than those involving tunnel boring machines (TBMs), it is then required to stake out the tunnel face at given intervals during the excavation. The tunnel face can be staked out at any time within the Tunnel application using Stake face. This function allows the setting out of a series of points perpendicular to the horizontal alignment. The horizontal alignment indicates the position of the design profile at the chainage of the tunnel face. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 734 Cross section view a a) Points to stake out Tunnel_015 Given that it is likely that a degree of rock debris is present at the tunnel face or that inexact excavation techniques such as blasting are used, it cannot be assumed that the tunnel face at any stage of the excavation is perpendicular to the horizontal alignment. This situation in turn implies that we cannot stake out a point on the tunnel face at a given chainage as the chainage of the tunnel face at any particular point is unknown. Iterative techniques are necessary to enable any defined point on the tunnel face to be staked out accurately. The Stake face function involves setting out a point on the tunnel face at this unknown chainage. First of all the point to stake out on the tunnel face is staked out at an approximate chainage (e). The point is defined by offsets regarding the centreline or by its position along the design profile and its offset from the profile. Given that the excavated tunnel face does not intersect the defined chainage, another point (e') is measured. First iteration e e' a e' e b a Tunnel_016 c d a) b) c) d) e) Centreline Instrument position Tunnel face Approximate chainage to stake out Point to stake out at approximate chainage e') Point to stake out on tunnel face The true chainage of the measured point of the first iteration (e') is then calculated. The defined point (e) is staked out at the calculated chainage (d). Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 735 Second iteration This process is repeated until the differences between staked point and the defined point are within a tolerance set by the user. e a e c d b Tunnel_017 Drilling rig orientation a a) b) c) d) e) Centreline Instrument position Tunnel face Calculated chainage from first iteration Point to stake out at calculated chainage Description This functionality helps to orientate the drilling rig when drilling holes parallel to the tunnel axis or using a drilling pattern, that is manual entry of drill direction. Drilling rig orientation step-by-step with Drilling rig orientation: Parallel to alignment Step Description 1. Make sure that Tunnel - Stakeout and Method to use: Stake face is selected. 2. In Tunnel Configuration, Tunnel design page, set Drilling rig orientation: Parallel to alignment. Refer to "Configuration, Tunnel design page". 3. In the Define screen check Drilling rig orientation and type in the values. Refer to "Defining the Work". 4. If Drilling rig orientation: Parallel to alignment was selected in Tunnel Configuration, Tunnel design page and Check Jumbo position was checked in the Define screen, then proceed to define the drill entry position on the tunnel face by entering the respective centreline offset in Stake Face, Offsets page. 5. In Stake Face, General page, enter the approximate tunnel face chainage. To position the laser pointer to the drill entry point press Fn Positn to find the point. 6. Position the drill bit to the laser point on the tunnel face. 7. Now the jumbo boom moves onto line between the laser point on wall and the telescope so that the laser now points at the back of the boom. Press Fn Tools... Select Check Jumbo position to get the delta angles which will be used by the drilling rig to move the boom parallel to the alignment. Horizontal angle Vertical angle Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 736 Drilling rig orientation step-by-step with Drilling rig orientation: Drill Pattern Step Description 1. Make sure that Tunnel - Stakeout and Method to use: Stake face is selected. 2. In Tunnel Configuration, Tunnel design page, set Drilling rig orientation: Drill Pattern. Refer to "Configuration, Tunnel design page". 3. In the Define screen, check Drilling rig orientation and select the application of the drill pattern. Refer to "Defining the Work". 4. If Apply drill pattern from: Defined Chainage was selected, then proceed to define the drill entry position for the measured chainage by entering the defined chainage centreline offsets in the Stake Face, Offsets page and the drill angles according to the defined chainage. 5. In the Stake Face, General page, enter the defined chainage value in the Stake chainage editable field. To position the laser pointer correctly on the measured tunnel face press Fn Positn. 6. The delta chainage value after using Fn Positn is the difference between the defined and measured chainage. It is normal if this is large. The delta position and delta height values after this step should equal zero. Position the drill bit to the laser point on the tunnel face. Example: d2 c b d1 d Tunnel_033 7. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel a a b c d d1 Chainage 10 Chainage 15 Chainage 20 Centreline Stake height diff at defined chainage 10 d2 Stake height diff at defined chainage 15 Stake face point 1 at chainage 10 (point1). Stake face point 1 at chainage 15 as defined at chainage 10. Position and direction at chainage 15 are a result of the Stake offset, Stake height diff and drilling angles as defined for chainage 10. Now the jumbo boom moves onto line between the laser point on wall and the telescope so that the laser now points at the back of the boom. Press Fn Tools... Select Check Jumbo position to get the delta values which will be used by the drilling rig to move the boom for the correct drilling direction. 737 49.3.3 Stake profile and Check profile Stake/Check point on surface c d a) b) c) d) e) f) e b f a Tunnel_021 Centreline Design point to stake out Excavated profile Design profile Centreline offset Centreline height difference If it is not possible to stake out the defined point between successive iterations, the instrument will maintain the chainage and height difference from the vertical alignment fixed. The horizontal offset from the centreline to calculate the new position of the point are modified. The point that will be staked out will thus maintain the defined chainage and height difference but will have a modified offset value from the centreline. c d e b f a Tunnel_022 a) b) c) d) e) f) Centreline Point to stake out on excavated profile Excavated profile Design profile Centreline offset Centreline height difference Rotated profile b c a Tunnel_029 Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel a) Centreline b) Rotated centreline offset c) Rotated centre height difference 738 49.3.4 Scan profile Overview A tunnel surface is scanned in detail during construction and/or at the completion of construction to detect overbreak, underbreak and/or to create an 'as built plan' of the finished tunnel surface. Scan profile allows measuring a user-defined number of tunnel profiles along an existing tunnel alignment. It can be defined: • Whether to scan the whole tunnel profile or just a segment of it. • The interval between measurements around the profile. It does not matter if a design profile exists in the job or not. If the job does not contain a design profile, then before scanning the defined scan area the instrument will first scan a profile at the instrument chainage. For a description of the Scan profile, Scan area page, refer to "49.3.1 Overview". During a scan During a scan • Pt+: To skip the point being measured and move onto the next profile point. • Prof+: To stop scanning the current profile and move onto the next profile. • Temp: To enter a temporary scan interval. Pause and options before continuing It is possible to end the scan once started using Stop. To pause the scan, for example to allow passing site traffic through, use Pause. Once • • • the scan has been paused, several options are available before continuing: Stop: To end the scan. Resum: To continue the scan at the next position. Manual: To interrupt the current scan so aiming can be done manually and points added. • Auto: After measuring points manually, press Auto to continue scanning where you finished before pressing Manual. Define Temp Scan Interval By pausing the current scan and pressing Temp, a temporary scan interval can be entered. This results in all scan segments being scanned at the defined temporary scan interval until the Define Temp Scan Interval screen is re-entered and Use a temporary scan interval is unchecked. Description of fields Field Option Description Use a temporary scan interval Check box If this box is checked, then scanning stops and any defined scan interval is ignored and replaced by the temporary scan interval. Temporary scan interval Editable field How often a point is measured around a profile. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 739 Invalid measurements This process is repeated until the measured point is within the chainage limit or the maximum number of iterations has been reached. Invalid measurement situations could occur, for example: • in irregular tunnel surfaces, where the horizontal alignment is formed by a curve with a small radius. • if the end distance or start distance defined in Scan Profile, Scan area page were too large. Scan Segments If Define a scan task: Scan using segment was selected in the Define screen, then the Scan Segments screen allows creating, editing or deleting scan segments. Key Description OK To continue to Scan Profile after defining the scan segments. New.. To create a new scan segment. Edit.. To edit a defined scan segment. Delete To delete a defined scan segment. Scan To set Yes or No in the Scan column for the highlighted segment. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Name Name of the scan segment. Scan Status to scan or not scan a segment. Interval How often a point is measured around the profile. Next step New.. to access New Scan Segment. New Scan Segment This screen allows the definition of one or multiple segment(s) of the scan profile as opposed to scanning the whole profile. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 740 When defining the scan segment, define the start and end angles in the station profile. The vertical circle values are used not the horizontal circle values so transit the telescope between face 1 and 2 as needed. Key Description OK To store the defined scan segment and return to Scan Segments. Dist To measure the distance to points at the starting angle and the end angle of a segment. When Start angle or End angle is highlighted, set the verticle circle values by aiming the telescope at the relevant point and press Dist. Positn To review the position of the segment once it has been defined. The instrument turns to the corresponding angle. Available when Start angle or End angle is highlighted. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Segment name Editable field The name of the scan segment. Start angle Display only The angle measured to the point at the beginning of the segment. Highlight this field, aim at the start of the segment and press Dist to see the angle value in this field. End angle Display only The angle measured to the point at the end of the segment. Highlight this field, aim at the end of the segment and press Dist to see the angle value in this field. Scan this segment Check box When this box is checked, the segment is scanned. When this box is not checked, the segment is not scanned. Scan interval Editable field Defines how often a point is measured in this segment of the profile. If overlapping segments are defined, then a non scan segment has priority over a scan segment. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 741 49.4 The Tools Menu 49.4.1 Profile Viewer Availability This menu function is available for the check method Scan profile. This menu option is always available. The data that can be viewed depends on those data available in the working job. It is independent of the currently measured Scan Profile points. The measured profiles to be viewed must be saved in the working job. Access Press Fn Tools.. on the Scan Profile page. View at - Layer Name, Profiles page Key Description OK To confirm the settings and return to the Scan Profile screen. Delete To delete the highlighted profile. More To display information about the time and the date of when the profile was stored. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Chainage The chainage of the profile. Nº Points The number of points in the profile. Time and Date The time and the date of when the profile was stored. Next step Page changes to the Points page. The points belonging to the profile which is highlighted on the Profiles page are displayed. Points can be deleted from the profile. Page changes to the Map page. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 742 View at - Layer Name, Map page Key Description OK To accept the settings and return to the Scan Profile screen. <-- or --> To select the relevant point in the plot. The information displayed shows the centreline offset, the delta height and delta profile of the point. Points can also be selected on the touch screen. Ch- or Ch+ To decrease/increase the chainage. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access MapView configuration settings. Refer to "37.3 Configuring MapView". Fn Positn To position the total station to the defined point, including defined offsets. Fn Quit To exit the application. 49.4.2 Stake face auto Description To stakeout tunnel face points automatically. The surveyor configures and selects the points to use in the stakeout. The person driving the drilling machine can see the stakeout points looking to the current position of the laser. Availability This menu function is available for the stake method Stake face. This menu option is available if the defined chainage has a valid value. Measure mode: Continuous is supported. Access Stake Face Auto, General page Step Description 1. Press Fn Tools.. in Stake Face. 2. Select Stake Face Auto in Stake Face Toolbox. Key Description OK To access the Stake Face Auto screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 743 Description of fields Field Option Description Store staked points Check box When this box is checked, the staked points are stored. Wait time after Check box staked point When this box is checked, a time delay is active after staking a point and before staking the next point starts. Delay Editable field Verify orienta- Check box tion The time delay after staking a point and before staking the next point starts. Available when Wait time after staked point is checked. When this box is checked, the system checks orientation automatically in a defined interval. If the orientation error is greater than the defined Hz tolerance, then the auto mode is stopped. Orientation job Selectable list A point for the orientation check can be selected from a job on a data storage device. Available when Verify orientation is checked. Orientation point Selectable list The point ID of the point for the orientation check. Available when Verify orientation is checked. Hz tolerance Editable field Tolerance for horizontal directions. If the orientation error is greater than the defined angle, then the auto mode is stopped. Available when Verify orientation is checked. Next step Page changes to the Points page. Stake Face Auto, Points page Select the points to include in the stakeout. Key Description OK To access the Stake Face Auto screen. Use To set Yes or No in the Use column for excluding/including the highlighted point. Any line can be selected on the Map page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Point ID Displays the name of all points in the selected Tunnel job. Use For Yes: The selected point is used for stake. For No: The selected point is not used for stake. CL offset The horizontal offset of the point from the layer centreline. CL ht diff The height difference of the point to the layer centreline. Next step Page changes to the Map page. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 744 The Map page shows a cross section, profile and planar view of the design data at the selected chainage. Point selection/deselection is possible on the Map page. IF THEN a single point is to be selected/deselected tap on the point. multiple points are to be selected Stake Face Auto click the icon, drag the stylus on the screen in a diagonal line to make a rectangular area. When Stake face auto is activated, the measurement screen opens. In a loop, all selected points are automatically staked indefinitely until the user stops the measurement, or the orientation check is out of tolerance. Key Description Stop To stop the automatic stakeout. Pause To pause the automatic stakeout. Resum To re-start the automatic stakeout. <-- To select the previous point. --> To select the next point. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To access configuration settings. Refer to "45.3 Configuring Roads Applications". Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Roads - Tunnel 745 50 Scanning 50.1 Accessing Scanning Availability Available for MS50 R2000 and on CS when connected to MS50 R2000. Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Scanning. Scanning Depending on the status of the job and actual instrument setup, the icons are active or not. If a new working job and a new setup have been created, then only Create scan definition and Scan settings are active. 50.2 Defining a Scan Access Select Create scan definition in Scanning. The New Scan Definition wizard starts. Create Scan Definition A unique name for the new scan definition. The name can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. Input required. Next changes to the next screen. Choose Scanning Method Description of fields Field Option Description Select one of the following options to define a scan area. Method Rectangular area Area defined by upper left and lower right corner. Either turn the telescope manually. Or use the Turn to point option from the context menu. Refer to "37.6 Context Menu". If the first point is the top left corner, then the second point is then to the bottom right corner point. Or the first corner is the bottom left corner point and the second point is then the top right corner point. Polygonal area Area defined by three or more corners in clockwise direction. Either point the telescope to the corners (actual position of the crosshair). Or draw the polygonal scan area on the Camera tab. The closing line between the first and the last point has a different line style. Manually entered To define a scan area manually by typing in the HZ and V value of two diagonal corners of a rectangle. Full dome scan area Viva Series, Scanning If scan definitions have already been defined from the current instrument setup, the scan areas are displayed on the Camera tab in Manually Entered Extents. A new scan area can be defined in addition to the existing scan areas. The scan area is the full field of view of the instrument. 746 Next step Next changes to the next screen. Camera view and Camera page The scan area can be defined on the camera view/Camera page of the telescope camera and overview camera. Switching between both cameras is possible. Description of keys Key Description Next Available when defining rectangular areas. To accept the selected point and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Available when defining a scan area manually. To accept the defined extension of the scan area and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Add Available when defining polygonal areas. To add the current crosshair position as a next point to the polygonal area. Dist To correct the paralaxe by taking a reflectorless distance measurement. The crosshair style changes from the coarse style to the fine style. Done Available when defining polygonal areas. To confirm the defined scan area and to proceed to the subsequent screen. At least three points must be defined. Back To return to the previous screen where the definition mode can be selected. Fn Config.. To configure the camera view. Refer to "Camera View Settings, General page". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of icons If Display TS camera zooming toolbar is checked in Camera View Settings, General page, icons are available in a toolbar located on the right side of the screen. Refer to "Overview of keys, softkeys and icons" for the right toolbar icons. The toolbar on the left side of the screen is always active. Icon Description To scroll the toolbar. Drawing mode is active. To add a point to the polygonal area tap the point on the display. Moving by joystick is active in the drawing mode. Tab and turn mode is active. To add a point to the polygonal area tab a point on the display. The instrument turns so that the digital crosshairs on the display point to the tapped point. Check the point and press Add. To delete the last selected point of the polygonal area. To delete the whole boundary of the polygonal area and to re-start the definition of the polygonal scan area. Viva Series, Scanning 747 Scan Resolution The resolution has a direct influence on the file size. Key Description Next To accept changes and to continue with the subsequent screen within the wizard. Dist Available when Define spacing by: Distances is selected. To take a reflectorless distance measurement. The measured value is displayed in the Slope distance. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Define spacing by Angles The scan resolution is defined by horizontal and vertical angle values. Distances The scan resolution is defined by horizontal and vertical spacings at a certain range. Hz and V Editable field Available for Define spacing by: Angles. The horizontal and vertical angle values defining the scan resolution. Slope distance Editable field Available for Define spacing by: Distances. The range for which the horizontal and vertical spacing are valid. Horizontal spacing and Vertical spacing Editable field Available for Define spacing by: Distances. The horizontal and vertical spacing defining the scan resolution at the defined range. Estimated points Display only The estimated number of points to be scanned according to the defined scan resolution. Next step Next changes to the next screen. Scan Mode Key Description Next To accept and record the scan mode. Dist To measure and display distances. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Optimise scan 1000 pts/s, up to for.. 300m Viva Series, Scanning Description • 1000 Hz scanning mode. • Range up to 300 m. • Optimal to use when time is critical. 748 Field Option Description 250 pts/s, up to 400m • 250 Hz scanning mode. • Range up to 400 m. • Optimal for use when time and accuracy are critical. 62 pts/s, up to 500m • 62 Hz scanning mode. • Range up to 500 m. • Optimal for use when accuracy and range are critical. Approx 1 pt/s, up • 1 Hz long range mode. to 1000m • Range up to 1000 m. • Optimal for long range applications Time required Display only The time that the measurement needed. Average scan Editable field distance (optional) Slope distance to the scanning object. This distance is optional. By knowing the distance to the object, the system optimises the scanning speed. Next step Next changes to the next screen. Scan Distance Filter Key Description Finish To exit the wizard. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Use distance Check box filter - only objects within the minimum & maximum distance will be scanned Description When this box is checked, only objects within the defined distance range are scanned. Min distance Editable field Minimum distance of the scan distance. Max distance Editable field Maximum distance of the scan distance. Next step Finish to exit the wizard. Viva Series, Scanning 749 50.3 Configuring Scanning Access Select Scan settings in Scanning. Scan Settings Key Description OK To return to Scanning. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Store signal to Check box noise ratio (SNR) values with scan points When this box is checked, the value of the Signal to Noise Ration of the returned signal is stored as additional information to the scan area. Store scan Check box area on panoramic image (if panoramic image is captured) When this box is checked, the scan area is laid over the image and stored with the image when a panoramic image is captured. Check box When this box is checked, a scan is paused when a message is shown. Pause scanning when a message is shown Apply filter to Check box optimise the point cloud Viva Series, Scanning Description When this box is checked, the filter creates an optimum of the point cloud regarding data quality. 750 50.4 Starting a Scan Access Select Start scan in Scanning. Scan Status, Progress page Key Description Start To start scanning. Stop To end scanning. By stopping the scan, the already scanned points are stored in a file. The scan gets the status Scan completed. Pause and Scan To pause/re-start scanning. Cpture Available as long as the scan has not yet started. To take an image with the current pixel resolution. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Scanning Field Option Description Scan name Display only Then name of the first or current scan. Points scanned Display only The total number of scanned points. % completed Display only In percent, the number of scans taken against the total number of scans which must be taken. Time remaining Display only Estimated time remaining until the scan is finished. Scans completed Display only Number of scans being measured / Number of total scans 751 51 Sets of Angles 51.1 Overview Description Sets of Angles: • This application is used to measure multiple sets of directions and distances (optional) to pre-defined target points in one or two faces. The application can include Monitoring as an option. • The mean direction and mean distance (optional) to each target point, within a set is calculated. The residual for each direction and distance (optional) within a set is also calculated. • The reduced average direction and average distance (optional) to each target point, for all active sets is calculated. • Coordinates to each target point are calculated using the reduced average direction and average distance (optional). Monitoring: • This module can be integrated within the Sets of Angles program. • With this module, it is possible to use a timer to enable repeated and automated angle and distances measurements to pre-defined target points at defined intervals. If the message panel appears which requires that the application must be activated via a license key then refer to "30.3 Load licence keys". Diagram P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P0 TS_048 Known: P1 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional) P2 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional) P3 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional) P4 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional) P5 Pre-defined target point - E,N,Height (optional) Unknown: a) Mean direction and mean distance (optional) to each target point, within a set b) Mean coordinates (optional) for each target point, for all active sets c) Residual for each direction and distance (optional ), within a set d) Reduced average direction and average distance (optional) to each target point, for all active sets Automatic aiming Automatic aiming (search and measurements) can be performed to a prism. After completing the first measurements to each target point, the measurements to the target points in subsequent sets are automated. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 752 Station setup and station orientation If oriented grid coordinates are to be recorded, a station set up and station orientation is required before starting the Sets of Angles application. Point averaging Sets of Angles points are never calculated as an average, even if a measured point of class Meas already exists with the same point ID. 51.2 Sets of Angles 51.2.1 Accessing Sets of Angles Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Sets of angles. Sets of Angles Key Description OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the next screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Sets of Angles application. Refer to "51.2.2 Configuring Sets of Angles". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of options Options Description Create a new group To define the target points. Refer to "51.2.3 Creating New Point Groups". Select an existing group To select, edit and manage a points group of the target points for the survey. Refer to "51.2.4 Managing Existing Point Groups". Viva Series, Sets of Angles 753 51.2.2 Configuring Sets of Angles Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Sets of angles. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Parameters page The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for all pages, unless otherwise stated. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Config.. To edit the survey screen page currently being displayed. Available when a list item in Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "25.3 My Survey Screen". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages. To define what action is taken when a message screen appears during a measurement set. Stop for messages Viva Series, Sets of Angles All messages All message screens are displayed as per normal and are closed as defined by the settings in Time out. Tol exceeded only Only the message screen relating to the exceeding of tolerances is displayed and is closed as defined by the settings in Time out. Never stop No message screens are displayed except for specific warnings. Specific warnings which affect the instrument and its ability to continue with the monitoring process will be displayed and will remain on the screen. These warnings include the overheating of the instrument, low battery levels, or unavailable space on the data storage device. 754 Field Option Description To define the time delay for the automatic closing of message screens during a measurement set. This selectable list is not available when Stop for messages: Never stop. Time out No time out There is no automatic closure, only by user interaction in a message screen. When a message screen appears, press Yes to close. 1 sec to 60 sec All message screens are automatically closed as defined by these individual time settings. To define the action if a target point cannot be measured. Re-measure points Never The target point is skipped and the next target point in the list is measured. Automatically The measurement to the target point is repeated automatically. The option for Measure mode in Measure & Target Settings is also changed for the repeated measurement. If the option is changed, then it is applied to all following sets. Manually The measurement to the target point can be repeated manually or the target point can be skipped. Sort points by Hz angle Check box Check this box to sort the target points automatically. The instrument will work in a clockwise direction and find the shortest path to move between the target points. Define time when sets should be measured (timer monitoring) Check box This field is only available when Monitoring is registered through the licence key. When this box is checked, automatic monitoring of target points is activated. When this box is not checked, automatic monitoring of target points is not activated. The Sets of Angles application will apply. Next step Page changes to the Tolerances page. Configuration, Tolerances page Description of fields Field Option Description Use tolerances Check box If checked, the entered horizontal, vertical and distance tolerances are checked during the measurements to verify accurate pointing and measurements. Hz tolerance Editable field Tolerance for horizontal directions. V tolerance Editable field Tolerance for vertical directions Distance tolerance Editable field Tolerance for distances. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 755 Next step Page changes to the Defaults page. Configuration, Defaults page Define the default target properties for points that are added to the point group by importing. Description of fields Field Option Target height Editable field The default prism height. Target Selectable list Target names as configured in the Targets screen. Leica constant Display only The additive constant as stored for the selected prism in the SmartWorx Viva software. Target aiming Manual Measurements are done without any automation. ATR search and/or ATR measurement are not performed. Automatic Positioning to static prisms. The ATR sensor is used for measurements to static prisms. If needed an ATR measurement or ATR search is performed after pressing Meas or Dist. Lock Availability depends on instrument type. The instrument locks onto and follows the moving prism. Good If weather conditions are normal, then select this mode. Rain & fog To increase the instrument measuring ability during suboptimal weather conditions. This mode is automatically deactivated when the instrument is turned off. Rain & fog always As for Rain & fog, however this mode stays active when the instrument is turned off. Visibility Description Sun & reflec- To increase the instrument measuring ability tions during incident solar radiation and reflections, for example safety vests. This mode has a considerable influence on the range. This mode is automatically deactivated when the instrument is turned off. Sun & rflctns As for Sun & reflections, however this mode always stays active when the instrument is turned off. Use precise target Check box aiming Available for the 0.5" instruments of TS50/TM50. When this check box is checked, ATR measurements with higher accuracy are performed. Use ultra fine aiming Check box Reduces the field of view of the ATR. The setting is only applied for Target aiming: Automatic in Measure & Target Settings. Automatically survey points Check box Check this box to survey the target points automatically. The instrument will automatically turn and measure the target point. For instruments with automatic aiming. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 756 Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. 51.2.3 Creating New Point Groups Description The points to be used for Sets of Angles can be selected and the first set measured. The measurement settings of the first measurement to each point are used for all further sets. Access Highlight Create a new group in Sets of Angles and OK. New Point Group Viva Series, Sets of Angles 757 Key Description Store To store the new points group. Fn Config.. To configure the Sets of Angles application. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Point group name Editable field Add Points To Group Description The name of the points group. Key Description OK To select the checked option and to continue with the next screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of options Option Description Measure points When this box is checked, the points to be used for Sets of Angles can be measured. Use for sets Available when Measure points is checked. To select the measuring sequence. Add individual points from a job When this box is checked, a control job can be selected. Individual points can be selected from this job. Refer to "Select Points - Survey, Sets page". Add all points from When this box is checked, a control job can be selected. All a job points from the control job are added to the point group by pressing OK. Select Points to be Added, Points page The points are sorted in alphabetical order. To sort points by horizontal angle, check Sort points by Hz angle in Configuration Parameters, page. Key Description OK To store the points to the group. Select To change the setting in the Select column for the highlighted point. More To display information about the 3D coordinate quality, the class, Easting, Northing and Elevation, the time and the date of when the point was stored, Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 758 Key Description Fn All or Fn None To change the setting in the Select column for all scans at once. Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step Page changes to the Plot page. The points from the list are displayed in black. The other points from the working job are displayed in grey. Define Points for Set Key Description OK To measure the entered point and to access Select Points - Survey. Done To finish selection of points and access Sets of Angles for further steps. Fn Config.. To configure the Sets of Angles application. Fn Get Pt To select points stored in the database. Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Use ultra fine aiming Check box Reduces the field of view of the ATR. The setting is only applied for Target aiming: Automatic in Measure & Target Settings. Automatically survey points Check box Available for instruments with automatic aiming and Target aiming: Automatic. If checked, search and measurements are done to specified targets in additional sets. Next step IF THEN new or selected points are to be measured OK to access Select Points - Survey. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 759 IF THEN existing points are to be selected Fn Get Pt to select a point from Data, Points page. all desired points Done to return to the Manage Point Group:. have been selected and measured Select Points Survey, Sets page Key Description Meas To measure and store the angles and distance, and to return to Define Points for Set. Dist To measure a distance. Store To store data and to return to Define Points for Set. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description ∆ Hz Display only Difference between the current horizontal angle and the horizontal angle to this target when selected. ∆ AR Display only Available when Hz angle display: Angle right is configured in Regional Settings, Angle page. Difference between the current angle right and the angle right to this target when selected. ∆V Display only Difference between the current vertical angle and the vertical angle to this target when selected. ∆ slope Display only Difference between the current slope distance to the target and the slope distance to this target when selected. Next step Meas to measure and store the angles and distance, and to return to Define Points for Set. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 760 51.2.4 Managing Existing Point Groups Description A point group of the target points for the survey can be selected. Access Highlight Select an existing group in Sets of Angles and OK. Existing Point Groups Key Description OK To continue with the next screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Sets of Angles application. Refer to "51.2.2 Configuring Sets of Angles". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Point Groups Selectable list The name of the points group. No. of points Display only The number of points in the group. Creation date Display only The date of when the point group was created. Creation time Display only The time of when the point group was created. Next step OK to access Point Groups. Point Groups Edit Point Group, Points page Key Description OK To continue with the next screen. New.. To create a new point group. Edit.. To edit the highlighted point group. Delete To delete an existing points group. More To display additional information. Fn Quit To exit the application. Key Description OK To store the points to the group. + Pts To add points to the group. Prop.. To view or change the settings for a point. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 761 Key Description Prev to display the previous point of the point group. Available unless the beginning of the list is reached. Next to display the next point in the list of points. Available unless the end of the list is reached. More To display information about the date, the 3D coordinate quality, the point code, the target height and fine aiming. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn - One To remove all points from the group. Fn - All To remove the highlighted point from the group. The point itself is not deleted. Fn Quit To exit the application. 51.2.5 Measuring the Sets Description The points defined in the point group are measured with the defined measurement method and for the defined number of sets. Access Highlight Measure Sets in Sets of Angles and OK. Measure Sets Key Description OK Opens a screen to measure the points. When auto survey is activated, measurements are done automatically. Fn Config.. To configure the Sets of Angles application. Refer to "51.2.2 Configuring Sets of Angles". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description No. of sets Editable field The number of sets to measure with the target points. The maximum of sets allowed is 200. No. of points Display only The number of target points. Determines the order in which the target points are to be measured. Measure method A'A"B"B' Viva Series, Sets of Angles The target points are measured in face I and face II. point A I - point A II - point B II - point B I ... 762 Field Option Description A'A"B'B" The target points are measured in face I and face II. point A I - point A II - point B I - point B II ... A'B'A"B" The target points are measured in face I and face II. point A I - point B I... point A II - point B II ... A'B'B"A" The target points are measured in face I and face II. point A I - point B I... point B II - point A II... A'B'C'D' The target points are only measured in face I. point A I - point B I - point C I - point D I ... Next step OK to measure further sets of the defined points. Set n of n, Pt n of n, Sets page Key Description Meas To measure and store the angles and distances, and to increment to the next point. Dist To measure a distance. Store To store data and to increment to the next point. Skip To skip measuring the displayed point and continue with the next point. Pause or Resume To pause/re-start the set measurement. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Done To end the sets of angles measurements and to return to Sets of Angles. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description ∆ Hz Display only Difference between the current horizontal angle and the horizontal angle to this target when selected. ∆V Display only Difference between the current vertical angle and the vertical angle to this target when selected. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 763 Field Option Description ∆ slope Display only Difference between the current slope distance to the target and the slope distance to this target when selected. Target aiming Manual Measurements are done without any automation. ATR search and/or ATR measurement are not performed. Automatic Positioning to static prisms. The ATR sensor is used for measurements to static prisms. If needed an ATR measurement or ATR search is performed after pressing Meas or Dist. Lock Availability depends on instrument type. The instrument locks onto and follows the moving prism. Good If weather conditions are normal, then select this mode. Rain & fog To increase the instrument measuring ability during suboptimal weather conditions. This mode is automatically deactivated when the instrument is turned off. Rain & fog always As for Rain & fog, however this mode stays active when the instrument is turned off. Visibility Sun & reflec- To increase the instrument measuring ability tions during incident solar radiation and reflections, for example safety vests. This mode has a considerabel influence on the range (restriction 100 150 m). This mode is automatically deactivated when the instrument is turned off. Sun & rflctns As for Sun & reflections, however this mode always stays active when the instrument is turned off. Use precise target Check box aiming Available for the 0.5" instruments of TS50/TM50. When this box is checked, four ATR measurements are performed and the mean value out the measurements is considered for the angle value. Check box Reduces the field of view of the ATR. The setting is only applied for Target aiming: Automatic in Measure & Target Settings. Use ultra fine aiming Next step Meas to measure further sets of the selected points. • Motorised instruments point automatically in the direction of the targets. • Instruments with automatic aiming and auto survey activated, measure the targets automatically. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 764 Measurement Summary This screen is displayed automatically at the end of the sets measurement. Key Description OK To continue with the next screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns After measuring sets Column Description Point This column is always visible. Points of the point group in the same order as in the point group. Compl meas How many times the point was successfully measured. Example: 4/6 - The point was measured four times, six sets were measured. In tolerance How many times the tolerance configured was met. Example: 4/6 - The point falls within the defined tolerance four times, six sets were measured. Compl sets How many sets are completed. The value is the same for all points. Example: 4/6 - The point was measured in a complete set four times, six sets were measured. Depending on points skipped or not, select how to continue. Key Description OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the next screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of options Options Description Always available: Measure more sets To measure additional sets. Available for sets incomplete: Re-measure incomplete sets To re-measure the skipped points in the face that was skipped. To fill in the missing measurements in the sets. Remove incomplete points To calculate results. The skipped points are discarded. Only points measured in all sets are used for the calculation. Remove incomplete sets To calculate results. The sets that contain skipped points are discarded. Only the complete sets are used for the calculation. Available for sets complete: View and manage results Available when no points are skipped. Refer to "51.2.6 Managing Results". Compute points from results Available when no points are skipped. To compute points from set results. Exit Sets of Angles To end the Sets of Angles program. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 765 51.2.6 Managing Results Description For two and more sets measured with angles and distances in two faces, calculations for angles and distances can be done. For sets measured in one face, the standard deviation and average values can be viewed. If only one set or point is measured, only some of the values are displayed. Manage Results if points measured with method A'B'C'D', the points results are limited and only standard deviation and average values are shown. Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. sets To view angle/distance results. Use To activate/deactivate sets. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description No. of points active Display only Number of active points which are set to Yes in the Use column in the Sets of Angles screen. Refer to "Residuals in Set n". No. of sets active Display only Number of active sets which are set to Yes in the Use column in the Angle Results/Distance Results screen. Refer to "Angle Results/Distance Results". Hz σ single dir. Display only Standard deviation of the single horizontal direction. Hz σ avg dir. Display only Standard deviation of the average horizontal direction. V σ single dir. Display only Standard deviation of a single vertical direction. V σ avg dir. Display only Standard deviation of the average vertical direction. σ single distance Display only Standard deviation of a single distance. σ avg distance Display only Standard deviation of the average distance. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 766 Next step sets accesses the Angle Results/Distance Results screen. Angle Results/Distance Results Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. Points.. To access Residuals in Set n. Use To set Yes or No in the Use column for the highlighted set. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Set Displays the number of the sets. Hz Σr Residl Shows the calculated absolute sum of residuals in Hz of the selected set. The sum of residuals is the sum of the difference between the reduced average direction and each sets directions. For sets not used in the calculation, ----- is shown. V Σr Residl Shows the calculated absolute sum of residuals in V of the selected set. The sum of residuals is the sum of the difference between the average vertical angles and each sets vertical angles. For sets not used in the calculation, ----- is shown. Max Residl SD Shows the calculated maximum residuals in slope distance of the selected set. The sum of residuals is the sum of the difference between the average distance and each sets distance. For sets not used in the calculation, ----- is shown. Use For Yes: The selected set is used for calculations. For No: The selected set is not used for calculations. Next step Points.. to access Residuals in Set n. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 767 Residuals in Set n Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. Use To set Yes or No in the Use column for the highlighted point. More To view additional information. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Compute Points, General page Column Description Point This column is always visible. Point ID of the measured points in the order they were defined and measured. Hz Residual Residual in the Hz value of the selected point within the single set. V Residual Residual in the V value of the selected point within the single set. Avg Hz Reduced Average Hz value of the point in all active sets. Avg V Average V value of the point in all active sets. Mean Hz Mean Hz value of the point within the single set. Mean V Mean V value of the point within the single set. SD Residual Residual in the distance value of the point within the single set. Avg SD Average distance value of the point in all active sets. Mean SD Mean distance value of the point within the single set. Use For Yes: The selected point is used for calculations in all sets. For No: The selected point is not used for calculations in any set. Key Description Store To store the results and continue with the next screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. The functionality and softkeys available on the Plot page are described in the MapView chapter. Refer to "37.4.1 Screen Area" for information functionality. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 768 Description of fields Field Option Description No. of points active Display only The number of selected points having been measured. No. of sets active Display only The number of sets having been measured. Store Point ID Prefix with Prefix/suffix Suffix Adds the setting for Prefix/suffix at the end of the original point IDs. Editable field The identifier with up to four characters is added in front of or at the end of the ID of the calculated points. Use a point as Check box reference Compute Points, Points page Adds the setting for Prefix/suffix in front of the original point IDs. When this box is checked, the point selected is considered fixed: known coordinates and therefore ∆ Easting and ∆ Northing are made equal to zero. The values shown on the Points page are updated accordingly. Key Description Store To store the calculated points which are set to Yes in the Accept column. Accept To set Yes or No in the Accept column for the highlighted point. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Column Description Point Point ID of the measured points in the order they were defined and measured. ∆ Easting The difference in Easting between the original and the calculated points. ∆ Northing The difference in Northing between the original and the calculated points. Accept For Yes: The selected point is used for calculations in all sets. For No: The selected point is not used for calculations in any set. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 769 51.3 Monitoring Description Monitoring is a module integrated within the Sets of Angles application. Monitoring uses a timer to enable repeated and automated angle and distances measurements to pre-defined target points at defined intervals. The ability to configure the handling of message screens during measurement sets is also enabled. Important aspects For monitoring, instruments must be motorised. Monitoring is licence protected and is only activated through a licence key. The licence key can be entered manually or loaded from the data storage device. Monitoring preparation This step-by-step description is an example on preparing a set for monitoring. Step Description 1. Select the control and the working job. 2. Set station coordinates and station orientation. 3. Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Sets of angles. 4. In Sets of Angles press Fn Config.. to configure Sets of Angles for monitoring. For the Parameters page set: • Page to show: None (for example purposes only). • Stop for messages: All messages (for example purposes only). • Time out: 10 secs (for example purposes only). • Define time when sets should be measured (timer monitoring) (this option must be selected for monitoring). This setting will enable access to the Define Monitoring Timer screen. 5. Press OK to access the Sets of Angles screen. 6. Select Create a new group. 7. Press OK to access the Define Points for Set screen. 8. Enter details of the target point as required. For each target point, ensure that auto survey is activated. This setting will enable the automated measurement and recording of the target point in the other face. The setting also enables the automated measurement and recording of all target points during monitoring. 9. Press OK to access the Select Points - Survey screen. 10. Measure and record the measurement to the target point as required. 11. Continue with steps 8. to 10. until all target points for the first measurement set have been measured and recorded. 12. Press Done to complete the selection of the target points for the first measurement set in one face. This action then begins the measurement of the target points in the other face. On completion, the Sets of Angles screen will be accessed. 13. Select Measure Sets. 14. Press OK to access the Define Monitoring Timer screen. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 770 Define Monitoring Timer Description of fields Field Option Description Begin date Editable field Start date for monitoring. Begin time Editable field Start time for monitoring. End date Editable field End date for monitoring. End time Editable field End time for monitoring. Interval Editable field The time between the start of each scheduled measurement set. Determines the order in which the target points are to be measured. Measure method A'A"B"B' The target points are measured in face I and face II. point A I - point A II - point B II - point B I ... A'A"B'B" The target points are measured in face I and face II. point A I - point A II - point B I - point B II ... A'B'A"B" The target points are measured in face I and face II. point A I - point B I... point A II - point B II ... A'B'B"A" The target points are measured in face I and face II. point A I - point B I... point B II - point A II... A'B'C'D' The target points are only measured in face I. point A I - point B I - point C I - point D I ... Next step When all required information is entered press OK to begin the monitoring process. A screen displays a notice that monitoring is in progress. If necessary, press Cancel to stop the monitoring process and return to Sets of angles menu. Refer to "51.2 Sets of Angles" for information about calculations and the viewing of results. Monitoring interval Description The dates and times entered define the timeframe for when the monitoring will take place. The time interval defines the time between the start of each measurement set during the monitoring period. The interval time begins at the start of a measurement set and ends at the start of the next measurement set. Example Data; • • • • 3 target points Begin Date: 03.11.2010 End Date: 06.11.2010 Interval: 30 min • 4 measure sets • Begin Time: 14:00:00 • End Time: 14:00:00 Results; • The time taken to measure 4 sets of 3 target points in both faces is 10 minutes. • The measurements will start at 14:00:00 on 03.11.2010. • At 14:10:00, the first measurement set is complete. • The instrument will wait until 14:30:00 for the next scheduled measurement set. Viva Series, Sets of Angles 771 52 Setup 52.1 Overview Description The Setup application is only available for use with TPS instruments. Setup determines the station coordinates and the instrument orientation using TPS measurements and/or GPS measurements. Setup with GPS using SmartPole Setup with GPS using SmartStation SmartPole allows target points to be SmartStation allows TPS station coordidetermined using GPS measurements. The nates (position and height) to be deternew points are then used as control mined from GPS measurements. points for the TPS setup. Methods for TPS Methods for SmartPole Methods for SmartStation "On-the-Fly" setup type Setup Method "Standard" setup type Setup methods Set orientation - - Known backsight - Multiple backsights Transfer height - - Resection - Orientate to line - - • Each setup method requires different input data and a different number of target points. • All setup methods are described in "52.7 Setup Methods". Setup types "Standard" setup "On-the-Fly" setup This type of setup is the traditional type. The user must always measure all setup points consecutively to complete the setup. The TPS station coordinates and TPS orientation must be set before measuring survey points. This setup type allows the user to move between setup and survey before completing the setup (working "on the fly"). When leaving setup the TPS station coordinates and orientation do not have to be final, they can be set at anytime during the survey. This setup can only be used when measuring survey points. When staking out points, the TPS station coordinates and TPS orientation must be set first. Incomplete setups • For a "Standard" setup, the user must always measure all setup points consecutively to complete the setup. This type of setup is always regarded as a complete setup. • For "On-the-Fly" setups, the setup points can be measured together with the survey points. It is not necessary to complete the setup before measuring survey points. Until the user selects Set in Station Results, this type of setup is regarded as incomplete. Viva Series, Setup 772 An incomplete setup, or a setup where more targets can be added, can be accessed in the following ways: 1. In the Survey application, Setup can be accessed by selecting the Setup softkey. 2. When entering any panel where it is possible to do a measurement, a message is displayed to notify that the setup is incomplete. It is then possible to: a) continue with the existing application, or OK b) start Setup and create a new station setup, or New.. c) start Setup and continue to measure additional fixpoints. Setup 3. Assigning the function TPS - Continue open setup to the favourites or a hot key. 52.2 Accessing Setup Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Setup. Total Station Setup An illustration and a description is shown for each Setup method. Key Description OK To accept changes and access the subsequent screen. The chosen settings become active. Refer to "52.4 Set Station Point" or "52.5 Enter Station Information". Fn Config.. To configure the Setup application. Refer to "52.3 Configuring Setup". Fn Quit To exit the wizard. 52.3 Configuring Setup Access Press Fn Config.. in Total Station Setup. Configuration, General page Viva Series, Setup 773 Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the application name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Remind me of last Check box setup before measuring Use two face measurements in setup Check box Description Current instrument setup details can be displayed to remind the user to either keep the current instrument setup, check the backsight, or create a new setup. Refer to "52.6 Setup Reminder" for details. Defines if the instrument measures the second face automatically after storing the first. When this box is checked, after storing a measurement with All or Store motorised instruments change face automatically, non-motorised instruments access Telescope Positioning. The measurements of face I and face II are averaged. The averaged value is stored. When this box is not checked, no automatic measurement in two faces. Use graphics to Check box help choose setup method When using two face measurements, then the angle right value is averaged between both two face measurements. When this box is checked, the setup methods are displayed in a screen accompanied by a graphic and text describing each setup method. When this box is not checked, the setup methods are selected from the drop-down menu in Go to Work!. Show message when setup is complete Check box When this box is checked, a message informs when the setup is finished. Next step Page changes to the Known backsight page. Viva Series, Setup 774 Configuration, Known backsight page For Setup method: Known backsight, the settings on this page apply. Description of fields Field Option Description Check backsight position Check box Allows a check to be made on the horizontal coordinate difference between the existing and the measured known backsight point. If the defined Position limit is exceeded, the setup can be repeated, skipped or stored. Position limit Editable field Available when Check backsight position is checked. Sets the maximum horizontal coordinate difference accepted in the position check. Check backsight height Check box Height limit Editable field Available when Check backsight height is checked. Sets the maximum vertical difference accepted in the height check. Allows a check to be made on the vertical difference between the existing and the measured known backsight point. If the Height limit is exceeded, the setup can be repeated, skipped or stored. Next step Page changes to the Advanced page. Configuration, Advanced page For Setup method: Resection and Setup method: Multiple backsights, the settings on this page apply. Description of fields Field Option Description Auto position to setup targets Check box When this box is checked, the instrument positions horizontally and vertically to the point. Calculate scale Check box from target observations Viva Series, Setup Only available if the job properties do not have Compute scale using set to Stn & coord system. If checked, a station scale will be calculated from the target observations. The user will have the option to apply this new scale (calculated ppm + current ppm = new ppm) to all survey observations, including the setup observations, from that setup. If not checked, then the calculated ppm will not be displayed and therefore not applied to any survey observations. Use Helmert method for resection Check box Helmert calculation is used. Height weighting 1/distance or Available when Use Helmert method for resection 1/distance² is checked. To change the distance weighting that is used in the calculation of the station height in the resection. 775 Field Option Description Edit default station Check box quality checks Check to type in values for standard deviation, position and height accuracy. If the limits are exceeded, a message will be shown when Calc is selected. Orientation limit Editable field Available when Edit default station quality checks is checked. Define a limit for the standard deviation of the orientation. Position limit Editable field Available when Edit default station quality checks is checked. Define a position accuracy of the target point. Height limit Editable field Available when Edit default station quality checks is checked. Define a height accuracy of the target point. Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, Setup 776 52.4 Set Station Point Access A station point must be selected for Setup method: Set orientation, Setup method: Known backsight, Setup method: Multiple backsights and Setup method: Transfer height. Set Station Point is then accessed automatically from Setup. Set Station Point Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Scale.. To type in values for the scale corrections. Refer to "New Job, Scale page". Atmos.. To type in values for the atmospheric corrections. Refer to "Atmospheric Corrections, Atmospheric ppm page". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Instrument height Editable field The height of the instrument. The selection made here determines the availability of the other fields on this screen. Station point from Job A station point can be selected from a job on a data storage device. Enter new point Pressing OK opens a screen where a new point can be typed in. After pressing Store there, the Setup application continues. GPS - Smart- Available when TPS and GPS are used. Pressing Station OK opens the GPS Survey application. After measuring a point with Meas, Stop, Store there, the Setup application continues. Refer to "56.1.2 Real-Time Rover Operations". Viva Series, Setup In order to use GPS, a coordinate system for the setup is required and must be attached to the working job. If not, then a coordinate system must be selected, or local coordinates for the station must be typed in, during the setup process. 777 Field Option Description Last used station To obtain the correct elevation of the setup point, measure the instrument height as usual and ensure the antenna type is set to the relevant SmartStation antenna. If SmartPole is used in the setup or later in Survey, remember to update the antenna type after finishing the SmartStation measurement. The station used last in the Setup application is displayed. Job Selectable list The job from which the station is to be selected. Refer to "5.4 Choosing a Job". Point ID Display only The point ID of the station point. Easting, Northing and Elevation Display only The coordinates of the station point. Current scale Display only The scale according to the scale settings for the selected station. Refer to "14 Antenna Heights" for further information regarding height values used in a SmartStation. 52.5 Enter Station Information Access Station information must be typed in for Setup method: Resection and Setup method: Orientate to line. Enter Station Information is accessed after selecting OK in Total Station Setup with one of these setup methods selected. Enter Station Information For a description of keys refer to "52.4 Set Station Point". Description of fields Field Option Station ID Editable field Type in an ID for the station point. Point code Selectable list Select a point code for the station point if desired. Instrument height Editable field The height of the instrument. Use control job for Check box the target points Viva Series, Setup Description Target points can be selected from the control job. Job Selectable list The control job from which the target points can be selected. Refer to "5.4 Choosing a Job". Current scale Display only The scale according to the scale settings for the selected station. Refer to "14 Antenna Heights" for further information regarding height values used in a SmartStation. 778 52.6 Setup Reminder Description When activated, the setup reminder appears whenever the user enters a measurement screen. The reminder allows the user to check the current station setup details before proceeding with the survey. When this reminder appears, three options are available to the user: 1) To keep the current station setup and proceed with the survey. 2) To check the backsight point. 3) To create a new station setup. Current Setup Details Key Description OK To accept the selection. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Description Continue with current setup The last setup is used and recorded in the working job. Check the backsight To open the Check Point screen. The point suggested is the point which Setup uses as the reference orientation. For the setup methods Set orientation and Known backsight, the orientation target point is suggested. For the setup methods Multiple backsights, Transfer height, Resection and Orientate to line, the first target is suggested. Make a new setup Viva Series, Setup To start the Setup application and create a new station setup. 779 52.7 Setup Methods 52.7.1 Set orientation and Known backsight Requirements The position coordinates of the station point are required. For Set orientation: The instrument is set up and oriented to either a known or unknown target point, to which a true or assumed azimuth is set. For Known backsight: The instrument is set up and oriented to a known backsight target. For SmartStation, the position coordinates of the station are unknown and are determined with GPS. The instrument is set and oriented to either a known or unknown target point, to which a true or assumed azimuth is set. Updating Hz measurements A station setup using the Set orientation method, is always automatically flagged with an ’update later’ attribute. If the backsight point is measured again, for example from another station, and found to have different coordinates, then a message will appear. The user can then select whether to update the original setup or not. The update will use the backsight point coordinates to recalculate the orientation and subsequently update all measured points connected to the setup. Access For information on camera and images refer to "33.3.3 Within Applications". In Total Station Setup, select Setup method: Set orientation or Known backsight. Press OK. In Set Station Point, select a station. Press OK. Set Station Orientation, Orientation page Viva Series, Setup Key Description Set To set the station and orientation and exit the Setup application. Dist To measure a distance to the point being used to set the azimuth. For Set orientation: A distance measurement is NOT required when setting the Station and the Orientation with Set. GPS For Known backsight applicable when using SmartPole. To enter the GPS Survey screen and measure a point with GPS. The antenna height is automatically converted from the target height. Store To store the measurement with or without a distance. Only available when Use two face measurements in setup is selected in the Setup configuration. More To change between the slope and the horizontal distance. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Run / IndivID Available for Setup method: Set orientation only. Run automatically chooses the next available point ID from the list of points already stored. IndivID allows the user to type in any value for Backsight ID. 780 Key Description Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID of the backsight point. Backsight ID Editable field For Set orientation. Selectable list For Known backsight. Select a point from the points stored in the control job. Viva Series, Setup Target height Editable field Height of the target above or below the backsight point. The last setup target height is always remembered. Direction Editable field Available for Set orientation. The direction is set to 0 by default. This value can be edited. The value is not set to the system until Set is pressed. Slope distance Display only Available for Set orientation. The slope distance measured between the station point and the backsight point. Horiz distance Display only Available for Set orientation. Press Dist to measure a distance to the target point being used to set the azimuth. Height difference Display only Available for Set orientation. The vertical distance between the station point and the backsight point. Computed direction Display only Available for Known backsight. Displays the calculated azimuth from the selected station to the backsight point. Computed hz dist Display only Available for Known backsight. Displays the calculated horizontal distance between the selected station and backsight point. Computed slp dist Display only Available for Known backsight. Displayed after More was pressed. The calculated slope distance to the backsight point. ∆ hz dist Display only Available for Known backsight. The difference between the calculated horizontal distance from station to backsight point and the measured horizontal distance. ∆ slope dist Display only Available for Known backsight. Displayed after More was pressed. The difference between the calculated slope distance from station to backsight point and the measured slope distance. ∆height Display only Available for Known backsight. The difference between the control height of the backsight point and the measured height of the backsight point. If the backsight point is a 2D point, this field shows ----. Angle right Display only Available when Hz angle display: Angle right is configured in Regional Settings, Angle page. Displays the horizontal angle difference between the backsight point and the current telescope position. 781 Next step Page changes to the Backsight page. Set Station Orientation, Backsight page Key Description Set To set the station and orientation and exit the Setup application. +Attrib To create additional attributes for this point code. Name or Value Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. To highlight the field of the attribute name or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in. Last To recall the last used attribute values for the selected code. Default To recall the default attribute values for the selected code. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Backsight ID Editable field Point ID of the backsight point. or display only Point code Selectable list The code for the backsight point. Description Display only A short description of the code. Next step Page changes to the Station page. Set Station Orientation, Station page Viva Series, Setup 782 Key Description Set To set the station and orientation and exit the Setup application. Dist To measure a distance to the point being used to set the azimuth. A distance measurement is NOT required when setting the Station and the Orientation with Set. SF / Ppm To switch between displaying the current scale as a scale factor or ppm value. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Station ID Display only Station ID as selected in Set Station Point. Instrument height Editable field The instrument height. Point code Selectable list The code for the backsight point. Current PPM / Current scale Display only The current job scale. Refer to " New Job, Scale page" for more information on scale corrections. Next step Page changes to the Plot page. 52.7.2 Multiple backsights Requirements The position coordinates of the station point are required. The instrument is set up and oriented to one or more known backsight targets. For SmartStation, the position coordinates of the station are unknown and are determined with GPS. The instrument is set up and oriented to one or more known backsight targets. For TPS and SmartStation, the orientation is determined by sighting to one or more known target points (maximum of ten target points). Only angles or both angles and distances can be measured. The height of the station point can also be derived from the target points. For information on camera and images refer to "33.3.3 Within Applications". Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method: Multiple backsights. Press OK. In Set Station Point, select a station. Press OK. Measure Target Unless otherwise stated the following screen and description applies to the setup methods: Multiple backsights, Transfer height, Resection, and Orientate to line. Viva Series, Setup 783 Key Description Meas To measure and store the distances and angles made to the control points. After storing the measurement data, the next point ID in the job is displayed. The instrument positions to the point if enough data is available. Dist To measure and display distances. Store Records displayed values temporarily. The target measurements will not be stored to the current job until the station is set. A distance measurement is not necessary before pressing Store. After recording the measurement data, the next point ID in the job is displayed. The instrument positions to the point if enough data is available and the instrument is robotic. GPS Applicable when using SmartPole. To enter the GPS Survey screen and measure a point with GPS. The antenna height is automatically converted from the target height. Done For Resection only. To temporarily exit the Setup application. The station setup will be incomplete but can be continued and completed at a later time. This softkey is replaced by Calc when sufficient data is available. Calc For Multiple backsights: Available after the first measurement. Allows the user to see the calculated station orientation and other results. For Resection: Available after measuring two target points or as soon as a preliminary station and orientation can be calculated. The calculated station coordinates and overall “quality” of the results are displayed. Fn Find Stakeout values are provided to guide the prism holder to the selected target point. For Resection: Available once sufficient data is available for calculation. Refer to "52.9 Finding a Target Point". Fn Positn To position the instrument to the selected target point. For Resection: Available once sufficient data is available for calculation. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Setup Field Option Description Point ID Selectable list The point ID of the target point to be measured. Target height Editable field The height of the target above or below the backsight point. The last setup target height is always remembered. Hz angle Display only The current horizontal angle. Angle right Display only Available when Hz angle display: Angle right is configured in Regional Settings, Angle page. Displays the horizontal angle difference between the backsight point and the current telescope position. V angle Display only The current vertical angle. Slope distance Display only The measured slope distance after Dist was pressed. 784 Field Option Description ∆ azimuth Display only Displays the difference between the calculated azimuth and the current horizontal angle. If Setup method: Resection, displays ----- until sufficient data for calculation is available. ∆ hz dist Display only The difference between the calculated and the measured horizontal distance. ∆ height Display only The difference between the given and the measured height of the target point. A maximum of ten target points can be measured and used for the calculation. When the maximum number of points is exceeded, a message will appear. The user can remove previous points or finish the setup. Points can be removed from the Station Results, Targets page. 52.7.3 Transfer height Requirements This method is used to compute a station height to apply to the selected station. Only the height is updated, the orientation is not updated. The position coordinates of the station point are required. Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method: Transfer height. Press OK. In Set Station Point, select a station. Press OK. For a description of the Measure Target screen, refer to "52.7.2 Multiple backsights". 52.7.4 Resection Requirements The coordinates of the station point are unknown. The coordinates and orientation are determined by sighting to at least two or more known target points (maximum of ten target points). Only angles or both angles and distances can be measured. For a resection, least squares or robust calculations are used. The resection calculations can be done using the Helmert method, robust method or least squares method, after three measurements to known backsights have been completed. Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method: Resection. Press OK. In Enter Station Information, type in the required information. Press OK. Viva Series, Setup For a description of the Measure Target screen, refer to "52.7.2 Multiple backsights". 785 52.7.5 Orientate to line Description This method can be used to calculate the 2D or 3D local coordinates for the instrument station and the orientation of the horizontal circle. The calculation is done using the distance and angle measurements to two target points. The first target point always defines the origin of the local coordinate system. The second target point, in conjunction with the first target point, always defines the local direction of North or East (depending on the working style). Requirements Important features: • All coordinates calculated are local coordinates. • The first target point always defines the origin of the local coordinate system (North=0, East=0, Height=0 (optional)) • The second target point, in conjunction with the first target point, always defines the local direction of North or East. Access In Total Station Setup, select Setup method: Orientate to line. Press OK. In Enter Station Information type in the required information. Press OK. Define Station Ht & Axis Key Description OK To accept all settings and continue. The chosen settings are activated and the next screen, Measure Target, is displayed. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Use station height User entered The height value of the station will be entered by the user and used to calculate the height of the measured points. Transfer from The height of the station will be calculated relatrgt 1 tive to the first measured point. Station height Editable field Available for Use station height: User entered. The elevation of the instrument station. Target 1 height Editable field Available for Use station height: User entered. The height of the first measured point. Axis defined between target 1 & 2 Viva Series, Setup To define the positive North or positive East axis. 786 Field Option Description North axis The second point measured defines the direction of the positive North axis. East axis The second point measured defines the direction of the positive East axis. For a description of the Measure Target screen, refer to "52.7.2 Multiple backsights". 52.8 Setup Results Description The results screen is displayed after pressing Calc in the Measure Target screen. The results screen is part of the Multiple backsights, Transfer height, Resection and Orientate to line setup methods. Excluding Orientate to line, after three measurements to known targets, the calculations can be done using the robust method or the least squares method. For Resection, the calculations can also be done using the Helmert method. After the station is set, all following measurements will be related to this new station and orientation. For information on camera and images refer to "33.3.3 Within Applications". Station Results, Results page Key Description Set To set the orientation, to store all setup data and exit the application. For Transfer height: To store all setup data and exit the application. Done To exit the setup without setting it, the setup is incomplete. Robust or LSqrs To display the results for the robust or the least squares calculation method. Trgt+ To access Measure Target and to measure more target points. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn 3 par or Fn Switches between a 3 parameter and 4 parameter calculation. For 3 4 par parameter, the current scale is not applied to setup observations for a new station calculation. For 4 parameter, the current scale is applied. The station coordinates will be automatically updated according to the setting used. Defaults to 4 parameter. Viva Series, Setup SF or ppm To display the scale results by scale factor or as a ppm value. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 787 Description of fields Field Option Description New orientation Display only New oriented azimuth with running angle as telescope moves. Not available for setup method Transfer height. Angle right Display only Available when Hz angle display: Angle right is configured in Regional Settings, Angle page. Displays the horizontal angle difference between the backsight point and the current telescope position. ∆height Display only The difference between the new calculated height and the old height. Available for setup methods Multiple backsights and Transfer height. Use the new height Check box For setup method Multiple backsights: When this box is checked, both orientation and height are updated. If not checked, only the orientation is updated. For setup method Transfer height: When this box is checked, the station height is updated. If not checked, the station height does not change. Not available for any other setup methods. New height Display only The calculated height is displayed. Available for setup methods Multiple backsights and Transfer height. Old height Display only The original height is displayed. Available for setup methods Multiple backsights and Transfer height. σ height Display only Standard deviation of the calculated station height. Available for setup methods Transfer height. Easting Display only The calculated Easting is displayed. Available for setup methods Resection and Orientate to line. Northing Display only The calculated Northing is displayed. Available for setup methods Resection and Orientate to line. Elevation Display only The calculated Height is displayed. Available for setup methods Resection and Orientate to line. Apply the Check box computed elevation for this station When this box is checked, then the height from the solution is set as the station height. When this box is not checked, then the height is not updated. Available for setup method Resection. Next step Page changes to the Station page. Viva Series, Setup 788 Station Results, Station page Key Description Set To set the orientation, to store all setup data and exit the application. For Transfer height: To store all setup data and exit the application. Done To exit the setup without setting it, the setup is incomplete. Scale.. To type in values for the scale corrections. Refer to "New Job, Scale page". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn 3 par or Fn Switches between a 3 parameter and 4 parameter calculation. For 3 4 par parameter, the current scale is not applied to setup observations for a new station calculation. For 4 parameter, the current scale is applied. The station coordinates will be automatically updated according to the setting used. Defaults to 4 parameter. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Station ID Display only Station ID of the current station set up. Instrument height Editable field The current instrument height. Point code Selectable list Select a point code for the station point if desired. Current PPM / Current scale Display only The current job scale. Refer to " New Job, Scale page" for more information on scale corrections. Next step Page changes to the Quality page. Station Results, Quality page For a description of the softkeys refer to "Station Results, Station page". This page is not available for setup methods Transfer height or Orientate to line. Description of fields Viva Series, Setup Field Option Description New orientation Display only New oriented azimuth with running angle as telescope moves. Available for setup method Multiple backsights. σ new orientation Display only Standard deviation of the calculated orientation. 789 Field Option Description ∆height Display only Delta height, the difference between original and calculated height. Available for setup method Multiple backsights. σ height Display only Standard deviation of the calculated station height. σ easting Display only Standard deviation of the calculated station Easting. Available for setup method Resection. σ northing Display only Standard deviation of the calculated station Northing. Available for setup method Resection. Next step Page changes to the Targets page. Station Results, Targets page Viva Series, Setup This screen displays information about the accuracy of the measured target points and allows exclusion of measurements that are not to be used in the calculation. Additional measurements can be made and measurements can be deleted. This page is not available for setup method Orientate to line. Key Description Set To recalculate the station data and update all values after target points have been deleted or excluded from the calculation. Use To change between using the selected point as 3D, 2D, 1D or not at all, in the calculation. The change automatically updates any new coordinate or orientation values. Remov To delete a point from the list of measured target points and exclude it from the Setup calculation. More To change the value displayed in the fourth column. For Resection: To change between ∆Hz, ∆ hz dist, ∆ height, ∆ easting and ∆ northing. For Multiple backsights: To change between ∆Hz and ∆ height. For Transfer height: Only ∆ height available. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. 790 Description of columns Column Description ! The ! indicates that the delta value of either measured horizontal angle, distance or height exceeds the calculation limit. Point ID The point ID of the measured target points. Use Indicates if and how a target point is used in the station calculation. Choices are 3D, 2D, 1D and No. ∆Hz Can be displayed by pressing More. Difference between calculated and measured horizontal angle for the target points. If a target point does not have coordinates, ----- are displayed. Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by a !. ∆ hz dist Can be displayed by pressing More. Difference between calculated and measured distance from the station to the target points. If a target point does not have coordinates, ----- are displayed. Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by a !. ∆ height Can be displayed by pressing More. Difference between the known control point height and the measured height of the target point. If a target point does not have a height coordinate, ----- are displayed. Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by a !. ∆ easting Can be displayed by pressing More. Difference between control point and measured point, calculated from new station coordinates. ∆ northing Can be displayed by pressing More. Difference between control point and measured point, calculated from new station coordinates. Next step Page changes to the Plot page. 52.9 Finding a Target Point Description The Find Target screen can be accessed, to guide the prism to the selected target point. The screen is only available if the Stakeout application is available on the instrument. The functionality of this screen is similar to a stake out routine and is intended to help find hidden survey bench marks or base points. Access Press Fn Find in Measure Target once enough data is available to calculate roughly the new orientation. Find Target This screen is similar to the Stakeout, Stake page and is configured through the Stakeout configuration settings. Refer to "Stakeout, Stake page" for a detailed description of this screen. Viva Series, Setup 791 53 Stakeout 53.1 Overview Description The Stakeout application is used to place marks in the field at predetermined points. These predetermined points are the points to be staked. The points to be staked can • be uploaded to a job on the instrument using LGO. • already exist in a job on the instrument. • be uploaded from an ASCII file to a job on the instrument using Main Menu: Jobs & Data\Import data\Import ASCII data. Diagram P1 d2 d1 P0 GS_057 P0 P1 d1 d2 α Current position Point to be staked Stake out distance Height difference between current position and point to be staked Stake out direction P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 d3 Station Current position Point to be staked Stake out element Stake out element Stake out element P1 d1 P2 d2 P0 TS_009 Stakeout modes Coordinate system Viva Series, Stakeout d3 Points can be staked using different modes: • Polar mode. • Orthogonal mode. Staking out is possible for RTK rover and TPS. The points to be staked must exist in a job on the active memory device or can be typed in. If staking local grid points with GNSS, always ensure that the correct coordinate system is being used. For example, if the points to be staked are stored in WGS 1984, the active coordinate system must also be WGS 1984. 792 Point types It is possible to stake: • Position only points. • Height only points. • Points with full sets of coordinates. Height types Height type of the point to be staked: Orthometric OR ellipsoidal Height type computed for current position:Orthometric OR ellipsoidal depending on the • configured transformation, • availability of a geoid model, • height type of the point to be staked. If possible, the height type of the point to be staked is computed for the current position. Height source Heights can be taken into account from • the vertical component of a coordinate triplet. • a Digital Terrain Model. The DTM licence key must be loaded. Refer to "30.3 Load licence keys" for information on how to enter the licence key. If loaded, the height of the points to be staked can be edited in the field. Coding of staked points Codes can be attached to staked points, lines and areas. The behaviour of the coding functionality depends on the definition of a survey screen page with editable fields for coding and attributes. Averaging of staked points The principles for averaging are identical to the averaging principles of the Survey application. 53.2 Accessing Stakeout Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Stakeout. Stakeout Viva Series, Stakeout Key Description OK To accept changes and access the subsequent screen. The chosen settings become active. Fn Config.. To configure Stakeout application. Refer to "53.3 Configuring Stakeout". Fn Quit To exit the screen. 793 Description of fields Field Option Description Control job Selectable list The job containing the points to be staked. Points which are measured during staking out are stored in the working job. Next step IF the Stakeout application THEN is to be accessed OK accepts the changes and accesses Stakeout application. Refer to "53.4 Staking Out". is to be configured Config... Refer to "53.3 Configuring Stakeout". 53.3 Configuring Stakeout Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Stakeout. Press Fn Config... Configuration, General page This screen consists of five pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for all pages, unless otherwise stated. Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Automatically Check box select next closest point Viva Series, Stakeout Description The order of the points suggested for staking out. When this box is checked, then the next point suggested for staking out is the point closest to the point which was staked. If there are many points in the job, the search can take a few seconds. When this box is not checked, the next point suggested for staking out is the subsequent one in the job. 794 Field Option Description Show addiCheck box tional page from My Survey Screen The user-defined survey screen page to be shown in the Stakeout screen. Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages. Store point ID Stake point ID with The staked points are stored with the same point IDs as the points to be staked. Prefix Adds the setting for Prefix / suffix in front of the original point IDs. Suffix Adds the setting for Prefix / suffix at the end of the original point IDs. Prefix / suffix Editable field Available for Store point ID with: Prefix and Store point ID with: Suffix. The identifier with up to four characters is added in front of or at the end of the ID of the staked point. Only update stakeout values when distance is measured Check box When this box is checked, angles and stakeout values are updated after a distance was measured. Then all values are frozen until the next distance is taken. Automatically Check box turn to point When this box is checked, the instrument positions automatically to the point to be staked. Turn to Available when Automatically turn to point is checked. Horiz distance Instrument positions horizontally to the point to be staked. Position & height Instrument positions horizontally and vertically to the point to be staked. Show direction message to next point Use two face measurements For each point which is selected for staking, angle and distance information is momentarily displayed in the message line. Instrument The delta horizontal angle that the instrument must turn to the point, and the distance from the instrument to the point, is displayed in the message line. Last point The delta horizontal angle that the instrument must turn to the point, and the distance from the last staked point, is displayed in the message line. Check box To take a measurement in Face I and Face II. The point stored is an average of the two measurements. When using instruments fitted with auto aiming, the point is automatically measured in both faces. The resulting point is stored and the instrument is returned to the first face. Next step Page changes to the Quality control page. Viva Series, Stakeout 795 Configuration, Quality control page Description of fields Field Option Check Check box distance before storing (set Limit to 0 if you wish to always be shown differences before storing) Limit Editable field Check cut/fill Check box before storing Limit Editable field Description Allows a check to be made on the horizontal coordinate difference between the staked point and the point to be staked. If the defined Limit is exceeded, the stake out can be repeated, skipped or stored. Available when Check distance before storing (set Limit to 0 if you wish to always be shown differences before storing) is checked. Sets the maximum horizontal coordinate difference accepted in the position check. Allows a check to be made on the vertical difference between the staked point and the point to be staked. If the defined Limit is exceeded, the stake out can be repeated, skipped or stored. Available when Check cut/fill before storing is checked. Sets the maximum vertical difference accepted in the height check. Next step Page changes to the Heights page. Configuration, Heights page Description of fields Field Option Allow height Check box of point being staked to be edited Description When this box is checked, the field Design height is displayed in Stakeout, Stake page. The design height is the height of the point to be staked. The value for Design height can be changed. When this box is not checked, the field Current height for the height of the current position is displayed in Stakeout, Stake page. The value for Current height cannot be changed. Offset height of all points being staked Check box Allows a constant height offset to be applied to the height of the points being staked. Height offset Editable field The height offset that is applied. Next step Page changes to the Graphics page. Viva Series, Stakeout 796 Configuration, Graphics page Description of fields Field Option Description The reference direction to be used to stakeout points. The stakeout elements and the graphical display shown in the Stakeout application are based on this selection. Navigate direction From instrument The direction of the orientation is from the instrument to the point to be staked. To instrument The direction of the orientation is from the point to be staked to the instrument. To north The North direction shown in the graphical display based on the active coordinate system. From north The direction of the orientation is from the North direction to the point to be staked. To sun The position of the sun calculated from the current position, the time and the date. To last point Time-wise, the last recorded point. If no points are yet staked, Navigate direction: To north is used for the first point to be staked. To point A point from the working job. To point (cntrl job) A point from the Control job selected in Stakeout. To line (cntrl job) The direction of the orientation is parallel to a reference line from the Control job. Open the listbox to create, edit or delete a reference line. Point ID or Line To line The direction of the orientation is parallel to a reference line from the working job. Open the listbox to create, edit or delete a reference line. Following arrow The direction of the orientation is from the current position to the point to be staked. The graphical display shows an arrow pointing in the direction of the point to be staked. Selectable list Available for Navigate direction: To point (cntrl job), Navigate direction: To point, Navigate direction: To line and Navigate direction: To line (cntrl job). To select the point or line to be used for orientation. The method of staking out. Navigate using Direction & distance The direction from the orientation reference, the horizontal distance and the cut/fill is displayed. In/out, left/right The distance forwards to/backwards from the point, the distance right/left to the point and the cut/fill is displayed. Switch to bulls Check box eye when 0.5m from target Viva Series, Stakeout When this box is checked, a bulls eye bubble is shown in the stakeout graphic when less than half a metre from the point being staked. 797 Field Option Beep faster Check box when getting close to point Description The instrument beeps when the distance from the current position to the point to be staked is equal to or less than defined in Start within. The closer the instrument is to the point to be staked the faster the beeps will be. Distance to use Height, HoriThe type of distance to use for staking. zontal distance or Position & height Start within Editable field Available when Beep faster when getting close to point is checked. The horizontal radial distance, from the current position to the point to be staked, when a beep is to be heard. Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, Stakeout 798 53.4 Staking Out Diagram This diagram shows an example for Navigate using: In/out, left/right. P1 d2 d3 d1 GS_054 P0 P0 P1 d1 d2 d3 Current position Point to be staked Forwards or backwards Right or left Fill or cut P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 d3 Station Current position Point to be staked Forward or backwards Right or left Cut or fill P1 d1- P2 d3+ d2+ P0 TS_011 This diagram shows an example Navigate using: Direction & distance. P1 d2 d1 GS_055 P0 P0 P1 d1 d2 α Current position Point to be staked Distance Cut or fill Direction P0 P1 P2 a b c Station Current position Point to be staked Distance Horizontal angle Cut or fill P1 a b TS_010 Viva Series, Stakeout P0 P2 c 799 For information on camera and images refer to "33.3.3 Within Applications". Stakeout, Stake page The pages shown are from a typical working style. An additional page is available when a user-defined survey screen page is used. Key Description Meas To start measuring the point being staked. The key changes to Stop. The difference between the current position and the point being staked is still displayed. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Stop To end measuring the point being staked. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General page recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The key changes to Store. After ending the measurements, the differences between the measured point and the point to be staked are displayed. Store To store the measured point. When Automatically store point is checked in Quality Control, General page, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Dist To measure a distance. Near To search the Control job for the point nearest to the current position when the key is pressed. The point is selected as the point to be staked and is displayed in the first field on the screen. After staking and storing the nearest point, the next point suggested for staking out is the one which was suggested before the key was pressed. Available when Meas is displayed. Revers To reverse the graphical display top to bottom. A reversed graphical display can be used when the point to be staked lies behind the current position. Survy.. To survey additional points which may be needed during staking out. To return to Stakeout application, press Fn Quit or ESC. Available when Meas is displayed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Stakeout application. Refer to "53.3 Configuring Stakeout". Fn Conect and To connect/disconnect from the GPS reference data. Fn Disco Viva Series, Stakeout 800 Key Description Fn Init To select an initialisation method and to force a new initialisation. Available when Meas or Store is displayed and for working styles allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer to "56.4 Initialisation for RealTime Rover Operations". Fn 2D Pos To position the telescope (X,Y) onto the point to be staked. Fn 3D Pos To position the telescope (X,Y,Z) onto the point to be staked. Fn Mnual.. To enter angle and distance values to stake out a point. Fn Quit To exit Stakeout application. Description of the elements of the graphical display The graphical display provides a guide to find the point to be staked out. Element Description Point to be staked / known point North Sun Defined line From instrument Follow arrow Forward arrow, distance to point Side arrow, distance to point Polar arrow, direction to point Height The current position and/or height is within the configured stake out limit for position and/or height. Viva Series, Stakeout 801 Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Selectable list The point ID of the point to be staked. Antenna ht Editable field The default antenna height. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. Target height Editable field Current height Display only The default prism height. Available when Allow height of point being staked to be edited is not checked in Configuration, Heights page. The orthometric height of the current position is displayed. If the orthometric height cannot be displayed, the local ellipsoidal height is displayed. If it is not possible to display the local ellipsoidal height, the WGS 1984 height is displayed. The value for Height offset configured in Configuration, Heights page is taken into account. Design height Editable field Available when Allow height of point being staked to be edited is checked in Configuration, Heights. The design height, which is the orthometric height of the point to be staked, is displayed. If the orthometric height cannot be displayed, the local ellipsoidal height is displayed. If it is not possible to display the local ellipsoidal height, the WGS 1984 height is displayed. The value for Height offset configured in Configuration, Heights page is not taken into account. Changing the value for Design height changes the values displayed for cut and fill. Next step Page changes to the Map page. Refer to "37 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the functionality and softkeys available. Viva Series, Stakeout 802 53.5 Stakeout Difference Limit Exceeded Description If configured a check is made on the horizontal and/or vertical coordinate distance from the staked point to the point to be staked. Refer to "53.3 Configuring Stakeout" for information on configuring the check and the limits. Access If either of the configured difference limits are exceeded, the following screen is accessed automatically when the point is stored. Stakeout Limit Exceeded The availability of the fields depends on the configuration for Navigate using. The limits that have been exceeded are shown in bold and indicated by a !. Key Description Back To return to the Stakeout screen without storing the point. Staking out of the same point continues. Store To accept the coordinate differences, store the point information and return to the Stakeout screen. Skip To return to the Stakeout screen without storing the point. According to filter and sort settings the next point is suggested for staking out. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Viva Series, Stakeout Field Option Description Point ID Display only The point ID of the point to be staked. Store point ID Editable field The unique number which is used to store the staked point. Allows a different point ID to be typed in, if needed. Cut Display only The negative height difference from the height of the staked point to the height of the point to be staked. To move down. Fill Display only The positive height difference from the height of the staked point to the height of the point to be staked. To move up. 2D distance Display only Displays the horizontal difference from the staked point to the point to be staked. 3D distance Display only Displays the spatial difference from the staked point to the point to be staked. ∆Hz Display only The bearing from the staked point to the point to be staked. 803 Field Option Description ∆Dist Display only Horizontal distance from the staked point to the point to be staked. Forward Display only The horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked in the direction of the orientation. Back Display only The horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked in the reverse direction of the orientation. Right Display only Horizontal distance from the staked point to the point to be staked orthogonal to the right of the orientation direction. Left Display only Horizontal distance from the staked point to the point to be staked orthogonal to the left of the orientation direction. 53.6 Staking Out a DTM or Points & DTM Description A Digital Terrain Model can be staked alone or together with points. The heights of the current positions are compared against the heights of a selected DTM job. The height differences are calculated and displayed. Staking a DTM can be used for • staking out where the DTM represents the surface to be staked. • quality control purposes where the DTM represents the final project surface. DTM jobs are created in LGO. DTM jobs are stored in the \DBX directory on the active memory device. Diagram d2 P1 d1 P1 Point to be staked d1 Antenna height d2 Cut or fill GS_056 d2 P1 d1 TS_012 Viva Series, Stakeout P1 Point to be staked d1 Cut or fill d2 Reflector height 804 Access If the message panel appears which requires that the application must be activated via a license key then refer to "30.3 Load licence keys". To stake out DTM heights only: Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Stakeout+\Stakeout DTM. To stake out positions of points and DTM heights: Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Stakeout+\Stake points & DTM. Stakeout Description of fields Field Option Description Control job Selectable list The positions of points in the job selected here are staked out. Heights to be staked out are taken from the DTM job. Points which are measured during staking out are stored in the working job. DTM Viva Series, Stakeout Selectable list The DTM job to be used must be stored in the \DBX directory on the active memory device. Heights without positions are staked out relative to the selected DTM job. The stake out procedure is identical as for the normal Stakeout application but the heights to be staked are taken from the selected DTM job. The negative or positive height differences from the current position to the equivalent point in the selected DTM job is calculated and displayed. Height offsets apply. Refer to "53.3 Configuring Stakeout", "53.4 Staking Out" and "53.5 Stakeout Difference Limit Exceeded". 805 54 Seismic Stakeout 54.1 Overview Description The Seismic Stakeout application includes all the standard stakeout functionality plus extra features that are specific to seismic survey. It supports exclusion zone files in order to warn users when the selected preplot point position or the current measured position falls inside a protected area. It provides a specific Offset page in the main stakeout screen to help staking, offsetting or skidding preplot points. A “default line width annotation” feature is available for users who need to report the width of the cut line. Terms Exclusion zone: Protected area where drilling is not allowed. Preplot: Refers to design. For example preplot points and preplot job – not control points or control job. Track and bin: The preplot point IDs are comprised of a track(line) and bin(station). For example, if the point ID 162304 has 3 bin characters then its track would be 162 and its station 304. 54.2 Accessing Stakeout Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Stakeout+\Seismic stakeout. Choose Control Job (Preplot) Key Description OK To activate the selected control job (preplot job). Fn Config.. To configure Seismic Stakeout application. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Control job Selectable list Job that contains preplot points to be staked. Viva Series, Seismic Stakeout 806 Choose Exclusion Zone Key Description OK To validate the selected exclusion zone file. Opens the Define Line Settings screen. The file is converted to an internal format (*.xnz) when used for the first time. View To open the Exclusion zone viewer after loading the zones in memory. The file is converted to an internal format (*.xnz) when used for the first time. Refer to "Exclusion zone viewer". Fn Config.. To configure Seismic Stakeout application. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description File type ESRI SHP Polygon shapefile in local grid coordinate system GPSeismic LZO Leica exclusion zone format by GPSeismic software Selectable list The file that contains exclusion zones against which the measured or selected preplot position will be tested. The file must be stored in the DATA\ZONE directory on the data storage device. Exclusion zone file Open the selectable list to change the memory device as needed. Select if no file is available for a given project area. Refer to "Exclusion Zone Files - SHP". No. of zones Display only Numbers of exclusion zones included in the selected file. Description Display only File description as read in the file’s header. Exclusion Zone Files - SHP Viva Series, Seismic Stakeout 807 Key Description OK To accept the selection. More To display information about the file name, size and last modification date/time. CF card, SD card or Intrnl To change between viewing exclusion zone files stored on another data storage device or internal memory. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Key Description OK To return to the previous screen. More To display information about the zone ID, type and geometry. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Exclusion zone viewer Define Line Settings Seismic stakeout is usually done following a line of preplot points. The application can take advantage of line settings definitions to improve the seismic stakeout. Key Description OK To open the Seismic Stakeout screen. Fn Config.. To configure Seismic Stakeout application. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Seismic Stakeout 808 Description of fields Field Option Description Use track number optimization Check box The track(line) number can be used internally by the application to filter preplot points that belong to the current line being staked. This option also increase the performance of the preplot point test by reducing the number of exclusion zones loaded into memory. Track number Editable field Track number of the line being staked. Common prefix identifier of all preplot points that belong to a given line. Points order Selectable list Line walking direction as defined by preplot point IDs. Use default line width annotation Check box This option is for users who need to report the width of the cut line. It allows to store automatically the last entered line width in the staked point annotation (Annot 4). Depending on the reminder method, a dialog will show-up after point store that recall the user to measure and update the line width value. Reminder method for line width annotation update. Reminder by Point Reminds after a point interval Distance Reminds after a distance interval Point interval Editable field Number of staked point after which the default line width annotation must be updated. Distance interval Editable field The distance after which the default line width annotation must be updated. 54.3 Configuring Stakeout Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Stakeout+\Seismic stakeout. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Seismic stakeout page For all other pages on this screen, refer to "53.3 Configuring Stakeout". Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Seismic Stakeout 809 Key Description Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Enable preplot Check box point test The preplot point test is done each time the current point ID selection changes (in Stake or Map page from Seismic Stakeout screen). The preplot point position is tested against exclusion zones and an appropriate warning message appears when the position is inside one or more zones. Check box The navigation test is done continuously on the current measured position. The current position is tested against all exclusion zones in the surrounding area as defined by Display radius. Enable navigation test Appears in the Stake and Map page when the measured position falls inside one or more exclusion zones. In addition, the touched zone is highlighted in red in the map (that could be more than one zone). Appears in the Stake and Map page when an exclusion zone file is active and the navigation test is disabled. Viva Series, Seismic Stakeout 810 Field Option Description Show message line warning Check box Inside zone warning displayed at the message line when the current measured position falls inside one or more exclusion zones. The message line stays on for seven seconds when triggered even if the user gets out of the zone(s). Display radius Editable field This radius defines the area around the current measured position for which the exclusion zones will be added to the stakeout map. Check box Show LZO inner polygons It is better to keep this value as small as possible to not load too many exclusion zones in memory. The application automatically readjusts this radius when more than 200 zones overlap the defined area An inner polygon is created when adding an offset to an exclusion zone in GPSeismic (LZO format). Use this option to display inner polygons on the stakeout map. Inner polygons are displayed in yellow and no inclusion test is done against them. 54.4 Staking Out Seismic Stakeout, Stake page Same as standard Stakeout application, except for specific warning icons that appear in the left upper corner of the bulls-eye. Refer to "53.4 Staking Out" for a description of keys, fields and standard elements of the graphical display. Description of specific elements of the graphical display Element Description Indicates that current measured position falls inside one or more exclusion zones. Indicates that an exclusion zone file is active but navigation test is disabled. Viva Series, Seismic Stakeout 811 Seismic Stakeout, Offset page Refer to "53.4 Staking Out" for a description of keys. Description of fields Field Option Description Azimuth Editable field Direction from the current preplot point for which the In-line and Cross-line offsets are computed. This azimuth value is automatically updated each time the selected preplot point changes in the Stake and Map page. The computed azimuth is based on the next preplot point in the list. If no next point is available then it will be from previous point to current one. Or enter an azimuth value for specific validation. In-line Display only Measured position in/out offset based on the line from the current preplot point to the given azimuth direction. Negative value is in. Cross-line Display only Measured position left/right offset based on the line from the current preplot point to the given azimuth direction. Negative value is left. Radius Display only Horizontal distance from the measured position to the current preplot point. Slope to point Selectable list Slope distance Viva Series, Seismic Stakeout Display only Point stored in the working job for which the slope distance from the current measured position is required. Useful when offsetting a preplot point to validate cable length from previous staked point. Slope distance from measured position to selected Slope to point. 812 55 Base Menu - Start base 55.1 Start base over known point Description In this option, a known point stored in the working job is used to set up the RTK base. Access Select Base Menu\Go to Work!\Start base over known point. Set antenna height & type. Type in the antenna height and select the antenna being used. Key Description Next To accept changes and access the subsequent screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Antenna height Editable field The height of the antenna that is being used. RTK base antenna Selectable list Leica Geosystems antennas are predefined as default and can be selected from the list. Default antennas contain an elevation-dependent correction model. New antenna correction models can be set up and transferred to the instrument using LGO. Open the list to define or edit additional antennas. Refer to Antennas for information on antennas. Vertical offset Display only The vertical offset of the measurement reference point. Next step Next to access Select known point. Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base 813 Select known point Select the point to be used as base station. A point could already be stored in the control job either by manual entry, by measuring or by transfer from LGO. If a new point is to be created, open the selectable list for Point ID and press Point ID. If an existing point is to be edited, open the selectable list for Point ID and press Edit... Key Description Next To accept changes and access the subsequent screen. Coord To view other coordinate types. Local coordinates are available when a local coordinate system is active. Back To return to the previous screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Next to access Base setup complete.. Follow the instructions on the screen. 55.2 Start base over last setup Description To use the same coordinates as when the instrument was last used as a base. Available when the instrument has previously been used as a base and no point in the control job has the same point ID as the one last used. After turning off, the base coordinates are stored in the System RAM. They can be used again the next time the instrument is used as a base. This functionality means that even if the data storage device that previously contained the base coordinates is formatted, the last used coordinates can still be used. Access Select Base Menu\Go to Work!\Start base over last setup. Set antenna height & type. This screen is identical with the one in Start base over known point. Refer to Start base over any point. Next step Next to access Last used RTK base point.. Last used RTK base point. The point ID and coordinates of the last used base are displayed in grid. When no local coordinate system is active, WGS 1984 coordinates are displayed. Refer to Start base over any point for information on the keys. Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base 814 Next step Next to access Base setup complete.. Follow the instructions on the screen. 55.3 Start base over any point Description To use the coordinates of the current navigation position as base coordinates. Access Select Base Menu\Go to Work!\Start base over any point. Set antenna height & type. This screen is identical with the one in Start base over known point. Refer to Start base over any point. Next step Next to access Measure new point.. Measure new point. Type in a point ID for this new point. Refer to Start base over any point for information on the keys. Code information or annotations can be added in the rover menu in View & edit data. Next step Next to access Base setup complete.. Follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Base Menu - Start base 815 56 Survey - General 56.1 Surveying Points 56.1.1 Post-Processed Kinematic and Static Operations Requirements • A typical working style for a static or post-processed kinematic operation is used. Ensure that the working style has Log data for post-processing selected in the Raw Data Logging Settings screen. Access For information on camera and images refer to "33.3.3 Within Applications". For RTK rover: Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. If configured for post-processed kinematic operations, the logging of moving observations begins. Survey, Survey page The fields shown are from a typical working style for static or post-processed kinematic operations. The screen described consists of four pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the Survey page, the Code page and the Annot page. Refer to "37 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the keys on the Map page. The fields and functionality of this screen vary slightly when accessed from other applications where individual point measurements are needed. Key Description Meas To start logging of static observations. The key changes to Stop. Stop To end recording of positions when enough data is collected. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General, recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The key changes to Store. Store To store the point information. When Automatically store point is checked in Quality Control, General, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. Near To compare the user’s current position with the coordinates of all points already stored in the job and find the nearest point. This point ID is then suggested as the next point ID to be used. HdnPt.. To measure a hidden point. Refer to "60 Survey - Hidden Points". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure SmartCodes, auto points and hidden point measurements. Refer to "26.5 SmartCodes", "58 Survey - Auto Points" and "60 Survey - Hidden Points". Viva Series, Survey - General 816 Key Description Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for manually measured points. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: • To start a new sequence of point IDs type over the point ID. • For an individual point ID independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Antenna height Editable field The default antenna height as defined in the active working style is suggested. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. 3D CQ Display only The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed position. 56.1.2 Real-Time Rover Operations Requirements • A typical working style for real-time rover operations is used. • The appropriate real-time device is attached and working properly. For information on camera and images refer to "33.3.3 Within Applications". Access For RTK rover: Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Survey, Survey page The fields shown are from a typical working style for real-time rover operations. The screen described consists of four pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the Survey page, the Code page and the Annot page. Refer to "37 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the keys on the Map page. The fields and functionality of this screen vary slightly when accessed from other applications where individual point measurements are needed. Viva Series, Survey - General 817 Key Description Meas To start logging of static observations. The key changes to Stop. Stop To end recording of positions when enough data is collected. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General, recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The key changes to Store. Store To store the point information. When Automatically store point is checked in Quality Control, General, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job. If the codes and/or attribute values of the new and the existing point do not match, a screen opens where they can be corrected. Refer to "26.6 Code and Attribute Mismatch". Near To compare the user’s current position with the coordinates of all points already stored in the job and find the nearest point. This point ID is then suggested as the next point ID to be used. HdnPt.. To measure a hidden point. Refer to "60 Survey - Hidden Points". Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure SmartCodes, auto points and hidden point measurements. Refer to "26.5 SmartCodes", "58 Survey - Auto Points" and "60 Survey - Hidden Points". Fn Avg To check the residuals for the averaged position. Available for Mode: Average in Job Properties:, Averaging page and for more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point. Refer to "6.3.3 Mean Page". Fn Abs To check the absolute difference between measurements. Available for Mode: Average in Job Properties:, Absolute differences page and for more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point. Refer to "6.3.3 Mean Page". Fn Conect and To connect/disconnect from the GPS reference data. Fn Disco Fn Init.. To select an initialisation method and to force a new initialisation. Available for working styles allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer to "56.4 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations". Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit Viva Series, Survey - General To exit the screen. 818 Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for manually measured points. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: • To start a new sequence of point IDs type over the point ID. • For an individual point ID independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Antenna height Editable field The default antenna height as defined in the active working style is suggested. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. 3D CQ Display only The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed position. 56.2 Adding Annotations Description Annotations can be used to add either field notes or comments to points being surveyed. Access For RTK rover: Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Go to the Annot page. If it is not already displayed, the Annot page can be configured to appear in the Survey application through the My Survey Screen Settings screen. Refer to "25.3 My Survey Screen"for more information. Survey, Annot page Description of fields Field Option Description Annot 1 to Annot 4 Editable field Type in the annotation. The annotation can be up to 16 characters long and include spaces. When the ASCII input interface is configured to be used and an annotation is reserved for the incoming ASCII string, then no other information can be typed in for the particular annotation. CE to clear the entry. Last to recall all annotations entered for the previously surveyed point. Any annotations just entered are overwritten. ENTER. The next line is highlighted. Next step Step Description 1. Meas to start the point measurement. 2. Stop to end the point measurement. Viva Series, Survey - General 819 Step Description 3. Store to store the point information including the annotations. 56.3 Timed Measurements Description Surveying regulations in some countries require that several instruments in a session start the point measurement simultaneously at a predefined time. Timed measurements are possible for all types of GPS operations, except for real-time base operations. Requirements • Automatically start measuring point on entering survey: Timed is configured in Quality Control, Advanced page. Refer to "13.4 Quality control". • Time at point is configured for one of the lines in one of the survey screen pages. Refer to "25.3 My Survey Screen". Access For RTK rover: Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Survey, Survey page Refer to "56.1 Surveying Points" for a description of keys. Description of fields Field Option Description Start time Editable field The current local time with the seconds rounded to 00, for example for the current local time 07:37:12 it is 07:38:00. Type in the start time in hours, minutes and seconds for when the point measurement will begin. Press Meas. The point measurement does not start yet. The name of the field changes to Time to go. Time to go Display only The countdown time in hours, minutes and seconds before the point measurement starts automatically. The point measurement starts when it is 00:00:00. Then, data is logged as configured in the working style. Any measurement counter defined to be used in survey screen page is displayed and starts incrementing. The name of the field changes to Time at point. Viva Series, Survey - General 820 Field Option Description Time at point Display only The time in hours, minutes and seconds from when the point is measured until point measurement is stopped. Press Stop and Store when enough data is collected. The name of the field changes to Start time. 56.4 Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations 56.4.1 Accessing Initialisation for Real-Time Rover Operations Requirements • The active working style is a real-time rover configuration. Access For RTK rover: • Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Press Init... • Access is possible from other screens where individual point measurements are needed, for example from Inverse Pt - Pt with Survy... Re-initialise the RTK Initialisation method Description Refer to chapter Initialise while moving The rover antenna can be moved during the initialisation process. Initialise while static "56.4.2 Initialise while Moving" Initialise on a known point 56.4.2 Initialise while moving step-bystep The antenna setup must be static on a pillar, a tripod or on a pole with a quickstand. "56.4.3 Initialise while Static" The antenna setup must be static on a pillar, a tripod or on a pole with a quickstand. The coordinates of the point must be stored in, or able to be converted to, the WGS 1984. They must be stored in the working job either by manual entry or by measuring. "56.4.4 Initialise on Known Point" Initialise while Moving Step Description 1. Does the instrument currently have a fixed solution? • If yes, continue with step 3. 2. 3. • If no, continue with the next row. The initialisation starts automatically. Continue with the row after step 3. Yes to start the initialisation. The current ambiguity solution is discarded. Meas is available but must not be pressed until the ambiguity solution is gained. 4. The initialisation is gained when the ambiguities are solved. 5. Continue with the surveying operation. Viva Series, Survey - General 821 56.4.3 Initialise while Static Initialise while static step-by-step Step Description 1. Does the instrument currently have a fixed solution? • If yes, continue with step 3. • If no, continue with the next row. 2. Continue with step 6. 3. Yes to start the initialisation. The current ambiguity solution is discarded. 4. The initialisation starts automatically. Stop is available but must not be pressed until the ambiguity solution is gained. The initialisation is gained when the ambiguities are solved. Any configurations for Automatically stop point measurement in Quality Control, General page are ignored. Stop when enough data is collected. 5. When Automatically stop point measurement is not checked in Quality Control, General page, Store to store the point information. 6. Continue with the surveying operation. 56.4.4 Initialise on Known Point Initialise on known point step-by-step Step Description 1. Does the instrument currently have a fixed solution? • If yes, continue with step 3. • If no, continue with step 4. 2. Yes to start the initialisation. The current ambiguity solution is discarded. 3. In Data:, Points page, highlight the known point for the initialisation. 4. OK starts the initialisation. Survey screen Point ID: The ID of the selected known point is displayed. Antenna height: The default antenna height as defined in the active working style is suggested. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. 5. 6. 7. Viva Series, Survey - General Enter the correct antenna height. If desired, add a code. If desired, add an annotation. Stop is available but must not be pressed until the ambiguity solution is gained. The initialisation is gained when the ambiguities are solved. Any configurations for Automatically stop point measurement in Quality Control, General page are ignored. Stop when enough data is collected. When Automatically stop point measurement is not checked in Quality Control, General page, Store to store the point information. An average is automatically calculated with the known coordinates. Continue with the surveying operation. 822 57 Survey - General Description The Survey application is used for point measurement. Angles and distances for points can be measured and the calculated coordinates stored using Meas, Dist and Store. For information on camera and images refer to "33.3.3 Within Applications". Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey. Survey, Survey page The fields shown are from a typical working style. The screen described consists of four pages. The explanations for the softkeys given here are valid for the Survey page, the Offset page, and the Code page. Refer to "37 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the keys on the Map page. The fields and functionality of this screen vary slightly when accessed from other applications where individual point measurements are needed. Key Description Meas To measure and store distances and angles. Stop Available if Measure mode: Continuous and Dist was pressed. Stops the distance measurements. The key changes back to Meas. Dist To measure and display distances. Store To record data. If Measure mode: Continuous and/or Log auto points is checked, records measured point and continues tracking. RmtHt. To access Survey Remote Point. Available if Measure remote points is checked in Configuration, Remote points page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure SmartCodes, auto points and remote point measurements. When Fn Avg or Fn Abs are active, this key is not available. Refer to "26.5 SmartCodes", "58 Survey - Auto Points" and to "62 Survey - Remote Point" for information on the fields and keys. Fn Avg To check the residuals for the averaged point. Available for Mode: Average in Job Properties:, Averaging page and for more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point. Refer to "6.3.3 Mean Page". Fn Abs To check the absolute difference between the measurements. Available for Mode: Average in Job Properties:, Absolute differences and for more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point. Refer to "6.3.3 Mean Page". Viva Series, Survey - General 823 Key Description Fn 2Store To aim manually at the target and only record the angle measurement (Hz/V) in face I and face II. The point stored is an average of the two measurements. Fn 2Face Available for Measure mode: Single and Measure mode: Single (fast). To take a measurement in Face I and Face II. The point stored is an average of the two measurements. When using instruments fitted with auto aiming, the point is automatically measured in both faces. The resulting point is stored and the instrument is returned to the first face. Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Point ID Editable field The identifier for measured points. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed: • To start a new sequence of point IDs overtype the point ID. • For an individual number independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Target height Editable field The last used target height is suggested when accessing the Survey application. An individual target height can be typed in. Hz Display only The current horizontal angle. V Display only The current vertical angle. Horiz distance Display only The horizontal distance after Dist was pressed. No distance is displayed when accessing the screen and after Store or Meas. Height difference Display only The height difference between station and measured point after Dist. Displays ----- when accessing the screen and after Store or Meas. Easting Display only Easting coordinate of the measured point. Northing Display only Northing coordinate of the measured point. Elevation Display only Elevation of the measured point. Viva Series, Survey - General Description 824 58 Survey - Auto Points 58.1 Overview Description Auto points are used to automatically log points at a specified rate. Additionally, individual auto points can be stored outside the defined rate. Auto points can be collected in the Survey application. An Auto page is visible when logging of auto points is active. Auto points are used in moving applications to document a track which was walked or driven along. Auto points that are logged between starting and stopping logging of auto points form one chain. A new chain is formed each time logging of auto points is started. Up to two offset points related to one auto point can be logged. The offset points can be both to the left or right and they can be coded independently of each other and of the auto points. Coding of auto points Logging of auto points is possible for TPS and in the GPS rover menu. Coding of auto points is similar to coding manually occupied points. Refer to "26 Coding" for information on coding. The differences are: • Thematical coding: Available for Store points:To DBX (pts&codes) in Configuration, Log auto points page. Always available. • Free coding: Always available. • Quick coding: Not available. • Codes of auto points overwrite the codes of points with the same point ID but a different code, existing in the working job. • Codes of auto points can be changed when no auto points are being logged. • Up to three attributes can be stored with a code. Averaging of auto points An average is never calculated for auto points even if a manually occupied point of class Meas already exists with the same point ID. 58.2 Configuring Auto Points Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Auto points page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 825 Key Description Config.. To configure what is viewed in the Auto page in the Survey application. Available for Log auto points checked. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Log auto points Check box Activates the logging of auto points. All other fields on the screen are active and can be edited. Store points by Time Auto points are logged according to a time interval. The time interval is independent from the update interval for the position on the screen. Distance The difference in distance from the last stored auto point, which must be reached before the next auto point is logged. The auto point is logged with the next available computed position. Height difference The height difference from the last stored auto point, which must be reached before the next auto point is logged. The auto point is logged with the next available computed position. Distance or height Before the next auto point is logged, either the difference in distance or the difference in height must be reached. The auto point is logged with the next available computed position. Stop & go An auto point is stored when the position of the antenna/prism does not move more than the distance configured in Minimum distance between points within the Stop time. Once a point has been stored, the position must change more than the distance configured in Minimum distance between points before the routine starts again. User decides An auto point is stored upon pressing Meas ( ) / Store ( ) in Survey, Auto page. In the beginning, the chain to which the auto points will be assigned must be started with Start. In the end, the chain must be closed with Stop. Available unless Store points by: Distance or height. Log every Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points Editable field For Store points by: Distance and Store points by: Height difference. The difference in distance or height before the next auto point is logged. From 0.05s to 60.0s For Store points by: Time. The time interval before the next auto point is logged. For GS05/GS06/GS08plus/GS12 logging rates of 0.2s and slower are supported. 826 Field Option Description Max distance Editable field Available for Store points by: Distance or height. The value for the difference in distance before the next auto point is logged. Max height Editable field Available for Store points by: Distance or height. The value for the height difference before the next auto point is logged. Minimum distance between points Editable field Available for Store points by: Stop & go. The distance within which the position is considered stationary. Stop time Editable field Available for Store points by: Stop & go. The time while the position must be stationary until an auto point is stored. Store points Changing this setting while auto points are being logged stops the logging. It must then be restarted. To MDB (pts only) Logs auto point to a job file. Point logging at up to 20 Hz. Coding and logging of offset points is not possible. Points cannot be displayed in MapView or output via format files. Logging To DBX (pts&codes) Logs auto points to the DBX. Point logging at up to 1 Hz. Coding and logging of offset points is possible. Points can be displayed in MapView or output via format files. Automatically Logging of auto points starts immediately when the Survey screen is accessed. Controlled Logging of auto points starts upon pressing Start on the Auto page in Survey. starts Check box Don't store auto log point if CQ exceeds limit 3D CQ Editable field Available if Don't store auto log point if CQ exceeds limit is checked. Limit for the coordinate quality above which an auto point is no longer automatically stored. When the CQ of the auto point falls again below the defined value then the storing of auto points begins again. Logging Instrument beeps when storing an auto point. Never Instrument never beeps. limit Beep when auto logged point is If checked, monitoring of the coordinate quality is activated. Auto points are stored when the coordinate quality is within the defined limit. For example, only phase fixed solutions can be logged by defining a CQ limit. stored Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 827 Next step IF the survey screen mask THEN is not to be configured OK closes the screen and returns to the previous screen. is to be configured Config... Configure Page Key Description OK To accept changes and to return to previous screen. Clear To set all fields to Line space full. Default To recall the default settings. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Name Editable field The name of the page is shown as page name in Survey. Show in the Survey application Check box Shows or hides the page as a page in Survey. 1st line Display only Fixed to Point ID. 2nd line to 16th line For each line, one of the following options can be selected. Angle right Displays the horizontal angle difference between the backsight point and the current telescope position. % completed Display only field for the percentage of the time for which the point has been occupied based on the setting for Stop criteria in screen Quality Control. Appears in the page during the point occupation if Quality Control is checked. Annotation 1 to Annotation 4 Editable field for comments to be stored with the point. Antenna height Input field for antenna height for static observations. Attrib (free) 01 to Display only field for attributes for free codes. Attrib (free) 20 Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 828 Field Option Description Attrib 01 to Attrib Editable field for attributes for codes. 20 Automation Unavailable for SmartStation. Select automation type. Avg max #distances Input field for maximum number of distance measurements in the averaging EDM mode. Azimuth Display only field for the azimuth. Backsight pt ID Display only field for the point ID of the backsight point. Code Editable field for codes. Code (free) Editable field for free codes. Code desc (free) Display only field for the description of free codes. Code information Editable field for additional information relating to the code, such as instructions to the CAD package to start a line and string number and curve information. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points Description Display only field for the description of codes. Easting Display only field for Easting coordinate of measured point. GDOP Display only field for the current GDOP of the computed position. HDOP Display only field for the current HDOP of the computed position. Elevation Display only field for the height coordinate of the measured point. Height difference Display only field for the height difference between station and reflector. Horiz distance Display only field for horizontal distance. Humidity Editable field for relative humidity to be stored with point. Hz angle Display only field for the horizontal angle. Instrument height Display only field for the instrument height. Line space full Insert full line space. Line space half Insert half line space. Linework Selectable list with option for flagging a line/area. Local ellipsoid ht Display only field for the elevation of the current GNSS position. Measure mode Select EDM measurement mode. Measure Select EDM type. Moving antenna ht Input field for antenna height for moving observations. 829 Field Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points Option Description Msd PP obs Display only field for the number of static observations recorded over the period of point occupation. Appears in the page when recording of static observations is configured. Northing Display only field for Northing coordinate of measured point. Number of dists Display only field for number of averaged distances measured with EDM mode averaging. Offset left/right Input field for horizontal distance offset for measured point, perpendicular to the line of sight. Offset height Input field for height offset for measured point. Offset in/out Input field for horizontal distance offset, in the direction of line of sight. Offset mode Select offset mode. PDOP Display only field for the current PDOP of the computed position. PPM atmos Display only field for atmospheric ppm. PPM geometric Display only field for geometric ppm value. PPM total Display only field for the total ppm value. Point ID Editable field for the point ID. Pressure Editable field for atmospheric pressure. Prism constant Display only field for additive constant of currently selected reflector. Quality 1D Display only field for the current height coordinate quality of computed position. Quality 2D Display only field for the current 2D coordinate quality of computed position. Quality 3D Display only field for the current 3D coordinate quality of computed position. RTK positions Display only field for the number of positions recorded over the period of point occupation. Appears in the page of real-time rover configurations. SD (last recorded) Display only field for the last recorded distance. Slope distance Display only field for measured slope distance. Station ID Display only field for current station ID. Station easting Display only field for current station Easting coordinates. Station height Display only field for current station height coordinates. Station northing Display only field for current station Northing coordinates. 830 Field Option Description Std deviation Display only field of standard deviation in millimetres of averaged distances. Target Select a prism. Target height Input field for prism height. Temp dry Editable field for dry temperature to be stored with point. Temp wet Editable field for wet temperature to be stored with point. Time at point Display only field for the time from when the point is occupied until point occupation is stopped. Appears in the page during the point occupation. Type Display only field for the type of code, for example point code, line code or area code. V angle Display only field for vertical angle. V angle display Select vertical angle display. VDOP Display only field for the current VDOP of the computed position. WGS84 ellipsoid ht Display only field for the current GNSS position. WGS84 latitude Display only field for the current GNSS position. WGS84 longitude Display only field for the current GNSS position. 58.3 Measuring Auto Points Requirements • Log auto points in Configuration, Log auto points page. • The rover menu must be used. Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!, Survey. Go to the Auto page. Survey, Auto page Before logging of auto points has started, the page appears as shown: Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 831 Key Description Start For Logging starts: Automatically in Configuration, Log auto points page, logging of auto points starts immediately when the Survey screen is accessed and Start need not be pressed. To start logging of auto points and offset points if configured or, for Store points by: User decides, to start the chain to which the auto points will be assigned. The first auto point is stored. Measure mode: Continuous becomes active. For Measure: Prism instrument locks onto prism. For Measure modeLong range (>4km), Measure: Prism is set and instrument locks onto the prism. Stop Meas Store Offst1.. To end recording of auto points and offset points if configured or, for Store points by: User decides, to end the chain to which the auto points are assigned. Available for Stop. To store an auto point at any time. Available for Stop. To store an auto point at any time. To configure recording of the first type of offset points. Refer to "58.4.2 Configuring Offset Points". Available for Store points: To DBX (pts&codes) in Configuration, Log auto points page. Offst2.. To configure recording of a second type of offset points. Refer to "58.4.2 Configuring Offset Points". Available for Store points: To DBX (pts&codes) in Configuration, Log auto points page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure auto points. Refer to "58.2 Configuring Auto Points". Fn Quit To exit the Survey application. Point information logged until pressing Fn Quit is saved in the database. Description of fields Field Option Auto point ID Editable field Available unless GPS auto points: Date & time/TPS auto points: Date & time in ID Templates. The identifier for auto points. The configured ID template for auto points is used. The ID can be changed. To start a new sequence of point IDs, type over the point ID. Date & time Moving antenna Description Available for GPS auto points: Date & time/TPS auto points: Date & time in ID Templates. The current local time and date is used as identifier for auto points. Editable field The default antenna height for auto points as defined in the active working style is suggested. ht Target height Code (auto) Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points Editable field The default reflector height as defined in the active configuration set is suggested. The thematical code for the auto point. 832 Field Option Description • If a point code is selected then any open line/area is closed. The occupied point is stored with the selected code independently of any line/area. • If a line code is selected then any open line is closed and a new line with the selected code is created. The line ID is defined by the configured line ID template. The occupied point is assigned to that line. The line stays open until it is closed manually or another line code is selected. • If an area code is selected then the behaviour is as for lines. Selectable list Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. The attributes are shown as display only, editable field or selectable list fields depending on their definition. Editable field Available if Use a list box to view codes is not checked. Codes can be typed in but not selected from a codelist. A check is performed to see if a code of this name already exists in the job. If so, the according attributes are shown. Configure a survey screen mask with a selectable list for code types to define if a point, line or area code is typed in. Description Display only The description of the code. Msd auto points Display only Available after pressing Start. The number of auto points logged since Start has been pressed. Display only The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed position. Slope distance Display only The measured slope distance. When Start is pressed, Measure mode: Continuous is set and the slope distance is constantly updated. Hz Display only The current horizontal angle. V Display only The current vertical angle. 3D CQ Next step IF THEN auto points are to be logged Start. Then, for Store points by: User decides, Meas whenever an auto point is to be logged. offset points are to Offst1.. or Offst2... Refer to "58.4 Offset Points of Auto Points". be configured Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 833 58.4 Offset Points of Auto Points 58.4.1 Overview Description Offset points • can be created with auto points when auto points are stored to the DBX. • can be to the left or to the right of auto points. • are automatically computed with the logging of auto points, if configured. • form a chain relative to the chain of auto points to which they are related. Subsequent computed chains are independent from each other. • can be coded independently of auto points. • have the same time of when they were stored as the auto points to which they are related. • have the same coding functionality, properties and averaging functionality as auto points. Up to two offset points can be related to one auto point. The screens for the configuration of offset points are identical except for the title Auto Points - Offset 1 and Auto Points - Offset 2. For simplicity, the title Auto Points - Offset 1 is used in the following description. Computation of offset points The computation of offset points depends on the number of auto points in one chain. One auto point No offset points are computed or stored. Two auto points The configured offsets are applied perpendicular to the line between two auto points. P4 P0 P1 P2 P3 P1 P5 P4 P5 P2 d1 d1 P0 GS_061 d2 d2 P3 P5 P2 P6 P1 P2 P4 P3 P5 P6 P3 d1 d1 P1 TS_044 Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points d2 P4 d2 First auto point Second auto point First offset point for P0 Second offset point for P0 First offset point for P1 Second offset point for P1 Horizontal offset to the left Horizontal offset to the right First auto point Second auto point First offset point for P1 Second offset point for P1 First offset point for P2 Second offset point for P2 Horizontal offset to the left Horizontal offset to the right 834 Three or more auto points The first offset points are computed perpendicular to the line between the first and the second auto point. The last offset point is computed perpendicular to the line between the last auto point and the one before. All other offset points are computed on a bearing. The bearing is half of the angle between the last and the next measured auto point. P0 P1 P2 P3 P7 P8 P4 P5 P6 P4 P5 P9 P1 P7 P8 P9 P6 P2 d1 d1 P0 GS_062 d2 P3 d2 α1 α2 P8 P9 2 P6 1 P10 P2 P7 P3 d1 P1 TS_045 Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points d2 P4 P5 First auto point Second auto point First offset point for P0 Second offset point for P0 Third auto point First offset point for P1 Second offset point for P1 Fourth auto point First offset point for P4 Second offset point for P4 Horizontal offset to the left Horizontal offset to the right Angle between P0 and P4 Angle between P1 and P7 P1 P2 P3 P4 First auto point Second auto point First offset point for P1 Second offset point for P1 P5 Third auto point P6 First offset point for P2 P7 Second offset point for P2 P8 Fourth auto point P9 First offset point for P5 P10 Second offset point for P5 d1 Horizontal offset to the left d2 Horizontal offset to the right α1 Angle between P1 and P5 α2 Angle between P2 and P8 835 58.4.2 Configuring Offset Points Requirements Available for Store points: To DBX (pts&codes) in Configuration, Log auto points page. Access Press Offst1.. or Offst2.. in Survey, Auto page. Auto Points - Offset 1, General page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Offst2.. and Offst1.. To switch between configuring offset point type one and two. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Store offset 1 points and Store offset 2 points Check box Activates logging of offset points. All other fields on the screen are active and can be edited with this setting. Horiz distance Editable field The horizontal offset between -1000 m and 1000 m at which the offset point is collected. Height offset Editable field The height offset between -100 m and 100 m from the related auto point. Identifier Editable field The identifier with up to four characters is added in front of or at the end of the ID of the auto point. This ID is then used as the point ID for the related offset point. This functionality could support an automatic workflow into CAD packages including setting symbols and stringing lines. Prefix/suffix Prefix Adds the setting for Identifier in front of the auto point ID. Suffix Adds the setting for Identifier at the end of the auto point ID. Next step Page changes to the Code page. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 836 Auto Points - Offset 1, Code page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. +Attrib To create additional attributes for the selected code. Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. Name or Value To highlight the attribute field or the field for the attribute value. The name of the attribute can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in. Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in. Last To recall the last used attribute values for the selected code. Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. Default To recall the default attribute values for the selected code. Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point code Selectable list The thematical code for the offset point. Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. The attributes are shown as display only, editable field or selectable list fields depending on their definition. Code Editable field The thematical code for the offset point. Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. Codes can be typed in but not selected from a codelist. A check is performed to see if a point code of this name already exists in the job. If so, the according attributes are shown. Description Display only Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. The description of the code. Attributes Editable field Available if Use a list box to view codes is checked. Up to three attribute values can be stored. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 837 Next step IF THEN offset point config- OK to return to the survey screen. uration is finished a second offset point is to be configured Example for offset point IDs Page and then Offst2.. or Offst1.. to change to configuration screen for the second point. The offset point ID is a combination of the auto point ID and an identifier as a prefix or suffix. The right most part of the auto point ID is incremented within the point ID. If the length of the auto point ID plus identifier is greater than 16 characters, then the auto point ID is truncated from the left. Auto point ID Identifier Prefix/Suffix Offset point ID Auto1234 Auto1235 OS1 Prefix OS1Auto1234 OS1Auto1235 … Auto1234 Auto1235 OS1 Suffix Auto1234OS1 Auto1235OS1 … Refer to "25.1 ID templates" for more information on point IDs. Viva Series, Survey - Auto Points 838 59 Survey Cross Section 59.1 Overview Description The Survey Cross Section application allows for the automatic changing of codes during a survey. This function is useful when surveying multiple cross sections. Examples could include surveys of railway lines, roads, small waterways, driveways and paths. The codes for the elements in the cross section to be surveyed are all stored and predefined in a template. The codes are then automatically changed after each point observation. Diagram a a) Cross section element GS_075 Template Templates are used to pre-define the order of the codes for the survey. A template pre-defines • the coding sequence of a cross section. • the type of coding. Cross section methods and directions Templates can be applied • to the ZigZag method or the Same Direction method. • in either a forward direction or in a backward direction. ZigZag GS_076 Same Direction GS_077 Survey Cross Section is possible for RTK rover and TPS. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 839 Coding of cross section elements Codes can be attached to cross section elements. Refer to "26 Coding" for information on coding. • Thematical coding: Available • Free coding: Available • Quick coding: Not available Averaging of cross section elements The principles for averaging are identical to the principles use in the Survey application. Refer to "6.3.3 Mean Page" for information on averaging. Exporting data The points and lines are recorded as for all other applications. The data can be exported as normal. 59.2 Accessing Survey Cross Section Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Survey cross section. Description Cross section templates • pre-define the sequence of codes for a cross section. • consist of elements. Elements can be defined such that the surveyed points of a cross section are • stored with a point code. • stored with a free code. During the process of surveying a cross section, the code for the next element to be measured is then selected and suggested automatically. Survey X Section Templates All cross section templates stored in the working job are listed in alphabetical order, including the number of elements in each cross section template. Key Description OK To select the highlighted cross section template and to start surveying a cross section. New.. To create a cross section template. Edit.. To edit the highlighted cross section template. Delete To delete the highlighted cross section template. Copy.. To create a cross section template based on the one currently highlighted. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 840 59.3 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template Access In Survey X Section - Templates, press New.., Copy.. or Edit... New Template/Edit Template/Copy Template, General page Type in a name for the new cross section template. Next step Page changes to the Elements page. New Template/Edit Template/Copy Template, Elements page Key Description Store To store the cross section template and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Add To add one or more elements to the end of the current list. Edit.. To edit the highlighted element. Delete To delete the highlighted element from the list. Insert To insert one element before the currently highlighted element of the list. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of columns Field Description No. The number of the element. Code The code assigned to the element. If no code is assigned to the element, ----- is displayed. Code type The type of the code assigned to the element. Next step Add, Edit.. or Insert accesses Add Element/Edit Element/Insert Element. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 841 Add Element/Edit Element/Insert Element The functionality of the screens adding, editing and inserting an element are similar. Differences are outlined. Key Description OK To add the element at the end of the cross section template or to store the changes. To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Next In Add Element: To add the element to the end of the Elements list and stay in the Add Element screen to add further elements. In Edit Element: To update the element in the Elements list and stay in the Edit Element screen to edit details of the next element in the list. Prev Available in Edit Element. To update the element in the Elements list and stay in the Edit Element screen to edit details of the previous element in the list. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Element number Display only For Add Element and Insert Element: The number of the element to be added. For Edit Element: Displayed as x/y. x Number of the element to be edited. y Total number of elements on the active template. The type of code to be used with the element. Code type Free codes To store a code independent of the element as time-related information. Thematic codes To store a code together with the element. Store free code After pt is stored Determines if a free code is stored before or after the point. Available for Code type: Free codes. or Before pt is stored Code (free) Selectable list The code which will be stored before or after the point/line. Available for Code type: Free codes. Code Selectable list The code which will be stored with the next point/line. Available for Code type: Thematic codes. Description Display only A line for a detailed description of the code. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 842 Next step OK adds the element or stores the changes. 59.4 Surveying Cross Sections Description The fields on this screen indicate which cross section element is to be surveyed next. Access Press OK in Survey X Section - Templates. Survey, General page The pages shown are from a typical working style. An additional page is available when a user-defined survey screen page is used. Key Description Meas Available if a template has been opened with Start. To start measuring the next point of the cross section. The key changes to Stop. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Stop Store To end measuring the point. The key changes to Store. To store the measured point. The key changes to Meas. To store angles and distance. Distance must be measured before. Dist To measure a distance. Start and End To open and close the selected cross section template. While the template is open, the elements of the cross section can be surveyed. Survy.. To manually measure a point that is not part of the cross section. The point is not treated as an element of the cross section. The open template remains open. Available if a template has been opened with Start. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Cross Section Survey application. Refer to "59.5 Configuring Survey Cross Section". Fn Prev To select the previous element of the cross section template. The currently measured element will not be stored. Available when End is displayed. Fn Next To select the next element of the cross section template. The currently measured element will not be stored. Available when End is displayed. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 843 Key Description Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for manually measured points. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: • To start a new sequence of point IDs type over the point ID. • For an individual point ID independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Antenna ht Editable field Target height Editable field The default prism height. The active template for the cross section. Template Element The default antenna height. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. Selectable list The cross section template is closed. Opening the selectable list accesses Survey X Section - Templates where a new template can be created and an existing template can be selected or deleted. Refer to "59.3 Creating/Editing a Cross Section Template". Display only The cross section template is open. Display only Displayed as x/y. x The number of the next element on active template. The number increases/decreases as moving across the cross section depending on the selection for Method in Configuration. y Total number of elements on active template. Code Display only The name of the code. Point codes will be stored with the measured point. Free codes will be stored, depending on the configuration, before or after the measured point. Distance to last Display only The horizontal distance from the current position to the last surveyed element position in the previous cross section. ----- is displayed for unavailable information. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 844 Next step IF THEN a cross section template is to select the desired template and press Start. be opened an element of a cross section is to be surveyed Meas, Stop and then Store. Meas, or Dist and then Store. Once the end of a cross section is surveyed then the next cross section will be measured. Depending on the Method selected in Configuration, General page, the measurement is either in the same direction or in the reverse direction. a cross section template is to select the desired template and press End. be closed data is to be viewed graphically Page. An element of a cross section template can also be surveyed from the Map page. Refer to "37 MapView Interactive Display Feature" for information on the functionality and softkeys available. the application is to be exited Fn Quit. 59.5 Configuring Survey Cross Section Access In the survey screen of the cross section application, press Config... Configuration, General page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Config.. To edit the survey screen page currently being displayed. Available when a list item in Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "25.3 My Survey Screen". Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the application. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 845 Description of fields Field Option Description Method by which subsequent cross sections will be surveyed. Refer to "59.1 Overview" for a diagram. Method Zig-zag Each new cross section is started at the same end as where the previous cross section finished. Same direction Each new cross section is started at the same end as where the previous cross section started. The way of surveying the cross section. This influences in which order the elements of a template will be applied. Refer to "59.1 Overview" for a diagram. Direction Forward The cross sections will be surveyed in the same way as the elements are defined in the selected template. Backward The cross sections will be surveyed in the reverse way as the elements are defined in the selected template. Show distance Check box to last msd section Activates a display only field in the survey screen. The horizontal distance from the current position to the last surveyed element position in the previous cross section will be displayed. Show code attribute Check box When this box is checked, some attribute fields are displayed in the survey screen. Useful if the surveyor is stringing, to see that the correct string attribute value is being used. Attribute to show From 1 to 20 The number of attribute fields which is displayed in the survey screen. Available when Show code attribute is checked. Check box Show additional page from My Survey Screen When this box is checked, a user-defined survey screen page is shown in the survey screen. Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages. Available when Show additional page from My Survey Screen is checked. Next step OK returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Viva Series, Survey Cross Section 846 60 Survey - Hidden Points 60.1 Overview Description Hidden points are points which cannot be measured directly by GPS, because, either they cannot be physically reached, or because satellites are obstructed, for example by trees or tall buildings. • A hidden point can be calculated by measuring distances and/or azimuths to the hidden point using a hidden point measurement device. Or for distances a tape can be used. • Additional auxiliary points can be manually measured. • Bearings can be computed from previously measured points. In contrast to the COGO application, hidden point measurements is more of a measuring application than a calculation application. Example Hidden point measurement methods Application: Completing a survey of telegraph poles for a telecommunication company. Aim: The telegraph poles must be surveyed to 0.3 m accuracy in plan but height is not of concern. Use of hidden point measurements: For poles surrounded by heavy undergrowth, where it is not possible to measure the pole directly without taking time to cut a path through the undergrowth. Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in hidden point measurements does not result in the hidden point being recomputed. A hidden point can be measured by • Bearing and distance • Two bearings • Two distances • Chainage and offset • Backwards bearing and distance A hidden point measurement device can be attached to the instrument such that the measurements are automatically transferred to the instrument. Heights If configured, heights are taken into account. Refer to "60.7 Hidden Point Measurement Including Heights" for information on configuring height offsets. Device height and Target height configured in Hidden Point Device Offsets are applied when the hidden points are computed. ∆ height in Hidden Point Connection is the value directly from the hidden point measuring device. Coding of hidden points • Thematical coding: • Free coding: • Quick coding: Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points Available in Hidden Point Result after the calculation of a hidden point. Thematical coding of hidden points is identical to coding of manually measured points. Can be started while in Hidden Point Connection. Free coding of hidden points is identical to coding of manually measured points. Not available. 847 Averaging of hidden points An average is calculated for hidden points if a point of class Meas already exists with the same point ID. Azimuth is used throughout this chapter. This term must always be considered to mean also Bearing. Auxiliary points Auxiliary points are used to compute azimuths required for the calculation of hidden point coordinates. Auxiliary points can be points existing in the job or they can be manually measured. The point ID template configured for Auxiliary points in ID Templates is applied. 60.2 Hidden Point Methods 60.2.1 Bearing & Distance Description One point must be known. It • can already exist in the job. • can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements. • can be manually typed in. The distance and the bearing from the known point to the hidden point are to be determined. An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which might not be known. The auxiliary point can be determined in the direction from the known point to the hidden point. Diagram P2 d P1 GS_063 P0 Known P0 Known point To be measured d Distance from P0 to P2 α Bearing from P0 to P2 P1 Auxiliary point, optional Unknown P2 Hidden point 60.2.2 Using 2 Bearings Description Two points must be known. They • can already exist in the job. • can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements. • can be manually typed in. The bearings from the known points to the hidden point are to be determined. Auxiliary points help compute the bearings which might not be known. Auxiliary points can be measured in the direction from the known points to the hidden point. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 848 Diagram P3 P4 Known P0 First known point P3 Second known point To be measured α1 Bearing from P0 to P2 α2 Bearing from P3 to P2 P1 First auxiliary point, optional P4 Second auxiliary point, optional Unknown P2 Hidden point P2 P1 GS_064 P0 60.2.3 Using 2 Distances Description Two points must be known. They • can already exist in the job. • can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements. • can be manually typed in. The distances from the known points to the hidden points are to be determined. The location of the hidden point relative to the line between the two known points is to be defined. Diagram P2 d2 b P1 a d3 d1 GS_065 P0 Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points Known P0 First known point P2 Second known point d3 Line from P0 to P2 a Right of d3 b Left of d3 To be measured d1 Distance from P0 to P1 d2 Distance from P2 to P1 Unknown P1 Hidden point 849 60.2.4 Chainage & Offset Description Two points must be known. They • can already exist in the job. • can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements. • can be manually typed in. The chainage from one known point along the line between the two known points must be determined. The offset of the hidden point to the line between the two known points must be determined. Diagram P1 d2 P2 d1 GS_067 P0 Known P0 First known point P1 Second known point To be measured d1 Chainage d2 Offset Unknown P2 Hidden point 60.2.5 Backwards Bearing & Distance Description In order to compute the hidden point, the measurements are taken from the hidden point. One point must be known. It • can already exist in the job. • can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements. • can be manually typed in. The distance and the bearing from the hidden point to the known point are to be determined. An auxiliary point helps compute the bearing which might not be known. An auxiliary point can be measured in the direction from the hidden point to the known point. Diagram P2 P1 d GS_068 P0 Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points Known P0 Known point To be measured α Bearing from P2 to P0 d Distance from P2 to P0 P1 Auxiliary point, optional Unknown P2 Hidden point 850 60.3 Hidden Point Measurements Hidden point measurements are possible from the Survey application and when the Survey application screen is called from another application, for example from Stakeout. Access Press HdnPt.. in the survey screen. Hidden Point Measurement The setting for Method on this screen determines the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys. Key Description Calc To calculate the hidden point and to display the results. EAO Available for Angle offset: New for each point or Angle offset: Permanent in Hidden Point Device Offsets. To change or enter an External Angle Offset. Hts.. To type in the device and target heights to be considered. Sun Available when Azimuth is highlighted. The azimuth from the direction of the sun to the known point is computed. Azmth Available when Azimuth is highlighted. To select or manually measure an auxiliary point and to compute the azimuth. Posn ? To determine chainage and offset of the current position relative to the line between the two known points. The values are displayed in Chainage and Offset. The point from where the chainage has been measured is selected in Chainage from. Slope Available when Horiz distance or Chainage is highlighted. To measure a slope distance and an elevation angle or percentage grade. The values are used to compute the horizontal distance. Survy.. Available when a point field is highlighted. To measure the known point manually for the calculation of the hidden point. Fn Config.. To configure hidden point measurements. Refer to "19 Connections.. - All other connections". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Method Selectable list The method for measuring hidden points. Refer to "60.2 Hidden Point Methods" for a description of the methods. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 851 Field Option Description Point Selectable list The point ID of the current position. This point is the known point for the calculation of the hidden point. To type in coordinates manually for the known point open the selectable list and create a new point. Point A Selectable list The point ID of the current position. This point is the first known point for the calculation of the hidden point. To type in coordinates manually for the known point open the selectable list and create a new point. Point B Selectable list The point ID of the current position. This point is the second known point for the calculation of the hidden point. To type in coordinates manually for the known point open the selectable list and create a new point. Editable field The azimuth from the known point to the hidden point. Type in an azimuth. When a hidden point measurement device is attached to the instrument to measure the azimuth, the value is automatically transferred. Horiz distance Editable field The horizontal distance from the known point to the hidden point. Type in a distance. When a hidden point measurement device is attached to the instrument to measure the distance, the value is automatically transferred. Azimuth Location Selectable list Chainage from Selectable list Available for Method: Using 2 distances. The location of the hidden point relative to the line from Point A to Point B. Available for Method: Chainage & offset. The chainage from one known point along the line between the two known points. Looking from the point selected in Chainage from, a positive chainage is towards the second known point. A negative chainage is into the opposite direction of the second known point. Next step Calc calculates the hidden point and displays the results in Hidden Point Result. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 852 60.4 Hidden Point Results Computed distances on Hidden Point Result P2 d2 P1 d5 P0 P1 P2 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d4 d1 d6 d3 P0 GS_066 First known point Hidden point Second known point Distance from P0 to P1 Distance from P2 to P1 Check chainage A Check chainage B Check offset Check distance AB Hidden Point Result Key Description Store To store the result. Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Next To store the hidden point and to return to Hidden Point Measurement. Another hidden point can be measured. Fn Quit To not store the hidden point and to exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for the hidden point. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed. Type in a point ID. Check distance AB Display only Available for Method: Using 2 bearings and Method: Using 2 distances. The computed horizontal distance between Point A and Point B. Check bearing Display only AB Check distance A Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points Display only Available for Method: Using 2 bearings and Method: Chainage & offset. The computed bearing from Point A to Point B. Available for Method: Using 2 bearings and Method: Chainage & offset. The computed horizontal distance between Point A and the hidden point. 853 Field Option Description Check distance B Display only Available for Method: Using 2 bearings and Method: Chainage & offset. The computed horizontal distance between Point B and the hidden point. Check chainage A Display only Available for Method: Using 2 distances. The computed distance on the line from Point A to Point B from Point A to the point of intersection with Check offset. Check chainage B Display only Available for Method: Using 2 distances. The computed distance on the line from Point B to Point A from Point B to the point of intersection with Check offset. Check offset Display only Available for Method: Using 2 distances. The computed perpendicular distance from the hidden point to the line from Point A to Point B. Next step On the Code page, type in a code if desired. On the Map page, measured distances are indicated by solid arrows, bearings are indicated by half solid and half dashed arrows. Store stores the hidden point. 60.5 Computing an Azimuth 60.5.1 Using the Sun Description The azimuth for a hidden point measurement can be computed using a known point and the sun. The known point can be manually measured. The location of the hidden point can be away from the sun or in the direction towards the sun. Ensure that the shadow of the pole falls in the direction of the point. Diagram P1 P1 P0 P0 GS_069 P0 Known point P1 Hidden point α Bearing from P0 to P1 P0 Known point P1 Hidden point α Bearing from P0 to P1 Requirements Bearing & distance, Using 2 bearings or Back brng & distance must be selected for Method. Access In Hidden Point Measurement highlight Azimuth. Press Sun. Follow the instructions on the screen. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 854 60.5.2 Using Auxiliary Point Description The azimuth for a hidden point measurement can be computed using an auxiliary point. The auxiliary point • can already exist in the job. • can be manually measured during the hidden point measurements. • can be manually typed in. The location of the auxiliary point can be in the direction towards the hidden point or away from the hidden point. Diagram P2 P2 P0 P1 P0 GS_071 P0 P1 P2 α GS_072 Known point Auxiliary point, Azimuth Pt Hidden point Bearing from P2 to P0 P0 P1 P2 α P1 Known point Auxiliary point, Azimuth Pt Hidden point Bearing from P0 to P2 Requirements Bearing & distance, Using 2 bearings or Back brng & distance must be selected for Method. Access In Hidden Point Measurement highlight Azimuth. Press Azmth. Choose Azimuth Point Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. The azimuth is computed and displayed in Azimuth in Hidden Point Measurement. Survy.. Available for Azimuth Pt being highlighted. To measure the auxiliary point manually for the calculation of the azimuth. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 855 Description of fields Field Option Description Azimuth Pt Selectable list The auxiliary point for the calculation of the azimuth. Direction Selectable list The location of the auxiliary point relative to the hidden point. Next step OK closes the screen. 60.6 Computing Horizontal Distances from Slope Distances Description The horizontal distance for a hidden point measurement can be computed using a slope distance, and an elevation angle or percentage grade. The slope distance and the elevation angle can either be typed in or measured with a hidden point measurement device. Diagram P1 d1 d2 P0 GS_073 P0 P1 d1 d2 α Known point Hidden point Slope distance Horizontal distance Elevation angle Requirements Bearing & distance, Using 2 bearings or Back brng & distance must be selected for Method. Access In Hidden Point Measurement highlight Horiz distance. Press Slope. Slope distance Key Description OK To take over the result. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 856 Description of fields Field Option Description Slope distance Editable field Type in a distance from the known point to the hidden point. When a hidden point measurement device is attached to the instrument to measure the distance, the value is automatically transferred. Elevation angle Editable field Type in the elevation angle from the known point to the hidden point. When a hidden point measurement device is attached to the instrument to measure the elevation angle, the value is automatically transferred. Grade (%) Editable field The grade from the known point to the hidden point is automatically computed from the slope distance and the elevation angle. The value for Grade (%) can be typed in instead of the value for Elevation angle. Then Elevation angle is computed automatically. Horiz distance Display only The horizontal distance from the known point to the hidden point is automatically computed from the slope distance and the elevation angle. ∆ height Available if using heights is configured. The height difference between the known point and the hidden point is automatically computed from the slope distance and the elevation angle. Display only Next step OK returns to Hidden Point Measurement. The horizontal distance is displayed in Horiz distance. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 857 60.7 Hidden Point Measurement Including Heights Diagram P1 d2 d3 d4 b d1 a d2 d3 d4 P2 d5 P0 d5 GS_074 Configuration stepby-step Hidden Point Measurement P0 P1 P2 a b d1 Known point Target point Hidden point Height of P0 Height of P2 = a + d1 + d4 - d3 Device height: Height of hidden point measurement device above P0 Slope distance Target height: Height of P1 above P2 Height difference between hidden point measurement device and P1 Horizontal distance Step Description 1. Compute height for hidden points is checked in Configuration. 2. Height offset: Device & target ht in Hidden Point Device Offsets. Description of fields Field Option Description ∆ height Selectable list The positive or negative height difference between the centre of the hidden point measurement device and the target point. Type in the value. When a hidden point measurement device is attached to the instrument to measure the height difference, the value is automatically transferred. For hidden point measurement methods using two known points, ∆ height must be determined from each known point. Refer to "60.3 Hidden Point Measurements" for a description of all other fields on the screen. Next step Press Hts... Device & Target Height Description of fields Field Option Device ht at pt Editable field A Description The height of the hidden point measurement device above Point A. Editable field The height of the target point above the hidden point when measured from Point A. Device ht at pt Editable field B Available for hidden point measurement methods using two known points. The height of the hidden point measurement device above Point B. Target height Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 858 Field Option Description Target height Editable field Available for hidden point measurement methods using two known points. The height of the target point above the hidden point when measured from Point B. Next step OK closes the screen and returns to Hidden Point Measurement. There, ∆ height still displays the positive or negative height difference between the centre of the hidden point measurement device and the target point. The heights of the hidden point measurement device above the ground, and the target point above the hidden point, are applied when the hidden point is computed. For hidden point measurement methods using two known points, this computation is done for each known point. In this case, the height of the hidden point is the average. Viva Series, Survey - Hidden Points 859 61 Hidden Point 61.1 Overview Description Hidden points cannot be measured directly by a TPS instrument, because they are not directly visible. A hidden point can be calculated from measurements to prisms mounted on a hidden point rod. The spacing and length of the hidden point rod are known. The hidden point rod can be held at any angle, as long as it is stationary for all measurements. Measurements for the hidden point are calculated as if the hidden point was observed directly. These calculated measurements can also be recorded. The hidden point rod can have either two or three prisms. If three prisms are used the average will be calculated. Hidden point rod The prisms on the hidden point rod are also called auxiliary points after they have been measured. 1 d2 3 d3 2 d1 TS_046 Hidden point tasks 1 2 3 d1 d2 d3 Prism 1 Prism 2 Prism 3 Rod length Distance from prism 1 to prism 2 Distance from prism 1 to prism 3 The Hidden Point application can be used for the following tasks: • The hidden point application can be used to obtain accurate three-dimensional coordinates for a point that is blocked from direct measurement by an obstruction. • Determination of flow line locations and elevations in manholes, without measuring from the manhole rim to the flow line, and then estimating corrections for nonverticality of the measuring tape and eccentricity from the rim measurement to the flow line. • Determination of recesses in building corners for detailed surveys, without estimating right angle offsets, with or without taping of the dimensions. • Measurements behind overhangs, buttresses and columns for quantity determinations in underground construction or mining, without estimating right angle offsets, with or without taping of the dimensions. • Measurements of industrial process piping or other equipment in close quarters. • Detailed architectural surveys for remodelling or cultural preservation or restoration work • Any place where accurate measurements would require many more instrument setups in order to achieve line of sight from the instrument to the points being measured. The TPS Hidden Point application does not generate a report sheet. Viva Series, Hidden Point 860 61.2 Accessing Hidden Point and Measuring Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\TPS hidden point. Diagram 1 3 d3 d2 d1 2 d1 Rod length d2 Distance from prism 1 to prism 2 d3 Distance from prism 1 to prism 3 P1 P0 TS_047 Measure Reflector 1, Hidden pt page Key Description Meas To measure and store the prism, and access the next screen. Dist To measure a distance. Store To store data. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the TPS hidden point application. Refer to "61.3 Configuring Hidden Point". Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Aux point ID Editable field The point ID of the auxiliary point, the prism on the hidden point rod. The Auxiliary Points ID template is used. Hz Display only The horizontal angle to prism 1, the auxiliary point, is displayed. V Display only The vertical angle to prism 1, the auxiliary point, is displayed. Slope distance Display only The slope distance to prism 1, the auxiliary point, is displayed. Viva Series, Hidden Point Description 861 Field Option Description Height difference Display only The height difference to prism 1, the auxiliary point, is displayed. Rod length Editable field The length of the rod can be adjusted before the hidden point result is displayed. The rod length always keeps the distances R1-R2 for two prisms and R1-R3 for three prisms into account. Next step Take the measurements to prism 2 and, if desired, to prism 3. After the last prism of the hidden point rod is measured, Hidden Point Result, Result page is accessed. Hidden Point Result, Result page Key Description Store To measure the prism and exit the application. Next To store the hidden point and to access Measure Reflector 1 to take more hidden point measurements. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Point ID Editable field The name of the hidden point. The configured point ID template is used. Hz Display only The calculated horizontal angle to the computed hidden point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information. V Display only The calculated vertical angle to the computed hidden point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information. Slope distance Display only The calculated slope distance to the computed hidden point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information. Height difference Display only The calculated height difference from instrument to computed hidden point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information. Viva Series, Hidden Point Description 862 Field Option Easting, Northing Display only and Height Description The calculated coordinates of the computed hidden point. ----- is displayed for unavailable information. Next step Page changes to the Code page. Type in a code if desired. Page changes to the Plot page. Measured distances are indicated by solid arrows. 61.3 Configuring Hidden Point Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\TPS hidden point. Press Fn Config... Configuration Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Config.. To configure the selected survey screen page. Refer to "25.3 My Survey Screen". Fn About To display information about the program name, the version number, the date of the version, the copyright and the article number. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Page to show Selectable list The user-defined survey screen page to be shown in Measure Reflector 1, Measure Reflector 2 and Measure Reflector 3. Measure tolerance Editable field Limit of the difference between input and measured spacing of the prisms. For three prisms being used, limit for maximum deviation of the three measurements. Yes or No The auxiliary points are deleted when the hidden point is stored. Delete aux points The auxiliary points are prism 1, prism 2 and prism 3 of the hidden point rod. Viva Series, Hidden Point 863 Field Option Description The Auxiliary Points ID template is used for the auxiliary points. The Survey Points ID template is used for the computed hidden point. No. of reflectors 2 or 3 Two or three prisms are used on the rod. Auto position Yes or No Available for No. of reflectors: 3. The third prism is aimed at automatically. Rod length Editable field Total length of hidden point rod. Distance R1-R2 Editable field Spacing between the centres of prism 1 and prism 2. Distance R1-R3 Editable field Available for No. of reflectors: 3. Spacing between the centres of prism 1 and prism 3. Prism 3 is situated between prism 1 and prism 2. Next step OK returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed from. Viva Series, Hidden Point 864 62 Survey - Remote Point 62.1 Overview Description Remote point is used to determine the 3D coordinates of inaccessible points, for example on bridges. The horizontal distance to a base point directly underneath or above the remote point is measured. Then the instrument is aimed at the remote point. The coordinates of the remote point are calculated with the distance measured to the base point and the angles measured to the remote point. Diagram a P2 d1 P1 P0 TS_043 P0 P1 P2 d1 α a Instrument station Base point Remote point Horizontal distance to the base point Vertical angle between base point and remote point Vertical axis from P1 to P2 To ensure correct results, the remote point and the prism must be lined up vertically. If it is not possible to maintain an exactly vertical line, the acceptable Hz dist tolerance must be chosen. The horizontal distance to the remote point and to the base point should coincide. Averaging of remote points An average can be calculated for remote points if a measured point of class Meas already exists with the same point ID. The average flag for the point is Auto. 62.2 Accessing Remote Point Description Remote point measurements are possible from the Survey application when Measure remote points is checked in the Configuration, Remote points page and a valid distance measurement is available. Access Press RmtHt. in Survey, Survey page after one point is measured with Dist. Survey Remote Point, Remote points page Key Description Store Stores the remote point. Stays in this screen. Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point 865 Key Description Base pt Returns to the Survey screen. The distance measurement is cleared. Page To change to another page on this screen. The page available depends on the Page to show selected in the Configuration, Remote points screen. Refer to "62.3 Configuring Remote Point". Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field Displays the point ID for the remote point. The point ID in Survey Remote Point is always identical to the point ID in Survey. ∆ height - remote to base Display only The elevation difference between the base point and the remote point. Hz Display only The current horizontal angle. V Display only The current vertical angle. Slope distance Display only The current slope distance to the remote point calculated from the horizontal distance to the base point and the current vertical angle. Horiz distance Display only The horizontal distance measured to the base point. Easting Display only Calculated Easting coordinate for the remote point. Northing Display only Calculated Northing coordinate for the remote point. Elevation Display only Calculated height for the remote point. Next step IF THEN if a remote point is Store. to be stored a new base point is Base pt to return to the Survey screen. to be measured Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point 866 62.3 Configuring Remote Point Access In Survey press Fn Config.. to access Configuration. Configuration, Remote points page Key Description OK To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Page To change to another page on this screen. Config.. To configure the selected survey screen page. Available when Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "25.3 My Survey Screen". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Measure remote points Check box If checked, the remote point function is active. RmtHt. is added to the function keys in Survey after Dist is pressed. Hz dist tolerance Editable field The horizontal distance to the remote point is equal to the horizontal distance of the base point. The value for Hz dist tolerance is the maximum tolerated length of the chord between the base point and the remote point. Page to show Selectable list All survey screen pages from Main Menu: User\Work settings\My Survey Screen can be selected. Viva Series, Survey - Remote Point 867 63 Traverse 63.1 Overview Description The Traverse application is used to fulfil one of the most common operations done by surveyors; to establish a control point base system to be used as a skeleton for other survey operations. For example, topographic survey, point stakeout, line stakeout or road stakeout. Types of traverse If the message panel appears which requires that the application must be activated via a license key then refer to "30.3 Load licence keys". • • • • External reference & closed loop Internal reference & position check Open end & position check Closed end traverse P6 P2 P1 P5 P10 P8 P3 TS_049 P4 P7 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P9 P10 Traverse point Backsight point Traverse point Sideshot point Traverse point Sideshot point Sideshot point Closing point Sideshot point Closing angle point Averaging of Traverse points An average point of class Meas is calculated by the Traverse application. 63.2 Accessing Traverse Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\Traverse. Traverse Viva Series, Traverse Key Description OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "63.6 Configuring Traverse". 868 Key Description Fn Quit To exit the application. Next step IF THEN a traverse is to be highlight the relevant option and press OK. created or selected Traverse is to be configured Fn Config... Refer to "63.6 Configuring Traverse". 63.3 Creating/Editing a Traverse Access • In Traverse, select Create a new traverse. Press OK. • In Manage Traverses, press New.. or Edit... New Traverse/Edit Traverse Key Description OK To store the settings. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "63.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Viva Series, Traverse Field Option Description Traverse ID Editable field The ID of the traverse. Description Editable field A line for a detailed description of the traverse, for example, work to be performed. Optional. Operator Editable field The person’s name who is creating the traverse. Optional. Date Display only The date of when the traverse was created. Available in the Edit Traverse screen. Time Display only The time of when the traverse was created. Available in the Edit Traverse screen. Status Open The traverse is not closed in position. Available in the Edit Traverse screen. 869 Field Option Description Position closed The traverse has been closed in position on a control point. Available in the Edit Traverse screen. Posn & angle The traverse has been closed both in position and closed angularly. Available in the Edit Traverse screen. Adjusted The traverse data is the result from an adjustment. Available in the Edit Traverse screen. 63.4 Selecting an Existing Traverse Access In Traverse, select Existing Traverse. Press OK. Existing Traverse Key Description OK To accept the settings. Data.. To display traverse data. Refer to "63.5 Traverse Data". Not available for adjusted traverses. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "63.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields The fields are identical with those fields in the Edit Traverse screen. Refer to "63.3 Creating/Editing a Traverse". Next step ENTER when Traverse ID is highlighted. Accesses Manage Traverses. Viva Series, Traverse 870 Manage Traverses All traverses of the working job are displayed. Key Description OK To confirm selection of highlighted traverse and return to Select an existing traverse. New.. To create a new traverse. Refer to "63.3 Creating/Editing a Traverse". Edit.. To edit the traverse ID and description of the highlighted traverse. Refer to "63.3 Creating/Editing a Traverse". Data.. To display traverse data. Refer to "63.5 Traverse Data" for more information. Fn Quit To exit the application. 63.5 Traverse Data Description This screen allows the review and editing of traverse stations inside of a traverse and allows the user to access Point Results for editing. Access Data.. in Manage Traverses. OR Data.. in a Confirmation window of the Point Results screen. Traverse Data Viva Series, Traverse Key Description OK To return to where this screen was accessed from. Edit.. To access the Point Results screen. Refer to "63.8 Traverse Point Results". Delete To permanently delete the LAST traverse station. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. 871 Description of columns Column Description Station ID Point ID of the station. Backsight ID The backsight point measured from the current station ID. No. sets Number of measured sets. No. FS Number of measured foresight points. 63.6 Configuring Traverse Access Select Main Menu:Go to Work!\Survey+\Traverse. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Parameters page Key Description OK To accept changes and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed. Config.. To edit the survey screen page currently being displayed. Available when a list item in Page to show is highlighted. Refer to "25.3 My Survey Screen". Available on the Parameters page. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Description Measure sequence B'F'...F''B'' All points are measured in face I, then measured in face II in reverse sequential order. B'F'...B''F'' All points are measured in face I, then measured in face II. B'B''F'F''... Backsight point is measured in face I immediately followed by face II. Other points are measured in face I, face II order. B'B''F''F'... Backsight point is measured in face I immediately followed by face II. Other points are measured in alternating face order. B'F'... All points are measured in face I only. Check box Option to define if only one foresight point or multiple points are used during the sets. Foresight Viva Series, Traverse Option 872 Field Option Description When using automatic target aiming, automatically measure the targets Check box For instruments with automatic aiming and this option checked, automatic aiming search and automatic aiming measurements are done to specified targets and subsequent sets. Show additional page from My Survey Screen Check box The user-defined survey screen page to be shown in the Traverse screen. Page to show Selectable list The names of the available survey screen pages. Next step Page changes to the Quality control page. Configuration, Quality control page Description of fields Field Option Description Check for errors before storing Check box The entered horizontal, vertical and distance tolerances are checked during the measurements to verify accurate pointing and measurements. Hz tolerance Editable field Tolerance for horizontal directions. V tolerance Editable field Tolerance for vertical directions. Distance tolerance Editable field Tolerance for distance. Check for backsight height Check box The entered height tolerance for the backsight point is checked during the measurements to verify accurate pointing and measurements. Height limit Editable field Tolerance for the backsight height. Next step Page changes to the Report sheet page. Configuration, Report sheet page Viva Series, Traverse Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. 873 Field Option Description Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. 63.7 Traverse Methods 63.7.1 Starting Traverse Start traverse stepby-step The quickest setup method is described. Step Description 1. Start the Traverse application. 2. Traverse Select Create a new traverse. 3. OK to access New Traverse. 4. New Traverse Type in the name of the new traverse. 5. OK to access Configuration. Check the settings. 6. OK to access Total Station Setup. Any standard setup method can be used. 7. Set to set the station and orientation. 8. A confirmation window is displayed. FS Pt.. 9. Foresight, Set: Foresight ID The name of the foresight point. Target height The target height of the foresight point. Number of sets The number of sets to be measured. 10. Meas to measure and record. The measurement settings for the first measurement to each point are used for all further sets. 11. Point Results OK to move to the next station, to return to the Point Results screen (and set a point as a closing point), to survey a sideshot, to view traverse data or to end the traverse. 12. Viva Series, Traverse Move to move to the next station. After pressing Move, Traverse is exited. To continue with the traverse from the next station refer to "63.7.2 Continuing an Existing Traverse". 874 63.7.2 Continuing an Existing Traverse Measure traverse step-by-step Step Description 1. Start the Traverse application. 2. Traverse Select Select an existing traverse. 3. OK to access Existing Traverse. 4. Existing Traverse 5. Traverse ID The name of the traverse. ENTER to select a different existing traverse. Data.. to view data of the active traverse. Fn Config.. to change the working style settings. OK to access Backsight, Set:. Enter Instrument height. Hz, V and Horiz distance The measured values are displayed. Calc azimuth The calculated azimuth from the current station point to the backsight point. ∆ hz dist and ∆ height The difference between the computed and measured values. 6. More to change between the displayed values. 7. FS Pt.. to measure a foresight point. 8. Foresight, Set: Meas to measure and record the backsight point. Foresight ID The name of the foresight point. Target height The target height of the foresight point. Number of sets The number of sets to be measured. 9. Survy.. to measure sideshot points. 10. Point Results Meas to measure and record the foresight points. The measurement settings for the first measurement to each point are used for all further sets. OK 11. A confirmation window is displayed. Move to move to the next station. 12. Viva Series, Traverse Repeat steps 1. to 11. until traverse is ready to be closed. 875 63.7.3 Closing Traverse Close traverse stepby-step Step Description 1. Refer to paragraph "63.7.2 Continuing an Existing Traverse" to measure a traverse. Measure a backsight on a new station. 2. The confirmation window in Foresight, Set: is displayed. Close.. to begin the process for closing the traverse. 3. The confirmation window to select a known point is displayed. OK 4. The Data: screen for the control job is displayed. Highlight the closing point. 5. OK to select the highlighted point. 6. Foresight, Set: Meas to measure and record the closing point. 7. Point Results OK to view traverse results. 8. Traverse Results OK to display the confirmation window. 9. C Ang.. to close the traverse with angular closure. 10. Move to the closure point and start Traverse application. 11. Traverse Optionally the traverse can be adjusted. Select Select an existing traverse. 12. OK to access Existing Traverse. 13. Existing Traverse Traverse ID The name of the traverse to be closed is displayed. 14. OK to access Close Angle. 15. Close Angle Closing method To measure onto a known point or a known azimuth. Foresight ID The point ID of the foresight point. Known azimuth Available for Closing method : By known azimuth. Known azimuth for foresight point. 16. OK to access Backsight, Set:. 17. Meas to measure all sets. 18. Point Results OK to view traverse results. 19. Traverse Results OK to exit viewing traverse results. 20. Viva Series, Traverse Quit to quit the Traverse application. Optionally the traverse can be adjusted. 876 Close traverse on internal reference This option is used for determining the closure of a closed loop traverse, consisting of a single control point with an arbitrary backsight azimuth. This function allows completion of a traverse without having to reoccupy the initial station setup to measure a closing angle. The positional closure is calculated by comparing the control position of the initial station setup to the measured position of the final foresight. The angular closure is calculated by comparing the set azimuth of the initial backsight to the azimuth of the final measured leg. P6 P5 P4 P1 TS_050 Viva Series, Traverse P2 P3 The first station setup is on P1, and an assumed direction to backsight P6. Upon closing this traverse, with the last setup over P6, the closing point is P1. In this case the only point that is considered as a control is P1. Step Description 1. The first station setup is on P1 in the diagram shown. Begin the traverse, moving in the direction P1, P2...P6. 2. When on the last setup point (P6 in the diagram shown), measure a backsight. 3. Close 4. Data: Select the closing point from the available list (P1 in the diagram shown). OK 5. Measure all the sets to the closing point as per a standard traverse. 6. Point Results OK when the review of the results is completed. 7. Yes to confirm the automatic calculation. 8. Traverse Results The traverse closure is shown with positional and angular values. 877 63.7.4 Creating a Control Point from Backsight by Azimuth Description If a traverse is to be established on existing control points, two control points must be defined to start the traverse. If the traverse absolute position is arbitrary, it can be convenient to define the control in the field with arbitrary values. This functionality is an option to turn the averaged position value into a control point when a backsight by azimuth is collected. Access At the beginning of a traverse, when all the measurements are completed to the backsight: On the Point Results screen, select Page to reach the Backsight page. Fn Ctrl. OR Anytime during the traverse: On the Traverse Data screen, highlight the first station setup then Edit... On the Point Results screen, select Page to reach the Backsight page. Fn Ctrl. Point Results Confirmation Key Description No To close the confirmation window without further action. Yes To store the point as control point. 63.8 Traverse Point Results Description Point observation results are displayed on this screen. Access Is displayed automatically after measuring all sets from the current station. OR In Traverse Data press Edit... Point Results, Foresight page and Backsight page Viva Series, Traverse The softkeys are explained, except for the softkeys on the Map page. 878 Key Description OK While measuring a traverse: Displays a confirmation window with traverse measurement options. Otherwise: To return to Traverse Data. +Sets.. To add more sets while still at the setup. It could be necessary on particular legs of a traverse that more than the designated number of sets is required. Possibly some of the sets from the first run exceeded the tolerance limit and must be disabled. Sets.. To include or exclude measured sets in the calculation of a foresight point. In the Sets, Point screen press Use to include or exclude a set and Spread/Resid to review the effect of using the set. Close.. To set a point as a closing point if not selected before measurement. Or to revert a closing point to a normal foresight. More To display additional information. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "63.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Edit.. To edit point code and annotations. Fn Check.. Available on the Foresight page. To check inverse distances and closure between the selected point and a point from the fixpoint job. Fn Ctrl Available on the Backsight page of the initial station. Refer to "63.7.4 Creating a Control Point from Backsight by Azimuth". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Viva Series, Traverse Field Option Description Point ID Selectable list Selected point ID. or display only Target height Selectable list The target height of the target point. or display only Point type Foresight, The current point type. Available on the Foresight Closing point page. or Closing angle No. of used sets Display only The number of sets out of all measured sets used for the calculation. Available on the Foresight page. Number of sets Display only The number of sets the point was measured in. Available on the Backsight page. Hz arc average Display only Average horizontal angle. V average Display only Average vertical angle. Dist average Display only Average distance. Hz arc std dev Display only Standard deviation of horizontal angle. V std dev Display only Standard deviation of vertical angle. Dist std dev Display only Standard deviation of distance. Hz spread Display only Spread of horizontal angle. 879 Field Option Description V spread Display only Spread of vertical angle. Dist spread Display only Spread of distance. Next step Page changes to the Stn info page. Point Results, Stn info page Description of fields Field Option Description Station ID Display only The station ID of the instrument station. Instrument height Editable field Current instrument height. Editable. Easting Display only Easting value of the station position. Northing Display only Northing value of the station position. Elevation Display only Orthometric height of the station position. Scale Display only Scale factor used in the calculation. Temperature Display only Temperature set on the instrument. Pressure Display only Atmospheric ppm set on the instrument. Next step Page changes to the Map page which provides an interactive display of the data. IF accessed THEN after sets measurement OK opens a confirmation window with options that are dependent on traverse status: • For an open traverse: Move to next station, return to Point Results, to survey a sideshot, to view traverse data or to quit the traverse application. • For a closed traverse: Move to close angle, return to Point Results, to survey a sideshot, to adjust the traverse or to quit the traverse application. from Traverse Data Viva Series, Traverse OK returns to Traverse Data. 880 63.9 Traverse Results Description Traverse closure results are displayed on this screen. Access Is displayed automatically after the traverse closing point is measured or selected. OR Reslt.. in Traverse Data when a traverse is closed. Traverse Results, Position page Key Description OK To move to close angle, to return to Traverse Results, to survey a sideshot, to adjust the traverse or to quit the Traverse application. N & E or L & D To view the misclosure error in north/east or length/direction. Adjust.. To adjust the traverse. Data.. To display traverse data. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "63.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Starting point Display only The point ID of the traverse start point. Closing point Display only The point ID of the traverse closing point. Length of error Display only The length of the misclosure error. Direction of error Display only The direction of the misclosure error. ∆ north Display only Error in north. ∆ east Display only Error in east. ∆ elevation Display only Error in height. Total distance Display only Total length of the traverse. 2D accuracy Display only Position ratio of misclosure. 1D accuracy Display only Height ratio of misclosure. Next step Page changes to the Angle page. Viva Series, Traverse 881 Traverse Results, Angle page Description of fields Field Option Description Foresight ID Display only Point ID of the closing angle point. Displays ----- if no values are available. Known azimuth Display only Defined azimuth of closing line. Displays ----- if no values are available. Azimuth average Display only Mean value of the measured azimuth closing line. Displays ----- if no values are available. Angular misclosure Display only Angular misclosure of traverse. Displays ----- if no values are available. Next step OK to move to close angle, to return to Traverse Results, to survey a sideshot, to adjust the traverse or to quit the Traverse application. 63.10 Traverse Adjustment 63.10.1 Accessing Traverse Adjustment Description • A traverse adjustment can be performed on three components: 2D positions, angles and elevations. • Various adjustment methods are available for selection. Once the adjustment is performed, the results can be reviewed. Adjusted points are stored into a new job, and a report can be generated. • If the message panel appears which requires that the application must be activated via a license key then refer to "30.3 Load licence keys". Access Viva Series, Traverse Survey points have to be measured while Traverse is running to be part of the adjustment calculations. The traverse adjustment option can be reached in different ways based on specific conditions. Upon completing the observations onto the closing point, Adjust.. to access Traverse Adjustment. OR After the measurements are done on the closing line for angular closure, Adjust.. to access Traverse Adjustment. OR When the traverse is closed: Reslt.. in Traverse Data, then Adjust.. in Traverse Results to access Traverse Adjustment. 882 Traverse Adjustment, Method page Key Description OK To calculate the result. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "63.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Traverse ID Display only The ID of the traverse. Horiz adjustment Compass rule Suitable for surveys, where angles and distances were measured with equal precision. Angle balance Vert adjustment Transit rule Suitable for surveys, where angles were measured with a higher precision than the distances. No distribution No distribution is made. Equally The angle misclosure is distributed equally. No distribution No distribution is made. Equally The height error is distributed equally. By distance The height error is distributed by distance. No distribution No distribution is made. Next step OK starts the adjustment calculation. Viva Series, Traverse 883 63.10.2 Adjustment Results Description The results of the adjustment calculations can be reviewed by accessing the different pages. Access OK in Traverse Adjustment. Adjustment Results, Position page Key Description OK To access the next screen. N & E or L & D To view the misclosure error in north/east or length/direction. More To display the values for the unadjusted, the balanced and the adjusted solution. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Traverse application. Refer to "63.6 Configuring Traverse". Fn Quit To exit the application. Description of fields Field Option Description Closure data type Adjusted, More to change between the options and display Unadjusted or the values accordingly. Balanced Starting point Display only The point ID of the traverse start point. Closing point Display only The point ID of the traverse close point. Length of error Display only The length of the misclosure error. Direction of error Display only The direction of the misclosure error. ∆ north Display only Error in north. ∆ east Display only Error in east. ∆ elevation Display only Error in height. Total distance Display only Total length of the traverse. 2D accuracy Display only Position ratio of misclosure. 1D accuracy Display only Height ratio of misclosure. Next step Page changes to the Angle page. Viva Series, Traverse 884 Adjustment Results, Angle page Description of fields Field Option Description Closure data type Display only More to change between the options. Known azimuth Display only Defined azimuth of closing line. Displays ----- if no values are available. Azimuth average Display only Mean value of the measured azimuth closing line. Displays ----- if no values are available. Angular misclosure Display only Angular misclosure of traverse. Displays ----- if no values are available. Next step Page changes to the Points page. Adjustment Results, Points page The adjusted points are listed. The Point type column shows the function for each point. View.. shows the coordinate values of the highlighted point. Next step Page changes to the Method page. Adjustment Results, Method page The adjustment methods previously selected in Traverse Adjustment and used for the adjustment are displayed. Next step Page changes to the Map page. The Map page provides an interactive display of the data. OK accesses Adjustment Store. Adjustment Store Description of fields Field Option Description Traverse ID Display only The ID of the traverse. Store adjusted job Selectable list The location to save the adjusted job. The job can to be saved to the CF card, SD card, USB or Internal memory. New job Editable field The new job name. Once adjustment results have been reviewed and accepted, the adjusted position of the points are stored in a separate job. Include survey points Check box Store point ID with Same point ID Prefix / suffix Survey points can be included or not. Adjusted points are stored in the new job as a triplet of class ADJ (adjusted). Adjusted points are stored in the new job with the original point IDs. Prefix Adjusted points are stored in the new job with a prefix in front of the original point IDs. Suffix Adjusted points are stored in the new job with a suffix at the end of the original point IDs. Editable field Available when Prefix or Suffix is selected in Store point ID with. The value that is added to the front or end of the original point ID. Next step Store.. stores the results. Viva Series, Traverse 885 64 Volumes & Surfaces 64.1 Overview Description The Volume Calculations application allows surfaces to be measured and volumes (and other information) to be computed from these surfaces. Volume calculations tasks The Volume calculations application can be used for the following tasks: • Measuring points (surface points and boundary points) defining a new surface or extending existing surfaces from the working job. • Calculating the triangulation of the measured surface points to establish the surface. • Calculating volumes from a base (3D point, entered elevation) or by a stockpile method. The surface calculation can be made from: • existing point data in the job. • manually occupied points. • entered coordinates. Activating the application If the message panel appears which requires that the application must be activated via a license key then refer to "30.3 Load licence keys". Volume Calculations are possible for RTK rover and TPS. Point types Surfaces can be created from points stored as: • Local grid • Height mode can be ellipsoidal or orthometric. Heights and positions are always taken into account. Points must have full coordinate triplets. 64.2 Accessing Volumes & Surfaces Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Volume calculations. Volume Calculations Key Description OK To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Volume Calculations application. Refer to "64.3 Configuring Volumes & Surfaces". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Volumes & Surfaces 886 Next step IF THEN a Volume Calculations method is to be started highlight the relevant option and press OK. Volume Calculations is to Fn Config... Refer to "64.3 Configuring Volumes & be configured Surfaces". 64.3 Configuring Volumes & Surfaces Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\Volume calculations. Press Fn Config... Configuration, Report sheet page Description of fields Field Option Description Create report sheet Check box To generate a report sheet when the application is exited. A report sheet is a file to which data from an application is written to. It is generated using the selected format file. Report sheet Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. The name of the file to which the data will be written. A report sheet is stored in the \DATA directory of the active memory device. The data is always appended to the file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Report Sheets screen. On this screen, a name for a new report sheet can be created and an existing report sheet can be selected or deleted. Format file to use Selectable list Available when Create report sheet is ticked. A format file defines which and how data is written to a report sheet. Format files are created using LGO. A format file must first be transferred from the data storage device to the internal memory before it can be selected. Refer to "30.1 Transfer user objects" for information on how to transfer a format file. Opening the selectable list accesses the Format Files screen where an existing format file can be selected or deleted. Next step Page changes to the first page on this screen. Viva Series, Volumes & Surfaces 887 64.4 Calculating Volumes 64.4.1 Create a New Surface by Measuring New Points Access Select Create a new surface by measuring points in Volume Calculations. New Surface Description of fields Field Option Description Surface ID Editable field The name/number of the new surface. Next step OK to access Survey Surface Points. After measuring surface points, more points can be surveyed, points can be grid scanned or a surface can be reviewed and edited. Survey Surface Points, Survey page The pages shown are from a typical working style. An additional page is available when a user-defined survey screen page is used. Key Description Meas To start measuring the surface point. The key changes to Stop. To measure a distance and store distance and angles. Stop To end measuring the surface point. When Automatically stop point measurement is checked in Quality Control, General page recording of positions ends automatically as defined by the stop criteria. The position mode icon changes to the moving icon. The key changes to Store. Dist To measure a distance. Store To store the measured surface point. When Automatically store point is checked in Quality control, General, the measured point is stored automatically. The key changes to Meas. Near To search the working job for the point nearest to the current position when the key is pressed. The point is selected as the point to be measured and is displayed in the first field on the screen. After measuring and storing the nearest point, the next point suggested is the one which was suggested before the key was pressed. Available when Meas is displayed. »Bndry and »Surf To change the type of point to be measured between surface point and boundary point. Done To finish measuring. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Volumes & Surfaces 888 Key Description Fn 2Store To aim manually at the target and only record the angle measurement (Hz/V) in face I and face II. The point stored is an average of the two measurements. Fn 2Face Available for Measure mode: Single and Measure mode: Single (fast). To take a measurement in Face I and Face II. The point stored is an average of the two measurements. When using instruments fitted with auto aiming, the point is automatically measured in both faces. The resulting point is stored and the instrument is returned to the first face. Fn Conect and To connect/disconnect from the GPS reference data. Fn Disco Fn Init.. To select an initialisation method and to force a new initialisation. Available when Meas or Store is displayed and for working styles allowing phase fixed solutions. Refer to "56.4 Initialisation for RealTime Rover Operations". Fn IndivID and To change between entering an individual point ID different to the Fn Run defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template. Refer to "25.1 ID templates". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID Editable field The identifier for manually occupied points. The configured point ID template is used. The ID can be changed in the following ways: • To start a new sequence of point IDs type over the point ID. • For an individual point ID independent of the ID template Fn IndivID. Fn Run changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template. Antenna height Editable field The default antenna height as defined in the active working style is suggested. Changing the antenna height here does not update the default antenna height as defined in the active working style. The changed antenna height is used until the application is exited. 3D CQ Display only The current 3D coordinate quality of the computed position. Target height Editable field The last used target height is suggested when accessing this screen. An individual target height can be typed in. Hz Display only The current horizontal angle. V Display only The current vertical angle. Horiz distance Display only Viva Series, Volumes & Surfaces The horizontal distance after Dist was pressed. No distance is displayed when accessing the screen and after Store or Meas. 889 Field Option Description Height difference Display only The height difference between station and measured point after Dist. Displays ----- when accessing the screen and after Store or Meas. Next step Measure all points. Then press Done. 64.4.2 Create a New Surface by Using Grid Scan Access Select Create a new surface by using grid scan in Volume Calculations. New Surface Description of fields Field Option Description Surface ID Editable field The name/number of the new surface. Next step OK to access Survey Surface Points. After measuring surface points, more points can be surveyed, points can be grid scanned or a surface can be reviewed and edited. Grid scan points to surface Refer to "44.9 Grid Scan on Surface" for defining the grid scan area, defining the scan settings as well as starting and ending grid scanning. 64.4.3 Create a New Surface from Previously Stored Points Access Select Create a new surface from previously stored points in Volume Calculations. When accessing the Edit Surface screen after selecting Create a new surface from previously stored points the Points page is active. Any other time this screen is accessed the General page is active. New Surface Description of fields Field Option Description Surface ID Editable field The name/number of the new surface. Next step OK to access Survey Surface Points. After measuring surface points, more points can be surveyed, points can be grid scanned or a surface can be reviewed and edited. Edit Surface, General page Viva Series, Volumes & Surfaces 890 Key Description OK To accept all settings and continue with the next screen. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Volume Calculations application. Refer to "64.3 Configuring Volumes & Surfaces". Fn Del Srf To delete the surface. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Surface ID Selectable list Name of the surface to be triangulated. No. of surface Display only pts Number of points inside the surface. No. of boundary pts Display only Number of boundary points of the surface. ID of last stored pt Display only ID of the last measured point of the chosen surface. Date Display only Date of the last measured point of the chosen surface. Time Display only Time of the last measured point of the chosen surface. Surface status Triangulation done Triangulation needed The surface has been triangulated and not been modified since the last triangulation. The surface has been modified since the last triangulation or no triangulation exists. Next step Page changes to the Points page. Surface status, Points page Key Description OK To accept all settings and continue with the next screen. +All.. To add all points from the working job to the surface. +One.. To add one point from the working job to the surface. Bndry To use this point for the boundary. Page To change to another page on this screen. Viva Series, Volumes & Surfaces 891 Key Description Fn -One To remove the marked point from the surface. Fn -All To remove all points from the surface. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step OK continues to Surface Task Selection. Refer to "64.4.5 Selecting the Surface Task". 64.4.4 Choosing an Existing Surface Access Select Create a new surface from previously stored points in Volume Calculations. Existing Surface The fields available are identical with the fields in Surface status, General page. Refer to "64.4.3 Create a New Surface from Previously Stored Points". Next step Select the desired surface ID then press OK. OK continues to Surface Task Selection. Refer to Selecting the Surface Task. 64.4.5 Selecting the Surface Task Surface Task Selection Description of the options Options Description Measure more points to the surface To measure points defining a new surface or extending existing surfaces and boundaries by surveying. Refer to "64.4.1 Create a New Surface by Measuring New Points". Grid scan more points to the surface To add more points to the surface by grid scanning new points. The grid scan procedure restarts. Review & edit the surface To view the surface summary and add/remove points from the surface. Refer to "64.4.3 Create a New Surface from Previously Stored Points". Edit the boundary & triangulate surface To define/redefine the boundary using manual point selection, or one of the existing automatic methods, and then create a triangulation. A DXF model can then be exported if desired. Refer to "64.4.6 Boundary Definition". Calculate the volume To compute the volume of a surface by a reference (3D point, entered elevation) or by the stockpile method. Refer to "64.4.7 Compute Volumes". Available when a valid triangulation of the surface exists. Exit the Volumes app To end the application and return to the screen from where Volume Calculations was accessed. Next step Select the task to do next. OK selects an option. Viva Series, Volumes & Surfaces 892 64.4.6 Boundary Definition Edit Boundary, Points page Key Description OK To start calculating the triangulation. +One.. To add points from the working job to the surface. Move ↑ To move the focused point one step up within the boundary definition. Move ↓ To move the focused point one step down within the boundary definition. Tools To access the Boundary Tools Menu. Page To change to another page on this screen. Home To move the focus to the first point within the boundary definition. End To move the focus to the last point within the boundary definition. Fn -One To remove the marked point from the boundary definition or completely from the surface. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Page changes to the Map page. IF you want to THEN change to the Map page Page to change to the Map page. check the triangula- OK to access Triangulation Results. tion results access the Tools menu Viva Series, Volumes & Surfaces Tools accesses Boundary Tools Menu. 893 Edit Boundary, Map page Key Description OK To start calculating the triangulation. Remov To remove the marked point from the boundary definition or completely from the surface. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure MapView. Refer to "37.3 Configuring MapView". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Next step Triangulation Results IF you want to THEN check the triangulation results OK to access Triangulation Results. The Summary page and the Details page contain only display only fields. Information such as the number of triangles/surface points/boundary points, the minimum/maximum elevation or the 3D area is shown. The Map page contains a plot of the triangles of the surface’s triangulation and also its boundary. Key Description OK To return to Surface Task Selection. Store To go to a screen where the surface can be saved as DTM job. DXF To go to a screen where the triangulation can be saved as a DXF. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the report sheet. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Viva Series, Volumes & Surfaces 894 Boundary Tools Menu Description of fields Field Description Add many points Lists all points in the working job. Remove all points Method to remove all points that are indicated in Edit Boundary, Points page. Sort points by time Method to sort all points in Edit Boundary, Points page by the time they were stored. Sort points by prox- Method to sort all points Edit Boundary, Points page by the imity closest proximity. Method to define a new boundary as if a rubber band was placed around the points. The current list of boundary points will be ignored. Compute rubber band bndry Next step Select the task to do next. OK selects an option and returns to Edit Boundary. 64.4.7 Compute Volumes Volume Calculation Key Description OK To compute the volume. Fn Config.. To configure the Volume Calculations application. Refer to "64.3 Configuring Volumes & Surfaces". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Surface ID Selectable list Surface chosen from the triangulated surfaces currently stored to the working job. No. of triangles Display only Number of triangles from the triangulation of the surface. To calculate the volume of the triangulated surface. Calculate using Viva Series, Volumes & Surfaces Description Stockpile Volume between the triangulated surface and the plane defined by the boundary points of the surface. Surface to elevation Volume between the triangulated surface and the height entered by the user. 895 Field Option Description Surface to point Volume between the triangulated surface and the height of a selected point. Next step OK calculates the volume and continues to Volume Calculation Results. Volume Calculation Results, Summary page Key Description OK To close the triangulation of the surface. DXF To export the triangulation results to a DXF file on the data or root directory of the CF Card. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Config.. To configure the Volume Calculations application. Refer to "64.3 Configuring Volumes & Surfaces". Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Surface ID Display only Name of the surface used for the calculation. Available for Calculate using: Surface to elevation and Calculate using: Surface to point. Point ID Display only The point to which the volume is calculated. Available for Calculate using: Surface to point. Elevation Display only The elevation of the point to which the volume is calculated. Available for Calculate using: Surface to elevation and Calculate using: Surface to point. Area Display only Area of the base plane. Net volume Display only Volume of the surface. Volume cut Display only Cut of the volume. Available for Calculate using: Surface to elevation and Calculate using: Surface to point. Volume fill Display only Fill of the volume. Available for Calculate using: Surface to elevation and Calculate using: Surface to point. Next step Page changes to the Details page. Viva Series, Volumes & Surfaces 896 Volume Calculation Results, Details page Description of fields Field Option Description Minimum elevation Display only Minimal elevation of the triangulated surface. Display only Maximal elevation of the triangulated surface. Maximum elevation Average thickness Display only Perimeter Display only Average thickness of the calculated volume. Perimeter of the measured surface area (intersection of the measured surface to the reference datum). Next step Page changes to the Plot page. Viva Series, Volumes & Surfaces 897 65 QuickVolume 65.1 Overview Description The application allows volumes to be computed from ALL scans and/or ALL measured points stored in a job. 65.2 Accessing Volume Calculations Access Select Main Menu: Go to Work!\Survey+\QuickVolume. Choose Job Key Description OK To accept changes and access the subsequent screen. The chosen settings become active. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Surface Name Field Option Description Job Selectable list The job from which a volume will be computed. Key Description OK To start the triangulation. All points and scans within the selected job are used in the triangulation. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Surface name Selectable list Description Name of the surface to be triangulated. 65.3 Volume Calculations Volume Calculation Key Description OK To accept all settings and continue with the next screen. MinElv To set the minimum elevation point of the current surface as elevation value. Available for Calculate using: Surface to elevation. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option To calculate the volume of the triangulated surface. Calculate using Viva Series, QuickVolume Description Stockpile Volume between the triangulated surface and the plane defined by the boundary points of the surface. Surface to elevation Volume between the triangulated surface and the height entered by the user. 898 Field Option Description Surface to point Volume between the triangulated surface and the height of a selected point. Next step OK calculates the volume and continues to Volume Calculation Results. Volume Calculation Results, Summary page Key Description Store To return to Surface Task Selection. Page To change to another page on this screen. Fn Quit To exit the screen. Description of fields Field Option Description Surface ID Display only Name of the surface used for the calculation. Point ID Display only The point to which the volume is calculated. Available for Calculate using: Surface to point. Elevation Display only The elevation of the point to which the volume is calculated. Available for Calculate using: Surface to elevation and Calculate using: Surface to point. Area Display only Area of the base plane. Net volume Display only Volume of the surface. Volume cut Display only Cut of the volume. Available for Calculate using: Surface to elevation and Calculate using: Surface to point. Volume fill Display only Fill of the volume. Available for Calculate using: Surface to elevation and Calculate using: Surface to point. Next step Page changes to the Details page. Viva Series, QuickVolume 899 Appendix A Menu Tree Menu tree for GNSS RTK rover and TPS |—— | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Viva Series, Menu Tree Go to Work! | |—— Setup (TPS) | |—— Survey | |—— Stakeout | |—— Survey+ | | | |—— Scanning for MS50 | | | |—— Measure to ref line | | | |—— Ref plane & grid scan | | | |—— Volume calculations | | | |—— QuickVolume | | | |—— TPS hidden point (TPS) | | | |—— Sets of angles (TPS) | | | |—— Determine coord system | | | |—— QuickGrid (GPS) | | | |—— Traverse (TPS) | | | |—— Survey cross section | |—— Stakeout+ | | | |—— Stake to ref line | | | |—— Stakeout DTM | | | |—— Stake points & DTM | |—— COGO.. | | | |—— Inverse | | | |—— Traverse | | | |—— Intersection | | | |—— Line & arc calculations | | | |—— Area division | | | |—— Shift, rotate & scale | | | |—— Angle 900 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |—— | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |—— | |—— | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Jobs & Data | |—— New job | |—— View & edit data | |—— Create control data | |—— Job properties | |—— Choose working job | |—— Choose control job | |—— Import data | | | |—— Import ASCII data | | | |—— Import alignment data | | | |—— Import DXF data | | | |—— Import DTM data | | | |—— Import XML data | |—— Export & copy data | |—— Export ASCII data | |—— Export custom data | |—— Export DXF data | Viva Series, Menu Tree | |—— Horizontal curve | |—— Triangle Roads.. | |—— Alignment Editor | |—— Roads - Stakeout | |—— Roads - As built check | |—— Rail - Stakeout | |—— Rail - As built check | |—— Tunnel - Stakeout (TPS) | |—— Tunnel - As built check (TPS) Switch to Base menu (GPS) Unavailable for GS05/GS06 901 | | | | | | | | |—— | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Viva Series, Menu Tree |—— | |—— | |—— | |—— Export XML Data Export Data Using Stylesheet Export FBK/RW5/RAW data Copy data between jobs Instrument | |—— TPS settings (TPS) | | | |—— Measure mode & target | | | |—— Prism search settings | | | |—— Atmospheric corrections | | | |—— Level bubble & compensator | | | |—— Offsets & Quality Control | | | |—— Lights / Lights & accessories (TS) | |—— GPS settings | | | |—— RTK rover wizard | | | |—— Satellite tracking | | | |—— Antenna heights | | | |—— Quality control | | | |—— Raw data logging | |—— Connections.. | | | |—— GPS connection wizard (GPS) | | | |—— TPS connection wizard (TPS) | | | |—— Internet wizard | | | |—— CS connection wizard (TS) | | | |—— All other connections | |—— Instrument status info | | | |—— Battery & memory | | | |—— Satellite tracking (GPS) | | | |—— RTK data link status (GPS) | | | |—— Current GPS position (GPS) | | 902 | | | | | | | | | | |—— Viva Series, Menu Tree | | | | | | | | |—— |—— | |—— | |—— | |—— Raw data logging (GPS) Connection status Internet connection status TPS current station info (TPS) TPS camera settings (TPS, CS) User | |—— Work settings | | | |—— ID templates | | | |—— Coding & linework | | | |—— My Survey Screen | | | |—— Hot keys & favourites | | | |—— Prompt before storing | |—— Working style wizard | |—— System settings | | | |—— Regional settings | | | |—— SmartWorx options | | | |—— Screen & audio | | | |—— Admin settings | |—— Tools & other utilities | | | |—— Transfer user objects | | | |—— Load firmware & Apps | | | |—— Load licence keys | | | |—— Ftp data transfer | | | |—— Format memory devices | | | |—— View contents of ASCII files | | | |—— Leica Exchange | |—— Check & Adjust (TS) | |—— About Leica Viva 903 Menu tree for GPS RTK base |—— | | | | | | | | | |—— Viva Series, Menu Tree Go to Work! | |—— Start base over known point | |—— Start base over last setup | |—— Start base over any point | |—— Go to rover menu Instrument | |—— Base settings | |—— Satellite tracking | |—— Base raw data logging | |—— Base connections | | | |—— Connect to base sensor | | | |—— All other connections | |—— Base status info | |—— Battery & memory | |—— Satellite tracking | |—— Current position | |—— Raw data logging | |—— Connection status 904 Appendix B Internal Memory Available memory > 500 MB. Data stored to the internal memory The following are examples of the data types that can be stored to the internal memory. • Applications • Codelists • Coordinate systems • Format files • Geoid and CSCS files • Jobs & Data • System languages • Working styles Viva Series, Internal Memory 905 Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device Description On the memory device, files are stored in certain directories. The following diagram of the directory structure refers to the data storage devices and the internal memory. All files are fully compatible with Leica System 1200 and vice versa, with the exception of the following listed files which are not compatible between the systems: • Working styles and configuration sets • System.ram and VivaSystem.zip • Licence files • Language files, and • Application files. Directory structure |—— | |—— | | | | | | | |—— | |—— | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |—— | | | | CODE • Codelists, various files CONFIG | |—— RTK_PROFILE | |—— SKETCH_TEMPLATE | |—— USERMANAGEMENT • Working style files (*.xfg) CONVERT • Format files (*.frt) DATA | | | | | | | | | | | |—— GPS | | | |—— CSCS | | | |—— GEOID | | | |—— RINEX | |—— XML • ASCII (*.txt), DXF (*.dxf), LandXML (*.xml), Terramodel (*.xml), Carlson (*.cl) and Shape files (*.shp, *.shx and *.dbf and all other shape file components) for import/export to/from job • Section files for Carlson (*.sct) and ASCII report files for Terramodel (*. txt) for import to job • Report sheets created from applications DBX | | |—— JOB | | | |—— MAP | | |—— IMAGES | | | |—— SCANS | | | | |—— DOWNLOAD | |—— GPS • RTK profile files (*.rpr) • Custom templates (*.jpg) for sketching • Administration settings files (*.usm) • CSCS field files (*.csc) • Geoid field files (*.gem) • RINEX files • Alignment Editor Alignments (*.xml) • • • • DTM jobs, various files Coordinate system file (Trfset.dat) Job files for System 1200 Job files, various files. Jobs are stored in a folder per job. • Map related files (for example *.mpl), stored in a subfolder per job. • Image files (*.jpg), stored in a subfolder per job. • Scan database files (*.sdb files) • Bitmaps of intensity values (*.bmp files) • Various files, downloaded by the Ftp data transfer application (*.*) • Antenna file (List.ant) Viva Series, Directory Structure of the Memory Device 906 | | | |—— GSI | | |—— SYSTEM • GSM/Modem station list (*.fil) • Server list (*.fil) • GSI files (*.gsi) • ASCII files for export from job (*.*) • • • • • Viva Series, Directory Structure of the Memory Device Application files (*.axx) Firmware files (*.fw) Language files (*.s*) Licence file (*.key) System files (VivaSystem.zip) 907 Appendix D Pin Assignments and Sockets D.1 GS08plus Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the GS08plus/GS12 ports. In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the GS08plus/GS12 are explained. Ports at the instrument underside a b PW R BT TRK ON OFF a) Clip on contacts (only GS12) b) Lemo port (USB and serial) GS_122 Pin assignments for 8 pin LEMO-1 1 2 7 8 3 4 Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out 2 USB_D- USB data line In or out 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In or out 7 PWR Power input, 10.5 V-28 V In 8 TRM_ON/USB_ID RS232, general purpose signal In or out 6 5 PIN_001 Sockets 8 pin LEMO-1: D.2 GS10 Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the GS10 ports. In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the GS10 are explained. Ports at the instrument front panel a LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO EGI.1B.308.CLN d b c e GS_093 a) b) c) d) e) Port Port Port Port Port P3: Power out, data in/out or remote interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO PWR: Power in. 5 pin LEMO ANT: GNSS antenna in P1: CS field controller in/out or remote interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO P2: Power out, data in/out or remote interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 908 Pin assignments for port P1 1 2 7 8 3 4 Pin assignments for port P2, and port P3 1 2 7 8 4 Function Direction 1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out 2 USB_D- USB data line In or out 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In or out 7 PWR Power input, 10.5 V-28 V In 8 TRM_ON/USB_ID RS232, general-purpose signal In or out Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 RTS RS232, ready to send Out 2 CTS RS232, clear to send In 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In 7 GPIO RS232, configurable function In or out 8 +12 V 12 V power supply out Out Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 PWR1 Power input, 11 V-28 V In 2 ID1 Identification pin In 3 GND Signal ground - 4 PWR2 Power input, 11 V-28 V In 5 ID2 Identification pin In 6 5 PIN_003 Pin assignments for port PWR 1 2 5 3 Signal Name 6 5 PIN_001 3 Pin 4 PIN_004 Sockets Port P1 Port P2 and port P3: Port PWR: Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO EGI.1B.308.CLN LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO HMA.1B.308.CLNP LEMO-1, 5 pin, LEMO HMG.1B.305.CLNP 909 D.3 GS14 Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the instrument ports. In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the instrument ports are explained. Ports at the instrument underside a b 004118_002 Pin assignments for port P1 1 2 7 8 3 4 a) QN-connector, only for models with UHF radio b) Port 1 (USB and serial) Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out 2 USB_D- USB data line In or out 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In or out 7 PWR Power input, 10.5 V-28 V In 8 GPIO RS232, general-purpose signal In or out 6 5 PIN_001 Sockets Port 1: D.4 GS15 Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the GS15 ports. In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the GS15 are explained. LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO HMI.1B.308.CLWP Ports at the instrument underside d a b a) b) c) d) c GS_094 Pin assignments for port P1 1 2 4 PIN_001 7 8 3 QN-connector Port 2 Port 1 (USB and serial) Port 3 Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out 2 USB_D- USB data line In or out 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In or out 7 PWR Power input, 10.5 V-28 V In 6 5 Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 910 Pin assignments for port P2 1 2 7 8 3 4 Signal Name Function Direction 8 TRM_ON/USB_ID RS232, general-purpose signal In or out Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 RTS RS232, ready to send Out 2 CTS RS232, clear to send In 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In 7 GPIO RS232, configurable function In or out 8 +12 V 12 V power supply out Out Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 PWR 4 V power supply in In 2 Tx Transmit data In 3 Rx Receive data Out 4 GPO/DCD General-purpose out, carrier detect out Out 5 RTS Request to send In 6 CTS Clear to send Out 7 GPI/CFG General-purpose in, config mode in In 8 PWR 6 V power supply in In 9 GPIO General-purpose signal In or out 10 GND Signal and chassis ground - 11 USB+ USB data line (+) In or out 12 USB- USB data line (-) In or out 13 GND Signal and chassis ground - 14 ID Identification pin In or out 15 GPIO General-purpose signal In or out A1 NC Not used - A2 RF1 Antenna port, radio to antenna - 6 5 PIN_003 Pin assignments for port P3 A1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PIN_005 Sockets A2 Port 1: Port 2: Port 3: Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO EGI.1B.308.CLN LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO HMA.1B.308.CLNP 15 pin RS232:RS232, 15 pin, DE15 911 D.5 GS25 Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the GS25 ports. In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the GS25 are explained. Ports at the instrument back panel P2 P4 E2 GS25_001 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) Pin assignments for port P1 1 2 7 8 3 4 Pin assignments for port P2 1 4 PIN_003 7 8 3 b cd e f P1 g h i j Port BT: Bluetooth antenna Port ANT: GNSS antenna in Port P2: Power out, data in/out or remote interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO Port P4 and E2: Serial/Event port. 8 pin LEMO Port PPS: Puls per second output Port E1: Event 1 Port P1: CS field controller in/out or remote interface in/out. 8 pin LEMO Port 3: Communication slot-in port and LEDs Port PWR: Power in. 5 pin LEMO Communication Slot-in port, Antenna, TNC Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out 2 USB_D- USB data line In or out 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In or out 7 PWR Power input, 10.5 V-28 V In 8 TRM_ON/USB_ID RS232, general-purpose signal In or out Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 RTS RS232, ready to send Out 2 CTS RS232, clear to send In 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In 7 GPIO RS232, configurable function In or out 8 +12 V 12 V power supply out Out 6 5 PIN_001 2 a E1 6 5 Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets 912 Pin assignments for port P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A1 A2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PIN_005 Pin assignments for port P4/E2 1 2 7 8 3 4 Signal Name Function Direction 1 PWR 4 V power supply in In 2 Tx Transmit data In 3 Rx Receive data Out 4 GPO/DCD General-purpose out, carrier detect out Out 5 RTS Request to send In 6 CTS Clear to send Out 7 GPI/CFG General-purpose in, config mode in In 8 PWR 6 V power supply in In 9 GPIO General-purpose signal In or out 10 GND Signal and chassis ground - 11 USB+ USB data line (+) In or out 12 USB- USB data line (-) In or out 13 GND Signal and chassis ground - 14 ID Identification pin In or out 15 GPIO General-purpose signal In or out A1 NC Not used - A2 RF1 Antenna port, radio to antenna - Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 RTS RS232, ready to send Out 2 CTS RS232, clear to send In 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In or out 7 GPIO/EVT2 IN RS232, general purpose input/output In or out 8 +12 V 12 V power supply out Out Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 PWR1 Power input, 11 V-28 V In 2 ID1 Identification pin In 3 GND Signal ground - 4 PWR2 Power input, 11 V-28 V In 5 ID2 Identification pin In 6 5 PIN_003 Pin assignments for port PWR 1 2 5 3 Pin 4 PIN_004 Sockets Port P1 Port P2 and P4/E2: Port 3: Port PWR: PPS: E1: Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO EGI.1B.308.CLN LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO HMA.1B.308.CLNP 15 pin RS232:RS232, 15 pin, DE15 LEMO-1, 5 pin, LEMO HMG.1B.305.CLNP LEMO REN.OS.250.CTL LEMO HGP.00.250.CTL 913 D.6 CS10/CS15 Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the CS10/CS15 ports. In this chapter, the pin assignments and sockets for the ports of the CS10/CS15 are explained. Ports at the instrument bottom panel - DSUB9 connector a CS_022 b c a) DSUB9 port b) USB Mini port c) USB A Host port b a) Lemo port (USB and serial) b) USB A Host port Ports at the instrument bottom panel - Lemo connector CS_021 Pin assignments for RS232 serial port 2 1 6 3 7 4 8 9 Pin assignments for 8 pin LEMO-1 2 7 8 3 4 Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 NC Not connected - 2 RxD RS232, receive data In 3 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 4 NC Not connected - 5 GND Signal Ground - 6 NC Not connected - 7 RTS RS232, request to send Out 8 CTS RS232, clear to send In 9 NC Not connected - Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out 2 USB_D- USB data line In or out 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In or out 7 PWR Power input, 10.5 V-28 V In 8 TRM_ON/USB_ID RS232, general purpose signal In or out 5 PIN_002 1 a 6 5 PIN_001 Sockets 9 pin RS232: 8 pin LEMO-1: Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets RS232, 9 pin, DB9 LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO EGI.1B.308.CLN 914 D.7 TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the instrument port. In this chapter, the pin assignments and socket for the port 1 of the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite instrument are explained. Ports at the TS11/TS15/TS12 Lite instrument a 5 1 4 3 2 a) Port 1 TS_127 Pin assignments for port P1 1 2 5 3 4 PIN_006 Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 PWR Power input, + 12 V nominal (11 V - 16 V) In 2 - Not used - 3 GND Single ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out Sockets Port 1: D.8 MS50/TS50/TM50 Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the instrument port. In this chapter, the pin assignments and socket for the port 1 of the MS50/TS50/TM50 instrument are explained. LEMO-0, 5 pin, LEMO ENA.OB.305.CLN Ports at the MS50/TS50/TM50 instrument g a b h 005037_001 Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets f e d c a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 915 Pin assignments for 8 pin LEMO-1 1 2 7 8 3 4 Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 USB_D+ USB data line In or out 2 USB_D- USB data line In or out 3 GND Signal ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out 6 ID Identification pin In or out 7 PWR Power input, nominal +12 V (11 V 16 V) In 8 NC Not connected - 6 5 PIN_001 Sockets Port 1: D.9 TPS1200+ Description Some applications require knowledge of the pin assignments for the instrument port. In this chapter, the pin assignments and socket for the port 1 of the TPS1200+ instrument are explained. Ports at the TPS instrument LEMO-1, 8 pin, LEMO EGI.1B.308.CLN a 5 1 4 3 2 a) Port 1 TS_002 Pin assignments for port P1 1 2 5 3 4 PIN_006 Sockets Pin Signal Name Function Direction 1 PWR Power input, + 12 V nominal (11 V - 16 V) In 2 - Not used - 3 GND Single ground - 4 RxD RS232, receive data In 5 TxD RS232, transmit data Out Port 1: Viva Series, Pin Assignments and Sockets LEMO-0, 5 pin, LEMO ENA.OB.305.CLN 916 Appendix E Cables E.1 GPS Cables Power cables Y cables Radio programming cables Viva Series, Cables Name Description GEV97 • Allows GS10 (power port) to be externally powered • LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° • 1.8 m GEV71 • Allows powering of any device from car battery. • Crocodile clips / LEMO-1, 5 pin , 30° (female) • 4.0 m GEV172 • Allows GS10 (power port) to be externally powered from two external batteries • LEMO-1, 5 pin / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° • 2.8 m GEV219 • Allows CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) to be externally powered via the LEMO port • Allows GS10/GS15 (port 1) to be externally powered • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° • 1.8 m GEV235 • Allows CS10/CS15 (with either connector modules) to be externally powered via the power jack • Wall adapter / 3 mm barrel connector • 1.5 m Name Description GEV172 • Allows GS10 (power port) to be externally powered from two external batteries • LEMO-1, 5 pin / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° • 2.8 m GEV205 • Allows connections between GS10/GS15 (port 1), an external radio in GFU1200 housing and the GEB71, with GS10/GS15 and a radio being externally powered • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° (female) / LEMO-1, 5 pin • 1.8 m GEV215 • Allows connections between CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module), the GS10/GS15 (port 1) and the GEB71, with the GS10/GS15 being powered from the GEB71. • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° • 2.0 m GEV261 • Allows connections between MS50/TS50/TM50, external battery GEB171 and a PC with either USB or 9 pin D-Sub RS232. • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin/USB/9pol D-Sub • 1.8 m Name Description GEV231 • Allows an “SLR” radio device to be externally powered and programmed by a computer • 15 pin (GS15 slot-in port) (female) / 9 pin, RS232 serial / LEMO-1, 5 pin • 1.8 m 917 Radio cables Serial data transfer cables Viva Series, Cables Name Description GEV171 • Allows a radio within a GFU1200 device to be externally powered and programmed by a computer • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° (female) / 9 pin, RS232 serial / LEMO-1, 5 pin • 1.8 m Name Description GEV67 • Allows System 500 GFU housings to be connected to a GS10 (port 2 and 3), or GS15 (port 2) • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° • 0.5 m GEV125 • Allows a Satel modem (not inside housing) to be connected to a GS10 (port 2 and 3), or GS15 (port 2) • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / 15 pin, RS232 serial • 1.8 m GEV232 • Allows System 1200 GFU housings to be connected to a GS10 (port 2 and 3), or GS15 (port 2) • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° (female) • 2.8 m GEV233 • Allows System 1200 GFU housings to be connected to a GS10 (port 2 and 3), or GS15 (port 2) • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° (female) • 0.8 m Name Description GEV160 • Allows serial connection between GS10 (port 2 and 3), or GS15 (port 2) to a computer to stream NMEA or RTK data • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / 9 pin, RS232 serial • 2.8 m GEV162 • Allows serial connection between GS10/GS15 (port 1) to a computer to stream NMEA or RTK data • Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) and, for example, a hidden point device, ASCII input device, or computer. • Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with 9 pin serial CBC02 connector module) and GS10/GS15 (port 1). This connection is useful when using third-party software such as Carlson SurvCE on the CS10/CS15 and a cable connection is required to the GS10/GS15. • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / 9 pin, RS232 serial • 2.8 m GEV163 • Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) and GS10/GS15 port 1. This connection is useful when using third-party software such as Carlson SurvCE on the CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) and a cable connection is required to the GS10/GS15. • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° • 1.8 m 918 USB to serial converter cables USB data transfer cables Antenna cables Viva Series, Cables Name Description GEV195 • Allows GS10 (port 2 and 3) or GS15 (port 2) to be connected to a computer where a serial connection is required, but no 9 pin RS232 port physically exists on the computer. This cable allows a serial connection through the USB port of the computer to the CS10/CS15 or GS10/GS15 hardware. • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / USB type A • 2.0 m GEV269 • Allows CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) and GS10/GS15 (port 1) to be connected to a computer where a serial connection is required, but no 9 pin RS232 port physically exists on the computer. This cable allows a serial connection through the USB port of the computer to the CS10/CS15 or GS10/GS15 hardware. • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / USB type A • 2.0 m Name Description GEV223 • Allows USB data transfer between CS10/CS15 (both connector modules) and a computer. • USB Type A / Mini USB Type B • 1.8 m GEV234 • Allows a CS10/CS15 (with 9 pin serial CBC02 connector module) to connect to a GS10/GS15 (port 1). This cable is for when a cable connection is needed between CS10/CS15 and GS10/GS15 when the CS10/CS15 is using the CBC02 connector module. • Allows a USB connection between the USB port of a computer and the GS10/GS15 (port 1) • Allows a USB connection between the USB port of a computer and the CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / USB type A • 1.65 m GEV237 • Allows a CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) to connect to a GS10/GS15 (port 1). This cable is for when a cable connection is needed between CS10/CS15 and GS10/GS15 when the CS10/CS15 is using the CBC01 connector module. • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° • 1.65 m Name Description GEV108 • TNC connector / TNC connector • 30 m GEV119 • TNC connector / TNC connector • 10 m GEV120 • TNC connector / TNC connector • 2.8 m GEV134 • TNC connector / TNC connector • 50 m GEV141 • TNC connector / TNC connector • 1.2 m 919 E.2 Power cables Radio / Y cables Serial data transfer cables Viva Series, Cables Name Description GEV142 • TNC connector / TNC connector (male) • 1.6 m - • TNC connector / TNC connector • 70 m TPS Cables Name Description GEV52 • Allows TS11/TS12 Robotic/TS15 to be externally powered • LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 5 pin • 1.8 m GEV219 • Allows CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) to be externally powered via the LEMO port • Allows GS10/GS15 (port 1) to be externally powered • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° • 1.8 m Name Description GEV186 • Allows connections between TS11/TS12 Robotic/TS15, an external battery and TCPS27/TCPS28/TCPS29 • LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / LEMO-0, 8 pin,30° / LEMO-1, 5 pin • 1.8 m GEV220 • Allows connections between MS50/TS50/TM50, external battery GEB171 and a PC with 9 pin D-Sub RS232. • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin/USB/9pol D-Sub • 1.8 m GEV236 • Allows connection between MS50/TS50/TM50, an external battery and TCPS27/TCPS28/TCPS29 • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 15/150° / LEMO-1, 5pin / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° • 1.8 m GEV261 • Allows connections between MS50/TS50/TM50, external battery GEB171 and a PC with either USB or 9 pin D-Sub RS232. • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 5 pin/USB/9pol D-Sub • 1.8 m Name Description GEV102 • Allows serial connection between TS11/TS12 Robotic/TS15 and a computer • Allows serial connection between TS11/TS12 Robotic/TS15 and CS10/CS15 (with 9 pin serial CBC02 connector module) • LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / 9 pin, RS232 serial • 2.0 m GEV162 • Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with 9 pin serial CBC02 connector module) and a computer • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / 9 pin, RS232 serial • 2.8 m 920 Name Description GEV163 • Allows serial connection between CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) and GS10/GS15 port 1. This connection is useful when using third-party software such as Carlson SurvCE on the CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) and a cable connection is required to the GS10/GS15. • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 30° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° • 1.8 m GEV187 • Allows connections between TS11/TS12 Robotic/TS15, an external battery and a computer • LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / 9 pin, RS232 serial / LEMO-1, 5 pin, 30° • 2.0 m GEV217 • Allows serial connection between TS11/TS12 Robotic/TS15 and CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-0, 5 pin,30° • 1.8 m USB to serial converter cables Name Description GEV189 • Allows TS11/TS12 Robotic/TS15 to be connected to a computer where a serial connection is required, but no 9 pin RS232 port physically exists on the computer. This cable allows a serial connection through the USB port of the computer to the TS11/TS12 Robotic/TS15 or DNA hardware • LEMO-0, 5 pin, 30° / USB type A • 2.0 m USB data transfer cables Name Description GEV234 • Allows a USB connection between the USB port of a computer and the CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / USB type A • 1.65 m GEV237 • Allows a CS10/CS15 (with LEMO CBC01 connector module) to connect to a GS10/GS15 (port 1). This cable is for when a cable connection is needed between CS10/CS15 and GS10/GS15 when the CS10/CS15 is using the CBC01 connector module. • LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° / LEMO-1, 8 pin, 135° • 1.65 m Viva Series, Cables 921 Appendix F NMEA Message Formats F.1 Overview Description National Marine Electronics Association is a standard for interfacing marine electronic devices. This chapter describes all NMEA-0183 messages which can be output by the instrument. Access Select Main Menu: Instrument\Instrument\All other connections\NMEA 1 or NMEA 2. Press Mesgs. A Talker ID appears at the beginning of the header of each NMEA message. The Talker ID can be user defined or standard (based on the NMEA 3.0). The standard is normally GP for GPS but can be changed in NMEA Output 1 or NMEA Output 2. F.2 Symbols Used for Describing the NMEA Formats Description NMEA messages consist of various fields. The fields are: • • • • • Header Special format fields Numeric value fields Information fields Null fields Certain symbols are used as identifier for the field types. These symbols are described in this section. Header Symbol Field Description Example $ - Start of sentence $ --ccc Address • -- = alphanumeric characters identifying the talker GPGGA Options: GP = GPS only GL = GLONASS only GN = Global Navigation Satellite System • ccc = alphanumeric characters identifying the data type and string format of the successive fields. Usually the name of the message. Special format fields Symbol Field Description Example A Status • A = Yes, Data Valid, Warning Flag Clear V • V = No, Data Invalid, Warning Flag Set llll.ll Latitude • Degreesminutes.decimal 4724.538950 • Two fixed digits of degrees, two fixed digits of minutes and a variable number of digits for decimal fraction of minutes. Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 922 Symbol Field Description Example • Leading zeros are always included for degrees and minutes to maintain fixed length. yyyyy.yy Longitude • Degreesminutes.decimal 00937.04678 5 • Three fixed digits of degrees, two fixed digits of minutes and a variable number of digits for decimal fraction of minutes. • Leading zeros are always included for degrees and minutes to maintain fixed length. eeeeee.eee Grid Easting At the most six fixed digits for metres and three fixed digits for decimal fractions of metres. 195233.507 nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing At the most six fixed digits for metres and three fixed digits for decimal fractions of metres. 127223.793 hhmmss.ss • hoursminutesseconds.decimal 115744.00 Time • Two fixed digits of hours, two fixed digits of minutes, two fixed digits of seconds and a variable number of digits for decimal fraction of seconds. • Leading zeros are always included for hours, minutes and seconds to maintain fixed length. mmddyy Date • Monthdayyear - two fixed digits of month, two fixed digits of day, two fixed digits of year. 093003 • Leading zeros always included for month, day and year to maintain fixed length. No specific symbol Defined field • Some fields are specified to contain predefined constants, most often alpha characters. M • Such a field is indicated by the presence of one or more valid characters. Excluded from the list of valid characters are the following that are used to indicate other field types: A, a, c, x, hh, hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, yyyyy.yy. Numeric value fields Symbol Field Description Example x.x Variable numbers • Integer or floating numeric field 73.10 = 73.1 = 073.1 = 73 • Optional leading and trailing zeros. Decimal point and associated decimalfraction are optional if full resolution is not required. Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 923 Information fields Null fields Symbol Field Description Example hh_ Fixed HEX field Fixed length HEX numbers 3F Symbol Field Description Example c--c Variable text Variable length valid character field A aa_ Fixed alpha field Fixed length field of upper case or lower N case alpha characters xx_ Fixed number field Fixed length field of numeric characters 1 Symbol Field Description Example No symbol Information Null fields do not contain any informaunavailable for tion. output ,, Fields are always separated by a comma. Before the Checksum field there is never a comma. When information for a field is not available, the position in the data string is empty. F.3 GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data Syntax $--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GGA Header including Talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West x Position quality indicator 0 = Fix not available or invalid 1 = No real-time position, navigation fix 2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed 3 = Valid fix for GNSSPrecise Positioning Service mode, for example WAAS 4 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 26. x.x HDOP x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. If the local ellipsoidal height is not available either, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported. M Units of altitude as fixed text M Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 924 Field Description x.x Geoidal separation in metres. The Geoidal separation is the difference between the WGS 1984 earth ellipsoid surface and mean sea level. M Units of geoidal separation as fixed text M x.x Age of differential GNSS data, empty when DGPS not used xxxx Differential base station ID, 0000 to 1023 *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Examples User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGGA,113805.50,4724.5248541,N,00937.1063044,E,4,13,0.7,1171.281,M,703.398, M,0.26,0000*42 F.4 GGK - Real-Time Position with DOP Syntax $--GGK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,EHTx.x,M*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GGK Header including Talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position mmddyy UTC date llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West x Position quality indicator 0 = Fix not available or invalid 1 = No real-time position, navigation fix 2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed 3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed 5 = Real-time position, float xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 26. x.x GDOP EHT Ellipsoidal height x.x Altitude of position marker as local ellipsoidal height. If the local ellipsoidal height is not available, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported. M Units of altitude as fixed text M *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 925 Examples Standard Talker ID $GNGGK,113616.00,041006,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,3,12,1.7,EHT1171. 742,M*6D User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGGK,113806.00,041006,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,3,13,1.4,EHT1171. 746,M*66 F.5 GGK(PT) - Real-Time Position with DOP, Trimble Proprietary Syntax $PTNL,GGK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,EHTx.x,M*hh Description of fields Field Description $PTNL $ = Start of sentence delimiter, talker ID fixed with PTNL GGK GGK sentence formatter hhmmss.ss UTC time of position mmddyy UTC date llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West x Position quality indicator 0 = Fix not available or invalid 1 = No real-time position, navigation fix 2 = Not existing 3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed 4 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed Examples xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 26. x.x PDOP EHT Ellipsoidal height x.x Altitude of position marker as local ellipsoidal height. If the local ellipsoidal height is not available, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported. M Units of altitude as fixed text M *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Standard Talker ID $PTNL,GGK,113616.00,041006,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,3,12,1.5,EHT117 1.742,M*4C User-defined Talker ID = GN $PTNL,GGK,113806.00,041006,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,3,13,1.2,EHT117 1.746,M*43 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 926 F.6 GGQ - Real-Time Position with CQ Syntax $--GGQ,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GGQ Header including talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position mmddyy UTC date llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West x Position quality indicator 0 = Fix not available or invalid 1 = No real-time position, navigation fix 2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed 3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed 5 = Real-time position, float Examples xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 26. x.x Coordinate quality in metres x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. If the local ellipsoidal height is not available either, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported. M Units of altitude as fixed text M *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Standard Talker ID $GNGGQ,113615.50,041006,4724.5248556,N,00937.1063059,E,3,12,0.009,1171.2 81,M*22 $GPGGQ,113615.50,041006,,,,08,,*67 $GLGGQ,113615.50,041006,,,,04,,*77 User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGGQ,113805.50,041006,4724.5248541,N,00937.1063044,E,3,13,0.010,1171.2 81,M*2E Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 927 F.7 GLL - Geographic Position Latitude/Longitude Syntax $--GLL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GLL Header including talker ID llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West hhmmss.ss UTC time of position A Status A = Data valid V = Data not valid a Mode indicator A = Autonomous mode D = Differential mode N = Data not valid *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field is set to A for the Mode indicators A and D. The Status field is set to V for the Mode indicator N. Examples Standard Talker ID $GNGLL,4724.5248556,N,00937.1063059,E,113615.50,A,D*7B User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGLL,4724.5248541,N,00937.1063044,E,113805.50,A,D*7E F.8 GNS - GNSS Fix Data Syntax $--GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,xxxx*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GNS Header including talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West c--c Mode indicator N = Satellite system not used in position fix or fix not valid A = Autonomous; navigation fix, no real-time fix D = Differential; real-time position, ambiguities not fixed R = Real-time kinematic; ambiguities fixed Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 928 Field Description xx Number of satellites in use, 00 to 99 x.x HDOP x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. If the local ellipsoidal height is not available either, the WGS 1984 ellipsoidal height will be exported. x.x Geoidal separation in metres x.x Age of differential data xxxx Differential base station ID, 0000 to 1023 *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Examples Standard Talker ID $GNGNS,113616.00,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,RR,12,0.9,1171.279,703.398,0.76,0000*6C $GPGNS,113616.00,,,,,,08,,,,,*69 $GLGNS,113616.00,,,,,,04,,,,,*79 User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGNS,113806.00,4724.5248547,N,00937.1063032,E,R,13,0.7,1171.283,703.398,0.76,0000*39 F.9 GSA - GNSS DOP and Active Satellites Syntax $--GSA,a,x,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GSA Header including talker ID a Mode M = Manual, forced to operate in 2D or 3D mode A = Automatic, allowed to change automatically between 2D and 3D x Mode 1 = Fix not available 2 = 2D 3 = 3D xx Numbers of the satellites used in the solution. This field is repeated 12 times. 1 to 32 = PRN numbers of GPS satellites 33 to 64 = Numbers of WAAS and WAAS like satellites 65 to 96 = Slot numbers of GLONASS satellites x.x PDOP x.x HDOP x.x VDOP *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 929 Examples Standard Talker ID $GNGSA,A,3,01,11,14,17,19,20,24,28,,,,,1.5,0.9,1.2*26 $GNGSA,A,3,65,66,67,81,,,,,,,,,1.5,0.9,1.2*29 User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGSA,A,3,01,11,14,17,19,20,23,24,28,,,,65,66,67,81,,,,,,,,,1.2,0.7,1.0*27 F.10 GSV - GNSS Satellites in View Syntax $--GSV,x,x,xx,xx,xx,xxx,xx,.....*hh Description of fields Field Description $--GSV Header including talker ID x Total number of messages, 1 to 4 x Message number, 1 to 4 xx Number of theoretically visible satellites according to the current almanac. xx PRN (GPS) / Slot (GLONASS) number of satellite xx Elevation in degrees, 90 maximum, empty when not tracking xxx Azimuth in degrees true north, 000 to 359, empty when not tracking xx Signal to Noise Ration C/No in dB, 00 to 99 of L1 signal, null field when not tracking. ... Repeat set PRN / Slot number, elevation, azimuth and SNR up to four times *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Satellite information can require the transmission of multiple messages, specified by the total number of messages and the message number. The fields for the PRN / Slot number, Elevation, Azimuth and SNR form one set. A variable number of these sets are allowed up to a maximum of four sets per message. Examples Standard Talker ID $GPGSV,3,1,11,01,55,102,51,11,85,270,50,14,31,049,47,17,21,316,46*7A $GPGSV,3,2,11,19,31,172,48,20,51,249,50,22,00,061,,23,11,190,42*7E $GPGSV,3,3,11,24,11,292,43,25,08,114,,28,14,275,44,,,,*45 $GLGSV,2,1,06,65,16,055,42,66,64,025,48,67,46,262,42,68,01,245,*64 $GLGSV,2,2,06,81,52,197,47,83,07,335,,,,,,,,,*68 User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNGSV,3,1,10,01,55,100,51,11,86,263,50,14,31,049,47,17,22,316,46*65 $GNGSV,3,2,10,19,30,172,48,20,52,249,51,23,12,190,42,24,12,292,42*6C $GNGSV,3,3,10,25,09,114,,28,14,274,44,,,,,,,,*62 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 930 F.11 LLK - Leica Local Position and GDOP Syntax $--LLK,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,eeeeee.eee,M,nnnnnn.nnn,M,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M*hh Description of fields Field Description $--LLK Header including talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position mmddyy UTC date eeeeee.eee Grid Easting in metres M Units of grid Easting as fixed text M nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing in metres M Units of grid Northing as fixed text M x Position quality 0 = Fix not available or invalid 1 = No real-time position, navigation fix 2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed 3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed 5 = Real-time position, float Examples xx Number of satellites used in computation x.x GDOP x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. M Units of altitude as fixed text M *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Standard Talker ID $GNLLK,113616.00,041006,764413.024,M,252946.774,M,3,12,1.7,1171.279,M*0F $GPLLK,113616.00,041006,,,,,,08,,,*57 $GLLLK,113616.00,041006,,,,,,04,,,*47 User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNLLK,113806.00,041006,764413.021,M,252946.772,M,3,13,1.4,1171.283,M*04 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 931 F.12 LLQ - Leica Local Position and Quality Syntax $--LLQ,hhmmss.ss,mmddyy,eeeeee.eee,M,nnnnnn.nnn,M,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M*hh Description of fields Field Description $--LLQ Header including talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position mmddyy UTC date eeeeee.eee Grid Easting in metres M Units of grid Easting as fixed text M nnnnnn.nnn Grid Northing in metres M Units of grid Northing as fixed text M x Position quality 0 = Fix not available or invalid 1 = No real-time position, navigation fix 2 = Real-time position, ambiguities not fixed 3 = Real-time position, ambiguities fixed 5 = Real-time position, float Examples xx Number of satellites used in computation x.x Coordinate quality in metres x.x Altitude of position marker above/below mean sea level in metres. If no orthometric height is available the local ellipsoidal height will be exported. M Units of altitude as fixed text M *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Standard Talker ID $GNLLQ,113616.00,041006,764413.024,M,252946.774,M,3,12,0.010,1171.279,M* 12 $GPLLQ,113616.00,041006,,,,,,08,,,*4D $GLLLQ,113616.00,041006,,,,,,04,,,*5D User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNLLQ,113806.00,041006,764413.021,M,252946.772,M,3,13,0.010,1171.283,M* 1A Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 932 F.13 RMC - Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS Data Syntax $--RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x.x,x.x,xxxxxx,x.x,a,a*hh Description of fields Field Description $--RMC Header including talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time of position fix A Status A = Data valid V = Navigation instrument warning llll.ll Latitude (WGS 1984) a Hemisphere, North or South yyyyy.yy Longitude (WGS 1984) a East or West x.x Speed over ground in knots x.x Course over ground in degrees xxxxxx Date: ddmmyy x.x Magnetic variation in degrees a East or West a*hh Mode Indicator A = Autonomous mode D = Differential mode N = Data not valid Examples Carriage Return Line Feed Standard Talker ID $GNRMC,113616.00,A,4724.5248557,N,00937.1063064,E,0.01,11.43,100406,11.4 3,E,D*1C User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNRMC,113806.00,A,4724.5248547,N,00937.1063032,E,0.00,287.73,100406,287 .73,E,D*10 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 933 F.14 VTG - Course Over Ground and Ground Speed Syntax $--VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a*hh Description of fields Field Description $--VTG Header including talker ID x.x Course over ground in degrees true north, 0.0 to 359.9 T Fixed text T for true north x.x Course over ground in degrees magnetic North, 0.0 to 359.9 M Fixed text M for magnetic North x.x Speed over ground in knots N Fixed text N for knots x.x Speed over ground in km/h K Fixed text K for km/h a Mode Indicator A = Autonomous mode D = Differential mode N = Data not valid Examples *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed The Magnetic declination is set in the instrument in Regional Settings, Angle page. Standard Talker ID $GNVTG,11.4285,T,11.4285,M,0.007,N,0.013,K,D*3D User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNVTG,287.7273,T,287.7273,M,0.002,N,0.004,K,D*3E Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 934 F.15 ZDA - Time and Date Syntax $--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh Description of fields Field Description $--ZDA Header including talker ID hhmmss.ss UTC time xx UTC day, 01 to 31 xx UTC month, 01 to 12 xxxx UTC year xx Local zone description in hours, 00 to ±13 xx Local zone description in minutes, 00 to +59 *hh Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Examples This message is given high priority and is output as soon as it is created. Latency is therefore reduced to a minimum. Standard Talker ID $GPZDA,091039.00,01,10,2003,-02,00*4B User-defined Talker ID = GN $GNZDA,113806.00,10,04,2006,02,00*76 Viva Series, NMEA Message Formats 935 Appendix G AT Commands AT commands Hayes Microcomputer Products is a leading manufacturer of modems that has developed a language called the AT command set for controlling digital cellular phones and modems. This AT command set has become the de facto standard. List of selected AT commands The characters in this table are the most commonly used AT commands when configuring a digital cellular phone or modem. Refer to the manual of the used digital cellular phone or modem for information on which AT commands to use. AT command Description ~ Inserts a delay of 1/4 second. ^# Inserts the phone number as defined in digital cellular phone connection. ^^ Inserts character ^. ^C Bearer Service: Connection Element. ^M Inserts a carriage return and send command. ^S Bearer Service: Speed including Protocol and NetDataRate. AT Starts a command line to be sent to phone. AT&F[ ] Sets the configuration parameters to default values specified by manufacturer of phone. : • 0 = Factory default configuration profile ATD Starts a call to the phone number given as parameter. If “;” is present, a voice call to the given number is performed. AT+CBST= [ [, [, ]]] Sets the bearer service with data rate , and the connection element . Refer to the manual of the used digital cellular phone or modem for a list of supported name, speed and connection element values. AT+CREG= [ ] Enables/disables network registration reports depending on the parameter . AT+CREG? Reports the and registration status of phone. : • 0 = Disable network registration unsolicited result code • 1 = Enable network registration unsolicited result code : • 0 = Not registered, ME is not currently searching a new operator to register to • 1 = Registered, home network • 2 = Not registered, but ME is currently searching a new operator to register to • 3 = Registration denied • 4 = Unknown • 5 = Registered, roaming Viva Series, AT Commands 936 AT command Description AT+COPS= [ [, [, >[, < AcT>]]]] Forces an attempt to select and register the GSM\UMTS network operator. : • 0 = Automatic choice • 1 = Manual choice : • 0 = Alphanumeric long form • 1 = Short format alphanumeric • 2 = Numeric, 5 digits : • Network operator in format defined by : Access technology selected: • 0 = GSM • 2 = UTRAN AT+COPS? Returns the currently registered network operator. AT+COPS=? Returns a list of all available network operators in form of: , long alphanumeric , short alphanumeric , numeric , : : Operator availability: • 0 = Unknown • 1 = Available • 2 = Current • 3 = Forbidden : Access technology selected: • 0 = GSM • 1 = GSM Compact • 2 = UTRAN AT+CPIN= [, ] AT+CPIN? Returns the status of the PIN request: • READY = Phone can be used • SIM PIN = PIN is not set, phone not ready for use. • SIM PUK = PUK is required to use the device • ERROR = No SIM card inserted AT+CSQ Reports received signal quality indicators in form of: AT+CSQ=? Returns the supported ranges. AT+FLO= tions. • 0 = Flow control None • 1 = Flow control Software (XON-XOFF) • 2 = Flow control Hardware (CTS-RTS) Viva Series, AT Commands 937 Appendix H Event Input Notify Message Format Description With GS25, a message can be created. This message provides information about • the fact that an event was detected by the receiver • the time when the event was detected. The message can be in ASCII or in binary format. It is sent to a connected device, for example a PC. Refer to "19.12 Event Input 1/Event Input 2" for configuring the event input interface. Example $PLEIR,HPT,134210000,1203*17 Syntax in ASCII $PLEIR,EIX,sssssssss,tttttttt,nnnn,cccc,dddd*hh Description of the fields Field Description $PLEIR Header EIX Message identifier. X = 1 for port E1 X = 2 for port E2 ssssssssss GPS time of week of event in ms tttttttt GPS time of week of event in ns nnnn GPS week number cccc Event count dddd Event pulse count This is the count of all pulses including those violating the specified accuracy limit boundary conditions set in Event input 1/Event input 2, Event input page. This allows determination of missed events. *hh Checksum Carriage return Line feed Example $PLEIR,EI2,292412000,28932,1203,203,1*70 Viva Series, Event Input Notify Message Format 938 Appendix I PPS Output Notify Message Format Description With GS25, a message can be created. This message informs about the output of a PPS pulse. The message can be in ASCII or in binary format. It is sent to a connected device, for example a PC. The message is sent at least 0.5 s before the next pulse. For this reason, notify messages are sent when the PPS output rate is greater than 1 s. Refer to "19.11 PPS Output" for configuring the PPS output interface. Syntax in binary format In binary, the notification message format is Leica Binary v2. Documentation for LB2 is available on request from the Leica Geosystems representative. Syntax in ASCII $PLEIR,HPT,sssssssss,nnnn*hh Description of the fields Field Description $PLEIR Header HPT Message identifier, High Priority Time sssssssss GPS time of week of next PPS output in ms nnnn GPS week number *hh Checksum Carriage return Line feed Example $PLEIR,HPT,134210000,1203*17 Viva Series, PPS Output Notify Message Format 939 Index 3 3D transformation ........................................... 963 3rd party instruments ...................................... 373 A Absolute coordinate difference Display ........................................................... 63 Limit exceeded ............................................... 63 Absolute difference between two points .......... 62 Access Find target point .......................................... 791 GPS settings ................................................... 28 Joystick .......................................................... 24 Known backsight .......................................... 780 Multiple backsights ....................................... 783 Orientate to line .......................................... 786 Orientate with compass ................................. 26 Positioning Hz/V ............................................. 25 Remote point ............................................... 865 Resection ..................................................... 785 Set orientation ............................................. 780 Sets of angles .............................................. 753 Setup application ......................................... 773 Survey .......................................................... 823 TPS settings ................................................... 21 Transfer height ............................................ 785 Access Point Name .......................................... 245 Activate Code filter ...................................................... 75 Code group .................................................... 75 Adapter, screw-to-stub .................................... 161 Add point to line ................................................ 69 Adj, class ......................................................... 944 Adjustment Combined (l, t, i, c, ATR and OAC) ................ 338 Compensator (l, t) ........................................ 343 Electronic ..................................................... 333 Inspecting laser plummet ............................. 346 Inspecting the laser plummet ....................... 346 Mechanical ................................................... 333 Of circular level on instrument ............. 345, 345 Of circular level on prism pole ...................... 346 Of circular level on tribrach .................. 345, 345 Tilting axis (a) .............................................. 341 Adjustment results ........................................... 884 Admin settings ................................................. 315 Admin settings file, directory ........................... 906 Alignment Backup ........................................................ 628 Horizontal ................................................... 625 Vertical ....................................................... 625 Viva Series, Index Alignment Editor Configuration ..............................................630 Menu ...........................................................629 Alignment Editor Files, directory .......................906 Angle, COGO calculation method ......................462 Angle, display format .......................................309 Annotations Add ..............................................................819 Configuration ...............................................184 Recall ...........................................................819 Antenna Calibration ....................................................159 Create ..........................................................150 Edit ..............................................................150 Recall deleted default ...................................150 Antenna file, directory ..............................906, 906 Antenna height ................................................158 Determine ....................................................160 Antenna management, access ..........................149 Antennas .........................................................149 Default .........................................................149 APN ..................................................................245 Application COGO ...........................................................403 Customised ..................................................402 Delete ..........................................................319 Description ...................................................402 Determine coordinate system Traditional ..............................................470 Loadable and non-loadable ...........................402 Reference Line .............................................502 Reference Plane & Grid Scan ........................535 Sets of angles ..............................................752 Setup ...........................................................772 Stakeout ......................................................792 Survey Auto points .............................................825 Hidden points .........................................847 Survey Cross Section ....................................839 Survey GPS General ...................................................816 Survey TPS General ...................................................823 Remote point ..........................................865 TPS hidden point ..........................................860 Traverse .......................................................868 Upload ..........................................................319 Application program file, directory ....................907 Applications, general information .....................402 Arc Calculations,COGO calculation method ........434 940 Area Code ............................................................ 945 Delete ............................................................ 55 Edit ................................................................ 68 Area management ............................................. 65 Areas,sorting and filter ...................................... 71 Arrow, orientate to Reference Line ............................................. 511 As built check, definition .................................. 556 ASCII Export format .............................................. 111 Import format ................................................ 99 ASCII file, directory ........................................... 906 ASCII input Connection .................................................. 183 Status .......................................................... 264 ASCII report file (Terramodel), directory ........... 906 Asymmetric parabola ....................................... 642 AT Msg ............................................................ 247 Atmospheric ppm ............................................. 134 ATR Measurement ............................................... 368 Search ......................................................... 369 Window ....................................................... 369 ATR collimation error ....................................... 336 Attribute Add for Free code ............................................... 291 Thematical code ............................. 288, 296 Description .................................................. 942 Type in new ................................................... 81 Attribute mismatch .......................................... 298 Attribute type .................................................. 942 Attribute value region ...................................... 943 Attribute value type ......................................... 943 Auto points Averaging ..................................................... 825 Coding ......................................................... 825 Configure ..................................................... 825 Store ........................................................... 827 Auto position, Roads ....................................... 580 Automatic aiming ............................................. 368 Automatic aiming collimation error .................. 336 Automatic Prism Search ................................... 131 Automatic Target Aiming ATR Positioning of crosshairs .............................. 334 Automatic targeting mode ............... 128, 756, 764 Auxiliary points Azimuth computation ................................... 855 Hidden point measurements ........................ 848 Averaging .......................................................... 62 Auto points .................................................. 825 Configure ....................................................... 44 Viva Series, Index Cross section elements .................................840 Hidden points ...............................................848 Include/exclude coordinate triplet ...................63 Limit, exceeded ..............................................64 Offset points ................................................834 Sets of angles ..............................................753 Staked points ...............................................793 Traverse points .............................................868 Averaging mode ...............................................943 Define ............................................................62 Avge, class .......................................................944 Azimuth, compute Determine coordinate system .......................493 Hidden point measurements .........................854 Azimuth/bearing fields .....................................309 Azmth ..............................................................855 B Backsight point, check ........................................23 Backsight, traverse ...........................................875 Backward in Survey Cross Section .....................846 Backwards Bearing & Distance Hidden point measurements .........................850 Backwards compatible ......................................906 Base pt ............................................................866 Basic terms ......................................................625 Batter rail .........................................................669 Battery, status .................................................251 Bearing ............................................................309 Bearing & Distance Hidden point measurements .........................848 Bearing/azimuth fields ......................................309 Beep ................................................................314 Auto points ..................................................827 Hz-Sector .....................................................314 Bitmaps of intensity values, directory ...............906 C Cables ..............................................................917 CAD files, directory ...........................................906 Calculator .........................................................376 Operating mode ...........................................376 Calibrate touch screen ......................................314 Calibration, antennas .......................................159 Camera ............................................................349 Camera configuration ...............................272, 350 Cant Left/Right Description for Rail Check .............................711 Cant value ........................................................708 Carlson file, directory .......................................906 Carriage way ....................................................609 Carrier ..............................................................161 Cassini projection ...............................................91 Catch point ......................................................609 941 CDMA .............................................................. 225 Connection, configure .................................. 227 Centreline ........................................................ 620 Chainage ...................................................... 618 Extension ..................................................... 615 Chainage .......................................................... 609 Ahead .................................................. 943, 950 Back ............................................................. 943 Centreline .................................................... 618 Equation ...................................................... 613 Format ......................................................... 307 Gap .............................................................. 613 Overlap ........................................................ 613 Reference Line ..................................... 504, 508 Chainage & Offset Hidden point measurements ........................ 850 Chainage equation ........................................... 943 Edit ............................................................. 630 Chainage, definition ......................................... 616 Change Radio channel, requirements ........................ 230 Change face ....................................................... 21 Channel changing, requirements ...................... 230 Check Backsight point .............................................. 23 Recorded point .............................................. 23 Check & Adjust Menu ....................................... 337 Check and adjust instrument ............................ 333 Check tunnel .................................................... 557 Class ................................................................ 943 Classic 3D transformation ................................ 963 Results ......................................................... 484 Classification of points, hierarchy .................... 943 Clear To Send .................................................. 248 Clockwise, Tunnel ............................................ 732 Cmnd.. ............................................................. 184 CMR/CMR+, data format ................................... 193 Cntrl.. Configure station to dial ...................... 237, 239 Code Area ............................................................. 945 Create ............................................................ 81 Description .................................................. 944 Edit ................................................................ 81 Free ............................................................. 945 Line ............................................................. 945 Point ............................................................ 945 Quick ........................................................... 945 Code filter for lines and areas ............................ 74 Code group ...................................................... 945 Activate/deactivate ........................................ 75 Manage .......................................................... 82 Code information ............................................. 299 Viva Series, Index Code mismatch .................................................297 Code type ..................................................81, 945 Codelist, directory ............................................906 Codelists ............................................................78 Codes Manage Job codes ..................................................51 Point, line, area codes ..............................80 Sort Codelist management ...............................80 Data management ....................................75 Coding Auto points ..................................................825 COGO points .................................................403 Configure settings ........................................276 Cross section elements .................................840 Hidden points ...............................................847 Offset points ................................................834 Staked points ...............................................793 Thematical With codelist ...........................................287 Without codelist .....................................290 COGO ...............................................................403 Angle ............................................................405 Arc Calculations ............................................404 Area Division ................................................404 Configure .....................................................405 Distance input/output ..................................405 Horizontal curve ...........................................405 Intersections ................................................404 Inverse .........................................................404 Line Calculations ...........................................404 Modify values ...............................................467 Shift, Rotate & Scale ....................................405 Traverse .......................................................404 Triangle ........................................................405 COGO points Coding ..........................................................403 Combined adjustment (l, t, i, c, ATR and telescope camera) ...........................................................338 Combined Scale Factor .....................................491 Command, send to device ................................185 Compass ............................................................22 Compass, orientate with ....................................26 Compatible with Leica System1200 ..................906 Compensator ....................................................136 Adjustment (l, t) ...........................................343 Configuration ...............................................136 Index errors (l, t) ..........................................335 Computation, offset point ................................834 Configuration Camera .................................................272, 350 Check & Adjust .............................................345 942 Compensator ............................................... 136 Hidden point ................................................ 863 Leica Exchange ............................................. 327 Offsets ........................................................ 138 Remote point ............................................... 867 Sets of angles .............................................. 754 Setup ........................................................... 773 Traverse ....................................................... 872 Configuration file, directory ............................. 906 Configure SBAS ............................................................ 199 Connection Configure ..................................................... 179 CS to TS with RH16 or TCPS29 ..................... 168 Leica Legacy TPS .......................................... 171 Third Party TPS ............................................. 171 To GS05/GS06 .............................................. 165 Connections, status ......................................... 263 Constant .......................................................... 624 Context Menu, MapView ................................... 394 Control points .................................................. 470 Convert to RoadRunner ............................ 630, 656 Converters, Tunnel ........................................... 721 Coordinate geometry calculations .................... 403 Coordinate Quality GPS .............................................................. 947 TPS .............................................................. 948 Coordinate system ............................................. 84 Active ............................................................ 84 Create ............................................................ 86 Default .......................................................... 84 Determine .................................... 474, 485, 499 Edit ................................................................ 86 Recall deleted default .................................... 85 Turn into user defined default ........................ 85 Update ......................................................... 481 Coordinate system file, directory ..................... 906 Coordinate system management, access ............ 85 Coordinate triplet ............................................ 946 Copy data ........................................................ 111 Copy points/data between jobs ........................ 124 Counterclockwise, Tunnel ................................. 732 Country Specific Coordinate System models ..... 946 CQ GPS .............................................................. 947 TPS .............................................................. 948 Create Area ............................................................... 65 Code .............................................................. 81 Codelist .......................................................... 79 Coordinate system ......................................... 86 CSCS models .................................................. 94 Ellipsoid ......................................................... 89 Viva Series, Index Geoid model ...................................................94 ID template ..................................................274 Line ................................................................65 Point ..............................................................57 Prism ............................................................130 Projection .......................................................92 Transformation ...............................................88 Traverse .......................................................869 Create reference plane From measured points ..................................539 From stored points .......................................540 Cross section assignment .................................950 Check ..........................................................653 Create .........................................................654 Delete .........................................................653 Edit .....................................................630, 654 Cross section element Average ........................................................840 Coding ..........................................................840 Cross Section Survey, configure ........................845 Cross section template .....................................951 Add a layer ..................................................651 Create .........................................................649 Delete .........................................................649 Duplicate .....................................................649 Edit .....................................................629, 649 Crown Road Info page ......................................................594 Crown, Stakeout ...............................................682 csc file .............................................................946 CSCS field file ...................................................946 CSCS field file, directory ...................................906 CSCS model ........................................................94 Create from data storage device .....................94 Description ...................................................946 Types ...........................................................946 CSF ...................................................................491 CTR16 on CS15 .................................................168 Ctrl CDMA ...........................................................227 Class .............................................................943 GPS Real-Time ..............................................231 GSM .............................................................225 Internet/Ethernet .........................................234 Modem .........................................................229 Radios for remote control ............................233 RS232 ..........................................................234 CTS ..................................................................248 Current key ......................................................298 Current position, status ....................................259 Curve ...............................................................642 Custom template, directory ..............................906 Custom, export format .....................................111 943 Customised application .................................... 402 Cut-off angle ........................................... 146, 269 D Data ................................................................ 951 Copy between jobs ....................................... 124 Exchange between two users ....................... 325 Preparing for Reference Line ........................ 503 Up-/download to/from exchange server ....... 325 Data export ..................................................... 111 Directory ...................... 112, 114, 115, 119, 121 Data format, real-time ............................. 193, 193 Data management ............................................. 54 Access ........................................................... 54 Data storage device ......................................... 723 Daylight point .................................................. 609 DBX ................................................................. 723 Deactivate Code filter ...................................................... 75 Code group .................................................... 75 Default prisms ................................................. 129 Default targets ................................................ 129 Default, recall Antenna ....................................................... 150 Coordinate system ......................................... 85 Devices ........................................................ 246 Projection ...................................................... 90 Survey screen settings ......................... 280, 828 Target .......................................................... 130 Deflection error ............................................... 630 Delete Antenna ....................................................... 150 Application ................................................... 319 Code .............................................................. 80 Codelist .......................................................... 79 Coordinate system ......................................... 85 Coordinate triplet ........................................... 63 Cross section template ................................. 840 Element in alignment ................................... 632 Element in cross section template ................ 841 Format file .. 408, 515, 546, 583, 757, 776, 798, 874, 887 From Data Log ............................................... 70 Geoid model .................................................. 93 ID template .................................................. 273 Image ........................................................... 362 Inverse COGO calculation ............................. 466 Job ................................................................. 51 Language ..................................................... 311 Line/area ....................................................... 55 Matched points .................................... 460, 476 PI in alignment ............................................. 639 Point .............................................................. 54 Point from line ............................................... 69 Viva Series, Index Points from profile .......................................742 Projection .......................................................90 Report sheet 408, 515, 545, 583, 757, 776, 798, 873, 887 RTK Profile ............................................144, 145 Scan ...............................................................56 Surface .........................................................891 Target ..........................................................130 Transformation ...............................................88 Working style ...............................................305 Descr ...............................................................264 Design element ................................................625 Bloss curve ..................................................955 Parabola ..............................................951, 960 Spiral ...........................................................962 Straight (tangent) ...............................962, 963 Design height ...........................................616, 675 Design point .....................................................502 Design to Field Description ...................................................699 Installing .......................................................699 Details on instrument errors .............................334 Devce.. .....................................................217, 245 Device Configure .....................................................247 Create ..........................................................247 Description ...................................................951 Edit ..............................................................247 Device height Hidden point measurements .........................858 Devices Configuration ...............................................241 Configure .....................................................245 Control .........................................................225 For Internet, configure .................................245 Overview ......................................................241 Recall deleted default ...................................246 Difference limit exceeded in Stakeout ..............803 Digital cellular phone Control .........................................................225 Version .........................................................256 Digital cellular phones ......................................241 Requirements for using ................................241 Supported ....................................................242 Dimensions, carrier and adapter .......................161 Display .............................................................314 Settings ........................................................279 Distance input/output in COGO ........................405 Distribution Residuals COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale ...........407 Documentation ....................................................2 Double Stereographic projection ........................91 Download data from exchange server ...............325 944 Downloads, Tunnel .......................................... 721 Drilling rig orientation ...................................... 736 DTM height .............................................. 616, 675 DTM job, directory ........................................... 906 DTM layer, select ............................................. 805 DXF ................................................................... 99 Data export ................................................. 115 Data import ................................................ 108 Export format .............................................. 111 DXF file, directory ............................................ 906 Dynamic ATR window ....................................... 132 Dynamic PS window ......................................... 132 E EAO Configure ..................................................... 188 Hidden point measurements ........................ 851 Edit Area ............................................................... 68 Code .............................................................. 81 Codelist .......................................................... 79 Coordinate system ......................................... 86 Ellipsoid ......................................................... 89 Job ................................................................. 47 Line ............................................................... 68 Measured coordinate triplet ........................... 63 Point .............................................................. 59 Projection ...................................................... 92 Transformation .............................................. 88 Traverse ....................................................... 869 EDM ................................................. 127, 368, 368 EGL .................................................................. 371 EGNOS, real-time data format .......................... 196 Electronic Adjustment ...................................... 333 Electronic Distance Measurement .................... 368 Electronic serial number ................................... 228 Elevation .......................................................... 951 local ellipsoidal height ................................. 642 local orthometric height .............................. 642 Elevation mask ......................................... 146, 269 Ellipsoid Create ............................................................ 89 Edit ................................................................ 89 Ellipsoid distance in COGO ............................... 406 Ellipsoid management, access ............................ 89 Ellipsoidal height .............................................. 952 Ellipsoids ........................................................... 89 Emitting Guide Light EGL .................................. 371 End date, line/area ............................................ 68 End time, line/area ............................................. 68 ESN number ..................................................... 228 Est, class ......................................................... 944 Viva Series, Index European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System .....................................196, 199 Event input Interface ......................................................214 Notification message format ........................938 Status ..........................................................265 Exceeded limit Absolute coordinate difference .......................63 Average ..........................................................64 Coordinate quality ........................................152 Difference in Stakeout ..................................803 Height Stakeout .................................................796 Position Stakeout .................................................796 Exchange data ..................................................325 Exclude coordinate triplet from averaging ...........63 Expiry date, software maintenance ...................348 Export ................................................................48 Images .........................................................367 Export & copy data ..........................................111 Export data ......................................................111 Export format ...................................................111 Export Job, connection .....................................190 Export key ........................................................297 Exporting cross section elements .....................840 Extended RTK ...................................................199 F Favourites, configuration ..................................283 FBK ..................................................................122 Field file CSCS .............................................................946 Geoid ...........................................................952 Field of view .....................................................368 Field sketching .................................................365 Field to office ...................................................321 Filter Activate/deactivate for codes .........................75 Height smoothing .........................................199 Point, line and area codes ..............................74 Points, lines and areas ....................................71 Filter setting, define ...................................54, 362 Filter symbol ......................................................71 Filter.. ........................................................54, 362 Areas ..............................................................55 Export ..........................................112, 114, 120 Lines ..............................................................55 Finding a target point .......................................791 Fine search ...............................................369, 370 Finished road level ...........................................609 Firmware file, directory ....................................907 Firmware, CS 3.5G modem ...............................319 945 Firmware, current version ................................ 348 Firmware, upload ............................................. 319 Firmware, version ............................................ 348 FKP, Flächenkorrekturparameter ...................... 198 Following arrow, orientate to Stakeout ...................................................... 797 Format Data storage device ..................................... 324 Event input notify message .......................... 938 Export .......................................................... 111 Import ............................................................ 99 NMEA message ............................................ 922 PPS output notify message .......................... 939 Format file, export ASCII .................................. 111 Format files, directory ...................................... 906 Forward in Survey Cross Section ...................... 846 Free code ........................................................ 945 Delete ............................................................ 70 Free coding ...................................................... 286 Frequency, change for radio ............................ 230 Functions ......................................................... 368 Functions, main menu ........................................ 30 G GAGAN ..................................................... 196, 199 gem file ........................................................... 952 GeoC++ ............................................................ 402 GeoCOM Mode ................................................. 223 Geoid field file ................................................. 952 Geoid field file, directory .......................... 906, 906 Geoid model ...................................................... 92 Create from Data storage device / internal memory ..... 94 Delete ............................................................ 93 Description .................................................. 952 Management, access ...................................... 93 View ............................................................... 93 Geoid separation ............................................. 952 Geoid, height above ......................................... 952 Geometric elements ......................................... 625 Geometric ppm .................................................. 45 GetPt ............................................................... 759 GGA ......................................................... 202, 924 GGK ................................................................. 925 GGK(PT) ........................................................... 926 GGQ ................................................................. 927 GLL .................................................................. 928 GNS ................................................................. 928 Go to Work! ....................................................... 30 Go To Work! Menu Description .................................................... 31 GPRS ................................................................ 245 Viva Series, Index GPRS device Requirements for using ................................245 Supported ....................................................245 GPS Aided Geo Augmentation Navigation .196, 199 GPS Settings .......................................................28 GPS used for TPS Setup ....................................777 Grade In ........................................................646, 647 Out .....................................................646, 647 Graph, showing satellites .................................253 Grid distance in COGO ......................................405 Grid orientation ................................................538 Ground distance in COGO .................................406 Group Codes .............................................................80 Coding Thematical ..............................288, 291, 296 Job codes .......................................................52 GSA ..................................................................929 GSI Data .............................................................217 Format .........................................................217 Output .........................................................217 Word information .........................................219 GSI file, directory ..............................................907 GSI16 .................................................................99 GSI8 ...................................................................99 GSM .................................................................225 GSM connection, configure ...............................225 GSV ..................................................................930 GUS74 Laser Guide ...........................................373 H HdnPt.. .............................................................851 Height Design ..................................................616, 675 Ellipsoidal .....................................................952 Entered manually ..........................................616 Entered manually, Roads ..............................675 Geoid ...........................................................952 Height layer of DTM ..............................616, 675 Hidden point measurement ..........................858 Individual point .............................616, 616, 675 Info layer of DTM ..........................................675 Levelled ........................................................952 Mean sea level ..............................................952 Orthometric ..................................................952 Priorities .......................................................675 Road and Rail ...............................................616 Second height ..............................................675 Height (aim to stake ht) ...................................603 Height filter ......................................................199 Height mode ......................................................89 946 Height offset, stakeout .................................... 796 Height smoothing ............................................ 200 Height type Current position ........................................... 793 Point to be staked ....................................... 793 Hidden point measurement devices ................. 244 Supported .................................................... 244 Hidden point measurement, heights ................ 858 Hidden point, connection ................................. 186 Hidden points .................................................. 847 Averaging ..................................................... 848 Coding ......................................................... 847 Method ........................................................ 848 Hinge point ...................................................... 609 Hlth.. ....................................................... 146, 269 Horizontal alignment ............................... 610, 955 Create a bloss curve .................................... 635 Create a curve ............................................. 635 Create a straight ......................................... 635 Edit ............................................................. 629 Edit a bloss curve ........................................ 635 Edit a curve ................................................. 635 Edit a straight ............................................. 635 Delete element ............................................ 632 Delete PI ...................................................... 639 Horizontal collimation error (c) ........................ 334 Horizontal curve, COGO calculation method ..... 463 Hot keys Configure ..................................................... 283 Description .................................................... 19 Hts.. ................................................................ 100 I ID .................................................................... 959 ID template ...................................................... 272 Create .......................................................... 274 Identification number ...................................... 312 Illumination ...................................................... 372 Image Delete .......................................................... 362 Management ................................................ 362 Taking .......................................................... 352 Image files, directory ....................................... 906 Images Exporting ..................................................... 367 Sketching ..................................................... 364 Images, panorama ........................................... 360 Imaging ............................................................ 349 Import ............................................................... 48 Format ........................................................... 99 Importers Description .................................................. 699 Installing ...................................................... 699 Viva Series, Index Include coordinate triplet in averaging ................63 Increase point ID ..............................................274 Increasing NE, SE, SW, NW ................................309 Incrementation .................................................275 Point ID’s ......................................................274 Indefinite triangle .............................................679 IndivID ..............................759, 817, 818, 824, 866 Info page .........................................................578 Information, additional to codes ......................299 Initialisation .............................................818, 956 Access ..........................................................821 Methods .......................................................956 Moving .........................................................821 On known point ............................................822 Static ............................................................822 Instrument .........................................................30 Errors, details ...............................................334 Instrument source ............................................957 Instrument, 3rd party TPS .................................373 Instrument, Leica Legacy TPS ............................373 Instrument, orientate to Reference Line .............................................511 Stakeout ......................................................797 Interface Status Event input .............................................265 Internet ..................................................263 Remote ...................................................264 Interface, description .......................................957 Interference .....................................................230 Internal memory ...............................................905 Internet Connection ...................................................180 Control .........................................................234 Status ..........................................................263 Internet connection status ...............................266 Internet device Requirements for using ................................245 Supported ....................................................245 Intersection, COGO calculation method ............421 Intfce Status Rover ......................................................264 Inv.. ..................................419, 424, 426, 428, 431 Inverse, COGO calculation method ....................408 J Job Create ............................................................42 Default ...........................................................42 Digital Terrain Model (DTM) job, Roads .........559 Edit ................................................................47 Management ..................................................42 947 Management, (Road, Rail, Tunnel) ................ 558 Rail job, Roads ............................................. 559 Tunnel job, Roads ........................................ 559 Working ......................................................... 42 Job file, directory ............................................. 906 Job files Sys1200, directory .............................. 906 Jobs & Data ....................................................... 30 Joystick, move by ............................................... 24 K Keys, configure .................................................. 19 Known backsight ............................................. 780 Known point, initialisation method .................. 956 L Lambert 1 Parallel projection ............................. 91 Lambert 2 Parallel projection ............................. 91 LandXML Export format .............................................. 111 LandXML file, directory .................................... 906 Language Delete .......................................................... 311 Select .......................................................... 311 Upload ......................................................... 319 Language file, directory ................................... 907 Laser plummet ................................................. 372 Inspect ......................................................... 346 Last point, orientate to Reference Line ............................................. 511 Stakeout ...................................................... 797 Layer Select DTM, Stakeout .................................. 805 Road, Info page ........................................... 596 Stakeout ...................................................... 682 Layers .............................................................. 562 Left rail ............................................................ 616 Leica 4G, data format ...................................... 193 Leica Exchange User name and password creation .............. 325 Configuration ............................................... 327 Transfer status ............................................ 331 Leica Geosystems TPS prism system ................ 131 Leica legacy instruments .................................. 373 Leica Legacy TPS Connection .................................................. 171 Leica SmartWorx Viva software, exit ................... 30 Leica, data format ........................................... 193 Length ............................................................... 68 Levelled height ................................................ 952 LGO Creation Antenna records ..................................... 159 Attributes ............................................... 942 Viva Series, Index Codes .....................................................945 CSCS field files ........................................946 DTM jobs .................................................804 Geoid field files .......................................952 Quick codes ............................................287 Download Coordinate systems ..................................84 Jobs ..........................................................42 Upload Coordinate systems ..................................84 Jobs ..........................................................42 Licence file, directory .......................................907 Licence key ......................................................402 Limit, exceeded Absolute coordinate difference .......................63 Average ..........................................................64 Line ..........................................................561, 610 Create ............................................................65 Delete ............................................................55 Edit ................................................................68 Orientate to Reference line .........................................511 Stakeout .........................................797, 797 Reference .....................................................502 Stake out .....................................................678 Line calculations, COGO calculation method ......434 Line code .........................................................945 Filter ..............................................................74 Line management ...............................................65 Line of sight .....................................................334 Line of sight error (c) .......................................334 Line Road, Info page ........................................583 Line style Coding ............................................................82 For line/area code ..........................................53 New line .........................................................66 Linear ...............................................................624 Lines, sorting and filter ......................................71 Linework ....................................................82, 300 Using the linework field ................................300 with thematical coding .................................301 List reference stations .....................................233 LLK ...................................................................931 LLQ ..................................................................932 Loadable application ........................................402 Local line Info page ......................................................585 Local Line Stakeout ......................................................679 Local Manual Slope Road, Info page .................591 Lock .................................................................370 Lock settings ....................................................315 Log of messages ..............................................211 948 Log raw observations ....................... 137, 156, 270 Logging status ................................................. 261 Loss of Lock .................................................... 370 M Main menu ......................................................... 30 Management Antennas ..................................................... 149 Area ............................................................... 65 Codelists ........................................................ 78 Coordinate systems ....................................... 84 Data .............................................................. 54 Images ......................................................... 362 Jobs ............................................................... 42 Jobs (Road, Rail, Tunnel) .............................. 558 Line ............................................................... 65 Points ............................................................ 57 Prisms .......................................................... 129 Manual slope Road, Info page .......................... 591 Manual, validity .................................................... 2 Manually entered height .......................... 616, 675 Map ................................................................. 398 Map files, directory .......................................... 906 MapView .......................................................... 387 Access ......................................................... 387 Area with focus, symbol ............................... 391 Configure ..................................................... 387 Context Menu .............................................. 394 Example of results in plot mode ................... 396 Keys ............................................................. 392 Line with focus, symbol ................................ 391 North arrow ................................................. 391 Point symbols .............................................. 393 Point with focus, symbol .............................. 391 Scale bar ...................................................... 391 Screen area .................................................. 390 Select Lines and Areas ................................. 393 Select Points, Lines and Areas ...................... 393 Softkeys ...................................................... 392 Symbol Instrument station .................................. 391 Reflectors ............................................... 391 Rover ..................................................... 391 Toolbar Description ............................................. 392 Symbol ................................................... 391 View results ................................................. 396 Master-Auxiliary Correction ...................... 198, 198 Match points ............................................ 460, 476 Matching points Choose ........................................................ 482 Edit .............................................................. 482 MAX ................................................................. 198 Mean page ......................................................... 62 Viva Series, Index Access ............................................................63 Mean sea level, height ......................................952 Meas, class .......................................................944 Measure Antenna height .............................................158 Sets, sets of angles ......................................762 Setup points .................................................783 Measure & target settings ................................126 Measure mode Fast ..............................................................127 Long range ...................................................127 Tracking ........................................................127 Measure to .......................................................127 Mechanical Adjustment .....................................333 Mechanical Reference Plane .............................159 Memory Device to be formatted ................................324 Status ..........................................................251 Menu Go To Work! ...................................................31 My Favourites .................................................20 Mercator projection ............................................91 Message log .....................................................211 Mismatch Attribute ......................................................298 Code ............................................................297 Mode Targeting ......................................................369 Mode, Calculator ..............................................376 Modem .............................................................242 Control .........................................................229 Requirements for using ................................242 Supported ....................................................242 Modify values in COGO .....................................467 Molodensky-Badekas ..........................................89 Mountpoint ..............................................235, 385 Move by joystick .................................................24 Moving initialisation method .............................956 MRP .................................................................159 MSAS ...............................................................196 MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System ...196, 199 Multiple backsights ...........................................783 Multiple chainage .............................................613 N National Marine Electronics Association ............922 Natural surface ................................................609 Nav, class .........................................................944 Negative offset, COGO .....................................418 Next available point ID Real-time rover operations ...........................819 Static operations ..........................................817 949 NMEA ............................................................... 922 NMEA, connection ............................................ 206 Nominal gauge ................................................. 616 None, class ...................................................... 944 Non-loadable application ................................. 402 North, orientate to Reference Line ............................................. 511 Stakeout .............................................. 797, 797 NTRIP ............................................................... 957 Number of satellites, used in solution ..... 254, 254, 255, 255 O Object Delete ............................................................ 70 Description .................................................. 959 Oblique Mercator projection ............................... 91 Offset Antenna Input ...................................................... 150 Vertical ........................................... 158, 162 External angle .............................................. 188 Hidden point measurements ........................ 188 Reference plane ........................................... 538 Stakeout, height .......................................... 796 Offset point Computation ................................................ 834 Configure ..................................................... 836 Description .................................................. 825 ID ................................................................. 838 ID, Examples ................................................ 838 Offsets .................................................... 137, 621 Defining, Rail check ...................................... 716 Sign convention ........................................... 620 Using offsets with Rail ................................. 711 Onestep transformation .................................. 964 Results ......................................................... 483 Orientate Reference Line ............................................. 511 Stakeout ...................................................... 797 Orientate with compass ..................................... 26 Origin, reference plane .................................... 538 Original ground ................................................ 609 Orthometric height .......................................... 952 Overbreak ........................................................ 620 Overwrite, code for auto points ....................... 825 P Panoramc imaging ........................................... 360 Parabola .......................................................... 642 Parabola, asymmetric ....................................... 642 Parameters, set for transformation .................. 477 Partial Bloss Curve ........................................... 632 Viva Series, Index Password for Leica Exchange, creation .............325 Pendular displacement .....................................713 Pendulum length ......................................712, 713 Perpendicular ...................................................623 Phase center variations, vertical .......................159 Pillar setup .......................................................160 Pin assignment .................................................908 Plumb line ........................................................623 Point Add to line .....................................................69 Auto .....................................................825, 825 Auxiliary ........................................................848 Azimuth computation ...................................855 Create ............................................................57 Delete ............................................................54 Delete from line .............................................69 Edit ................................................................59 Height ..........................................................675 Hidden .........................................................847 Orientate to, Reference Line ........................511 Orientate to, Stakeout ..................................797 Point code ........................................................945 Filter ..............................................................74 Point ID Incrementation .............................................274 Next available Real-time rover operations .....................819 Static operations ....................................817 Point management .............................................57 Point symbols, MapView ...................................393 Points Copy between jobs .......................................124 Delete from profile .......................................742 Sorting and filter ............................................71 Polar Stereographic projection ............................91 Pole Height ..........................................................163 Setup ...........................................................163 Port, description ...............................................960 Portal ...............................................................620 Positioning Hz/V .................................................25 Positive offset, COGO .......................................418 Post-processed kinematic .................................954 Power down .....................................................313 PowerSearch ....................................................369 ppm Atmospheric .................................................134 Geometric ......................................................45 Transformation results .........................483, 484 PPS output .......................................................939 Interface ......................................................212 Precise Measurements ......................................333 Prediction .................................................132, 370 950 Advantages ................................................. 200 Description .................................................. 200 Recommended settings ................................ 200 Preparing data for Reference Line .................... 503 Priority of heights ............................................ 616 Prism Create .......................................................... 130 Default ........................................................ 129 Prism search .................................................... 368 After prediction ............................................ 371 Prism system Leica Geosystems TPS .................................. 131 True zero ..................................................... 131 Prisms Management ................................................ 129 PRN ................................................................. 252 Profile .............................................................. 951 Profile (tunnel), view ....................................... 742 Projection Cassini ........................................................... 91 Create ............................................................ 92 Delete ............................................................ 90 Double Stereographic ..................................... 91 Edit ................................................................ 92 Lambert 1 Parallel .......................................... 91 Lambert 2 Parallel .......................................... 91 Mercator ........................................................ 91 Oblique Mercator ........................................... 91 Polar Stereographic ........................................ 91 Recall deleted default .................................... 90 RSO ............................................................... 91 Transverse Mercator ...................................... 91 UTM ............................................................... 91 Projection distortion .......................................... 45 Projection management, access ......................... 90 Projections ......................................................... 90 Properties Offset points ............................................... 834 PS .................................................................... 369 360° search ................................................. 370 Window ....................................................... 370 Pseudorandom Noise ....................................... 252 Q Quadrant ......................................................... 309 Quick access to screens, configure .................. 283 Quick code ....................................................... 945 Quick coding .................................................... 287 Quick Settings GPS ................................................................ 28 TPS ................................................................ 21 Viva Series, Index R Radio Change channels ..........................................230 Default .........................................................243 For GPS ........................................................243 For TPS .........................................................243 Interference .................................................230 Supported ............................................243, 243 User defined .................................................243 Version .........................................................256 Radio Link Protocol ..........................................227 Rail Check Check height of lower rail .............................711 Checking a track ...................................708, 708 Rail Editor Description ...................................................700 Installing .......................................................700 Rail, Info page ..................................................600 RAW .................................................................122 Raw data logging ..............................................261 Raw observations, log ......................137, 156, 270 RCS ..................................................................371 Ready To Send .................................................248 Real-time .........................................................192 Base .............................................................955 Rover ...........................................................955 Status ..........................................................254 Recall Annotations .................................................819 Default Attribute values ..................................58, 66 Survey screen settings ....................280, 828 Deleted default Antenna ..................................................150 Coordinate system ....................................85 Devices ...................................................246 Projection .................................................90 Target .....................................................130 Last used attribute values ........................58, 66 Previous result, COGO ...419, 424, 426, 428, 431 Receive data from third party device ................183 Recorded point, check ........................................23 Rectified Skewed Orthomorphic projection .........91 Red laser ..........................................................139 Visible ...........................................................373 Ref, class .........................................................944 Reference datum ................................................45 Reference line Configure .....................................................508 Measure to ...................................................522 Stake to .......................................................526 Reference plane Create from measured points .......................539 951 Tilted ........................................................... 536 Reference Plane Create from stored points ............................ 540 Reference plane & scan Application ................................................... 535 Reference point ....................................... 502, 668 Reference point surface ................................... 671 Refraction Coefficient ................................................... 135 Correction .................................................... 135 Relock ............................................................. 371 Remote connection .......................................... 222 Remote connection, configuration ................... 211 Remote point ................................................... 865 Access ......................................................... 865 Configuration ............................................... 867 Use .............................................................. 867 Report sheet, create name 408, 515, 545, 583, 757, 776, 798, 873, 887 Report sheet, directory .................................... 906 Resection ........................................................ 785 Residual Distribution COGO Shift, Rotate & Scale ....... 407 Result1 ............................................ 427, 429, 466 Result2 ............................................ 427, 429, 466 Results ............................................................ 881 Traverse ....................................................... 878 Traverse adjustment .................................... 884 Resurvey staked point ..................................... 803 Reticule ........................................................... 139 Reticule illumination ......................................... 139 Retry ............................................................... 369 Right rail .......................................................... 616 RLP .................................................................. 227 RmtHt .............................................................. 823 Road alignment file .......................................... 558 Road job, new .................................................. 657 Robotic targeting mode ................... 128, 756, 764 Rotate, MapView .............................................. 388 Rotation Point ................................................. 620 Rotations, set for transformation .................... 477 RPN mode ........................................................ 376 RS232 .............................................................. 243 RSO projection ................................................... 91 RTCM Data format ................................................. 193 V3 ................................................................ 193 RTK network info ............................................... 60 RTK Profile Create new .................................................. 143 Delete .................................................. 144, 145 Edit .............................................................. 143 Select another ............................................. 143 Viva Series, Index RTK profile file, directory ..................................906 RTK with more availability .................................199 RTS ..................................................................248 Run ..........................................759, 817, 818, 824 RW5 .................................................................122 S S/N ...................................................................252 Same Direction, Survey Cross Section ...............839 Satellite status .................................................252 Satellite tracking, settings ........................145, 268 Satellites Health ..................................................147, 269 Number used in solution .......254, 254, 255, 255 SBAS, description .............................................199 Scale Roads ...........................................................572 Set for transformation ..................................477 Transformation results .........................483, 484 Scale factor, combined .....................................491 Scan .................................................................623 Delete ............................................................56 Scan database files, directory ...........................906 Scan Viewer .......................................................76 Scanning Configure .....................................................750 Search Windows ...............................................131 Second point of cant ........................................708 Section file (Carlson), directory ........................906 Segment Slope distance .............................................651 Slope ratio ...................................................651 Select DTM layer ...............................................805 Serial number ...................................................348 Set orientation .................................................780 Set-D Coordinate system .........................................85 Projection .......................................................90 Transformation ...............................................88 Sets of angles ..................................................752 Access ..........................................................753 Configuration ...............................................754 Measure sets ................................................762 Measurement methods .........................762, 771 Settings for communication with TPS ...............171 Settings, lock and unlock ..................................315 Setup Access ..........................................................773 Application ...................................................772 Configuration ...............................................773 Known backsight ..........................................780 Measure target points ..................................783 Methods .......................................................780 952 Resection ..................................................... 785 Set orientation ............................................. 780 Setup on TPS using GPS ................................... 777 Setup reminder ................................................ 779 Shape file, directory ......................................... 906 Shape files, directory ....................................... 906 Shift Constant ...................................................... 605 Linear .......................................................... 605 Parabolic ...................................................... 605 Reverse ........................................................ 605 Sign convention ........................................... 606 Surface grade ............................................... 607 Shift, Rotate & Scale, COGO ............................ 451 Shifts ............................................................... 623 For Roads .................................................... 604 Set for transformation ................................. 477 Shoulder .......................................................... 609 Sign convention ............................................... 624 Signal to noise ratio ......................................... 252 Single Point Position ........................................ 393 Sketching Field ............................................................. 365 Sketching on images ........................................ 364 Skip point Sets of Angles .............................................. 763 Stakeout ...................................................... 803 Skyplot ............................................................ 253 Slope ............................................................... 611 Distance Hidden point measurements ................... 856 Slope Road Info page ..................................................... 591 Slope, key ........................................................ 856 SmartAntenna firmware, upload ...................... 319 SmartCodes ..................................................... 293 Assigning codes ................................... 295, 296 Code Block ................................................... 295 Configuration ............................................... 293 Copying code block ...................................... 297 Smartkey ........................................................... 19 Smoothing heights ........................................... 199 Socket ............................................................. 908 Sockets ............................................ 915, 916, 916 Soldner Cassini projection .................................. 91 Sort Codes Codelist management ............................... 80 Data management .................................... 75 Points, lines and areas ................................... 71 Sort settings, define .................................. 54, 362 Source ............................................................. 960 Space-Based Augmentation System ................. 199 Viva Series, Index Spiral In ................................................................962 Out .............................................................962 Spiral parameter A ............................................942 SPP ..................................................................393 Stake Height difference .................................674, 712 Offset ..................................................673, 712 Stake mode, Roads ..........................................570 Stake offset .....................................................612 Sign convention ............................................612 Stake out Chainage and offset .....................................677 Direct ...........................................................612 Indirect .........................................................612 Line ..............................................................678 Surface grade ...............................................680 Stake tunnel .....................................................557 Staked points Average ........................................................793 Coding ..........................................................793 Stakeout Configure .............................................794, 809 Crown ...........................................................682 Definition .............................................556, 556 Difference limit exceeded .............................803 Layer, Roads .................................................682 Local line ......................................................679 To centre line ...............................................619 To rail ...........................................................619 Standard deviation ...........................................949 GPS ..............................................................947 Standard mode ................................................376 Standing axis ....................................................334 Start up ............................................................313 Static ...............................................................953 Initialisation method .....................................956 Station .............................................................609 Station equation Delete .........................................................655 Term ............................................................613 Station setup, delete in Traverse ......................871 Station to dial Configure .....................................................237 Create ..........................................................238 Edit ..............................................................238 Station, definition ............................................616 Status ..............................................................250 Connections .................................................263 Internet connection ......................................266 Transfer via Leica Exchange Server ................331 Store, auto points ............................................827 Stored key .......................................................298 953 Straight ........................................................... 642 Sub class ......................................................... 962 Sun .................................................................. 854 Azimuth computation ................................... 854 Orientate to Reference Line ....................................... 511 Stakeout ................................................ 797 Superelevation ......................................... 616, 620 Superelevation base ........................................ 616 Supported functions Nikon ........................................................... 375 Sokkia .......................................................... 374 Topcon ........................................................ 374 Supported functions, Leica Legacy TPS ............. 373 Surface ............................................................ 611 DTM ............................................................. 611 Layer ........................................................... 611 Surface grade .................................................. 611 Stake out ..................................................... 680 Surface grade Road, Info page ......................... 588 Surface, delete ................................................ 891 Survey Access ................................. 816, 817, 820, 823 Auto points .................................................. 825 Default screen ............................................. 823 Hidden points .............................................. 847 Post-processed kinematic operations ........... 816 Real-time rover operations ........................... 817 Static operations .......................................... 816 Status TPS .................................................... 251 Survey Cross Section Direction ...................................................... 846 Methods ...................................................... 839 Survey GPS Application general ...................................... 816 Points .......................................................... 816 Survey remote point, TPS ................................. 865 Survey screen page .......................................... 279 Survey TPS Application general ...................................... 823 Points .......................................................... 823 Remote point ............................................... 865 Symbols, for points in MapView ....................... 393 System file, directory ....................................... 907 System information, status .............................. 348 System1200, backwards compatible ................ 906 T Taking an image ............................................... 352 Talker ID .......................................................... 922 Tangent ........................................................... 642 Tap Map .......................................................... 398 Viva Series, Index Target Default .........................................................129 Recall deleted default ...................................130 Target height, hidden point measurements ......858 Target point Find ..............................................................791 Task, Roads ......................................................608 Telescope camera collimation error ..................336 Template (customer for sketching), directory ...906 Template, Survey Cross Section ................839, 840 Terramodel file, directory .................................906 Text .................................................................314 Thematical coding ............................................286 Third Party TPS Connection ...................................................171 Tilting axis ........................................................334 Adjustment (a) .............................................341 Error (a) .......................................................335 Time slicing ......................................................206 Time stamp ......................................................287 Timed measurement .........................................820 Toe ..................................................................609 Tolerances, Traverse .........................................873 Tools Menu For Rail .........................................................717 Top ..................................................................609 Touch screen on, off ........................................314 TPS Corrections ................................................134 TPS Settings .......................................................21 Track ................................................................616 Centre line ....................................................616 Definition of a single track ...........................616 Definition of multiple tracks .........................618 Transfer objects ...............................................317 Transformation Create ............................................................88 Delete ............................................................88 Description ...................................................963 Edit ................................................................88 Requirements .......................................470, 963 Set parameters .............................................477 Transformation management, access .................87 Transformation model ........................................89 Transformation parameters ..............................963 Transformations .................................................87 Transverse Mercator projection ..........................91 Traveller ...........................................................670 Traverse Application ...................................................868 Backsight screen ...........................................875 Close traverse ...............................................876 Configuration ...............................................872 Continuing an existing traverse .....................875 954 Create .......................................................... 869 Delete station setup .................................... 871 Edit .............................................................. 869 Point results ................................................. 878 Start traverse ............................................... 874 Traverse point, averaging ................................. 868 Traverse, COGO calculation method ................. 417 Triangle, COGO calculation method .................. 465 Triplet .............................................................. 946 Tripod setup .................................................... 162 True zero prism system .................................... 131 Tunnel centreline ............................................. 721 Tunnel Profile Editor ........................................ 722 Layer details view ........................................ 722 Profile details view ....................................... 722 Two real-time devices .............................. 242, 243 Twostep transformation .................................. 966 Results ......................................................... 483 Type in new attribute ........................................ 81 U Underbreak ...................................................... 620 Universal Transverse Mercator projection ........... 91 Unlock settings ................................................ 315 Update coordinate system ............................... 472 Upload Application ................................................... 319 Firmware ...................................................... 319 Language ..................................................... 319 Upload data to exchange server ....................... 325 USB ................................................................. 244 User ................................................................... 30 Check and adjust .......................................... 333 User name for Leica Exchange, creation ........... 325 Using 2 Bearings, hidden point measurements . 848 Using 2 Distances, hidden point measurements 849 UTM projection .................................................. 91 View File ...............................................................325 Geoid model ...................................................93 Points, lines, areas, free code stored in job ....54 View profile (tunnel) .........................................742 Virtual Reference Station ..................................198 Volume Calculations, end application ................892 VRS ..................................................................198 VTG ..................................................................934 W WAAS ...............................................196, 196, 199 WGS84 .............................................................968 Wide Area Augmentation System ..............196, 199 Wildcard .............................................................72 Wizard for RTK Rover settings ..........................143 Work Settings... ................................................272 Working style Default .........................................................304 Description ...................................................304 User defined .................................................304 Wizard ..........................................................304 X XML Data export .................................................119 X-RTK ...............................................................199 Z ZDA ..................................................................935 ZigZag, Survey Cross Section ............................839 Zoom .......................................................353, 392 Window ................................................365, 392 V Verge ............................................................... 609 Versions of system firmware ............................ 348 Vertical alignment ............................................ 610 Create a curve ............................................. 644 Create a parabola ........................................ 644 Create a straight ......................................... 644 Delete an element .............................. 632, 639 Edit ............................................................. 629 Edit a curve ................................................. 644 Edit a parabola ............................................ 644 Edit a straight ............................................. 644 Vertical index error (i) ...................................... 335 Vertical offset, antenna ........................... 158, 162 Vertical plane ................................................... 537 Viva Series, Index 955 Total Quality Management: Our commitment to total customer satisfaction. Leica Geosystems AG, Heerbrugg, Switzerland, has been certified as being equipped with a quality system which meets the International Standards of Quality Management and Quality Systems (ISO standard 9001) and Environmental Management Systems (ISO standard 14001). Ask your local Leica Geosystems dealer/sales representative for more information about our TQM program. 772940-5.0.0en Original text Published in Switzerland © 2013 Leica Geosystems AG, Heerbrugg, Switzerland Leica Geosystems AG Heinrich-Wild-Strasse CH-9435 Heerbrugg Switzerland Phone +41 71 727 31 31 www.leica-geosystems.com
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Create Date : 2013:05:06 17:14:23+02:00 Modify Date : 2013:05:07 18:04:34+02:00 Language : en XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26 Metadata Date : 2013:05:07 18:04:34+02:00 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:72d4765e-b8fd-4451-a897-747ff9d9683f Instance ID : uuid:8425c944-bc02-49b4-b37c-0ae2579c4d58 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 956EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools